Today’s News 2nd January 2020

  • 75% Of Young Want To Escape South Korean "Hell"
    75% Of Young Want To Escape South Korean “Hell”

    Authored by Andrew Salmon via The Asia Times,

    Does research reflect global middle class angst, a uniquely Korean malaise – or mere talk?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From afar, South Koreans might appear to be blessed among East Asians.

    Citizens of a prosperous democracy that has birthed a hero-to-zero national success story, world-beating corporate brands, a futuristic infrastructure and the glitzy K-pop universe that is beloved across the region, they boast enviable looks, lifestyles and quality of life.

    Up close, things look different. According to a recent survey of 5,000 persons, 75% of 19-34 year old natives of the world’s 11th richest nation want out.

    The shock finding, reported in the popular Hankyoreh newspaper on December 29, was revealed at Korea Women’s Development Institute’s 119th Gender Equality Policy Forum, in a presentation titled “Diagnosis of Gender Conflicts from a Youth Standpoint and Suggested Policy Responses for an Inclusive State: A Gender Analysis of Fairness Perceptions.”

    The survey found that 79.1% of young women and 72.1% of young men want to leave Korea, that 83.1% of young women and 78.4% of young men consider Korea “hell” and that 29.8% of young women and 34.1% of young men consider themselves “losers.”

    Beyond gender differences, the survey suggests massive popular dissatisfaction with local life.

    But does it demand that Seoul’s elite sit down and seriously ponder the Korean Dream? Or does it merely reflect superficial talk among youth who live decent lives and have no real intention of leaving?

    ‘Hell Joseon’

    A catchphrase has become current among young Koreans in recent years to describe their country: “Hell Joseon” – “Joseon” being the name of a long-dead Korean kingdom. That phrase is being superseded by a new term, “Tal-Jo” – a pormanteau comprising “leave” and “Joseon,” which, vernacularly, might be best be translated as “Escape Hell.”

    “As a joke, we call Korea ‘Hell Joseon,’ but there is another term called ‘Tal-Jo’ which we use a lot more than ‘Hell Joseon’ nowadays,” Park Ji-na, a 20-something Seoul undergraduate, told Asia Times. “Me and my friends just use this in conversation as joke, but if I had a good opportunity to go abroad and work, I would.”

    Some say it is far from unique to Korea. “I think there is a middle class crisis in all wealthy countries,” Pae Hee-kyung, who runs an educational institute near Seoul, told Asia Times.

    Across the developed, post-industrial world, middle classes are under perceived siege from falling living standards, evaporating opportunities and rising wealth inequality. These trends have arisen against the backdrop of a globalizing world that distributes capital and jobs away from customary centers of investment, manufacturing and related prosperities.

    Some pundits posit that these issues explain Brexit in the UK, the election of Donald Trump in the US and the protests of young Hong Kongers.

    Are South Koreans different?

    For Korea, the transition from poverty to prosperity and the rise of the bourgeoisie has been shockingly fast: The country morphed from little-known agricultural backwater to global industrial powerhouse in just three decades. While Koreans from the mid-1960s to the mid-1990s could anticipate decent jobs and rising standards of living as growth rates surged, this is no longer the case.

    “Here, if you look at your father’s generation, they had less in material terms but they had hopes that, every year, they would be paid more, that they could buy an apartment, and that the price would go up and they would feel a sense of achievement and wealth,” Daniel Tudor, author of Korea: The Impossible Country, told Asia Times.

    That is no longer the case for two reasons.

    Firstly, the South Korean economy has matured and growth has slowed from the high double digits to the low single digits. Secondly, the national growth locomotives – family-run conglomerates, such as Samsung, Hyundai and LG – have gone global and off-shored. With South Korea’s population now at a national high of 51 million persons, there are insufficient full-time, white-collar positions to absorb a highly educated populace.

    Yet Korea’s unemployment statistics are hardly calamitous. According to World Bank data, between 1995 and 2017, unemployment only rose above 4% for three years – 1999, 2000 and 2001 ( in the wake of the Asia financial crisis). It stood at over 4% for the first eight months of 2019, but fell to 3.6% in November, according to data provider CEIC.  The youth unemployment rate in South Korea averaged 7.19% from 1982 until 2019, according to Statistics Korea, but despite hitting a high of 11.7% in April this year, had dropped to 7.1% in October.

    A related issue is property. Koreans have traditionally not invested in securities or financial products, preferring to sink their savings into homes – a trend exacerbated by the low-interest-rate era. The result: soaring house prices. Combine this with half the national population – some 24 million persons – living in and around the Seoul metropolitan area, and it is easy to understand why young Koreans think they will never be able to afford a home.

    And there is one area where young Koreans sense a distinctly local injustice. In this neo-Confucian, fast-growth economy, education provides the key to success. The college entrance system, despite methodological criticisms, was widely assessed as being fair. Now, questions hang over that.

    In recent years, the children of two prominent figures – Choi Soon-sil, the confidante of jailed ex-President Park Geun-hye, and Cho Kuk, a short-lived justice minister under the current Moon Jae-in administration – have been revealed to have enjoyed privileged access to top colleges. The cases have emerged from both sides of the political spectrum, suggesting a broad culture of elite entitlement.

    Many feel a resultant bitterness.

    Such privileged people “have a lot of money and are using that money to go to universities and their lives are very ensured,” said Park. “But however hard we work, we don’t even know if we will be able to buy a house – I don’t know how we can live in the future!”

    Real concern or youth talk?

    Clearly, the study’s findings reflect the talk of youth. How should they be analyzed?

    According to the World Bank’s GINI co-efficient data, South Korea is a reasonable 31.6, compared with Japan at 32.1, the UK at 33.2 and the US at 41.5 – the higher the number, the graver the inequality – but author Tudor believes that Korea’s fast-track development trajectory has engendered acute sensitivities.

    I don’t think Korea is particularly unequal – it is quite middle class compared to other wealthy countries – but if you go back one or two generations, things were very equal: everyone had nothing.” he said. “When everyone has nothing you don’t feel poor, but now, even if you have quite a decent standard of living, you look at others around and you may feel, ‘Oh my god!’”

    Pae, the educator, opines that the current young are not as badly served by their systems as they believe.

    “In the Korean education system, there are lots of chances for scholarships; Korean higher education is a lot cheaper than abroad; and there are plenty of chances of working holidays – so there are lots of opportunities,” she said. “But millennials want to get out of this cycle.”

    Another issue is a very notable national tendency to raise emotive voices.

    “Since I have been living in Korea, people complain all the time,” said Tudor. “The president is terrible – whoever he or she is – and the economy is terrible or on the brink of a crisis – however good it may be.”

    Even Park, the student, admits that she and her friends are not actually planning moves.

    “I and my friends talk about leaving Korea, but in order for us to get jobs abroad we should at least have a doctor’s degree, or have certain qualifications like nurse or UX designer,” she said. “Me and my friends, who study liberal arts or business, though we say ‘Tal Jo’ – we can’t.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 01/02/2020 – 00:00

  • "I'm Not Recommending Anyone Use It": First 5G Rollout Fails To Live Up To The Hype
    “I’m Not Recommending Anyone Use It”: First 5G Rollout Fails To Live Up To The Hype

    When Apple stock closed last year at an all time high after doubling from its January 2019 lows, there were many confused looks among the trader community: after all any attempts to justify the move through the company’s future earnings – which haven’t budged in the past year – would only provoke laughter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instead, there were two other explanations being suggested: the company’s record stock buybacks, which helped to drastically expand AAPL’s PE multiple, and the looming “paradigm shift” that is 5G and Apple’s launch of 5G-compatible phones.

    Well, for those who bet the farm on the latter, there may be a slight problem, because while 5G has yet to be made available in most countries, one nation has already had a 5G offering for 8 months: South Korea, and early adopters here have been anything but excited about the “5G revolution.”

    when 5G services were launched there in April, Jang Dong-gil was among the first wave of South Koreans to sign up. Now eight months in, Jang, a 30-year-old tech company worker, has a chilling review for the next-generation technology: 5G hasn’t lived up to the hype.

    “I don’t feel the difference,” Jang, who has been using a 5G-enabled Samsung handset, told the WSJ. In fact, on many days he switches off his 5G service altogether because his connection often drops as his phone pingpongs between 5G and the existing 4G LTE network.

    With the rest of the world eagerly awaiting its own 5G rollout, all eyes were on South Korea,  which for most of 2019 was home to the vast majority of the world’s 5G users, offering the broadest lessons in what the next-generation network has to offer. Yet where any hope that Apple’s will merely jump to a $2 billion (or higher) valuation could crash and burn is that although it is still early in the global rollout, 5G service in South Korea has proved more of a future promise than a technological breakthrough.

    Of course, it’s not just phones: 5G launched during the past year promising to help power a future of autonomous “everything”: from cars, to virtual reality and telesurgery, thanks to its theoretical speeds of up to 100 times faster than today’s 4G networks. In fact, the next-generation network’s potential has been at the forefront of the technological war between the US and China, setting off a technological arms race – and associated trade war – between Beijing and Washington, which has pressured allies to avoid adopting equipment made by China’s Huawei over national-security and other concerns.

    For better or worse, it is now seen – if only symbolically – that the company, and the nation, behind the infrastructure that allows global adoption of 5G will be the world’s next technological superpower. As such, many countries are scrambling to deploy the superfast network, hoping homegrown companies can enjoy an early advantage providing new, popular services like those from Uber, Instagram and Netflix that flourished during the 4G era. Currently, few, if any, 5G apps have emerged that would justify an upgrade by consumers.

    And while 5G is now operational in Korea (we hope we don’t have to clarify that we are talking about the South version), larger countries are now also beginning the transition. In the U.S., 5G services have been rolled out in select cities—though adoption remains modest, requiring consumers to buy a new phone and, in some cases, subscribe to a top-tier, unlimited data plan.

    In China, the rollout is far more aggressive: the government has prioritized expanding access to 5G since its launch in November, and by the end of 2020, China’s 5G subscribers are estimated to hit 120 million, said Chris Lane, an analyst at Bernstein Research. But initial 5G showcases have been limited to tests such as remote telesurgery procedures or streaming a dance performance in a remote village.

    Predictably, South Korea is much further along and is expected to end 2019 with more than 4.5 million subscribers among its population of 51 million, according to telecom analysts polled by the WSJ.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In April, the country’s top three carriers – KT Corp, SK Telecom and LG Uplus – launched 5G service on the same day Verizon Communications debuted in two U.S. cities. From the very start, about half of South Korea’s population could have access to 5G service after buying a network-enabled device.

    On their 5G phones, South Korean users – who have traditionally had access to all the latest and greatest cell phone technology first – can live-stream sports with a 360-degree view of the action, watching from any angle and in slow motion. Visitors to a Seoul park can summon a giant cat on their phone’s screen as they take in the scenery using augmented reality. Another app lets people gather in virtual-reality rooms to watch baseball games or concerts together.

    However, such 5G “flourishes” are still merely attention-grabbing gimmicks which have yet to draw a large audience: “There’s no killer 5G app,” said Woody Oh, a Seoul-based analyst at Strategy Analytics.

    “As far as adoption goes, we’re still at the very start,” said Julian Gorman, head of Asia-Pacific for GSMA, a trade association for mobile carriers. We’re eight months into a cycle that’s going to be many years in length,” he said.

    Or perhaps 5G is merely an extremely conveient service in search of a spark, and only Apple can provide it. After all, 3G networks, which enabled data transfers among device users and launched in 2001, didn’t fully kick off until Apple’s first iPhone came out in 2007. It took years for its successor, 4G, to bring in ride-sharing platforms like Uber and Grab Holdings since it launched in 2011.

    Where does 5G come in? For now, 5G’s main visible benefit lies in transferring large amounts of data extremely quickly, such as downloading movies faster and streaming high-resolution content seamlessly. That could be handy – after all, some 70% of data traffic carried from mobile devices to an operator comes from video content, compared with less than 25% five years ago. That figure is expected to rise further with 5G.

    Yet is it truly revolutionary that one will be able to download a pirated version of the latest Star Wars movie on their cell phone in seconds instead of minutes? Indeed, telecom experts say 5G’s advantages are hard for consumers to experience with smartphones. Instead, the bigger leap will be felt with self-driving cars or smart cities, they say.

    For current users, though, a key challenge is simply staying connected to 5G.

    Take Yun Seung-yeol, a 27-year-old architectural designer in South Korea, who was given a big enticement to sign up for the new service: he got subsidies from his telecom provider to shave about two-thirds off the roughly $1,000 price tag for a 5G-enabled Galaxy Note 10 device.

    He said he notices a difference on the superfast network only when downloading files or images on his phone. Besides that it’s a nuisance. Yun, who has an hour-long commute to his Seoul office, said he has turned off the 5G feature on his device for the past month because he kept losing connection when he left Seoul for his home in a neighboring city. He is considering switching back to a 4G data plan if the situation doesn’t improve.

    “For now, I’m not recommending anyone to use 5G,” Yun said, uttering the scariest words for anyone who bought AAPL stock near its all time highs on expectations that the stock will continue to soar in 2020 just because of the relentless 5G hype…


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 23:30

  • American Collapse & The Great Impeachment Charade
    American Collapse & The Great Impeachment Charade

    Authored by Daniel Lazare via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    In order to understand the great impeachment charade, it’s important to keep three facts about the strange bird known as the United States uppermost in mind.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The first is that the US is the ultimate law-based society, one whose structure derives entirely from a single four-thousand-word document created in 1787.

    The second is that while Americans think of the Constitution as the greatest plan of government known to man, it’s actually the opposite: a grotesque pre-modern relic that grows more unrepresentative and unresponsive with each passing year. A pro-rural Electoral College that has overridden the popular vote in two of the last five presidential elections; a lopsided Senate that allows the majority in ten urban states to be outvoted four-to-one by the minority in the other forty; lifetime Supreme Court justices who can veto any law at variance with an ancient constitution that only they understand – it’s a broken-down old rattletrap in need of a top-to-bottom overhaul. Yet it’s so thoroughly frozen that structural reform is all but unthinkable.

    The third thing to keep in mind is that as the constitutional system grows more and more undemocratic, the two-party system that grew out of it in the nineteenth century grows more undemocratic as well. The result is a bipartisan race to the right. Sometimes, the Republicans seem to be in the lead as Trump imprisons thousands of immigrants fleeing murderous conditions in Central America that the US war on drugs helped create. Other times it’s the Democrats as they beat the drums for imperialist war against Russia.

    Take all these factors – xenophobia, mindless obeisance to ancient law, a president imposed against the popular will, etc. – mix thoroughly, place in a super-hot oven due to a growing imperial crisis, and impeachment is what pops out. The process itself is very old, a by-product of fourteenth-century Anglo-Norman law. (Impeachment derives from the Old French empeechier, meaning to ensnare or entrap.) The British abandoned it in the late eighteenth century when Edmund Burke wasted seven years impeaching an Indian colonial governor named Warren Hastings on grounds of corruption. (The House of Lords finally acquitted him in 1795). But then the Americans took it up and now, two centuries later, are immersed in the same brainless exercise.

    The results were all too evident in mid-December when one Democrat after another took to the House floor to denounced Donald Trump for violating the ancient constitution by withholding lethal military aid from the neo-Nazis of the Ukraine’s Azov Battalion.

    “We used to stand up to Putin and Russia – I know the party of Ronald Reagan used to,” declared Adam Schiff, the Democratic point man on impeachment, his voice quivering with emotion. The fight to defend the Ukraine is “about more than Ukraine. It’s about us. It’s about our national security. Their fight is our fight. Their defense is our defense…. And when the President sacrifices our interests, our national security for his election, he is sacrificing our country for his personal gain.”

    This was the Democratic line in a nutshell. In order to safeguard the ancient republic at home, the US must pay foreign satraps to defend its imperial interests abroad.

    Since no patriotic American could possibly disagree, any and all problems must stem from meddling by the evil dictator Vladimir Putin and his traitorous puppet in the Oval Office. Americans must therefore fulfill the ancient law by impeaching him just as the “founding fathers” would have wanted. Only then will peace and freedom return to the land of the free and the home of the brave.

    It’s all quite ridiculous, but what’s even more bonkers is that millions of Americans think it’s true. Trump is meanwhile in his element. Now that Democrats have voted to impeach him in the House, he’d like nothing more than a lengthy trial in the Senate because (a) acquittal in the upper house is a certainty and (b) it will allow the Republican majority to put the torturers to the rack by subpoenaing everyone from Joe and Hunter Biden to Adam Schiff himself and declaring them in contempt of Congress if they refuse to testify. Senator Majority Leader Mitch McConnell has described an all-out Senate war as “mutual assured destruction,” and he’s right since, once unleashed, the ancient constitutional machinery will grind everything to dust in its path.

    American politics will grow only more farcical. If Putin looms larger and larger on the world stage; if “the moment has come,” as the Times Literary Supplement recently announced, “for even the most hardened skeptics to admit that he is one of the most successful world leaders of our era”; if the US at the same time staggers from one imperial disaster to another even while descending into civil war – then it’s not because the Russian leader is particularly clever, but because the US is locked in an ancient mindset that is increasingly divorced from reality. It’s lost in a constitutional labyrinth of its own making, and impeachment is leading it deeper and deeper into the maze.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 23:00

    Tags

  • Obama's NSC Holdovers Finally Booted After Three Years Of Non-Stop Leaks
    Obama’s NSC Holdovers Finally Booted After Three Years Of Non-Stop Leaks

    The White House National Security Council is sharply downsizing ‘in a bid to improve efficiency’ by consolidating positions and cutting staff, according to the Washington Times  – which adds that a secondary, unspoken objective (i.e. the entire reason) for the cuts is to address nonstop leaks that have plagued the Trump administration for nearly three years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Trump and new National Security Adviser Robert O’Brien

    Leaks of President Trump’s conversations with foreign leaders and other damaging disclosures likely originated with anti-Trump officials in the White House who stayed over from the Obama administration, according to several current and former White House officials. –Washington Times

    The reform is being led by National Security Adviser Robert C. O’Brien, who told the Times that 40-45 NSC staff officials had been sent back to their home-agencies, and more are likely to be moved out.

    “We remain on track to meeting the right-sizing goal Ambassador O’Brien outlined in October, and in fact may exceed that target by drawing down even more positions,” said NSC spokesman John Ullyot.

    Under Obama, the NSC ballooned to as many as 450 people – and officials wielded ‘enormous power’ according to the report, directly telephoning commanders in Afghanistan and other locations in the Middle East to give them direct orders in violation of the military’s strict chain of command.

    Meanwhile, the so-called second-hand ‘whistleblower’ at the heart of President Trump’s impeachment was widely reported to be a NSC staffer on detail from the CIA, Eric Ciaramella, who took umbrage with Trump asking Ukrainian President Volodomyr Zelensky to investigate former VP Joe Biden – who Ciaramella worked with.

    After O’Brien is done, less than 120 policy officials will remain after the next several months.

    The downsizing will be carried out by consolidating positions and returning officials to agencies and departments such as the CIA, the State and Defense departments and the military.

    Mr. O’Brien noted that the NSC had a policymaking staff of 12 in 1962 when President Kennedy faced down the Soviet Union during the Cuban missile crisis. During the 2000s and the George W. Bush administration, the number of NSC staff members increased sharply to support the three-front conflict in Iraq, Afghanistan and the war on terrorism.

    However, it was during the Obama administration that the NSC was transformed into a major policymaking agency seeking to duplicate the functions of the State and Defense departments within the White House. –Washington Times

    “The NSC staff became bloated during the prior administration,” said O’Brien. “The NSC is a coordinating body. I am trying to get us back to a lean and efficient staff that can get the job done, can coordinate with our interagency partners, and make sure the president receives the best advice he needs to make the decisions necessary to keep the American people safe.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I just don’t think that we need the numbers of people that it expanded to under the last administration to do this job right,” he added.

    Obama-era NSC officials are suspected of leaking classified details of President Trump’s phone conversations with foreign counterparts.

    After Mr. Trump’s election in November 2016 and continuing through the spring of 2017, a series of unauthorized disclosures to news outlets appeared to come from within the White House. Several of the leaks involved publication of sensitive transcripts of the president’s conversations with foreign leaders.

    Rep. Devin Nunes, California Republican and former chairman of the House Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence, said this year that he sent the Justice Department eight criminal referrals related to the leaks, including those related to Mr. Trump’s conversations with the leaders of Mexico and Australia.

    Former White House strategist Steve Bannon said efforts to weed out the Obama holdovers was a priority early in the administration.

    The NSC had gotten so big there were over 450 billets,” said Mr. Bannon, adding that he and others tried to remove the Obama detailees from the White House.

    “We wanted them out,” he said. “And I think we would have avoided a lot of the problems we got today if they had been sent back to their agencies.”-Washington Times

    In addition to Ciaramella, Lt. Col. Alexander Vimdman (likely Ciaramella’s source) testified against President Trump during the House Impeachment investigations – telling the Democratic-led House Intelligence Committee that he was “concerned” by what he heard on Trump’s call with Zelensky.

    NSC official Tim Morrison, meanwhile, testified that Vindman was suspected of leaking sensitive information to the press, a claim Vindman denied.

    Read the rest of the report here.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 22:30

    Tags

  • Why Is The UN Hiring English-Speaking Disarmament Officers In New York?
    Why Is The UN Hiring English-Speaking Disarmament Officers In New York?

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic prepper blog,

    As the Second Amendment conflict heats up across the United States, here’s another “crazy conspiracy theory” that has turned out to be true.

    The United Nations is hiring in New York. What positions are they trying to fill?

    English-speaking DISARMAMENT, DEMOBILIZATION, AND REINTEGRATION OFFICERS.

    This job was posted the day after Christmas. So for all the folks who have been saying “nobody is trying to take your guns” you might want to read this job listing and reconsider your opinion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Is this in response to the Virginia crisis?

    You may recall that citizens of Virginia have become outraged recently by new laws that are likely to pass this month, effectively banning all semi-automatic weapons. Sanctuary counties, cities, and municipalities now cover all but the most urban parts of the state. These sanctuaries have vowed to support the Second Amendment and are refusing to enforce unconstitutional gun laws.

    In response, a member of the state congress suggested that Governor Northam could call up the National Guard to disarm residents of Virginia despite the wishes of local governments. In response to that, at least one county has formed a militia and others are expected to spring up. The state’s Attorney General says that these sanctuaries carry no legal weight.

    Despite the AG’s opinion and threats from the state government, Virginians appear to have no plans to give up their guns or register them. Many members of law enforcement entities and the National Guard have said that they will not act on unconstitutional orders.

    One has to wonder if this is why the UN is hiring “disarmament officers?”

    What is the job description?

    Here are the responsibilities for the new hires, as per the United Nations job listing.

    Within delegated authority, the Disarmament, Demobilization and Reintegration Officer will be responsible for the following duties:

     

    • Acts as a Focal Point for Disarmament, Demobilization and Reintegration (DDR) components for two to three missions, responsible for planning, support to implementation and evaluation;

    • Participates in DPO and Integrated Task Force planning meetings for the establishment of a new peacekeeping mission with a potential DDR component;

    • Provides technical assistance to peace negotiations;

    • Participates in technical assessment missions;

    • Advises, develops and reviews (as appropriate) initial DDR functional strategy and concept of operations for further development into a full programme by the DDR component and the National DDR Commission;

    • Drafts and reviews DDR inputs to SG report, code cables, and talking points;

    • Develops initial result-based framework and budget for new DDR components in new mission;

    • Liaises with UNDP and donor community to raise voluntary contributions for DDR programmes;

    • Presents and/or defends new and subsequent DDR budgetary requirements in the ACABQ and the 5th Committee of the General Assembly;

    • Develops staffing structure and terms of reference for a DDR component, including terms of integration with other UN agencies, funds and programmes;

    • Provides technical clearance for applicants to DDR units in new and ongoing missions;

    • Provides Headquarters support in planning the civilian and military logistics support for DDR;

    • Continually reviews DDR programme strategy and implementation through relevant documents, reports and code cables;

    • Conducts field missions to assess implementation of established DDR programmes;

    • Identifies potential problems and issues to be addressed and suggests remedies to DDR units in the field;

    • Liaises with Member States, UN actors and other DDR interested partners to represent the mission’s DDR component at the Headquarters level;

    • Establishes and maintains an outreach network with CSOs and IGOs active in the area of DDR.

    • Supports the doctrine development work in the area of DDR in the department, with the Inter-Agency Working Group (IAWG) on DDR and other relevant national and international actors working on DDR issues;

    • Contributes to Department-level or Policy Committee-level policy development work on DDR and related issues;

    • Maintains and further develops the Integrated DDR Standards – a set of inter-agency policies, guidelines and procedures on DDR;

    • On behalf of the Chief of the DDR Section, co-chairs the IAWG on DDR, contributes to bringing coherence to the interaction of the UN system and its partners on DDR;

    • Supervises the Associate Expert (Junior Professional Officer) in the development and maintenance of the web-based United Nations DDR Resource Centre;

    • Liaises with others (UN, regional organisations and Member States) providing DDR.

    • Other duties as required. (source)

    Also notable is the required language fluency – English – and the desired experience.

    Seven years of relevant experience in disarmament affairs, political analysis or in national military or paramilitary service, preferably related to the design, implementation or review of DDR. (source)

    Employees would answer to the Secretary-General of the United Nations.

    As per the UN, here are some specifics about this job description. Of special note:

    Disarmament is the collection, documentation, control and disposal of small arms, ammunition, explosives and light and heavy weapons of combatants and often also of the civilian population. Disarmament also includes the development of responsible arms management programmes. (source)

    As well, the UN especially wants women to apply for this job, citing gender equality. But is it possible they think that a gun owner might have more ethical difficulty firing on a woman trying to take their weapons than a man?

    The US is no longer part of the UN Arms Trade Treaty.

    You may recall back in 2013, the United Nations convinced then-Secretary of State John Kerry to sign a treaty that “unequivocally bans arms transfers that are in violation of a U.N. arms embargo or that exporters have reason to know will be used to commit genocide and other grievous war crimes.”

    In 2013, the US signed the UN Arms Trade Treaty but that signature was never ratified. Last April, President Trump officially withdrew from the international gun control treaty.

    However noble that may sound, anti-gun control activists were concerned this would lead to the UN being able to disarm Americans on US soil.

    So why is the UN looking for English-speaking disarmament experts?

    Don’t be silly, “no one is coming to take your guns.”

    How many times has someone told you not to worry – that nobody is coming to take your guns away? That all they want is “common-sense gun laws?”

    In light of the current political climate and this job listing, I’d say that is an outright a lie.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 22:00

  • NHTSA's Special Crash Investigations Unit To Review Fatal Tesla Crash In Los Angeles
    NHTSA’s Special Crash Investigations Unit To Review Fatal Tesla Crash In Los Angeles

    The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has opened an investigation into the Dec. 29 crash of a Tesla Model S in Southern California that killed two people, reported Bloomberg.

    NHTSA’s Communications Director Sean Rushton wouldn’t comment on the specifics of the crash and didn’t say if the Model S was on Autopilot during the incident. 

    A speeding black Tesla ran a red light and plowed into a Honda Civic Sunday, instantly killing two occupants in that car. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Los Angeles Police Department, at the time of the accident, said two occupants in the Tesla suffered non-life threatening injuries. 

    NHTSA’s inquiry into the crash will be headed by the agency’s Special Crash Investigations unit. It has already investigated 13 Tesla crashes where Autopilot was suspected of malfunctioning. 

    Earlier last month, NHTSA announced that it would open an investigation into a crash in Connecticut where a Tesla hit a parked police cruiser while on Autopilot. 

    NHTSA criticized Autopilot’s lack of safeguards after it probed a 2018 crash in Sept. 

    Tesla and NHTSA have advised drivers that their hands must be on the steering wheel at all times while engaging Autopilot. Still, some drivers disobey the rules and take their hands off the steering wheel as it’s their belief the vehicle is fully autonomous. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    U.S. Senator Ed Markey recently said Tesla should suspend Autopilot to its customers until new safety mechanisms are put in place to avoid future crashes.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 21:30

  • "On the Edge Of A Precipice" – A Challenging Decade Is Upon Us
    “On the Edge Of A Precipice” – A Challenging Decade Is Upon Us

    Submitted by Erico Matias Tavares  of Sinclair & Co.

    While a decade is just an arbitrary measure of time, people often attribute certain emotional and cultural characteristics to it, such as the “roaring 20s” of the 20th century.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 20s of the 21st century are promising to mark a defining period in world History, particularly for the West, as vital trends that have been developing for years are expected to accelerate and reach a tipping point. “Roaring” might not be the best description by the end of it.

    Consider that at the very start of the decade the UK will no longer be part of the EU, itself a monumental change with deep social, economic and geopolitical consequences. The US and other major economies will face even more profound developments this decade.

    The dominant context behind all this is what British historian C. Northcote Parkinson defined in the early 1960s as the great dynamo of History – the passing of the baton of global preeminence between East and West since historical records began.

    Nobody knows what will happen 6 months from now, much less a decade, but recognizing the ascendancy of the East as a whole – and the evident decline of the West – can help pinpoint important trends and cycles that are likely to materialize in the near future. That ascendancy has started decades ago and will solidify in the short years ahead.

    This is a humble “back of the envelope” attempt by the author to read some through important tea leaves, colored (as a disclaimer from the outset) by his rather pessimistic view of the prospects of his native West and by his admiration of the resilience of the East:

    1. The productivity of debt in most major economies is already below 1, meaning that it takes several dollars in new debt to create a dollar of GDP. This is particularly the case with government debt, and consequently in order to sustain even meager economic growth debt loads as percentage of GDP will continue to growing strongly, following Japan’s path;
    2. This in turn means that interest rates can never be normalized, otherwise such debt loads would become immediately unsustainable. Financial repression will thus continue, likely even be expanded. Central banks will continue to monetize debts at unprecedented levels and even take on the role of steering industrial policy, a good example being the “green economy”;
    3. These actions by central banks have enabled Eurozone banks over the last decade to become liquid but not necessarily solvent, a situation exacerbated by negative interest rates and the flaws of and structural imbalances generated by the Euro. A quick look at the share price of Deutsche Bank, Germany’s largest bank, clearly shows this;
    4. Birth rates across the West will continue to fall further given a confluence of social and economic problems. Many Eastern countries are are wrestling with this problem, but the way Western elites are dealing with it are transforming its cyclical nature into a structural one, with deep generational consequences;
    5. Related to that, the pension crisis will come to the forefront, with more Baby Boomers retiring (where possible) into pension plans that for the most part are underfunded, in many cases severely, despite record high asset prices;
    6. Modern agriculture has been very successful in delivering calories, basically by converting copious amounts of fossil fuels into food, but rather less so in delivering nutrients. This is because it exhausts top soil and organic matter, critical to produce nutrient-dense foods. As such the health crisis will become worse as a depleted nutrition acts as a catalyst to major diseases;
    7. All these factors will add more pressure for governments to take action, meaning that all those contingent liabilities will finally start materializing in budgets over the course of the decade – with a vengeance;
    8. This situation is particularly serious in the US, where it is very possible that the government will lose control of its budget deficit at some point (if it hasn’t already), especially given zero political will and capability to address this. One look at the Congressional Budget Office decadal projections should raise alarm, especially as no recession is expected, but no party seems to care;
    9. Mass migration into the Western world will continue unabated driven by massive demographic imbalances between developed and developing countries, and Western elites seeking to maintain control by “dividing and conquering” their societies and absorbing the spoils into supranational compacts that they control;
    10. Another thing which is unlikely to change is the US’ foreign entanglements. Like with immigration and the budget deficit, no party has the will to do anything about it. Three dynamics make highly likely the emergence of a new, bigger conflict where the US will once again become involved this decade: (i) the military being spread all over the planet, raising the chances of some fire exchange with someone, even by accident, (ii) enormous military spending, already larger than several major countries combined, that keeps on growing, and (iii) America’s enemies becoming more entrenched and determined in their quest to develop capabilities to seriously challenge its dominance (like Iran developing medium-range nukes this decade, along with others);
    11. Automation, the replacement of humans with machines, will accelerate and start replacing enough jobs to generate even more income inequality between workers and capital owners, already a sensitive topic thanks to the monetary and fiscal policy imbalances of the last decade;
    12. It is therefore inevitable that populism will continue to increase, both on the right and the left of the political spectrum. The hollowing out of the moderate center, tied to a neo-liberal model that is seriously sputtering, will prompt a major political and social polarization in many Western societies not seen since the 1930s;
    13. The trend towards globalization will be impaired, despite the best efforts of supranational organizations like the UN to maintain the status quo. Major exporting economies like Germany will be disproportionately impacted, creating more tensions inside an already frail EU;
    14. The political landscape will massively change in the US. The fragmentation of political views and aspirations already means that a two party-system is incapable of dealing with differing objectives inside their respective electorates. However, the emergence of new parties is severely limited by lack of access to funding necessary to win at the federal level, which means that democracy will suffer;
    15. This loss of democracy is even more likely given the profound demographic change taking place in the US, where immigrants tend to vote overwhelmingly for the Democratic Party. As a result Texas and other states will likely swing Blue by the end of the decade, meaning that Republicans will be locked out of power for a generation+. Once again California led the way for the rest of the country, with an entrenched Democrat super-majority there. As democracy recedes, societal and ethnic conflict will gradually become mainstream;
    16. What this really means is the beginning of the end for the great American experiment this decade, as its traditional institutions – including its Constitution – can no longer properly function under such conditions. This is hugely consequential for the world in terms of prosperity and freedoms;
    17. One feature of diverse societies is that they are inherently unstable, meaning there’s a far greater need for a government to mediate the interests and conflicts between different groups. Politicians will increasingly tighten their grip on society, aided by technology that will become even more intrusive. Silicon Valley and Washington DC will thus become even more intertwined;
    18. Societal fragmentation will not be limited to the US, far from it. French President François Hollande warned in 2016 (after he left office, of course) that his country would eventually break apart. This may become a de facto reality in the 2020s as multiple societal, demographic and economic factors converge in French society. In fact the new decade was inaugurated with dozens of cars set on fire in Paris. These factors will also impact other European countries in similar ways, including Sweden, Belgium, even Germany;
    19. The EU will become increasingly authoritarian to prevent more BREXITs and keep that political project going. Any dissent of its main guiding policies, from the environment to immigration, is already being stamped out under the guise of “hate speech”. It will only get worse from here. A draconian social credit system similar to what China is developing might be in place by the end of the decade. It seems inevitable that the political make-up of the EU and several of its members will be radically different by the end of the decade compared to today;
    20. BREXIT might have been a fantastic idea given all that is happening in the EU, but the timing will prove to be off. First, we are close to a global recession, which absent very vigorous central bank action might become serious, thus curtailing any initial enthusiasm. Second, Boris Johnson will be pursuing free trade deals when the globalization tide is turning against him. Third, because in order to ensure the City of London’s preeminent access to global capital markets he will have to offer a bargaining chip, and that is what’s left of British industry – meaning the working class seats the Conservatives were able to impressively flip from Labour on the back of BREXIT. Perhaps the UK as well might not escape the coming fragmentation;
    21. Working and middle classes across the West, including the UK and especially the US (if one looks objectively at the results of three years of “America First” policies under Donald Trump), will finally realize that they have no real political representation. The real political fault line is not between right and left, rich and poor, liberal and conservative, but rather globalism versus nationalism. There is no money in the latter, beyond extracting taxes to pay for that burgeoning government (that will inevitably oppress them) and elite pet projects, like solving “climate change” and the “migrant crisis”;
    22. The West thrived when its working and middle classes thrived. These are the people who consume, who largely maintain the national traditions, who fight their wars. Financially and demographically they are in a very tough spot, with birth rates far below replacement levels and life expectancy plunging due to drugs and health problems. Half of Americans can’t cut a $400 check for an emergency. As things stand this rot will likely accelerate as the decade progresses;
    23. All this does not mean that it will be smooth sailing for the East, far from it, as those economies still depend a great deal on Western markets. Still, they have a highly motivated, educated and productive workforce, comparatively low debt levels (ex-Japan), high savings and very little contingent liabilities. They are also very safe to live in. Attracting top talent from the US and Europe, in addition to their own, should not be too difficult, further cementing their competitiveness. In a sense these economies are merely reverting to the global place they used to occupy before that baton swung to the West;
    24. Russia is an interesting case as it was always between East and West, given its vast cultural, ethnic and geographical components. Thanks to incredible short-sightedness and (frankly speaking) stupidity from the NeoCons in Washington DC it will now embrace its Eastern future. The 2020s will consolidate the emergence of Eurasia as a super economic block towards the end of the century, independent from any US interference;
    25. That sets up different scenarios for the coming fracturing of the EU by mid-century, if not sooner. Eastern European countries should gradually gravitate towards Eurasia, including Germany – the worst case scenario for US hegemony. The center West of Europe will become more culturally and demographically aligned with Africa, and so might pursue its future there. And Portugal and Spain, if they had any sense, should seek close ties with their cultural peers in Latin America and Africa;
    26. Africa could be the one bright spot in the middle of all the turmoil elsewhere, especially given that it has a lot of development potential and a vast supply of all sorts of natural resources. China (i.e. the East) is spending vast sums to unlock this potential and is now the continent’s largest trading partner. Unfortunately, the constraints holding Africa back are all too familiar: corruption, loss of their most enterprising people to mass migration, weak institutions incapable of addressing the aspirations of its very young populations and increasing social and ethnic conflicts, exacerbated by a resurgence of political Islam – another quintessential Eastern ideology that gains force whenever the West declines. This decade will indicate which way it will eventually go the rest of the century;
    27. Energy prices should remain very volatile, as demand is pressured by a weakening of the economic cycle and supply by a coming peak in US crude oil production this decade. The explosive situation across the Middle East, from Libya to Pakistan, will add much greater uncertainty as the decade unfolds. The West faced serious oil shocks in the 1970s as the US could no longer ramp up its production to counter supply embargoes from the Middle East; it is vulnerable to a repeat of that by the end of the decade. Sustained crude oil price rallies above $100/bbl would very likely put a nail in the coffin of the financial house of cards concocted by Western central banks;
    28. Commodities markets in general should perform better on a relative basis this decade, especially when compared to US stock markets, which have been on an absolute tear since the end of the financial crisis in 2009. The longest bull market in the context of the weakest capital expenditures cycle since WW2 suggests that significant productive capacity might be taken offline at some point this decade. Mean reversion is a real thing in capital markets;
    29. Aging farming populations worldwide, quite severe in some cases, will finally put significant pressure on food supplies by mid-decade, if not sooner. And the young, so far, are not replacing them. As a result, record food supplies globally at the start of the decade may turn into food deficits by the end, especially given strong population growth projections (including in the West via mass migration);
    30. And the US dollar? Its cycles typically last around a decade, and if that is the case we might be nearing the end of is bull run, certainly this decade. Adding to this cyclical outlook is the fundamental deterioration of the US fiscal position outlined above. That deficit will have to be financed somehow, and some pretty juicy yields might have to be offered especially if the dollar starts weakening. While it may still remain the world’s reserve currency given lack of competitors, cryptocurrencies might increasingly offer an alternative. StableCoins, a variant, in particular offer governments a monetary alternative to generate growth within the constraints of the Euro, for instance;
    31. Gold should remain part of any investor’s portfolio (in physical form), although nobody can say for sure whether prices will be higher in dollar terms by the end of the decade. Trillions of dollars in debt issued in the last decade will become due and together with weak economic growth the risk of a deflationary shock remains significant;
    32. The wildcard in predicting financial outcomes is as Western societies profoundly change so will the rules of the investment game. It’s not inconceivable that capital controls will be in place before the end of the decade. The more Europe and the US sink into deep fiscal and economic issues, the bigger that wildcard will be;
    33. Investors’ focus will gradually shift from speculation to wealth preservation, given the dearth of fairly valued opportunities at the start of the decade and a far more uncertain global environment.

    Summing up, this decade will very likely be remembered for the end of the world order that had been in place since WW2.

    Yes, there is a positive drift on societies across the world emanating from relentless technological progress, but it is highly unlikely that this will do anything to stop the profound demographic, financial and cultural changes that have accelerated this past decade. 

    Adam Smith noted that a nation can take a lot of ruin. For decades Westerners have been doing their best to figure out how much. Not only that, but a progressive cultural revolution starting in the 1960s has upended all Western traditional values and morals, and so the present generations are ill-prepared to cope with the massive challenges that lie ahead.

    If there is a silver lining in all this is that young people are starting to acknowledge the failure and dead-end of the current economic, moral and governance models, and are gradually returning to tradition, family life and communities. Localism, as opposed to globalism, will gain traction.

    Building resilience should be the motto of the coming decade.

    And with that, wish you a very hopeful, positive and healthy 2020.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 21:00

  • So Many People Have Fled California The State May Lose Multiple Seats In Congress
    So Many People Have Fled California The State May Lose Multiple Seats In Congress

    California is poised to lose multiple congressional seats after the 2020 census for the first time in the state’s history, thanks to an exodus of more than 200,000 people between 2018 and 2019, according to the Los Angeles Times. Top destinations include Texas, Arizona, Nevada, Oregon, Washington and Colorado.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “It’s got a lot to do with dispersion from California to the rest of the west,” said senior Brookings fellow, William Frey. “Arizona, Texas and Colorado are all big destinations for California migrants, and they all are gaining seats.”

    About 203,000 people left California in that period, a result of the state’s shifting migration patterns and economic strains that are making it harder to afford living here. New York, Illinois, New Jersey, Massachusetts and Louisiana also saw large losses to other states.

    California’s potential loss in reapportionment, which will be determined by next year’s census count, would drop the state’s number of seats in the U.S. House of Representatives from 53 to 52, said William Frey, a senior fellow at the Brookings Institution. –LA Times

    According to a relocation survey by Texas Realtors, 63,175 Californians moved to Texas in 2017, while almost 41,000 Texans moved to the Golden State. And while California may lose a seat in the House, Texas is likely to gain three seats after the 2020 census. Arizona, Colorado and Oregon may gain one seat apiece.

    A state’s population includes all residents – citizens and non-citizens, along with overseas federal employees and their dependents from whatever state they claim as home, according to the US Census Bureau.

    That said, if illegal immigrants fail to participate or fail to give honest household figures, California could lose multiple seats according to state redistricting analyst Paul Mitchell,

    “If, as many fear, non-citizen populations and the state’s heavily Latino population either fails to participate or participates without providing full household counts, then California could lose more than one seat,” said Mitchell.

    The House of Representatives, meanwhile, is limited to 435 members thanks to a 1929 federal law which lawmakers and the president could change if they wanted to.

    Exactly where California would lose a seat in the House depends on which communities are larger or smaller compared to census numbers from 2010. The state’s Citizens Redistricting Commission, whose members will be selected in coming months, will hold public hearings in 2021 to determine how to redraw congressional maps.

    Paul Mitchell, one of the state’s leading analysts of the redistricting process, said that two places could dominate the discussion: the communities sitting at the intersection of Los Angeles, Orange and San Bernardino counties and the suburbs to the east of San Francisco. –LA Times

    The most obvious political impact is that incumbent House members would need to run against each other or leave office. The Times notes that in 2012, “Rep. Brad Sherman (D-Northridge) defeated former Rep. Howard Berman in a bitter contest brought on by the new lines drawn in Los Angeles County.”

    Losing a House seat would be a “massive rewrite of the Central Valley congressional districts,” said Mitchell.

    California’s future numerical strength in Congress hinges in part on making sure that members of historically undercounted groups are included in the census count. In California, 72% of the population belongs to one of these groups, according to the Public Policy Institute of California.

    State census workers, community organizations and local politicians started outreach efforts as early as April to ensure an accurate tally in next year’s count. In addition to reapportionment, nearly $800 billion in federal tax dollars and political redistricting are at stake. –LA Times

    Officials say Los Angeles county will be the hardest to accurately tally because of its high concentrations of renters, homeless people, and immigrants who may not participate due to language barriers or fear of being targeted by federal immigration authorities.

    Meanwhile, the US growth rate has declined steadily over the past decade – with California leading the charge according to Frey, with about 400,000 people under the age of 18.

    “This is a symptom of an aging population,” Frey said, adding “and in states like California, an out-migration of younger families with children.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 20:30

  • "Revolutionary Changes In Public Opinion" – Gallup's Decade in Review: 2010-2019
    “Revolutionary Changes In Public Opinion” – Gallup’s Decade in Review: 2010-2019

    Authored by Justin McCarthy, a journalist and analyst at Gallup,

    A review of Gallup analyses over the past decade reveals that the years from 2010 to 2019 bore witness to key revolutionary changes in public opinion, along with some persistent trends and concerns, as well as striking moments and lasting effects.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here are the changes, issues and moments in public opinion that Gallup editors think will long be associated with the 2010s:

    Revolutionary Changes

    Same-Sex Marriage: When the decade began, only a handful of states had legalized gay marriage and most Americans opposed it. But in 2011, Gallup recorded majority support for same-sex marriage for the first time. Americans continued to warm to gay marriage as the decade progressed, with support reaching the 60% mark just before the Supreme Court’s 2015 Obergefell v. Hodges decision made gay marriage legal nationwide.

    In the final years of the decade, support has ranged between 61% and 67%. The wholesale change in public attitudes about gay marriage over such a short time span represents one of Gallup’s most compelling public opinion trends.

    Marijuana: Much like the issue of same-sex marriage, Americans’ views on legalizing marijuana have vastly changed, with the sharpest shift in support for legalization occurring in the past 10 years.

    In 2010, when no states had yet legalized recreational marijuana, 46% of U.S. adults supported legalizing it, but that grew to about two-thirds in four consecutive readings by decade’s end. Today, 11 states and Washington, D.C., have legalized recreational use of marijuana, while many other states have decriminalized it or passed laws allowing for medical marijuana use.

    The U.S. Economy: That two in three Americans say it is a good time to find a quality job in the U.S. at the conclusion of 2019 shows how far U.S. consumers have come from the economic despair Gallup found as the decade began.

    In January 2010, just 9% of Americans said it was a good time to find a quality job. And for the better part of the decade, Gallup’s Economic Confidence Index was in negative territory as Americans continued to reel from the effects of the global economic crisis and the U.S. recession. President Donald Trump’s inauguration in 2017 marked an important turning point as Americans again became net-positive about the economy and jobs in particular. But Gallup has consistently found that most Americans view the country’s current and future economic health through a political lens.

    Political Polarization: Republicans and Democrats have become more polarized in their views on issues and evaluations of politicians. This polarizing trend is not unique to the end of the decade, but it’s one that has accelerated over the past 10 years.

    A 2017 Gallup analysis found that Barack Obama’s presidential approval ratings had been the most politically polarized ratings for any president in Gallup’s history — and President Donald Trump’s are on pace to be even more polarized. But Republicans and Democrats diverge even on questions that are seemingly apolitical, including how the U.S. economy is doing and how they rate their personal healthcare situation, for example. This will have enormous consequences not just for the coming presidential election, but for how U.S. politics navigate beyond it.

    Religion: Religious faith is prominent in the U.S., but much less so than in previous decades. Church membership and attendance — as well as frequency of attendance — are all down to record lows. Americans have become less likely to believe in God. Meanwhile, more than one in five Americans (21%) now describe themselves as having no religion, a sizable jump from 14% in 2010 and 8% in 1999.

    In addition to the decline in Americans identifying with any religion, some of the largest changes within religious groups have occurred among U.S. Catholics, of whom weekly church attendance has nearly halved since the beginning of the millennium, and whose confidence in organized religion and the clergy have fallen.

    Persistent Issues and Concerns

    Gun Violence: Many of the deadliest mass shootings in U.S. history have occurred during the past decade, and Americans have often reacted to these events with alarm. In 2012, U.S. parents worries’ about their children’s safety rose after the tragic shooting at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown, Connecticut, which marked one of the least happy days in 2012, according to Americans’ self-reports of their emotions. In March 2018, less than a month after the Parkland, Florida, school shooting, Americans’ mentions of guns as the nation’s top problem spiked to a record high. But much like the cyclical political conversations on gun control, these fears typically decline until the next event drives them back up again.

    How Americans interpret deadly shootings is also divisive, as Republicans and Democrats attribute gun violence to different root problems. Majorities of Americans have generally reported wanting stricter gun control over time, and violent events have often pushed this desire to relative heights.

    Terrorism: Americans’ worries about terrorism in the 2010s were somewhat of a holdover from the prior decade, which was largely defined and shaped by the attacks that took place on Sept. 11, 2001. Much like gun violence, Americans’ worries about terrorism ebb and flow in reaction to terrorism in the U.S. and abroad. The 2013 Boston Marathon bombings prompted a double-digit increase in the percentage of Americans who believed another terrorist attack was coming. After the 2015 terrorist attacks in Paris, Americans’ concerns about the possibility of future terrorist attacks rose the most among a list of 15 problems facing the U.S.

    Fears about terrorism affect Americans’ behavior, as was evident in 2017, when a record-high percentage of U.S. adults reported they were less likely to attend large events because of terrorist attacks. As recently as October 2019, nearly half of Americans said they worried that they or a family member could be a victim of terrorism.

    Race Relations: Whites and blacks alike are less positive in their assessments of race relations in the U.S. than they were in the previous decade. The final years of the 2010s revealed heightened worries about race relations compared with previous measures Gallup has taken since 2001. The election of Obama, the first black U.S. president, may have signaled a major achievement in race relations, but Americans’ views of race relations became less harmonious during Obama’s time in office — and have further soured during Trump’s presidency.

    Striking Moments

    The 2016 Election: In 2016, for only the fourth time in U.S. history, the president elected by the Electoral College did not win the popular vote. Still, the event was singular in that the two major-party candidates had the worst favorable ratings Gallup has ever recorded leading up to an election, and Americans rated the tone of the election more negatively than elections in the past.

    Despite then-candidate Trump’s low ratings on personality and leadership qualities, the constant news about his opponent Hillary Clinton’s email server scandal hurt her. Trump’s attacks on the media came at a time when confidence in the media had dipped to new lows — especially among members of his own party.

    Osama bin Laden: Al-Qaeda founder Osama bin Laden had been “Public Enemy No. 1” even before the attacks on 9/11. His eluding capture had dogged then-President George W. Bush, who was in the first year of his presidency when the U.S. experienced the deadliest terrorist attack in its history.

    Nearly a decade after 9/11, bin Laden was killed in Pakistan by a U.S. special operations team. The raid was well received in the U.S., with 93% approving of the military action and about eight in 10 saying it was extremely or very important to the U.S. that bin Laden was killed (though the operation was not well-received in Pakistan, where it occurred). Americans gave most credit to the U.S. military and the CIA. Obama received a six-percentage-point bump in his approval ratings — a rare “rally event” for him.

    Government Shutdowns: The federal government shut down three times over the decade. While one was relatively brief (Jan. 20-22, 2018), the other two lasted weeks — with the most recent shutdown that ended in January 2019 being the longest in U.S. history. Gallup has found that these events affected Americans’ views of the country in various ways.

    In 2013, Congress approval dropped to one of its lowest levels in history, while satisfaction with government reached a new low. Meanwhile, Americans’ confidence in the U.S. economy — which had been slowly rebuilding after the global economic crisis — plummeted as the shutdown wore on.

    The Republican Party’s image took a hit as a result of GOP members of Congress’ role in the shutdown. Obama’s approval ratings mostly held steady during the shutdown of 2013, as did Trump’s ratings during the shutdown earlier this year. During the most recent shutdown, mentions of the government and poor leadership as the top U.S. problem spiked, while trust in the government to handle domestic and international issues each dropped to record lows.

    The Tea Party: The seeds of the Tea Party movement took root in 2009 and early 2010 when fiscal conservatives opposed “excessive” federal spending and government bailouts — and later, when conservative Republicans were outraged over various proposals from the new Democratic-controlled Congress and White House, particularly the Affordable Care Act.

    But the movement bore fruit in 2010, when 87 Republicans were newly elected to Congress, many under the umbrella of the Tea Party movement — representing one of the GOP’s greatest electoral victories in generations. In 2010, Gallup found that more than a quarter of Americans (28%) and about half of Republicans (49%) were supporters of the Tea Party movement, with strong support among whites and conservatives. Support for the movement waned after peaking at 32% following its successes in the 2010 elections. By 2015 — the last time Gallup posed the question — support was about half that level (17%).

    Occupy Wall Street: Not long after the Tea Party movement’s successes in 2010, the Occupy Wall Street movement was born when protesters in New York City’s Zuccotti Park remained there for two months in the fall of 2011. This prompted national and international re-creations of the protest and ignited larger conversations about wealth inequality in the U.S., particularly the top 1% of income earners.

    Americans were slightly more approving than disapproving of the movement’s goals and the way the protests were being conducted, but most were unfamiliar with the Occupy Wall Street movement. Occupy Wall Street likely tapped into frustrations that were present that year, as Americans’ satisfaction with opportunities for people to get ahead by working hard had dipped to a new low (55%) in 2011 and a record-low 44% said it was likely that U.S. youth would have better lives than their parents. Many of the movement’s messages have resonated with the current presidential campaigns of Sens. Bernie Sanders and Elizabeth Warren, whose platforms are largely centered on income inequality.

    Lasting Effects

    The Affordable Care Act (ACA): One of the decade’s most significant pieces of legislation was passed at its beginning. Signed by Obama in March 2010, the ACA successfully reduced the percentage of uninsured Americans. The bill, which became widely known as “Obamacare,” was controversial, with 45% of Americans supporting it and 48% opposing just weeks before its passage.

    Since then, public opinion has continued to tilt against the law, averaging 46% approval and 49% disapproval since 2012, based on annual averages. Americans were most negative about the ACA as the ACA exchanges opened in late 2013 and the individual mandate took effect in early 2014. The ACA enjoyed majority approval in only two polls, both conducted in 2017, amid Republican attempts to repeal it. Twin polls in 2019 found the law just as divisive today as it was at the start, with 50% approving of the ACA and 48% disapproving.

    Socialism: Nationally, socialism has not gained in popularity over the past decade — and less than half of Americans would vote for a socialist presidential candidate. But U.S. Democrats have warmed slightly to socialism, and they now view socialism more favorably than they do capitalism. About half of millennials view socialism positively.

    Though Americans skew negative in their views of socialism, their views are more nuanced when asked about specific aspects of government responsibility. With more political leaders, namely Democrats, adopting socialist messages, the coming decade will tell whether Americans become more positive in their views of socialism or whether they will remain as negative about it as they were in the 2010s.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 20:00

    Tags

  • DiGenova: Comey And Brennan Were 'Coup Leaders'
    DiGenova: Comey And Brennan Were ‘Coup Leaders’

    Former US Attorney Joe diGenova told OANN‘s John Hines that former FBI Director James Comey and former CIA Director John Brennan were “coup leaders” in an attempt to reverse the outcome of the 2016 US election.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    DiGenova says the Obama Justice Department was corrupted under Attorneys General Eric Holder and Loretta Lynch, “with the authority and knowledge of then-president” Obama, and that a ‘stupid and arrogant’ Susan Rice was dumb enough to document his knowledge in a January 20th, 2017 email.

    “And you’ll never forget, I’m sure, that famous Susan Rice email on inauguration day of Donald Trump, where she sends an email to the file memorializing that there had been a meeting on January 5th with the president of the United States, all senior law enforcement and intelligence officials, where they reviewed the status of Crossfire Hurricane and the president announced – President Obama – that he was sure that everything had been done by the book.

    I want to thank Susan Rice for being so stupid and so arrogant to write that email on January 20th because that’s exhibit A for Barack Obama – who knew all about this from start to finish, and was more than happy to have the civil rights of a massive number of Americans violated so he could get Donald Trump.” -Joe diGenova

    Moreover, diGenova says that after “all this stuff involving Trump and Page and Papadopoulos and Michael Flynn,” anyone who couldn’t see that the “corrupt investigative process of the FBI and DOJ was basically being used to conduct a coup d’état” is an idiot.

    “This was not hard. If you’re a good prosecutor you look at the facts in the Trump case, and the Page case, the Flynn case. There’s only one conclusion you can come to; none of this makes any sense. None of these people were evil. None of them. They were framed, and the whole process was playing out, and you knew it on July 5th 2016, when James Comey announced – usurping the functions of the Attorney General, that no reasonable prosecutor would bring a case against Hillary Clinton. That was ludicrous! She destroyed 30,000 emails that were under subpoena. If you or I did that, we would be in prison today. She got a break because she was Hillary Clinton, and James Comey was trying to kiss her fanny because he wanted something from her when she became president of the United States.

    All of these people who watched that news conference and didn’t think that it was a disgrace for the FBI. And then subsequently, watched all this stuff involving Trump and Page and Papadopoulos and Michael Flynn – and couldn’t see that the corrupt investigative process of the FBI and the DOJ was basically being used to conduct a coup d’état. I mean you have to be an idiot. Any first year assistant US attorney would look at all these facts and say ‘there’s a coup underway. There’s a conspiracy.’

    But for those of us thought that, the Washington Post, the New York Times. We were ‘conspiracy theorists.’ You know what? Pretty damn good theory, it appears today.

    To what extent is the CIA involved in this?” asked Hines.

    Well there’s no doubt that John Brennan was the primogenitor of the entire counterintelligence investigation,” replied diGenova. “It was John Brennan who went to James Comey and basically pummeled him into starting a counterintelligence investigation against Trump. Brennan’s at the heart of this. He went around the world. He enlisted the help of foreign intelligence services. He’s responsible for Joseph Mifsud and other people.”

    People do not have even the beginning of an understanding of the role that John Brennan played in this. He is a monstrously important person, and I underscore monstrously important person. He has done more damage to the Central Intelligence Agency – it’s equal to what James Comey has done to the FBI. It’s pretty clear that James Comey will go down in history as the single worst FBI director in history, regardless of how Mr. Durham treats him.”

    “He precipitated it. He caused it. He encouraged it, and he is responsible for it at a minimum. He and John Brennan are the coup leaders.”

    Watch:


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 19:30

  • Gary Shilling: Why It's So Hard To Forecast The Economy
    Gary Shilling: Why It’s So Hard To Forecast The Economy

    Authored by A.Gary Shilling, op-ed via Bloomberg.com,

    Normal cyclical patterns have gone missing, and may not be coming back anytime soon…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The U.S. economy has experienced its slowest recovery from a recession in the post-World War II era, and the longer it lasts the more evidence there is that normal cyclical patterns are missing. And their absence means market participants shouldn’t rely on them to divine the economy’s future.

    Consider the myriad developments that are atypical, or even the reverse of normal economic and financial market behavior. The Federal Reserve shifted from easing credit to tightening following past downturns, with its target federal funds rate normally raised within a year or so of the recession’s trough, eventually precipitating the next economic contraction. This time, the central bank kept its policy rate at the recessionary low of essentially zero until Dec. 2015, 78 months into the recovery. And then, after nine quarter-percentage point increases, it reversed course early this year with three rate cuts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Far from the Fed’s normal worries about an overheating economy and inflation, the central bank frets that low and even declining consumer prices will spawn deflationary expectations. Buyers will hold off in anticipation of lower prices. Inventories and excess capacity will mount, forcing prices down. The price cuts confirm suspicions and purchases are delayed even further, sparking a deflationary spiral. The glaring example is Japan, with deflation in most years in the past two decades and tiny real GDP annual growth of 1.1%.

    Also, despite the plunge in 30-year fixed mortgage rates from 6.8% in July 2006 to the current 3.7%, rate-sensitive single-family housing starts have been muted. They fell from a 1.8 million annual rate in January 2006 to 350,000 in March 2009 as the subprime mortgage market collapsed, but have only recovered to 940,000.

    Mortgage lending criteria have tightened and prime-age first-time homebuyers don’t have the necessary downpayments. The net worth of households headed by 18-to-34-year-olds dropped from $120,000 in 2001 to $90,000 in 2016, a 44% decline adjusted for inflation. Also, they learned from the last recession that for the first time since the 1930s, house prices nationwide can fall.

    In past business recoveries, the U.S. household saving rate fell as consumer spending grew faster than incomes.  In this expansion, it’s the reverse, leaping from 4.9% to 7.9% in November, retarding spending.

    Past postwar recessions spawned financial problems, but nothing like the 2008 crisis. The government’s reaction was equally severe with the enactment of the 2010 Dodd-Frank Act and other stringent regulations for financial institutions that are only now being slowly relaxed.

    In earlier business upswings, a drop in the unemployment rate of anything like the plunge from 10% in October 2009 to the current 3.5% would have spawned massive wage inflation. This time, real wages are barely growing.

    Globalization transported many high-paid manufacturing jobs to China. With the growing “on demand” economy—think Uber Technologies Inc. —many people trade flexibility in working hours for low pay. The payroll jobs that are being created are mostly in low-wage sectors such as retailing and leisure & hospitality.

    For years, foreign policy was bipartisan and expanding trade was considered highly desirable. Now, globalists have been overcome by protectionists, spurred by voters upset over stagnant purchasing power and rising income and asset inequality in G-7 countries. Trump’s 2016 election along with the U.K.’s “Brexit” from the European Union are among the results. Then there’s also the demise of global trade deals, which are being replaced by bilateral agreements or no pacts at all.

    The U.S.-China trade dispute will no doubt persist because China, with a declining labor force as a result of its earlier one child-per-couple policy, needs Western technologies to grow and achieve its worldwide leadership ambitions. But the U.S. is opposed to the technology transfers China wants.

    The dollar’s slide from 1985 until 2007 encouraged U.S. exports, curbed imports and gave U.S. multinationals currency-related boosts to profits. Since then, the dollar index has rallied 33% amid a global demand for haven assets. And it should continue to, given the relatively faster growth of the U.S. economy, its huge, free and open financial markets and the lack of meaningful substitutes for the greenback.

    Disinflation has reigned since 1980, but real interest rates were positive until the last decade.  But for 10 years now, real 10-year Treasury note yields have been flat at zero (see my Nov. 19, 2018 column, “Zero Real Yields Are Tripping Up Investors”).  This and the flat yield curve have pushed state pension funds and other investors far out on the risk curve in search of real returns, bidding up stocks to vulnerable levels.

    Earlier, the Fed was run by Ph.D. economists who clung to widely-held theories even though they didn’t work. Fed Chairman Jerome Powell is proving to be much more practical, backing away from rigid Fed policies such as the 2% inflation target and a zero-bound policy rate as well as unsuccessful forward guidance.

    In this different economic climate, it’s hard to time the end of the current recovery. Still, it will end, due either to Fed overtightening or a financial crisis, like the 2000 dot-com blow-off or the 2007-2009 subprime mortgage collapse. In the current excess supply-savings glut-deflationary world, it’s likely a recession will unfold due to a shock before the Fed overtightens.

    No financial crises are in sight, but there are possibilities such as excess debt in China and among U.S. businesses, a trade war escalation, consumer retrenchment resulting in widespread deflation, and disappointing corporate profits measured against sky-high stock prices. Watch for specific imbalances, not typical past patterns.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 19:00

  • A Third Of 18-34 Year Olds Live With Their Parents And Other 2019 Housing Market Highlights, In Charts
    A Third Of 18-34 Year Olds Live With Their Parents And Other 2019 Housing Market Highlights, In Charts

    As Goldman housing strategist Marty Young writes in his “year in review” housing and mortgage market summary, 2019 was characterized by sharply falling mortgage rates and a strengthening housing market:

    • 120bp: 30-year mortgage rates fell by 120bp between 2018Q4 and 2019Q4.

    • +17%: single family housing starts increased by 17% from November 2018 to November 2019.

    • +3.2%: the Case-Shiller US house price index has grown by 3.2% over the past 12 months.

    • 50%: 50% of outstanding conventional 30-year mortgage borrowers have a 50bp or larger refinance incentive as of 2019Q4 (up from 6% as of 2018Q4).

    • 5bp: agency MBS spreads widened by 5bp in 2019 (vs. 60bp of tightening of IG corporate bond spreads).

    • $230bn: Federal Reserve agency MBS holdings declined by $230bn over the past year.

    • $25bn: non-QM RMBS issuance has reached $25bn in 2019 year-to-date (vs. $11bn in 2018

    One remarkable observation: roughly a third of young Americans aged 18-34 now live with their parents: up from 27% before the crisis. Depending on how one looks at this data, it means that either household formation is about to soar, or an entire generation now has doubts it will ever be able to own its own house.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking ahead, the Goldman strategist expects slightly higher mortgage rates and a strong housing market for 2020:

    • Expect mortgage rates to increase by 25bp in 2020, ending the year at 4.0%.

    • Look for single family housing starts to increase by 5% in 2020 vs. 2019.

    • Expect the Case-Shiller US house price index to grow by 3% in 2020.

    • Expect 30% of outstanding conventional 30-year mortgage borrowers to still be in-the-money for refinancing in 2020Q4.

    • Look for mortgage spreads to move sideways and for IG spreads to widen by 20bp in 2020H1.

    • Expect Federal Reserve MBS holdings to decline by an additional $220bn in 2020.

    • Expect non-QM issuance to grow again to $30bn in 2020.

    And here are some of the pivotal charts recapping the housing market from the perspective of Goldman Sachs:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 18:30

  • I've Had Professors Who Educate, And Ones Who Indoctrinate. Here's What I Learned From Both…
    I’ve Had Professors Who Educate, And Ones Who Indoctrinate. Here’s What I Learned From Both…

    Authored by Emma Schambach via The College Fix,

    I’m prepared for the real world…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Earlier this month I graduated with a bachelor’s degree in political science from the University of North Carolina at Charlotte.

    As I look back on my time on campus, I can honestly say I am thankful for both the professors who challenged me intellectually and were open to my conservative views — as well as the professors who tried to indoctrinate me, belittled my principles, or allowed me to be verbally bullied by classmates.

    That’s because both types of experiences taught me how to better defend my beliefs as I enter the next stage in my life: real life.

    As I consider law school, I know that my potential future career as an attorney would be built upon defending my stances with wisdom and logic. With that, I appreciate the tutelage the intellectual sparring on campus gave me. It toughened me up, taught me how to argue the facts.

    That’s not to say that I support professors who shut down their students’ thoughts and opinions. Nor did I enjoy being condescended to as an undergrad.

    But looking back, in hindsight, it did help me grow.

    Prior to my university experience, I was home-schooled from first grade through twelfth grade. I felt this non-traditional start to my educational journey might put me at a disadvantage, or at least at a different starting point, than some of my classmates. What I came to discover after some time in the classroom was that I was well-prepared to defend my beliefs.

    Often I was the only conservative student to speak up in class, and I did have my fair share of leftist professors who badgered me over my opinions on abortion, immigration and economics.

    For example, one professor my sophomore year labeled me “anti-choice” in front of the class when I expressed that the government should have a Constitutional responsibility to protect pre-born children.

    But there’s another side to this story, too. I also had some professors who heard me out when I questioned their political views.

    I can still recall the time I challenged one of my professor’s anti-capitalism opinions during a lecture. After class he walked up to me, and my stomach was gripped with tension of the unknown. Yet to my pleasant surprise, he offered me an extra credit opportunity to write an essay on why I believe capitalism is the best economic system.

    This teaching opportunity strengthened my ability to articulate my opinions and gave me a chance to practice my writing skills.

    I am grateful to say I had other professors who, although they disagreed with me, did not shut me down or insult me because of it. These select few professors were the highlight of my college experience, educators who prioritized teaching over indoctrination. They are a powerful reminder that some scholars still allow the Socratic method in their classrooms. They offer a chance for their students — both conservative and liberal — to grow as individuals and intellectuals.

    Let me speak for my peers when I say “thank you” to all those professors out there who honor their call to educate. You help make our experiences on campus not only tolerable, but enjoyable.

    Students in the university system in America shouldn’t be afraid to express their different views. They should be encouraged to express dissent and be taught how to defend their ideas and build arguments using reason and logic.

    Unfortunately, far too often, leftist indoctrination is the lesson of the day. And not all students take it well, namely conservative freshmen who were not taught by their parents or high school teachers counter-arguments to liberal tropes. I’ve seen it happen first hand. They know capitalism is the only system that has lifted the most out of poverty, but they stumble on citing specifics. All too often they get devoured by their left-leaning professors and peers, and end up feeling bullied and belittled. They then go silent, or even worse, buy into the progressive dogma that socialism is the solution to all of the world’s evils.

    I’m glad that wasn’t me. As I look back on my experience at the University of North Carolina at Charlotte, I recall professors who challenged my beliefs through bullying tactics and intimidation, as well as professors who challenged me in order to strengthen my arguments and promote my academic success. I grew from both learning experiences.

    The professors who tried to silence me taught me the importance of standing up for myself and for those who are voiceless in the face of unreason and unkindness. The professors who challenged my beliefs and encouraged me to work on articulating them in order to build a stronger argument gave me the tools I need to succeed in the decades to come.

    Like me, conservative students who have fought bias throughout their education can step into the real world having already faced adversity by surviving a campus where about 80 percent of your peers and nearly 100 percent of your professors disagree with your political views.

    While it is disappointing and disheartening that the once-great university system in America is so blatantly biased, and discourages differing viewpoints of students, there is hope in the strong level-headed and determined conservative students who are being shaped by this academic hazing into the future conservative leaders of America.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 18:00

  • Baltimore City Breaks Murder Record Of The Century
    Baltimore City Breaks Murder Record Of The Century

    Baltimore City slid further into chaos and just broke its highest ever per-capita homicide rate after recording its 347th murder on Monday. 

    With about 602,000 residents, Baltimore City’s homicide rate breached 57 per 100,000 residents after 13 people have been murdered since Dec. 21. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The annual death toll has only hit 342 on two other occasions, onetime in 2017 and another in 2015. Breaching the 342 level to 347 is uncharted territory and suggests the situation will get worse in 2019. 

    This is the 5th year the city has recorded murders over 300, due mostly to the Ferguson effect post-2015 riots and socio-economic deterioration in the town. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The highest ever per-capita homicide rate and an out of control opioid epidemic comes as the total population in the city crashes to a 100-year low, many are fleeing the city for the suburbs as the local economy continues to dive deeper into a depression, never recovered since 2008.

    Baltimore City Mayor Bernard “Jack” Young held an end-of-year news conference on public safety Monday. Young said, “Our residents deserve to live without the fear of violence and it is my obligation and duty to leverage every resource and tool available to stop the cycle of violence that is crippling our city.” 

    He added, “We cannot stop violent crime through policing alone. We must use both community-based interventions and an integrated crime-fighting strategy.” 

    Young also wrote an op-ed in The Baltimore Sun on Tuesday about his new strategy to turn Baltimore City around will focus on identifying and charging gun crimes and holding weekly case reviews with the police department and the State’s Attorney’s Office. 

    Baltimore City Police Commissioner Michael Harrison said the number of people killed in the city this year is “deeply disturbing.”

    “That level of violence simply cannot be tolerated in a civil society, much less in a great city like Baltimore,” Harrison said.

    He said the department would start treating the “actual disease” of violence, instead of what he characterized as the symptoms.

    “[W]hen we only treat symptoms and never deal with root cause issues, violence, like a disease, builds resistance. It gets stronger and becomes more difficult to eradicate,” Harrison said. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    With no signs of abating, the murder crisis in Baltimore City will likely get worse. 

    Please do yourself a favor in 2020 and avoid traveling to the city considering its per capita homicide rate is one of the highest in the country. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 17:30

  • Bitcoin: 4 Big Competitive Advantages Over Altcoins In 2020
    Bitcoin: 4 Big Competitive Advantages Over Altcoins In 2020

    Authored by William Suberg via CoinTelegraph.com,

    Bitcoin easily succeeds over other cryptocurrencies in multiple key areas, which all but guarantee its future as the standard, noted academic Konrad S. Graf has concluded.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

    In the second installment of a two-part interview with Eurasia Review published Jan. 1, Graf highlighted a plethora of “competitive advantages” inherent to Bitcoin. 

    Graf has sought to gain exposure for Bitcoin through academic essays, which expand beyond its mechanism of action to situate it within the broader economic system.

    Scarcity 

    Bitcoin wins out over other forms of money — including other cryptocurrencies — largely due to its fixed supply. 

    “Bitcoin’s top competitive advantage… is its ability (to) restrict new issuance, the relative reliability of its methods for controlling unit production,” Graf summarizes.

    Specifically, Bitcoin’s supply cannot be manipulated, nor can its maximum issuance — 21 million units — ever change to dilute it. 

    No entity, no matter how powerful in terms of computing power active on the network, can diminish the value of the existing BTC held by savers by increasing the supply. This is in direct contrast to cryptocurrencies with a mutable supply, such as Ethereum (ETH) and XRP, as well as all fiat currencies.

    Apolitical value transfer

    The above characteristic thus makes Bitcoin particularly useful for settlements from anyone to anyone, as a financial protocol immune to the trappings of fiat.

    Here, Graf touches on Saifedean Ammous’ popular book, “The Bitcoin Standard,” which extensively examines Bitcoin’s advantages over fiat. Ammous likewise devotes space to how Bitcoin could function as a settlement currency without the need for middlemen.

    “Ammous argues that it is in the — for most people quite arcane — field of settlements that Bitcoin could find some of its most competitive applications. It could become not only an in-common non-political money unit, but also a direct competitor to the SWIFT system and any other existing or emerging rivals to it,” Graf explains.

    He continues: 

    “In a world where conventional systems are also politicized, Bitcoin has an advantage of being “neutral” in the sense that it is controlled by none of the competing power blocks, which means that any and all could potentially participate.”

    Technical prowess

    Against major altcoins, Bitcoin’s technical prowess means its position as a market leader has been obvious for years, says Graf.

    As Cointelegraph has also frequently reported, hash rate alone has achieved an order of magnitude better progress than Ethereum or similar market incumbents.

    “BTC currently has 97 exahashes protecting its network to BCH’s 2.5 exahashes, giving BTC a hash rate 39 times higher than that of even its next closest digital-cash competitor,” he continues.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bitcoin network hash rate vs. Bitcoin Cash, Bitcoin SV. Source: Coin.dance

    That attribute also differentiates Bitcoin from imitators with very similar characteristics — the principle may be the same, but hash rate distribution, or centralization, and activity on those other networks pale by comparison. 

    It’s not an entity

    On the topic of centralization, a final advantage Bitcoin has over “corporate” blockchains is its lack of weak points political actors can target. 

    That benefit has become all the more apparent in 2019, the year in which Facebook unveiled and subsequently faced a global backlash over its digital currency protocol, Libra

    CEO Mark Zuckerberg appeared before U.S. lawmakers alone several times, amid criticisms Facebook was attempting to remove government monopolies over the proposed stablecoin currency.

    “There is no CEO to summon to Washington for interrogation,” Graf concludes about Bitcoin.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 17:00

  • Giuliani Says Ukraine Corruption Came From 'Highest Levels Of Obama Administration'; Wants To Testify, Try Case
    Giuliani Says Ukraine Corruption Came From ‘Highest Levels Of Obama Administration’; Wants To Testify, Try Case

    Rudy Giuliani is not only willing to testify in President Trump’s Senate impeachment trial, he wants to “do demonstrations” in order to outline what he described as a “series of criminal acts” involving “the highest levels of the Obama administration, adding that Democrats Adam Schiff and House Speaker Nancy Pelosi will go down in history like Joe McCarthy when people “calm down and watch this carefully.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “What I learned is the corruption in Ukraine is vast, it’s extensive, it highly involves the Democratic party – not just in 2016 but for many years,” the former New York City mayor said at Trump’s New Year’s Eve party at Mar-a-Lago in Florida. 

    “When the full scope of what happens in Ukraine comes out, there are going to be a lot of Americans who participated in the corruption,” adding “The Bidens took millions of dollars laundered out of Ukraine, and the only reason they’re getting away with it is because you and the press protect them…”

    When asked what he discovered, Rudy replied “I’m not going to tell you what I found out until I have a proper forum… but it’s devastating,” adding “We will figure out the right forum.”

    “This is expanding, it will turn out to be a series of criminal acts. It will involve the highest levels of the Obama administration. It’s the reason the Democratic party is in panic.”

    “I would testify, I would do demonstrations, I’d give lectures, I’d give summations. Or, I do what I do best, I try the case,” adding, with a smile, “I’d love to try the case.”

    “If you give me the case, I will prosecute it as a racketeering case. Which I kind of invented anyway.”

    (Relevant part begins at 3:15)


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 16:33

    Tags

  • Netflix Is Coming For Its "Best Picture" Oscar In 2020
    Netflix Is Coming For Its “Best Picture” Oscar In 2020

    Netflix has been crushing the film industry, as we noted in our piece out just hours ago highlighting the demise of the movie theater industry.

    Now, the company may finally start getting its due as an official film studio, too, thanks to its memorable 2019, according to Bloomberg. It started the year by joining the Motion Picture Association of America and then went on to release memorable film hits like “The Irishman” and “Marriage Story”. 

    The year also included Eddie Murphy’s “Dolemite Is My Name,” which helped lead to Netflix doubling or tripling the output of most conventional Hollywood studios. Netflix executives are also now saying that the company’s financial targets rely on how well its movies do. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Scott Stuber, Netflix’s film chief said: “This fall was a nice culmination. I’m very proud of this slate. I can look you in the eye and say we’ve made as good movies this fall as anybody.”

    Stuber joined Netflix after working in film for more than 20 years. He was asked to “build a movie studio from scratch” by Netflix’s Chief Content Officer, and that’s exactly what he did. 

    Prior to 2019, the company’s slate of films, including names like “The Ridiculous 6”, was mostly forgettable. 

    Its one critically acclaimed movie, “Beasts of No Nation”, from 2016, earned no nominations at the Academy Awards. Stuber said: “It was a company built on television — that was first and foremost.”

    Now his past collaborators, including Dwayne “The Rock” Johnson and director Peter Berg are working with him at Netflix. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At his direction, Netflix has turned into the largest film studio in Hollywood – and it plans on continuing to release 50 to 60 films a year. “Bird Box” and “Murder Mystery” were two other hits, amassing more than 70 million views in their first month on the service. “Six of the 10 most-watched new titles on the service in the U.S. in 2019 were original films,” Bloomberg notes. 

    The studio has found a niche in films that Hollywood has abandoned, like adult dramas, romantic comedies and action movies without superheroes. And classic cinema buffs – like Martin Scorsese – have finally embraced Netflix. 

    The last piece of the puzzle for Netflix is the Oscars. Last year, Netflix saw 15 nominations, including for best picture, best director, best actress and best screenplay. The Best Picture Oscar eluded the studio. 

    But John Sloss, who produced “Green Book,” last year’s winner for best picture, admitted last year to Netflix’s Ted Sarandos that the hard part was over. This means in 2020, Netflix could be read for its first Best Picture Oscar. 

    “You did it. You got over the hump,” Sloss told Sarandos.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 16:30

  • After 20 Years Of Trading: You Learn You Know Nothing
    After 20 Years Of Trading: You Learn You Know Nothing

    Authored by Jared Dillian via RealInvestmentAdvice.com,

    You ever notice…

    That some memories tend to be stronger than others?

    What sort of things do you remember?

    You remember events in your life that had a lot of feelings associated with them.

    You remember the death of your pet like it was yesterday. All the nights spent sitting on the couch watching Wheel Of Fortune—it’s just a blur.

    Researchers have studied this in rats. They found that rats remembered things better if they experienced a rush of adrenaline.

    In those moments with strong memories, it feels like time slows down. Time doesn’t actually slow down—time is linear. But human beings experience time as flexible. Time also speeds up when things are boring.

    I’m fond of saying that all of finance, or at least the interesting part, is about human behavior. I find the daily fluctuations of stocks and credit spreads less interesting the older I get. And I think finance is more depraved the older I get. But the human behavior part fascinates me.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Miller’s Planet

    The fact that time stretches and compresses isn’t news to anyone who’s traded options.

    In the world of options, time and volatility work in opposite directions. As time passes, options decay. As volatility increases, options increase in value. All stuff you learned in class.

    But if you think about it, volatility increasing is another way of saying that there’s a lot of s— going on. Things are crazy. Options increase in value—which is really like saying that time is slowing down.

    Which is exactly how we experience it. Of all my days trading on Wall Street, what are the times that I remember most? The financial crisis, naturally. There was a lot of adrenaline associated with that.

    We all have strong memories of it. And while we experienced it, it seemed like time was slowing down—which was reflected in options prices. They were the highest in recorded history.

    Finance is simply human behavior.

    If I think back over the last 10 years, what do I remember?

    • The European crisis

    • The US debt downgrade

    • The Ebola scare

    • The yuan devaluation

    • The vol-splosion

    All the crazy times. Nobody remembers the stuff in between. Old-timers like me remember all the way back to 1997 and 1998, with the Asian Financial Crisis and LTCM and the Russian debt default. It’s the accidents that help us mark our time in the markets.

    Perspective

    We all perceive things differently. As I just demonstrated, we all perceive time differently.

    We also might perceive color differently—we just don’t know. There is no way to know that the red I see is the red you see.

    We all have different perspectives, especially when it comes to financial markets. I might find a stock attractive that you find unattractive. Happens all the time.

    A lot of financial analysis is searching for some objective truth in the markets. This is what the value people try to do. They try to identify the correct value of a security and then buy it if it’s underpriced.

    But there really is no objective truth in finance—just a set of ever-changing perspectives. Some examples:

    Target is up over 90%, year to date:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Is Target’s business 90% better? Is it earning 90% more revenue? Of course not—more people find the stock attractive and fewer find it unattractive.

    Pharmaceutical giant Bristol-Myers is up 48% in the last couple of months:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Again, is their business 50% better? No.

    People have created several models to explain stock market behavior. Keynes’s beauty pageant is at the top of the list. I will always catch a beauty pageant if it’s on TV. The goal isn’t picking the most attractive contestant. It’s picking the contestant that the judges will find most attractive. It’s a great exercise.

    But I don’t think that’s the right model.

    I came up with my own model and gave it to the world on the Bloomberg Opinion page. You can read about it here. But I feel like it’s incomplete, too.

    Sentiment also plays a role—big turning points are always at sentiment extremes.

    I’m not sure what the answer is—or if there even is an answer. I think about it all the time.  People smarter than me spend even more time thinking about it.

    Maybe there is no Grand Unified Theory—maybe there are regimes in the financial markets, and sometimes some things work and sometimes other things work.

    Maybe the rules change all the time and there is nothing we can do about it.

    I am not even sure buy-and-hold and dollar-cost averaging will work going forward.

    And that’s what you learn when you have 20 years of experience—that you actually know nothing.

    That said, one thing I do know is that the adrenaline rush reckless traders get throwing money at “hot stocks” is not something to aspire to. It’s much better to even out your odds with a diversified, balanced portfolio and a long-term view.

    *  *  *

    Jared Dillian is an investment strategist at Mauldin Economics and the editor of The 10 th  Man, a free contrarian investment newsletter. From 2001 to 2008, Jared worked at Lehman Brothers—first as an index arbitrage trader and then as head of the ETF trading desk. During this time, he routinely traded over $1 billion a day in volume.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 16:00

  • de Blasio's New York: Former Rikers Inmates Using Taxpayer-Funded Debit Cards To Buy Liquor, Tobacco
    de Blasio’s New York: Former Rikers Inmates Using Taxpayer-Funded Debit Cards To Buy Liquor, Tobacco

    Today in “why Democrats simply should never be allowed to allocate government capital” news, it it being reported that former inmates at Riker’s Island are now using their government-issued debit cards to buy booze and Juul pods. 

    The news comes just days after we reported that inmates were receiving training on how to become Starbucks baristas for “job security” purposes once they are released. 

    The debit cards were part of a “soft on crime city initiative” by beta male bleeding heart Mayor Bill de Blasio that provided ex-inmates with two $25 gift cards, according to the NY Post.

    JR, an employee at a liquor store near Riker’s Island, has said that her store was refusing to sell to the cardholders. 

    The liquor store employee said: “We’ve had more people coming in with the visa things. No, we don’t take that, no gift cards, none of that. People come in here always trying to find a way to pay without really paying.”

    City Sliquors, another liquor store along the Riker’s Island bus route, said ex-inmates “didn’t seem to understand why their payment wasn’t accepted”. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The store’s owner commented: “Usually we don’t accept it because we don’t know where it came from with no chip, it may bounce.”

    And even while booze has been difficult to get, tobacco and Juul pods have been easier for the ex-inmates to ascertain. 

    Ahmed, a worker at the Plaza Deli Grocery, said: “Yet to see one person use it to buy food.” 

    Seeing the rampant success of this program, the city is also planning on setting up ex-inmates with Metrocards and burner phones upon their release. The move comes as a result of de Blasio’s new bail reform law, which is supposed to incentivize inmates to show up for their court appearances. Other incentives being offered – we swear we are not making this up – are winter coats, Steve Madden shoes and Mets tickets.

    The programs are being run by city-funded non-profits and will cost about $500,000.

    One law enforcement source concluded: “It’s a sad state of affairs when the city bends over backward to reward criminals instead of protecting the victims of their crimes. What’s next? Free limo service back home?”

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 01/01/2020 – 15:30

    Tags

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 1st January 2020

  • The Leftist Cult Vs. The Trump Cult: Similarities And Differences
    The Leftist Cult Vs. The Trump Cult: Similarities And Differences

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    Political demagoguery is a valuable and effective weapon in the arsenal of the establishment elites. As long as there is a wide ideological division between groups in society, biases and desires can be tapped and manipulated.  This allows those in power to direct vast portions of the public down one path or another. When fear of an enemy and the drive to “win” become more important than truth and evidence, the population has tied its own puppet strings and handed them over to the spin doctors.

    This is why the false Left/Right paradigm has been so useful to the establishment for so long. Anytime the public starts to wake up to the web of control, all the elites have to do is push one or both sides of the political spectrum towards extremism and let the people rage at each other instead of picking up their torches and pitchforks and tearing down the oligarchy. This method of division and diversion keeps the masses occupied and feeling as though they are accomplishing something while actually accomplishing nothing.

    As Carroll Quigley, globalist insider and mentor to Bill Clinton, admitted in his book ‘Tragedy And Hope’:

    The argument that the two parties should represent opposed ideals and policies, one, perhaps, of the Right and the other of the Left, is a foolish idea acceptable only to doctrinaire and academic thinkers. Instead, the two parties should be almost identical, so that the American people can “throw the rascals out” at any election without leading to any profound or extensive shifts in policy….Then it should be possible to replace it, every four years if necessary, by the other party which will be none of these things but will still pursue, with new vigor, approximately the same basic policies.”

    The false Left/Right tactic has become more and more exposed in the past decade to the wider public, and so the elites had to change their methods to adapt to the growing awareness. Conservatives in particular have started to leave the plantation, and something had to be done to drag them back. The liberty movement has become a force in western life with tens of millions of members. It is an unpredictable element that the establishment needs to lock down and redirect if they ever hope to achieve their goal of a “new world order”.

    The elites have used two tandem strategies in this effort:

    First, they pushed leftist indoctrination towards full bore cultism.

    Second, they have attempted to co-opt the leadership of conservatives and the liberty movement using a political puppet figure in order to bottleneck our energy and momentum.

    Leftist culture has become increasingly erratic and unhinged (even more so than usual), informed by elements of a new social justice fanaticism; a kind of religious fervor where faith in ideological gatekeepers is more important than facts. The majority of the left, while not necessarily part of this “woke” religion, is still influenced by SJW rhetoric. Delusional notions of “patriarchy” and “inherent racism” and “inherent sexism” are woven into the Democrat mindset today. They see oppression everywhere, and victim group status has become the social currency they use to acclimate to a fantasy world where big government and entitlements are the solutions to all the world’s ills.

    The conservative side of civilization doesn’t participate in the oppression fantasies of the left. We don’t even speak the same language, as the left’s very vocabulary has shifted into an academic babble-language they simply made up to describe social dynamics that don’t exist and gender politics that are biologically and scientifically absurd. Reconciling with leftists in any meaningful way has become nearly impossible, and fear of their fanaticism is causing conservatives to assume that whatever these people hate, must be good.

    Enter Donald Trump, a kind of artificially created focal point machine, a figure that is designed to absorb liberty movement talking points and then regurgitate them in an alphabet soup puddle on Twitter. This rhetoric is relatively effective in that many conservatives recognize parts of the soup and find comfort that Trump “must be on their side”.

    I have outlined in numerous articles Trump’s dubious background and behavior. To summarize, we often hear lip service from Trump on anti-globalism and anti-elitism, even though it is an undeniable fact that he has saturated his cabinet with globalists and elitists.

    We heard anti-banker talking points from Trump during his campaign, even though Trump has a longstanding relationship to the Rothschild family and works side-by-side with Rothschild and Goldman Sachs bankers in the White House. We heard lots of anti-Federal Reserve discussion from Trump and observations that the current economy is an explosive bubble engineered by them; yet he now openly demands that the Fed inflate the bubble further while he takes full credit for the fake stock market rally.  We also heard many promises that US troops would be coming home and the long wars in the Middle East would end for America; this has not happened and likely will not happen as tensions with Iran continue to grow.

    In other words, Trump is a skin job. A robot. A false conservative and false prophet of the liberty movement. He tells us what we want to hear while his actions say something entirely different. Yet, a lot of conservatives still listen to him, because they despise the collectivist religion of the left, they desperately want mainstream recognition and representation, and because they want to believe that there is a white knight out there in Washington defending their interests and their future.

    The establishment understands these desires and exploits them. They understand that the more extreme the left becomes, the more tempted conservatives will be to jump blindly on the Trump bandwagon.

    Mainstream media outlets like CNN have taken to referring to Trump’s base as a “cult” recently, which of course is the pot calling the kettle black; but it does not mean that the accusation is wrong. Trump’s base is indeed acting more and more like a cult, but primarily in reaction to the cultism of leftists. The crazier the left gets, the more Trump becomes a folk hero to the right. The more the media promotes fabricated Russiagate nonsense or Ukrainian conspiracy narratives, the more conservatives assume that the establishment is “trying to take down” Trump.

    It is rather rudimentary reverse psychology – If the establishment media attacks Trump, then he must be “anti-establishment”. If the leftists hate Trump, then he must be good for conservatives. Nothing could be further from the truth, but if anyone points this out they will be immediately attacked as disinformation agents and purveyors of CNN talking points.

    A common argument in defense of Trump is to ignore his associations and behavior entirely and focus on the prevailing circus surrounding him instead. People state indignantly that:

    Trump is under attack! They are trying to impeach him! How can he be working with the globalists if they are trying to get rid of him…?”

    I would point out that there is a usefulness to political theater that goes far beyond trying to remove a president from office. Again, the media viciously attacked Trump during his election campaign, but if one understands that public trust in the mainstream media has collapsed in the past ten years, then one also understands that media attacks on Trump would only cause more people to like him and vote for him. The question then needs to be asked: Does the establishment understand this inverse relationship in public psychology? Or, did they completely overlook it?

    I seriously doubt they are overlooking it.

    If this is the case, then the frothing leftist rage against Trump, while partially real, is also 4th Generation warfare designed to trick conservatives into developing their own cult-like fantasy that Trump is our fearless leader fighting the good fight even though his presidency is tightly intertwined with global elitists. The impeachment itself comes at a time when a large portion of the liberty movement is waking up to the Trump con game and is questioning many of his activities and associations.

    The establishment has put a lot of effort into creating the Trump versus Leftist circus, and they really hate the idea that a number of people are refusing to pick a side.  For them, there is nothing worse than free thinkers who organize their own side separate from the false paradigm.

    The impeachment, like Russiagate, is not designed to get Trump out of office. It is a Hail Mary attempt to pull liberty minded conservatives back into the Trump fold; to keep us predictable and under control. It is also designed to keep leftists feeling justified in their insanity. Remember, the crazier the left acts, the more fearful and malleable conservatives become.

    The establishment likes Trump right where he is, and he will not be going anywhere, at least not until he has completely served his purpose. Whether that will be in the next year, or in another four years, it’s hard to say at this time. Obviously, the elites have to keep the left/right sideshow going at full volume until they are done using Trump as a distraction. They will “attack” him as often as needed to create the illusion that he is anti-establishment, and Trump will continue to play along to please his masters, many of them standing over his shoulder everyday in the White House.

    The Leftist Cult and the Trump Cult are similar in their refusal to accept facts and reality, as well as their ability to double and triple down on delusions that are consistently debunked.

    I have witnessed people on the Trump-train dismiss every blatant piece of evidence of Trump’s collusion with globalists on the basis that he is “keeping his enemies close”.  I have seen them ignore his support for Red Flag gun laws, his refusal to pull US forces out of Syria, Iraq, Afghanistan and Yemen, his hostility towards Iran, his support for totalitarian governments like Saudi Arabia, etc.  They call it “4D chess” and simply move on.  I have seen them shrug off endless data showing economic decline and proclaim instead an “economic boom”.  I have seen them completely absorbed and distracted by the trade war and China while forgetting all about the banking elites that engineer most of the calamity in our society.

    They act this way because they are afraid.  The political left frightens them, they are searching for a hero to save them, and they are willing to overlook almost any skeleton in Trump’s closet in order to make their fantasy version of him real.  But, the leftists are nothing more than a symptom – They are useful idiots, not the source of the disease.  And, Trump is not the hero conservatives are looking for anyway.  In terms of the liberty movement, Trump is irrelevant.  He’s a footnote.  The real work is being done by millions of activists breaking through decades of propaganda and exposing the truth.

    The difference between the Leftist Cult and the Trump Cult is mostly intent: Leftists double and triple down on their lies because they are infatuated with collective power and they see the truth as an obstacle to the “greater good”. The Trump cult ignores facts and evidence on Trump because they are hyperfocused on collective defense. Leftists are seeking to micromanage the thoughts and behavior of the world while conservatives are seeking to solidify enough political protection to ensure they are left alone. The Leftist Cult wants to burn everything to the ground, erase history and rebuild the world in their image. The Trump Cult is trying to keep the last structures of American heritage alive; they have simply put their faith in the wrong champion.

    The sad reality is, leftists and conservatives are likely far too alien to each other now to ever come to a diplomatic solution. The division in society is very real; it’s the division at the top that’s Kabuki theater. The liberty movement is the key to everything, as we are the constant target of establishment 4th Gen propaganda. If we didn’t matter, then the elites would not be spending so much time, money and energy trying to keep us in line. They need us to buy into the theater, otherwise we become an unknown element, a third party, a time bomb that could explode unexpectedly on them at any given moment.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 23:55

    Tags

  • A Decade In Tech
    A Decade In Tech

    As the decade draws to a close, it’s time to look back at some of the things the past ten years have brought us. To think that people clinking their glasses on New Year Year’s Eve 2009 had no idea what an iPad was and couldn’t post a picture of the fireworks on Instagram.

    As Statista’s Felix Richter rightfully points out, it was a different world back then.

    Infographic: A Decade in Tech | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    While the 2000s will always be remembered as the eve of the smartphone era, the past decade brought us some of the world’s most beloved social media apps as well as several gadgets we wouldn’t want to miss today.

    The PlayStation 4, launched in November 2013, went on to become the second best-selling video game console of all time. The Apple Watch (2015) helped wearables reach mainstream adoption and Amazon’s Echo rang in the smart speaker boom in 2014.

    As for the next decade, we have no idea what to expect. 5G will surely be a big topic for the early 2020s and rumors suggest that augmented reality headsets could become a thing. With several technology companies among the world’s most valuable (not to mention most resourceful) corporations right now, it seems safe to say that the next decade won’t disappoint from a technological point of view.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 23:30

  • We Were Warned About The Deep State, But Refused To Listen
    We Were Warned About The Deep State, But Refused To Listen

    Authored by Larry Johnson via Sic Temper ZTyrannis blog,

    Many of the critical tools employed in the coup to paint Donald Trump as a tool of the Russians and to manufacture a pretext for removing him from office, were created more than twenty years ago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I am talking about the surveillance state that the American electorate has ignorantly accepted as necessary in order to keep us safe from terrorists.

    Despite previous warning from whistleblowers like Russ Tice, Bill Binney, Ed Loomis and Kird Wiebe, no action to rein in the surveillance monster was taken until Edward Snowden absconded with the documents exposing the vast amount spying that the U.S. Government is doing to its own citizens. But even those weak efforts to supposedly rein in the NSA proved to be nothing more than mere window dressing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The spying got worse. Just ask Donald Trump and the members of his campaign that were targeted first by the CIA and NSA and then by the FBI. Fundamental civil rights were trampled.

    The real irony in all of this is that Barack Obama, as President, took credit for helping revise the laws in order to prevent the spying exposed by Edward Snowden. But under the Obama Administration, spying on political opponents–both real and perceived–escalated. We know for a fact that journalists, such as James Rosen and Sheryl Atkinson, were targets and their communications and computers attacked by the U.S. Government.

    We know, thanks to a memo released by Judge Rosemary Collyer, that “FBI consultants” were making illegal searches of NSA material using the names of Donald Trump, his family and members of his campaign staff.

    Some of this NSA material came courtesy of the Brits and their collection on U.S. targets. Some of this material came from the NSA’s own collection and storage of all electronic communications and was obtained using a nifty NSA tool called XKEYSCORE. Listen to Ed Snowden’s description. Also, take time to appreciate the irony that CNN and other journalists were actually trying to report real news. Now they are full blown apologists for the abuse of the intelligence collection tools.

    Six years ago, former NSA Technical Director for Military and Geopolitical Issues, Bill Binney, and Russ Tice, a former NSA analyst, appeared on the PBS News Hour. Once again, they make very clear the enormous nature to the threat to our civil liberties.

    Too bad Donald Trump did not listen to their warning.

    Given the robust, wide ranging ability of the NSA to probe all communications by any person in the United States, it is remarkable that no real dirt on Donald Trump was ever uncovered. Had such information existed, it would be in the NSA’s storage vaults in Utah and crooked CIA analysts under Brennan’s direction would have found it and used it. But that did not happed. The best the intel folks could fabricate were the salacious claims attributed to reports ostensibly created by former British spy, Christopher Steele. Turns out that the titillating account that Trump hired hookers to perform coprophilia (could of been worse, coprophagia) was nothing more than idle bar talk.

    What has happened to Donald Trump can happen to any of us. It is time to take this threat seriously and put the intel agencies back into a properly monitored corral. Otherwise, we will lose this Republic.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 23:05

  • America's Top New Year's Resolutions For 2020
    America's Top New Year's Resolutions For 2020

    For 2020, Americans are making the resolution to adopt healthy habits – concerning their finances as well as their bodies. A survey by Ipsos for Urban Plates has found that out of all participants who said they were making one or several new year’s resolutions, 51 percent wanted to manage their finances better and an equal amount wanted to adopt healthier eating habits.

    As Statista’s Katharina Bucxhholz notes, more popular resolutions for the upcoming year also circled around improving one’s health, with a more active lifestyle and weight loss being favorite answers.

    Infographic: America's Top New Year's Resolutions for 2020 | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    38 percent of participants wanted to improve their mental well-being or practice mindfulness, a sign of a growing awareness for these aspects of mental health. Despite environmental protection being an equally popular topic at the moment, only 22 percent of survey participants said they wanted to be more eco-friendly in 2020.

    18 percent of Americans said they were making only one resolution, while an additional 20 percent said they would make more than one. The percentage of resolution-makers was highest among Hispanics. A total of 56 percent in that group said they were making one or more resolutions.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 22:30

  • Strategic Folly & The Consequences Of America's Unending War In Afghanistan
    Strategic Folly & The Consequences Of America's Unending War In Afghanistan

    Authored by Lawrence Sellin via The Modern War Institute,

    If a recent article published by the Modern War Institute at West Point, “Don’t Let Kabul 2020 Look Like Saigon 1975: The Dangers of a Precipitous Afghanistan Withdrawal,” represents the prevailing American views on military strategy, then it goes a long way to explain why the United States lost the Afghanistan War.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The authors did get the premise right concerning the dangers associated with a precipitous withdrawal, but by getting all the basics wrong, they offer all the wrong solutions.

    The article begins with a whopper, that “a US/NATO military withdrawal must be managed responsibly to conserve the hard-earned gains on issues like civil liberties and women’s rights made over the past eighteen years.”

    No. Anyone who has spent any time in Afghanistan beyond the confines of a headquarters or a walled-in facility would know that is a not a valid reason to maintain a military presence in Afghanistan because it is simply not something within our capability either to establish or sustain.

    A proper exit strategy is a process of burden shifting in a manner that protects vital US interests, while preventing US adversaries from unduly benefitting from a withdrawal.

    Just like military leaders and policymakers over nearly two decades and through multiple administrations, the authors fail to address or even identify the true nature of the war in Afghanistan.

    From that omission arises all the misinterpretations of the present situation and the mistaken prescriptions for the future—most notably, the recommendation for continued nation building.

    The time is long overdue for a reality check.

    First, the conflict in Afghanistan is not an insurgency. It is a proxy war being waged by Pakistan against Afghanistan and the United States. It is similar to Pakistan’s use of terrorist proxies against India in Kashmir.

    Pakistan has always viewed Afghanistan as a client state and a security buffer against what it considers potential Indian encirclement and as a springboard to extend its own influence into the resource-rich areas of Central Asia.

    The American counterinsurgency strategy was never winnable as long as Pakistan largely controlled the supply of our troops in landlocked Afghanistan and regulated the operational tempo through its proxy army, the Taliban, which has maintained an extensive recruiting, training, and financial support infrastructure inside Pakistan, all of which has been immune to attack.

    Second, Pakistan has never been an ally of the United States, but a duplicitous partner, pursuing its own interests in coordination with its true ally, China, while being generously funded by us.

    Nowhere have Chinese ambitions been more clearly and publicly articulated than in a June 2018 China Daily article by former Pakistani diplomat, Zamir Ahmed Awan, who works for the Beijing-controlled Center for China and Globalization [comments added].

    New [Chinese] initiatives for peace in Afghanistan are welcome, and may change the scenario in the whole region. . . . I believe, American think tanks and leadership, especially military leadership has already realized that this war cannot be won. The only option is withdrawal, the sooner the better.

    Pakistan can play a vital role in a sustainable solution to the Afghan conflict [controlling Afghanistan as a client state]. Complete withdrawal and an Afghan-led [Taliban-led] solution is the only permanent way out. Pakistan can facilitate an honorable and safe passage for US withdrawal.

    Peace in Afghanistan will allow economic activity between Central Asia, Russia, China, and the Arabian Sea. . . . It can change the fate of the whole region. Chinese projects like the Belt and Road Initiative and the objectives of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization [SCO]. . . . At the recent SCO summit, the Afghanistan president was invited as a guest and observer. Hopefully, the country will soon join SCO. The China-Pakistan Economic Corridor may also be extended to benefit Afghanistan in the near future if there is peace.

    Since that article was published, China has offered to extend CPEC to Afghanistan; China will build a military facility in and deploy Chinese troops to Afghanistan; Afghan military personnel will be trained in China; and members of the Afghan Parliament have recommended that the Bilateral Security Agreement between the United States and Afghanistan be canceled, presumably to be replaced closer security ties with by China.

    Ultimately, America’s most formidable adversary in South Asia will be China, on which future US strategic planning should focus.

    China seeks global domination. One vehicle to achieve it is the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), a collection of infrastructure projects and a network of commercial agreements in 152 countries designed to link the entire world directly to the Chinese economy through interconnected land-based and maritime routes.

    One element of BRI is the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC), an infrastructure and development project, the backbone of which is a transportation network connecting China to the Pakistani seaports of Gwadar and Karachi located on the Arabian Sea

    The guarantor of that soft power approach is the hard power of Chinese military expansion.

    China plans to establish a naval and air bases on the Arabian Sea within easy reach of the strategically important Strait of Hormuz at the mouth of the Persian Gulf. That military facility will complement China’s already operational naval base in Djibouti, located at another strategic chokepoint, the entrance to the Red Sea and the Suez Canal.

    With or without US approval or participation, China intends to incorporate Afghanistan into CPEC and exploit the estimated $3 trillion in untapped Afghan mineral resources.

    The wild card in that scenario is Islamist extremism, of which Pakistan, not Afghanistan, is the true epicentre.

    Islamist militancy has long been an element of Pakistan’s foreign and domestic policies. Any threat by these groups to Pakistan’s nuclear arsenal is, therefore, largely self-created.

    As early as the 1950s, Pakistan began inserting Islamists associated with its Jamaat-e-Islami party into Afghanistan.

    In 1974, then Prime Minister Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto set up a cell within Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence Directorate (ISI) to begin managing dissident Islamists in Afghanistan.

    Under President Zia ul-Haq (1977–1988), Pakistan pursued a policy of aggressive “Islamization” with the proliferation of religious schools and religious political parties, resulting in a society that became ever more extreme and intolerant. Ethnic separatism was suppressed and Islamist fighters were found to be useful proxies for the Pakistani military.

    One source of America’s current dilemma in Afghanistan was a failure by the Reagan administration in allowing the Central Intelligence Agency to blindly outsource mujahideen funding to Pakistan’s ISI, which funneled American money and arms not to Afghan nationalists like Ahmad Shah Massoud, but to pro-Pakistani Islamists such as Gulbuddin Hekmatyar and Jalaluddin Haqqani.

    It is an undisputed fact that the Taliban were created by the ISI, beginning in 1994, as a means of intervening in the Afghan civil war to influence the outcome in favor of Pakistani national interests.

    Since its founding, the ISI and the Pakistani military have never stopped providing financial, logistical, and military support to the Taliban. The subterfuge underlying Pakistani policy was already apparent in the early days of the Afghanistan war.

    The tens of thousands of madrasas, many unofficial, have offered a fertile recruiting source, not just for the Taliban, but for other Pakistan-based militant groups, such as Jaish-e-Mohammed and Lashkar-e-Taiba, responsible for attacks against India.

    Contrary to the suggestion by the authors, it would be foolhardy to pump ever more international financial support into the region, funding largely supplied by the United States, an approach that would only benefit our adversaries.

    Quite the opposite is needed. Financial pressure should be brought to bear on Pakistan for its continued support of terrorism and steps should be taken to thwart Chinese economic and military expansion in the region, including closer cooperation with India.

    The only bargaining chip the United States has in peace negotiations is our presence in Afghanistan. The “presence” argument is clearly unsustainable. Between now and the beginning of a withdrawal, the United States should be identifying new forms of leverage, in the short term, to bolster our negotiating position, and, in the long term, as a basis of a new South Asian strategy.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 21:55

  • California's Woke Legislation For 2020: Students Can't Be Suspended
    California's Woke Legislation For 2020: Students Can't Be Suspended

    Among the dumbest of the state of California’s new ‘woke’ legislation for 2020 is that it’s set to ban all public and charter schools from suspending students for ‘willful defiance’ in this upcoming year: 

    A California bill that passed the Legislature would prohibit schools, including charter schools, from suspending students for willful defiance.

    That means if a student is acting up in class, teachers and school officials will not be able to suspend them from school.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Fast Times At Ridgemont High” (1982)

    As if California public schools weren’t already woefully behind national education standards, despite the state pouring $90 billion into the system this year alone, schools will now be forced to keep kids on campus no matter their level of constant defiance and disruption to the educational process of others.

    Under the law, SB 419, the only exception for which a student could still be suspended suspended will be for bringing a weapon or illegal drugs to school.

    And what’s the rationale? Because of course, racism

    As a local NBC affiliate reported earlier when the bill was passed by the state House and Senate:

    The bill by Sen. Nancy Skinner, D-Berkeley, would ban the suspension of students in grades K-8 for refusing to obey a teacher or administrator, a practice known as willful defiance.

    “I’ve dealt with a lot of these cases,” said Berry Accius, founder of Voice of the Youth, a nonprofit mentoring program in Sacramento. “Unfortunately, I’ve had kids that have been suspended for sometimes three months.”

    Accius said school suspensions are used disproportionately against students of color.

    “African American males and females, they are suspended at a higher rate — especially the African American males,” Accius said.

    No doubt the jobs of California school teachers and administrators just got immensely harder. It will take effect starting July 1, 2020.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Commenting at The American Conservative, Rod Dreher skewers the initiative and predicts the following outcome: “Now state legislators, in their wisdom, have condemned elementary school teachers and the well-behaved students — black, white, Latino, Asian, whatever — to the tyranny of brats.”

    And more: “Progressives are dismantling the ability of a basic social institution — the school — to defend itself, and to maintain order sufficient to fulfill its function.” Further, Dreher notes the inevitability that “when the parents who can afford to get their kids out of the public schools do so, progressives will call them racist.”

    * * * 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 21:20

  • Ron Paul: Should Racists Get Health Care?
    Ron Paul: Should Racists Get Health Care?

    Authored by Ron Paul via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

    Political correctness recently took a dangerous turn in the United Kingdom when the North Bristol National Health Service Trust announced that hospital patients who use offensive, racist, or sexist language will cease receiving medical care as soon as it is safe to end their treatment.

    The condition that treatment will not be withdrawn until doing so is safe seems to imply that no one will actually suffer from this policy. However, health-care providers have great discretion to determine when it is “safe” to withhold treatment. So, patients could be left with chronic pain or be denied certain procedures that could improve their health but are not necessary to make them “safe.” Patients accused of racism or sexism could also find themselves at the bottom of the NHS’s infamous “waiting lists,” unable to receive treatment until it truly is a matter of life and death.

    Since many people define racism and sexism as “anything I disagree with,” the new policy will no doubt lead to people being denied medical care for statements that most reasonable people would consider unobjectionable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is not the first time NHS has withheld treatment because of an individual’s behavior. A couple years ago, another local health committee announced it would withhold routine or nonemergency surgeries from smokers and the obese. Since reducing smoking and obesity benefits both individual patients and the health care system as a whole, this policy may appear defensible. But denying or delaying care violates medical ethics and sets a dangerous precedent. If treatment could be denied to smokers and the obese, then it could also be denied to those who engage in promiscuous sex, drive over the speed limit, don’t get the “proper” number of vaccinations for themselves and their children, or have “dangerous” political views.

    Government bureaucrats denying care to individuals for arbitrary reasons is the inevitable result of government interference in the health-care market. Government intervention is supposed to ensure quality and affordable (or free) care for all. But, government intervention artificially lowers the costs of health care to patients while increasing costs to providers. As demand rises and supply falls, government imposes rationing to address the shortages and other problems caused by prior government interference.

    Rationing has been part of American health care at least since the passage of the Health Maintenance Organization Act of 1973. Every plan to expand government’s role in health care contains some form of rationing.

    Advocates for government intervention in health care will counter complaints about rationing by saying the related health-care decisions are being made to benefit people’s quality of life. But, claiming government officials know how medical treatment can best enhance quality of life is as absurd as claiming that government officials know the correct prices of automobiles.

    The only way to reverse the slide into national health care and rationing is for those who understand the economic and moral case for liberty to keep pushing to replace Obamacare and all other government intrusions into health care. Government-controlled health care must be replaced by free-market health care that empowers individuals to determine for themselves what does and does not enhance their quality of life.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 20:45

  • After Woman Killed By Falling Debris On Seventh Ave., New York Revamps Facade Inspections
    After Woman Killed By Falling Debris On Seventh Ave., New York Revamps Facade Inspections

    220 buildings in New York must now take protective measures after a woman was killed by a piece of a facade that fell off a 17 story building near Times Square earlier this month. 

    According to the Wall Street Journal, building owners must install sidewalk sheds and the city is doubling the number of its facade inspectors to 22. It’s also increasing the frequency of facade inspections for buildings taller than six stories. 

    After 60 year old architect and philanthropist Erica Tishman was killed on December 17, building department workers went on an inspection spree, checking 1,331 buildings that had outstanding violations. About one in six of those buildings lacked proper safeguards and owners were issued summonses on Monday. 

    Tishman was hit by debris walking past 729 Seventh Ave. The building’s owner had already been issued a violation in April for failing to maintain the facade. In September, the owner challenged the violation in a city administrative court where a judge downgraded the violation to state that it didn’t pose an “immediate danger”.

    Which it obviously did…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After the hearing, the building’s owner was issued a permit to put up a sidewalk shed and repair the facade, but no work took place prior to the incident. The building is owned by a limited liability company controlled by commercial real-estate firm Himmel + Meringoff Properties.

    The company said the work had been delayed because a neighboring building owner wouldn’t give it access to perform the work. A spokeswoman for Himmel + Meringoff said: “The safety of our buildings, and our tenants, remains our highest priority, and we will continue to do everything to ensure the safety of the public in and around our properties.”

    On Monday, city officials said that under new rules the city will reinspect a building within 60 days of it being found to have an unsafe facade, in order to ensure that safety measures are taken. Officials also said that if owners fail to install protection for pedestrians, city contractors will do it at the owner’s expense. Facade inspectors will now also conduct follow up inspections every 90 days until repairs are completed. 

    Manhattan Borough President Gale Brewer said: “The tragic death of Erica Tishman was preventable, and while these new facade enforcement efforts cannot bring her back to life, they can help avoid another tragedy.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 20:10

  • The Biggest Crypto Winners And Losers Of 2019
    The Biggest Crypto Winners And Losers Of 2019

    Authored by Jinia Shawdagor via CoinTelegraph.com,

    Even though the cryptocurrency industry is not new to ups and downs, 2019 has turned out to be the year with the most surprising reveals. The long-lasting bear market of 2018 moved market analysts to call it the year of regulatory reckoning, leaving many jurisdictions uncertain about how to treat cryptocurrencies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

    However, 2019 also turned out to be the year of the comeback, as big tech giants like Facebook moved from banning crypto to embracing it. 

    Escalating global events such as the trade war between the United States and China have shifted investors’ point of view on the utility of cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin, but there is still a lot to be done even as the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission continues to turn down every other Bitcoin ETF proposal. 

    As the year comes to a close, here is a look at the companies, individuals and various crypto projects that managed to come out on top in 2019, as well as those that failed to mark the year as a positive in their books.

    The winners

    Bitcoin’s double growth

    This year, Bitcoin and the entire blockchain and cryptocurrency industry celebrated its tenth anniversary as proof of the resilience of Satoshi Nakamoto’s creation. However, at the beginning of 2019, the cryptocurrency industry was just recovering from the so-called crypto winter of 2018. 

    Fortunately, Bitcoin kicked off the year with a bullish trend that resulted in an approximate price increase of 11% higher by the end of the first quarter. Anthony Pompliano, the co-founder of Morgan Creek Digital asset management firm, shared his view with Cointelegraph:

    “Bitcoin’s price is up significantly in 2019 [as there are] more buyers than sellers on a net basis this year.”

    As the trading volume and market capitalization increased throughout the second quarter of the year, Bitcoin led the market with a 165% gain as its price surged from $4,103 to $10,888. Furthermore, Bitcoin’s market dominance increased from 54.6% to 65%.

    Among the reasons that have promoted Bitcoin’s continued growth despite a struggling market is the view that the digital currency can act as a hedge in the wake of increasing global uncertainty. This year, the U.S.–China trade war saw most investors look to Bitcoin and gold as hedges. Pompliano also told Cointelegraph that there were other contributing factors:

    “The biggest moments probably revolve around the announcement of Libra and the subsequent reactions, both positive and negative, from various folks across the traditional and cryptocurrency markets.”

    However, it was not all sunshine for Bitcoin in 2019. Over the third quarter of the year, a bearish outlook emerged as Bitcoin’s price decreased significantly as 100 billion in market capitalization was lost. Fortunately, even as the market struggled to gain ground against the bears, Bitcoin not only closed the quarter with the least amount of loss but also increased its market dominance by 5.4%. Ultimately, of all cryptocurrencies, Bitcoin’s performance has been the best so far.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Compared to assets from other markets, Bitcoin’s performance throughout the year is still far from tenuous. For instance, even though gold is regarded as a reliable store of value, its price has only increased by 17% since January. Even the S&P 500 Index, although with an excellent performance of +21%, is still dwarfed by Bitcoin’s growth throughout the year. Beyond price, Bobby Lee, CEO of the Ballet crypto wallet, told Cointelegraph that Bitcoin has benefited from several major technological developments:

    “2019 was a great year for Bitcoin bulls because of the advances in the open-source ecosystem. Lightning Network is increasing Bitcoin’s transaction capacity, wallets with built-in, user-friendly features (Wasabi, Samourai) are improving privacy.”

    Gods Unchained’s rise to popularity

    According to reports, Gods Unchained, a blockchain-based virtual card game built on Ethereum, emerged as one of the highest-grossing and most popular blockchain games in 2019. This came about after the platform completely sold out its Genesis Card Pack to the tune of about $6.2 million. This came about after Blizzard, the creators of Hearthstone (a digital trading card game) banned Hearthstone player Chung Ng Wai (also known as Blitzchung) for expressing support for the Hong Kong protests. The Hearthstone game developer also stripped Blitzchung of his winnings. 

    In addition to the backlash received from the gaming community, Blizzard’s actions were criticized in a tweet by Gods Unchained that claimed Blizzard “care[s] about money more than freedom.” Gods Unchained also promised to compensate Blitzchung for his lost winnings while offering him an invitation to their $500,000 tournament.

    The tweet by Gods Unchained was retweeted over 10,000 times, and Google searches for the game have since surged. Unlike Hearthstone, Gods Unchained is decentralized and uses blockchain to ensure that players truly own in-game items and have the freedom to trade them at will.

    In a move to give online game players long-term incentives, James Ferguson, CEO of Gods Unchained said that the game is “leveling up the outdated practices of the gaming industry.”

    Coinbase’s continued expansion 

    In the past, Coinbase maintained a reputation for employing a rather selective strategy for adding coins to its exchange. As one of the big league exchanges in the crypto space, Coinbase is also known for having significantly fewer large-scale hacks. In a year that saw other major exchanges like Binance fall victim to large scale security breaches, leading to the loss of thousands of Bitcoin, Coinbase stands out as a reliable and safe platform.

    However, the company was heavily scrutinized by Twitter users this year over its acquisition of Neutrino, a startup that collects cryptocurrency transactional data using the blockchain. For most Twitter users, this move seems to facilitate the exchange’s spying on its customers. 

    However, Coinbase’s move to acquire Neutrino is, according to a Coinbase blog post, part of its goal to support all assets while complying with applicable laws. In addition to acquiring Neutrino, Coinbase has doubled the number of listed cryptocurrencies on its exchange since 2018. Coinbase’s aggressive listing approach has seen the addition of coins such as Dash, Cosmos and Waves, to mention just a few.

    The company has almost constantly been making news throughout the year, from making acquisitions to denying them, as well as securing multiple patents along the way. Meanwhile, Coinbases’s Visa debit card solution has also seen exponential growth this year, now available for use in even more countries. 

    In May 2019, the company also expanded its reach to more than 100 countries while making its USDC stable coin — previously only available in the U.S. — available in 85 of those supported countries. In comparison, Coinbase was only available in about 32 countries last year. Its aggressive expansion appears to be in direct competition to other global players like Binance.

    Binance ventures further

    Ask any market analyst and they will admit that initial exchange offerings have grown into a big business in 2019. Reports have revealed a high demand for IEOs right from Q1 2019 to Q3, not to mention the fact that they collectively raised over $1.5 billion in the first half of 2019 alone. Unlike initial coin offerings, the biggest determining factor for a successful IEO is the availability of liquidity, and what better way to access liquidity than launching an IEO on a popular exchange. 

    That is why Binance and its native cryptocurrency BNB have had one of the best years yet. As one of the biggest marketplaces for digital assets, Binance enjoys a significant share of the trading volume. The exchange’s performance has been so exceptional that the Binance Coin has gained value by 150% over the year. When taking everything into account and considering year-on-year growth, Binance Coin has even slightly outperformed Bitcoin.

    Also, Binance expanded its reach with the launch of a fully independent U.S. arm of its trading platform. Despite heavy regulatory pressure that keeps the Binance exchange in the U.S. from operating in states such as New York, the company’s partnership with BAM, a registered money service in the U.S., has so far given the exchange some leeway.

    The losers

    Facebook’s uncertain Libra launch in 2020 

    Facebook’s announcement of its Libra cryptocurrency has been one of the major events of 2019. However, on the unveiling of Libra as a stablecoin backed by a select number of national currencies, U.S. lawmakers reacted with skepticism, summoning Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg to multiple hearings.

    At its core, Libra is a stablecoin backed by real money and lets users buy, sell and send money at nearly zero fees across borders. According to the project’s white paper, Libra’s overall mission is “to enable a simple global currency and financial infrastructure that empowers millions of people.”

    Libra’s white paper further claims that it will use “a new decentralized blockchain, a low volatility cryptocurrency, and a smart contract platform” to empower about 1.7 billion unbanked people. This will be achieved through the use of Facebook’s WhatsApp, Messenger and Calibra, which is a digital wallet designed for Libra users.

    Despite Libra’s ambitious plan to empower the unbanked, the Libra project has not only come under heavy scrutiny from lawmakers but also faced internal problems of its own. While sharing his thoughts with Cointelegraph, Ballet wallet’s Lee expressed optimism about Libra, saying that although “legislators and regulators in the United States and Europe understand that non-government currencies are a threat to their power, government opposition will diminish over time.” Lee further explained:

    “Governments will change their stance because they will come to understand that they can’t control or stop Bitcoin, and they will prefer to have their citizens use centralized corporate coins that can easily be regulated, monitored, and pegged to fiat currency.”

    Despite Libra’s ambitious plan to empower the unbaked, the Libra project has not only come under heavy scrutiny from lawmakers but also faced internal problems of its own. 

    The U.S. Congress has asked Facebook to pause further development of the Libra projects, and cynics now believe that the project will not get out of the starting blocks without the government’s approval. Multiple European countries have also spoken out against the proposed cryptocurrency, while China announced that it will soon launch its own stablecoin, a national central bank digital currency, likely as a retaliatory measure. Furthermore, in the wake of increased scrutiny from government regulators, some of Libra’s high profile backers like Visa, eBay, MasterCard and PayPal have abandoned the project.

    A rocky year for Circle

    In October 2018, Circle, a cryptocurrency firm based in Boston and backed by Goldman Sachs teamed up with Coinbase to launch the Centre consortium. Counting on its reputation as one of the most well-funded crypto startups, the two companies aimed to help accelerate adoption of cryptocurrencies. Through the Centre consortium, Coinbase and Circle would increase liquidity to the crypto industry through the issue of a stable coin called the USD Coin. 

    In July this year, Coinbase and Circle broadened participation into their consortium in a move that will allow other financial entities interested in the project to issue the USD Coin. In the announcement, the Centre network mentioned that “a natural next step is to imagine a new global digital currency” that would include a basket of tokens backed by a variety of stablecoins. Simply put, Centre’s plan is to go with a Facebook-like approach to create a global currency.

    However, Circle has had a rocky experience throughout 2019. Even though the USD Coin has received a positive reception, with Centre claiming that the stablecoin has been used to clear on-chain transfers worth over $11 billion, Circle closed its mobile app, reduced its fundraising goal by 40%, and laid off 10% of its staff between May and June this year. Just recently, the company let go of 10 more of its employees, citing efforts to streamline its services. 

    The latest news of layoffs from Circle comes after the recent transition of the company’s co-founder Sean Neville from his position as CEO to a seat at the company’s board of directors. However, a representative of Circle has denied any connections between the recent layoffs and Sean’s transition, telling Cointelegraph that: 

    “None of this is related to Sean transitioning out of the co-CEO role. Sean will continue to serve on Circle’s board.”

    Craig Wright’s court battles

    When Australian-born technologist Craig Wright claimed to be Satoshi Nakamoto back in 2015, most people in the crypto community were skeptical and thought nothing of it. 

    Most people expected that the Satoshi Nakamoto impersonator would have scurried back into obscurity by now. However, Wright and his claims have continued to headline the news throughout 2019. Wright claims that he invented Bitcoin a decade ago and mined over 1 million BTC along with his late business partner Dave Kleiman. After Kleiman’s death in 2013, Wright claims that he put the mined Bitcoin in the “Tulip Trust.”

    However, the Australian entrepreneur and computer scientist was sued by Kleiman’s estate in 2018 for allegedly stealing up to 1 million Bitcoin. In the past, it is said that Wright and Kleiman worked together on mining and developing Bitcoin. According to Kleiman’s family, Wright stole between 550,000 to 1 million Bitcoin — worth about $10 billion. 

    The ongoing case led to Magistrate Judge Bruce’s ruling that ordered Wright to turn over half of his Bitcoin holdings and intellectual property from before 2014 to Kleiman’s estate, presuming he is indeed Nakamoto. On Oct. 31, the trials re-emerged after Wright pulled out of the settlement agreement to forfeit half his Bitcoin and intellectual property.

    In addition to his court battles, Wright was scrutinized by the crypto community after presenting what was considered forged documents as evidence of him being Nakamoto in another case of Wright against Peter McCormack. Wright’s case against McCormack is based on the fact that McCormack’s repeated statement that Wright is not Satoshi is harmful to Wright’s reputation. Most recently, Wright presented another document that allegedly proves how he came up with the Satoshi Nakamoto pseudonym.

    Bitcoin ETF’s continual rejection by the SEC 

    Even though U.S. regulators have always left a window for the possibility of approving Bitcoin exchange-traded funds in the future, up until now, every single attempt to license a Bitcoin ETF has been met with failure. In October this year, an ETF proposal filed by Bitwise Asset Management in conjunction with NYSE Arca was rejected by the Securities and Exchange Commission for failing to meet legal requirements that prevent illicit market manipulation. 

    In fact, all Bitcoin ETF proposals presented to the SEC have been rejected on concerns about fraudulent activities and market manipulation. One of the main criteria for approving an ETF is establishing the underlying market of a new commodity-based ETF.

    If the underlying market is resistant to manipulation, regulators can give the ETF the go-ahead. Given the complexities of the Bitcoin market, it seems approval from the SEC is unlikely. Despite the earlier rejection of Bitwise’s application, the SEC later announced that it would review Bitwise’s proposal once again.

    While speaking to Cointelegraph on the realistic timeline of the first Bitcoin ETF approval, Charles Lu, the CEO of the Findora fintech toolkit provider said, “For a Bitcoin ETF proposal to gain SEC approval, the sponsor will need to prove that real price discovery is happening as opposed to market manipulations.” In Lu’s opinion, this will not happen anywhere soon, since the SEC would require “surveillance sharing agreements” with the big exchanges.

    2019 and 2020

    Overall, the crypto industry has shown some significant growth over the past year. Although volatile, Bitcoin is showing significant signs of growth. More institutional investors are looking into the industry to find more ways to invest as well. Even though there is a downtrend in market cap and trading volumes, prominent traders believe that a turn of fate might just be around the corner, especially for Bitcoin holders.

    Out of all the winners and losers of 2019, perhaps Facebook Libra is one that stands to be most impactful in 2020. For most onlookers, it will be interesting to see whether Facebook’s Libra project will turn a new leaf and launch successfully in 2020. If it does, there is a high likelihood that big changes will take place throughout the entire industry.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 19:35

  • Judge In Hunter Biden Paternity Case Mysteriously Recuses Hours After New Allegations Filed
    Judge In Hunter Biden Paternity Case Mysteriously Recuses Hours After New Allegations Filed

    The judge in Hunter Biden’s paternity case suddenly recused himself from the case on Tuesday, following a string of third-party court filings accusing Biden of financial crimes. 

    “…the undersigned Judge recuses from said case pursuant to the Administrative Plan of the Sixteenth Judicial Circuit,” reads a brief note by Independence County Judge Don McSpadden, who offered no explanation for the move.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The recusal came two hours after ‘defrauded investor’ Joel Caplan filed to become a party in the case, which included a witness statement from ex-Ukrainian prosecutor Viktor Shokin, who says he was fired for investigating a Ukrainian gas company which Biden worked for. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Joel Caplan

    That said, Caplan’s claims are so bizarre that if one had enough tin foil, they might conclude that the recent string of filings in the case are being done to muddy the waters with absurdity. 

    The latest claim is that Biden was involved in a ‘multi-billion dollar stock scheme known as the China Hustle.‘ 

    Shokin’s witness statement was submitted to the court as part of Joel Caplan’s motion this week to try and become a party in Roberts’ paternity case with Biden.

    He claimed in Monday’s filing that he wanted in on the case so he could get his hands on Biden’s bank account records in order to prove he allegedly received $1.5 billion from Chinese companies that ‘hustled Americans out of their life savings’.

    Caplan told Judge Don McSpadden to ‘follow the money’ and in a 30-page filing, lays out how he was allegedly swindled out of 10 years of his life savings in a ‘multi-billion dollar stock scheme known as the China Hustle.’

    Caplan, who filed papers from Jerusalem, Israel, claims many Chinese nationals made fortunes from the ploy, which involved presenting fake company documents and claiming they were genuine investments when they were actual frauds. –Daily Mail

    Caplan referenced President Trump’s October claim that Biden received a $1.5 billion payout from a Chinese private equity fund – a claim Biden has denied. Caplan has sought bank records in an attempt to regain his lost savings, and for ‘justice.’

    Last week private investigator Dominic Casey also attempted to enter the case, claiming Biden was involved in a $150 million ‘counterfeiting scheme’. Hours after it was filed, Judge Casey tossed the motion on a technicality for being improperly filed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Friday, Dominic Casey (pictured) filed papers to Independence County on Friday, claiming he had provided Lunden Roberts with ‘electronic access’ to Biden’s bank account records, which are ‘subject of known felonies including fraud and counterfeiting’

    Casey heads up D&A Investigations, which is based near Orlando, Florida, and he is known for pursuing right-wing conspiracy theories. During the Casey Anthony trial he claimed a psychic told him where to find Caylee’s body.  

    Casey claimed Biden was involved in a ‘counterfeiting scheme’ in Ukraine that accumulated a $150 million fortune. Judge Don McSpadden tossed out Casey’s original motion six hours after it was filed.

     In Casey’s Friday motion, he gives his consent for Roberts’ legal team to use Biden’s bank account records in their court case, claiming that he has them.

     Biden’s lawyer Brett Langdon called Casey’s filing “a scheme by a non-party simply to make scandalous allegations in the pending suit to gain some quick media attention.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 19:00

    Tags

  • 1000s Stranded On Beach Encircled By Flames As Bushfires Blaze Through Australia
    1000s Stranded On Beach Encircled By Flames As Bushfires Blaze Through Australia

    Thousands of tourists and locals were left stranded on a beach in southeast Australia on Tuesday as bushfires ravaged a popular tourist area, leaving no escape by land.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Epoch Times’ Katabella Roberts reports, up to 4,000 people are trapped on the foreshore of the encircled seaside town of Mallacoota, in the East Gippsland region of Victoria, where authorities said nearby fires were manifesting extreme self-generating thunderstorms and “ember attacks.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Monday, Victoria’s Emergency Management Commissioner, Andrew Crisp, told residents and holidaymakers to leave the area by 9 a.m. or risk being stranded. However, in a later update he said it was now “too late” to get out of the area safely.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Firefighters were deployed to protect those stranded on the beach, and preparations are underway for a sea or airborne evacuation if needed.

    “We’ve got three strike teams in Mallacoota that will be looking after 4,000 people down on the beach there. We’re naturally very concerned about communities that have become isolated,” he added.

    Hundreds of people have taken to social media to share apocalyptic images of the area, which is currently blanketed in a thick cloud of red haze.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It comes after authorities warned up to 30,000 tourists currently visiting the area to leave as strong winds pushed an emergency-level bushfire towards the town.

    The fire moving towards Mallacoota began at Wingan River on Sunday and spread rapidly towards the coast, RNZ reported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, in a press conference on Tuesday, Premier Daniel Andrews said that four people are currently missing in Victoria.

    “There are a number of people who remain unaccounted for—four people, and of course we have fears for their safety,” Andrews said.

    “We cannot confirm their whereabouts, but as soon as we can bring any further information to you, then, of course, we will do that.”

    Andrews also asked Prime Minister Scott Morrison for military assistance amid the raging fires, suggesting naval vessels help get supplies to isolated communities or heavy-lift aircraft to work alongside the state’s air fleet.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    1030am at Mallacoota

    However, no decisions regarding military assistance have been finalized as of yet.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Monday, around 100,000 people were urged to flee five Melbourne suburbs. The swirling bushfires killed a volunteer firefighter who was battling a separate blaze in the countryside.

    Another volunteer firefighter from the New South Wales Rural Fire Service also died on Monday when the truck he was traveling in was overturned by strong winds and crashed at Jingellic, about 110 kilometers (68 miles) east of Albury.

    Authorities named him as 28-year-old Samuel McPaul, who was reportedly expecting his first child in May with his wife, Megan, whom he married last year.

    Two of his male colleagues, aged 39 and 52, also suffered burns in the incident but are said to be in a stable condition.

    Another eight people have been killed so far this fire season, while more than 1,000 homes have been destroyed, according to local reports.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 18:30

  • "OH MY GOD" – Tesla Driver On Autopilot Films Own Crash
    "OH MY GOD" – Tesla Driver On Autopilot Films Own Crash

    Tesla Autopilot seems to give some drivers a sense of invincibility while traveling the roads as they place their lives in the hands of artificial intelligence.  

    This was the case with YouTuber Dougal Vlogs, who uploaded a video on Dec. 30, showing a Model 3 presumably engaged in “Autopilot” (as per the video’s headline) traveling at a high rate of speed (over 70 mph) during a rainstorm. 

    The video is short, about 15 seconds, the vlogger is seen speeding down a two-lane highway traveling at 70-75mph while using Autopilot. 

    The vlogger is holding a camera about to talk about the Model 3, and an alarm sound starts blaring. Next thing you know, the Model 3 hydroplanes and crashes into the shoulder of the road, all caught on camera! 

    The vlogger was heard several times during the incident yelling “OH MOY GOD” — and at the end of the video tells his audience he just crashed.

    With-in 24 hours, the video has been viewed 70k times and with over 250 comments. The vlogger was mostly ridiculed in the comment section of the video.

    One YouTube said, “Let’s try out AutoPilot. Oh, yeah did I mention during a typhoon?” 

    Another said, “You should be cited for driving too fast for the weather conditions, reckless driving for not having your hands on the wheel, and distracted driving for being stupid enough to film in a rainstorm. Sadly you’re going to get a bunch of clicks and lots of attention for this piece of amazing stupidity. I am glad you are OK, but I am more glad that you didn’t kill some innocent person who might’ve been stuck on the side of the road or unfortunate enough to be driving next to you while you were pulling this kind of stupid nonsense.” 

    Someone said, “His license should be taken away. He’s a danger to all drivers and pedestrians on the road.” 

    Another said, “Elon Musk: “Mate! We can fix this with a firmware update.” LOL” 

    It remains to be seen if it was the driver’s fault or if Autopilot malfunctioned. 

     


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 18:00

  • Updating The 2020 Edition Of The OED (For Reality)
    Updating The 2020 Edition Of The OED (For Reality)

    Authored by Vladimir Golstein via Off-Guardian.org,

    In the tradition of the Oxford English Dictionary, I recommend the following terms and their definitions to be included in a 2020 version of the same.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    DNC – Democrats Nominate Clintons. A secret and nefarious body within Democratic Party that Makes Sure that only Clintons and their Clones get Nominations. The prominence of DNC is linked the futile attempts to slow down the demise of Neoliberalism.

    White Helmets – a new form of birth control. It prevents members of the mainstream press from getting impregnated by truth. Any reporter travelling to the Middle East, Russia, Europe, or China is required to wear one all the time.

    International News – A collection of urban legends and old wife-tales. Any news reported from Russia or China should be presumed a lie, unless proven otherwise. Under no circumstances should a proof come from the Atlantic Council, Wikipedia, Snopes, or any other propaganda outfit that calls itself “fact checker.”

    Impeachment – a transgender incubus that visits nightly US Democrats in their sleep. The touch of Impeachment is so enticing, that those affected can’t think of anything else even during their waking hours.

    Whoever gets visited by this incubus more than two times – be it an academic, politician, diplomat, military personnel, or security specialist – turns into a script-reading zombie, as has been recently witnessed during Impeachment Hearings.

    Greta – A naïve character from Brothers Grimm’s Fairy Tale. In this tale, Greta leads her brother along with thousands of trusting adults deep into dark woods, where the evil Witch, called Climate Change, inflicts endless suffering upon her victims. These sufferings include floods, droughts, locusts, boils, plagues, death of livestock, and listening to the NPR all the time. The specter of Greta continues to haunt Europe to this very day.

    Ukraine – an illegitimate child of the secret love affair between the Clintons, Biden, Obama, Merkel, and assorted Polish and Swedish Blonds. The child – instead of becoming an angelic baby with blond curls – grew up into a modern Frankenstein who eats its own parts and infects anyone who touches it with hatred and paranoia.

    The country named in honor of this child has become a place where rich Democrats send their children to learn looting, before they can come back and start looting their own country. It is also a place where they feel the need to celebrate Nazi collaborators by turning them into national heroes. Even Poland does not do that.

    Brexit – an evil uncle of Boris Johnson. When Boris’ ambitions to fill the shoes of great British Prime Ministers, like Disraeli or Churchill, has failed to realize, in comes Brexit, and relying on his network of old Etonians and angry proletarians, he helps Boris to achieve his goals.

    Steele Dossier – the collection of adult cartoons that describes – in the most grotesque and ridiculous details – the sexapades of the presidential candidate, Donald Trump. The collection is so grotesque and unrealistic that only the most sordid porn-watchers and the most valiant agents of alphabet agencies find it plausible.

    Quid Pro Quo – one of the most sordid stories in Steele dossier, that depicts Donald Trump sleeping with fifty-five concubines of the Ukrainian Ruler in one night; the reported feat outdoes therefore the record set by Heracles, known to have slept with fifty daughters of a Greek King in one night.

    Russians – a mysterious group of people – who, similar to the demons of ancient times, the witches of the Middle Ages, and the Jews of the Modern Period — was created by the western mind for the purposes of scapegoating. Russians combine all possible contradictions: they can be simultaneously weak and strong; socialist, yet greedy and rapacious; conniving, yet very sloppy; they can pull a very sophisticated stunt, yet leave all the traces and clues that lead back to them. They can’t do anything without cheating; yet, they are always caught in their lies. General public in the west is convinced that the only way to defeat Russians is to vote for the candidate who can say “Russians” faster than his rivals.

    Whataboutism – An incantation that one pronounces to dismiss legitimate concerns of one’s opponent. It is the modern day version of “catch the thief,” when a thief, to avoid being caught, starts chasing an innocent person while screaming “catch the thief.” Used primarily by the propagandists of NATO countries to deflect scrutiny of their own violent and illegal behavior.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 17:30

    Tags

  • North Korea's Kim Slams Trump's "Gangster-Like Demands", Warns Of "New Strategic Weapon"
    North Korea's Kim Slams Trump's "Gangster-Like Demands", Warns Of "New Strategic Weapon"

    It appears North Korea’s leader Kim Jong-Un decided a New Year’s Eve ‘gift’ was better than Christmas.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Yonhap news, reporting on a KCNA report, North Korea will continue building up its nuclear deterrent to counter US aggression, but the degree to which it expands its weapons program will depend on the US’ attitude.

    Calling out US insincerity regarding discussions about the partial lifting of sanctions, Kim blasted Washington’s “gangster-like demands” as the reason no agreement had yet been reached between the two countries.

    The more the US stalls for time, Kim said, the more it will find itself “helpless in the face of North Korean power.”

    Finally, Kim warned that North Korea has a “new strategic weapon” up its sleeve, and time was running out before his government would be moved to take “shocking actual action.”

    …and a happy new year to you too!

    Notably, as BNO points out, all of the current news alerts are based on a KCNA report regarding yesterday’s plenary meetings. Kim has not delivered his speech yet.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 17:02

    Tags

  • Mike Bloomberg's Secretive Election Tech Firm Lied About DNC Relationship To Lure New Recruits
    Mike Bloomberg's Secretive Election Tech Firm Lied About DNC Relationship To Lure New Recruits

    A secretive digital marketing firm founded by Mike Bloomberg to help him win he 2020 election lured new recruits by falsely claiming that it would be the “primary platform” for the Democratic National Committee, according to CNBC.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The company, Hawkfish, was created “with the intention of overpowering the formidable data operation assembled by the Republican National Committee and Trump’s cash-flush campaign,” according to a previous CNBC report.

    Yet to attract top talent – a roster which now includes former Facebook Chief Marketing Officer Gary Briggs and former CEO of location-tracking firm Foursquare – Hawkfish told prospective new hires that they are “currently working with the Bloomberg campaign and will be the primary platform used by the DNC throughout 2020.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bloomberg has placed the blame on the headhunter they used to find talent, Andiamo Partners, who they say mistakenly believed the company had a contract with the DNC.

    Several potential hires received notices through LinkedIn in which they were informed that Hawkfish was working for both the Bloomberg campaign and the DNC. It wasn’t immediately clear how many recruiting targets received the erroneous pitch.

    “The recruiting company mistook support for Democratic causes as Hawkfish working under contract with the DNC, which isn’t the case,” said Frazier, the Bloomberg aide. –CNBC

    According to the report, on Nov. 27, just three days after Bloomberg officially launched his campaign, the DNC fired off a notice to Hawkfish that their pitches were misleading, according to DNC spokesman Daniel Wessel.

    “We had previously alerted Hawkfish that the recruiting emails were incorrect and misleading,” Wessel told CNBC.

    Hawkfish, meanwhile, conceded to the DNC that the script wasn’t accurate – correcting it on December 2nd, according to Bloomberg campaign spokesman Michael Frazier.

    The company says it’s done work for Democratic groups in state races in Virginia and Kentucky, but would not elaborate on who their clients were. Notably, Democrats won control of the Virginia statehouse for the first time in over two decades, while GOP candidate Matt Bevin was narrowly defeated by Democratic candidate Andy Beshear – which CNBC implies Hawkfish may have had something to do with.

    Meanwhile, despite spending over $100 million on TV ads across the country and $20 million on digital Facebook and Google ads, Mike Bloomberg is polling in fifth place in the Democratic primary, behind Biden, Sanders, Warren and Buttigieg, according to Real Clear Politics.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 17:00

  • Here Are The "Costanza Trades" Of 2020
    Here Are The "Costanza Trades" Of 2020

    After an “everything is awesome, nothing will go down” 2019, Mark Orsley – Head of Macro Strategy for Prism, is out with a review of his 2020 “Costanza Trades,” while offering his comprehensive thoughts for next year.

    *  *  *

    Long time readers will know that The Macro Scan takes a twist at year end to present next year’s “Costanza Trades” or the “Not Top 10 Trades of 2020.” A kind push back against all the bank “year ahead” pieces that tend to be consensus.

    For those of you not familiar with George Costanza, his character on the sitcom Seinfeld could do no right when it came to employment, dating, or life in general. In one episode, George realizes over lunch at the diner with Jerry that if every instinct he has is wrong; then doing the opposite must be right. George resolves to start doing the complete opposite of what he would do normally. He orders the opposite of his normal lunch, and he introduces himself to a beautiful woman that he normally would never have the nerve to talk to: “my name is George,” he says, “I’m unemployed, and I live with my parents.” To his surprise, she is impressed with his honesty and agrees to date him! Doing the opposite was the right thing. Watershed!

    Employing the Costanza method to trading is an interesting exercise. Ask yourself what are the trades that make complete rational sense and all your instincts say are right…now consider the opposite. Basically what you end up constructing is an out of consensus portfolio. If you can back those out of consensus views with fundamental and technical justification; there is potentially a high amount alpha in these trades.

    It was another successful year for Costanza (though not his best) who fought the idea the world was coming to an end after the December 2018 risk asset massacre. The winners far outpaced the losers.

    2019 Costanza Trades:

    1) Long FANGs -> + 41%

    2) Receive credit protection in IG and HY -> IG 45bps tighter, HY +7.75pts

    3) Long Eurodollar spreads (EDZ9/EDZ0) -> -16bps

    4) Long Bunds -> German yields 45bps lower

    5) Short Gold -> -18%

    6) Long WTI crude -> +37%

    7) Long AUD/USD -> -0.77%

    8) Short EM -> +16% (although in fairness it wildly underperformed the US)

    9) Long Bitcoin -> +103%

    Costanza Track Record (% of views that were correct):

    • 2015 70% correct

    • 2016 70% correct

    • 2017 83% correct

    • 2018 71% correct

    • 2019 55% correct

    This year is the polar opposite of 2018 which saw massive risk off. Now in December 2019; trade progress between China and the US has developed, risks of a hard Brexit have been reduced, central banks have cut rates and injected liquidity, and fiscal stimulus is being instituted around the world. It’s now full risk on and everything is merry and bright.

    That setup makes this year’s Costanza portfolio easy to construct. Costanza is going all in on the idea that reflation is a farce, growth concerns can reemerge, central banks will NOT be on hold in 2020, ranges will be broken, and volatility is too low.

    2020 Costanza Trades (in no particular order):

    1) Short Rest of World equities vs. long US equities

    2) Short US 2s10s steepener (aka: the flattener)

    3) Long “green” Euribors

    4) Short US 10yr breakevens

    5) Long vol: a. “White” Eurodollars b. VIX c. EUR/USD FX

    6) Short Gold

    7) Short Copper

    8) Short Oil

    9) Long $Mex

    10) Long Bitcoin Bonus: Long initial jobless claims/short the US consumer

    As you can see, Costanza thinks the world is NOT reflating as much as the big banks are leading us to believe (recall most of the big banks were calling for 3 HIKES in 2019), and that growth risks still exist in a year with major political uncertainty. Let’s go through each trade and assess the likelihood of Costanza once again beating the street.

    1) Short Rest of World equities vs. long US equities

    Global growth has bounced on the back of the Fed’s liquidity injection, Phase 1 progress, fiscal stimulus around the world, “yada yada.” That bounce has led to the consensus view across the street to move out of the US equity market (a safer play when global growth is slowing) and into the rest of the world (RoW –higher beta to growth) which has lagged US indices and thus have more upside if growth is picking up again.

    When looking at the ratio of US vs. EM, the street is really telling you to fade a multi-year up trend. However, the ratio has gotten quite extended to its trend line so a reversion similar to 2016/2017 is not out of the question…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Impressively, the RoW is already economically outperforming the US as seen in economic surprise indices.

    US (black), EZ (purple), China (blue)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instinct: Fed liquidity injection stimulates global growth as it improves global trade which benefits RoW, countries outside the US are stimulating their economies via fiscal while the US loses its fiscal impulse in 2020, the tariff risk has peaked – therefore the RoW will bounce more than the US from here

    Costanza: tariffs have been cut not eliminated, Phase 2 trade talks will be much more difficult, Trump will institute tariffs on the Eurozone, the Fed will end its liquidity injections in 2020 as funding issues calm down past year end, EM growth (led by China) continues to slow – all will keep the trend intact for the US to outperform EM and RoW

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 35%

    Recall the mid-Oct recommendation to buy ESH0 3300/3400 call spread for 5pts which is now worth 33pts (6.5x return). The point is to not pat ourselves on the back but realize it has moved a lot and very fast. Therefore, the crowd is not crazy to sell US and play the catch up trade via RoW longs. I would throw in the risk of margin compressions on US earnings as wages will likely rise more in 2020 as the Fed attempts to further tighten the labor market.

    Additionally, the big risk will be the US election which could be the catalyst of US underperformance. The election will be another close call and that could lead to major uncertainty as the policy difference between the Dems and GOP is so vastly different.

    Conversely, as long as the Fed keeps pumping Dollars into the global system, that will be positive for RoW growth as Dollars are needed for global trade. Unlike Costanza, we don’t see that spigot getting turned off and in fact we expect that the Fed will eventually move to coupon purchases next year, possibly as early as March. That will be positive for risk assets and accelerate the higher beta plays like EM.

    In terms of geopolitical risks, the amount of progress made on the US/China trade talks has been impressive including two major sticking points (IP theft and enforcement). So the surprise in 2020 could be a Phase 2 deal. Further on geopol, it would be shocking if Trump went after Europe during the election cycle (isn’t he incentivize to keep the economy going?). So trade war fears should further abate in 2020.

    Speaking of progress, the Germans keep inching their way to stimulus with an ever growing acceptance of running a fiscal deficit, something that very few market participants believe will happen. That means EZ equities could be an outperformer next year and prove Costanza wrong.

    Overall, Costanza wants to be in low beta, defensive trades in 2020 which makes sense given how much equities have rallied this year and that the street has now fully bought into reflation. The pushbacks to Costanza would be that the best of times are past for the US (especially politically) and the Fed will have to keep injecting liquidity which benefits the RoW. Therefore, we should all consider that perhaps the US is not the best “hiding place” any more, and all that capital flow into the US the past couple years could reverse in 2020. Meaning if there is big risk off, the US could be the worse place to be.

    2) Short US 2s10s steepener (aka: the flattener)

    The steepener was one of the most popular macro trades this year. The view in the beginning of the year was that the economy was slowing, the Fed would cut, and that back end would sell off on the prospects of future growth due to the Fed easing. That would be a classic end of cycle bull steepener. The prospects for the steepener was further emboldened by the tourist in the equity community who viewed it as a good hedge for equity longs.

    But ironically, the 2s10s curve really started to steepen once growth bottomed, fiscal stimulus around the globe began being floated, and the Fed injected liquidity which led to the bear steepener. The bear steepener is a classic reflation trade and as we know from above; the reflation theme makes George very upset!

    Instinct: The Fed is on hold in 2020 and has indicated it is “not planning to raise rates for a long time” which will keep front end rates contained whereas the long end can sell off on reflation prospects and coming supply due to fiscal spending around the world.

    Costanza: growth will continue to slow (see economic surprise index) which will cause the long end to re-rally and flatten the curve back as the Fed keeps front end rates steady for a least a few meetings. Additionally, per Brainard if growth slows materially, the Fed “might turn to targeting slightly longer-term interest rates” which will certainly flatten the curve. Lastly, George likes carry (+4bps 12m roll down).

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 50%

    hHis could very well be a case where Costanza is wrong at first and right later, thus the 50% assigned probability. The prospects for further bear steepening on the back of reflation looks valid, at least in the near term.

    Besides the above mentioned reasons, keep in mind that the beta to foreign curves could also steepen the US curve as central banks like the BOJ and ECB attempt to steepen their curves to aid their banking sector.

    Conversely, Costanza isn’t crazy either as if growth fears reemerge, you likely get a period of flattening before the bull steepener as the Fed will be on hold for as long as possible which means the long end will rally more. Further, if the economy really destabilizes, you could then get the Brainard play book where the Fed attempts to bring the entire curve to lower yield levels – thus flattening all curves to essentially zero.

    The ironic thing about playing the reflation idea in the steepener is that if the US reflates enough, the Fed could start talking hikes again. The market, who generally does not believe growth is strong enough for hikes, will no doubt bear flatten the curve. This may not be a 2020 story yet but note Evans comments (non-voter in 2020, voter in 2021) from last week where he said he is “quite comfortable with raising rates once in 2021 and again in 2022.” (Insert slapping head emoji – have these guys not learned their lesson yet!)

    The technicals jibe with the idea of the curve should continue to steepen over the next couple months as the reflation narrative plays out.

    US 2s10s curve have formed a picture perfect inverse head and shoulder pattern. The target is 55bps…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    3) Long “green” Euribors (ERH2)

    Long Euribors were one of the best trending trades of the year up until the ECB meeting on Sept 12th when we first caught wind that further rate cuts were going to be less likely.

    ERH2 broke its uptrend on Sept 12th , now trending to the downside, and just broke pivot support…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since then, we have gotten further clarification that not only are ECB cuts are becoming less likely, but there is a growing ambition to perhaps move out of negative rates, Riksbank style. ECB officials are now roundly talking about the adverse impact of negative rates, how they are starting to see improved growth prospects, and will consider a monetary policy path.

    • ECB’s De Guindos: side effects of monetary policy is becoming more evident

    • ECB’s de Cos: No conclusive evidence that sub-zero rates were hurting lending but could not rule any negative impact on banking sector

    • ECB’s Holzmann: noted he hopes to see the end of negative interest rates by the time his 6-year term ends – local press

    • ECB’s Holzmann: stated that he saw possible ECB rate changes if the inflation trough passed during 2020

    • ECB Lagarde: downside risks to growth “slightly less pronounced”

    • ECB’s Guindos: low rates create strains on bank profitability

    • ECB’s Knot: In time need to reassess our monetary policy; cannot rule out worrying prospect of current low interest rates lasting another

    Additionally, as we spoke about in trade #1, the prospects of German fiscal stimulus are inching their way along and that will keep Euribors under pressure.

    Instinct: growth bottoming, the ECB is done cutting and considering moving out of negative rates, prospects for German fiscal stimulus

    Costanza: European growth will remain lackluster due to structural reasons, cutting rates further is one of the ECB’s only levers to pull when growth slows, moving rates out of negative will cause the Euro to appreciate which will collapse growth, generally the world has learned that rising rates eventually hurts economic growth and breaks risk assets (due to debt deluge)

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 60%

    The ECB is in a tough spot. It has become en vogue for ECB members to warn about the effects of negative rates but do any of us believe the generally unimpressive growth in Eurozone will be able to sustain rate hikes and an appreciating currency? It’s a tall order.

    With the Euribor curve now pricing in hikes in the “greens,” Costanza is buying the dip and playing that at the very least; the ECB will be on perma-hold.

    4) Short US 10yr breakevens

    You don’t get reflation without the “flation.” This one is another bet against the conventional wisdom of reflation which by definition sees rising inflation.

    It has been a good run recently for “breaks” which are now ~30bps off the lows but note that it just failed at a key resistance level, and its Elliott Wave count suggests the recent rally was simply an ABC correction. That at least puts some probability that the reflation narrative is a head fake.

    Also note that at 2.1% headline CPI, 10yr breakevens tend to sit in the 1.70%-1.75% range (ie: right here).

    10yr breakevens failed at pivot resistance which completes its ABC correction off the 5-wave count down. That would suggest the rally is complete and note that at 2020 consensus forecast of 2.1% CPI, 10yr breaks are “fair” here…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The one big macro positive for inflation was the Fed effectively capping the Dollar this fall with its three rate cuts, but more importantly with the repo operation/liquidity injection/Not QE. Since then, the Dollar has depreciated and that will act as a tailwind for inflation.

    However, there are a few macro negatives:

    • The fact that tariffs will get cut in half means the feed through to prices will be negative for inflation.

    • China is still exporting deflation as we can see with its -1.4% PPI

    • No inflation impulse emanating from Europe or Japan

    • Trump is making it his mission to cut prescription drugs prices by increasing competition which will be very negative for medical prices (but good for the economy btw)

    • Oil is potentially topping (see trade #8 below)

    Instinct: global growth is picking up, the Fed has eased and provided liquidity, oil has rallied, fiscal stimulus is being instituted around the world – all should feed into higher inflation

    Costanza: reflation is a temporary pop that the inflation market already priced in, China is still deflating, oil will cap out soon, the Fed will end its liquidity injection next year which will cause the Dollar to rise again

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 60%

    The potential for higher inflation certainly is viable in the near term as reflation plays out a bit more. The problem is that higher inflation would lead to higher nominal yields. As we saw in 2018, higher yields ultimately tip the economy back towards the downside as the debt overhang, and the rising cost to service that debt with higher yields, will become problematic thus breaking the economy and markets once again. That would send breakevens back down.

    Let’s also not forget about the aging demographics problem in the US which will structurally compress inflation over the next decade. Therefore, once the green shoots of reflation fades; Costanza will likely be proven right.

    5) Long vol: “white Eurodollar”, VIX, Euro FX

    The environment is goldilocks: growth is picking up, the Fed is on hold, the ECB is on hold. What could go wrong?!?!

    Since the Fed’s last insurance cut + repo op, fixed income vol has been annihilated. From Costanza’s perspective, it has rarely been cheaper in the past year to bet against the market consensus that the Fed will be on hold. This could mean buying calls, puts, strangles or straddles depending on your view. Point is to own optionality that 2020 won’t be a range.

    Using Prism’s constant maturity data, EDU0 at-the-money normal implied vol is back near the 1-year lows…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other words, if you are playing the range theme in fixed income on the idea that the Fed is on hold in 2020, you are essentially selling vol at the lows. Full pass for Costanza.

    Similar story in equity vol. Obviously with S&P’s making higher highs, VIX has returned to its base where you normally don’t see the index drift any lower. So do you want to sell equity vol here?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And FX vol is just crazy low. All-time lows in 3m EUR/USD vol…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instinct: absolutely nothing will happen in 2020 (which is what current vol levels are implying)

    Costanza: the Fed generally does not make accurate calls on its policy direction so why believe they will remain on hold, the Fed shifts less hawkish/more dovish in 2020, there are still growth concerns, still trade talk uncertainty, US election uncertainty –buy volatility at the lows

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 99.99%

    This idea is made for Costanza. Most commentators right now are talking up a Fed on hold + reflation. You have to be concerned how consensus this is and the building of short vol positions in Q4.

    The odds of nothing happening in 2020 and not getting a disturbance in the force is slim to none. Has anyone noticed that US growth has been disappointing recently? Has Phase 1 actually been signed? Is Phase 2 done? Is there a US election this year where policy is so binary its impossible for businesses to make investment decisions? Anyone notice nominal yields are rising to a point compared to growth where risk asset vols tend picks up?

    The point is the market is priced for near perfection so playing ranges and selling vol at these levels has become dicey.

    Costanza will be proven right in his highest conviction trade of the year. He would much rather buy cheapening tails than sell ATM vol. Ideally, play for higher rates now which breaks the economy/risk assets and then for Fed cuts later.

    6) Short Gold

    Against his long vol position, Costanza wants to sell Gold. Gold has become a widely popular macro trade as central banks are expanding their balance sheets once again, the Dollar has been falling, and the Fed is working to keep real rates low. Therefore, the Gold long is completely intuitive and is breaking out.

    Gold is breaking out of its bull flag pattern. The target is 1700…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The major problem is just how widely own it is.

    Gold speculative positioning near all-time high…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instinct: Fed capped the Dollar and is compressing real rates, good insurance policy for an equity market melt down

    Costanza: positioning is very crowded long, Fed will end its liquidity injection in 2020 which will allow the Dollar to rise again, the Fed will indicate rate hikes are once again on the horizon

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 20%

    The gold market at some point will need a positioning cleanse but the bull case is strong and the bear case is weak at best. The consensus will likely be proven right (for once).

    7) Short Copper

    Shorting Dr. Copper is a simple play that reflation will be temporary and that trade talks could deteriorate once again.

    Costanza will be concerned about the supply issues in Chile which has also provided a bid to copper this year. Longer term, copper demand should remain robust as the US moves to more electronic vehicles of which copper is a major component of.

    Copper has broken out of its 1-year downtrend…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instinct: the trade wars are cooling which will be good for global growth and China, supply disruptions, EV demand

    Costanza: the breakout has been mostly uninspiring which could be a signal that reflation is not real, Chilean supply issues could be fixed in 2020, the EV demand theme is very long term and may not be a 2020 story

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 50%

    This is really a pure call on global growth and as stated above in some of the other trades, its likely reflation works for Q1 or so and then fades later in 2H. Therefore, with copper mostly beaten down due to trade wars, its prudent to position long here especially if you think the progress on China-US trade talks are genuine. Compared to some of the other reflation trades, this has a better entry point.

    8) Short Oil

    Costanza is really beating a dead horse now. Many factors drive crude oil prices but more than anything, global growth concerns kept WTI under $60 for most of the year. With the growth picture more robust, WTI has recaptured $60.

    Besides the possible reemergence of growth concerns, Costanza will hang his hat on US production continuing to grow. What’s been impressive this year is US production has risen from 11.5m barrels/day to almost 13m barrels/day despite rig counts declining all year (mostly due to DUC’s being completed). But note that the rig count is starting to turn higher again which is typical when prices start to rise and producing oil becomes economically attractive again. That could keep supply pressures going.

    US total crude production (black) vs. rig counts (purple)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bull case rests on the idea that US production will start to fall as production issues have reemerged (wells producing less oil than expected), capex has been low, and funding has become more difficult. Additionally, OPEC has made it clear they will keep prices firm with output cuts for the time being.

    It’s also time to see if IMO 2020 (curtailing sulfur output on cargo ships which requires a heavy blend of crude) will cause a price spike or not as shippers could stockpile the necessary crude to turn it into product that would lower their sulfur emissions.

    Costanza knows that WTI, at the end of the day, generally maintains a range around its “fair value.” In this case, over the past 5 years, WTI has an average price of $53. You can see from the below chart, 72% of the time, it stays within 1 standard deviation of that average (there has only been two periods where it traveled outside that zone). Therefore, better to fade at the top of the range than chase…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instinct: growth is picking up, IMO 2020 rules take effect now, US production will slow due to well issues

    Costanza: global growth concerns still exist, shippers can use scrubbers to manage the new IMO 2020 rules, rig count is picking up which will mean US production will keep rising, DUC’s are being completed which will bring new supply with or without increasing rig count, OPEC+ ends or reduces the supply cuts now that Aramco has IPO’d (note recent Russian comments that cuts are not indefinite), getting to the top of its normal range

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 65%

    In The Macro Scan on September 30th, we discussed how oil would bottom out in the low $50s with a target range of $60-$65. That micro call played out and here we are back at the top end of the range. Statistically speaking, Costanza looks wise to play that range with the market betting on reflation.

    9) Long USD/MXN (Long US Dollar vs. short Mexican Peso)

    Costanza’s call here has a few different drivers:

    • A play that global growth convergence will not occur in 2020 (see trade #1)

    • A play that the USMCA deal will not spur the Mexican economy which has seen two consecutive quarters of negative GDP growth

    • A play that the Fed will not continue its repo operations well into 2020 which is working to suppress the USD, or will re-lose control over funding markets bringing back the Dollar shortage theme

    • A play against all those trying to collect carry, short vol, etc. (Mex is the highest yielding major currency)

    So this encompasses many of Costanza’s view of short risk assets, short EM, short nothing is going to happen, and long Dollar.

    Instinct: growth is recovering, Fed is on hold for 2020, Fed is injecting liquidity, Mexico will benefit from USMCA deal, long EM and collect carry

    Costanza: global growth is still murky and the Mexican economy has slowed hard (-0.3% GDP YoY), Banxico will have to cut rates further hurting its currency carry, the Fed will end the liquidity injections in 2020, risk asset vol will emerge which will hurt carry trades

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 60%

    This is a popular street idea and when EM trades get crowded, Costanza gets worried. It appears to him that the Mexican economic slowdown will outweigh the benefits of USMCA passage. Probably another example of not working first but bouncing in 2H.

    Correction down to its long-term trend line with a 2H rally?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    10) Long Bitcoin

    Since adding Bitcoin to his repertoire two years ago, Costanza is two for two in his Bitcoin calls (short vol in 2018, outright long Bitcoin in 2019). Luckily enough the long trade in 2019 worked brilliantly in 1H but has since given up much of those games. Thus entering the decade, the sentiment has flipped bearish mainly due to:

    1) As trade war fears abate, the demand from the Chinese to move wealth offshore via Bitcoin decreases. And with the common belief that tariffs have peaked, there will be less demand for Bitcoin going forward.

    2) Government sponsored cryptocurrencies which will lower Bitcoin demand. China is expanding is blockchain study and Japan is pushing for an international network of cryptocurrency payments as examples.

    3) Libra/Stablecoins – full of controversy, but Facebook intends to move ahead with plans to bring a stable medium of currency exchange to 1.7b “unbanked” people to allow money to more easily flow around the world.

    As you can see, there has been plenty of fundamental reasons to sell Bitcoin in 2H, but Costanza is betting there is still a store of value price that the market will place on it. His bet is that store of value price is around 6k. Notice the fractals that have formed since July which are “W” shaped corrections. All those “W’s” have worked to fill the various “gaps” that formed during the 1H rally. There is one last gap to fill down at 6078. Note that coincides with the all-important pivot support around 6,000. Also take notice that the MACD (bottom graph) is starting to make higher lows which is an indication that momentum is starting to turn higher…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Instinct: improved China-US trade talks means less demand from the Chinese, governments continue to work to introduce legitimate crypto, the private sector as well is attempting to bring a more stable form of crypto

    Costanza: there will always be demand for a non-legitimate crypto, spec traders will buy just above 6,000 once the last 1H gap is filled and at key pivot support

    Estimated probability of Costanza being right: 75%

    Whether you believe Bitcoin is the IPhone or the Treo of cryptocurrencies is neither here nor there going into 2020. It remains the most liquid way to transfer money globally without real government supervision.

    Further, it is still the best speculative asset in the macro landscape due to its high volatility which simply does not exist in the developed markets due to central banks compressing volatility. Those specs will take their shots at long in 2020, and Costanza has to imagine the whales come in just ahead of 6k.

    Bonus: Long Initial Jobless Claims (higher claims), short the consumer

    Record low unemployment and strong consumer. That has been the story in 2019 despite an economic slowdown and three Fed rate cuts. The street widely expects claims and UER to remain low in 2020.

    The labor market is tight and the Fed intends on “letting it run hot” as per Kaplan’s comments that “inflation is not running away from us, so we might have the luxury of trying to do more to get more people into this workforce on a sustainable basis.”

    The problem is tight labor markets can end a cycle. Wages rise which compresses margins which then leads to layoffs as companies cut costs to improve profitability (at a time when corp. earnings are now negative on a YoY basis).

    That puts wages in a tough spot entering 2020. Either they rise to an unsustainable level which would end the cycle, or wages fall telling us the cycle has already ended. The only “goldilocks” scenario from Costanza’s estimation would be a stable 3% average hourly earnings (i.e.: right here, no big movements). While claims are still low on an absolute basis, the scene “under the hood” is less robust. The 4-week moving average has moved from 212k three months ago to 228k now. Not exactly troublesome yet by any means but ticking higher nonetheless. Additionally, when looking at a heat map of claims on a state-to-state basis, you can see that the rate of change is worsening more than the headline number suggests. 6m change of claims by state…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Notice how in the beginning of the year, there were only five states in the red (seeing rising claims). Now 50% of states are in the red (seeing rising claims compared to 6m ago).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If claims breakout, that would kill the other consensus economic thought of a strong consumer. Not to say this would send the US into a deep recession (it won’t because consumers have savings right now), but this would reinvigorate the US slowdown theme and cause many of Costanza’s theme to play out and squash the reflation narrative.

    Summary:

    Costanza’s view is straight forward once again this year: fade the reflation narrative and the idea that nothing will happen in 2020 which has led the crowd to play the range and sell vol. Costanza wants to own vol, own tails for range breaks, and generally be short reflation assets.

    What are some of the potential, reasonable catalyst for Costanza to be profitable?

    • US growth slowdown (its already been disappointing) led by a weakening labor market that hurts the “strong consumer” narrative forcing the Fed back into a cutting cycle (thus lifting fixed income vol)

    • Central banks start talking rate hikes and/or market pricing for hikes increase which leads to higher rates which once again cracks risk assets

    • US election cycle turns 2016 Charlottesville ugly in addition to policies being so uncertain that business retrench which will hurt consumer and business sentiment

    • Inability for China-US to complete a Phase 2 deal which disproves the “peak tariff” idea

    • EM growth continues to weaken due to supply chain disruptions and still enacted tariffs

    • US oil production breaks above 13m barrels/day which brings down oil prices serving as not only a poor reflation signal but hurts energy equities (now becoming a popular long) and breakeven/inflation expectations

    What are the glaring issues that could lead to Costanza being more wrong than right for the first time in history?

    • The prospects for German fiscal stimulus continues to improve

    • The Fed, having learned their lesson in 2018, continues to talk down rate hikes (they better censor Evans then), especially with the 2020 Fed becoming less hawkish/more dovish

    • The Fed continues to inject liquidity in order to control funding markets with the potential to shift purchases out the curve (i.e.: into coupons)

    • Companies begin to restock inventories lifting manufacturing PMI’s and, as per prior history, service PMI’s bounce 6-months later

    • A Biden vs. Trump outcome would reduce political risks as policies are less binary

    • IMO 2020 causes a demand spike for heavy crude lifting oil prices at the same time as spurring economically positive drilling activity that helps the economy

    Wishing everyone a very Happy New Year and a successful 2020!

    Thank you for your continued support, and I look forward to many thought-provoking market discussions in 2020. I doubt it will be a dull year.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 16:30

  • 2019 – The Year Of Buying Everything
    2019 – The Year Of Buying Everything

    The global bond and stock markets added $24 trillion in market value ($17.5 tn stocks, $6.5 tn in bonds)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The Dollar ended 2019 at the same level it started – but stocks, bonds, and gold all rallied on the heels of an unprecedented surge in global liquidity…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Remember, correlation is not causation, especially when your career depends on people thinking you’re a guru stock-picker…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    And as central banks spewed liquidity, they stomped on the throat of all risk in all asset classes…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    In global equity land…

    • FTSEMIB (Italy) – best year since 1998

    • CAC – best year since 1999

    • Europe 500 – best year since 2009

    • MSCI World – best year since 2009

    • DAX – best year since 2012

    • IBEX (Spain) – best year since 2013

    • S&P – best year since 2013

    • SHCOMP (China) – best year since 2014

    • FTSE – best year since 2016

    • Dow – best year since 2017

    In the US, Trannies lagged as Nasdaq soared (but everything was green)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    All of which makes perfect sense, because fun-durr-mentals…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    And it’s not just 2019…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    This won’t end well…

    Defensives modestly outperformed Cyclicals in 2019…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Amid considerable intra-year vol, Momo and Value ended only marginally lower…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Apple added a stunning $550 Billion in market cap in 2019 (best year since 2009)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    …as its Fwd EPS tumbled…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Credit protection dramatically outperformed equity protection (thanks to a late collapse in spreads)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Bonds were bought with both hands and feet as treasury yields collapsed in 2019…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    • 30Y Yields fell their most since 2014

    • 2Y Yields fell their most since 2008

    • 2s30s yield curve steepened 29bps – the first year the curve has steepened since 2013

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    In FX-land, the Loonie was the year’s best performer… and the Swedish Kroner was the worst

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The Dollar tumbled into year-end, erasing its gains against a broad trade-weighted basket of fiat malarkey…And the three legs lower all started as the “Phased One” deal with China was ‘completed’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Cryptos broadly speaking had a yuuge year, but it was a tale of two halves with gains halved after peaking around late June…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Commodities had a big year

    • Gold had it best year since 2010

    • Silver had its best year since 2010

    • Oil had its best year since 2016

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    But Palladium was the year’s big commodity/precious metal winner…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    And while the dollar’s slide is accelerating into year-end against global fiat currencies, it has a long way to catch down to its weakness against hard assets…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

     

    Finally, in case you wondered, “you are here”…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    And with a huge h/t to CNBC’s Joumanna Bercetche, an ode to 2019:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ‘Twas the Night before Xmas
    Stock markets at record highs
    Tech sector breaking into new territory
    Brushing off trade war & recession cries

    But what a year 2019 was,
    Let’s rewind back to last December
    The world was looking a little different
    One last hike the Fed would rather not remember

    Only took 7 months to reverse course
    “A mid cycle adjustment” Powell mumbled
    followed by two step September and October cuts
    “Where did I find this guy” the President grumbled

    But of course there was another battle front
    The China US trade war raged on
    In April a deal was “about 90% done”
    Took another 8 months to get to Phase One

    Tariffs went up on both sides
    a terrible year for manufacturing and trade
    PMIs slumped into contractionary territory
    “95% Republican approval rating, I get top grades!”

    The President tweeted, with one eye on the election
    “It’s all one big witch hunt, am fully exonerated”
    Not everyone agreed, as Democrats pressed on
    “The evidence suggests, he is NOT fully exculpated”

    Meanwhile, we sat glued watching the House of Commons,
    an equally tumultuous year back in the UK
    “Order Order” no one really understood the amendments
    But could the bill with the Irish Backstop pass? Three times Nay..

    After multiple cabinet resignations and brexit deadlock
    The writing was clearly etched on the wall,
    Prime Minister May , resigned in May,  
    and of course Tory Euroskpetics were enthralled.

    Then commenced the Tory leadership contest
    Ten eager contenders, to be whittled down to one
    Never mind trust issues,
    “Let’s get Brexit done”

    But first PM Johnson had a cunning plan ,
    proroguing Parliament and giving unlawful advice to the queen
    “Don’t worry its a do or die Brexit,
    We will be out by Halloween!”

    Back from Brussels, brandishing a deal
    Deadlock in Parliament persisted,
    “Time for a General Election” all parties squealed
    Even Jeremy Corbyn who had resisted

    And so it was on December 12th
    The Conservative party secured its biggest majority in 30 years
    The withdrawal bill now passed with flying colours
    Brexit on January 31st with no free trade deal yet… Cheers.

    2020 will also see a new BOE governor
    Andrew Bailey confirmed in the seat,
    Will the Bank hike or cut we wonder,
    Managing brexit will be no easy feat

    But in all of this let’s not forget about Europe,
    Caught in a brexit quagmire and manufacturing slump
     “Europe treats us worse than China”
    Perpetual threat of tariffs being dangled by Trump

    Trouble in paradise with the German coalition:
    new SPD leadership want to re-negotiate the terms
    “while we poll low, we want rules of our volition”
    As CDU’s fiscal campaign made us all squirm

    And oh the Italians kept us on our toes
    The 5-Star Lega coalition fell apart
    Another political crisis as the economy slows?
    PD theatrically swept in with 5 Star : “it’s a new start”

    What about NATO the transatlantic alliance
    “Braindead” declared French President Macron
    “This isn’t just a spending partnership but a political one”
    We shook our heads, where did this all go wrong

    Meanwhile OPEC+ continued with production cuts
    Oil apparently too oversupplied
    “we want full compliance this time: no if , no buts”
    Aramco went for a local listing, not quite $2T (but they tried)

    And of course the central banks, still standing firm,
    The ECB unleashed its latest round of easing
    A month before the end of Draghi’s term
    Now it’s up to Lagarde to do the hawks appeasing

    “We will do whatever it takes” Draghi’s words
    Echoing forever in the annals of history
    “I am neither a dove nor a hawk
    but an owl” Lagarde said fervently

    Another memorable speech at the UN
    “How dare you, you stole my dreams”
    Green warrior Greta Thunberg
    Warning of climate change in its extreme

    A 2019 that was hectic to say the least:
    The US President impeached
    Hong Kong riots in the East
    Codes of civility breached

    While we don’t know what 2020 has in store
    Perhaps one of less uncertainty
    Happy New Year to you all
    and thank you for watching CNBC! – Jou

    *  *  *

    Happy New Year!


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 16:00

  • "A Nation Dying" – Opioid Deaths Linked To Auto Plant Closures, Study Says
    "A Nation Dying" – Opioid Deaths Linked To Auto Plant Closures, Study Says

    A new study has found the link between automobile manufacturing plant closures and a community’s struggle with opioid overdose deaths. 

    The study, published Monday in JAMA Internal Medicine, titled “Association Between Automotive Assembly Plant Closures and Opioid Overdose Mortality in the United States,” shows how US adults are more likely to die from opioid overdoses if they live near a manufacturing plant that closed in the last five years.

    “Our findings illustrate the importance of declining economic opportunity as an underlying factor associated with the opioid overdose crisis,” researchers from the Perelman School of Medicine at the University of Pennsylvania wrote in the study.

    Researchers examined opioid death rates in 112 manufacturing counties across the US that had at least one manufacturing plant close since 1999. A majority of the counties were in the South and Midwest regions of the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From 1999 to 2016, plant closures affected 29 counties. Those counties saw 85% higher opioid overdose deaths than counties without closures. 

    Researchers noted that white working-age men were mostly affected.

    “The current opioid overdose crisis may be associated in part with the same structural changes to the US economy that have been responsible for worsening overall mortality among less-educated adults since the 1980s,” researchers said.

    As we’ve noted before, the opioid crisis in the last several decades has unfolded in three waves: The first wave of prescription pills started right before the Dot Com bust and ended around the 2008 financial crisis. The second wave began in 2009 and was associated with a significant increase in heroin-related deaths. The third wave started in 2015, which involved the proliferation of synthetic opioids, such as fentanyl. Each wave saw a greater number of overdose deaths. In total, more than 400,000 people died from 1999 to 2017. 

    The link between auto plant closures and the rise in opioid-related deaths suggests the nation is dying. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 15:50

  • Watch: 20 Times Leftists Went Berserk On Campus In 2019
    Watch: 20 Times Leftists Went Berserk On Campus In 2019

    Via The College Fix,

    TRIGGERED: Violence, destruction, rage…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Students who touted conservative, Republican, Constitutional or pro-life opinions on college campuses over the last 12 months were often met with extreme resistance.

    Throughout 2019, leftists were wildly triggered by opinions they disagreed with, prompting them to vandalize or destroy displays, disrupt events, shout down speakers, scream at the top of their lungs — and even physically assault their right-of-center peers.

    Many of these examples were caught on camera.

    Here is a look back at some of the most extreme examples The College Fix has reported on over the last year.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 15:35

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 31st December 2019

  • Turkey's Gunboat Gambit In The Mediterranean
    Turkey’s Gunboat Gambit In The Mediterranean

    Authored by Burak Bekdil via The Gatestone Institute,

    Turkey, since 2011, has been waging a pro-Sunni proxy war in Syria, in the hope of one day establishing in Damascus a pro-Turkey, Islamist regime. This ambition has failed, costing President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan’s Turkey violent political turmoil on both sides of Turkey’s 911-km border with Syria and billions of dollars spent on more than 4 million Syrian refugees scattered across the Turkish soil.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In Egypt, in 2011-2012, Erdoğan aggressively supported the failed Muslim Brotherhood government and deeply antagonized the incumbent — then-general but now president — Abdel Fattah al-Sisi. Since Erdoğan’s efforts in Syria and Egypt failed, his Sunni Islamist ambitions have found a new proxy-war theater: Libya.

    On December 10, Erdoğan said he could deploy troops in Libya if the UN-backed Government of National Accord (GNA) in Tripoli (which Turkey supports) requested it. Erdoğan’s talks with GNA’s head, Fayez al-Sarraj, who is fighting a war against the Libyan National Army (LNA) of General Khalifa Haftar, produced two ostensibly strategic agreements: a memorandum of understanding on providing the GNA with arms, military training and personnel; and a maritime agreement delineating exclusive economic zones in the Mediterranean waters.

    Greece and Egypt protested immediately while the European Council unequivocally condemned the controversial accords. Meanwhile, the deals apparently escalated a proxy competition between Turkey’s old (Greece) and new (Egypt and the United Arab Emirates) rivals.

    With the al-Sarraj handshake, Erdoğan is apparently aiming to:

    • minimize Turkey’s isolation in the Mediterranean, one which has gradually worsened since 2010, following one diplomatic crisis after another with Israel;

    • counter strategic cooperation between Cyprus, Greece, Egypt and Israel, including joint diplomatic, energy and military initiatives;

    • cut into the emerging Cypriot-Greek-Egyptian-Israeli maritime bloc;

    • push back against Arab (Egyptian and UAE) pressure on al-Sarraj;

    • fill the European vacuum in Libya; and

    • emerge as a deal-breaker in the Mediterranean rather than a deal-maker.

    All that ambition requires military hardware as well as diplomatic software. Since 2011, a year after the Mavi Marmara incident ruptured relations with Israel, Turkey has been investing billions of dollars in naval technologies, in an apparent effort to build up the hardware it would one day require.

    In the eight years since then, Turkey has built four Ada-class corvettes; two Landing Ship Tank (LST) vessels; eight fast Landing Craft Tank (LCT) vessels; 16 military patrol ships; two deep-sea rescue ships; one submarine rescue ship; and four assault boats.

    The jewel in the naval treasury box is a $1 billion Landing Platform Dock (LPD), now being built under license from Spain’s Navantia shipyards, to be operational in 2021. The TCG Anadolu, Turkey’s first amphibious assault ship, will carry a battalion-sized unit of 1,200 troops and personnel, eight utility helicopters and three unmanned aerial vehicles; it also will transport 150 vehicles, including battle tanks. It also may be able to deploy short takeoff and vertical landing STOVL F-35 fighter jets. Turkey will be the third operator in the world of this ship type, after Spain and Australia.

    Erdoğan’s naval ambitions, however, are not limited just to an emerging fleet of conventional vessels. In 2016, he said that the LPD program would hopefully be the first step toward producing a “most elite” aircraft carrier. He also said he “sees it as a major deficiency that we still do not have a nuclear vessel.”

    On December 22, Turkey’s first Type 214 class submarine, the TCG Piri Reis, hit the seas with a ceremony attended by Erdoğan. “Today,” he said, “we gathered here for the docking of Piri Reis. As of 2020, a submarine will go into service each year. By 2027, all six of our submarines will be at our seas for service.”

    Unsurprisingly the docking ceremony reminded Erdoğan of his Libyan gambit: “We will evaluate every opportunity in land, sea and air. If needed, we will increase military support in Libya.”

    Erdoğan seems to think that his best defense in the Mediterranean power game is an offense. On December 15, Turkish Naval Forces intercepted an Israeli research ship, the Bat Galim, in Cypriot waters and escorted it away, as tension over natural resource exploration continued to rise in the region.

    On December 16, Turkey dispatched a surveillance and reconnaissance drone to the Turkish-controlled north of the divided island of Cyprus. A week before the drone deployment, Turkish Foreign Minister Mevlüt Çavuşoğlu said that Ankara could use its military forces to halt gas drilling in waters off Cyprus that it claims as its own.

    Libya is another risky proxy war theater for Turkey. Its deals with the al-Sarraj government over troop deployment and maritime borders will become null and void if the Libyan civil war, begun in 2014, ends with Gen. Haftar’s victory. The chief of staff of the LNA, Farag Al-Mahdawi, announced that his forces would sink any Turkish ship approaching the Libyan coast. “I have an order; as soon as the Turkish research vessels arrive, I will have a solution. I will sink them myself,” Al-Mahdawi warned, noting that the order was coming from Haftar. On December 21, Haftar’s forces seized a Grenada-flagged ship with Turkish crew aboard, on the suspicion that it was carrying arms. The ship was later released.

    The European Union is another factor why Erdoğan, once again, is probably betting on the wrong horse. Technically speaking, Turkey is a candidate for full EU membership, but it is an open secret that accession talks have not moved an inch during the past several years, and with no prospects of progress in sight. Making membership prospects even gloomier, EU foreign ministers in November agreed on economic sanctions for Ankara for violating Cyprus’ maritime economic zone by drilling off the island.

    The Mediterranean chess game leaves Turkey in alliance with the breakaway Turkish Cypriot statelet and one of the warring factions in Libya, versus a strategic grouping of Greece, Cyprus, Egypt (and the UAE), Israel, and the other warring Libyan group.

    One emerging power in Libya, however, is not a Western state actor. After controlling Syria in favor of President Bashar al-Assad and establishing permanent military bases inside and off the coast of the country, Russia has the potential to step into the Libyan theater with a bigger proxy and direct force, to establish its second permanent Mediterranean military presence. As in Syria, where divergent interests did not stop Turkey from becoming a remote-controlled Russian player, Moscow can once again make use of the Turkish card to undermine Western interests in Libya.

    Also as in Syria, Turkey’s Islamist agenda will probably fail in Libya, but by the time Erdoğan understands that, it might be too late to get out of Moscow’s orbit.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/31/2019 – 02:00

    Tags

  • Nullify Government Tyranny: In 2020, Harness The Power Of Your Discontent
    Nullify Government Tyranny: In 2020, Harness The Power Of Your Discontent

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “The people have the power, all we have to do is awaken that power in the people. The people are unaware. They’re not educated to realize that they have power. The system is so geared that everyone believes the government will fix everything. We are the government.” – John Lennon

    Twenty years into the 21st century, and what do we have to show for it?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Government corruption, tyranny and abuse have propelled us at warp speed towards a full-blown police state in which egregious surveillance, roadside strip searches, police shootings of unarmed citizens, censorship, retaliatory arrests, the criminalization of lawful activities, warmongering, indefinite detentions, SWAT team raids, asset forfeiture, police brutality, profit-driven prisons, and pay-to-play politicians have become the new normal.

    Here’s just a small sampling of the laundry list of abuses—cruel, brutal, immoral, unconstitutional and unacceptable—that have been heaped upon us by the government over the past two decades.

    The government failed to protect our lives, liberty and happiness. The predators of the police state wreaked havoc on our freedoms, our communities, and our lives. The government didn’t listen to the citizenry, refused to abide by the Constitution, and treated the citizenry as a source of funding and little else. Police officers shot unarmed citizens and their household pets. Government agents—including local police—were armed to the teeth and encouraged to act like soldiers on a battlefield. Bloated government agencies were allowed to fleece taxpayers. Government technicians spied on our emails and phone calls. And government contractors made a killing by waging endless wars abroad.

    The American President became more imperial. Although the Constitution invests the President with very specific, limited powers, in recent years, American presidents (Trump, Obama, Bush, Clinton, etc.) claimed the power to completely and almost unilaterally alter the landscape of this country for good or for ill. The powers that have been amassed by each successive president through the negligence of Congress and the courts—powers which add up to a toolbox of terror for an imperial ruler—empower whomever occupies the Oval Office to act as a dictator, above the law and beyond any real accountability. The presidency itself has become an imperial one with permanent powers.

    Militarized police became a power unto themselves, 911 calls turned deadly, and traffic stops took a turn for the worse. Lacking in transparency and accountability, protected by the courts and legislators, and rife with misconduct, America’s police forces became a growing menace to the citizenry and the rule of law. Despite concerns about the government’s steady transformation of local police into a standing military army, local police agencies acquired even more weaponry, training and equipment suited for the battlefield. Police officers were also given free range to pull anyone over for a variety of reasons and subject them to forced cavity searches, forced colonoscopies, forced blood draws, forced breath-alcohol tests, forced DNA extractions, forced eye scans, forced inclusion in biometric databases.

    The courts failed to uphold justice. With every ruling handed down, it becomes more apparent that we live in an age of hollow justice, with government courts more concerned with protecting government agents than upholding the rights of “we the people.” This is true at all levels of the judiciary, but especially so in the highest court of the land, the U.S. Supreme Court, which is seemingly more concerned with establishing order and protecting government agents than with upholding the rights enshrined in the Constitution. A review of critical court rulings over the past two decades, including some ominous ones by the U.S. Supreme Court, reveals a startling and steady trend towards pro-police state rulings by an institution concerned more with establishing order and protecting the ruling class and government agents than with upholding the rights enshrined in the Constitution.

    The Surveillance State rendered Americans vulnerable to threats from government spies, police, hackers and power failures. Thanks to the government’s ongoing efforts to build massive databases using emerging surveillance, DNA and biometrics technologies, Americans have become sitting ducks for hackers and government spies alike. Billions of people have been affected by data breaches and cyberattacks. On a daily basis, Americans have been made to relinquish the most intimate details of who we are—our biological makeup, our genetic blueprints, and our biometrics (facial characteristics and structure, fingerprints, iris scans, etc.)—in order to navigate an increasingly technologically-enabled world.

    Mass shootings claimed more lives. Mass shootings have taken place in virtually every venue, including at churches, in nightclubs, on college campuses, on military bases, in elementary schools, in government offices, and at concerts. However, studies make clear that the government’s gun violence—inflicted on unarmed individuals by battlefield-trained SWAT teams, militarized police, and bureaucratic government agents trained to shoot first and ask questions later—poses a greater threat to the safety and security of the nation than any mass shooter.

    Debtors’ prisons made a comeback. Not content to expand the police state’s power to search, strip, seize, raid, steal from, arrest and jail Americans for any infraction, no matter how insignificant, state courts were given the green light to resume their practice of jailing individuals who are unable to pay the hefty fines imposed by the American police state. These debtors’ prisons play right into the hands of the corporations that make a profit by jailing Americans. This is no longer a government “of the people, by the people, for the people.” It has become a government “of the rich, by the elite, for the corporations,” and its rise to power has been predicated on shackling the American taxpayer to a debtors’ prison guarded by a phalanx of politicians, bureaucrats and militarized police with no hope of parole and no chance for escape.

    The cost of endless wars drove the nation deeper into debt. America’s war spending has already bankrupted the nation to the tune of more than $20 trillion dollars. Policing the globe and waging endless wars abroad hasn’t made America—or the rest of the world—any safer, but it has made the military industrial complex rich at taxpayer expense. Approximately 200,000 US troops are stationed in 177 countries throughout the world, including Africa, where troops reportedly carry out an average of 10 military exercises and engagements daily. Meanwhile, America’s infrastructure is falling apart. The interest on the money America has borrowed to wage its wars will cost an estimated $8 trillion.

    “Show your papers” incidents skyrocketed. We are not supposed to be living in a “show me your papers” society. Despite this, the U.S. government has introduced measures allowing police and other law enforcement officials to stop individuals (citizens and noncitizens alike), demand they identify themselves, and subject them to patdowns, warrantless searches, and interrogations. These actions fly in the face of longstanding constitutional safeguards forbidding such police state tactics.

    The government waged war on military veterans. The government has done a pitiful job of respecting the freedoms of military veterans and caring for their needs once out of uniform. Despite the fact that the U.S. boasts more than 20 million veterans who have served in World War II through the present day, the plight of veterans today is America’s badge of shame, with large numbers of veterans impoverished, unemployed, traumatized mentally and physically, struggling with depression, suicide, and marital stress, homeless, subjected to sub-par treatment at clinics and hospitals, left to molder while their paperwork piles up within Veterans Administration offices, and increasingly treated like criminals—targeted for surveillance, censorship, threatened with incarceration or involuntary commitment, labeled as extremists and/or mentally ill, and stripped of their Second Amendment rights—for daring to speak out against government misconduct.

    Free speech was dealt one knock-out punch after another. Protest laws, free speech zones, bubble zones, trespass zones, anti-bullying legislation, zero tolerance policies, hate crime laws, shadow banning on the Internet, and a host of other legalistic maladies dreamed up by politicians and prosecutors (and championed by those who want to suppress speech with which they might disagree) conspired to corrode our core freedoms, purportedly for our own good. On paper—at least according to the U.S. Constitution—we are technically free to speak. In reality, however, we are only as free to speak as a government official—or corporate entities such as Facebook, Google or YouTube—may allow. The reasons for such censorship varied widely from political correctness, so-called safety concerns and bullying to national security and hate crimes but the end result remained the same: the complete eradication of free speech.

    The government waged a renewed war on private property. The battle to protect our private property has become the final constitutional frontier, the last holdout against our freedoms being usurped. We no longer have any real property rights. That house you live in, the car you drive, the small (or not so small) acreage of land that has been passed down through your family or that you scrimped and saved to acquire, whatever money you manage to keep in your bank account after the government and its cronies have taken their first and second and third cut…none of it is safe from the government’s greedy grasp. At no point do you ever have any real ownership in anything other than the clothes on your back. Everything else can be seized by the government under one pretext or another (civil asset forfeiture, unpaid taxes, eminent domain, public interest, etc.).

    Schools became even more like prisons. So-called school “safety” policies—which run the gamut from zero tolerance policies that punish all infractions harshly to surveillance cameras, metal detectors, random searches, drug-sniffing dogs, school-wide lockdowns, active-shooter drills and militarized police officers—have turned schools into prisons and young people into prisoners. From the moment a child enters one of the nation’s 98,000 public schools to the moment she graduates, she will be exposed to a steady diet of draconian zero tolerance policies that criminalize childish behavior, overreaching anti-bullying statutes that criminalize speech, school resource officers (police) tasked with disciplining and/or arresting so-called “disorderly” students, standardized testing that emphasizes rote answers over critical thinking, politically correct mindsets that teach young people to censor themselves and those around them, and extensive biometric and surveillance systems that, coupled with the rest, acclimate young people to a world in which they have no freedom of thought, speech or movement.

    The Deep State took over. The American system of representative government was overthrown by the Deep State—a.k.a. the police state a.k.a. the military/corporate industrial complex—a profit-driven, militaristic corporate state bent on total control and global domination through the imposition of martial law here at home and by fomenting wars abroad. The “government of the people, by the people, for the people” has perished. In its place is a shadow government, a corporatized, militarized, entrenched bureaucracy that is fully operational and staffed by unelected officials who are, in essence, running the country and calling the shots in Washington DC, no matter who sits in the White House. Mind you, by “government,” I’m not referring to the highly partisan, two-party bureaucracy of the Republicans and Democrats. Rather, I’m referring to “government” with a capital “G,” the entrenched Deep State that is unaffected by elections, unaltered by populist movements, and has set itself beyond the reach of the law. This is the hidden face of a government that has no respect for the freedom of its citizenry. This shadow government, which “operates according to its own compass heading regardless of who is formally in power,” makes a mockery of elections and the entire concept of a representative government.

    The takeaway: Everything the founders of this country feared has come to dominate in modern America. “We the people” have been saddled with a government that is no longer friendly to freedom and is working overtime to trample the Constitution underfoot and render the citizenry powerless in the face of the government’s power grabs, corruption and abusive tactics.

    So how do you balance the scales of justice at a time when Americans are being tasered, tear-gassed, pepper-sprayed, hit with batons, shot with rubber bullets and real bullets, blasted with sound cannons, detained in cages and kennels, sicced by police dogs, arrested and jailed for challenging the government’s excesses, abuses and power-grabs?

    No matter who sits in the White House, politics won’t fix a system that is broken beyond repair.

    For that matter, protests and populist movements also haven’t done much to push back against an authoritarian regime that is deaf to our cries, dumb to our troubles, blind to our needs, and accountable to no one.

    So how do you not only push back against the police state’s bureaucracy, corruption and cruelty but also launch a counterrevolution aimed at reclaiming control over the government using nonviolent means?

    You start by changing the rules and engaging in some (nonviolent) guerilla tactics.

    Take part in grassroots activism, which takes a trickle-up approach to governmental reform by implementing change at the local level (in other words, think nationally, but act locally).

    And then, nullify everything the government does that flies in the face of the principles on which this nation was founded.

    If there is any means left to us for thwarting the government in its relentless march towards outright dictatorship, it may rest with the power of juries and local governments to invalidate governmental laws, tactics and policies that are illegitimate, egregious or blatantly unconstitutional.

    In an age in which government officials accused of wrongdoing—police officers, elected officials, etc.—are treated with general leniency, while the average citizen is prosecuted to the full extent of the law, nullification is a powerful reminder that, as the Constitution tells us, “we the people” are the government.

    For too long we’ve allowed our so-called “representatives” to call the shots. Now it’s time to restore the citizenry to their rightful place in the republic: as the masters, not the servants.

    Nullification is one way of doing so.

    Various cities and states have been using this historic doctrine with mixed results on issues as wide ranging as gun control and healthcare to “claim freedom from federal laws they find onerous or wrongheaded.” Most recently, a growing number of communities—including more than a 100 counties, cities and towns in Virginia—have declared themselves to be Second Amendment sanctuaries and adopted resolutions opposing any “unconstitutional restrictions” on the right to keep and bear arms. It is mass movements such as these that the government fears most.

    Indeed, any hope of freeing ourselves rests—as it always has—at the local level, with “we the people.” One of the most important contributions an individual citizen can make is to become actively involved in local community affairs, politics and legal battles. As the adage goes, “Think globally, act locally.”

    America was meant to be primarily a system of local governments, which is a far cry from the colossal federal bureaucracy we have today. Yet if our freedoms are to be restored, understanding what is transpiring practically in your own backyard—in one’s home, neighborhood, school district, town council—and taking action at that local level must be the starting point.

    Responding to unmet local needs and reacting to injustices is what grassroots activism is all about. Attend local city council meetings, speak up at town hall meetings, organize protests and letter-writing campaigns, employ “militant nonviolent resistance” and civil disobedience, which Martin Luther King Jr. used to great effect through the use of sit-ins, boycotts and marches.

    Let’s not take the mistakes, carnage, toxicity and abuse of this past decade into 2020.

    As long as we continue to allow callousness, cruelty, meanness, immorality, ignorance, hatred, intolerance, racism, militarism, materialism, meanness and injustice—magnified by an echo chamber of nasty tweets and government-sanctioned brutality—to trump justice, fairness and equality, there can be no hope of prevailing against the police state.

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, we could transform this nation if only Americans would work together to harness the power of their discontent and push back against the government’s overreach, excesses and abuse.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 23:45

  • Despite Star Wars "Success", U.S. Movie Ticket Sales Plunged 4.6% In 2019
    Despite Star Wars “Success”, U.S. Movie Ticket Sales Plunged 4.6% In 2019

    Star Wars: The Rise of Skywalker led at the box office again last week, but while it has helped catalyze a great 2019 for Disney, pretty much everyone else in the movie industry has sputtered and struggled.

    The new “Star Wars” film brought in $72 million this weekend, according to the San Francisco Chronicle, easily beating out Sony Corp.’s “Little Women” and “Spies in Disguise,” from Disney’s Fox studio.

    But the film’s gross take, which was expected to be as much as $100 million, was down 59% from last week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But this shouldn’t be much of a surprise: the industry has fallen apart in 2019, with U.S. ticket sales declining 4.6.% from the year prior. 2020 is expected to also be a “challenge”. 

    Another film that opened this past weekend, “Little Women”, was expected to gross $18 million but only brought in $16.5 million. The animated “Spies in Disguise” raked in $13.2 million after projections of $11 million. “Uncut Gems”, starring Adam Sandler, expanded to more theaters and brought in $9.6 million, in the middle of its forecasted $8.5 million to $10 million range. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recall, just days ago, we reported on movie theater stocks plunging after continued weak ticket sales for Star Wars were announced for the weekend of December 20 to December 22. AMC Entertainment Holdings, Cinemark Holdings Inc., and Cineworld Group Plc all fell in response.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we noted then, theater stocks have exhibited declines throughout most of the year. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The movie generated $176 million last weekend weekend, making it the third-largest December debut ever – but it still tracked below estimates of $183 million.

    “Hollywood was banking on a strong showing to boost receipts,” Geetha Ranganathan, an analyst at Bloomberg Intelligence, wrote.

    “The reception, far below predecessors, may have been partly due to mixed critical reviews.”

    North America’s movie theater industry remains in limbo since the emergence of streaming services. A consolidation wave among movie theaters continues despite Hollywood’s softer domestic performance in 2019. Operators have been hunting for additional growth channels, including expansion in Asia.

    U.K.-based Cineworld is expected to become North America’s largest movie theater operator as it acquires Canada’s Cineplex in a $1.86 billion deal. 

    Netflix has undoubtedly disrupted the industry by releasing its content on television screens and mobile devices instead of at the box office.  Netflix released 371 new movies and TV shows in 2019, over 50 percent more than they did last year, according to data compiled by Variety Insight. 

    The movie theater consolidation wave began in 2012 when China’s Dalian Wanda Group purchased AMC Entertainment. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 23:25

  • How Chemists, Chinese Factories, & "Dark Web" Dealers Spread Fentanyl Across America
    How Chemists, Chinese Factories, & “Dark Web” Dealers Spread Fentanyl Across America

    Authored by Daniel Kolitz via TheNation.com,

    The Wizard of OxyContin – where is he now? That nickname, revealed in leaked documents, belonged to an employee of Abbott Laboratories, which partnered with Purdue Pharmaceuticals to sell the drug. Starting in the late 1990s, he and his colleagues canvassed clinics around the country, hard-selling doctors on their flagship product. Purdue wooed doctors taught to distrust pain medications with steaks, vacations, and a stunning range of swag: Oxy-branded clocks, pens, beach hats, even swing music compilations. They were told that, unlike other opioids, OxyContin was addiction-proof; its time-release coating assured a steady, measured dose and would thwart attempts at abuse.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unmentioned by those reps – but known by their bosses from day one – was the ease with which this coating could be removed. As doctors began prescribing the drug in ever-larger numbers and Oxy’s sales soared into the billions, this glitch would devastate families, ravage towns, and before long spark the worst drug crisis in US history.

    Purdue eventually gestured toward fixing this problem, after 14 years of lucrative dithering. In 2010, a few years before its patent was set to expire, the company prolonged it with a new formula. This revamped Oxy was harder to abuse, and while its effectiveness has been debated, rates of prescription drug abuse have declined, aided by “pill mill” raids and stricter prescribing guidelines. But the wreckage that Oxy left behind is still being felt: In 2017, more than 47,000 Americans have died of opioid overdoses, the highest number on record. That same year, fentanyl became a household name, surfacing in local news segments, policy-website explainers, and thousands of toxicology reports. When the original Oxy vanished from the streets, many of the people addicted to it turned to heroin—and now it emerged that much of the heroin available in the United States (along with fast-rising quantities of cocaine) was laced with fentanyl. The advantage, for dealers, was price: Fentanyl costs less than heroin and is easier to acquire. It also happens to be 50 times more potent.

    Often lost in the early news reports was the fact that fentanyl alone wasn’t killing people; many different kinds of fentanyl were. Since its invention in 1959 by the Belgian chemist and doctor Paul Janssen, fentanyl has seen more than 1,400 analogues: twists on the original formula whose origins and effects vary widely. Carfentanil, for instance—100 times stronger than fentanyl—was until 2018 FDA-approved for use as an elephant tranquilizer. It is here that the opioid crisis intersects with (and amplifies) a newer scourge: NPS, or new psychoactive substances, molecularly tweaked stand-ins for traditional street drugs. The best-known of these is probably K2, or Spice, the ostensible marijuana substitute whose high bears little resemblance to the real thing and whose side effects include blood-clotting, kidney failure, and instant death. But there are hundreds more, and likely thousands in development. Mini-pandemics have erupted across the country, as when, in the course of a single week last year, over 100 people in New Haven overdosed on what was later determined to be AB-FUBINACA, yet another synthetic cannabinoid.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ben Westhoff, in Fentanyl, Inc.: How Rogue Chemists Are Creating the Deadliest Wave of the Opioid Epidemic, charts this progression in harrowing detail. We are now dealing, he writes, with “the harshest drug challenge in our history.” His book is one of the first to address what the Centers for Disease Control has called the “third wave” of the opioid crisis: first OxyContin, then heroin, and now fentanyl and its analogues. Earlier accounts of this crisis – Sam Quinones’s Dreamland: The True Tale of America’s Opiate Epidemic or Beth Macy’s Dopesick: Dealers, Doctors, and the Drug Company That Addicted America – had in Purdue Pharma the benefit, structural and dramatic, of a villain. More or less everyone can agree that pharmaceutical companies should refrain from wantonly pursuing profit at the expense of public health. Dopesick is rarely a pleasant read, but Macy’s account of Purdue’s first major court battle – which culminated in criminal convictions for three executives and $600 million in fines—provided at least some measure of catharsis.

    Westhoff, reporting from the flayed, despairing center of this crisis, can’t offer any comparable relief. Purdue Pharma is now dead, and responsibility has devolved, in this third wave, to thousands of loosely affiliated actors: Dark Web distributors, small-time dealers, chemists whose skills and moral scruples vary widely. Like the cryptocurrencies that mask countless NPS transactions, these networks are decentralized: Members taken down are just as quickly replaced. But there is consolation in clarity, and the achievement of Westhoff’s book is to press this sprawling cast and the forces that gave rise to it into something like a coherent narrative, forming legible patterns out of widespread chaos.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Glassine pouches of confirmed fentanyl are displayed at the Drug Enforcement Administration Northeast Regional Laboratory in New York, 2019. (AFP via Getty / Photo by Don Emmert)

    As Westhoff points out, many of the most dangerous NPS were developed under completely legal circumstances, by tenured professors at prestigious universities. These experimental compounds—as well as the steps taken to produce them—were written up in small, peer-reviewed science journals and more or less forgotten, until the underworld began to repurpose these articles as recipes for recreational drugs. David Nichols, the utopian chemist who once dreamed of a drug that would end all war, now finds himself faced with the grief of parents like Eric Brown, whose son Montana overdosed on 251-NBOMe, which was brought into the mainstream through his research.

    If Fentanyl, Inc. does have a primary antagonist, it’s the Chinese government. Virtually all of the fentanyls that have flooded the United States in recent years have been manufactured in China, where many NPS are legal, an arrangement that allows legitimate businesses to churn them out on a scale inconceivable to illicit drug makers in North America. This process has been heavily underwritten, as Westhoff demonstrates, by “lucrative tax incentives, subsidies, and direct financial support” from the Chinese government, as part of its breakneck bid to expand the country’s biotechnology sector.

    The extent to which Chinese officials are aware of what they’re funding is unclear – some of these companies produce hundreds of products, churning out fentanyls alongside collagen, pesticides, and erectile-dysfunction meds – but the blind eye they’ve turned toward the export of these chemicals has yielded a number of complaints from the United States. The companies, meanwhile, know exactly what they’re doing: Fentanyls and NPS that are legal in China but banned in the US are often shipped in disguise, packaged as dog food or high-gluten wheat flour bread. In addition to an urgent public health crisis, this is an issue of international trade, which means that President Donald Trump seems authentically to care about it. In April, under pressure from his administration, China instituted a blanket ban on the production of all fentanyl variants. The majority of Westhoff’s reporting was conducted before this announcement was made, but, as he argues and as recent developments have borne out, it is “far from clear” if these new regulations have had any impact.

    To illuminate this deadly, improbable cycle—in which drugs developed at American universities are mass-produced in Chinese factories and then sold to North American dealers, occasionally winding up, as party drugs, on the very same campuses whose endowments funded their creation—Westhoff ranges widely, logging time with each link in the chain of production. Eventually, in the book’s intrepid centerpiece, he manages to infiltrate two Chinese chemical manufacturers. At one of them, undercover as a cautious buyer, he encounters a roomful of cheerful twentysomethings blithely Skyping with potential customers to organize deals. It’s an uncanny moment: With fentanyl components swapped for cheap razors or custom-made mattresses, this could be any number of US start-ups, right down to the strained cheer and punishing work hours (though with the further difference that all of these people live together, in a motel adjacent to their office). But the book’s most revealing encounter takes place back home, when Westhoff, still posing as a buyer, is asked via Skype by one of these young sales reps why exactly people buy a chemical called NPP. Westhoff explains that it’s used to make fentanyl.

    “I know Fentanyl,” she continued, “but why [do] people use it?”

    “It’s highly addictive,” I said.

    “Yes, I know it is a bad ,” the saleswoman admitted, “but I still sell it, so sometimes I feel guilt. NPP is not forbidden in China, so we can sell. I sell it, because I want to earn money, earn a living.”

    Westhoff lets this exchange stand on its own, but a whole world throbs beneath it. Like many Chinese companies, the one this woman works for—called Yuancheng—began exporting its products to the United States only after China joined the World Trade Organization in 2001. That development cost millions of Americans their factory jobs and helped speed along the opioid crisis, as thousands of newly unemployed workers started selling their surplus Oxy to make the rent or maintain their own supply. Asked to justify themselves, they might have said something similar. Neither party—the laid-off factory worker selling Oxy out of his foreclosed home; the Yuancheng saleswoman working six-day weeks to keep the room she shares with six coworkers—can really be blamed. That the latter has progressed to killing the former suggests a failure, or an apotheosis, of two miserably enmeshed systems.

    Stemming the flow of drugs from China is important, as is working, somehow, to curb the spread of NPS. But this problem isn’t disappearing soon, and there are people who urgently need our help. The relative whiteness of those affected by the opioid crisis has softened the old approach—jail the dealers, jail the addicts, remind young children that drugs are bad—but as Westhoff demonstrates, we have a long way to go. If we are to treat opioid-use disorder as a disease like any other, then here-and-now treatment must be our first priority, and Fentanyl, Inc. closes with a tour of some organizations taking that imperative seriously. Most of them are located outside the United States, a country whose fervent commitment to prolonged and needless suffering largely precludes the safe-injection sites and drug-testing operations that have saved countless lives in Europe. There have been some signs of progress—Westhoff highlights Grand Forks, North Dakota, a small conservative city that has liberalized access to Narcan, clean needles, and medication-assisted treatment—but harm reduction has yet to take hold as a national strategy. Which is unfortunate, because no other strategy works.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 23:05

  • In "Stunning Twist", Carlos Ghosn Flees Japanese House Arrest, Arrives In Lebanon To Escape "Rigged" Justice System
    In “Stunning Twist”, Carlos Ghosn Flees Japanese House Arrest, Arrives In Lebanon To Escape “Rigged” Justice System

    Update: Confirming earlier speculation, Nissan’s former Chairman Carlos Ghosn who was facing criminal trial in Japan, said he fled for Lebanon and has left Japan, which Bloomberg called a “stunning twist” in a saga that began over a year ago with this shocking arrest in Tokyo. Ghosn said in a statement through his representatives Tuesday that he was not fleeing justice, but instead seeking to avoid “injustice and political persecution.”

    “I am now in Lebanon and will no longer be held hostage by a rigged Japanese justice system where guilt is presumed, discrimination is rampant, and basic human rights are denied,” the former Nissane and Renault head said in an e-mailed statement Tuesday. “I have not fled justice – I have escaped injustice and political persecution.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ghosn, now a global fugitive from the law, picked Lebanon as it has no extradition agreement with Japan. The 65-year-old has said he’s the victim of a conspiracy between Nissan executives, prosecutors and government officials to prevent him from further integrating the company with Renault.

    Ghosn did not provide details on how he got out but promised to talk to reporters soon. He was awaiting trial for what prosecutors called a pervasive pattern of financial misconduct and raiding of corporate resources for personal gain — allegations that Ghosn has denied. Ghosn fled Japan because he doesn’t believe he will get a fair trial in the country, a person familiar with the matter said earlier.

    Ghosn was released on bail in April under the condition that he live at a registered address and not leave Japan. As Bloomberg notes, the strict terms of his release were designed to prevent him from fleeing. He wasn’t permitted to spend more than one night away from his house without a judge’s permission. A video camera was trained on his front door, and at the end of each month, Ghosn was required to provide a list of everyone he’d met. Ghosn’s overseas travel ban was still in place when he fled to Lebanon, according to Kyodo.

    The mystery of how Ghosn left Japan deepens as his passport was confiscated as part of the conditions of bail. According to Lebanese media, he arrived on a private jet from Turkey. Neither is it clear how Japan might get Ghosn back: The country has extradition treaties with the U.S. and South Korea, according to the foreign ministry’s website.

    Ghosn was born in Brazil and raised in Lebanon, where he has investments in real estate and vineyards and continues to be viewed as a business icon and wunderkind. His image has been used for national postal stamps.  Since the early days of his incarceration, Ghosn won support from Lebanon.

    And so, just as Jeffrey Epstein managed to “suicide” himself despite constant surveillance and suicide watch, so too Carlos Ghosn, arguably the highest profile alleged criminals under house arrest currently, somehow managed to evade his overseers and flee to one of the few countries that has no extradition treaty with Japan…

    * * *

    Earlier:

    Just over 13 months after his arrest in Japan, The FT reports that former Nissan-Renault Chairman Carlos Ghosn is no longer under house arrest in Japan and has arrived in his parents’ native Lebanon, according to a source close to the Nissan-Renault chairman’s family and a professional associate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ghosn had been out on bail, under house arrest, for alleged financial wrongdoing in Japan. Ghosn holds Lebanese, French and Brazilian citizenship.

    Local media reported that, according to an associate of Mr Ghosn, he arrived in a private jet  at Beirut’s Rafic al-Hariri international airport late on Sunday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For now, it is unclear whether the former carmaker’s chairman has escaped house arrest in Japan or whether a deal has been struck for his release. 

    Dow Jones also reported Ghosn arrived in Lebanon, said he plans to hold a press conference in the coming days.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 22:55

  • Chinese Scientist Who Created First Gene-Edited Babies Sentenced To 3 Years In Prison
    Chinese Scientist Who Created First Gene-Edited Babies Sentenced To 3 Years In Prison

    A Chinese court on Monday sentenced a scientist responsible for creating the world’s first genetically modified children to a three-year stretch in prison after his experiments elicited a massive backlash over what some described as a blatant abuse of bioethics, according to reports in the Chinese press that were picked up by WSJ.

    The court accused Dr. He Jiankui of forging documents to conceal what he was doing from both the patients he recruited for the trial and the doctors who performed the work alongside him. Both Dr. He and two alleged “accomplices” pleaded guilty, according to the court.

    “In order to pursue fame and profit, they deliberately violated the relevant national regulations, and crossed the bottom lines of scientific and medical ethics,” the court said.

    Dr. He (the son of rice farmers) graduated with a degree in physics in China before getting a doctorate from Rice University in the US. Eventually, he switched to studying biology, which led to his interest in gene-editing technology.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. He

    People who knew the doctor said he wanted to make history, and also ameliorate what he saw as an injustice against HIV-positive people in China, who are barred from receiving fertility treatments. It’s believed that the doctor expected a reward from Beijing for helping China reach its goal of becoming a leader in genetic science.

    Instead, Dr. He stunned the global scientific community last year when he revealed that he had successfully edited the genes of two twin babies from HIV+ parents. Dr. He said he had engineered the twin girls using a gene-editing technology called Crispr-Cas9 to be resistant to HIV. The girls were born of a healthy mother and an HIV+ father, which can sometimes lead to the virus being passed down to the children.

    He also admitted to creating a third genetically modified baby. Chinese authorities said they will monitor all three children into adulthood.

    Unfortunately for Dr. He, the accolades he had anticipated never materialized.

    Instead, his revelation elicited condemnation from bioethicists and other doctors in China, including the inventors of the gene-editing technology he used. Dr. He was soon fired from his post at Southern University of Science and Technology (based in the southern city of Shenzhen).

    And on Monday, he was convicted by a court in Shenzhen of illegally practicing medicine.

    Bioethics contend that editing the genes of embryos is a much more sensitive area because those children will eventually grow up and risk passing on the edited genes to the next generation, creating room for unintended consequences to surface decades down the road.

    In the US, gene-editing technology has mostly been applied to terminally ill patients who likely won’t pass on the changes to the next generation.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 22:45

  • Seattle Company Used Secret Drain To Dump Toxic Waste Directly Into Sewer System
    Seattle Company Used Secret Drain To Dump Toxic Waste Directly Into Sewer System

    Authored by Emma Fiala via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    According to a 36-count grand jury indictment, a Seattle company used a hidden drain to dump a highly-corrosive chemical solution directly into the sewer system.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The King County sewer system eventually reaches the Duwamish Waterway and the Puget Sound.

    After “a sensitive sewer flow meter tipped them off to something strange,” agents sent a robot into the sewer to investigate, the Seattle Times reports.

    Inside the sewer, the robot’s camera recorded a white stain of unknown origin and, according to a federal indictment handed down earlier this month, federal agents executed a search warrant after real-time monitoring equipment they installed indicated an unusual spike in the water’s pH.

    During the search, a portable pump covered in a high-pH liquid and a hidden drain that had never been disclosed were both discovered.

    It turns out, both the company’s owner and the manager of the plant, who happen to be cousins, have been lying to regulators since at least 2009, according to the indictment. The scheme was discovered in 2018.

    The Seattle Barrel and Cooperage Company collects used 55-gallon industrial drums and resells them after undergoing a reconditioning process that involves washing them in a tank full of highly-corrosive chemical solution. The family-owned company is legally obligated to dispose of the caustic solution properly.

    Louie Sanft and John Sanft have both charged with criminal conspiracy as well as 29 counts of violating the Clean Water Act—one for each of the 29 times that investigators documented the waste being discharged into the sewer system in 2018 and 2019—and are expected to appear in court next month.

    The century-old company is laying the blame on a former employee whose employment was terminated earlier this year, according to Seattle Barrel’s lawyer, Harold Malkin. That employee hasn’t been named or charged.

    Louie Sanft’s lawyer, Angelo Calfo, blames the former employee as well and says that the Justice Department and the EPA both made a “serious error” in charging his client.

    Calfo explained:

    “Louie had no motive to do this. Company practice and policy was to have the tank water boiled down and evaporated. Any sludge from the tank would be transported for proper disposal. This case is about a former employee who cut corners for his own gain.”

    The county began monitoring Seattle Barrel’s activities via “cover monitoring” after a King County Industrial Waste employee observed the plant manager dump an oily substance directly into a sewer. The company was fined $55,250 in 2013 after the county discovered violations of its wastewater discharge permit. After various improvements, the company claimed to be a “zero discharge” facility but, according to the indictment, those improvements didn’t involve the caustic solution that the company has been dumping directly into the sewer system.

    Seattle Barrel was also required to pay $30,000 in fines after the Washington Department of Ecology discovered the company was “failing to identify caustic wastewater as a hazardous waste, missing labels on hazardous waste containers and lacking measures to prevent the escape of hazardous liquids.”

    U.S. Attorney Brian Moran said:

    “At a time when we are searching for strategies to protect Puget Sound and improve water quality for fish and wildlife, we need companies to do their share—not scheme for ways to pollute in private.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 22:25

    Tags

  • A Major Bank Admits QE4 Has Started, And That Stocks Are Rising Because Of The Fed's Soaring Balance Sheet
    A Major Bank Admits QE4 Has Started, And That Stocks Are Rising Because Of The Fed’s Soaring Balance Sheet

    There was a period of about two months when some of the more confused, Fed sycophantic elements, would parrot everything Powell would say regarding the recently launched $60 billion in monthly purchases of T-Bills, and which according to this rather vocal, if always wrong, subsegment of financial experts, did not constitute QE. Perhaps one can’t really blame them: after all, unable to think for themselves, they merely repeated what Powell said, namely that  “growth of our balance sheet for reserve management purposes should in no way be confused with the large-scale asset purchase programs that we deployed after the financial crisis. Neither the recent technical issues nor the purchases of Treasury bills we are contemplating to resolve them should materially affect the stance of monetary policy. In no sense, is this QE.

    As it turned out, it was QE from the perspective of the market, which saw the Fed boosting its balance sheet by $60BN per month, and together with another $20BN or so in TSY and MBS maturity reinvestments, as well as tens of billions in overnight and term repos, and soared roughly around the time the Fed announced “not QE.”

    And so, as the Fed’s balance sheet exploded by over $400 billion in under four months, a rate of balance sheet expansion that surpassed QE1, QE2 and Qe3…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … stocks blasted off higher roughly at the same time as the Fed’s QE returned, and are now up every single week since the start of the Fed’s QE4 announcement when the Fed’s balance sheet rose, and are down just one week since then: the week when the Fed’s balance sheet shrank.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The result of this unprecedented correlation between the market’s response to the Fed’s actions – and the Fed’s growing balance sheet – has meant that it gradually became impossible to deny that what the Fed is doing is no longer QE. It started with Bank of America in mid-November (as described in “One Bank Finally Admits The Fed’s “NOT QE” Is Indeed QE… And Could Lead To Financial Collapse“), and then after several other banks also joined in, and even Fed fanboy David Zervos admitted on CNBC that the Fed is indeed doing QE, the tipping point finally arrived, and it was no longer blasphemy (or tinfoil hat conspiracy theory) to call out the naked emperor, and overnight none other than Deutsche Bank joined the “truther” chorus, when in a report by the bank’s chief economist Torsten Slok, he writes what we pointed out several weeks back, namely that “since QE4 started in October, a 1% increase in the Fed balance sheet has been associated with a 1% increase in the S&P500, see chart below.” Not that DB has absolutely no qualms about calling what the Fed is doing QE4 for the simple reason that… it is QE4.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The chart in question, which is effectively the same as the one we created above, shows the weekly change in the Fed’s balance sheet and the S&P500 as a scatterplot, and concludes that all it takes to push the S&P higher by 1% is to grow the Fed’s balance sheet by 1%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And just to underscore this point, the strategist points out that such a finding is “consistent with this new working paper, which finds that QE boosts stock markets even when controlling for improving macro fundamentals.” Which, of course, is hardly rocket science – after all when you inject hundreds of billions into the market in months, and this money can’t enter the economy, it will enter the market. The result: the S&P trading at an all time high in a year in which corporate profits actually decreased and the entire rise in the stock market was due to multiple expansion.

    In short: the Kool Aid is flowing, the party is in full force and everyone has to dance, because the Fed will continue to perform QE4 at least until Q2 2020. Which reminds us of what we wrote last week, namely that another big bank, Morgan Stanley, has already seen through the current meltup phase, and predicts the “Melt-Up Lasting Until April, After Which Markets Will “Confront World With No Fed Support“.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 22:05

  • Jonathan Turley: The 11th Commandment – Thou Shalt Not Testify For Republicans
    Jonathan Turley: The 11th Commandment – Thou Shalt Not Testify For Republicans

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    American journalist H.L. Mencken once observed, “Say what you will about the Ten Commandments, you must always come back to the pleasant fact that there are only ten of them.” Despite an unending respect for Mencken, this is an occasion in which I found him mistaken, after I violated the Eleventh Commandment, “Thou shalt not testify for Republicans.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Worse yet, I am a recidivist sinner, after testifying as a constitutional expert in both the Clinton and Trump impeachment hearings. Like all mortal sins, the violation of the Eleventh Commandment comes with not just eternal but immediate damnation. What is most striking about this commandment is that it does not matter if your testimony is made in good faith. For example, under the Ninth Commandment, you are only guilty if you give false evidence against your neighbor. Under the Eleventh Commandment, it does not matter if your testimony is true or false. A law-fearing academic must not give any testimony for Republicans.

    In my recent testimony before the House Judiciary Committee regarding President Trump’s impeachment, I opposed the position of my fellow witnesses that the definition of actual crimes is immaterial to their use as the basis for impeachment – and I specifically opposed impeachment articles based on bribery, extortion, campaign finance violations or obstruction of justice. The committee ultimately rejected those articles and adopted the only two articles I felt could be legitimately advanced: abuse of power, obstruction of Congress. Chairman Jerrold Nadler even ended the hearing by quoting my position on abuse of power. Our only disagreement was that I opposed impeachment on this record as incomplete and insufficient for submission to the Senate.

    None of that matters under the Eleventh Commandment, however. It is the act of testifying for Republicans that is a sin against the legal academy. Indeed, what followed was a series of false stories attacking not my testimony but me, personally. The falsity of these stories is a warning to any academic who considers straying from the Democratic path.

    Turley flipped his testimony from the Clinton impeachment. 

    One of the most bizarre false stories was that I testified differently on my views of impeachment during the Clinton and Trump impeachments. Given the 21-year gap, it might not be strange for views to change. However, my views in the two cases were the same.

    In both hearings, I said a president could be impeached for noncriminal conduct, including abuse of public office. Yet stories on CNN and other outlets objected that, in the Clinton case, I warned Congress, “If you decide that certain acts do not rise to impeachable offenses, you will expand the space for executive conduct.” Somehow this was portrayed as a “flip-flop” since I was arguing against impeachment in the Trump hearings on this record. It doesn’t matter that the Judiciary Committee did precisely what I suggested in dropping the four criminal theories for the articles or going forward with the two I said would be legitimate. I was not arguing against impeaching on the two articles adopted — only that a completed record was absent.

    More importantly, the statement in the Clinton case referred to perjury. Democrats argued back then that a president could commit perjury on some subjects, such as sexual relations, and not face impeachment; they argued that an impeachment crime must be tied to the office, not to personal interests. That was ridiculous and would allow a president to kill a lover but not face impeachment. Indeed, the Democratic position would allow a presidential Harvey Weinstein to abuse countless interns and then pressure them to lie to an independent counsel.

    Turley thought Justice Sotomayor wasn’t smart enough. 

    Perhaps the most vile false story can be traced to a tweet sent out by a University of Baltimore law professor asking, “Does anybody else remember @JonathanTurley appearing on MSNBC to explain that Sonia Sotomayor didn’t have the intellect to serve on the Supreme Court?” I certainly didn’t remember that — because I never said anything like that. No matter: Soon, from MSNBC to liberal websites, the story was all the rage, with titles such as “Jonathan Turley thought Sonia Sotomayor wasn’t smart enough to be on the Supreme Court.”

    When then-Judge Sotomayor was nominated, I was asked as a legal commentator to review her opinions and give my view of what that body of work suggested about her potential on the Supreme Court. The issue at the time was whether President Obama was appointing an intellectual counterweight to conservative Justice Antonin Scalia. I noted that her opinions were narrow and offered few insights into her potential as an intellectual force on the court. My comments were directed to her opinions, not her intellect. And I was not alone in this conclusion: Adam Liptak in The New York Times noted that her opinions were “narrow” and “reveal no larger vision, seldom appeal to history and consistently avoid quotable language.”

    In the interview cited by the Baltimore professor, I gave my view of 30 of Sotomayor’s opinions, which did not contain anything particularly deep or profound in judging her possible impact on the court. However, I immediately stated that this is not unique and that other justices have had similarly short, unremarkable appellate opinions yet proved to be profound on the Supreme Court. I expressly compared Sotomayor to Justice John Paul Stevens, whom I have long praised; I also said that Sotomayor could prove to be a truly great justice but that her opinions did not offer any glimpse into how she might emerge in such a role.

    In my analysis of Justice Sotomayor’s nomination, I returned to these points and specifically objected to those who said her narrow decisions were evidence of a lack of intellectual depth. I wrote, “This is demonstrably absurd. These opinions are little different from those of [Justices] Alito, Souter, or the limited writings of [Justice] Thomas. Clearly, Sotomayor is quite intelligent. This record is little different from records of Republican nominees who enthralled these same critics.” And I repeatedly stressed that she could prove to be a great nominee in finding voice and depth in her opinions on the court.

    Some articles objected that, in an “unprompted” comment, I raised Sotomayor’s gender and race. I did so to praise the selection of the first Latina to the court, a nomination that I said was “rightfully” a point of pride. Moreover, the vast majority of news stories also referenced that historic aspect of her nomination. However, that was separate from the analysis of her opinions and the question of her intellectual legacy. What also was omitted is that, before Sotomayor’s nomination, I wrote a column on intellectual leaders on the courts and pushed for the nomination of Diane Wood of the 7th Circuit, a liberal powerhouse.

    None of that matters, however, because heresy demands condemnation — whether or not it is based in reality. After all, this is all meant to get people not to seriously consider the flaws in the impeachment, including the proposed articles that ultimately were dropped. So, for any academic tempted to testify for Republicans in an impeachment proceeding, I can only caution that Romans 12:19 may say that “vengeance is mine … sayeth the Lord” – but judgment will be more immediate for anyone who strays from the chosen professorial path.

    Jonathan Turley is the Shapiro Professor of Public Interest Law for George Washington University and served as the last lead counsel during a Senate impeachment trial. He testified as a witness expert in the House Judiciary Committee hearing during the impeachment inquiry of President Trump.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 21:45

  • China Approves New GMO Crops From The US For Imports
    China Approves New GMO Crops From The US For Imports

    China’s agriculture ministry said Monday that it had approved two new genetically modified crops for import from the U.S., reported Reuters

    The announcement comes ahead of a potential Phase 1 trade deal signing between Beijing and Washington next month. The U.S. has long demanded that China imports more genetically modified crops. 

    According to Reuters, the new crops approved for import were Corteva AgriScience’s DAS-81419-2 soybean and 55-1 papaya, developed by the USDA and Hawaii University.

    “This further expands channels for imports of U.S. agricultural products, and helps pave the way for buying more U.S. soybeans,” said Li Qiang, chief analyst with Shanghai J.C. Intelligence Co. Ltd.

    Reuters also said China renewed import licenses for ten other genetically modified crops, including BASF developed T25 corn, A5547-127 soybean, T45 canola, Oxy-235 canola, and Ms8Rf3 canola.

    Bayer-owned Monsanto Far East Ltd’s MON89788 soybean, 15985 cotton, and H7-1 beet were also reapproved for import, along with DuPont subsidiary Pioneer’s 305423 soybean and 305423×GTS40-3-2 soybean.

    With the signing of the Phase 1 trade deal expected next month, China’s Customs Administration reported last week that inbound agriculture shipments from the U.S. more than doubled to 2.6 million tons, the highest since March 2018, and up from about 1.1 million tons in October.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While China is unlikely to order less soybean from either Brazil or Argentina any time soon as the two nations have emerged as the two key supply chain alternatives to the U.S., the continued push to reopen the U.S. market to Chinese importers comes as China food inflation is soaring. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 21:25

  • Schlichter: Here's What's Going To Happen In 2020
    Schlichter: Here’s What’s Going To Happen In 2020

    Authored by Kurt Schlichter, op-ed via Townhall.com,

    If you thought you can’t top the stupidity we experienced in 2019, brace yourself for 2020 because it’s going to be a pronoun-fueled weather cult pinko freakshow. But it won’t be all amusing antics – the left hates us and its ugly mask is coming off, revealing the even uglier fascist visage lurking beneath. If you listen to them, and if you aren’t an insufferable goo goo wimp who refuses to hear them, you will know that they intend to silence you, even imprison you, and deprive you of the ability to participate in your own governance. So, if you want to live as a free man or woman – if they have their way, they’ll destroy you for recognizing that unalterable binary – best be ready. 

    Be motivated to engage in the cultural melee. 

    Vote. 

    And buy guns and ammo. As my favorite literary creation famously says, no one has ever regretted being too well armed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With that in mind, here are my predictions for 2020:

    10. Trump Will Be Impeached…Yawn: Poor, flailing Nancy Pelosi will eventually transmit the articles of impeachment to the Senate, thereby actually impeaching the President. Now, whether Pelosi’s current antics constitute “impeachment” or not is irrelevant, except denying it due to her gamesmanship is fun because it owns the libs. No one cares, and to the limited extent we normal people do, this alleged impeachment is a badge of honor for the President. Her fringe-driven delay tactics make the Dems look dumber, and eventually she will send it to the Senate where Cocaine Mitch will kill it. Sure, some of the useless GOP caucus will make noises about how this clusterfark must be taken seriously because principles and honor and stuff. Saps. They just better take seriously that we in the base will electorally eviscerate them if they vote to convict. Maybe Mitt the Gimp will vote for it because he’s weak and stupid. Maybe Senator Iglookowski (RINO-AK) will too. But in the end, Trump will triumph and yet again humiliate his opponents.

    9. The Economy Will Stay Strong, Disappointing Democrats: The party of the workin’ man is already in mourning because the Trump economy has finally brought some prosperity back to the workin’ man instead of concentrating wealth among the globalist liberal gentry that Obama served. The media will cheerlead for a recession; the Democrats will try to ignore the new Roaring 20s, but America’s success will remain a nightmare for liberals during 2020.

    8. Virginia Will Declare War on Its Citizens: The liberals recently elected as moderates in the Old Dominion will reveal their true colors as they attempt to crush dissent wherever voters were stupid enough to elect them. The Virginia left will not back down – it will attempt to criminalize vast numbers of citizens and bend them to its will using violence and legal terrorism if need be. This will provoke a counterreaction that will make it clear to moderates that electing liberals means voting for conflict, not just center-left business as usual like with old school Democrats. Look for it to get ugly. They think they can break our will, and they will learn they can’t. This will energize conservatives across the country.

    7. Replacing Justice Ginsburg: She’s had a good run but the opponent conservatives tend to most respect for being tough is playing a losing game against statistics. It is not to wish ill upon her to say that time is not on her side; in 2020, it is very, very likely Donald Trump will be replacing her. Count on the Murder Turtle not to buy into an interpretation of the Garland Rule that ties his hands – it’s confirmation time. The Democrats will go even nuttier than usual, but too bad. Just get ready for future Justice Amy Coney Barrett to have to explain that, yes, she likes beer, and no, she didn’t run a rape gang in elementary school.

    6. Trans Fascism Backlash: Normal people are getting tired of being told they have to lie and say there are 631 sexes, and they are tired of militant jerks wanting boys hanging out in their girls’ locker room, and they are getting sick of boys winning girls’ sports championships. J.K. Rowling, who is otherwise a leftist doofus, recently survived social media cancelation for telling the truth that sex is real. The rest of us will be roused to action – people were trying to be polite, but now it’s all too stupid and obnoxious to tolerate. There is a big difference between being kind and not adding to the pain of people with real issues, and with being forced by drag bullies and their allies to publicly affirm what everyone knows is false. Look for more and more people, prominent and not prominent, to be told that they must agree that men can get pregnant and that women can have penises, and to answer, “No.”

    5. Pardon This: We will see the President pardon the victims of Deep State vendettas designed to overturn the election of 2016. General Mike Flynn, Roger Stone, and Paul Manafort will all be cleared, probably right after the election. Which is good, because we will need the cells for…

    4. Durham’s Indictments: The investigation into the soft coup is going to turn up wrongdoing that the entrenched leftist bureaucracy can’t shove under the rug anymore. John Durham telegraphed his righteous retribution when he publicly rejected IG Horowitz’s pathetic shrug over the Deep State’s shenanigans. We’re going to see some folks finally held to account. Not all of them – not Felonia Milhous von Pantsuit, not that Looming Doofus Comey, but others. It’s an important first step in defeating the cancer on our government that is having these Democrat partisans in positions of power in the bureaucracy.

    3. Foreign Policy Success: With the National Security Council under the properly low-key and sober guidance of Robert O’Brien (I know him – great guy and perfect for this job), America will continue to rebuild its strength, wind down open-ended military commitments, force allies to do their part, and avoid unnecessary conflicts. Iran will continue to destabilize, but we will not go to war – we will neuter the mullahs economically and let the Persian people deal with their oppressors. China has some strengths but many weaknesses – we will exploit those and build a trade relationship based on reciprocity instead of American submission. NATO countries will reluctantly fork over their dues, and our relationship with the UK will become even more special now that it is free of the EU’s yoke. Foreigners finally understand – America will use every element of its power to defend American interests, so behave. Also, we will get the Space Force going (long overdue) and move toward a 355-ship Navy (very long overdue). Finally, look for a promotion for America’s most effective diplomat (and future GOP presidential contender) Richard Grenell.

    2. Democrats Will Lose the House: They took the House back promising to be pragmatic do-gooders who would work across party lines to do the people’s business blah blah blah blah blah. It was all garbage. The ones that weren’t actively defiling hotel room furniture via naked hair brushing grossness with underlings were obediently obeying Pelosi’s commands. “Impeach? Yes, ma’am, right away, ma’am.” And what were they doing that was useful to their voters? Nothing – America’s biggest problem is not that Democrats have too little control.

    1. Trump Will Get Reelected: There are a number of reasons, many recited above. But the most important is that God looks out for the United States. Oh, and the Dems will nominate Biden, who will choose Sitting Bolshevik as his VP (He’s gotta choose a girl and Willie Brown’s Ex is out for dissing him and he can’t choose Amy Tantrum Gal Klobuchar because he needs to nail down the Dem’s commie wing). A fake Indian and a fake competent leader – great combo. Once nominated, Gropey J will continue to commit gaffes, only his slobbering media buddies won’t be able to keep hiding them. Plus, there’s the Lil’ Crackpipe factor. Hoover Biden, the nominee’s Snortunate Son, will have another crack issue, or another paternity suit, or maybe both – which the garbage media will tell us is none of our business and is not important. But it is. In the end, Trump will improve on his 2016 Electoral College numbers and win the popular vote too, at which point the liberals will turn against the entire concept of voting.

    *  *  *

    I also predict that my newest novel Collapse will continue to be an Amazon bestseller, and that there will be another action-packed, hilarious novel coming next year once I finish my traditional non-fiction book for Regnery that is also due out in 2020. Go ahead and use that gift card you got at Christmas or Hanukkah or Kwanzaa to get the other entries in the series, People’s RepublicIndian Country and Wildfire. Remember, every time you read one of my books, the Never Trump weenies who called them “appalling” sob and rend their sissy bow ties.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 21:05

    Tags

  • Fox Crushes Cable News With Record High Viewership As CNN Implodes
    Fox Crushes Cable News With Record High Viewership As CNN Implodes

    Fox News dominated the basic cable news industry in 2019, according to a new report, which specifies the network has hit record high viewership. 

    Nielsen Media Research said Fox News averaged 2.5 million viewers during primetime in 2019, far outpacing any other news network. The network’s viewership hit a 23-year high this year, blowing out its competitors, CNN and MSNBC, by a long shot. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fox News even beat out ESPN with its 1.78 million viewers during primetime. It seems the American people under a Trump administration are more concerned about politics and the economy than sports. MSNBC trailed ESPN for the third spot at 1.75 viewers during primetime. This is the fourth consecutive year Fox News has blown out its competitors. 

    Nielsen said CNN came in 22nd place, recorded just 972,000 viewers during primetime. 

    The gap in viewership between Fox News and CNN on a nightly basis is nearly 1.5 million viewers daily during primetime.

    Fox News’ “Hannity” was the most popular news show with 3.3 million viewers during primetime. The second was “Tucker Carlson Tonight” with 3.1 million, and MSNBC’s “Rachel Maddow Show” was third with 2.78 million. 

    To sum up, CNN is suffering a credibility crisis as viewership is in a mass exodus, fleeing the fake news network to more conservative networks, such as Fox News. There appears to be no plan of action by CNN or liberal media to fix the hemorrhaging of viewership, indicating the trend will persist through 2020. 

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 20:45

  • Did Pompeo Go Off Reservation In Iraq Attack?
    Did Pompeo Go Off Reservation In Iraq Attack?

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    I have to wonder who Secretary of State Mike Pompeo is actually loyal to. Because, the U.S. strike of Kata’ib Hizbullah forces near the Al Qaim border crossing with Syria in Iraq is a dangerous escalation there.

    And it’s completely at odds with Trump’s goals of wanting us out of the Middle East. The Al Qaim border crossing is a particular red line for Israel and their allies in the U.S. State and Defense Departments.

    It represents the normalization of commerce between Syria, Iraq and Iran over time. This is the so-called Shia Crescent which is the stuff of nightmares for Benjamin Netanyahu.

    And the U.S. has been hopping mad for months since now caretaker Iraqi Prime Minister Adil Abdel Mahdi opened the border because it undermines U.S. presence in Syria.

    The entire point of U.S. occupation of the Al-Tanf border crossing into Jordan and the oil fields in Deir Ezzor province is about starving the Syrian government of any reliable energy and revenue.

    When Al Qaim/Al Bukamai was opened it was only a matter of time before a major skirmish would occur over it. Israel staged a series of air attacks previously using U.S. assets and air bases to launch them back in September.

    Now, we have the convenient excuse for attacking these forces which are part of the Popular Mobiliztion Units, PMU, which Pompeo despises by ‘retaliating’ for a rocket attack on the K1 base near Kirkuk where one U.S. mercenary was killed and a handful of others injured.

    The response from the U.S. Air Force was completely out of line with the initial attack and occurred without any attempt by Pompeo and Secretary of Defense Mark Esper to justify it.

    They just invoked the phrase, “Iran-backed forces” and then bombed troops over 200 miles away where they wanted to strike anyway.

    And what’s important is what both Elijah Magnier and Moon of Alabama pointed out immediately, the U.S. struck member of Shia militias who were made official part of the Iraqi defense forces.

    In other words the U.S. just attacked and killed dozens of Iraqi military personnel.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And the U.S. can get away with this because the Iraqi government is in a total state of flux, thanks to a President, Barham Salih, refusing to honor the constitution, obstructing the selection of a new Prime Minister.

    His actions remind me of Italy’s Sergio Mattarella who inserts himself into the process of government formation there to suit his EU partners-in-crime.

    In Iraq the U.S. has been officially silent on the government turmoil there but the circumstances are pretty clear that the chaos works as a cover for what was an egregious violation of Iraq’s sovereignty.

    Remember, the U.S. forces there are at the invitation of the Iraqi government and with Salih keeping the Shia political forces from uniting to choose a Prime Minister, the likelihood of that invitation being rescinded now is remote.

    Color me not shocked that this attack on PMU forces occurred. Pompeo has been itching for an excuse to attack them for months. He tried his version of diplomacy with Prime Minister Mahdi to rescind their official status and was unsuccessful.

    Mahdi was livid after Israel’s air attack and made noises about rescinding the U.S. invitation. No shock then that protests against his government spun up quickly after that.

    So at some point this attack was going to happen. Netanyahu in serious political trouble facing a third election in a year, unable to form a government.

    Pompeo coming to his rescue to keep the dream of warring with Iran should be obvious to all.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The question is whether President Trump is engaged with this policy at all or did Pompeo and Defense Secretary Mark Esper go off on their own, pull this trigger and then inform Trump and get him to accept this post hoc?

    Everywhere Pompeo goes one week winds up in flames the next anymore. When he visits a trouble spot which Israel and the neoconservatives he represents want destabilized, a miracle occurs the next week.

    Before this it was Lebanon and Iraq. This week it’s Ukraine. There is the threat of peace breaking out there with Russia and Ukraine agreeing to terms on both a gas and oil transit contract into Europe which Pompeo is dead set against.

    Will we see some attack on Ukrainian forces which break the peace and can be blamed on Russia?

    Trump has to know that escalation from here ends with U.S. forces coming home in body bags as PMU forces themselves, go off the reservation during this power vacuum in Baghdad and attack U.S. troops directly.

    But I think this is exactly what Bibi and Pompeo want. This attack was a clear provocation to escalate and give Israel and the neocons all the ammunition they need to force Trump into the wider conflict with Iran they’ve been angry about not getting for six months now.

    They failed with the Global Hawk incident back in June. That operation got John Bolton fired as National Security Director. Now we have a clearly disproportionate strike designed to inflame passions of Iran-backed Shia forces.

    And it looks like it worked.

    The entirety of Iraq’s leadership seems to be of the same mind, and even rejected the US plan to strike when they were tipped off immediately before it happened, per NBC:

    In a statement, [former PM] Abdul-Mahdi said Secretary of Defense Mark Esper had called him about a half-hour before the U.S. strikes Sunday to tell him of U.S. intentions to hit the bases of the militia suspected of being behind Friday’s rocket attack. Abdul-Mahdi said he asked Esper to call off the U.S. plan.

    One byproduct of the major US strikes on Sunday is sure to be that more and more of the Iraqi population will view the Americans, and not the Iranians, as the foreign occupiers.

    This dramatic escalation by Washington is only likely to push more popular support toward the Shia PMF, and strengthen the movement in parliament to have US forces legally expelled, especially with the demise of the ISIS threat. 

    Any strike by the PMU here on U.S. forces will be music to Pompeo’s and Netanyhahu’s ears. And it will put Trump in a real bind with his base during an election year and an impeachment process Speaker Nancy Pelosi is purposefully dragging out to build a stronger case.

    What stronger case could there be at this point if Trump were to not declare war or fire back on our troops getting attacked in Iraq or Syria? He’s derelict as Commander-in-Chief. It’s part of their stupid Ukraine narrative that Trump withheld aid weakens our national security.

    I speculated in the past that Trump was getting ready to fire Pompeo.

    As Secretary of State Pompeo has been nothing short of a disaster, undermining President Trump’s strong instincts to get the U.S. out of the Middle East and solve the myriad of open geopolitical wounds around the world.

    Unlike his former-partner-in-neoconservatism, John Bolton, Pompeo is more adept at playing at being loyal to Trump while always seeming to move U.S. diplomacy in a more belligerent direction in the wake of any of Trump’s ‘impulses’ to act on his conscience and/or instincts.

    It doesn’t matter if we’re talking Iran (Pompeo’s demands of Iran are off-the-charts insane), Lebanon (outright blackmail of the Lebanese government) or North Korea (making demands in negotiations which overstep Trump’s promises to Kim Jong-un) Pompeo is always there doing his thinly-veiled Israeli loyalty dance with the subtlety of a freight-train but somehow always framing it as making it Trump’s policy.

    This move by Pompeo looks like a classic pre-emptive move to bind Trump down force him into a war which will be unpopular back home. The only one who wins with this attack is Israel.

    U.S. troops are now less safe, effective forces fighting ISIS have been neutered and the Iraqi government is in shambles. Good job Mike.

    Mike wants his golden parachute back to the Senate where he can continue doing god’s work for the Israelis, one more voice in a U.S. Senate seemingly without a limit on its thirst for power and the blood of the world.

    This won’t end well and Trump better get his Flying Monkeys under control quick or he won’t be President much longer. Because when the body bags start, he’ll be the one who gets blamed.

    *  *  *

    Join my Patreon to get the 360 view of geopolitics and markets.  Install the Brave Browser to help ensure we’ll be allowed to.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 20:25

  • China Non-Manufacturing PMI Slides Back Near Multi-Year Lows
    China Non-Manufacturing PMI Slides Back Near Multi-Year Lows

    Following a big, surprise jump in November, China’s official PMIs were expected to fall back a little in December (but remain – handily – above 50 and the ‘expansion/contraction’ divide), helped by an improvement in industrial production and hopes after the ‘phase one’ trade deal was (allegedly) completed.

    A mixed bag though with manufacturing PMI flat at 50.2 (better than the expected 50.1) and non-manufacturing PMI lower at 53.5 (from 54.4) and below expectations of 54.2.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    New manufacturing orders picked up (the last time the reading was above 50 was May 2018), but the improvement in manufacturing was concentrated in large- and medium-sized enterprises with small enterprises plunging deeper into contraction (at 47.2).

    New non-manufacturing orders slowed as prices (selling and buying fell), pushing employment further into contraction (48.3).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The slide in Services dragged the composite PMI for China overall lower (but still well above the rest of the major world economies)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    We wonder how long this re-excitement of hope about Chinese economic growth will last given the massive amount of stimulus has produced a very meager credit impulse…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    “The potential de-escalation of China-U.S. trade tension, improved global manufacturing demand, inventory restocking driven by lessening demand headwinds, and accelerated infrastructure investment growth in China may continue to support a moderate cyclical recovery,” China International Capital Corp. economist Eva Yiwrote in a note.

    “Gross domestic product growth in the fourth quarter may pick up on a sequential basis compared with the third quarter.”

    The government is also reportedly rolling out a range of policies to support the economy in 2020.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 20:11

  • Trump The Terrible: The Left's Boogeyman
    Trump The Terrible: The Left’s Boogeyman

    Authored by James Fite via LibertyNation.com,

    The Trump Derangement Syndrome fevers ran high last week, as the media chattered on about their new favorite boogeyman. He’s a madman. He’s a gangster. He’s the most dangerous man on the planet. He’s Trump the Terrible – and we must get rid of him at any cost lest he win another term in the White House.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Donald The Delusional

    Donald Trump is clearly insane – as in, 25th Amendment, let’s get him out of office insane. Or that’s the professional opinion of the completely ethical and uninterested in politics Dr. Bandy X. Lee. Back in January of 2018, Dr. Lee generously examined President Trump – without actually meeting with him – and declared him dangerously nuts. There is one problem with her diagnosis, however. As Liberty Nation’s Mark Angelides explained at the time:

    “The American Psychiatric Association (APA) actually bans psychiatrists from making a diagnosis without a direct examination. Not only is this rule in place because the APA believes without a face to face examination, all information is worthless, but they also see it as highly unethical.”

    And as for not being politically motivated, at the time of her so-called diagnosis, Dr. Lee was promoting a book titled – of all things – The Dangerous Case of Donald Trump.

    Thankfully, her plan to have the president declared unfit and removed from office based on her clearly biased opinion failed and she faded out of the public eye. But just as the Herpes virus lurks beneath the surface only to pop up from time to time with surprise outbreaks, Dr. Lee has not and will not leave us be. She erupted back into the spotlight in June of 2019, leading a group of other anti-Trump mental health professionals at Capitol Hill as they tried to spread awareness of the Delusional Don.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Bandy Lee

    It seems as true now as it was back in June when LN wrote, “if you thought you had heard the last of Dr. Bandy X. Lee, you’re as crazy as anyone who thinks her plan could actually work. That’s right, she’s back.” And back she is. This time, the good doctor is calling on Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) to demand Trump receive an evaluation.

    Leave it to Salon to dig up the doctor for her opinion on Trump’s mental health. Their title says it all: “Pelosi ‘has the right’ to submit Trump to an ‘involuntary evaluation’: Yale psychiatrist Bandy Lee.” Never mind impeachment – Speaker Pelosi, it seems, is falling behind in her duty to protect the nation from this dangerous madman.

    “As a coworker, she has the right to have him submit to an involuntary evaluation, but she has not,” Lee told Salon. “Anyone can call 911 to report someone who seems dangerous, and family members are the most typical ones to do so. But so can coworkers, and even passersby on the street. The law dictates who can determine right to treatment, or civil commitment, and in all 50 U.S. states this includes a psychiatrist.”

    Dr. Lee goes on to say that a mental health hold seems inevitable, but her opinion here is once again suspect. “I am beginning to believe that a mental health hold, which we have tried to avoid, will become inevitable,” Lee said. Avoid? She has actively campaigned to have him declared unfit to lead and removed from office! It makes you wonder which of the two, Donald Trump or Bandy Lee, has a mental health issue. She’s bound to fail and fade away as she always does, but when will she pop back up and what will her scheme be then? All we can really say with any certainty is that she will be back, eventually.

    Trump The Thug

    “Donald Trump will not be bound by any rule, even after he has been caught.” So reads the conclusion of a Saturday article in The Atlantic, titled “A Gangster in the White House.” So what has Teflon Don – admittedly, a rather gangster sounding nickname – done this time? He retweeted a follower’s post revealing the name of the person believed to be the whistleblower behind the Ukraine call reveal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tweeter in Chief Donald Trump

    That’s right – the president shared a tweet revealing a name that has been circulating in the media for weeks. By late October, a bevy of articles offering “everything you need to know about Eric Ciaramella the whistleblower” had flooded the media. But Trump’s a gangster because he retweeted a story using the name.

    “Trump is organizing from the White House a conspiracy to revenge himself on the person who first alerted the country that Trump was extorting Ukraine to help his reelection,” the author wrote before declaring the act “more lawbreaking to punish the revelation of past lawbreaking.”

    But there are a few problems with this argument even if we pretend Trump’s call was criminal. First, there is some debate as to who is forbidden from outing a whistleblower. Even if Trump isn’t allowed to reveal the name, his retweeting of a news story two months after the man was first exposed by the media as the most likely candidate is hardly leaking top-secret information.

    And then there’s the question of the whistleblower’s protected status. Of course, the government that has had the whistle blown on it never wants to admit it – just ask Edward Snowden, who would still face prosecution for leaking should he return to the U.S.

    This so-called whistleblower, on the other hand, certainly seems to have some powerful friends protecting him. Did he discover some wrongdoing and blow the whistle, or was he sent to Adam Schiff by a deep state that wants Trump gone? He wouldn’t have a chance if it weren’t for a last-minute rule change removing the requirement that a whistleblower’s complaint be based on first-hand knowledge. LN’s Tim Donner hit the nail on the head when he said, “Common sense can lead you to only one conclusion when rules that would have disallowed the explosive complaint were changed just in time to allow it.”

    Democrats In Denial

    Despite trying to brand President Trump as a mafia-style criminal, a madman, and the most dangerous world leader today, the left has failed to erode his support. But still, they hurl their attacks. Surely, if they just keep fighting on, they can do enough damage to cost him the 2020 election. The left, of course, is simply in denial. Filmmaker and rabid anti-Trumper Michael Moore declared that if the next presidential election were held right now, Trump would win re-election – and he was probably right. But even he suffers from the delusion that Trump is nigh-universally hated. He explained that 70% of the 2020 electorate will be women and racial minorities, all of whom are on the side of the Democrats. Never mind the large number of conservative women who voted for Trump in 2016, and never mind the many blacks and Hispanics who have walked away from the Democratic Party since the last election, who now enjoy the lowest unemployment rates in the nation’s history. To the Democrats in denial, they don’t exist.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 19:45

  • Tesla Plunges After Cowen Note Predicts Missed 2019 Delivery Targets
    Tesla Plunges After Cowen Note Predicts Missed 2019 Delivery Targets

    Tesla stock fell as much as 5% in trading on Monday, suffering its biggest drop in nearly a month after Cowen released a note suggesting that the company could miss its delivery target for the year. 

    The note suggested that Tesla could deliver 356,000 vehicles for the year, which is slightly below the company’s target of 360,000 to 400,000, according to Bloomberg

    Cowen’s note said: “Excluding the Netherlands and China, we expect Model 3 deliveries to be down compared to the prior quarter and year-ago period.”

    Analyst Jeffrey Osborne’s estimate “highlights the demand saturation we are seeing across most mature markets as we shift from pent-up demand to steady flow demand.”

    Cowen also raised its fourth quarter delivery estimate to 101,000 from 95,000 to reflect better expectations for the Netherlands and China. Osborne sees the company missing expectations for Model S/X and posting in-line numbers for Model 3. 

    At the same time, Wedbush’s Dan Ives released a note that predicted “Tesla will find success in China with Giga 3 and potentially hit the key 100,000 delivery number quicker than the U.S./Europe trajectory and be a demand tailwind.”

    But the market seemed to agree with Cowen on Monday at least, as Tesla stock was clipped 3.7% on the day, closing at $414.60. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Starting to catch down to bonds’ reality?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Osborne believes there are many issues facing the company, including  “pricing and mix issues that we believe will affect margins and profitability in the fourth quarter”. He’s also skeptical about long-term demand in China, where we have noted an electric vehicle supply glut is likely in the midst of taking place. 

    Cowen notes that the best selling EV in China this year “has sold less than 2,000 vehicles per week and the top 5 models (all local brands) combined for less than 6,000 vehicles per week.” These models cost about 25% to 75% less than what the China made Model 3 will cost. 

    “While Tesla has built a very dedicated fan base that has been willing to excuse poor build quality, customer service, and service infrastructure, we continue to be skeptical around broader adoption,” Osborne concluded, slapping a price target of $210 on the stock.

    Will Osborne be the trend setter for analysts now that Tesla stock has hit the stratosphere, or will the company continue to elude reality? As the year wraps up, it won’t be long before we know whether or not their prognostication holds water. Tick tock, Elon. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 19:25

  • Caution: Government May Be Hazardous To Your Liberty
    Caution: Government May Be Hazardous To Your Liberty

    Authored by Laurence Vance via The Future of Freedom Foundation,

    The Federal Cigarette Labeling and Advertising Act of 1965 required a health warning to be placed on packs of cigarettes sold in the United States. The original warning, which appeared on cigarette packs from January 1, 1966, through October 31, 1970, was

    Caution: Cigarette Smoking May Be Hazardous To Your Health

    There are more dangerous things that Americans should be on the lookout for.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Just before Christmas, Donald Trump signed two bills into law to fund all the departments and agencies of the federal government and avert a government shutdown. According to the White House, the bills are:

    H.R. 1158, the “Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2020,” which provides full-year funding through September 30, 2020, for projects and activities of certain agencies of the Federal Government; and

    H.R. 1865, the “Further Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2020,” which provides full-year funding through September 30, 2020, for projects and activities of the remaining agencies of the Federal Government.

    The bills do some other things as well.

    They expand paid family leave. Said President Trump, “I am proud to report after that, after decades of empty promises and inaction, the legislation I have signed into law provides 12 weeks of paid parental leave for federal employees. This ensures parents are not forced to choose between their jobs and spending precious time with their children.”

    They give U.S. military personnel and most federal workers a 3.1 percent pay raise. Said President Trump, to federal workers, “This pay raise reflects the excellent work of our federal workforce.” And to service members, “Your selfless service, noble sacrifice, and unfailing allegiance to duty and country is what keeps America safe, strong, proud, and free.”

    They repeal three taxes in the Affordable Care Act (Obamacare): the so-called “Cadillac tax” on generous employer health plans, taxes on health insurance companies, and taxes on medical-device makers.

    They reauthorize the U.S. Export-Import Bank.

    And they raise the federal age for purchasing tobacco products from 18 to 21 years old. Specifically, in the “Further Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2020,” under Division N, “Health and Human Services Extenders,” in Title I, “Health and Human Service Extenders,” Subtitle F, “Miscellaneous Provisions,” Sec. 603, “Minimum age of sale of tobacco products,” it states,

        (a) In General. — Section 906(d) of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C.     387f(d)) is amended —

    (1) in paragraph (3)(A)(ii), by striking “18 years’” and inserting “21 years”; and

    (2) by adding at the end the following:

    “(5) Minimum age of sale. — It shall be unlawful for any retailer to sell a tobacco             product to any person younger than 21 years of age.”

    This is something that has been in the works all year.

    Back in May, Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-Ky.) and Sen. Tim Kaine (D-Va.) introduced a bill, the “Tobacco-Free Youth Act” (S.1541), to raise the federal minimum age for purchasing tobacco products to 21. “We’re in the middle of a national health epidemic,” said McConnell in a speech on the Senate floor. Kaine said in a statement, “Today, we are coming together to side with young people’s health. With this bipartisan legislation, Senator McConnell and I are working to address one of the most significant public-health issues facing our nation today.” American Heart Association CEO Nancy Brown said she supports the bill, saying in a statement, “We commend Majority Leader McConnell and Senator Kaine for prioritizing the health of teens and young adults with a bill to raise the national sales age for tobacco products to 21. We urge strong bipartisan support for this bill as written, and we call on lawmakers to reject any effort to add language that would weaken its impact or benefit tobacco companies.”

    At the same time, but in the House, Rep. Donna E. Shalala (D-Fla.), sometime secretary of the Department of Health and Human Services under Bill Clinton, and Frank Pallone (D-N.J.), current Energy and Commerce Chairman, introduced a similar bill, the Reversing the Youth Tobacco Epidemic Act of 2019 (H.R.2339). “We’re trying to protect children,” said Shalala in an interview with CQ Magazine.

    With the passage of the “Further Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2020,” those bills are now irrelevant.

    Anyone with half a brain in the United States knows that smoking cigarettes is dangerous, destructive, and deadly. According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC),

    • Cigarette smoking is the leading preventable cause of death in the United States.

    • Smoking causes more deaths each year than the following causes combined: HIV, illegal drug use, alcohol use, motor vehicle injuries, firearm-related incidents.

    • More than 10 times as many U.S. citizens have died prematurely from cigarette smoking as have died in all the wars fought by the United States.

    • Cigarette smoking increases the risk for death from all causes in men and women.

    But none of that means that the federal government should raise the federal age for purchasing tobacco products from 18 to 21.

    Consider the following:

    First of all, the Constitution. Nowhere does the Constitution authorize the federal government to set a minimum age for anyone to purchase tobacco products. And not only that, neither does the Constitution authorize the federal government to have anything to do with smoking tobacco or anything else. Tobacco was a plentiful commodity at the time the Constitution was written. If the Framers wanted to mention tobacco in the Constitution, they certainly could have done so.

    Second, unnecessary legislation. Sixteen states, the District of Columbia, and more than 500 localities have already raised their minimum age to purchase tobacco products to 21. These states are: Arkansas, California, Connecticut, Delaware, Hawaii, Illinois, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Oregon, Texas, Vermont, and Virginia. The minimum age increases to 21 next year in Pennsylvania and Washington, and in Utah in 2021. Some other states have a legal age between 18 and 21. The new federal tobacco legislation is an assault on federalism and the Tenth Amendment.

    Third, the proper role of government. Is it the proper role of government to keep the peace and punish those who violate the personal or property rights of others, or is it the proper role of government to be a nanny state that micromanages the behavior of its citizens? The federal government not only shouldn’t have a minimum age of 21 to purchase tobacco products, it shouldn’t even have a minimum age of 18.

    Fourth, consistency. There are many dangerous activities that Americans engage in every day. And sometimes they lead to serious injury or death. Here are ten of them:

    • Skydiving

    • Bungee jumping

    • Operating a chainsaw

    • Climbing a ladder

    • Riding a motorcycle

    • Working as a roofer, fisherman, logger, or miner

    • Taking prescription drugs

    • Driving a car

    • Taking a bath

    • Crossing the street

    If the government is going to have a minimum age for tobacco purchases to “protect children,” then why not a minimum age to engage in those other dangerous activities to protect even more children? And why not a maximum age to protect the elderly?

    Fifth, second-class citizens. At the age of 18, Americans have the legal right to marry, enter into contracts, adopt children, vote in elections, and join the military and possibly die for their country. Yet, with this new tobacco legislation, the federal government is instituting a second class of citizens who can do all of those things but not buy a pack of cigarettes.

    And sixth, the nature of government. Government has always been the greatest violator of personal freedom and property rights. As former Foundation for Economic Education president Richard Ebeling put it, “There has been no greater threat to life, liberty, and property throughout the ages than government. Even the most violent and brutal private individuals have been able to inflict only a mere fraction of the harm and destruction that have been caused by the use of power by political authorities.”

    Regardless of how dangerous, destructive, or deadly the use of tobacco might be, the government hazard to the individual liberty and personal freedom of Americans is infinitely more dangerous, destructive, and deadly.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 19:05

  • Greta Thunberg: "I Wouldn't Have Wasted My Time" Meeting With Trump
    Greta Thunberg: “I Wouldn’t Have Wasted My Time” Meeting With Trump

    During a Monday interview with BBC radio’s “Today” program, teenage climate activist Greta Thunberg said that she wouldn’t have met with President Trump on the sidelines of the UN General Assembly, even if she had the opportunity.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    She wouldn’t meet with him, Thunberg said, because she doubts that he would take her seriously: if Trump won’t acknowledge the work of the world’s leading climate scientists, then what hope would Thunberg have?

    “Honestly, I don’t think I would have said anything [to Donald Trump] because obviously he’s not listening to scientists and experts, so why would he listen to me?” Thunberg said. “So I probably wouldn’t have said anything, I wouldn’t have wasted my time”.

    Back in September, a video of Thunberg giving Trump the “death stare” – as left-leaning outlets like the Guardian, Buzzfeed and Huffington Post described it – during her visit to the UN General Assembly went viral, earning the 16-year-old climate activist more plaudits from her peers and supporters.

    Donald Trump earned the enmity of climate activists when he decided to pull the US out of the 2015 Paris Climate Accord back in 2017. So far, Trump has directed his administration to relax or rescind dozens of Obama-era environmental rules. And if he wins another term (an outcome that is looking more likely by the day), it’s almost guaranteed that he will continue to gut the EPA while relaxing restrictions on the American energy industry – coal in particular.

    Since Thunberg’s rise to fame earlier this year, Trump has repeatedly criticized the teenager, once joking that she should “work on her anger management problem.”

    And he’s not the only world leader to criticize young Greta. Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro once called her “a brat” and complained that she receives too much attention from the media.

    Australian Prime Minister Morrison  told Thunberg that he was “not here to impress people overseas” after she accused his administration of not doing enough to protect the environment.

    During Monday’s interview, Thunberg accused Bolsonaro, Morrison and her other critics of being “terrified of young people” and their insistence that their countries do more to protect the environment.

    “Those attacks are just funny because they obviously don’t mean anything,” Thunberg said during the interview. “I guess of course it means something – they are terrified of young people bringing change which they don’t want – but that is just proof that we are actually doing something and that they see us as some kind of threat”.

    Her father, who also chimed in during the interview, praised his daughter for handling the criticism “incredibly well” consider his daughter’s autism.

    Thunberg rejoined the activists camping outside Sweden’s Parliament in December after four months of traveling overseas, starting with her trip to New York for the UN General Assembly back in September.

    “I hope I won’t have to sit outside the Swedish parliament for long. I hope I don’t have to be a climate activist any more,” she said on Monday, adding she was looking forward to returning to school in August.

    “I just want to be just as everyone else. I want to educate myself and be just like a normal teenager.”

    Unfortunately for Thunberg, the young activist will likely find that there’s no going back. But fortunately, she has a good sense of humor, as Reuters pointed out. 

    “Quite frankly, I don’t know how she does it, but she laughs most of the time. She finds it hilarious,” said Thunberg’s father,  Svante Thunberg, who also participated in the interview. 

    Don’t take criticism from strangers on the Internet so seriously: now that’s a lesson that could benefit thousands, if not millions, of Americans.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 18:45

  • Snyder: No House Of Worship In America Is Safe
    Snyder: No House Of Worship In America Is Safe

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    The events of the past couple of days should be a major wake up call for all of us. The number of mass shootings in the United States hit a record high in 2019 as the thin veneer of civilization that we all take for granted on a daily basis continues to disappear. And these mass shooters seem particularly attracted to soft targets such as schools and churches. When I was growing up, I never even imagined that a gunman might storm into my school or church and start shooting. And as far as I knew, neither my school nor my church had any sort of armed security. But now if you are attending a church or sending your kids to a school that does not have armed security, you are literally gambling with the lives of your family members. The world that we live in has dramatically changed, and if we choose to ignore the harsh realities that now confront us, we do so at our own peril.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Sunday, a gunman opened fire at a Church of Christ in Texas about eight miles away from Fort Worth, and it immediately made headlines all over the nation…

    A gunman killed two people during a Sunday morning service at a church in White Settlement before members of the congregation fatally shot him, authorities say.

    Police in White Settlement, about eight miles west of Fort Worth, were called before 11 a.m. to the West Freeway Church of Christ at 1900 South Las Vegas Trail after two members who are part of the church’s security team opened fire on the gunman.

    What do you think would have happened if nobody in that church had been armed?

    The gunman could have just run around the congregation shooting people at his leisure.

    I have seen video of the shooting and it is harrowing. We don’t know what the dark-hooded man wanted, but once he made his move it didn’t take long for him to start shooting

    In the video, the gunman, who is wearing what seems to be a dark-colored hood, gets up from a pew in the back of the room and walks up to a man in a suit who is standing in the corner.

    As the two speak and the man points to his right, the gunman reaches into his jacket and pulls out a shotgun.

    Of course this kind of thing seems to be happening every few days now, and as a result many of us have become desensitized to this sort of violence.

    I just did a Google search for church gunman and I got 23,800,000 results. The unthinkable has suddenly become a reality that every church in America must deal with.

    If you are holding services that are open to the public, you must have armed security. There is simply no other safe alternative.

    And this rise in violence here in the U.S. is happening in the context of rising persecution all over the globe.

    On Christmas Day, 11 Christians were brutally martyred by Islamic terrorists in Nigeria, but it barely made a blip in the U.S. news cycle…

    Bloodthirsty ISIS terrorists have reportedly beheaded 11 Christian hostages on Christmas Day in Nigeria. The militants said in a sickening video that the mass killing was in revenge for the deaths “of our leaders, including Abu Bakr al-Baghdadi”. Islamic State West Africa Province (ISWAP), which includes supporters from Boko Haram, released a shocking 56-second video. Claiming to show their captives’ execution, the clip was produced by ISIS’s media arm, Amaq, reports the BBC.

    Sadly, what we have seen so far is just the beginning. Thousands of Christians were martyred for their faith in 2019, and the persecution just continues to intensify with each passing year.

    Meanwhile, anti-Semitic violence just continues to escalate as well. On Saturday night, a horrific anti-Semitic attack in New York shocked the entire nation

    Authorities say an Orange County man stabbed five people at a rabbi’s home late Saturday night in Monsey, New York — the latest and most violent in a string of anti-Semitic attacks in the greater New York City area in the last few days.

    Ramapo Police Chief Brad Weidel said the suspected attacker, identified as Grafton Thomas, 37, of Greenwood Lake, entered the residence around 10 p.m. armed with a knife. Saturday was the seventh night of Hanukkah and was being widely observed in Monsey, a hamlet that is home to thousands of Orthodox Jews. There were as many as 70 people in the rabbi’s home at the time of the attack.

    These precious people were not even meeting in a synagogue.

    This gathering was being held in a private home, and you would think that would be safer.

    Unfortunately, that was not the case, and the attacker moved from one target to another with brutal efficiency

    “He took out his knife, sword from a holder and started hitting people back and forth. Nothing, he didn’t say anything. He screamed after me when I came out here, he screamed after me, ‘Hey you, I’ll get you,’” one witness told CBS2’s Marc Liverman. “He moved to the front door. He could go straight into the kitchen and the dining room’s the first thing. First, he went into the dining room and hit a few people there. Then he went into the kitchen and hit one guy there, and then he came back to the dining room.”

    We live at a time when anti-Semitic violence is on the rise all over the nation. Leading up to the attack on Saturday night, there were anti-Semitic incidents in New York state on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. Many in the Jewish community in New York are living in fear at this point, and according to the Washington Post the number of anti-Semitic crimes in New York City alone has “jumped 21 percent in the past year”…

    Anti-Semitic attacks are on the rise around the country, leaving members of the Jewish community feeling frightened and unsafe. In New York City, anti-Semitic crimes have jumped 21 percent in the past year. According to the Anti-Defamation League, there were 1,879 incidents of anti-Semitism in the United States in 2018, including more than 1,000 instances of harassment.

    But of course this epidemic of anti-Semitism is not just isolated to New York. Hatred for Israel and hatred for the Jewish people is rising all over the nation, and it is being fueled by extremely evil people that are absolutely seething with hatred.

    Have nothing to do with such people.

    As global events accelerate and our society becomes even more unstable, attacks on Christians and Jews will become even more common.

    We can certainly wish that the world would go back to the way it once was, but meanwhile we have to take the steps that are necessary to protect our families and our communities.

    From now on every house of worship in America should have armed security, and if your house of worship does not, I would find somewhere else to go.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/30/2019 – 18:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 30th December 2019

  • "Because You'd Be In Jail!" – The Real Reason Democrats Are Pushing Trump Impeachment?
    “Because You’d Be In Jail!” – The Real Reason Democrats Are Pushing Trump Impeachment?

    Authored by Robert Bridge via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    In the time-honored tradition of Machiavellian statecraft, all of the charges being leveled against Donald Trump to remove him from office – namely, ‘abuse of power’ and ‘obstruction of congress’ –are essentially the same things the Democratic Party has been guilty of for nearly half a decade: abusing their powers in a non-stop attack on the executive branch. Is the reason because they desperately need a ‘get out of jail free’ card?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Due to the non-stop action in Washington of late, few believe that the present state of affairs between the Democrats and Donald Trump are exclusively due to a telephone call between the US leader and the Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky. That is only scratching the surface of a story that is practically boundless.

    Back in April 2016, before Trump had become the Republican presidential nominee, talk of impeachment was already in the air.

    “Donald Trump isn’t even the Republican nominee yet,” wrote Darren Samuelsohn in Politico.

    Yet impeachment, he noted, is “already on the lips of pundits, newspaper editorials, constitutional scholars, and even a few members of Congress.”

    The timing of Samuelsohn’s article is not a little astonishing given what the Department of Justice (DOJ) had discovered just one month earlier.

    In March 2016, the DOJ found that “the FBI had been employing outside contractors who had access to raw Section 702 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) data, and retained that access after their work for the FBI was completed,” as Jeff Carlson reported in The Epoch Times.

    That sort of foreign access to sensitive data is highly improper and was the result of “deliberate decision-making,” according to the findings of an April 2017 FISA court ruling (footnote 69).

    On April 18, 2016, then-National Security Agency (NSA) Director Adm. Mike Rogers directed the NSA’s Office of Compliance to terminate all FBI outside-contractor access. Later, on Oct. 21, 2016, the FBI and the DOJ’s National Security Division (NSD), and despite they were aware of Rogers’s actions, moved ahead anyways with a request for a FISA warrant to conduct surveillance on Trump campaign adviser Carter Page. The request was approved by the FISA court, which, apparently, was still in the dark about the violations.

    On Oct. 26, following approval of the warrant against Page, Rogers went to the FISA court to inform them of the FBI’s non-compliance with the rules. Was it just a coincidence that at exactly this time, the Director of National Intelligence James Clapper and Defense Secretary Ashton B. Carter were suddenly calling for Roger’s removal? The request was eventually rejected. The next month, in mid-November 2016 Rogers, without first notifying his superiors, flew to New York where he had a private meeting with Trump at Trump Towers.

    According to the New York Times, the meeting – the details of which were never publicly divulged, but may be guessed at – “caused consternation at senior levels of the administration.”

    Democratic obstruction of justice?

    Then CIA Director John Brennan, dismayed about a few meetings Trump officials had with the Russians, helped to kick-start the FBI investigation over ‘Russian collusion.’ Notably, these Trump-Russia meetings occurred in December 2016, as the incoming administration was in the difficult transition period to enter the White House. The Democrats made sure they made that transition as ugly as possible.

    Although it is perfectly normal for an incoming government to meet with foreign heads of state at this critical juncture, a meeting at Trump Tower between Michael Flynn, Trump’s incoming national security adviser and former Russian Ambassador to the US, Sergey Kislyak, was portrayed as some kind of cloak and dagger scene borrowed from a  John le Carré thriller.

    Brennan questioning the motives behind high-level meetings between the Trump team and some Russians is strange given that the lame duck Obama administration was in the process of redialing US-Russia relations back to the Cold War days, all based on the debunked claim that Moscow handed Trump the White House on a silver platter.

    In late December 2016, after Trump had already won the election, Obama slapped Russia with punitive sanctions, expelled 35 Russian diplomats and closed down two Russian facilities. Since part of Trump’s campaign platform was to mend relations with Moscow, would it not seem logical that the incoming administration would be in damage-control, doing whatever necessary to prevent relations between the world’s premier nuclear powers from degrading even more?

    So if it wasn’t ‘Russian collusion’ that motivated the Democrats into action, what was it?

    From Benghazi to Seth Rich

    Here we must pause and remind ourselves about the unenviable situation regarding Hillary Clinton, the Secretary of State, who was being grilled daily over her use of a private computer to communicate sensitive documents via email. In all likelihood, the incident would have dropped from the radar had it not been for the deadly 2012 Benghazi attacks on a US compound.

    In the course of a House Select Committee investigation into the circumstances surrounding the attacks, which resulted in the death of US Ambassador Chris Stevens and three other US personnel, Clinton handed over some 30,000 emails, while reportedly deleting 32,000 deemed to be of a “personal nature”. Those emails remain unaccounted for to this day.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    By March 2015, even the traditionally tepid media was baring its baby fangs, relentlessly pursuing Clinton over the email question. Since Clinton never made a secret of her presidential ambitions, even political allies were piling on. Senator Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.), for example, said it’s time for Clinton “to step up” and explain herself, adding that “silence is going to hurt her.”

    On July 24, 2015, The New York Times published a front-page story with the headline “Criminal Inquiry Sought in Clinton’s Use of Email.” Later, Jennifer Rubin of the Washington Post candidly summed up Clinton’s rapidly deteriorating status with elections fast approaching: “Democrats still show no sign they are willing to abandon Clinton. Instead, they seem to be heading into the 2016 election with a deeply flawed candidate schlepping around plenty of baggage — the details of which are not yet known.”

    Moving into 2016, things began to look increasingly complicated for the Democratic front-runner. On March 16, 2016, WikiLeaks launched a searchable archive for over 30 thousand emails and attachments sent to and from Hillary Clinton’s private email server while she was Secretary of State. The 50,547-page treasure trove spans the dates from June 30, 2010 to August 12, 2014.

    In May, about one month after Clinton had officially announced her candidacy for the US presidency, the State Department’s inspector general released an 83-page report that was highly critical of Clinton’s email practices, concluding that Clinton failed to seek legal approval for her use of a private server.

    “At a minimum,” the report determined, “Secretary Clinton should have surrendered all emails dealing with Department business before leaving government service and, because she did not do so, she did not comply with the Department’s policies that were implemented in accordance with the Federal Records Act.”

    The following month brought more bad news for Clinton and her presidential hopes after it was reported that her husband, former President Bill Clinton, had a 30-minute tête-à-tête with Attorney General Loretta E. Lynch, whose department was leading the Clinton investigations, on the tarmac at Phoenix International Airport. Lynch said Clinton decided to pay her an impromptu visit where the two discussed “his grandchildren and his travels and things like that.” Republicans, however, certainly weren’t buying the story as the encounter came as the FBI was preparing to file its recommendation to the Justice Department.

    The summer of 2016, however, was just heating up.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hack versus Leak?

    On the early morning of July 10, Seth Rich, the director of voter expansion for the Democratic National Committee (DNC), was gunned down on the street in the Bloomingdale neighborhood of Washington, DC. Rich’s murder, said to be the result of a botched robbery, bucked the homicide trend in the area for that particular period; murders rates for the first six months of 2016 were down about 50 percent from the same period in the previous year.

    In any case, the story gets much stranger. Just five days earlier, on July 5th, the computers at the DNC were compromised, purportedly by an online persona with the moniker “Guccifer 2.0” at the behest of Russian intelligence. This is where the story of “Russian hacking” first gained popularity. Not everyone, however, was buying the explanation.

    In July 2017, a group of former U.S. intelligence officers, including NSA specialists, who call themselves Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity (VIPS) sent a memo to President Trump that challenged a January intelligence assessment that expressed “high confidence” that the Russians had organized an “influence campaign” to harm Hillary Clinton’s “electability,” as if she wasn’t capable of that without Kremlin support.

    “Forensic studies of ‘Russian hacking’ into Democratic National Committee computers last year reveal that on July 5, 2016, data was leaked (not hacked) by a person with physical access to DNC computer,” the memo states (The memo’s conclusions were based on analyses of metadata provided by the online persona Guccifer 2.0, who took credit for the alleged hack). “Key among the findings of the independent forensic investigations is the conclusion that the DNC data was copied onto a storage device at a speed that far exceeds an Internet capability for a remote hack.”

    In other words, according to VIPS, the compromise of the DNC computers was the result of an internal leak, not an external hack.

    At this point, however, it needs mentioned that the VIPS memo has sparked dissenting views among its members. Several analysts within the group have spoken out against its findings, and that internal debate can be read here. Thus, it would seem there is no ‘smoking gun,’ as of yet, to prove that the DNC was not hacked by an external entity. At the same time, the murder of Seth Rich continues to remain an unsolved “botched robbery,” according to investigators. Meanwhile, the one person who may hold the key to the mystery, Julian Assange, is said to be withering away Belmarsh Prison, a high-security London jail, where he is awaiting a February court hearing that will decide whether he will be extradited to the United States where he 18 charges.

    Here is a question to ponder: If you were Julian Assange, and you knew you were going to be extradited to the United States, who would you rather be the sitting president in charge of your fate, Hillary Clinton or Donald Trump? Think twice before answering.

    “Because you’d be in jail”

    On October 9, 2016, in the second televised presidential debates between Donald Trump and Hillary Clinton, Trump accused his Democratic opponent of deleting 33,000 emails, while adding that he would get a “special prosecutor and we’re going to look into it…” To this, Clinton said “it’s just awfully good that someone with the temperament of Donald Trump is not in charge of the law in our country,” to which Trump deadpanned, without missing a beat, “because you’d be in jail.”

    Now if that remark didn’t get the attention of high-ranking Democratic officials, perhaps Trump’s comments at a Virginia rally days later, when he promised to “drain the swamp,” made folks sit up and take notice.

    At this point the leaks, hacks and everything in between were already coming fast and furious. On October 7, John Podesta, Clinton’s presidential campaign manager, had his personal Gmail account hacked, thereby releasing a torrent of inside secrets, including how Donna Brazile, then a CNN commentator, had fed Clinton debate questions. But of course the crimes did not matter to the mendacious media, only the identity of the alleged messenger, which of course was ‘Russia.’

    By now, the only thing more incredible than the dirt being produced on Clinton was the fact that she was still in the presidential race, and even slated to win by a wide margin. But perhaps her biggest setback came when authorities, investigating Anthony Weiner’s abused laptop into illicit text messages he sent to a 15-year-old girl, stumbled upon thousands of email messages from Hillary Clinton.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Now Comey had to backpedal on his conclusion in July that although Clinton was “extremely careless” in her use of her electronic devices, no criminal charges would be forthcoming. He announced an 11th hour investigation, just days before the election. Although Clinton was also cleared in this case, observers never forgave Comey for his actions, arguing they cost Clinton the White House.

    Now James Comey is back in the spotlight as one of the main characters in the Barr-Durham investigation, which is examining largely out of the spotlight the origins of the Trump-Russia conspiracy theory that dogged the White House for four long years.

    In early December, Justice Department’s independent inspector general, Michael E. Horowitz, released the 400-page IG report that revealed a long list of omissions, mistakes and inconsistencies in the FBI’s applications for FISA warrants to conduct surveillance on Carter Page. Although the report was damning, both Barr and Durham noted it did not go far enough because Horowitz did not have the access that Durham has to intelligence agency sources, as well as overseas contacts that Barr provided to him.

    With AG report due for release in early spring, needless to say some Democrats are very nervous as to its finding. So nervous, in fact, that they might just be willing to go to the extreme of removing a sitting president to avoid its conclusions.

    Whatever the verdict, 2020 promises to be one very interesting year.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 23:30

    Tags

  • The Myth Of Voter Suppression
    The Myth Of Voter Suppression

    Do Republicans win elections by preventing minorities from voting?

    The Left says yes, but the data says no.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Jason Riley, senior fellow at the Manhattan Institute, settles the argument with hard evidence, separating fact from fiction.

    h/t The Srategic Culture Foundation


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 23:00

  • 2020: The Final Combat Of Western Hegemonism
    2020: The Final Combat Of Western Hegemonism

    Authored by Paul Schmutz Schaller for The Saker Blog

    The world situation is changing very fast and one needs to make an effort in order to keep pace with the events. The end of a year is a welcome opportunity for an assessment of the current situation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I shall concentrate on two main subjects…

    2019: The West has lost the supremacy in the Middle East

    I think that this was the most important change in the year drawing to a close. Iran has successfully and creatively defended herself against the „maximal pressure“ from the USA and has kept her distance with the West European countries. Economically, the country has suffered from the US-sanctions, but she has now passed the biggest crisis. The country took the imposed problems as a motivation to improve the economical governance and to diminish the dependance from petrol. While in June, say, there was a more or less real danger of an aggressive war against Iran, now, this treat haas faded into the background. The report of UN-Secretary-General Guterres of Desember 10 saying that the UN, after an investigation in Saudi Arabia, cannot verify the US and Saudi claims that Iran was behind the strikes on Aramco in September, is a diplomatic victory for Iran. As for the Iranian trade, an official recently said that, during the last 9 months, China, Iraq, UAE, Afghanistan and Turkey were major destinations for the Iranian exports while Turkey, UAE and Germany are biggest Iranian trade in terms of imports.

    Syria has made further important progress in the fight against terrorism, in particular in the province Idleb. Moreover, the government and the army were able to utilize the partial withdrawal of the US occupying army in the north-east of the country. The reconstruction in Syria moves forward, Russian and Chinese enterprises will thereby play an important role. Hundreds of thousands refugees have come back. In short, as President Assad said in the interview with Italian Rai News 24: „[… ] the situation is much, much better […] and I think that the future of Syria is promising; we are going to come out of this war stronger.“

    In the absurd war of Saudi Arabia against Yemen, the strategic situation has completely changed. Saudi Arabia has lost the initiative and different Arabian and African countries have stopped the support for the Saudi army. The Ansarallah movement of the Houthis has made important attacks, in particular against Aramco, and the movement has now strong official relations with Iran.

    The West and Israel are still trying hard to exploit the economical and political crisis in Lebanon and Iraq. However, the patriotic forces in both countries were able to keep a positive outlook of the situation and could avoid to fall into the traps.

    There is no reason to think that the positive development in the Middle East will change in the next months. Quite the contrary. One can expect that the fight in Afghanistan against terrorism and US occupation will make important progress. Moreover, the influence of China and Russia will further increase. However, the general situation will remain tense. This is of course due to the fact that there is a country like Israel in this region which is utterly hostile against the neighboring countries and tyrannizes the indigenous population.

    Asia as a whole has already widely casted off the yoke of Western hegemonism. As of South America, the developments in 2019 show – despite of the coup in Bolivia – a movement to more independence which very probably will continue. I would assume that this vague will also grow in Africa, in particular in Western and central Africa, due to the fight against terrorism and the beneficial influence of China and Russia.

    2020: The fight between the American national imperialism and Western hegemony will come to a decision

    Trump has won in 2016, based on his program of „America first“. Since then, it has become more and more clear that this program is in fact a program of an American national imperialism. Trump is not interested in a „Western“ perspective. A typical example are the US sanctions against numerous countries, even against traditional allies. This is a crucial change. Since the end of World War 2, the USA were constructed as a worldwide leading power. During the cold war, this has developed into the collective Western hegemony – including countries like Japan, Australia and others – with the USA as the undisputed leader. The emergence of an American national imperialism is a somewhat unexpected challenge for all other Western countries. Nevertheless, it is a logical evolution, provoked among other things by the declining power of Western hegemony and the appearance of China, the new Russia, as well as their strategic collaboration.

    The traditional Western hegemonic forces have never accepted the election of Trump in 2016. They are very strong inside the US Democratic Party and in the US parliament in general, but also in Western Europe. With the impeachment and the US election in 2020, the fight between the both tendencies will reach a decision. One should expect that this fight will be very hard. The only logical outcome will be a victory of Trump; however, it is still to be seen whether this will be a clear victory or not. In other words, will the Western hegemonic forces be obliged to accept it this time? I think that these questions will be very crucial in 2020.

    Also for Western Europe, the influence of this fight will be immense. Concerning this matter, the UK is the most advanced country in Western Europe. After a struggle of 3 and half years, the population has given a clear mandate to the Johnson government to deliver Brexit. It is probable that now, where this central question is resolved, the development in the UK will be quite dynamical. The formation of a national imperialism will advance quickly. France also is rather well prepared for a victory of the American national imperialism; with the period of de Gaulle in the 1960s, she has a historical model.

    On the other hand, I believe that Germany is the less prepared country. Germany is very anti-Trump. In 2016, polls in Germany indicated that up to 90% would vote for Hillary Clinton and only 4% for Donald Trump. The polls during the last years have clearly confirmed this rejection of Trump in the German population. Also, German Chancellor Merkel has been widely seen as a stronghold of the traditional Western hegemony and against American national imperialism. However, the situation is changing. Merkel has lost her authority and is now rather isolated. The awareness is growing that Trump does not stand for a parenthesis in history, but for a fundamental change. The impeachment is not judged as positive as one could await. Moreover, the German industry would like to have better relations with Russia. The US sanctions against Nord Stream 2 will only reinforce the will in Germany to become more autonomous.

    There is still another problem. While national imperialism has a long tradition in the UK and in France and will probably be accepted without too much of resistance, in Germany, national imperialism is not popular, for historical reasons. Therefore, one may predict that Germany will have a big debate on her political identity; even a profound crisis is possible. This is certainly complicated by the fact that Merkel has to be replaced and that there is – actually – no convincing successor. I am however quite confident that Germany will be able to find a way for playing a quite positive role in the future world.

    We therefore may anticipate that Western hegemony is replaced by national imperialisms. Of course, they will remain a big problem for the world, even if the classical Western hegemony will suffer an important defeat. But the contradictions of other Western countries with the USA will strongly expand. This gives the remaining world much better perspectives.

    From my point of view, 2019 was a very positive year and I am convinced that the same will be the case for 2020.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 22:30

    Tags

  • Compulsive Gambler Sues Casino For "Letting Him" Lose $260,000
    Compulsive Gambler Sues Casino For “Letting Him” Lose $260,000

    It’s a bold strategy, Cotton, let’s see if it pays off for him…

    Tarwinder Shokar is taking an unorthodox step after getting cleaned out on a gambling binge. After losing about $260,000 US, Shokar has now turned around and sued the Caesars Windsor Resort And Casino as well as the Ontario Lottery and Gaming Commission for his losses – plus about $381,000 in punitive damages, according to Newsweek.

    The case was filed around the time the gambling took place and has been recently transferred to the Superior Court of Justice in Windsor.

    Shokar’s lawyer Iain MacKinnon said: “Our position is he was a compulsive gambler and the casino and/or the OLG were either well aware of his past background—or should have been.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shortly prior to his binge, Shokar apparently attempted suicide by throwing himself in front of a bus after losing all of his money at a different casino. Ironically, he survived the accident and actually wound up collecting a large insurance payout as a result of his injuries. He then took the insurance money and lost that all, too.

    Shokar reportedly had fraud convictions and had been banned from a number of other casinos due to his behavior. A travel agency was said to then recommend Caesars Windsor, who Shokar claims knew that he was there to spend a large amount of money, and who treated him to VIP treatment, including plying him with alcohol.

    His first visit on October 17, 2013 resulted in him losing about $70,000 US. On his next visit, he racked up losses of about $190,000 US. The lawsuit says the casino should have known that he had a gambling problem, but instead chose to “take advantage of him”.

    Which is precisely the line of business that casinos are in…


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 22:00

  • Zuesse: Russiagate Investigation Now Endangers Obama
    Zuesse: Russiagate Investigation Now Endangers Obama

    Authored by Eric Zuesse via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Former US President Barack Obama is now in severe legal jeopardy, because the Russiagate investigation has turned 180 degrees; and he, instead of the current President, Donald Trump, is in its cross-hairs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The biggest crime that a US President can commit is to try to defeat American democracy (the Constitutional functioning of the US Government) itself, either by working with foreign powers to take it over, or else by working internally within America to sabotage democracy for his or her own personal reasons. Either way, it’s treason (crime that is intended to, and does, endanger the continued functioning of the Constitution itself*), and Mr. Obama is now being actively investigated, as possibly having done this. The Russiagate investigation, which had formerly focused against the current US President, has reversed direction and now targets the prior President. Although he, of course, cannot be removed from office (since he is no longer in office), he is liable under criminal laws, the same as any other American would be, if he committed any crime while he was in office.

    December 17th order by the FISA (Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act) Court severely condemned the performance by the FBI under Obama, for having obtained, on 19 October 2016 (even prior to the US Presidential election), from that Court, under false pretenses, an authorization for the FBI to commence investigating Donald Trump’s Presidential campaign, as being possibly in collusion with Russia’s Government. The Court’s ruling said:

    In order to appreciate the seriousness of that misconduct and its implications, it is useful to understand certain procedural and substantive requirements that apply to the government’s conduct of electronic surveillance for foreign intelligence purposes. Title I of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA ), codified as amended at 50 USC. 1801-1813, governs such electronic surveillance. It requires the government to apply for and receive an order from the FISC approving a proposed electronic surveillance. When deciding whether to grant such an application, a FISC judge must determine among other things, whether it provides probable cause to believe that the proposed surveillance target is a “foreign power” or an agent a foreign power…

    …The government has a heightened duty of candor to the FISC in ex parte proceedings, that is, ones in which the government does not face an adverse party, such as proceedings on electronic surveillance applications. The FISC expects the government to comply with its heightened duty of candor in ex parte proceedings at all times. Candor is fundamental to this Court’s effective operation…

    …On December 9, 2019, the government filed, with the FISC, public and classified versions of the OIG Report… It documents troubling instances in which FBI personnel provided information to NSD[National Security Division of the Department of Justice] which was unsupported or contradicted by information in their possession. It also describes several instances in which FBI personnel withheld from NSD information in their possession which was detrimental to their case for believing that Mr. [Carter] Page was acting as an agent of a foreign power…

    On December 18th, Martha McCallum, of Fox News, interviewed US Attorney General Bill Barr, and asked him (at 7:00 in the video) how high up in the FBI the blame for this (possible treason) goes:

    MACCALLUM: Were you surprised that he [Obama’s FBI Director James Comey] seemed to give himself such a distance from the entire operation?

    “JAMES COMEY: As the director sitting on top of an organization of 38,000 people you can’t run an investigation that’s seven layers below you. You have to leave it to the career professionals to do.”

    MACCALLUM: Do you believe that?

    BARR: No, I think that the — one of the problems with what happened was precisely that they pulled the investigation up to the executive floors, and it was run and bird dogged by a very small group of very high level officials. And the idea that this was seven layers below him is simply not true.

    The current (Trump) A.G. there called the former (Obama) FBI Director a liar on that.

    If Comey gets heat for this possibly lie-based FBI investigation of the US Presidential nominee from the opposite Party of the sitting US President (Comey’s own boss, Obama), then protecting himself could become Comey’s top motivation; and, in that condition, protecting his former boss might become only a secondary concern for him.

    Moreover, as was first publicly reported by Nick Falco in a tweet on 5 June 2018 (which tweet was removed by Twitter but fortunately not before someone had copied it to a web archive), the FBI had been investigating the Trump campaign starting no later than 7 October 2015. An outside private contractor, Stefan Halper, was hired in Britain for this, perhaps in order to get around laws prohibiting the US Government from doing it. (This was ‘foreign intelligence’ work, after all. But was it really? That’s now being investigated.) The Office of Net Assessment (ONA) “through the Pentagon’s Washington Headquarters Services, awarded him contracts from 2012 to 2016 to write four studies encompassing relations among the US, Russia, China and India”. Though Halper actually did no such studies for the Pentagon, he instead functioned as a paid FBI informant (and it’s not yet clear whether that money came from the Pentagon, which spends trillions of dollars that are off-the-books and untraceable), and at some point Trump’s campaign became a target of Halper’s investigation. This investigation was nominally to examine “The Russia-China Relationship: The impact on US Security interests.” Allegedly, George Papadopoulos said that “Halper insinuated to him that Russia was helping the Trump campaign”, and Papadopoulos was shocked at Halper’s saying this. Probably because so much money at the Pentagon is untraceable, some of the crucial documentation on this investigation might never be found. For example, the Defense Department’s Inspector General’s 2 July 2019 report to the US Senate said “ONA personnel could not provide us any evidence that Professor Halper visited any of these locations, established an advisory group, or met with any of the specific people listed in the statement of work.” It seems that the Pentagon-contracted work was a cover-story, like pizza parlors have been for some Mafia operations. But, anyway, this is how America’s ‘democracy’ actually functions. And, of course, America’s Deep State works not only through governmental agencies but also through underworld organizations. That’s just reality, not at all speculative. It’s been this way for decades, at least since the time of Truman’s Presidency (as is documented at that link).

    Furthermore, inasmuch as this operation certainly involved Obama’s CIA Director John Brennan and others, and not only top officials at the FBI, there is no chance that Comey would have been the only high official who was involved in it. And if Comey was involved, then he would have been acting in his own interest, and not only in his boss’s — and here’s why: Comey would be expected to have been highly motivated to oppose Mr. Trump, because Trump publicly questioned whether NATO (the main international selling-arm for America’s ‘defense’-contractors) should continue to exist, and also because Comey’s entire career had been in the service of America’s Military-Industrial Complex, which is the reason why Comey’s main lifetime income has been the tens of millions of dollars he has received via the revolving door between his serving the federal Government and his serving firms such as Lockheed Martin. For these people, restoring, and intensifying, and keeping up, the Cold War, is a very profitable business. It’s called by some “the Military-Industrial Complex,” and by others “the Deep State,” but by any name it is simply agents of the billionaires who own and control US-based international corporations, such as General Dynamics and Chevron. As a governmental official, making decisions that are in the long-term interests of those investors is the likeliest way to become wealthy.

    Consequently, Comey would have been benefitting himself, and other high officials of the Obama Administration, by sabotaging Trump’s campaign, and by weakening Trump’s Presidency in the event that he would become elected. Plus, of course, Comey would have been benefitting Obama himself. Not only was Trump constantly condemning Obama, but Obama had appointed to lead the Democratic National Committee during the 2016 Presidential primaries, Debbie Wasserman Schultz, who as early as 20 February 2007 had endorsed Hillary Clinton for President in the Democratic Party primaries, so that Shultz was one of the earliest supporters of Clinton against even Obama himself. In other words, Obama had appointed Shultz in order to increase the odds that Clinton — not Sanders— would become the nominee in 2016 to continue on and protect his own Presidential legacy. Furthermore, on 28 July 2016, Schultz became forced to resign from her leadership of the DNC after WikiLeaks released emails indicating that Schultz and other members of the DNC staff had exercised bias against Bernie Sanders and in favor of Hillary Clinton during the 2016 Democratic primaries — which favoritism had been the reason why Obama had appointed Shultz to that post to begin with. She was just doing her job for the person who had chosen her to lead the DNC. Likewise for Comey. In other words: Comey was Obama’s pick to protect Clinton, and to oppose Trump (who had attacked both Clinton and Obama).

    Nowadays, Obama is telling the Party’s billionaires that Elizabeth Warren would be good for them, but not that Sanders would — he never liked Sanders. He wants Warren to get the voters who otherwise would go for Sanders, and he wants the Party’s billionaires to help her achieve this (be the Party’s allegedly ‘progressive’ option), so that Sanders won’t be able to become a ballot option in the general election to be held on 3 November 2020. He is telling them whom not to help win the Party’s nomination. In fact, on November 26th, Huffington Post headlined “Obama Said He Would Speak Up To Stop Bernie Sanders Nomination: Report” and indicated that though he won’t actually say this in public (but only to the Party’s billionaires), Obama is determined to do all he can to prevent Sanders from becoming the nominee. In 2016, his choice was Hillary Clinton; but, today, it’s anyone other than Sanders; and, so, in a sense, it remains what it was four years ago — anyone but Sanders.

    Comey’s virtually exclusive concern, at the present stage, would be to protect himself, so that he won’t be imprisoned. This means that he might testify against Obama. At this stage, he’s free of any personal obligation to Obama — Comey is now on his own, up against Trump, who clearly is his enemy. Some type of back-room plea-bargain is therefore virtually inevitable — and not only with Comey, but with other top Obama-appointees, ultimately. Obama is thus clearly in the cross-hairs, from now on. Congressional Democrats have opted to gun against Trump (by impeaching him); and, so, Trump now will be gunning against Obama — and against the entire Democratic Party (unless Sanders becomes its nominee, in which case, Sanders will already have defeated that Democratic Party, and its adherents will then have to choose between him versus Trump; and, so, too, will independent voters).

    But, regardless of what happens, Obama now is in the cross-hairs. That’s not just political cross-hairs (such as an impeachment process); it is, above all, legal cross-hairs (an actual criminal investigation). Whereas Trump is up against a doomed effort by the Democratic Party to replace him by Vice President Mike Pence, Obama will be up against virtually inevitable criminal charges, by the incumbent Trump Administration. Obama played hardball against Trump, with “Russiagate,” and then with “Ukrainegate”; Trump will now play hardball against Obama, with whatever his Administration and the Republican Party manage to muster against Obama; and the stakes this time will be considerably bigger than just whether to replace Trump by Pence.

    Whatever the outcome will be, it will be historic, and unprecedented. (If Sanders becomes the nominee, it will be even more so; and, if he then wins on November 3rd, it will be a second American Revolution; but, this time, a peaceful one — if that’s even possible, in today’s hyper-partisan, deeply split, USA.)

    There is no way that the outcome from this will be status-quo. Either it will be greatly increased further schism in the United States, or it will be a fundamental political realignment, more comparable to 1860 than to anything since. The US already has a higher percentage of its people in prison than does any other nation on this planet. Americans who choose a ‘status-quo’ option will produce less stability, more violence, not more stability and a more peaceful nation in a less war-ravaged world. The 2020 election-outcome for the United States will be a turning-point; there is no way that it will produce reform. Americans who vote for reform will be only increasing the likelihood of hell-on-Earth. Reform is no longer an available option, given America’s realities. A far bigger leap than that will be required in order for this country to avoid falling into an utter abyss, which could be led by either Party, because both Parties have brought the nation to its present precipice, the dark and lightless chasm that it now faces, and which must now become leapt, in order to avoid a free-fall into oblivion.

    The problem in America isn’t either Obama or Trump; it’s neither merely the Democratic Party, nor merely the Republican Party; it is instead both; it is the Deep State. That’s the reality; and the process that got us here started on 26 July 1945 and secretly continued on the American side even after the Soviet Union ended and Russia promptly ended its side of the Cold War. The US regime’s ceaseless thrust, since 26 July 1945, to rule the entire world, will climax either in a Third World War, or in a US revolution to overthrow and remove the Deep State and end its dictatorship-grip over America. Both Parties have been controlled by that Deep State, and the final stage or climax of this grip is now drawing near. America thus has been having a string of the worst Presidents — and worst Congresses — in US history. This is today’s reality. Unfortunately, a lot of American voters think that this extremely destabilizing reality, this longstanding trend toward war, is okay, and ought to be continued, not ended now and replaced by a new direction for this country — the path toward world peace, which FDR had accurately envisioned but which was aborted on 26 July 1945. No matter how many Americans might vote for mere reform, they are wrong. Sometimes, only a minority are right. Being correct is not a majority or minority matter; it is a true or false matter. A misinformed public can willingly participate in its own — or even the world’s — destruction. That could happen. Democracy is a prerequisite to peace, but it can’t exist if the public are being systematically misinformed. Lies and democracy don’t mix together any more effectively than do oil and water.

    *  *  *

    * The given official US definition of “treason” (see top of page 3 there) is “Whoever, owing allegiance to the United States, levies war against them or adheres to their enemies, giving them aid and comfort within the United States or elsewhere, is guilty of treason.” Any US official has sworn to uphold and defend, never to subvert, the Constitution of the United States, and this is defining the US, itself, as being the continued functioning of the US Constitution. Treason is thus the supremely illegal act under US law, the act that violates any US official’s oath of office. (When treason is perpetrated by someone who is not a US official, it is still a severe crime, but less severe than it is for any US official.) The phrase “levies war against them” means war against the functioning of the Constitution that is their supreme law. “Or” means alternatively, and “adheres to their enemies” means is a follower of any person or other entity that seeks to impose a different constitution. “Enemies” is not defined — it need not be a foreign opponent; it may be a domestic opponent of the US Constitution. Thus, an American can be an enemy of the United States of America. In fact, the official definition explicitly refers ONLY to an entity “owing allegiance to the United States.” (Obviously, that especially refers to any US official.) This is how a “traitor” is understood, in US law. Obviously, the worst traitor would be one who committed the treasonous act(s) while a US official.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 21:30

    Tags

  • Petrodollar Shock: Russia Could Invert Part Of Its National Wealth Fund In Gold
    Petrodollar Shock: Russia Could Invert Part Of Its National Wealth Fund In Gold

    In the past two years Russia has been quite explicit in its shifting preference between fiat, in the form of the world’s reserve currency, US Dollars and hard assets, i.e., gold: after liquidating almost all of its Treasury holdings in mid 2018, roughly around the time relations between the US and Russia hit rock bottom and started digging, Russian gold holdings continued to climb and just a few months back rose to a record, more than doubling in the past 4 years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It now appears that the recent gold-buying spree wasn’t enough, because according to Russia’s Finance Minister Anton Siluanov, Russia is now also considering investing part of its National Wealth Fund in gold, adding that it is Russia’s view that investment in the precious metal as more sustainable in the long-term than in financial assets.

    “There is a discussion on whether to invest the fund’s money in gold and precious metals. There are a lot of supporters and opponents,” Siluanov said.

    While Russia has traditionally been one of the world’s largest gold producers, its central bank has been the main buyer of its metal in recent years, partly as a result of Western sanctions imposed on Moscow in 2014, which forced the central bank was reducing the share of U.S. dollar assets in its reserves.

    So is Russia about to double down and in addition to converting its forex reserves into gold, will start buying the yellow metal for its sovereign wealth fund too? It appears so: speaking to reporters last Tuesday, Siluanov said that the finance ministry proposes that the National Wealth Fund’s new investment structure would mirror the foreign exchanges reserves structure of the central bank and excludes gold.  As of December 1, the central bank’s gold reserves stood at 72.7 million troy ounces, worth approximately $108 billion.

    As a reminder, the Russian National Wealth Fund accumulates revenues from oil exports and was initially designed to support the pension system. It was worth $124 billion as of Dec. 1. It is, therefore, a key cog in the petrodollar mechanism. This means that a key player in the global petrodollar recycling pathway will instead convert its revenues from sales of oil not into dollars, but directly into gold, bypassing the current reserve currency.

    As a reminder, it was in late 2014, shortly before China’s economy suffered its first major shock – and currency devaluation – of the post-crisis era, when we reported in “How The Petrodollar Quietly Died, And Nobody Noticed” that as a result of the oil price crash of late 2014, the petrodollar had suffered its first near-death experience, as petrodollar exports would fall negative in 2014 for the first time in 18 years. And while since then we have seen a modest rebound, the net exported capital remains dangerously close to zero, in effect keeping the entire petrodollar system on death watch. 

    Russian gold miners usually sell their metal to Russian commercial banks, which then re-sell it to the central bank. Russia’s Polyus and Polymetal, along with Canada’s Kinross, are the world’s top producers.

    That said, for now, the petrodollar is safe: “The Finance Ministry does not propose (the fund) investing in the precious metals, though one could think and consider this,” Siluanov said. “My point of view is that gold might well be present when investing reserve money.”

    In November, the Russian finance ministry proposed spending 1 trillion roubles ($16 billion) from the National Wealth Fund to support infrastructure projects and exports between 2020 and 2022, as it tries to boost economic growth. The government will be able to use money from the Fund once its liquid assets exceed 7% of GDP, something the finance ministry expects to happen in 2020.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 21:00

  • America Is Over But You Knew That Already
    America Is Over But You Knew That Already

    By Doug “Uncola” Lynn via TheBurningPlatform.com,

    Should old acquaintance be forgot,
    And never brought to mind?
    Should old acquaintance be forgot,
    And old lang syne?

    For auld lang syne, my dear,
    For auld lang syne,
    We’ll take a cup of kindness yet,
    For auld lang syne.

    – Robert Burns

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the Encyclopedia Britannica, “Auld Lang Syne” literally translates to “Old Long Since” which could also be interpreted as “since long ago” or “for old times’ sake”.  Certainly, there is a feeling of melancholy when the song is sung at the end of another year gone by.  Maybe any sadness could be attributed to good times that are now gone or, perhaps, especially, regret at what might have been.

    The same goes for inevitable outcomes of unavoidable events, predictable denouements of tragic stories, and the ineluctable death of nations. It calls to mind a quote from the 1994 movie “The Legends of the Fall” when the Native American narrator described how a beautiful young woman caused brothers to hate one another and a family to fragment.  He said:

    She was like the water that freezes inside a rock and breaks it apart. It was no more her fault than it is the fault of the water when the rock shatters.

    Indeed. Natural forces rage over and upon the earth.  And who is Man to stop the rain?

    A recent article addressing our “hysteric times” identified America as a corpse consumed by maggots, with liberals acting as the maggots and conservatives as “rooting for the corpse”.  What an astute analogy.  Because the Collective acts to completely consume rotting systems as those wearing MAGA hats perform CPR on a skeleton.

    There are those who will say America’s fate was sealed when her government assimilated education, or when the Bible was banned in schools.  Others will blame the creation of the Federal Reserve in 1913, or FDR’s New Deal, or the assassination of JFK, or the advent of The Great Society under Lyndon Johnson.

    History buffs might claim the nation began its first convulsions when Abe Lincoln overturned states’ rights in the Civil War era or even earlier than that – when the Federalists overrode the Anti-Federalists in 1788.

    Or maybe it was due to the covert implementation of the 45 Communist Goals, or the development of the League of Nations and United Nations.

    Perhaps it was the Nixon Shock. Roe v. Wade?  Disco? 911? The Patriot Act?  Smartphones? Social Media? Foreign wars? Too big to fail?  Political correctness? Illegal immigration?  The exponentially growing national debt? Corruption in the CIA, FBI, DoJ and other alphabet soup government agencies?

    In truth, it could’ve been any, and all, of the above or maybe these were just the symptoms of something deeper and more profound. In any case, they were all cracks and water in the nation’s foundation.  And as was expected, winter is finally here.

    Exactly how and when America’s foundational stones will shatter in the coming months is anyone’s guess, but do know this:  When Progressive Democrats, and an activist mainstream media, stage a third-world impeachment trial of a U.S. President while reverently citing the words of the nation’s long-dead founders who were, by their own definition, privileged white males and racist slave owners – the end is nigh.

    So it was no surprise when several days ago, in a buffet line, this blogger overheard an overweight man tell an obese woman the following:

    Poor Trumpy. He got hisself impeached.

    To which the woman replied with a Cheshire-cat grin of satisfaction: 

    Yep!  History will always show that he was impeached“.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One wonders if these citizens were aware of President Trump’s December 17, 2019 letter to House Speaker Nancy Pelosi. It was sent the day before the impeachment vote and it said, in part, the following:

    I write to express my strongest and most powerful protest against the partisan impeachment crusade being pursued by the Democrats in the House of Representatives. This impeachment represents an unprecedented and unconstitutional abuse of power by Democrat Lawmakers, unequaled in nearly two and a half centuries of American legislative history.

    The Articles of Impeachment introduced by the House Judiciary Committee are not recognizable under any standard of Constitutional theory, interpretation, or jurisprudence. They include no crimes, no misdemeanors, and no offenses whatsoever. You have cheapened the importance of the very ugly word, impeachment!

    By proceeding with your invalid impeachment, you are violating your oaths of office, you are breaking your allegiance to the Constitution, and you are declaring open war on American Democracy…

    ….You are the ones interfering in America’s elections. You are the ones subverting America’s Democracy. You are the ones Obstructing Justice. You are the ones bringing pain and suffering to our Republic for your own selfish personal, political, and partisan gain…

    …. Any member of Congress who votes in support of impeachment – against every shred of truth, fact, evidence, and legal principle – is showing how deeply they revile the voters and how truly they detest America’s Constitutional order. Our Founders feared the tribalization of partisan politics, and you are bringing their worst fears to life.

    Worse still, I have been deprived of basic Constitutional Due Process from the beginning of this impeachment scam right up until the present. I have been denied the most fundamental rights afforded by the Constitution, including the right to present evidence, to have my own counsel present, to confront accusers, and to call and cross-examine witnesses ….

    Do the people care?  Evidently not.  And, unsurprisingly, House Speaker Pelosi called the 6-page letter “ridiculous” and “really sick” as some polls now show 54% of American’s supporting Trump’s forced removal from office.

    It means there is no coming back from this one.  The damage is done.

    It means, by any definition, perilous times are here; and that predictably programmed dialectics will prevent either side from accepting the results of the 2020 Presidential Election.  Surely, the ANTIFA crowd will be rioting in the streets in the event of a Trump win. And, if Trump loses and contests the results over wrongful impeachment, illegal immigration, vote fraud, or any other reason – the rioting of the collectivists will be even worse.

    It also means that if Trump loses, a large percentage of the U.S. population will not accept the tyranny of the Political Left; because if the Progs are now willing to engage in such nefarious deeds as recently demonstrated on Capitol Hill with the impeachment sham, and in states like Virginia regarding gun control, imagine what happens when they win the power to legislate socialist hell from sea to shining sea.

    Understandably, therefore, many natives have become increasingly angry and restless; and this may also be due to the fact that Epstein didn’t kill himself.

    For example, at a recent election rally for Joe Biden, a random nobody in the audience called out the former vice president of the United States regarding his corrupt involvement in Ukraine.  The heckler, additionally, yelled to Biden as one of the leading presidential candidates in the Democratic primaries:

    “YOUR SON IS A CRACKHEAD, JOE! WHADDEYA THINK ABOUT THAT?”

    Yet, in spite of the heckler’s accurate statements, the Biden supporters in the audience began chanting: “WE WANT JOE! WE WANT JOE!”

    Yes, America is dead because her citizens love lies more than fast food, opiates, and ice cream.

    Apparently, so, too, do American institutions today.  It’s why the FISA court has refused to hold anyone accountable at the FBI in the aftermath of Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s stunning report on FISA abuse during the 2016 Presidential Election;  why a TV news network, in an Orwellian manner, identified Trump as the leader of a “destructive cult”, using “mind control” on Americans”; and why the U.S. Senate may deny the president his right to confront his accusers.

    Certainly, U.S. Attorney John Durham may plumb the depths of the Russiagate rabbit hole but his report is not due to be delivered until late spring or early summer 2020.  Even then, one wonders if Americans will have the stomach to digest it fully; that is, of course, if the corporate media spinners choose to spoon-feed any of Durham’s findings to the imprudent plebes.

    Ask yourself these questions, Dear Reader: Do American’s have the political will to actually drain the swamp?  What happens when the economy tanks in 2020? Do you think they’ll desire to root out any corruption then?

    Or stated another way: Do the current measurable demographics in America today identify a sufficient percentage of the body politic as having the necessary moral outrage, and the courage, to sustain real swamp draining?  And will the current demographics significantly change in the New Year as fiat green confetti rains down over Wall Street and onto Main Street?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Regardless, it has become clear that those at the top of the pyramid, as well as their minions comprising the Political Left, care not to consider the historical view of their actions. It could be because they are now desperate as cornered animals. Or maybe it’s because they believe they’ll soon be the victors who will rewrite history.  And perhaps from their perspective, these are not mutually exclusive.

    Even so, take heart.  America’s fate may have long been sealed, but the ideas that originally made the country great will never die.  Many will rise to meet the collective tide and even if victory is not assured under Trump’s presidency – his election will prove to have been a crucial catalyst toward that end.

    Until that time, trust nothing reported by the Orwellian Media, remain ever skeptical, and never overestimate the American Sheeple.  One day, in their wake, new mini-republics might rise and become known en masse as Nobullshitopia.  Because then, and only then, can we stand united.

    In the meantime, cheers to the New Year as we raise our glasses to the like-minded near and far. The past is a bright dream, and hope is the future’s fixed star.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 20:30

    Tags

  • China's Next Real Estate Bubble: Building EV-Production Cities Across The Country
    China’s Next Real Estate Bubble: Building EV-Production Cities Across The Country

    Just in time for Tesla’s big move to China, entire cities are popping up from within the country dedicated solely to making electric vehicles. 

    Shunde New Energy Vehicle Town in China is taking shape inside of the city of Foshun as a hub for EV production and research. It is estimated that the city could eventually generate $15 billion in revenue per year.

    Bloomberg calls the cities “at least 20 electric-centric versions of Detroit under construction as China” as the country continues to bet big on EV technology. President Xi Jinping hopes that EV manufacturers will help boost other industries. He aims for the country to become a “manufacturing superpower” by 2025, in hopes that it’ll make China more self-sufficient and diversified.

    And cities in China are working to shift their economies to become a part of Xi’s new plan. They are offering cheap land and tax breaks to bring in car makers, parts supplies and engineering labs, in hopes of bolstering their own local economies. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He Xiaopeng, chairman of Xpeng Motors Technology Ltd., said: “The new-energy vehicle industry is a bet local governments must take. A successful EV maker could bring at least 200 companies in the industry chain into a province.’’

    So far, about $30 billion has been committed to developing these EV towns. The commitments range from fixed asset investments to development costs. It’s a move that’s typical of China’s “command-led” approach to its economy, as Bloomberg calls it.

    To us, it looks similar to the country’s real estate strategy: try to build it, and hope they come.

    That’s what China has been doing, erecting industrial parks, apartments and schools while laying out their offers – and sitting back, hoping that companies come in to take them up on thier offers. 

    Between 2009 and 2017, the country spend about $36.5 billion subsidizing EV sales. This could be why China now accounts for more than half of all passenger EV sales worldwide.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The rapid urbanization of the country has taken up many available land tracts, which has in turn pushed prices higher and made zoning laws tougher. By committing to EVs, local officials are likely to find it easier to get central government approval for redevelopment plans. 

    Shunde NEV Town is being built by China’s largest developer, Country Garden. The company has promised to bring EV-related businesses and meet tax revenue targets. 

    Liu Wei, who’s overseeing the project for Country Garden said: “The industry chain is far more comprehensive than car manufacturing. We’re well aware the fever will fade, but some emerging firms will grow, and that’s who we want to house.”

    Country Garden has been able to keep office rents cheap (by as much as 25%) by using land in small towns, instead of adjacent areas. The businesses in these small towns will then need workers. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cui Dongshu, secretary general of the China Passenger Car Association, said: “The towns have at least one key resource that EV makers and suppliers are eager to own: the land. That will naturally attract them to move into the towns.”

    But EVs only make up less than 5% of total car sales in China. Some analysts see these pop-up towns as destined for failure, as a result. John Zeng, managing director of LMC Automotive Shanghai said: “Most of those EV towns will fail. This wave of electric-vehicle building will come to a life-or-death moment. When EV carmakers are being squeezed, the ‘EV Town’ bubble will burst.’’

    Liu Wei concluded: “I admit that the EV sector is still working its own way. But we have been well aware of sector challenge since planning it two years ago, and we’re confident that we can adapt to the change.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 20:00

  • These Five Top Trends Will Go On To Define The Decade
    These Five Top Trends Will Go On To Define The Decade

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    As we roll into a new decade it might be a good time to explore the five top trends that define and are shaping our world. Overall, I wish I could be more positive but it seems the story of mankind is rooted in our moving forward in fits and starts as we work our way through adversity. War and conflict have always caused the world great grief. Sadly, with the increase in our ability to caused mass destruction, this is even more troubling. Adding to my concerns is that we are not trending towards a more peaceful sustainable place.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We live in a world where our system of governance is geared at getting politicians re-elected and fulfilling the most pressing needs of today.  Things like profit, greed, and quenching our endless desire for growth is placed in front of longer-term issues and needs. The idea that we must increase our population to create growth is flawed. Simply adding mouths to feed and adding new workers to replace those retiring creates additional demand but is shortsighted in that it ignores the problems exploding population across the planet brings with it.

    Mapping out a logical and sustainable long-term plan requires delving into some rather hefty philosophical questions like what brings real happiness. Dictators that govern under an agenda totally of their own creation have been no more successful than elected officials in coming up with real answers to our woes. Below are what I see as the “key” and most powerful directional shifts dictating our future and shaping our culture. These are followed by a few words on each.

    1. The central banks pouring money and credit into the financial system in an effort to keep the economy moving forward.

    2. The growing number of social ills, sick, and dysfunctional people.

    3. Political shifts and polarization are rapidly increasing. – Populism has been growing for several years when combined with surging inequality and discontent people rise-up in protest.

    4. As technology and artificial intelligence advance those in power are moving forward using these tools to turn us into pawns.

    5.  Concern over climate change is on the rise. Sadly, few of those talking about it see cutting waste as a priority.

    Too many economic watchers, it has become obvious the greatly expanded role of central banks in the world’s economy is not working. The global financial system has morphed into a giant experiment controlled by an evil alliance that could be called the “Financial-Political Complex.” Interest rates have been flat or negative in real terms still many people advocate they still need or should go lower. These people forget that low-interest rates flowing from policies such as ZIRP and NIRP do not extend down to low-income individuals with poor credit. The huge number of people that fall into this category get no relief while low rates punish those that have saved. This fuels inequality. The concept that a rising tide floats all boats or trickle-down economics has proven to heavily favor the rich.

    As a result of society’s growing ability to care for people and expanded medical care we have bent Charles Darwin’s law concerning, “survival of the fittest.” Governments have engaged in constructing a safety net under societies most vulnerable but whatever we do it seems it “ain’t enough.” Examples of social ills include crime, bullying, racism, delinquency, discrimination, family disintegration, drug addiction, poverty, and homelessness. While some of these problems may be less drastic than others all are costly to society and lessen the ability of our culture to function. Ironically, the often considered conservative belief in the “right to life” in some ways adds to this dilemma. simply put, children born with at least one dysfunctional parent have a greatly reduced chance of becoming a successful adult.

    The world is undergoing a huge political shift that has magnified the sharp divisions of contrasting groups as to how issues should be addressed. This has resulted in a rapid increase in polarization as opinions and beliefs conflict. Populations frustrated by the failure of their leaders to create a more just world are taking to the streets in large protests to put their demands forth. Inequality and globalization are fueling a populist movement that will most likely grow as governments that have over-promised fail to carry out all they have pledged. Unfortunately, these movements can turn into revolutions that merely switch out one incompetent or corrupt leader for another.

    We need only to look at a country like China where conformity is highly valued and the government  tries to control all facets of a person’s life to see how such actions conflict with the idea of freedom of choice. A balance between conformity and “over the top” diversity is most likely a place where society finds its happy place. Conformity can crush the human soul while the lack of it is often difficult for society to address because it raises the issue of where one person’s rights end and another persons begin. Today we are seeing inequality soar and it can be argued conformity greatly reduces the ability of individuals to move up the social ladder.

    A growing question is just how much of this is by design due to the culturally elite putting their foot on the head of those below them. Over the years with the aid of new technologies governments across the world have greatly expanded their ability to watch our movements and everything we do. They have even incorporated and leveraged the ever-present smartphone as an ultra-powerful surveillance device. The control over the individual will become complete as they move us towards being a cashless economy. This translates into where we will be unable to buy food, may at any moment have our ability to message others cut, and will be forced to rely on autonomous vehicles to deliver us to our destinations.

    A lack of control over our lives grants those in charge total control over us making us powerless pawns and slaves with little choice but to do their bidding or perish. This dovetails with the move towards artificial intelligence where there exists great potential but also the dangerous possibility and risk that technology could create an environment where mankind is rendered redundant. This would leave mankind facing robots and weapons of mass  destruction. The noose is rapidly tightening around our necks os quickly it has resulted in a reshuffling in the list of the “Worlds 10 Worst Problems.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This Is Not Rocket Science!

    The last major trend to have exploded on the scene is growing concern over climate change and global warming. Sadly, few of those talking about it see cutting waste as a key part of the answer and a priority instead they tout massive change. The fact is, many of our problems flow from governments and consumers wasting so much. While this waste drives the GDP higher it does little to make our lives better.

    The reality is that “waste” is proving massively destructive to life on this planet. This extends to governments misallocating funds as corruption and crony capitalism flourish. Whether we are talking about bombs built and dropped in the middle of an empty desert, brochures that are printed but never distributed, or Medicaid fraud all add to our deficit and pull resources away from more important areas.

    For both political and economic reasons, poor planning, weak recycling practices, and wasteful squandering of our natural resources on things that yield little of value continue to haunt America and most of the world. The message that we should conserve our natural resources is vastly understated. Most climate change advocates seem to be nibbling around the edges of cutting waste and focused on issues few people agree about. These include over the top ideas that are predicted to cost a huge amount of money but may prove ineffective and even harm the environment over time. Often it is the same people responsible for our problems that propose these expensive cures. They also promote them as “job creators” to sweeten their allure. Sadly, most do not work but generate negative unintended consequences as they become giant costly boondoggles.

    After examining the top trends defining the last decade and ushering in the new there is little question they will play a key part in determining our future. The world is changing at a more rapid pace than at any time in our history. The takeaway is we can expect things to be very interesting going forward. This doesn’t necessarily mean they will be good or events will unfold as we hope but you can rest assured that boredom is not in the cards.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 19:30

  • Average US Family Can't Afford A Home In 71% Of The Country
    Average US Family Can’t Afford A Home In 71% Of The Country

    More Americans are getting priced out of purchasing homes than ever, as soaring prices continue to outpace wages, according to a new report.

    ATTOM Data Solutions’ Q4 2019 US Home Affordability Report says the average wage earner can’t purchase a home in 344 out of 486 counties, or about 71% of the US. 

    The report revealed the top five largest populated counties where median-priced homes outpaced wages in Q4 that made it unaffordable to the average American — were in Los Angeles County, CA; Maricopa County (Phoenix), AZ; San Diego County, CA; Orange County, CA (outside Los Angeles) and Miami-Dade County, FL.

    The top ten least affordable counties in Q4 were: Kings County, NY; Dallas County, TX; Riverside County, CA; Queens County, NY; and San Bernardino County, CA.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    About 142 out of 486 counties, or about 29% of the US, had an affordable median-priced home in Q4 for the average wage earner. Those counties were: Cook County (Chicago) IL; Harris County (Houston), TX; Wayne County (Detroit), MI; Philadelphia County, PA, and Cuyahoga County (Cleveland), OH.

    The report listed ten more counties where the average American could afford to purchase a home in Q4: Franklin County, OH; Oakland County, MI; Allegheny County, PA; Mecklenburg County, NC; and Fulton County, GA.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stagnate wages and excessive monetary policy via the Federal Reserve have contributed to an affordability crisis across the country. At least 34% of Americans, or approximately 100 million people, are in the renting economy, which has plunged homeownership rates to lows not seen since the 1960s.

    Almost half of US workers between ages 18 to 64 are employed in low-wage jobs, a recent Brookings Institution report found. Low wage jobs represent between 33% to 66% of all jobs in more than 400 metropolitan areas across the country. 

    “The Greatest Economy Ever” could be a reality for the top 10% of Americans who are a majority of the asset owners and have benefited from the Fed pumping trillions of dollars into the financial markets over the last decade. Still, the middle class has been wiped out, now referred to as the bottom 90%, most of them have been left behind and can’t purchase a home in a majority of the country. 

    Something has to change in the early 2020s, or the extreme wealth inequality that is building up could lead to social unrest. We’re sure the Fed, government and financial elites have a plan to launch People’s Quantitative Easing to thwart riots. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 19:00

  • Authorities Have Always Prevented The Bright Future Of Humankind
    Authorities Have Always Prevented The Bright Future Of Humankind

    Authored by Aleksandar Sarovic for The Saker Blog,

    Authorities have power over people, and they enjoy this power. They preserve their power in society primarily by imposing knowledge on people. Authorities have been teaching us everything we know. Nothing can come to us if it does not pass the filters of authorities. We are what the authorities made us become, and it is challenging to escape from it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you love baseball, democracy, or god, this is because the authorities made you love it. People hardly get a chance to love something if the authorities did not let them, even though people believe that they have free will. The point is, people may only choose the options that authorities give them. Inconvenient options for authorities are not even accessible to people. For example, society has never developed a knowledge of how to create a just society because the authorities have prevented searching for the solution. When people build something new on the top of the choices the authorities give them, this is only the development of the will of authorities.

    Authorities create rules which implement social policy, and people have to obey them. These rules have become the origin of social sciences. Authorities have always supported social ideas that followed their interests and suppressed those that didn’t. Therefore, social scientists have followed the interest of authorities and not of people. As a result, social sciences alienate society from social justice. We may accept that social scientists acted the best they could under the pressure of authorities, but also, their work prevents the progress of society.

    Even when social scientists want to improve society, they can hardly do it because the alienated knowledge they accepted from their predecessors put them on the wrong path. Through the history of humankind, authorities have supported the creation of complex social sciences that prevent us from finding the escape from social problems. We think the way the authorities taught us to think, and that prevents us from searching for the bright future of humankind.

    Social scientists have developed democracy and presented it as the best political choice of the people, by the people, for the people. According to this introduction, democracy must have been in the interest of authorities; otherwise, it would not be allowed to exist. Authorities have learned that dictatorship initiates a rebellion of people, which may take their lives. They found it more convenient to control the social policy secretly by manipulating people. Today they do it by controlling politicians, scientists, and media with the economic power they possess. I have presented how efficient they are in the article The Conspiracy of the World Exposed. As a result, we have a democracy that follows the interests of the elite and not of people. It is nothing else but a form of dictatorship that keeps preventing the freedom of people. Democracy must have been a designed forgery of the authorities.

    We name the authorities in capitalism, the elite. We call them the elite because they do not rule over society openly as authorities historically did, but by secretly using the wealth they possess. Their power is nothing lesser than the power of dictators who openly ruled, but it is much more secure and stable. People cannot replace the elite from power because they do not know who they are. The politicians who work for the elite listen to their messages very carefully because otherwise, they would lose financial support from the elite and would not be able to be politicians.

    Scientists know as well if they do not obey the elite, they will not get grants for their researches, and they would not be able to be scientists. This is the reason social scientists present capitalism as a final stage in the development of society. At least by not offering real solutions that might improve capitalism if not replacing it. The whole philosophy of capitalism is to let capitalists make profits. All of the paths that achieve this goal today lead to the exploitation of workers. The capitalism we know is very unjust.

    Social scientists prevent ideas which may endanger the status of the elite and support ideas that help the elite survive. The elite has encouraged social sciences to support Marxism because the elite knew in advance that Marxism would put the workers on a wrong path that could not replace capitalism. History has proved it. It also shows that the elite can cheat on the highest intellectuals. If Marxism were able to replace capitalism, the elite would ban it, and not one Marxist would be able to propagate Marxism freely. I have explained it in the article Marx still prevents the progress of society.

    All organizations in the western world that fight for a better future need money for their operations, and they can get it only from the elite because nobody else has it. By depending on the elite, these organizations lose their strength in fighting for social justice and a better world. Instead, by being corrupted by the elite, they rather mislead the people and prevent the bright future of humankind.

    All the information available to people is created and supported by the elite. The elite owns the mainstream media of the western world, but they hide it. So-called independent media desperately need money for their operations, and they may get it only from the elite because nobody else has a financial power to support them. They pay this support by being obedient to the elite. They do not publish material the elite do not like. On the other hand, when the elite are interested in promoting something, you may find information about it where ever you turn your head. When you see a persistent media reporting, you may be well aware it is created to deceive you.

    For example, people are perplexed about what exactly happened on the 9/11 terrorist attack thanks to the elite who invested billions of dollars in the 9/11 false propaganda. They did it to hide their involvement in 9/11, but also to deceive and mislead people. The elite used 9/11 to conquer independent countries around the world and to reduce the freedom of people. The elite are masters of deception. Their manipulation also divides people because then, they cannot change anything. I explained what happened on 9/11 in the article My investigation of 9/11.

    Global warming propaganda is about increasing restrictions in CO2 production, which has the intention to keep the power of the elite by preventing the progress of the world, especially in developing countries. Yes, the Sahara desert expands, and the Arctic shrinks as the result of global warming, but it does not affect the rich countries. The elite has created the global warming issue, not because they are concerned about climate change, but because they want to enforce rules to control the world.

    In a similar example, the development of nuclear weapons is forbidden in countries that do not have it. It should obliged developed countries to get rid of their nuclear weapons as well, though they do not have any intention to do it.

    The elite has initiated all of the events and talks in the western world. Nothing beside it on a public level exists. That means people think the way the elite made them think. That means whatever people do, they can do nothing but support the elite. This is the reason nothing changes. Today’s society is an authoritarian dictatorship that prevents people from freedom of creating and meeting their needs.

    *  *  *

    All social problems have their origin in authoritarian systems, and an escape from all of the social issues lies in equal human rights. Equal human rights will create good societies unconditionally by giving everyone the same opportunities. This is what authorities have prevented from all of the history of humankind, and as a result, we do not know even what equal human rights are.

    There is no such thing as partially equal human rights because these human rights are not equal. There is only one package of equal human rights, and it should not be rocket science to discover how equal human rights are supposed to look. Everyone can come up with the idea alone if they eliminate all rights that are not equal and try to imagine the equal human rights replacement. The problem is quite simple, and yet, society has not defined equal human rights so far.

    To be able to define equal human rights, we need to rethink all of the imposed knowledge authorities have produced through the history of humankind. Social scientists not only do not want to do it, but they also refuse new ideas that reconsider the alienated knowledge they have accepted. Social sciences should develop society, but in fact, they prevent the development of society and the bright future of humankind.

    People tend not to accept new ideas that question the established way of thinking. Once we start loving baseball, democracy, or god, we keep loving it no matter what. As a result, people live in a deception created by authorities from the day they are born till the day they die. It alienates them from a good life, and it is tough to change.

    George Orwell: “The further a society drifts from truth, the more it will hate those who speak it.”

    Mark Twain: “It’s easier to fool people than to convince them that they have been fooled.”

    The fight for equal human rights will not be easy, but it is well worth it. Once we start establishing equal human rights, a bright future of humankind will begin. And defining equal human rights is very simple. I did it in the article Equal Human Rights will Build a Good Society Unconditionally.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 18:30

  • Chinese President Xi Installs Finance Experts To Avoid "Lurking, Devastating Debt Bombs"
    Chinese President Xi Installs Finance Experts To Avoid “Lurking, Devastating Debt Bombs”

    The average forecast for China’s GDP in 2020 could be around 5.9%, indicating that the world’s second-largest economy will continue to experience downward pressure. 

    Slowing growth, deteriorating financial conditions for local governments, slowing property construction investment, plunging manufacturing investment, and credit crunches in low-tier cities have sparked concerns that China’s big financial meltdown could be nearing. 

    In response to the elevated financial risks, Chinese President Xi Jinping installed 12 former executives at state-run financial institutions across the country who will support the communist government’s ability to combat banking and debt difficulties, reported Taipei Times.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some of the most recent appointments have been central bankers, veteran securities officials, and provincial governors, who will also help transition China’s economy from the world’s factory to a service-based economy producing high-quality goods. At the same time, the government is preparing for an extensive personnel reshuffle in 2022, with at least half of its 25 members of the Politburo could be replaced. 

    Feng Chucheng, a partner at Plenum, an independent research platform in Hong Kong, told Taipei Times that “Bankers are now in demand, as local governments are increasingly exposed to financial risks.” 

    “These ex-bankers and regulators are given the task of preventing and mitigating major financial risks,” Chucheng said.

    The appointments are in response to growth collapsing to a three-decade low in 2019, as traditional monetary policy becomes ineffective to boost the economy. 

    One reason behind the ineffectiveness behind monetary policy in the country could be due to a balance sheet recession of companies that are paying down high debt loads, in an attempt to deleverage, causing investments to decline and contributing to slower economic growth. 

    Taipei Times noted that five regional banks have had “liquidity problems this year, raising the prospect of devastating debt bombs lurking in unexpected corners.” 

    He Haifeng, director of the Institute of Financial Policy at the Chinese Academy of Social Science, said: “Appointing financial vice governors to provinces can help better integrate financial policies into local practice, and to prevent financial risks beforehand.”

    And while central banks around the world are cutting interest rates and pumping liquidity into markets on the premise of a return to global growth in 2020, China is currently preparing for a slowing economy and financial armageddon

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 18:00

  • Tax Avoidance: A Moral Duty
    Tax Avoidance: A Moral Duty

    Authored by Darren Smith via JonathanTurley.org,

    While it is a truism that in many respects some form of taxation is needed to provide necessities to a society, in practice many government and social detriments arise as either a consequence to or are derivative of tax policy. I’ve found for myself that fostering a personal goal of avoiding specific taxation or in many cases excessive taxation generally comports with a greater advocacy of morality in several beneficial forms.

    First I must emphasize the difference between Tax Avoidance and Tax Evasion.

    • Tax Evasion is the criminal and / or civil refusal to make payment of taxes a taxpayer is legally compelled to provide as a consequence of earnings or purchases.

    • Tax Avoidance is the lawful participation in a practice where a taxpayer is not legally required to pay taxes or he or she chooses to abstain from or to minimize activities that generate lawful tax liability.

    I am by no means advocating tax evasion and I strongly discourage others to engage in such. While we have an obligation to pay the tax we are required, we are also equally obligated to make use of any deduction or credit of tax we are due.

    I believe this topic can be discussed in lengthy detail but for the purpose of brevity a primer should suffice.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In tax avoidance as a moral duty one has to probably accept the notion that not all goals sought by government or especially politicians are benevolent. For nearly the past two decades the U.S. Federal Government’s political leadership has actively engaged in what I consider to be highly immoral behavior. At it’s worst it has willingly engaged in instigating completely elective foreign expeditions and wars that resulted in the deaths of hundreds of thousands of foreign civilians, and thousands of American military personal and citizens. In fact it could realistically be argued that the resolve “to get” individuals who our politicians did not like, such as Saddam Hussein , Assad, and Quadaffi, was so prevalent that Congress and the then presidents convinced themselves that close to a million lives were worth taking out these three men. Men I might add posed no true threat to the people of the United States. So over a trillion dollars of tax payer supplied money and treasury securities went toward those debacles.

    I do not take issue with the idea of needing a military to protect ourselves in the ordinary sense, but lately in my life politicians have shown on the federal level that they believe a tool for personal political gain is to cause the death of civilians and our soldiers here to “get the bad guy”. And that looking tough works to get hired in an elected position. I am not willing to reward that behavior.

    Often in the past wars have ended simply because a nation depleted itself of money and materiel and could no longer prosecute the battle. It could also be argued that a government being awash in the financial means to fight an elective war would be more tempted to use such means than if it was constrained by a limited budget. For me I do not agree with providing that means so easily.

    The first example of “getting the bad guy” I came to realize in my life was President George H.W. Bush’s need to get Bad Guy Manuel Noriega. back in the 1980s. Most of you readers know of this affair so I won’t repeat it. For those who do not feel free to search for “Operation Just Cause”, the almost complete joke of a name our government gave that endeavor.

    I remember having a training class with two officers who formerly served in U.S. Special Forces during the invasion of Panama to oust Bad Guy Noriega on drug trafficking charges (or so that was the excuse)–A police action as it was called then. One of the officers said they were sent there to get Noriega and when in country found themselves pinned down by sniper fire. So, they called in an airstrike which leveled a building. Of course they had to defend themselves but I had to wonder what kind of police action this was. I knew that generally when we went to take down a drug dealer in the county it generally did not involve airstrikes and blowing shit up all over town. But it seems that when it involves bad guys our federal government doesn’t like, well what’s a few hundred or thousand civilian lives anyway? I must have missed something when I went through the academy. I thought we had to preserve the peace not destroy it.

    Controlling the size and over-reach of government

    The old maxim goes, “a government that is big enough to give you everything you want is strong enough to take everything you have” and the more money we supply government the greater it grows in terms of control and want of increasing revenue. Such is the way of empire building.

    I’ve seen many examples over the years where politicians here at the state level only curtailed spending when faced with either a crisis of revenue shortfalls or when the voters finally had enough and revoked their ability to tax excessively via the Citizen’s Initiative process or by removal at the ballot box. If we continue to allow government to be provided with limitless amounts of tax revenue it only encourages excessive spending and decreases any need for efficiency. And once again the pols will demand increasing tax rates exacted against citizens just to keep the juggernaut rolling. And the bigger it is, the more it wants to encroach upon others.

    The Practice of Tax Avoidance results in stronger, more independent living.

    Consider the notion of Conspicuous Consumption, that is the never-ending goal of spending money on “things” to elevate one’s self-image. It is the antithesis of Simple Living.

    Living beyond one’s means results in many greater tax liabilities, whether it be in the form of higher amounts of sales tax or engaging in activities that generate tax itself. The simplest form of this involves eating in expensive restaurants in high-sales-tax cities as opposed to buying ordinary food at a grocery store (tax free) and eating at home for fifteen-percent of the cost. The food is also healthier I might add.

    The stupidest example I personally saw was a Seattle based restaurant that charged more for pop than beer (due to Seattle’s sugared beverage tax) and because of the higher costs restaurants must pay due to over-regulation , the restaurant added an extra labor cost surcharge which was also subject to sales tax. In the end it cost more than five day’s worth of groceries just so that I could pay more tax and reward a city that is governed by some of the biggest fools in the state.

    Yet, if instead we buy ordinary groceries, and don’t support a government that is incompetent, if enough restaurants fail maybe businesses might actually begin to exert some action against bad legislation. Surely this is a bit harsh, but who really motivates politicians, the voter or corporations?

    Also ,if we looked carefully as a measure of what type of house or car to buy by the amount of tax we must pay resulting from such a purchase we might soon begin to realize that perhaps we don’t need the biggest, most expensive, most energy intensive, and most arrogant example of a dwelling or vehicle. An eight thousand square foot house that we can barely afford is not only more costly on the environment but can we morally justify our actions when a two thousand square foot house is just as livable? How much more hubris do we need when so much of the world would be greatly pleased just to have clean water and electricity. If instead we took some of that cost savings or superfluous property tax (which would probably be wasted otherwise) and gave it directly to a legitimate charity that actually bettered the lives of others less fortunate than we. Or we could at least be somewhat selfish and keep the money ourselves and not be as strapped for cash.

    Beneficial Tax Law Can Elicit Morally Sound Behavior

    While it can be debatable as to whether or not subsidies and tax credits result in a net benefit to the intended recipient generally speaking there are times where it does much good.

    When deductions to charity are permitted there is a direct link between the amounts individuals give and what tax breaks they receive, and in the absence of such charity is curtailed. The per-capita generosity for Americans is one of the highest in the world and we have a tradition of tax deductions for charitable giving. (Though unfortunately this has lessened recently due to tax law changes). We have also benefited from tax credit schemes that encouraged the purchase of greener vehicles and the willingness of investors to engage in the construction of Tax Credit low-income housing projects to house the under-served. In the latter, the desire for tax avoidance actually put roofs over people’s heads.

    I believe it is incumbent upon people to strongly consider how government will use what is given to it. The more power it is given, the less benevolent it will inevitably become. We only need a cursory understanding of history to recognize how usual this is the case. And money is as inseparable from power as it is from greed. The more money you give to politicians, the less freedom you will have.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 17:30

  • Powerful Winter Storm To Dump Snow And Ice From Northern Plains and Upper Midwest to Northeast
    Powerful Winter Storm To Dump Snow And Ice From Northern Plains and Upper Midwest to Northeast

    Winter Storm Gage is producing snow, ice, and strong winds from the Northern Plains and upper Midwest Sunday will move into the Northeast early next week and unleash a wintery mess that could cause severe travel headaches ahead of New Years, reported The Weather Channel

    The storm is expected to traverse across a broad area from Nebraska to Dakotas to northern and western Minnesota. Snow and high winds could produce blizzard conditions in these areas throughout Sunday. Some regions could see as much as 12 inches by Monday morning.

    The National Weather Service (NWS) published winter storm warnings, watches, and advisories for parts of the Central Plains into the northern Great Lakes, eastern upstate New York and parts of New England.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    NWS warned, “the same winter storm that is impacting areas of the Plains and Upper Midwest will be heading east next week and is expected to bring locally significant snow and ice across portions of the Northeast ahead of the New Years holiday.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Snow, sleet, and freezing rain will spread across eastern upstate New York into central and northern New England by Monday night. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Then by Tuesday, colder air will swoop into the region from Canada and turn much of the storm into a snow event for eastern upstate New York as well as in central and northern New England. Rain is expected in coastal areas of southeast New England.

    The Weather Channel predicts eastern Dakotas to northern Minnesota, northern Wisconsin and the Upper Peninsula of Michigan could receive around six inches of snow by Tuesday evening. Northeastern New York, Vermont, New Hampshire, and northern New England could see six to 12 inches. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A significant ice event through Monday could be seen from Scranton to Albany.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WCCO CBS Minnesota shared a video of a school bus sliding sideways down a street amid icy conditions on Saturday. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Earlier in the week, the storm produced wet conditions and heavy fog in Texas, led to this dramatic accident caught on camera: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 17:00

    Tags

  • Jim Rickards Warns That Tsunami Of Debt Could Upend The Economy
    Jim Rickards Warns That Tsunami Of Debt Could Upend The Economy

    Via Birch Gold Group,

    At some point, an economic problem deepens so much that the piper has to be paid. Both in the U.S. and globally, one of those problems appears to be mountains of debt.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Jim Rickards recently issued a dire proclamation about the global debt situation:

    Current global debt levels are simply not sustainable. Debt actually is sustainable if the debt is used for projects with positive returns and if the economy supporting the debt is growing faster than the debt itself. But neither of those conditions applies today.

    In other words, most of the global debt we’re racking up isn’t being used for productive purposes. Instead it’s being used to service “benefits, interest and discretionary spending,” according to Rickards.

    This debt growth should continue. According to the Institute of International Finance (IIF), global debt is expected to pass $255 trillion by the end of this year, and they don’t see the pace of debt accumulation slowing down.

    In fact, you can see below how the official global debt has already skyrocketed from about $80 trillion in 1999 to this new record:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Zero Hedge reports that, by year’s end, the global debt will be “roughly equivalent to a record 330% of global GDP.”

    With debt outpacing growth by such a large margin, we are fast approaching a day of reckoning. And when that day arrives, it could be disastrous.

    Rickards: “It’s a Catastrophic Global Debt Crisis Waiting to Happen”

    Another Zero Hedge artjcle reports:

    The world bank looked at the four major episodes of debt increases that have occurred in more than 100 countries since 1970 — the Latin American debt crisis of the 1980s, the Asian financial crisis of the late 1990s and the global financial crisis from 2007 to 2009.

    The bank says that we’re in the fourth episode now, and their prognosis isn’t good. In fact, they called the failure to properly manage the global debt “complacency”:

    “The increase in debt globally has already been larger, faster, and more broad-based since the Great Financial Crisis than in the previous three waves. This should be seen as a leading indicator for the possibility of financial crises ahead and shake up the complacency that is evident in macroeconomic policy making today with regard to increasing levels of both public and private debt.”

    Jim Rickards thinks the “trigger” for an imminent global debt crisis, if one happens, would boil down to rates:

    Low interest rates facilitate unsustainable debt levels, at least in the short run. But with so much debt on the books, even modest rate increases will cause debt levels and deficits to explode as new borrowing is sought just to cover interest payments.

    He also thinks that if these debt levels and deficits spiral out of control, it won’t take much to trigger a debt crisis not seen since the 1930s.

    World Bank President David Malpass sounded another alarm that if a crisis were to hit: “Emerging and developing economies are already more vulnerable on a variety of fronts than they were ahead of the last crisis.”

    Put simply, that means disaster for those economies if the global economy is upended. The ripple effects from such a crisis would also hit the U.S. economy hard.

    Once it hits, no amount of wishful thinking, denial, or ignorance will make this problem go away.

    Make Sure Your Retirement Stands On Solid Ground

    Unabated debt fueled growth on a global scale has put the world economy on a “knife edge of a debt crisis,” if Jim Rickards ends up being right.

    So now is an ideal time to consider fortifying your own “economy.” Market optimism is almost always pushed until it’s too late.

    If you want to hedge against that, don’t wait to start preparing your exit plan. Consider adding precious metals like gold and silver to your savings, which tend to perform well under uncertain economic conditions.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 16:30

  • US Conducts Air Strikes In Iraq And Syria, Targeting Iran-Backed Militia After US Contractor Killed
    US Conducts Air Strikes In Iraq And Syria, Targeting Iran-Backed Militia After US Contractor Killed

    The U.S. military conducted air strikes in Iraq and Syria against the five facilities controlled by the Kataib Hezbollah militia group in response to the killing of a U.S. civilian contractor in a rocket attack on an Iraqi military base, US Central Command said on Sunday. A U.S. official told Reuters that the strikes were carried out by F-15 fighter jets.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Iraqi security and militia sources said at least 18 militia fighters were killed and more than 50 wounded following three U.S. air strikes in Iraq on Sunday evening, with Reuters reporting that at least four local Kataib Hezbollah commanders were among the dead, adding that one of the strikes had targeted the militia group’s headquarters near the western Qaim district on the border with Syria.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Pentagon said it had targeted three locations of the Iranian-backed Shi’ite Muslim militia group in Iraq and two in Syria. The locations included weapons storage facilities and command and control locations the group had used to plan and execute attacks on coalition forces.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “In response to repeated Kata’ib Hizbollah attacks on Iraqi bases that host Operation Inherent Resolve (OIR) coalition forces, U.S. forces have conducted precision defensive strikes … that will degrade KH’s ability to conduct future attacks against OIR coalition forces” chief Pentagon spokesman Jonathan Hoffman said in a statement.

    The US has accused Kataib Hezbollah of carrying out a strike involving more than 30 rockets on Friday which killed a US civilian contractor and injured four US service members and two members of the Iraqi Security Forces near the oil-rich city of Kirkuk.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Earlier this month, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo blamed Iranian-backed forces for a series of attacks on bases in Iraq and warned Iran that any attacks by Tehran or proxies that harmed Americans or allies would be “answered with a decisive U.S. response” which begs the question if today’s attack is just a precursor to a broader Iranian offensive.

    And in what may perhaps be an early response to this question, shortly after news of the air strikes, the US evacuated all staff from the Iraq embassy in Baghdad following speculation that Kataib Hezbollah might carry-out a rocket attack in retaliation

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And while we wait to see if an attack will indeed take place against the US embassy in Baghdad, there were unconfirmed reports that Kataib Hezbollah had fired four 107mm rockets at Camp Taji where US troops are present and the Iraqi Air Force has a base; the attack was in response to the US airstrike targeting the Kataib Hezbollah’s local HQ.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 16:00

  • 2020: The Year Of The Oil Bankruptcies
    2020: The Year Of The Oil Bankruptcies

    Authored by Alex Kimani via OilPrice.com,

    A bankruptcy boom has hit the oil and gas industry, and it’s just getting started. Investors have lost their appetite for shale, and energy debt has become among the least desirable in the market. 

    The industry has been teetering on the verge of mass hysteria for much of 2019 as a record number of energy companies folded.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Energy and Restructuring law firm Hayes and Boone’s, a grand total of 50 energy companies filed for bankruptcy during the first nine months of the year, including 33 oil and gas producers, 15 oilfield services companies and two midstream companies.

    In contrast, 43 oil and gas companies filed for bankruptcy for the whole of 2018. 

    The biggest oil and gas bankruptcy of the year–indeed, the biggest since 2016–was EP Energy, which filed for bankruptcy in October, unable to pay back some $5 billion in debt. 

    Now, some observers are warning that the shakeout will pick up serious momentum in 2020.

    Bingeing on Debt

    During the latest shale boom, the putative class valedictorian of the modern energy industry, American drillers binged on mountains of readily available debt as they capitalized on investors and financiers willing to gamble on the premise that fracking operations could be significantly cheaper and more efficient than conventional drillers.

    Before long, oil markets were flooded with a deluge of the commodity far outstripping demand. In what few could have foreseen, the US became the world’s largest oil producer, with its nearly 13 million b/d output turning it from a net importer to a net exporter of crude. Predictably, prices tanked by a sizable margin, dropping to levels well below the breakeven points of many drillers.

    Suddenly, investors became wary of the shale industry and energy debt became anathema.

    They have good reason to be scared. 

    Companies with junk-rated bonds have been defaulting on interest payments at record levels, while dozens of smaller drillers that had saddled themselves with too much debt have been dropping like flies.

    Now analysts see this taking an even sharper turn, with more mergers and more debt restructurings required to get the industry back in shape.

    As Ken Monaghan, Amundi Pioneer co-director of high yield, has told CNBC:

    We’re at the early stages [of the shakeout]. The problem is some of these companies still have a bit of rope to go. they don’t have [debt] maturities that are coming up in 2020 and 2021. They’re going to try to outrun the clock and hope that oil prices move higher.”

    Michael Bradley, energy strategist with Tudor, Pickering, Holt, has expressed a similar sentiment, saying that the market is no longer rewarding energy companies with aggressive expansion schemes, preferring instead to see profits and money returned to shareholders.

    “Most people are saying we don’t want you to spend money on growth. We want you to give the money back because you guys are dummies.”

    Monaghan says there are more distressed companies in the energy sector than in any other, with energy bonds only recently moving to the green after remaining in losing territory for much of the year thanks to the latest oil price mini-rally.

    Bradley estimates that about $30 billion- $40 billion of high-yield energy debt [bonds] is now at risk. These companies have little choice but to seek bankruptcy protection and restructure if they hope to live to see another oil boom.

    Catch 22

    Shale drillers face a catch 22 situation because of the very nature of their business. Young shale wells decline at notoriously fast clips, with many depleting 70 percent to 75 percent of their reserves in the first year, thus forcing shale drillers to continue drilling new wells to replace lost supply. But with a freeze-out in debt and oil prices still low, they are bound to find it increasingly hard to keep up production.

    Bradley sees many mid-cap oil companies resorting to mergers in order to survive with an estimated $2B-$7B in M&A deals over the next two years. 

    These won’t be the usual gilt-edged mergers with fat premiums, though, as the tie-up between WPX Energy and Felix Energy has proved. This was a smart and sober $2.5-billion tie-up that reflects the fact that investors have soured on the sector. 

    In other words, the consolidation wave that everyone seems to expect is going to focus on smart deals, or none at all. 

    This also means that large-cap independent players such as Concho Resources Inc. (NYSE:CXO) and Diamondback Energy Inc. (NASDAQ:FANG) are likely to see their market shares grow.

    Ultimately, the ongoing shakeout is likely to leave the industry in a much better patch, though not so much for the consumer who will have to contend with higher oil prices thanks to higher levels of production discipline.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 15:30

  • China Launches Stealth Rate Cut By Switching Benchmark Lending Rate, Lowering Funding Costs
    China Launches Stealth Rate Cut By Switching Benchmark Lending Rate, Lowering Funding Costs

    More than 4 years since the last official Chinese rate cut (not of its far more targeted Required Reserve Ratio but its broad Benchmark rate), economists and pundits were wondering when, if ever, Beijing would finally cut its main rate again to ease financial conditions again at the broadest level and boost fading corporate profits while kickstarting the country’s moribund economy whose GDP is now growing below 6% GDP, the lowest on record. To be sure, China has had its share of setbacks in the past year preventing it from implementing the type of monetary policy it desires, most notably soaring food inflation as a result 110% pork CPI…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … even as producer prices, a driver of industrial profits, slumped below zero earlier in 2019, a clear indicator that China’s enterprises desperate for lower rates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet, a wholesale easing, such as cutting the benchmark rate, could potentially spark even more food inflation, setting off violent popular protests. After all, the Chinese population’s patience is already running thin, forcing Beijing to scrap import tariffs on US pork exports, a move which Xi Jinping (and Trump) quickly spun as a trade war concession, but in reality was a matter of preserving the peace for China which is desperate for any sources of cheaper protein to keep its 1.4 billion people fed, and happy.

    Well, overnight China finally did what so many had been expecting to do, if once again it did so in a roundabout way.

    Remember that back on August 17, China’s central bank unveiled detailed measures on its long-awaited interest rate reform by establishing a reference rate for new loans issued by banks to help steer corporate borrowing costs lower and support a slowing economy.

    As a key part of the rate overhaul, the Loan Prime Rate (LPR) would eventually become the new Benchmark Reference Rate to be used by banks for lending which is aimed at supporting funding as well as lower borrowing costs for small businesses; the rate will be set monthly (20th of every month) and will be linked to the Medium-term Lending Facility rate. The current 1 year LPR stands at 4.15% after its latest cut on Nov 30 versus the Benchmark Rate 4.35%.

    So even with the PBOC pushing the LPR lower by 10bps since its August inception, the benchmark rate has remained unchanged at 4.35% since October 2015. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is in this context that on Saturday, China’s entire interest rate framework was overhauled when the PBOC ordered lenders to adopt the new LPR rate as the de facto basis for all credit from next year, marking an end to the previous benchmark in what Bloomberg said was another step toward liberalizing the financial system (although many disagree).

    In a statement, the PBOC said that financial institutions should stop using the old lending rate as the pricing reference for all credit from January, and gradually convert existing loans to a new base using the loan prime rate, from March to August. The one-year lending rate had provided the previous anchor for loans across the economy.

    And since the PBOC is effectively forcing lenders to adopt a reference rate that is 20bps lower than the benchmark, Saturday’s announcement is effectively stealth easing, and will lower costs for the roughly 152 trillion yuan ($21.7 trillion) in yuan-denominated outstanding loans held by financial institutions and boost economic growth, even though – as with most things in China – it does not involve a straightforward cut to interest rates.

    The transition is “in line with the need to further reduce the financing costs for the real economy, although there’s still a long way to go,” said Fan Ruoying, analyst at the Bank of China’s Institute of International Finance in Beijing, as quoted by Bloomberg. The shift to the LPR comes at a time when Beijing has unveiled a raft of pro-growth measures, including tax cuts, more infrastructure spending, reductions in the amount of cash banks must keep on reserve and lending rates to boost credit.

    Ironically, while the move will benefit end-consumers and debtors, it could have an especially adverse impact for creditors, forcing even more bank failures, bank runs, bailouts and nationalizations. As Fan warned, “the move will present more challenges for commercial banks because the interest margin will be squeezed and lenders will need to improve their pricing ability.” As a reminder, many of the small and medium-bank failures that took place in 2019 – and there have been more this year than ever on record – have been attributed to the ongoing drop in rates that banks can charge client which in a time of shadow bank crackdowns, has meant more bank failures amid a flattening of the Net Interest Margin curve.

    “The purpose of the step is to make interest rates more market-driven and help lower financing costs,” said Wen Bin, an economist at Minsheng Bank in Beijing.

    To be sure, the impact of the loan reform won’t be groundbreaking as most new loans issued in the past 4 or so months already track the LPR: “By now close to 90% of new loans are priced with the LPR, but outstanding loans with floating rates are still based on the benchmark lending rate,” the central bank said in a separate statement. That means the real lending cost “can’t reflect changes in market interest rates.”

    Why did the PBOC decide to shift to the LPR, which we also dubbed China’s Libor rate when we discussed it in the summer, besides providing it a convenient way to cut rates by 20bps without actually implementing a 20bps rate cut? As a reminder, the rate which will become the benchmark for new loans this year, is based on the interest rate for one-year loans that 18 banks offer their best customers. Banks submit the quoted price each month in the form of a spread over the rate of the PBOC’s medium-term loans.

    According to Bloomberg, the move may help make monetary policy more effective, resolving a long-standing problem in which cheap funding that the PBOC offers banks doesn’t result in cheaper loans to businesses. In the new scenario when all borrowing is based on the LPR, the supply of central bank funding or cuts to the rates of medium-term loans will in theory push down the LPR, and reduce the cost of all lending to businesses. One can almost call it trickle down credit with Chinese characteristics…

    Whether or not such a move will succeed remains to be seen, but one thing is certain: the transition to just one short-term rate will simply somewhat China’s arcane rate system. The following Bloomberg explainer makes it clear why this was long overdue: most central banks govern the price of money in an economy via the rate that banks are charged to borrow cash over short time periods. In China, that approach had been divided into two steps. First, the PBOC guided prices for funding in the inter-bank market via its reverse repurchase agreements and medium-term lending facility. Then, it set the benchmark rates that were used to price mortgages, business loans and other commercial lending – the one-year and five-year lending rates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So will a successful transition from a benchmark to an LPR rate stoke another asset bubble? Perhaps, although the PBOC is careful to avoid overheating among China’s most important assets: housing. While the interest rate of home mortgages should also be converted to the LPR, the central bank said that the new borrowing cost must be the same as the current charges to “reflect the request to regulate the property market.” Eventually, at some point in the future, home mortgages could be repriced in the future, based on the LPR, the PBOC said, giving itself a buffer for when China’s housing market takes its next leg down.

    And while Bloomberg concludes that this latest stealth rate cut shows the PBOC’s “commitment to making the interest-rate system more market-driven” controls on deposits remain for now. In short, the step-by-step approach appears to be trying to open up the system without shrinking interest margins too rapidly and adding more pressure to smaller lenders. Unfortunately, with numerous banks having already failed previously in 2019 (as discussed here), and with more than half of China’s banks failing a recent central bank stress test, the only guaranteed outcome from this weekend’s effective rate cut is that, paradoxically, it will only accelerate the rate of failure of China’s already cash strapped, and in many cases insolvent, banks.

    Which begs the question: did Beijing, in hopes of gently stimulating the economy, start a cascade of failures that will eventually drag down more than just the small and medium banks (and result in the executions of many more bank CEOs) despite such “brilliant” marketing ploys as offering a pound of pork to starving savers with every new deposit, and precipitate China’s long-overdue financial crisis?


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 15:00

  • Narrative Managers Claim White Helmets Founder Was Driven To Suicide By Syria Skeptics
    Narrative Managers Claim White Helmets Founder Was Driven To Suicide By Syria Skeptics

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    Imperialist spinmeisters are trial-ballooning a new Syria narrative that is so breathtakingly stupid it needs its own article solely for the purpose of mockery.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Christmas Eve PBS aired a bizarre segment on the death of James Le Mesurier, the former military intelligence officer who founded the extremely shady propaganda construct known as the White Helmets. The segment makes relentless, ham-fisted appeals to emotion, even attempting to associate the White Helmets with Armistice Day using wistful camera pans over poppy flowers and misty war memorial art exhibits, but by far the most yogurt-brained part is its repeated suggestions that Le Mesurier killed himself because people had been accusing him of being a propagandist.

    “And now a story of a humanitarian trying to help Syria: the suspicious death in Turkey last month of James Le Mesurier, the co-founder of the White Helmets rescue organization in Syria,” opens PBS News Hour’s Judy Woodruff.

    “Friends and colleagues fear that he may have been murdered or driven to suicide by a campaign of character assassination.”

    “Whatever the cause, Le Mesurier was a victim of a very modern war,” the special’s narrator solemnly intones.

    “There is no hiding place in cyberspace. Le Mesurier was at the epicenter of a propaganda war, and his friends are appalled at what they regard as a campaign of character assassination.”

    “The amount of abuse, the amount of ill-placed propaganda, disinformation that’s on social media and the Internet coming out of Russian bots and Syria, Syrian regime, and others was unbearable,” Col. Hamish de Bretton-Gordon mourns.

    This ridiculous narrative was picked up and run with by Syria narrative managers on Twitter.

    “On lethal disinformation — a thread,” tweeted virulent Syria narrative manager Idrees Ahmad.

    “This is a disturbing report by Malcolm Brabant on the lethal consequences of conspiracism. It shows how slander and disinformation may have pushed James Le Mesurier, one of the finest humanitarians, to his death. The report highlights the pernicious lies issuing from the self-described ‘Working Group on Syria, Propaganda and Media’, which is a small group of academics, none specialising in Syria or the Middle East, in alliance with a group of pro-Kremlin trolls like Vanessa Beeley et al.”

    It is true that both Beeley and the Working Group on Syria, Propaganda and Media have accused Le Mesurier of running a propaganda operation on behalf of western governments using western government funding. But if Ahmad truly believed that accusing people of conducting propaganda caused them to kill themselves, he should turn himself in for attempted murder, because he accuses people of being propagandists constantly.

    Here’s a link to Ahmad calling journalist Max Blumenthal a “propagandist for Maduro”. Here’s a link to Ahmad calling Beeley a “pro-regime propagandist”. Here’s a link to Ahmad calling award-winning journalist Jonathan Steele “a fabricator and a propagandist”. Here’s a link to Ahmad calling CIA whistleblower John Kiriakou “a propagandist for Putin”.

    Talk about “lethal disinformation”, Idrees.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But of course, no one really believes that accusations of conducting propaganda actually drive people to suicide. If that were so, people like me would have thrown ourselves off a building years ago.

    I am accused of being a propagandist nearly every day. At the height of Russiagate hysteria it happened many times a day in my blog post comments and social media notifications. Depending on what’s in the news and how I’ve responded to it I’ve been accused of writing paid propaganda for the Kremlin, Assad, the Iranian government, Palestinians, Pyongyang, Beijing, Maduro, the alt-right, George Soros, and WikiLeaks, just off the top of my head.

    Every anti-imperialist, anti-interventionist, and antiwar activist with any kind of platform has had this experience. Ever since the new McCarthyism of establishment-driven Russia hysteria took off, accusing people who question imperialist narratives of conducting psyops for foreign governments has become the norm in political discourse. It’s created an extremely hostile and vitriolic environment in which productive conversations are vanishingly rare.

    Where’s our PBS special? Does anyone care? Is there any compassion from these hand-wringing establishment loyalists for the fact that Vanessa Beeley and the members of the Working Group on Syria, Propaganda and Media are hounded day in and day out by establishment narrative managers and their brainwashed followers with accusations of spreading propaganda, supporting genocide, and embracing war crimes? I know I’ve never had a garment-rending Idrees Ahmad thread written about concerns for my psychological well being, and I’ve been targeted by multiple online harassment campaigns over the years.

    The amount of hateful vitriol that gets leveled at people for simply opposing imperialism, for wanting peace, is truly astonishing. Just for saying “Hey here are some reasons we should maybe reconsider toppling yet another government in yet another Middle Eastern nation” will bring in complete strangers calling you all sorts of names, calling you disgusting, calling you evil, calling you a monster. For supporting peace.

    There are all kinds of people in the world who are very deserving of harsh words. Powerful exploiters, oppressors and manipulators. People who destroy the environment for profit. People who get rich selling weapons of war while paying politicians and think tanks to advance the cause of war. War criminals who’ve never faced justice. With all those people in the world who we can all agree are terrible, you wouldn’t think peace activists should feature anywhere near the top of anyone’s list. But they do. Because war propaganda is just that influential.

    And, of course, nobody cares. None of these narrative managers care about what psychological burden they might be placing on people by assuring their audiences that it’s perfectly sane and normal to hound and harass anyone who questions imperialist propaganda. Their concern is not and has never been about anyone’s psychological health. Their concern is in managing narratives in a way that favors the US-centralized empire that they serve.

    I do not know what caused Le Mesurier’s death; to be in any way confident that a known spook committed suicide at all, or was murdered by Russians, is absurd. Maybe he killed himself because he failed to listen to the adage “Before you diagnose yourself with depression or low self-esteem, first make sure that you are not, in fact, just surrounded by assholes.”

    What I do know, with absolute certainty, is that only idiots believe that skepticism about western regime change agendas in the Middle East kills people.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics on Twitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypalpurchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my new book Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone, or my previous book Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish or use any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 12/29/2019 – 14:30

    Tags

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 29th December 2019

  • 'Mass Stabbing' At Jewish Hannukah Celebration In New York, At Least 5 Injured
    'Mass Stabbing' At Jewish Hannukah Celebration In New York, At Least 5 Injured

    At least 5 people have been stabbed after a black male entered Rabbi Rottenburg’s Shul, located in the Forshay neighborhood in Monsey, New York, and pulled out a machete.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Notably, today is the last day of Hannukah.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As VosIzNeias.com reports, the alleged assailant pulled off the cover and stabbed at least 5 people. One of the victims was stabbed in the chest. Two of the victims of the attack were taken into hospital as critical.

    One of the victims was stabbed at least 6 times.

    The fifth/least severe case had a cut in his hand.

    The perpetrator then ran out and escaped in a vehicle. His plates were spotted before he left (HPT-5757 per the person who saw it and we confirmed it with him directly – a Gray Nissan Sentra), and the police are currently searching for him.

    Videos of the stabbing attack began disseminating on social media.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Motti Seligson, director of media for Chabad.org, told The Jerusalem Post that the congregants, Hassidim, were gathered for a Hanukkah party and confirmed the preliminary details of the event.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Orthodox Jewish Public Affairs Council said five people, all Hasidic, were transported to local hospitals with stab wounds. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    OJPAC also noted that “the perp’s face was partially covered with a scarf but skin showed him to be an African American.”

    New York Attorney General Letitia James tweeted support for the Jewish community shortly after the reported attack.

    “There is zero tolerance for acts of hate of any kind and we will continue to monitor this horrific situation,” the tweet read in part.

    “We are closely monitoring the reports of multiple people stabbed at a synagogue in Monsey, NY (Rockland County),” a representative of the New York City Police Department Counterterrorism Bureau tweeted.

    Hatzalah emergency response team is on scene and victims have been transferred to the hospital.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As JPost.com notes, this is the second stabbing attack in Monsey in the last two months.

    In November, a man jumped out of his car in stabbed a father on his way to synagogue, gauging his eye.

    In the last week, a spate of antisemitic crimes has swept the city.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 23:27

  • These Are The 10 Worst States For Millennials
    These Are The 10 Worst States For Millennials

    Even the most curmudgeonly boomer would probably agree that the millennial generation is struggling. Though they have no great wars to fight (in the West, wars are now fought by volunteers), millennials are facing enormous loads of student debt, stagnant wages, and an entrenched sense that the future looks bleak. Whatever skills they have learned will likely be rendered unmarketable thanks to AI, and anybody who isn’t programming the machines and computers who will run our future society should fear them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a group, those aged 23 to 38 earn less and have fewer assets than their parents. But across the US, there’s a pretty wide variance in living conditions, and for millennials who need to watch every penny, certain states make more hospitable homes than others.

    In a recent research project, Zippia.com determined the 10 worst states/territories for millennials. They are:

    • District of Columbia
    • Georgia
    • New York
    • Florida
    • North Carolina
    • California
    • South Carolina
    • Alabama
    • Louisiana
    • Mississippi

    As a region, the south is the most heavily represented on this list, accompanied by states with expensive urban enclaves where young people flock seemingly to live in penury while they follow their dreams chasing those entertainment and media jobs that will seemingly never provide a realistic paycheck (the share of millennials in their 20s and even into their 30s who depend on financial support from parents has never been higher).

    To arrive at its rankings, the researchers assigned number values for each of four categories: millennial unemployment rate, average student loan debt load, millennial home ownership and the percentage of millennials living in poverty.

    Which brings us to No. 1…

    Washington DC:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 6%

    Home Ownership: 18.38%

    Poverty Rate: 25%

    Student Loan Debt: $60,039

    A city known for its ridiculous housing prices, one in four millennials in our nation’s capital live in poverty. They also have the highest average student loan debt in the nation.

    Georgia:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 8%

    Home Ownership: 31.61%

    Poverty Rate: 20%

    Student Loan Debt: $37,284

    Though housing is relatively affordable in Georgia, and the student-debt burden is much lower than Washington DC, roughly one in five millennial Georgians live in poverty, which is enough to secure the No. 2 spot on this list.

    New York

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 7%

    Home Ownership: 24%

    Poverty Rate: 19%

    Student Loan Debt: $38,734

    Low home ownership rates coupled with brutally high rents make New York a no-brainer for the No. 3 spot. Millennials also face high poverty rates and burdensome student debt loads.

    Florida

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 7%

    Home Ownership: 29%

    Poverty Rate: 19%

    Student Loan Debt: $35,709

    The state best known as a sunny place for shady people, one in five of the state’s millennials live in poverty. Setting the numbers aside, the proximity to Florida Man can’t be easily quantified, but it definitely sucks.

    North Carolina

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 7%

    Home Ownership: 32%

    Poverty Rate: 20%

    Student Loan Debt: $36,246

    The issues with North Carolina is low home ownership and high unemployment, coupled with a high student debt burden.

    California

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 7%

    Home Ownership: 23%

    Poverty Rate: 17%

    Student Loan Debt $34,449

    Piss-poor policymaking in Sacramento has saddled Californians with expensive housing prices (because endless environmental regs make building so expensive), while nature is punishing the state with wildfires and a brutal drought that finally ended this year. Homeownership is simply out of reach for all but the wealthiest tech industry drones.

    South Carolina

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 7%

    Home Ownership: 36%

    Poverty Rate: 22%

    Student Loan Debt: $37,249

    Alabama

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 8%

    Home Ownership: 37%

    Poverty Rate: 23%

    Student Loan Debt: $34,861

    Alabama is very similar to the other southern states on this list: High unemployment and poverty.

    Louisiana

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment: 8%

    Home Ownership: 37%

    Poverty Rate: 26%

    Student Loan Debt: $33,860

    Things aren’t easy for millennials down by the bayou. Like Alabama before it, young people face high rates of poverty and unemployment. But at least they can drink their troubles away in the Big Easy.

    Mississippi

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hardly a surprise. One of the only Southern states that’s entirely devoid of a large urban commercial center (the largest city is the capital, Jackson, and it’s the only municipality in the state with a population of over 100,000 people), Mississippi is known for grinding rural poverty in communities where jobs, solid housing and even basic services like supermarkets can be hard to come by.

    If your state isn’t listed above, you can see where it fell on the list here.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 23:00

  • Danger Ahead!!! Advice From A Former Militia Leader
    Danger Ahead!!! Advice From A Former Militia Leader

    Authored by David Brockett via DCDirtyLaundry.com,

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Disclosure:

    During the 1990’s I served as a militia leader in Texas; it was after Federal agents killed Vickie Weaver and her son in Ruby Ridge, Idaho (1992), the Branch Davidian massacre in Waco, Texas (1993), the Assault Weapons Ban (1994), and the Oklahoma City bombing (1995). The nation was in turmoil.   The Clintons were in power with “Bloody Janet” Reno as Attorney General. Even the Home-Schooling movement was under fire by the Clinton cabal. We were told it “took a village’ to raise our children–but their village was full of unpatriotic idiots.

    Democrat Ann Richards (responsible for the illegal military involvement at the Waco massacre) was Governor of Texas, and we had almost no gun rights. You couldn’t even legally carry a pistol in your vehicle unless you could establish that you were “traveling” and staying away from home overnight (keep a suitcase in the trunk). By 1996 the militia movement was in full swing across the nation, with a bunch of poorly-trained men and women in camo, faced off against well-armed federal agents, law enforcement and the National guard. To say it was a powder keg would be an understatement. To make matters even more dangerous, the feds were using undercover operatives to stir up and instigate violence in militias.

    Today when I see people write about how close to a revolution we are, I understand the sentiment, but you ain’t seen nothing yet! Wait until you decide to group together, armed and wearing some kind of military uniform, making loud anti-government statements, and planning your resistance! Lots of interesting things will follow!

    Siren’s Song

    Oh, the romance of being a revolutionary: square-jawed, armed and dangerous, feared by men, admired by women and children–and your dog. But mostly it gives you a chance to buy loads of expensive, dangerous-looking toys and cool camo gear! Who could resist swaggering around with salty BVD’s, and a full complement of “weapons of war” strapped to your body? Then there are bivouacs where, after a hard day of standing around in the woods, you sit around a campfire talking shit. Maybe, if you’re lucky, one of the militia members has some acreage where you can waste a couple of hundred dollars praying and spraying ammo in the general direction of a target—it’s all about the noise! The member with the loudest gun wins. And let’s not forget the comradery forged in the fires of Hell as you and your buddies fight off mosquitos during practice night missions while humping the seventy pounds of gear (mostly useless to real guerilla fighters) someone convinced you to purchase.

    Brief History

    During the 1990s, the media managed to paint the militia movement as a dangerous bunch of kooks. Many will tell you that the bombing of the Murrah building in Oklahoma City was a government-initiated operation to further alienate the public. For many reasons I won’t get into here, I wouldn’t argue with those people.

    The Clinton administration was very unpopular, and the last thing they needed was a national uprising. Bill Clinton was cozy with the United Nations. Globalization had reared its ugly head in the form of NAFTA and the World Trade Organization (which followed GATT). I don’t have the space to cover how these organizations crippled the US economy or affected society, so you will have to do some research on your own. Suffice it to say that both Republicans and Democrats in Washington were working together (still are) on the financial demise of our nation and its sovereignty. The Assault Weapons ban was a bi-partisan fear-response to the threat posed by a well-armed civil resistance.

    To Be or Not to Be a Militia Member

    The first question you have to ask yourself is what you hope to gain by putting a government target on your back, and those in your family. In 1997 I hosted a national militia meeting on my property in Texas; it was a large encampment of militia leaders and members from all over the country. We even made the cover of Time Magazine as a “militia hotspot.” What was the goal of this get-together?

    Before I begin, let me tell you a funny story. During our camp set-up, we rented one of those huge blue and white striped tents (urban camo) and enough chairs to fill it. The day before our official agenda began, Channel Eight of Dallas sent a news chopper out to film our camp from the air. Seeing a bunch of people with AK’s slung over their shoulders, the chopper flew a wide circle around the camp–so wide they couldn’t get decent footage. They spent so much time flying this distant arc they ran low on fuel and had to leave. About thirty minutes later they came back, this time cautiously venturing in closer and closer; eventually, the side door opened and their cameraman began filming. I guess they decided we weren’t going to shoot them out of the sky. The point of the story is how the media had bought into their own militia boogeyman narrative.

    “They” will set you up

    Now back to the purpose of the meeting. Militia leaders were being picked off by the federales via entrapment schemes similar to what happened to Randy Weaver in Idaho. Government informants joined these groups and set up the leaders by doing things such as planting explosive devices (pipe bombs) on militia leader’s property to be “discovered” during federal raids. Other informants acted as instigators (our Texas group had one) prodding leaders and members into taking action that would unnecessarily put the unit in danger (physical and legal), and in a bad light to the public. Some informants got militia members on tape talking about planning illegal activities (this was actually a lot of empty bullshit boasting).

    The national meeting acted as a sounding board so that other militia leaders could be informed of the risks they were taking. I also believed that we needed a strong joint public statement about our mission and our intentions. So, we invited the FBI and any law enforcement members who might want to attend—we knew they would find their way in anyway. A local sheriff deputy sat in his car across the road, watching with binoculars; my neighbors kept goading him into going up the hill to our event. He declined. Back then police were taught to be afraid of militia members and mental patients. At least we were in good company.

    The negative government public relations campaign didn’t always work. During the national meeting, several families came to the gate with food and encouragement. My rural neighbors supported and encouraged what we were doing. When a Dallas news team gathered, interviewing people off our property, they only found one person (not a local) who said anything negative—guess which interview made the nightly news!

    I haven’t seen Clint Eastwood’s movie on Richard Jewel yet, but the Atlanta bomb that Jewel discovered was most likely planted as a false flag. Working as security, Jewel found the package and reported it. He paid the price for screwing up their operation. In a joint personal assault, the federal government and the media tried desperately to paint him as a domestic terrorist. Interestingly, the feds never investigated anyone else for this crime. See the movie.

    Who joins the militia?

    There were very few militia members with military experience. The ones, like myself, that had experience were Vietnam Vets. If you were around back then you will remember how vets were painted by the media as dangerous, wild-eyed camo-wearing kooks. It seemed that not a month went by without a violent incident involving a veteran. Just as school shootings are now, the media rushed to cover every veteran-involved incident. We were still wearing the scourge of the Vietnam War, and most media types came from the same liberal group that protested the war. Back then, no one knew anything about PTSD, and the VA denied such a malady existed (kind of like Agent Orange). The term “postal” was derived from Vietnam Vet Post Office employees losing it and shooting up the place. Occasionally a VA center would be the target. Eventually, many of these vets got help, but not nearly soon enough for them or their families. I digress.

    Most newbie militia members had no experience, and putting these well-intentioned, patriots in a real military-type operation would have been leading lambs to slaughter. A militia leader had to be realistic about his members and their capabilities. If you were lucky you would have at least a sprinkling of country people with firearms and woodland experience. At the time, people were coming in from everywhere because so many were concerned about a government mass round-up of dissenters and/or a societal breakdown where the bad guys could come from anywhere. I personally focused on gun safety, weapons familiarization, and marksmanship. Additionally, we worked on techniques for traveling safely during times of unrest, home defense, and survival.

    There was a reason so many people were worried about citizen internment. The plan for FEMA concentration camps was real. Former Congressman Henry B. Gonzales, R, of Texas, publicly admitted their existence and their purpose (contain people during a period of mass unrest). State troopers had been put on alert to be watchful for anyone who might be a militia member. Sheriffs and municipal police across the country were being fed scary bullshit by the FBI, and law enforcement was running around with hair-triggers during traffic stops.

    Nothing has changed–for the good

    I guess I have spent most of your time talking about how things were “back in the day,” but you can count on the same dynamics this millennium. The government is much more sophisticated in keeping an eye on citizens, and there are thousands more armed government agents. You have to assume that everything you do or say is being monitored by Big Brother. The good news is, if your group stays small and keeps their mouths shut, the feds are unlikely to bother with you. If you are looking for strength in numbers, assume you will have at least one informant in your group.

    Cull these members out immediately

    Gung-ho members who encourage aggressive illegal actions should be expelled immediately. Now, that may rub some patriots the wrong way, but to do otherwise is to set up your members for potential prison time. Just like in other relationships, everyone is not trustworthy. If you have a member(s) go off the rails and do something stupid, you are all guilty by association. If, on the other hand, you are willing to “take a stand” like they did at the Bundy Ranch in Nevada, just be aware it will be expensive and you risk your lives, family fortunes, and many years behind bars. Only you can know if the price is worth it. Also, be aware that if you have an informant or agitator in your group, your operation may be compromised in advance and your members put at risk, physically.

    Here is an article on what happened to members of a Michigan militia. 

    The FBI planted a secret informant and FBI agent in the militia in 2008 to record the activities of the group. The video and audio recordings became the crux of the federal case, including clips of the elder Stone making anti-government statements and remarks about killing police officers. The defendants all faced a maximum sentence of life in prison. Fortunately, after a very expensive and lengthy trial, most of the members were cleared of all charges. The leader and his son faced weapons charges.

    Explosive “experts” (guys who want to show you how to make illegal weapons like pipe bombs, grenades, etc.) should not be allowed in your organization unless you know them really, really, really well—even then you have to worry about other members who might inform on your group. In case you choose to train members on how to manufacture/store illegal explosives or weapons, the risk is great that they will be found and you will be prosecuted. Two militia leaders in South Carolina went to prison when two informants slipped onto their property and planted pipe bombs. The guilty verdict came even though there was testimony from several witnesses, including the informants, that the group had stated repeatedly that it was NOT interested in making explosives or doing anything illegal.

    In summary, there are fewer risks in forming your group around like-minded family members and close friends. As you can see from the Michigan Christian militia group–even they were infiltrated. Any stranger brings with them more risks than rewards. A family unit focused on self-protection and survival is your best option. If everyone is trained in survival skills, including marksmanship, and all members are equipped with everything they need, you should be prepared for almost anything coming your way. If society falls apart, or a government, foreign or domestic, imposes itself on the population, your group will have the option of joining with others if you so choose.

    With the threat of a “foreign” military (immigrant militias) operating in our country, danger could come from any quarter!

    Stay off the ridgeline and keep your powder dry!


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 22:30

  • Wealth Of The Richest Surged By $1.2 Trillion In 2019
    Wealth Of The Richest Surged By $1.2 Trillion In 2019

    At the same time that dipshits future Nobel Prize winners at the Fed like Neel Kashkari are walking around pondering why the inequality gap continues to widen in the United States, monetary policy has catalyzed another year of surging wealth for the richest in the country while keeping its boot on the neck of the poorest. 

    In fact, as Bloomberg notes, the wealth of the 500 richest people surged 25% in 2019. And the riches are coming in atypical fashion. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Among those are social media giants like Kylie Jenner, who became the youngest self-made billionaire this year after her cosmetic company signed an exclusive partnership with Ulta Beauty. She sold a 51% stake in her company for $600 million. 

    Similarly, the Korean family who helped popularize the Washington Nationals’ rally cry, “Baby Shark, doo-doo doo-doo doo-doo”, is now worth about $125 million.

    Another great example is Willis Johnson, who made his $1.9 billion fortune by building a network of junkyards to sell damaged cars.

    All of these are examples of just how much money made its way to the richest over the last 12 months. The Bloomberg Billionaires Index added $1.2 trillion, now placing their collective net worth at $5.9 trillion.

    Only 52 people on the ranking saw their fortunes decline during the year. Jeff Bezos, for example, lost $9 billion – but only due to his divorce. 

    Bloomberg noted the year’s biggest winners:

    • The 172 American billionaires on the Bloomberg ranking added $500 billion, with Facebook Inc.’s Mark Zuckerberg up $27.3 billion and Microsoft Corp. co-founder Bill Gates rose $22.7 billion.
    • Representation from China continued to grow, with the nation’s contingent rising to 54, second only to the U.S. He Xiangjian, founder of China’s biggest air-conditioner exporter, was the standout performer as his wealth surged 79% to $23.3 billion.
    • Russia’s richest added $51 billion, a collective increase of 21%, as emerging-market assets from currencies to stocks and bonds rebounded in 2019 after posting big losses a year earlier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Newly minted billionaires included Anthony von Mandl, the man behind “White Claw” hard seltzer and Hong Kong’s Lo family, who are in the business of producing soy milk. 

    With the market hitting new highs every day and President Trump’s relentless pressure on the Fed to keep rates low, the gap will likely continue to widen heading into 2020 – a year politicians will undoubtedly spend bickering about proposed solutions to the problem, all the while failing to understand that the alarm is coming from the inside, right before their eyes. 

    The gains are an obvious continued indicator of flawed monetary policy that everybody – except those at the Fed (and Steve Liesman) seems to understand.

    As a result, currently, the 0.1% control the biggest share of the pie in the U.S. than at any time since 1929. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 22:00

  • Experts Warn Global Outrage Levels May Reach Point Of No Return In 2020
    Experts Warn Global Outrage Levels May Reach Point Of No Return In 2020

    Via The Babylon Bee,

    The UN Panel on Outrage Change has confirmed the worst: global levels of outrage may reach the point of no return in 2020.

    Outrage levels previously reached dangerous highs during the Bush administration, but Obama was able to reverse the trend. He didn’t change much about the way Bush was handling things, but he was a Democrat, so outrage levels went back down as the press stopped reporting on scandals and corruption.

    However, in 2016, global outrage reached record highs, especially among Democrats. Republicans had been mildly outraged during the Obama years but mostly had to go to work so didn’t have much time to spew toxic, harmful outrage into the environment. Libertarians have generated almost no outrage since they are high all the time. 

    Experts believe the reelection of Trump in 2020 would be “catastrophic,” catapulting outrage levels well into the stratosphere.

    “If we do not cut our anger emissions immediately, the world will be consumed by fiery outrage by the end of next year,” said outrage expert Dr. Hal Gourd, pointing to a hockey-stick graph.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The audience responded by getting really mad, shaking their fists at the sky and making loud grunting noises.

    “Now, now, let’s all calm down,” Gourd said, but this only angered the crowd further.

    Finally, Gourd began to freak out as more and more bricks were lobbed his direction.

     “OK, FINE, IT’S TIME TO PANIC! AHHHHHH!!!!”

    He jumped out a window to his waiting luxury jet and flew away.

    Experts recommend everyone stop “yelling and stuff,” so we can prolong our inevitable death by outrage a few years. Those who do not wish to stop being outraged can purchase “outrage credits,” generated by people who are just chillin’.

    *  *  *

    If you value The Babylon Bee and want to see them prevail against Snopes and anyone else who might seek to discredit or deplatform them, please consider becoming a subscriber. Your support really will make a difference.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 21:30

  • Musk Tweets Boring's Las Vegas Tunnel To Open In 2020 
    Musk Tweets Boring's Las Vegas Tunnel To Open In 2020 

    Elon Musk is on top of the world, has been able to capitulate shorts and send Tesla’s equity price above the $420 per share buyout level, to close at $430.380 on Friday.  

    With Musk’s ego higher than ever, he tweeted Friday night that Boring Company would complete a commercial tunnel in Las Vegas in the near term and be fully operational in 2020. 

    “Boring Co is completing its first commercial tunnel in Vegas, going from Convention Center to Strip, then will work on other projects,” Musk tweeted late on Friday. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last month, we noted how Boring officially won the contract from Las Vegas to build a “subterranean transit system” by undercutting the bids of established players in the engineering space.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We pointed out how Boring is going to have to prove that its technology and talent can scale to municipality size projects, instead of a test run using a go-kart on skates in 50 feet of tunnel. 

    In July, Boring raised $120 million in a round of funding from gullible cultists “disruptive investors.” 

    We noted earlier this year that Boring’s tunnel projects were debunked by PhDs and ridiculed by government officials as nothing new: “There’s no revolution here. Let’s be honest here: he’s driving a car through a sewer pipe,” Ph.D. chemist and video blogger Phil Mason recently said. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    With the test tunnel completed in Hawthorne, California, and other projects in Chicago and Washinton, D.C. to Baltimore, Musk has made a lot of promises in the past where his timelines don’t exactly come true. 

    …We’re still waiting for the one million “robotaxis” to hit the streets in 2020, another promise made by Musk. 

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 21:00

  • Cohen: How Impeachment Is Escalating The New US-Russian Cold War
    Cohen: How Impeachment Is Escalating The New US-Russian Cold War

    Podcast of John Batchelor Show

    Summary of Broadcast Produced by Yvonne Lorenzo:

    As the New Cold War gathers up speed and escalates, we are entering a “fact free world” as allegations are made that are proved not to be true are promoted; for example, the allegation that the DNC was hacked by Russia has been officially debunked—no one could name the seventeen intelligence agencies, the Coast Guard was one. The notion of the hacking was cooked up by two agencies: by the DNI’s head James Clapper and Brennan at the CIA. Nevertheless, recently News Anchor Chuck Todd of NBC (the most pro-Russiagate network, the ones who shamelessly accused presidential candidate Tulsi Gabbard of being a Russian asset) took it one step further: ignoring the facts, Todd again stated that seventeen intelligence agencies agreed that the Russians not only interfered in the election but that they swung the election to Trump. While interference is one thing, no one has previously made that allegation. Consequently, we are now in a fact-free discourse in America: no evidence is necessary to prove anything, falsehoods are taken up by the legacy media, what Professor Cohen would call a world of tabloid gossip media, except in their favor the tabloids, fearing lawsuits, will do some fact checking, which is conspicuous in its absence in the legacy media. And Professor Cohen noted that it’s hard to get traction and you can’t have a conversation with someone when you don’t agree upon the facts.

    In conversation on a cruise with fellow liberals, Professor Cohen noted most take the view that where there is smoke there is fire and there is something to these allegations of Russiagate and Putin’s control over Trump; they state the media wouldn’t continue to promote these conspiracy theories, these allegations about Trump’s nefarious relations with the Kremlin, without reason and so there must be something to them. Yet while facts have become absolutely critical Cohen notes you can’t get people to focus on the facts; for that reason, he feels despair and observes that for the first time in his life in his public discussions of Russia there are no basic premises that people accept any more, for if you say “If there’s smoke, there’s fire,” that is just not a logical way of thinking: you either have the facts or you don’t.

    Batchelor also points out in the impeachment charges there is a great deal of presumption; there are no facts regarding the president as well, and he cites Trump’s letter to Nancy Pelosi and poses this question: what does the Kremlin think about the impeachment?

    Cohen answers that the Russian high policy class in the 1990s – the America worship period – they and not just the youth, strongly believed that Russia’s future was with the West and America in particular, and now what strikes Russians most is the role of Russian intelligence services in the Western allegations. Pro-America Russians thought that American intelligence services didn’t play the role that the Soviet ones did. In Russian history classes and as a staple of popular culture, the sinister role of the “secret police” goes back to the Czarist era but what distinguished America was that it didn’t have anything comparable in abuses by its intelligence services—or so it was believed. Consequently, for those who looked up to America, it’s a source of disillusion and shock to learn that the American special services “went off the reservation” for quite a long time, not unlike Russia’s, and so they have become disillusioned while for those who tried to get Russians to be more nationalistic, their perspective is to say with gratification, “We told you so. Now will you please grow up!”

    Russians call the American agencies “the organs” perhaps not being clear on the difference between the CIA and the FBI and conflating them. For Russians, the role of such agencies is baked into the culture and this has resulted in rethinking not only about America but about their own special services. An Op-Ed piece in a Russian liberal newspaper the Russian liberal author wrote, after watching what’s unfolding in America, we used to beat up on our intelligence services for decades but now maybe we need them. Contrary to a “cult of the intelligence services,” Cohen thinks what must be determined is the role of the American intelligence services in creating Russiagate from the very beginning.

    Yet what is critical is to know how Russiagate began in America, with the Barr-Durham probe into the origins of Russia and Russiagate will continue to be a major issue in the 2020 election. What struck Cohen about the letter from Trump to Pelosi—which was so eloquent he doubts Trump wrote it—was that he understands it will be an issue in the 2020 elections, and it was a campaign document. That aside, Trump is aware that Democrats are campaigning still on Russiagate; nothing has turned up that it factual. Therefore, despite the absence of facts, this will be a major issue. Ukraine has turned into a stand-in for Russia.

    Jennifer Rubin of the Washington Post, once a quintessential conservative, published an article titled “Time to Call out and Remove Putin’s Propagandist in America.” While the article is slightly cagier than that headline, essentially she wants to shutdown and deprive access to media who aren’t espousing and promoting the Russiagate/Russophobic narratives. Cohen condemns that kind of behavior is that. On opposite side of Rubin, Cohen stated he himself has never advocated the silencing and removal of those who promote among other falsehoods the provably false Russiagate narrative. He asks where are things drifting and he answers discourse and relations are becoming ugly and awful.

    Returning to the past, he notes there was an assumption that Russia under Yeltsin would emerge as a replica and junior partner of America; Cohen believes those who promote the Russiagate narrative and demonize Trump because their “impossible dream” failed—Russia is too old, too vast to ever be a replica of America. What took Professor Cohen aback in the testimony from Fiona Hill and others was how deep and wide the Russophobia runs in the Washington think tanks. Until she spoke and testified he had no idea how much she—and the other Russia experts—hate Russia.

    Batchelor noted this is the language of civil war in Trump’s letter; Trump uses the term “Star Chamber of partisan persecution” and “coup” which are the language of a country torn in half and he asked the question whether the weakening of the civil contract to be an advantage to Putin and Russia.

    Cohen notes every newspaper and media source in America say Putin is delighted since it is his goal is to foment disarray in America.

    The fact is, however, this chaos and dysfunction and enmity is one of the last things Putin wants. Putin’s purpose is to rebuild Russia from the economic and political catastrophes of the 1990s; Putin’s role is to reverse the demographic trend—men died in their fifties in the 1990s—and spend funds on modernization; that would be his legacy. Four hundred billion dollars has been saved to implement the modernization program. That attempt would be taken with modernizing partnerships with the West. Therefore, the last thing he wants is a new Cold War; the last thing he wants is political turmoil in America or in any Western nation. Cohen points out President Macron of France appears to understand that; he called for a rethinking of relations and said there could be no European security without Russia. Macron has broken with Washington and there will be a hell of fight because Washington is against it. But the notion that Putin wants to disrupt American society is wrong; Putin wants stability and partners.

    Cohen still thinks that leadership—the new President of Ukraine, Trump and Putin—could make a difference.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 20:30

    Tags

  • 'Former Trump Voter' Spotlighted In Democratic Ad Campaign Caught Lying; Didn't Actually Vote In 2016
    'Former Trump Voter' Spotlighted In Democratic Ad Campaign Caught Lying; Didn't Actually Vote In 2016

    A Pennsylvania man featured in a $3 million advertising campaign by Democratic ‘nerd virgin‘ commander David Brock’s Super PAC was found to be a total liar, after he feigned regret over voting for Donald Trump in 2016.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I voted for Donald Trump in 2016 because I thought he would make a change,” claimed Mark Graham, a registered Republican who lives in Erie, PA.

    “Did he make a change?” asks Brock’s virgin, off camera.

    “Not for the good!” Graham replied.

    “If I could go back in time, I would tell myself to beware the changes that President Trump has made.”

    “Voting for Donald Trump in 2020 would be like putting gasoline on a fire.

    Except Mark was full of shit. An investigation by local news outlet JET 24 action’s Chelsey Withers (as she reports in YourEerie) revealed that Mark didn’t vote at all in 2016, much less for Donald Trump.

    And according to PennLive, Mark’s lie caused the New York Times to issue corrections in two stories about swing voters and disaffected Trump supporters.

    “While Mr. Graham acknowledged misspeaking about his voting record, he said the Times article and the ad campaign accurately reflect his feelings about the 2016 race and President Trump’s performance in office.”

    Graham told Eerie News that he became involved with American Bridge through a 2018 focus group by Democratic Congressional Candidate Ron DiNicola.

    Graham said the focus group was comprised of local Republicans who supported DiNicola’s run for Congress. Former Erie County Director of Administration [G]erry Mifsud was working with DiNicola.

    “I sat through this focus group and a New York Times reporter had sought out [G]erry. How he got Jerry I don’t know.  Maybe it was DiNicola.  Maybe it was the Democratic Party,” Graham said.

    The reporter wanted to do a story on President Trump’s popularity in Erie.  He asked the focus group how they felt about the president. –Eerie News Now

    “That’s when I told him ‘It’s like if you re-elect this guy it’s like throwing gasoline on a fire.’ I just made it up.  He said, ‘I like that.  I’m going to use that,’ Graham told the outlet.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 20:00

  • Media's Deafening Silence On The Biggest Scandal Of 2019 Is Chilling
    Media's Deafening Silence On The Biggest Scandal Of 2019 Is Chilling

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via CaitlinJohnstone.com,

    This is getting really, really, really weird.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WikiLeaks has published yet another set of leaked internal documents from within the Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons (OPCW) adding even more material to the mountain of evidence that we’ve been lied to about an alleged chemical weapons attack in Douma, Syria last year which resulted in airstrikes upon that nation from the US, UK and France.

    This new WikiLeaks drop includes an email from the OPCW Chief of Cabinet Sebastien Braha (who is reportedly so detested by organisation inspectors that they code named him “Voldemort”) throwing a fit over the Ian Henderson Engineering Assessment which found that the Douma incident was likely a staged event. Braha is seen ordering OPCW staff to “remove all traces, if any, of its delivery/storage/whatever” from the organisation’s secure registry.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The drop also includes the minutes from an OPCW toxicology meeting with “three Toxicologists/Clinical pharmacologists, one bioanalytical and toxicological chemist”, all four of whom are specialists in chemical weapons analysis.

    “With respect to the consistency of the observed and reported symptoms of the alleged victims with possible exposure to chlorine gas or similar, the experts were conclusive in their statements that there was no correlation between symptoms and chlorine exposure,” the document reads.

    According to the leaked minutes from the toxicology meeting, the chief expert offered “the possibility of the event being a propaganda exercise” as one potential explanation for the Douma incident. The other OPCW experts agreed that the key “take-away message” from the meeting was “that the symptoms observed were inconsistent with exposure to chlorine and no other obvious candidate chemical causing the symptoms could be identified”.

    Like all the other manymanymanymany different leaks which have been hemorrhaging from the OPCW about the Douma incident, none of the important information contained in these publications was included in any of the OPCW’s public reports on the matter. According to the OPCW’s Final Report published in March 2019, the investigative team found “reasonable grounds that the use of a toxic chemical as a weapon took place. This toxic chemical contained reactive chlorine. The toxic chemical was likely molecular chlorine.”

    We now know that these “reasonable grounds” contain more holes than a spaghetti strainer executed by firing squad. This is extremely important information about an unsolved war crime which resulted in dozens of civilian deaths and led to an act of war which cost taxpayers tens of millions of dollars and had many far-reaching geopolitical consequences.

    Yet the mass media, freakishly, has had absolutely nothing to say about this extremely newsworthy story.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As of this writing, a Google News search for this story brings up an article by RT, Al-Masdar News, and some entries by alternative outlets you’ve almost certainly never heard of like UrduPoint News and People’s Pundit Daily.

    Make no mistake about it: this is insane. The fact that an extremely important news story of immense geopolitical consequence is not getting any mainstream news media coverage, at all, is absolutely stark raving insane.

    Up until the OPCW leaks, WikiLeaks drops always made mainstream news headlines. Everyone remembers how the 2016 news cycle was largely dominated by leaked Democratic Party emails emerging from the outlet. Even the relatively minor ICE agents publication by WikiLeaks last year, containing information that was already public, garnered headlines from top US outlets like The Washington Post , Newsweek, and USA Today. Now, on this exponentially more important story, zero coverage.

    The mass media’s stone-dead silence on the OPCW scandal is becoming its own scandal, of equal or perhaps even greater significance than the OPCW scandal itself. It opens up a whole litany of questions which have tremendous importance for every citizen of the western world; questions like, how are people supposed to participate in democracy if all the outlets they normally turn to to make informed voting decisions adamantly refuse to tell them about the existence of massive news stories like the OPCW scandal? How are people meant to address such conspiracies of silence when there is no mechanism in place to hold the entire mass media to account for its complicity in it? And by what mechanism are all these outlets unifying in that conspiracy of silence?

    We can at least gain some insight into that last question with the internal Newsweek emails which were published by journalist Tareq Haddad two weeks ago. The emails feature multiple Newsweek editors telling Haddad that they would not publish a word about the OPCW leaks for two reasons: (1) because no other outlets were reporting on them, and (2) because the US government-funded narrative management firm Bellingcat had published a laughably bogus article explaining why the leaks weren’t newsworthy. Haddad has since resigned from Newsweek.

    We may be certain that this story is being killed in news rooms all around the world in similar fashion, and possibly using those very same excuses. As long as no other “respectable” (i.e. establishment) outlets are covering this story, it can be treated as a non-story, using a deceitful US government-funded narrative management operation as justification as needed. If one journalist threw his life into chaos and uncertainty by resigning and blowing the whistle on this conspiracy of silence, we may be certain that the same is happening to countless others who don’t have to courage and/or ability to do the same.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Many alternative media commentators are highlighting this news media blackout on social media today.

    “Our fearless media watchdogs still maintaining complete blackout on OPCW whistleblower leaks debunking WMD attack in Douma. The leaks show that Trump—like Dubya— used fake WMDs to bomb Arab country—then strong-armed OPCW to cover up the lies,” tweeted journalist Mark Ames.

    “The US attacked Syria for a chemical attack by Assad last year. But official OPCW scientists who investigated the event didn’t find evidence the Syrian military used chemical weapons. The media has chosen to ignore this story and fire its own journalists who try to report on it,” tweeted author and analyst Max Abrahms.

    “This is the FOURTH leak showing how the OPCW fabricated a report on a supposed Syrian ‘chemical’ attack,” tweeted journalist Ben Norton. “And mainstream Western corporate media outlets are still silent, showing how authoritarian these ‘democracies’ are and how tightly they control info.”

    “Media silence on this story is its own scandal,” tweeted journalist Aaron Maté.

    But this spin machine is twirling off its axis trying to normalize this silence.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bellingcat narrative jockeys such as “senior investigator” Nick Waters are already scrambling to perception manage everyone into believing their own eyes are lying to them. Waters has a thread on Twitter that’s being shared around by all the usual Syria spinmeisters claiming, based on no evidence whatsoever, that WikiLeaks is selectively publishing the documents it has to create a false impression of events in the OPCW. Waters falsely claims that an email by Sebastien “Voldemort” Braha — the guy at the center of the scandal — proves that Ian Henderson was not a part of the Fact-Finding Mission (FFM) in Douma, in contradiction to the claims made by the anonymous second OPCW whistleblower who goes by the pseudonym of “Alex”.

    As Waters is one hundred percent aware, Henderson absolutely was part of the Douma Fact-Finding Mission, and one of the FFM members who actually went to Douma no less. I’ve put together a Twitter thread refuting Waters’ ridiculous claims which you can read by clicking here, but in short an arbitrary distinction seems to have been made between the FFM and the “FFM core team”, or what is labeled the “FFM Alpha team” in a newly leaked email trying to marginalize Henderson’s assessment. Henderson actually went to Douma as part of the FFM, unlike almost all members of the so-called “core team” who except for one paramedic operated solely in another nation (probably Turkey).

    Of course, the distinction of whether Henderson was or was not “in the FFM” is also itself irrelevant and arbitrary, since we know for a fact that he is a longtime OPCW inspector who went to Douma and contributed an assessment which was hidden from the public by the OPCW.

    So this narrative being spun by the US government-funded propagandists at Bellingcat is bogus from top to bottom, but what’s infuriating is that we already know who editors in news rooms are going to listen to.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s absolutely amazing how tightly interlaced Bellingcat is with the upper echelons of mainstream news media and the public framing of what’s going on in Syria. Mere hours after the latest WikiLeaks drop, CNN pundit Brian Stelter shared an article about Bellingcat founder and former Atlantic Council Senior Fellow Eliot Higgins, who warns of the dangers posed by alternative media reporters who cover underreported stories like the OPCW scandal.

    “We have this alternative media ecosystem that is driving a lot of disinformation. It is not understood by journalists or anyone really beyond a very small group of people who are really engaged with it,” reads the ironic Higgins quote in the excerpt shared by Stelter.

    We’ve been seeing a mad rush from mass media pundits to give this US government-funded narrative management operation unearned and undeserved legitimacy, churning out tweets like Stelter’s and fawning puff pieces by The New York TimesThe Guardian and The New YorkerThis unearned and undeserved legitimacy is then used by editors to justify looking to Bellingcat for instructions on how to think about important information on Syria rather than doing their own basic investigation and analysis. It’s a self-validating feedback loop which just so happens to work out very conveniently for the government which funds Bellingcat.

    It remains unknown exactly what’s transpiring in news rooms around the world to maintain the conspiracy of silence on the OPCW scandal, but what is known is that by itself this scandalous silence is enough to fully discredit the mass media forever. WikiLeaks has exposed these outlets for the monolithic propaganda engine that they really are, and they did it just by publishing extremely newsworthy leak after extremely newsworthy leak.

    In order to perception manage us any harder, these freaks are going to have to go around literally confiscating our ears and eyeballs.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics on Twitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypalpurchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my new book Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone, or my previous book Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish or use any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 19:30

  • Democrats Want To Outlaw 'Racist' Single-Family Housing In Virginia
    Democrats Want To Outlaw 'Racist' Single-Family Housing In Virginia

    Democratic lawmakers in Virginia want to override local zoning laws and abolish single-family housing, which they say is racist and bad for the environment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the Daily Caller‘s Luke Rosiak, “The measure could quickly transform the suburban lifestyle enjoyed by millions, permitting duplexes to be built on suburban lots in neighborhoods previously consisting of quiet streets and open green spaces. Proponents of “upzoning” say the changes are necessary because suburbs are bastions of segregation and elitism, as well as bad for the environment.”

    The proposed changes were introduced on Dec. 19 by VA House Delegate Ibraheem Samirah (D) as part of six housing measures.

    “Single-family housing zones would become two-zoned,” Samirah told the Caller. “Areas that would be impacted most would be the suburbs that have not done their part in helping out.”

    “The real issues are the areas in between very dense areas which are single-family zoned. Those are the areas that the state is having significant trouble dealing with. They’re living in a bubble,” he added.

    He said suburbs were “mostly white and wealthy” and that their local officials — who have historically been in charge of zoning — were ignoring the desires of poor people, who did not have time to lobby them to increase suburban density.

    In response to a question about whether people who bought homes in spacious suburbs have valid reasons, not based on discrimination, for preferring to live that way — including a love for nature and desire to preserve woods and streams — he said: “Caring about nature is very important, but the more dense a neighborhood is, the more energy efficient it is.”

    He said if local officials seek to change requirements like setbacks to make it impossible to build dense housing in areas zoned to preserve a nature feel, “if they make setbacks to block duplexes, there’d have to be a lawsuit to resolve whether those zoning provisions were necessary.” –Daily Caller

    “Because middle housing is what’s most affordable for low-income people and people of color, banning that housing in well-off neighborhoods chalks up to modern-day redlining, locking folks out of areas with better access to schools, jobs, transit, and other services and amenities,” Samirah wrote on Facebook, adding “I will certainly get pushback for this. Some will call it ‘state overreach.’ Some will express anxiety about neighborhood change. Some may even say that the supply issue doesn’t exist. But the research is clear: zoning is a barrier to more housing and integrated communities.”

    Fairfax County Republican Committee Chairman Tim Hannigan told the Caller that urban Democrats are waging war on the suburbs.

    “This could completely change the character of suburban residential life, because of the urbanization that would develop,” said Hannigan. “So much of the American dream is built upon this idea of finding a nice quiet place to raise your family, and that is under assault.”

    “This is a power-grab to take away the ability of local communities to establish their own zoning practices … literally trying to change the character of our communities.”

    Read the rest of the report here.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 19:00

  • Taking The Hard Way Out – Gold & The "Big Bomb Of Debt Monetization"
    Taking The Hard Way Out – Gold & The "Big Bomb Of Debt Monetization"

    Authored by David Hay via Evergreen Gavekal blog,

    “You don’t make mistakes when you don’t have money. When you have too much money, you will make a lot of mistakes.”
    – Jack Ma, founder of Alibaba, the Amazon of China

    “My view is simple and starts with the observation that gold is a lot like religion. No one can prove that God exists…or that God doesn’t exist…Well, that’s exactly the way I think it is with gold. Either you’re a believer or you’re not.”
    – Howard Marks, founder of OakMark, whose newsletter Warren Buffett reads “religiously”

    “Because of Paul Volcker, our financial system is safer and stronger. I’ll remember Paul for his consummate wisdom, untethered honesty, and a level of dignity that matched his towering stature.”
    – Barack Obama

    “Every penny of QE undertaken by the Fed that cannot be unwound is monetized debt.”
    – CNBC regular and former senior advisor to the president of the Dallas Fed, Danielle DiMartino Booth

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    SUMMARY

    • Interest rates and inflation couldn’t be more different today than they were in the 1970s.

    • One of the shocking surprises of the last decade is that despite ultra-low, zero, or, even, negative interest rates inflation has generally fallen rather than risen.

    • Yet, when it comes to asset prices (US stocks, global bonds, and real estate), it has been a completely different story.

    • One asset class that hasn’t risen as swiftly as others is gold and other precious metals.

    • This underperformance has caused most American investors—be they retail or institutional—to give up on precious metals as an essential asset class.

    • However, John Hathaway, who is considered to be the “Warren Buffett of the precious metals space,” is much more bullish given all of the macro-economic factors at play.

    • In the short-term, John and top economist David Rosenberg anticipate we could have a recession in 2020.

    • This becomes much more probable should financial markets correct hard next year after this year’s historic and euphoric rally.

    • We are likely to see governments and central banks launch a coordinated blitz made up of additional trillions of pseudo-money and unbridled spending should a recession hit.

    • With most US portfolios heavily skewed towards paper assets (i.e. stocks and bonds) and nearly devoid of hard assets (i.e. energy producers/transporters, gold miners, copper producers, and agriculture nutrient companies) the stage is set for a significant paradigm shift over the next decade.

    TAKING THE HARD WAY OUT

    40 years is a very long time, at least in human terms. But when it comes to inflation, the not-so-fine 1979 seems like 400 years ago. It was in that difficult year — with spiking oil prices pushing the CPI up at close to a double-digit rate — President Jimmy Carter appointed Paul Volcker as the head of the Federal Reserve. Even in those days, Mr. Volcker was a larger than life figure—in more ways than one.

    He stood 6’7” and he had already earned a reputation as a “hard money” proponent, in contrast to the politically-pliant and inflation-prone Fed heads who had preceded him in the wake of the last strong Fed chairman, William Chesney Martin. The latter was one of the few men Paul Volcker looked up to, reputationally if not literally. He also was the creator of the line that in time would become immortal, at least in economic circles: “It’s the Fed’s job to take away the punch bowl just when the party gets going.”

    It was Mr. Martin’s propensity to be a punch-bowl cop that got him into hot water in 1965. He was reluctant to monetarily accommodate Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society and Vietnam war spending sprees. This resistance reportedly caused LBJ to slam his Fed chairman up against a wall at the President’s Texas ranch, bellowing: “Boys are dying in Vietnam and Bill Martin doesn’t care.”

    But care he apparently did. Even as the US economy boomed and inflation began to rise at a disturbing clip in 1966 and 1967, Martin only timidly raised interest rates. It was not until President Johnson shocked the world in March of 1968 by announcing he would not run for re-election that Mr. Martin let interest rates really fly. The Fed’s discount rate popped from 4.7% to 5.6% in just two months, the fastest increase in a decade.

    Mr. Martin’s lectures to Congress over his 19-year tenure at the Fed revealed a mindset that likely would have put him at odds with LBJ’s successor, Richard Nixon. At the bottom of one economic slump, Mr. Martin warned Congress that you can’t ”spend yourself prosperous.” (He no doubt would have added or “print yourself prosperous” but that was an activity Mr. Martin likely never dreamed his cherished Fed would one day pursue…and pursue…and pursue…and pursue—that’s a pursue for each version of its Quantitative Easings!)*

    *The Fed refuses to call its latest money creation blitz QE 4 but almost everyone else is.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: The MacroTourist and David Collum

    For good measure, he remarked on another occasion, ”A perpetual deficit is the road to undermining any currency.” Despite Nixon’s impeccable GOP credentials, Mr. Martin may have suspected an inflationary wolf in sheep’s clothing. He resigned in January 1970, just one year into Richard Nixon’s first term. The next year, Mr. Nixon pulled the US off the gold standard and then proceeded to bully Mr. Martin’s replacement, Arthur Burns, into maintaining excessively low interest rates. This sequence led to Mr. Nixon’s re-election in 1972 but also to the virulent inflation that would haunt America over the next decade. (Do you discern any similarities with what’s happening today?)

    Earlier this month, Mr. Martin’s kindred spirit, Tall Paul, passed away at age 92. While most post-mortem commentaries were laudatory, there were a surprising number of criticisms of his anti-inflation campaign which, at one point, raised short-term borrowing rates to 21 ½%. Undoubtedly, many small business owners suffered mightily with the cost of money nearly 10% over the prevailing 12% inflation rate. Some critics even called Mr. Volcker a union-killer, erroneously, in my view, blaming him for the long decline in American union membership that has occurred since the early 1980s.

    Of course, interest rates and inflation couldn’t be any different today. Instead of a fed funds rate far above inflation, presently it is below it, even using the Fed’s preferred cost-of-living measure. (More on that topic in a bit). And instead of trying to quash inflation, most leading central banks are striving to force it up to 2% which has, for some reason, become the Holy Grail for the global gods of monetary policy. In most of the “advanced” world, interest rates are negative and, accordingly, well below the inflation rate of that particular country.

    One of the shocking surprises of the last decade is that despite ultra-low, zero, or, even, negative interest rates—combined with around $15 trillion of manufactured money—inflation has generally fallen rather than risen. Actually, the popular notion seven or eight years ago, as rates collapsed and central banks began their various Quantitative Easing programs (QE, i.e, digital money fabrication), was that high inflation, potentially of the hyper variety, was nearly certain.

    These concerns centered on the CPI and its less well-known corollary, the PPI, or Producer Price Index (basically, wholesale vs retail inflation). Yet, as we are all aware, when it came to asset prices – especially US stocks, global bonds, and real estate—it was a totally different story… except for one slice of the investment world that many thought would be among the biggest beneficiaries of this worldwide attempt to create printing-press prosperity. That would be gold and the other precious metals.

    Early on, it looked like the assumed scenario would play out. As QEs spread around the planet in the early part of this soon-to-be-completed decade, the precious metals complex went postal. As usual in bull phases, silver had the greatest surge, rising by 452% from its lows during the Great Recession. Gold’s ascent was less spectacular, but it nonetheless vaulted almost 170% from where it bottomed in late 2008.   By the spring of 2011, both were far ahead of global stock markets, including the S&P 500, once again measured from the lowest points of the financial crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, Evergreen Gavekal

    Fast forwarding to right now, it’s a very different story, at least for the S&P. The most revered stock index on the Planet Earth is up a prodigious 498.5% (total return) from its 2009 low-point, while gold and silver have roughly doubled by comparison. However, they do look much better compared to the global stock market index, excluding the US, since then; this is due to how poorly international stocks have performed vis-à-vis the US. (Ironically, in 2011 and 2012, overseas shares were all the rage, especially emerging markets.) On the more embarrassing side, gold and silver returns aren’t that much better than bonds over the past decade, despite having a monster lead in the early years. (Platinum has performed even worse!)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, Evergreen Gavekal

    This long performance lag has caused most American investors—be they retail or institutional—to give up on precious metals as an essential asset class. After all, if they couldn’t deliver during a time of ideal conditions (collapsing interest rates and binge-printing by central banks), what could possibly cause them to rise now? (Note: Central bank money fabrication causes their balance sheets to increase.)

    Chart of Gold vs Central Bank Balance Sheets

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, Evergreen Gavekal

    For an answer to this reasonable question, it might be helpful to review a summary created by Evergreen’s bright and inquisitive research team member, Michael Schaloum. Michael does this author a great favor by regularly listening to video interviews with many of the investment world’s brainiest inhabitants. He recently watched and summarized a debriefing on Real Vision TV with John Hathaway. For those of you that don’t know of John, he is considered to be the Warren Buffett of the precious metals space. He also lives near our family’s winter home and I’ve had the pleasure of meeting him on two occasions. Here is a bullet-point summary of Michael’s recap:

    • With $13 trillion of negative yielding bonds around the world, it’s evidence of systemic risk that is far bigger than the housing/mortgage crisis of last decade.

    • When interest rates do rise materially, it will trigger huge value declines for pensions and other institutions on their supposedly safe assets. He believes these losses will dwarf those seen in 2008.

    • Almost no one today expects an inflation resurgence. That’s why gold is cheap insurance should governments resort to attempting to inflate away entitlement obligations (social security, Medicare, Medicaid, etc).

    • We’re not going to see 1970s-type inflation, but it will be higher than we have now.

    • The dollar is constantly described as the best house in a bad currency neighborhood but that’s crazy because the “hood” is going down the

    • There’s a very good chance of a US recession next year.

    • Gold is the “third rail” of money management. It’s been in the penalty box for so long that an investment advisor can get fired for even mentioning it.

    • However, gold has recently broken out from a long basing period. The wind now appears to be at its back after six years of slogging. (Our “Going for the Gold” EVA in February, 2018, gave a strong endorsement to gold; since then it has generated a respectable 6% return.)

    • Gold miners now have a reserve life that is the lowest in 30 years. They are very reluctant to build new

    • Silver is gold on steroids. (Please refer back to the above chart of the former’s moonshot from 2008 to 2011.)

    Though apparently he didn’t mention it, John might have added that the Fed has now launched QE4 even though they refuse to call it that. Just since September, the Fed has whipped up another $500 billion of fake money. In this case, the precipitating factor was severe stresses in the repo, or repurchase agreement, market. This is where banks borrow and lend vast sums to each other on a very short-term basis, secured by treasury securities.

    It’s incredible, at least to me, that the Fed feels compelled to both cut rates and print money at a time when unemployment is at a 50-year low and the S&P 500 is cranking out record highs. Its rationale is partially due to fears of another repo market seize-up (which briefly drove the overnight lending rate to 10% in September) and its singular focus on an inflation measure almost no one else tracks, the PCE or Personal Consumption Expenditures.

    As storied money manager Stan Druckenmiller said last week, referring to the Fed’s preoccupation with the PCE:

    Well, first of all, there’s 14 recognized measures of inflation.  Twelve of them are above 2%.  Their preferred measure, the core PCE is at 1.7%.  The risks they are taking with regard to misallocation of resources, bubbles, all that stuff because something is at 1.7% as opposed to two, and now they’re talking about a makeup period?” 

    His last point is that the Fed is now openly discussing letting inflation run over 2% for an extended period to compensate, or make up for, the years when it’s been below 2%. Frankly, I continue to wonder why 2% is a good inflation level when it erodes purchasing power in a big way over time. With 2% inflation over a twenty-year timeframe, a dollar depreciates by roughly one-third (compounding works in reverse when a value is shrinking). Long-term, the story is much more dismal.

    Ironically, prior to the creation of the Fed in 1913, US consumer prices were stable for most of America’s 130-year history, outside of the War of 1812 and the Civil War. The deflation in the non-war years prior to 1913 offset the brief inflation bursts, so that for over a century the dollar roughly retained its purchasing power. Since then, outside of the Great Depression and those eras when people like Bill Martin and Paul Volcker were in charge of the Fed, it’s been all downhill. The US dollar’s purchasing power is less than 5% of what is was when the Fed opened its impressive doors, on the eve of WWI.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: WSJ, Labor Department, & Historical Statistics of the United States

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, Evergreen Gavekal

    As Mr. Druckenmiller alludes to, and I wholeheartedly agree with, the Fed’s preoccupation with a debatable and minor shortfall by inflation has led to series of dangerous circumstances, including monetizing the federal debt. In English, this means financing the government’s trillion dollar plus deficits with funds whipped up by the Fed’s magical money machine. As noted previously in these pages, if I’d said years ago that the Fed would be doing this, particularly at a time of decent economic performance, EVA readers would have questioned my sanity…even more than they normally do.

    Due to the Fed’s frenzied efforts, the money supply is in a ripping bull market of its own. The correlation between M2 (the main money supply metric) and the stock market recently has been remarkable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg, Evergreen Gavekal

    Other central banks have joined in opening up the liquidity fire hose. It’s certainly been glorious for investor portfolios as 2019 winds down but a rational person with a knowledge of history must realize the eventual payback. There’s never been a time in the past when central bank debt monetization hasn’t ultimately led to an unhappy ending. (Sorry for the double negative but this is a topic that deserves serious negativity!) Yet, it seems like almost no one is thinking about the eventual agonizing hangover these days; rather, it’s all about the intoxicating near-term returns.

    Referring back to John Hathaway’s comments about entitlement obligations, it’s almost inarguable that either benefits need to be drastically reduced or the US, and other developed world governments, must use inflation to reduce the nominal costs of those and the debt that is used to finance them. Since the former is politically untenable, the latter becomes the path of least resistance. Who seriously believes this current feckless cast of policymakers won’t take the easy way out?

    In the short-term, though, we could see a scenario that both John and another very wise man, David Rosenberg, anticipate. In their view, and I suspect they are right, we could have a recession in 2020. This becomes much more probable, in my opinion, should financial markets correct hard next year after this year’s historic and euphoric rally. It’s during the next recession that we are likely to see governments and central banks launch a coordinated blitz made up of additional trillions of pseudo-money (pseu-dough?) and unbridled spending (even more than we have today, which is expecting the truly surreal).

    To quote David: “Remember that what follows this period of recessionary deflation will be MMT or some facsimile thereof. That is the ‘big bomb of debt monetization that ends up sending gold beyond a bull market towards a parabolic surge.” In other words, the next recession and/or bear market (believe me, dear EVA reader these are both certain to happen again) will set off the chain reaction that leads to the atomic event which creates the inflationary burst central banks so dearly desire. It’s likely to be a classic case of “Be careful what you wish for—you may get it good and hard.”

    Another rich irony is that the central banks – the very perpetrators of this bizarre world in which we find ourselves, with all of its long-term inflationary implications – are in many cases buying gold in massive quantities. In 2018, central bank gold purchases were the highest in 50 years and 2019 might see a similar pace. Those based in the developing world and in Russia have been the most avid buyers. The former USSR now has almost 20% of its total foreign reserves in the yellow metal.

    In China, however, that number is under 3%, implying that gold could become a far larger component. This is particularly true given the trade war with the US and China’s increasingly dim view of the dollar’s long-term purchasing power. (I can’t blame them, can you?)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To reiterate a theme from several recent EVAs, Evergreen believes (or at least it’s Chief Investment Officer does) that the next decade will be very different than the past for financial markets. The last 10 years have seen receding inflation and interest rates, both of which have been jet-fuel for bonds and equity sectors such as consumer staples/discretionary, healthcare, and, of course, tech. These all fall under what I would call the “paper asset’ category.* Conversely, the “hard asset” sectors and sub-sectors like energy producers/transporters, gold miners, copper producers, and agriculture nutrient companies have been the ultimate St. Bernards—i.e., huge dogs. (Real estate is one hard asset that has flourished in the last decade, after its disastrous collapse in 2008 and 2009. However, the high degree of leverage and inflated prices that characterize much of the property market today is worrisome.)

    With most US portfolios heavily skewed toward the paper asset category and nearly devoid of hard assets, the stage is set for one of those paradigm shifts that is exceedingly painful for backward-looking, trend-following investors. As noted in last week’s EVA, that is everyone who is heavily involved with today’s most popular investment vehicles–US-focused stock index funds.

    Per Jack Ma’s quote at the opening of this EVA, when money is too abundant bad decisions are made and they typically involve the recent performance stars. There’s never been a time in American history when there has been this much excess liquidity greasing the markets for paper assets. If there was ever time to channel your inner contrarian, this is it—asap, if not sooner!


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 18:30

  • Trump Exposes Pelosi And Son's Ties To Ukraine-Linked Energy Group
    Trump Exposes Pelosi And Son's Ties To Ukraine-Linked Energy Group

    Well, this is a little awkward…

    Having earlier called Speaker Nancy Pelosi “desperate,” a clearly frustrated President Trump told reporters this week, following a video teleconference with U.S. troops,

    “she hates the Republican Party. She hates all of the people that voted for me and the Republican Party.”

    Marc Short, chief of staff to Vice President Pence, said of Trump on “Fox News Sunday.”

    He’s frustrated [with] what he found to be a completely unreasonable impeachment.

    And that frustration boiled over as the president tweeted a link to something that the Democrats may have trouble fully explaining…

    “Wow Crazy Nancy, what’s going on? This is big stuff!”

    Shortly after his mother became the first woman speaker, Paul Pelosi Jr., was hired by InfoUSA for $180,000 a year as its vice president for Strategic Planning.

    Nancy Pelosi’s son Paul is also on the board of an energy company.

    As Patrick Howley reports, Nancy Pelosi’s son Paul Pelosi Jr. (who went to Ukraine in 2017) was a board member of Viscoil and executive at its related company NRGLab, which did energy business in Ukraine!

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And Speaker Pelosi even appears in the company’s video commercials…

    And Howley confirms NGRLabs links to Ukraine

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, while there is no allegations of wrongdoing in the Pelosi case (and certainly no political intervention which we know Biden admitted publicly), it does make you wonder just how deep the cookie jar goes in Ukraine…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And explains why the country suddenly became a key strategic ally.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 18:00

    Tags

  • City Tells Church It Will Lose Religious Designation Because It Shelters Homeless People
    City Tells Church It Will Lose Religious Designation Because It Shelters Homeless People

    Authored by John Vibes via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    Earlier this week, on Christmas Eve, an order from the city of Cleveland was posted on the door of the Denison Avenue United Church of Christ, demanding that they kick out the homeless people that they had been allowing to sleep on their property or face losing their status with the city as a religious organization.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The order came from the Cleveland Division of Fire, citing code violations that they claim are dangerous for the inhabitants. The city is following the letter of the law, in this case, suggesting that it is illegal to change the official use of the building without first filling out the required paperwork and making significant changes to the property.

    According to the city’s building department, for the church to give shelter to homeless people, they would need to go through a costly process of not only updating the building but also getting the required permits and licenses that would designate the building as a homeless shelter.

    Pastor Nozomi Ikuta has promised to appeal the ruling, saying that the church has been battling the city for months over their right to help the homeless.

    “According to the city, it is improper for us to allow the Metanoia Project to use our building to provide overnight hospitality. They are telling us to apply to change the use of our building from a church to a shelter,” Ikuta told Cleveland.com.

    Ikuta said that the church is happy to make changes to their building to make it safer, but she doesn’t believe that the church should have to change its designated purpose.

    “In essence, this forces us to choose between our identity as a church and helping homeless people. We want to work with the fire department to resolve any concerns it might have, but we don’t think we should have to stop being a church just so we can help keep people off the street,” she said.

    Among the changes that are required by the fire department are updates to the building’s fire alarm system, adding fire extinguishers and exit sights, along with fire sprinklers and other safety measures.

    Local homeless advocates have argued that it is more dangerous to keep these people out on the streets than it is to house them in a building that may not be entirely up to code.

    “Six people have frozen to death over the past few years and the unsheltered homeless population continues to rise,” NEOCH executive director, Chris Knestrick told Scene.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 17:30

  • Auto Lenders Have Verified Income On Just 7% Of All Loans Since 2017
    Auto Lenders Have Verified Income On Just 7% Of All Loans Since 2017

    The auto industry in 2019 is starting to look a lot like the subprime mortgage market in 2007.

    One such example of an industry trying to move vehicle inventory by any means necessary was Mirna Lopez, a 65 year old who was able to buy a 2018 Nissan Pathfinder on monthly earnings of just $660. Her car loan’s monthly payment was slated to be $809.

    How was this possible? The Wall Street Journal reports that an employee at the dealership that sold her the car simply listed her monthly earnings at $7,833. Nothing creative, nothing fancy: just plain old fraud.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s no longer good enough for customers to be buying cars with debt only. Now, while the auto industry struggles to pull itself out of the recession it is mired in, some dealerships around the country are “dressing up” loan applications with fake incomes, according to consumer lawyers. Additionally, some large lenders have cut back on safeguards that could catch the fraudulent applications. 

    The result is usually a quick default on these loans and consumers destroying their credit. 

    Richard Feferman, a New Mexico lawyer who has sued dealerships and lenders said: “The consequence for a lot of people is to ruin them financially for five to 10 years.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The amount of false applications is “hard to quantify” according to PointPredictive, which sells software to detect loan fraud. The company estimates that more than 20% of loans have inflated incomes. 

    Of course, dealers have the option to ask for documentation to prove income, but over the past few years some subprime lenders have stopped checking them – partly in response to dealers demanding faster decisions. In fact, lenders verified income on only about 7% of all loans since 2017, the Journal found.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And the share of loans that go delinquent after origination is rising, specifically among subprime loans. Satyan Merchant, SVP of TransUnion’s auto business said: “That can be a signal of fraud.”

    By the end of September, U.S. consumers had $1.3 trillion in auto debt outstanding, up $740 billion from a decade prior. 

    After disclosing their income to a salesperson in the financing office at a dealership, that information then sends an electronic loan application to banks and finance arms of the dealership, which then decide whether to fund the loan. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Problem loans” often start with borrowers making poor decisions about what they can afford. Many borrowers don’t even read their loan application or final contract. 

    Dealerships can add to the trouble, rushing borrowers through the process or only showing them a partial copy of the application.

    Sometimes, dealers will even “fill out one application with correct information and submit an incorrect one to lenders.” Others tell the consumer they can come back and refinance some months later to a lower interest loan, only to find out it isn’t really an option.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we have reported on, dealers now make more money from financing than they do on the sale of vehicles. And the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau oversees auto lenders, but not dealerships, leaving room for dealers to act in bad faith. Last year, the FTC went after dealerships in Arizona and New Mexico for allegedly making up car buyers’ income. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    GM’s AmeriCredit verified incomes on roughly 70% of loans in some bond pools, while the auto financing arms of CarMax and Ally Financial were found to have verified income on less than 1% of loans, an analysis of 6 million prime and subprime loans showed. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 17:00

  • Life Comes At Us Way Too Fast: One Banker's Striking Explanation Why Nothing Makes Sense Any More
    Life Comes At Us Way Too Fast: One Banker's Striking Explanation Why Nothing Makes Sense Any More

    Deutsche Bank’s postmodern philosopher-cum-credit strategist Aleksandar Kocic, who missed his true calling and instead of writing a sequel to Ulysses, Finnegan’s Wake or some other pomo stream of consciousness piece in the style of Lacan, Derrida, Deleuze (or even Foucault, Beckett, Ginsberg or Burroughs) was reduced, no pun intended, to predicting the future by describing the shift in yield curves or their “Greek” derivatives, has always had a way with words and he certainly uses them in his 2020 vol market outlook which can be summarized – and we use the term very loosely – as follows, in his own words: “We see last year as the final stage of an on-going process of vega collapse caused by the chronic lack of demand, disruption of the vol/leverage cycle, and activity of the Central Banks. At the core of these developments resides an emerging new perspective of uncertainty: On top of the structural drivers, low volatility levels, compressed vol risk premia, and flat vol forwards present an articulation of the flattening of horizons.”

    Like we said, “a way with words.”

    While it would be an injustice to the Deutsche Banker to summarize what he talks about in simplistic terms (the problem with post-modernism is that it can’t by definition be reduced, hence why nobody really reads it), what the Serbian strategist focuses on in broad strokes is the ongoing collapse of vega (and its deficit), which however may be approaching the “boundaries of vol decline” (i.e., the moment when the Fed loses control so to speak)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … the persistence of low volatility risk premia, with Implied/Realized vol ratios free-falling from nearly 130% during the  summer to current 70-80% range, even as volatility risk premia away from rates remain above 100%, as central banks do everything to surpress rate vol…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … amid a structural shift in the vol market across two decades, the first culminating with the 2008 crisis, in which the “vol market was demand driven”, a period of “unprecedented systematization of mortgage hedging practices and concentration of negative mortgage convexity in a relatively small number of portfolios, as well as an aggressive growth of the hedge funds
    community…”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which however was followed by a “new equilibrium” defined by the post-2008 regulatory changes, nationalization of mortgage negative convexity, reduction of risk appetite, and recentering of supply and demand. In this decade, Kocic proposes that “the most significant change was the disappearance of the mortgage related demand, severance of the transmission mechanisms and the new role of Central Banks.” To wit, the “Fed has transformed from uninvolved player to an active convexity manager and its major supplier.” And with mortgage hedgers’ role nowhere nearly as significant as before the crisis, “as a consequence of regulatory changes, vol market in the second decade has been operating in an insurance mode (with more flows in out of the money vol) resulting in lumpy negative convexity distribution.”

     <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putting these vol market shifts in context, Kocic notes that in contrast to the beginning of the first decade, when net demand was about 50MM, or about 5% of total flows, second decade’s finale is dominated by nearly 20MM of vega surplus, or about 2% of total flows.

    There is another observation of this ubiquitous collapse in vol: as Kocic “explains”, low volatility is no longer perceived as ominous, “its persistence emerges as likely while flat or inverted curve is no longer meant to be a forecast of recession. Volatility and curve are now causally trapped by each other: For volatility to return in a meaningful way, the right side of the (rates) distribution needs to open up and, for (long) rates to be liberated, risk (and volatility) has to be brought back.”

    Yet for those who have followed Kocic’s observations in the rates market over the past few years, the above is not new. What may be new, however, are Kocic’s latest thoughts on why the “new normal” no longer strikes even skeptics as surreal or bizarre.

    As the DB strategist writes, the persistence of low volatility levels and compressed risk premia together with their  continuous decline “remains particularly puzzling in the context of the current environment where long-term risks remain abundant and substantial.”

    This, of course, is another way of saying (much more simply) that vol should be far higher considering the accrued risks form a decade of capital misallocation, rising political instability, and a market that is now as illiquid and fragile as it was during the financial crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So going back to what is new in Kocic’s latest report, is hiw interpretation of why the market no longer seems to care about, well, stuff. This is what he says: “in our view, such state of affairs reflects less the distribution of long-term risks then indifference to what lies ahead.”

    We can admit, that we live in a time when algos and traders all seem to ignore newsflow that does not fit a given, mostly bullish, narrative and blissfully trade purely based on irrelevant, non-discounting “signals” such as momentum, or frontrunning what others are doing. This in turn traps the Fed as markets, which are no longer efficient, discounting mechanisms as a result of central bank interventions – a theory first proposed by Citi’s Matt King in 2016 – get pushed even further from equilibrium, and force the Fed to intervene after even a modest drawdown as the alternative is nearly instant risk of catastrophic market collapse should markets be forced to reappraise assets in some fundamental value context.

    The implication is striking, because according to Kocic it suggests that reality itself has become too surreal:

    Given the underlying political entropy and reality contortions which it continues to produce, we are forced to abandon as inadequate the tools and frameworks that used to provide insight and access beyond immediate future and, in the absence of their replacement, confine our efforts to short-term horizons.

    What is the origin of this change in perspective? Here is Kocic again:

    Perspective is not a static concept, it is a function of condition under which it is formed. In skydiving, eyeballing consists in visually assessing our distance from the ground during the fall. We evaluate our altitude and work out the exact moment we need to open our parachute based on a dynamic visual impression. At 2000 meters, immediately after the jump, we cannot see the ground approaching. But when we reach the 800 to 600 meter mark, we start to see it “coming”. The sensation is very different than when observing the ground from a “static” perspective, e.g. from the plane at the same (600m) altitude. Speed affects our perspective: As the ground “rushes” towards us, the apparent diameter of objects increases faster and faster than our distance from the ground shrinks, and we suddenly have the feeling we are not seeing them closer but seeing them move apart suddenly, as though the ground were splitting open. Perspective is dependent on speed — it is a function of acceleration.

    And the punchline, which one can loosely paraphrase as “life comes at you too fast”:

    When extreme events begin to saturate the info-sphere on daily basis (sometimes even intraday), reality unfolds too fast – we no longer remember (or don’t care about) the headlines from two or three weeks ago. Our perspective and assessment of the horizon (“cognitive eyeballing”) is distorted. We are blinkered by intensity of information we have to process – overwhelmed by both its quantity and speed of its arrival – and no longer seem to be unable to properly assess the risks ahead of us, and have become insensitive to them. The distorted perspective downplays the risk of “hitting the ground”. The informational intensity transcends our capacity for statistical approximation and this rarefication of control affects the temporal regime of our decision making. As a consequence, our horizons flatten and everything that resides beyond immediate future is bundled as “long-term” — we appear to be indifferent to its temporal distance — it is all equally remote and equally out of grasp and we capitulate on our efforts to forecast beyond short term horizons.

    We find it amusing that it is the Wall Street strategist who tends to find delight in the absurd turns of the financial equivalents of post-modernism, not only in its linguistic realm but also its philosophy and how it applies to capital markets, that found it fitting to conclude his year ahead forecast with what can only be described as peak absurdity: to paraphrase Kocic, reality is now so perverted, with a barrage of flashing read headlines, news and events “coming at you” so fast that one can no longer discern what is signal and what is noise, that trying to not only predict the future but explain the present is at best an exercise in futility which is why markets no longer care and are “forced to abandon as inadequate the tools and frameworks that used to provide insight and access beyond immediate future”, instead focusing only on the moment.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 16:30

  • Biden Attempts To Defend Hypocritical Subpoena Refusal (That Trump Is Being Impeached For)
    Biden Attempts To Defend Hypocritical Subpoena Refusal (That Trump Is Being Impeached For)

    Despite previously demanding a “fair trial” in the Senate in which “all witnesses be seen and heard,” former VP Joe Biden appears to mean all witnesses except him and his son.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Having complained bitterly that President Trump did not comply with subpoenas in The House inquiry (and seeing Trump impeached for obstruction of Congress for such), Biden has said he will not comply with a Senate subpoena (which he has not received yet!).

    During an interview with the editorial board of The Des Moines Register, Biden stated that he would not play into the president’s “game.”

    “The reason I wouldn’t is because it’s all designed to deal with Trump doing what he’s done his whole life: trying to take the focus off him,” he said.

    “The issue is not what I did.”

    “This is all about a diversion,” Biden said to the newspaper.

    “And we play his game all the time. He’s done it his whole career.”

    The Democratic Party presidential nominee candidate’s comments came after Trump essentially said that if the Democrats want witnesses, we will have witnesses, but they will not like who they are.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, after legal experts and commentators criticized Biden for his remarks to the Iowa newspaper, noting that the White House’s refusal to comply with congressional subpoenas was part of the reason why Trump had been impeached, Biden decided to clarify his remarks this morning.

    “I want to clarify something I said yesterday. In my 40 years in public life, I have always complied with a lawful order and in my eight years as VP, my office – unlike Donald Trump and Mike Pence – cooperated with legitimate congressional oversight requests,” Biden said on Twitter.

    “But I am just not going to pretend that there is any legal basis for Republican subpoenas for my testimony in the impeachment trial,” Biden added.

    Then Biden really exposed his perspective:

    “The subpoenas should go to witnesses with testimony to offer to Trump’s shaking down the Ukraine government — they should go to the White House.”

    Ironic really…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Or is that a deep-fake? A debunked conspiracy theory?


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 16:00

  • "Eventually The Party Will Stop": Blain’s Financial Outlook For The 2020s
    "Eventually The Party Will Stop": Blain’s Financial Outlook For The 2020s

    Bill Blain’s Financial Porridge Outlook – 10 More Years… of what?

    “It was the era of risk, it is the era of sustainability, it was the age of unicorns, it is the age of wisdom, it was the epoch of renewal, it is the epoch of repair, it was the season of sure fire gains, it is the season of uncertainty, it was the spring of monetary policy, it is the winter of fiscal credulity, we had everything behind us, we have nothing ahead of us..”

    The Next Decade: The most exciting 10-years will be the next 10-years.

    Introduction

    The global market is a dynamic, energetic and malicious entity. It delights in confounding those who try to understand it. Blain’s Market Mantra No 1 states: “The market has but one ambition: to inflict the maximum amount of pain on the maximum number of participants.”

    The global economy is equally dynamic. It does not exist as a steady-state entity. It is constantly evolving with increasing rapidity. Competition among new unicorns demonstrates what we once held to be constant and forever, is now likely to be done, dusted and obsolescent over a very short-time frame, but also the fundamentals of good, profitable businesses don’t change.

    I am only a part-time market strategist – most of my day is spent trying to figure out who will buy my latest private debt deal, venture capital issue or where to finance yet another jet or block of commercial property. It does mean I spend my days actually talking with investors, traders, issuers, government and regulatory officials, rather than just looking at numbers. I’m sitting in the middle of a trading floor watching screens, hearing deals, and after 35 years of listening to market mumble-swerve with a trained broker ear… some of it is finally beginning to make sense!

    (Most traders my age retired long ago with the loot they amassed during their careers. Not me. I am addicted to sailing and yachts. It will say on my grave: “He spent it on fast boats, fast cars and fast women his wives, and squandered the rest….”)

    My greatest difficulty is collating what I hear, explaining my experiences, and putting them together into context as meaningful market insights… It’s fairly easy to do when I’ve got a time horizon of the next day – which I do on the Morning Porridge each day.

    To make this more difficult, I am going to give you a market outlook for the whole of the next decade – the 2020s.

    More Years – It’s all about Themes and the Narrative

    An awful lot happened over the last 10-years. Stock markets have risen dramatically. Bonds yields have never been so low. Passive index tracking has become the norm. Interest rates have never stayed so low so long. We have seen a European sovereign debt crisis and repeated country crisis in Latin America, Russia and Asia. Fintech, cryptocurrencies, unicorns, gaming, streaming and lots of other stuff we’d never heard of 10-years ago now dominate our current thinking. Our world has become much more complex, integrated, more fractious, innovative and changes far more swiftly.

    What word would you chose to sum up the last decade?

    • Credulous – the era of showing too great a readiness to believe.

    What word will sum up the next 10-years? Who knows? I suspect:

    • Cautious – eventually the party will stop…

    The pace and breadth of change across electorates, governments, businesses, and new opportunities over the next 10-years will have enormous implications for markets. There are so many potential points of divergence, it’s going to prove even more impossible to accurately predict the numbers, but we can certainly make educated guesses at what the themes are likely to be.

    Given an infinite number of economists, analysts and strategy geeks armed with computers, I suppose it would be possible to brainstorm the future and come out with proper predictions. Flying cars? 3D Star Trek replicators producing perfect steaks? Teleportation? Investment certainty? Dow to hit 100,000?

    I was going to start with one high-probability prediction: “this will be the last Decade Outlook I write”, but who knows: if interest rates remain this low, will I be able to afford to retire in my 60s?

    Markets are Event Driven, but trends are critical

    Economists and Strategists pepper their yearly outlooks with comments on the likelihood of recession, downturns, upturns, the shape of yield curves, overbought and undersold markets, sector developments and where gold, currencies, rates, and commodity prices are heading.

    Investment banks and fund managers are very good at producing pages and pages and pages of graphs, charts and pies showing just how the market will develop. Prices move in line with trends, which are set by events.

    Events can take form of a tiny little improvement to a product that increases its sales, right the way up to the scale to fundamental economic shifts, like a trade war or a surprise in politics. They can be momentary “no-see-ums” like an earthquake, or a culmination of a long-term trend, such as the unravelling of Unicorn tech valuations. Markets are determined by events. Some are predictable, some are not. The UK election illustrates how an event moves markets – on the back of increased Brexit certainty, sterling rallied, and we can predict businesses will move forward with new investment plans in terms of Capex, infrastructure, hiring and property plans. Even more prices move up and down.

    Themes are very different. They are the tides, currents and winds of markets around which events occur and trends follow. Skilled investors who can read these themes and use them to navigate the global markets by making educated guesses on where they will lead us next. Themes tend to merge and change as they encounter other narratives, becoming new market moving themes in themselves.

    Let me present a number of themes and narratives I reckon will play out during the next decade. Individually they might be limited, but it will be how they interreact with each other that will be most significant.

    Seven Major Themes

    There are 7 themes which I reckon will really matter:

    1) Market Distortion

    • Are the market distortions of the 2010s in terms of QE and monetary experimentation sustainable?
    • How damaging are the unintended consequences of distortion – inflated financial asset prices driving sub-optimal investment decisions and increasing income inequality across economies?
    • Can/will central banks continue to prop up markets and repress volatility via monetary policy?
    • Are central banks caught between a desire to normalise rates, but can’t?
    • If they withdraw monetary support, will markets tumble?
    • How violently could markets correct?
    • Are we still looking at lower for longer rates and zero inflation, or will inflation return?
    • Are deflation and Japanification greater threats than ongoing distortion?

    2) New Opportunities and business

    • A fourth industrial revolution is underway – Artificial intelligence, robotics, 3-D printing, nanotech, AR/VR, longevity, health, bio-pharma and climate cure tech will change business, employment and incomes.
    • The invention/innovation/commercialisation cycle is accelerating.
    • As the economy evolves, the need for new approaches to education and work will create bottlenecks.
    • Consumption, supply chains and work patterns will evolve.
    • New industry and manufacturing chains will require massive investment and financing to benefit.
    • Focus to shift back on profits, payback, competition and fundamental risks.

    3) Politics

    • Increasing dissatisfaction with politics, the political classes, and policies will lead to increasing unrest across democratic economies – raising the prospects of political event risk and/or gridlock.
    • Mature democracies may find new leaders emerging into the current political vacuum. Increased populism, especially on the right wing. Raised risk of charismatic leaders on right winning power.
    • 10 years of austerity will prove difficult to unwind through fiscal reflation in stressed debt markets – increasing political dissatisfaction.
    • Dissatisfaction with big-tech, surveillance capitalism, and Income inequality may spawn considerable voter pressure and regulatory backlash – ‘blame somebody’ theory.
    • Europe likely to suffer particular problems as the “committee” structure fails to agree fiscal policy, banking union, and how to enact fiscal support to struggling economies. Increasing imbalance and tensions between key members could pressure Euro.
    • US political cycle will continue to dominate markets and confidence in dollar and central banks.
    • Perversely, a period of potential calm for UK may beckon in early part of decade.

    4) Debt Crisis

    • If fiscal spending is the answer, will global debt levels test the limits of political credibility and thus the likelihood of rising rates and inflation?
    • Corporate debt levels look unsustainable and a result of distortion – will they break?
    • Liquidity issues will dominate any debt crisis.
    • Personal indebtedness is rising in line with diminished responsibility and victimhood society – it’s nobody’s fault but yourself does not play anymore.
    • Massive implications for risk – risk has been transferred from banks to asset managers. Can nonbanks manage rising fixed income risk?

    5) Geopolitics

    • Tensions between Europe, US, China and Russia will continue to rise.
    • Need for fundamental defence review and increased spend across democracies.
    • China likely to set own economic sphere using Chinese tech and Chinese government system – market driven communism.
    • Changing global supply chains will exacerbate tensions

    6) ESG/Sustainability and Fundamentals

    • ESG has emerged as a critical component of investment decision making over the last few years. It is likely to further develop as a theme.
    • It will become more thorough to prevent greenwashing, ensure sound governance and increasingly play to social themes.
    • Labels such as “Green Bond” will be redundant – everything will be expected to include a green element and be compliant.
    • Risk that potential regulatory capture of climate change agenda causes as much distortion as QE… for instance, disrupting supply chains by penalising fossils fuels and investments perceived as non-green.
    • Sustainability as an investment precept will become increasingly important; analysing firms, their business, and their place within the social and changing real environment as the critical issues in investment management. It’s a less proscriptive and more effective way to judge companies than ESG 101.
    • In a new global business environment of increased competition and shorter and shorter business life cycles, investors can’t wait aeons for profits. It will mark a return to fundamental investment based on rational expectations, profitability and sound businesses.
    • Opportunity to invest in efficient sectors damaged by excessive ESG.

    7) Climate Change

    • The easy one to predict– but the 2020s will likely confirm the reality of the environmental threat.
    • It raises increased sudden event risk from meteorological disasters, stressing the abilities of markets to cope with sudden large insurance and stranded costs.
    • Likely to create a massive new climate cure opportunity – inventing, innovating and commercialising climate cure technologies.
    • Perhaps the best way to address climate change is to stabilise populations – which could be done through education and jobs – but raising the issue of how to sustain growth while cutting emissions?

    And the rest…

    It’s a rule of markets that while things are never as bad as you think they might be, they are never as great as you hope. In a new era of financial realism and the re-establishment of monetary sanity, the new businesses claiming to have discovered a philosopher’s stone – for instance turning base automobiles into gold plated EVs worth trillions – are likely to be tested to destruction.

    Two Major Narratives

    There are multiple narrative possibilities, but two particular stories are most likely to dominate the next 10-years. From these flows many of the other themes, including geopolitics and how we react to Climate Change.

    Unravelling 10-years of Financial Repression: Past Performance is not an indicator of future performance.

    My first prediction for the next 10-years is: Markets are likely to hurt if and when they ever normalize. However, there is a possibility they remain distorted for far longer than we expect due to central banks fearing a stock or bond crash would trigger damaging global congestion.

    If you simply invested all your money in global stocks in 2010 you would have done rather well. Spreading it out to cover bonds also would have further enhanced your returns. If you did so, did you thank the Central Banks who funded your market upside?

    Can central banks continue to repress market volatility and push markets higher by throwing cash at them? That’s effectively what’s happened over the last 10-years. QE, ultra-low interest rates, and now the US Fed is repeating QE to stem a crisis in the repo market.

    The result has been massive market distortion – low rates chased investors down the credit risk curve in search of returns and into the equity markets; yield tourism. Corporate owners took advantage of low rates to leverage up and buy back stock, and spend on M&A.

    How complex will it get before it all breaks?

    We have to pay the piper not just for the last 10-years of distortion, but for the last 40 years spent in a bull interest rate environment. As yet there is little sign of inflation in the real economy – all the inflationary money created by central banks has flowed into the inflated financial assets. When I started in markets in 1985 the US 10-year Treasury was yielding around 12%, having fallen from 21% in 1980, and 15% in 1982 as I studied economics. Today its yielding 1.5%!

    Let’s remind ourselves how financial assets played out over the past 10-years:

    • US 10 Year Treasury – Rallied from 3.91% to 1.79%
    • Dow Jones – Rallied from 10,329 to 28,000

    What do such low interest rates tell us? Conventional economics would tell us low rates describe a global economy in slowdown, depression, limited inflation, minimal growth and few positive prospects. It sounds like the lower for longer economy many analysts predicted in 2010.

    Or you could look at the stock markets. Totally contradictory story. The US Dow is 3 times higher than 2010! It’s been driven by an insane mix of inspiration, insights and insolence as Unicorns reared and stumbled, corporate buybacks and low rates. A glance at stocks would suggest it remains a global boom time.

    The bottom line is simple. The last 10-years has been a story of massive central banking distortion to address the 2008 crisis. Now central banks face the consequences and are trapped. The distortion can’t go uncorrected indefinitely.

    10 years of monetary experimentation, QE, ultra-low interest rates fuelled and juiced an extension to an ongoing 30-year binge of irrational exuberance. It has fuelled massive inflation in financial assets – stocks and shares. Whatever lessons were learnt in 2008 have been quickly forgotten as investors followed the money and gorged on financial assets.

    Globally debt yields have tumbled. Most government bonds have flirted around negative yields. Even serial debt basket cases like Greece now trade within a few points of financial paragons like Germany. Ultra-low interest rates have meant debt levels are at a place that would have given bond analysts conniptions just a few decades ago.

    Equity prices are at record levels – juiced by corporates who have raised billions on the bond markets to buy back their own stocks and yield tourists looking for higher returns.

    Meanwhile, regulators have overseen rules that have resulted in risk being quietly transferred from banks to the investment sector – putting the savings of billions of pensioners and savers in peril

    • Analysts will tell you the markets can’t continue to hide the distortion.
    • Central bankers will privately admit there is nothing else they can do except maintain the distortion.
    • Traders will tell you to follow the money and buy the distortion

    The traders called it right for the last 10-years, backing their hunch central banks were trapped. They coat-tailed QE and low rates with a certainty global central banks have no alternative but to maintain low rates and keep juicing the markets.

    Analysts know it can’t continue indefinitely. Experienced traders know markets can remain irrational longer than investors can remain solvent. Global central banks know that to take their fingers off the monetary easy dead-man’s switch will destroy confidence. If they do extract the proverbial digit, then the all-out contagion consequences could make 2008 look like a slightly runny nose.

    The real threat would appear to be deflation and the Japanification of occidental economies. That may change if a crisis was to uncork the inflationary genie?

    How the end of financial distortion plays out depends on how other themes develop.

    Debt Markets depends on how much credibility Governments maintain.

    Prediction 2 – Global Debt is likely to Hurt. Lots.

    Global GDP is around $85 trillion, meaning the global economy is levered by a factor of some 3:1 – on $260 trillion of public and private debt, which is startling.

    The first question to ask about debt should always be: how will interest and principal be repaid? Have the trillions that have been raised in the last 10 years been spent in ways likely to return money to investors? Has the money been spent on building factories, creating jobs or building efficient infrastructure that will generate the returns necessary to repay the debt? Anyone looking in at how ultra-low interest rates have driven stock prices higher due to an orgy of debt-funded corporate buy-backs or to fund ill-advised M&A, or how massive populist-driven fiscal spending programmes are likely to increase
    government debt, would immediately assume the current debt markets are completely unsustainable…. The looming debt crisis of the 2020s will be complex and multifaceted. Even governments with access to magic money trees, who retain the keys to their own printing presses, are going to struggle to retain credibility and financial probity in the face of massive funding needs.

    Government Debt

    Over the next 10-years governments are going to be forced to correct the fact fiscal policy has effectively been ignored the last 10-years – buried in austerity budgets. There are two main factors that point to the need for massively increased government spending in coming years – populism and decay.

    Populism

    Electorates are angry. They increasingly perceive the last 10-years of monetary mistakes have made the rich richer by ramping financial assets and executive bonuses, while they were forced to pay through austerity public spending. The UK election illustrates the competition between politicians willing to buy votes through fiscal spending programmes. The revolting French illustrate the refusal of electorates to  accept tough decisions. Pensions, health services and other public goods including defence and educationdemand spending.

    Decay

    A massive infrastructure rebuild is required across the occidental economies – simply to maintain the current dilapidated occidental system. Yet infrastructure and government spending are massively inefficient in terms of cost overrun, delay and effectiveness.

    • Any significant infrastructure enhancements – including HS2 in the UK – are going to be luxuries, perhaps killed by other competing demands.
    • To replace ageing infrastructure with new climate-cure compliant rail, roads and port facilities, while rebuilding hospitals, schools and the housing stock to meet green goals is going to be massively expensive.
    • 10-years of government austerity programmes have created the need for massive social infrastructure catch-up spending. Education, health, benefits and care are all under pressure.
    • Rising geopolitical threats in an increasingly uncertain world where food and water security become the major issues means spending on defence will need to dramatically increase.

    The bottom line is government spending has to rise, at a time when rates are likely to be rising. Does that matter for economies that can create their own money? Not really, the choice is to create new money and call it debt.

    The factor that matters is credibility – if governments are credible and deliver credible spending plans then global investors will be prepared to fund debt at low prices. If credibility in the government wavers, the price of debt starts to increase.

    The problem here is not the amount of debt – because governments can create as much money as they care to. It’s the credibility of the government that sets the price of the debt – and that’s a political issue.

    Politics is the major factor likely to break the credibility of governments and trigger a succession of major global government debt crises.

    This is especially true in Europe where governments don’t hold the keys to the printing presses – they are owned by the committee called the ECB. This actually works in favour of some governments – where the credibility of the ECB outweighs the lack of credibility specific governments with investors who are willing to accept an implicit assurance the ECB will “do what it takes” to conditionally bail-out bad governments. What if that breaks? As it nearly did during the European sovereign debt crisis in 2010?

    Corporate Debt

    Corporate debt is dead simple. If interest rates rise, then lots of companies will struggle to repay debt and will go bust. Highly levered private companies that form the bulk of CLOs will probably collapse first, triggering a wave of panic around the market. Investors trying to exit corporate debt will find themselves trapped in illiquidity, driving prices swiftly down – which will look like a massive buying opportunity…. eventually.

    A few years later analysts will wonder why we allowed covenant-lite borrowing by barely solvent borrowers; why companies were allowed to bankrupt themselves by transforming equity into debt via buybacks; or how stockholders failed to constrain company managements.

    Corporate debt spreads show how the market is undervaluing risks. Corporates can’t make money the way governments do – they can’t create more; they have to borrow and most certainly pay it back. The risks of corporate debt are completely different to governments – the business ability to repay, the business environment etc. That risk is significant and isn’t covered when junk borrowers can issue debt a point over governments. When the market realises… it will be a wake-up moment.

    Personal Debt

    If you start your working career encumbered by £50k of student debt, with no chance of ever getting on the housing ladder, and with limited job prospects as careers are automated or digitised while workers are treated as anonymous resources to be hired/fired and employed by algorithms, then it’s hardly any wonder young Millennials, Gen X, Y and Z are increasingly angry. What else is there to do but spend money and borrow more.

    When a company can make workers redundant and skip paying wages or redundancy, and makes off with the pension pot, then what’s the incentive on the young workers to repay their pay-day lending? Go buy a car – what else would you spend your gig-economy wages on? If the delivery company lays you off because of a recession or replaces you with a drone – what can you do about it….

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If personal debt flattens consumption, then the whole corporate party tumbles off the merry-go-round as consumers stop buying. Helicopter money?

    History repeats. Egyptian masons downed tools building pyramids and swiftly robbed graves when they weren’t paid. Peasants were revolting in Plantagenet England. A guillotine was erected in Paris on the back of bread riots and an ill-timed comment about cake instead. The Nazis arose from the inflation of the Weimar era.

    Rising personal debt in this age of fake, easy money is presented as a consumer choice and desirable outcome – it’s not. It’s a massive political threat.

    Details, just details

    The predictability of events ranges from a nailed-on dead certainty, to a completely unexpected “no-seeums”. Without intending to insult believers in the Cygnus Atrastus, the predictability of events is not digital – almost everything is predictable, especially from the perspective of hindsight! Themes are complex and are only doors to more and more questions. Investors should regard the themes and narratives I’ve described above as concepts to drill down into further.

    There is so much more I would like to find the time to write about.

    I have a massive list of things that will solve everything, like cracking the capacitance problem; doing away with inefficient batteries and making electric vehicles light and efficient. Or maybe we will see the fusion problem solved – fusion power could save us with unlimited power, and its only 30-years down the line. (Its been 30-years down the line since fusion was declared our energy messiah in the 1950s).

    I would love to write how opportunities to develop new technologies to clean the seas of plastic, to develop hydrogen and electric aircraft will develop, or how we can crack the water crisis with desalination and icebergs. These things are all  possible, but will require significant investment.

    Or I could look at areas like global aviation, berate both Boeing and Airbus for their failure to develop new cheap efficient regional aircraft using modern tech. Both got greedy and stuck with 1960s and 70s designs. Maybe the Chinese will win that one – surprising us all by introducing a competitor. Even a plane with similar capabilities to the current aircraft would cause a demand shock in aviation.

    Maybe I should spend time talking about market risks from defaults, distressed debt, a new EM crisis brewing… but there is only so much I can say without getting really boring.

    For instance:

    Animal Protein

    Cutting back on meat production will reduce methane. It will drive business opportunities for protein replacement in terms of fake meat, vegetable alternatives, and the prospect of increasing food security by replacing land used for meat production with crops for human production. It will spur the development of 3D meat printing.

    It will also trigger a luxury meat market – where countries that can produce Co2 efficient meat command premium prices.

    These sub-themes create multiple new narratives:

    The UK could benefit from a shift from meat to crop production – our damp climate produces superb pasture allowing the production of high-quality luxury animal protein with a limited carbon footprint (because we don’t have to hack down forest to provide grazing). It opens the opportunity to export our meat around the globe.

    In contrast, repurposing former rain forest that was slashed/burnt to create cattle ranges by planting food crops will require soil enhancement and new farming infrastructure across South America at a time when water security is becoming difficult – begging further questions!

    Or,

    How about China?

    How successfully can China under the new great helmsman Xi navigate the next 10-years? Will China end up on a path of tumbling into a new gerontocracy of elderly men whose experience was moulded as children during the pain of the cultural revolution and the great leap forward? Or will it find a new route forward to successfully manage its evolution from a developing country into superpower?

    What are the prospects for success? Can it innovate technical solutions to its demographic, environment and bureaucratic challenges? I reckon China faces as much pressure as any state to improve its environment, and far from being suspicious of its ongoing reliance on power, the fact its embraced renewables is fascinating. Can China sustain growth without a debt bubble or does that actually matter if the state simply prints money and internalizes debt? Where does the party take the country – domestic capitalism or state control?

    It looks like China will go its own way – developing its own tech ecosystem, hi-value goods in autos, aerospace, shipping and rail. It will stage its own industrial revolution – AI, robotics, energy, pharma and health. The Chinese economy is going to move forward – and in the face of the increasingly erratic behaviour of the US president, and the political gridlock apparent to anyone trying to read US politics, perhaps long-term relationships with China will be preferable to a relationship with a flaky USA?

    Finally…. Some predictions from readers:

    Markets

    “I am expecting to see a massive correction in the bond markets. 10 yr UST moving above 3%, 10 yr Bunds above 1%. Credit spreads blowing out and Stock markets falling 20 to 30%.”

    “We will not see much higher yields next year. There is no case for inflation. Rates will go back to January 2019 levels once Trump settles with China. There is a case for margins to widen. We need a couple of spectacular defaults and that could signal a turn in the market. A future crisis will not be with banks but with institutional investors who have to write-off a lot of debt in their balance sheet and will try and sell deals.”

    Fiscal Policy

    “2020 will be the year where we will hear much more about governments’ opening up the purse strings in response to widening inequality. This is likely to result in developed market bond yield curves meaningfully steepen and 10-year Bund yields turn positive as the Germans finally give in to some stimulus.”

    “2020: Who wants to invest in the long Euro government bonds at -.5% or -0.7% of the countries that need to borrow heavily, i.e. that are in deficit? Only if you are forced to…Therefore capital controls are coming in Euroland sooner or later!”

    US Politics

    “Donald Trump will be easily beaten in November 2020 and win fewer electoral college votes than John McCain managed in 2008. The US economy will grow nicely but the impact of Trump’s unpresidential behaviour and his deep unpopularity with women will be impossible to overcome. In the early part of 2020 speculation will emerge that Hillary Clinton will enter the democratic primary. She will be blocked from running however – centrist candidate Biden will win the Dem nomination and then the election.”

    “In 2020 markets will fret about the choice between four more years of Donald Trump or a Democrat elected on a “socialist” platform. The battle will mean delays in corporate, and investor, decision making suggesting a sluggish economy and a sluggish market.”

    Tech Unicorns

    “2020 will be the year when Silicon Valley investors are caught swimming without trunks. IPOs start to dry up for cash-guzzling companies that have followed the ‘blitzscaling’ growth strategy and that has a knock-on impact on sentiment amongst the funders that have supported them to date. VCs start to look for businesses that can achieve profitability even if their ambitions are more modest than dominating entire industries or creating new paradigms.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 15:30

  • Weinstein Accusers Balk After Lawyers Set To Make More Than Plaintiffs
    Weinstein Accusers Balk After Lawyers Set To Make More Than Plaintiffs

    Last week, a tentative settlement agreement for $25 million was reportedly reached between Harvey Weinstein and more than 30 women who have accused him of sexual misconduct. If approved by the court, the deal would bring an end to the majority of lawsuits pending against the disgraced Hollywood mogul.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now that the details have come out, however, several of the women are objecting to attorney’s fees, which in some cases would hand the lawyers more than 10 times more than some of the accusers, according to The Guardian.

    Should we file this under ‘that’s how class-action lawsuits work’ or are the attorneys asking too much after two years of negotiations?

    Elizabeth Fegan, the lead attorney representing the women who are part of the original class action lawsuit and all future claimants who choose to join it, could receive up to 25% of the payout if the settlement goes ahead, legal observers said. They pointed out that sum could end up being 10 times or more the payment to individual victims, especially if more join the case and dilute the amount of the awards.

    Lawyer Douglas Wigdor says this is one of the grounds upon which he intends to fight the proposed settlement on behalf of two of his clients who have announced they will object.

    He says Fegan’s fee “could end up being significantly more than 10 times the amount” that individual plaintiffs will receive.

    “She stands to make millions of dollars in attorney fees if it settles and if it doesn’t, then she’s out of luck.” –The Guardian

    The proposed settlement with accusers is just one component of a $47 million deal which would also pay the Weinstein Company’s debts. Of it, $6.2 million would go to 18 accusers in the US, Canada and UK, while around $18.5 million would be set aside for class action participants – with more expected to join.

    Over a quarter of the overall settlement package, $12m, will go towards the legal costs of Weinstein, his brother Bob, and former members of the company’s board if the agreement goes ahead.

    According to attorney John Clune, who has advised several dissatisfied Weinstein accusers, “It certainly doesn’t seem fair that lawyers could be getting more than their clients … This is one of the things that I think the judge is going to have to take a close look at.”

    Fegan told The Guardian, “As in all class actions, attorneys’ fees are ultimately determined by the judge, who must evaluate and approve the percentage. If the court awards them 25% for fees, the attorneys will receive less than the value of time spent on the case using industry standard defined billing rates.”

    According to the report, New Zealand model Zoe Brock says she intends to file an objection to the proposed settlement – the fourth accuser to publicly say she will do so, adding that she feels “hopeless and defeated” by the proposed terms under which Weinstein wouldn’t be required to personally pay his accusers or admit any wrongdoing.

    Instead, the settlement would be paid by insurance companies representing the Weinstein Company.

    Brock, who was part of the original class action filed against Weinstein in November 2017, says she feels her hands are tied. “Even if I walk away I can’t take another suit against Harvey, or anyone connected to him, because the class action has already been filed,” she said.

    “I have been dealing behind the scenes with the weight of this negotiation for months and I have been very vocal about how unhappy I am about it with my legal team,” she told New Zealand radio station, Stuff.

    “They have been very careful in every email and every interview to say that no one is being forced into this settlement but I feel forced … I don’t feel like I have a choice.”

    Brock is among the Weinstein accusers who have sought outside advice from lawyers not involved in the settlement negotiations. –The Guardian

    Another Weinstein accuser who says she was sexually assaulted by the mogul in 2010, Dominique Huett, says she is also considering filing an objection, however she’s worried that if the settlement is not passed, nobody will be compensated.

    “I’m not sure I want to sign up to this,” she said, “but I feel I need to do what’s best for the collective and don’t want to get in the way of other women who feel this is their only option.”

    “It has been a very disturbing process. He [Weinstein] is still holding all of the power and all of the cards.”

    Meanwhile, Weinstein’s criminal trial is scheduled to begin January 6 in Manhattan, while he may also face charges in Los Angeles.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 15:00

    Tags

  • Shattering The Overton Window
    Shattering The Overton Window

    Authored by Robert Gore via StraightLineLogic.com,

    Aim your rocks at glass houses.

    The Overton window is the range of policies politically acceptable to the mainstream population at a given time. It is also known as the window of discourse. The term is named after Joseph P. Overton, who stated that an idea’s political viability depends mainly on whether it falls within this range, rather than on politicians’ individual preferences. According to Overton, the window frames the range of policies that a politician can recommend without appearing too extreme to gain or keep public office given the climate of public opinion at that time.

    CIA Wikipedia

    Heaven forbid anyone appear too extreme. Our rulers keep discourse safely within the Overton window by allowing debate about the details of what the government does or doesn’t do. However, those who question the necessity of particular government agencies or programs, or government in general, are beyond-the-pale extremists and cast into the Abyss of the Unacceptable, one zip code over from the Abyss of the Deplorable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Federal Reserve has been much in the news lately. The term “repo” is shorthand for a repurchase agreement. The repo market allows those who own securities to sell them to lenders and repurchase them on a set day at a higher price. The difference between the sale and the repurchase price is interest to the lender. The repo market is huge, providing short-term financing for hundreds of billions of dollars worth of transactions daily, primarily in government and agency debt.

    On September 16 the repo market blew up. Short term repos usually carrying interest rates of 1 or 2 percent required rates approaching 10 percent for the market to clear. The Fed stepped in, offering massive fiat credit to push rates back down. It wasn’t just a one-time glitch. Since then, the repo market has required substantial and repeated injections of Fed fiat credit. The Fed has announced injections totaling close to half-a-trillion dollars, or $500 billion, over the next few weeks to prevent the market from seizing up over year-end, when demand for repo financing is traditionally brisk. That will take the Fed’s balance sheet to around $4.5 trillion, the high reached after the last financial crisis.

    There are plenty of articles about the causes of the blowup and its implications and SLL has reposted some of them. Not alone among commentators, SLL’s best guess is that markets are seizing up under massive and ever-expanding US government debt. Unless the Fed buys what nobody else wants, the market will crash and rates will skyrocket. Time will tell. Without getting further into those weeds, the incident follows a pattern inherent in any government-central bank sponsored system of fiat credit creation.

    Credit expands faster than underlying economic production until interest and principal can no longer be paid and credit begins to contract. Governments and central banks meet that inevitable consequence with a still greater expansion of fiat credit, setting the stage for the next contraction and expansion. How successful governments and central banks are in forestalling economic and financial catastrophe is merely a detail. The important point is that the cycle, each successive crisis larger than the previous one, is a feature, not a bug, of fiat credit systems. Eventually they all crash

    Will the repo market be the tipping point for the next credit contraction? Apparently it already is, judging by the Fed’s frantic response. However, focusing on the details keeps the debate within the Overton window. Instead, ignore the details and look at the destruction wrought by the fiat credit system since inception. The dollar is worth about 2 percent of what it was in 1913 when the Fed was created. The Fed has amplified rather than damped economic fluctuations (for a masterful exposition of the destructiveness of US, European, and Japanese central banks the last several decades, see “The Japanization of the European Union,” Jesús Huerta de Soto, SLL, 12/13/19). Which prompts the Overton window-shattering question: why do we need central banks in the first place? The Overton window-shattering answer: we don’t.

    We’re not yet to the point where shattering questions are asked about central banks or other government or government-aligned institution, but we’re well into stage one: the realization that the status quo is not working for anyone but a small sliver of the population. Stage two has also launched: recognition that promoters of the status quo lie incessantly. So too has stage three: things keep getting worse.

    The lying is incessant. The Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons’ (OPCW) official conclusions about an alleged chlorine attack in Douma, Syria were unsupported by the evidence and several OPCW investigators raised unaddressed objections at the time. The findings were skewed to support propaganda justifying retaliatory airstrikes by the US, UK, and France. Justice Department Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s report detailed the FBI’s lies and deliberate omissions of exculpatory material to the FISA court. The Washington Post recently published what are being called the Afghanistan Papers, culled from a trove of Freedom of Information Act releases. Numerous military and civilian officials lied about America’s eighteen-year and counting war in Afghanistan from its inception. 

    This is a couple of weeks’ disclosures concerning official prevarication. The OPCW story hasn’t received much coverage in the mainstream media, while the IG report and the Afghanistan Papers have. They’re the tip of the iceberg. While more people are seeing the iceberg that’s above the water line, the Overton window and pervasive official secrecy still obscures the much larger part floating below the surface.

    It probably doesn’t matter. There is one bedrock truth about governments: they are based on coercion, violence, and fraud. It’s easy to mistake lack of public reaction to stories like the above for insouciance or mental sloth, but many people have internalized that governments repeatedly lie, they don’t need the details. They don’t have time to follow all the stories or to speak out and protest the undeniable lies and injustices—they have lives to lead. There are often nasty reprisals for those who speak out or protest, and they know that, too. But an ever-increasing percentage of the populace know in their bones that contemporary governance is rotten to its evil core. Whatever trust that once existed between government and the governed is long gone and it’s not coming back.

    What visibly agitates people are officially promoted issues and the attendant propaganda when they clearly see the effects on own their lives and well-being. Donald Trump rode immigration to the White House, astounding legions of pundits and self-proclaimed experts who endlessly assured us that illegal immigrants don’t take jobs, commit crimes disproportionate to their numbers, run drugs, or soak up welfare-state benefits. The unwashed masses rejected the assurances in favor of their own experience and knowledge.

    Once a person or institution loses trust, propaganda and “explanations” only increase skepticism and cynicism. The crowd promoting anthropogenic, apocalyptic global warming climate change is the same one that’s promoted open immigration, welfare and warfare states, and central banking, among other follies. Climate change is nothing more than a Trojan horse for more coercion, command, and control, ultimately leading to global government.

    The “deniers” reject the supposedly settled science. Science is never settled, there are only hypotheses that offer more explanatory and predictive power than previous hypotheses. Nobody listens to messages from messengers they don’t trust, and resorting to hysterically hectoring harpies doesn’t help the cause. AOC can take care of herself, but using a sixteen-year-old stooge is particularly reprehensible. Patriotism was once the last refuges of scoundrels, now it’s “the children” (see Clinton, Hillary, It Takes a Village: And Other Lessons Children Teach Us, 1996, Simon & Schuster).

    The 1910-1920 decade kicked off the long bull market in government.

    • In the US, we got the Federal Reserve, the income tax, direct election of senators, and Prohibition.

    • The world got World War I and the Treaty of Versailles, the Middle East sliced up into European satrapies, the Bolshevik Revolution, and the Spanish Flu.

    The next hundred years was a montage of government-sponsored horrors: the Great Depression, World War II, tyrannical dictatorships, mass slaughter, nuclear weaponry, terrorism, environmental degradation, the American military-industrial-intelligence-media-academic complex, and an unprecedented explosion of debt to pay for it all. Yet, after the bloodiest century in human history, in which governments killed an estimated 100 to 200 million people not counting the wars, questioning the legitimacy and necessity of governments is still outside the Overton window.

    Arctic blasts of reality are set to shatter that window and freeze all those who believed its double panes would protect them. It’s necessary because the current system is never going to improve itself. Only a full demonstration of the horrors of the old and unimproved will open people’s minds to the possibility of something different, something new and improved. Stage four is system collapse and we’re on the cusp. It will be the direct result of the last century’s follies and will spell the end of the bull market in government.

    The widespread dissatisfaction with the way things are, even before collapse, portends something much more ominous ahead. Brexit, Trump, Catalonia, Hong Kong, the Yellow Vests, and the other protests and unrest are relatively minor perturbations. Reform and separation are their predominant themes, not rebellion and overthrow. Reform, unfortunately, is impossible; entrenched elites’ money and power flow from the corruption. Separation and secession are the last, best hope for any kind of semi-peaceful resolution of the tensions besetting the world.

    The Civil War was fought to preserve the federal government’s control of the states. The Overton window puts beyond question that the Civil War permanently vanquished all consideration of secession. However, the centrifugal forces of decentralization and devolution are waxing. Eventually they will hurl present political arrangements against the wall. Doesn’t some sort of peaceful breakup make more sense than an inevitably bloody and doomed effort to preserve the unwieldy dominion of the corrupt, parasitic, and bankrupt federal government?

    For those of us bent on upending present political arrangements, it’s more logical to lay claim to part of the country as the US splats against the wall than to try and reconstitute a government to govern the sprawling American land mass, and a disparate and ideologically incompatible population of 330 million. Part of something is better than all of nothing. Texit or Appalachexit would be far easier than restoring a Constitutional republic to the whole of the United States. And there’s a tactical advantage to advocating for peaceful secession rather than violent revolt: the former won’t get you thrown in jail—yet, unless you’re in Catalonia or China—the latter might.

    Let those who want to remain safely within the Overton window have their welfare and warfare state, their central bank, their faltering empire, and their domination by parasitic government. Let the rest of us discover freedom, true peace, and self-sovereignty in one or more breakaway provinces.

    Surely if these outside-the-window notions are merely crackpot fantasies our efforts will fail and we’ll come skulking back, recognizing Washington as our one true master and begging for reunification. And if our efforts succeed? That’s stage five, a prospect we’re not to supposed to think of, dream about, or strive for, the stuff of our rulers’ nightmares. It’s why they installed the Overton window in the first place.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 12/28/2019 – 14:30

    Tags

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 28th December 2019

  • "White Man's Burden": The US Has Been Fighting "Forever Wars" Against Muslims For 120 Years
    "White Man's Burden": The US Has Been Fighting "Forever Wars" Against Muslims For 120 Years

    Authored by Darius Shahtahmasebi via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    U.S.-led wars in the Middle East have killed some four million Muslims since 1990. The recently published Afghanistan papers, provided an insight into the longest war in U.S. history and revealed how U.S. officials continuously lied about the progress being made in Afghanistan, lacked a basic understanding of the country, were hiding evidence that the war was unwinnable, and had wasted as much as $1 trillion in the process.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, this phenomenon is nothing new. While most people accept that the United States has been interfering with Muslim populations quite heavily since World War II, the truth is that the U.S. has been fighting “forever wars” against Muslim populations for well over 100 years. (If you want to really go back into history, Thomas Jefferson was also fighting Muslims in the oft-forgotten Barbary Wars in the early 1800s).

    The average American school curriculum likely doesn’t feature the fact that the U.S. waged a war from 1899 to 1913 in the southernmost island of the Philippines. Known as the Moro War, it was the longest sustained military campaign in American history until the war in Afghanistan surpassed it a few years ago. As a result, the U.S. and the Philippine governments are still embroiled in a battle with Islamist insurgents in the southern Philippines, which takes the meaning of “forever war” to a whole new level.

    Despite over a century passing since the U.S. led a counterinsurgency war against the Islamic Moros, its similarities with the Afghanistan war are incredibly noteworthy, to say the least.

    Even reading accounts of the terrain in which both conflicts were fought suggest they were equally as treacherous. As detailed in the memoir of Captain John Pershing, fighting the Moro Wars “entailed guerrilla warfare in a country unknown to us, with its swamps and rivers and its hills and mountains, every foot of which was familiar to the inhabitants and their insurrecto troops.”

    While the U.S. often boasts about fighting for freedom, many Americans may be wondering how it is that their freedom came to be located in the Philippines in the first place. Was it worth sending 75,000 American troops in just 1900 alone to the Philippines to fight and die? And was the operation even remotely successful?

    More importantly seems to be the indication that the U.S. military was not welcome in the Philippines, much as it is not welcomed by Afghanistan or any other Muslim-majority nation which has to duel with the U.S. Empire. After the U.S. defeated the Spanish fleet in Manila Bay and annexed the Philippines under the 1898 Treaty of Paris, the Moro population were not even consulted. The U.S. then sought to “pacify” them using brute force.

    “I want no prisoners,” ordered General Jacob Smith on Samar Island during the war in 1902. “I wish you to kill and burn, the more you kill and burn the better you will please me.”

    Fast forward over 100 years later and it is difficult to see how U.S. military doctrine has changed for the better. A video came to light in 2010 of then-General James Mattis saying that it was “a hell of a lot of fun to shoot” people in Afghanistan. Mattis was later rewarded for his heroism and bravery by being crowned Donald Trump’s secretary of defense for a short while.

    As you can imagine, General Smith received his wish just as Mattis after him, with perhaps half a million locals dying as a result of the U.S. invasion. At Bud Dajo, some 1,000 Moro separatists, including their families had fled to the crest of a volcano to escape the American invasion. Allegedly, American troops reached the top of the volcano and fired down into the crater until they killed 99 percent of the inhabitants. The colonizers then took the time and effort to pose for a photograph with the hundreds of dead bodies (no, seriously). 

    It is also worth noting that some 4,000 U.S. soldiers lost their lives during this particular war. This closely mirrors the number of coalition deaths since 2001 in Afghanistan—and for good reason. To minimize U.S. personnel deaths in the Philippines’ war, the U.S. military deployed Filipinos led by U.S. officers into battle. (Sound familiar?)

    At one stage, Filipinos ended up doing almost all of the dying as U.S. soldiers slowly left the battle theatre. In fact, the final year of conflict was the bloodiest year of the Moro war. This seems to be the trend in a number of U.S. wars. This is certainly true with respect to Afghanistan, with the U.S. military and its Afghan lackeys on the ground killing more civilians than the Taliban in recent times.

    But what is all this senseless violence for? To put it simply, whether in the Philippines, Iraq, Afghanistan, or elsewhere, this rampage is all borne out of the belief that America’s subordinates are not capable of ruling themselves and will ultimately profit from American occupation. This was actually the firm thinking of U.S. President Theodore Roosevelt, who saw it as the duty of the United States to maintain the Philippines as a protectorate. This idea was famously (or infamously) termed the “White Man’s Burden” in a poem written by Rudyard Kipling, who sent the poem to Teddy prior to his decision to engage in the Philippine-American war.  A 1902 Life Magazine cover even depicted an apparent waterboarding of a Filipino POW by U.S. personnel (the supporters in the background seem to be watching with glee).

    When not much has changed, it seems it never will. We can also expect this type of activity to continue for the foreseeable future, given the geopolitical stakes at hand. In the case of the Philippines, it was recently reported that Chinese and Philippine foreign ministers have sealed an agreement for the two nations to pursue joint oil and gas exploration in the hotly contested South China Sea. 

    As it turns out, the South China Sea could contain anywhere between 125 billion barrels of crude oil and 500 trillion cubic feet of natural gas. The idea that a foreign adversary, especially one rising to prowess on the world stage such as China, could control the majority of these resources unchecked is a major blow to the U.S. Empire.

    Whether it is lithium, opium, and geostrategic chess moves in Afghanistan; or natural gas and oil in the South China Sea, Muslim populations will continue to suffer in a colonial terror campaign which has been unfolding for over 100 years.

    Think of it this way: if another century passes and your great grandchildren had never heard of the “forever war” that took place in Afghanistan in the early 2000s, all the while watching a new war unfold in the Indo-Pacific region for similar reasons, you would rightfully be fuming in your grave.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 23:45

  • Visualizing Every Coal Power Plant In The World (1927-2019)
    Visualizing Every Coal Power Plant In The World (1927-2019)

    If you live in a developed country, it’s been clear that the appetite for coal power is falling.

    Not only has coal been singled out as a primary source of carbon emissions and air pollution, but, as Visual Capitalist’s Jeff Desjardins details below, it’s also been getting phased out in favor of cheap natural gas in some regions around the world.

    In the U.S., electricity generation from coal has been dropping since the late 2000s, and in Europe the departure from coal has accelerated even quicker. In fact, it’s estimated that European coal power output could fall 23% in 2019 alone.

    A Different Global Story

    However, despite a growing consensus around the use of thermal coal in the West, the global story is actually quite different.

    Today’s animation from SVT Nyheter details every coal power plant in the world from 1927 to 2019, and it shows that coal power — especially in South Asia — has continued to ramp up.

    As of 2019, there are an estimated 2,425 coal-fired power plants in the world, combining for an operating capacity of about 2,000 GW and roughly 15 billion tonnes of CO₂ emissions.

    Global Tipping Point?

    Since 2010, there have been hundreds of new coal power plants commissioned — and almost all of them can be found somewhere in Asia:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, it seems that this could be the year that the story changes.

    Preliminary data suggests that Indian coal consumption could drop in 2019 for the first time in over a decade. Meanwhile, it’s expected that China’s growing coal capacity could be fully offset by decreasing use of the fossil fuel in developed nations.

    As a result, according to Carbon Brief, global coal power generation could fall 3% in 2019:

    If this trend continues, it could be a sign of a tipping point in global coal consumption — and if the sentiment around coal shifts the same way in China, the potential impact could be amplified even further.

    Will 2020 provide additional evidence towards a global sea change in coal dependence, or is 2019 just a blip on the radar?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 23:25

  • Understanding Why There's No FBI Whistleblowers Outlining Institutional Corruption
    Understanding Why There's No FBI Whistleblowers Outlining Institutional Corruption

    Authored by ‘sundance’ via TheConservativeTreehouse.com,

    To understand why there’s no-one in the administrative mid-tier of the FBI acting in a whistle-blowing capacity requires a background perspective looking at the totality of corruption.  The institutions are protecting themselves; and yes, that protection applies to the internal dynamics.

    Former DAG Rod Rosenstein was dirty.  He might not have started out dirty, but his actions in office created a dirty mess.  Rosenstein facilitated the McCabe operation against Trump during the May 16th, 2017, White House FBI sting against Trump with Mueller.  Rosenstein also facilitated the special counsel (writ large), and provided three scope memos to expand the corrupt investigation of President Trump.  According to the inaction of AG Bill Barr, we’re not allowed to see those authorizing scope memos.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Additionally, despite knowing the Trump investigation held a false predicate, Rosenstein signed the 3rd renewal of a fraudulent FISA application.  Worse yet, even if Rosenstein was caught up by corruption around him, he did nothing to stop the fraud once identified.

    Why is Rosenstein a key inflection point?  Because Rod Rosenstein recommended current FBI Director Christopher Wray to President Trump.  POTUS then allowed Wray, as he does all department heads, to select his deputy – Wray chose David Bowditch.

    Keep in mind the National Security Division of the DOJ (DOJ-NSD) was/is the epicenter of many corrupt activities, including filing the fraudulent FISA application, manipulating interpretations of law for FARA (§901) violations, and doing all of this while denying any inspector general oversight. As FISA Judge Rosemary Collyer recently noted, the DOJ-NSD is positioned as a rogue legal arm of the U.S. intelligence apparatus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    FBI Director Wray selected the former head of DOJ-NSD to become the lead lawyer for the FBI, chief legal counsel Dana Boente.

    So from Rosenstein we got: Chris Wray, David Bowditch, Dana Boente and another dubious DOJ recommendation, DC U.S. Attorney Jessie K Liu (ref. Awan Bros and James Wolfe).  Keep this in mind moving forward.

    Another career corrupt-o-crat to come out of the DOJ-NSD, who was also involved in the fraudulent legal filings was the lead lawyer for the division, Michael Atkinson.

    Atkinson was moved from DOJ-NSD to become the Intelligence Community Inspector General (ICIG).  Yes, the same IGIC who manipulated the rules and regulations to allow the hearsay Ukraine CIA “whistleblower”, Eric Ciaramella.

    What we end up with is a brutally obvious, convoluted, network of corrupt officials; each carrying an independent reason to cover their institutional asses… each individual interest forms a collective fraudulent scheme inside the machinery of the FBI apparatus.

    The motive behind the DOJ/FBI effort to cover for Senate Intelligence Committee Security Director James Wolfe’s unlawful classified information leaks, is connected to this network and expands into the SSCI Chairman (Richard Burr) and Vice-Chair Mark Warner.

    Security Director Wolfe was working on instructions from inside the committee itself; his leak of the FISA application to journalist Ali Watkins was in alignment with the intents/motives of the SSCI in March 2017.   Dirty politicians corrupting staff.

    The DOJ and FBI didn’t charge James Wolfe with the leaking of classified information because it would have exposed corruption within the SSCI.  Wolfe was prepared to call the senators in his defense…. this could not be allowed.  The SSCI has oversight over the intelligence community to include the FBI, DOJ, DOJ-NSD, CIA, ODNI etc.

    How does all of this corruption come together?….  More importantly how does this level of institutional corruption create the inability of FBI whistle-blowers to come forward?

    The Senate Select Committee on Intelligence is the approver for any nominations for any executive appointed position involving the intelligence community.

    If the senate intel committee wants to block the nomination, likely adverse to their interests, they can… simply, they don’t take it up. (See Trump’s attempt to appoint Representative John Ratcliffe as ODNI as an example.)

    However, along with approving Wray and Bowditch, the SSCI also approved former DOJ-NSD legal counsel Michael Atkinson to become Intelligence Community Inspector General.  Who would an honest intelligence whistle-blower have to go through?  Dirty Michael Atkinson.

    The same dirty Michael Atkinson who was the top legal counsel to the head of the DOJ-NSD when the corrupt DOJ-NSD agency operations were ongoing. See how the whistle-blower block works?

    Aligned interests – The Senate Intel Committee uses the placement of Atkinson to block any whistle-blower action that would be adverse to their interests.  Whistle-blowers ain’t stupid, they know what surrounds them.

    Senator Mark Warner and Senator Richard Burr are dirty.  So too is ICIG Atkinson, FBI Director Chris Wray, FBI Deputy Director David Bowditch and FBI Legal Counsel Dana Boente.

    Robert Mueller was dirty.  Rod Rosenstein was dirty.  All of the special counsel lawyers including Andrew Weissmann and Brandon Van Grack (Flynn prosecutor) are dirty.  Additionally Mueller’s lead FBI Agent David Archey, who was promoted after the corrupt special counsel investigation to be the head of the Virginia FBI field office, dirty.

    FBI official David Archey, like ICIG Michael Atkinson, conveniently put into a place where he can run cover for FBI operations that might expose dirty DC and Virgina-based FBI activities.  See how that works?

    Try telling me with all we know about the Mueller investigation how anyone on the special counsel assignment was participating in a fraudulent investigation without knowing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Special Agent Peter Strzok, dirty.  FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith, dirty.  FBI Lawyer Lisa Page, dirty.  FBI media spox Michael Kortan, dirty.  James Comey, Andrew McCabe and James Baker, dirty-dirty-dirty.  Fortunately all of these are fired… but what about Supervisory Special Agent Joseph Pientka (SSA1)?  Pientka clearly outlined as dirty by IG Horowitz report on FISA abuse, and yet still employed; still providing cover.

    So what exactly does that make Horowitz?  Perhaps lead corruption polisher who comes in willfully blind behind the Bondo application team?

    That, all of that, in its brutal totality, is why we have not seen any honest FBI whistle-blowers come forward.

    There’s no-one for them to blow the whistle to…

    Every day we spend outraged about what the DOJ and FBI did in 2016 and 2017, is one less day that AG Bill Barr is not being held accountable for all of this current DOJ and FBI corruption that stares him in the face when he brushes his teeth each morning.

    If we had a functioning Fourth Estate none of these corrupt officials could survive investigative media scrutiny.  Unfortunately the corrupt administrative state doesn’t *play* the press, it actually involves the press…. it absorbs the press… it attaches the press viability to its own position…. it makes the press part of the corrupt process.

    The press cannot turn against the corrupt administrative state without exposing their own culpability, participation and lack of credibility… It’s a protective circle.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 23:05

  • A Decade Of Boozing Comes To A Close
    A Decade Of Boozing Comes To A Close

    As the decade comes to a close, what better time to look back and review which trends in alcohol made an impact – and which ones likely won’t be sticking around for the 2020s. 

    Craft spirits caught on in a big way during the decade, according to Bloomberg. There were 195 independent craft distilleries in the U.S. in 2010 and that number rose to 1,586 by 2018. With handmade-style liquors becoming popular, major brands like Proximo and Remy Cointreau found themselves purchasing majority stakes in small distilleries. 

    Kaveh Zamanian, founder of Louisville, Kentucky’s Rabbit Hole Distillery, which was purchased in 2019 by Pernod Ricard said: “The benefit of a strategic partnership allows us to scale up in a meaningful way.”

    Zamanian doesn’t see the partnership as “selling out”, but rather as an investment in his vision and path toward more product innovation. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, U.S. tariffs on European alcoholic products could continue to make the next year even better for domestic-made spirits. Additionally, the recently signed Craft Beverage Modernization Tax Reform Act provides distillers savings of $10.80 per gallon of the first 100,000 gallons produced.

    Celebrity liquor also became popular in the 2010’s, including “Born & Bred Vodka from Channing Tatum, Heaven’s Door Whiskey from Bob Dylan, Virginia Black Whiskey from Drake, Villa One Tequila from Nick Jonas, and even Ron de Jeremy spirits from porn star Ron Jeremy.”

    George Clooney also wound up selling his Casamigos tequila brand to Diageo for $1 billion in 2017. Actor Ryan Reynolds acquired part of Oregon’s Aviation Gin in 2017, also. 

    Andrew Chrisomalis, CEO of Davos Brands, which owns Aviation, said: “Ryan is recruiting new fans to the gin category and to American gin in particular.”

    Aside from ownership, some other actors took a different angle on things. Meanwhile, Matthew McConaughey was named “creative director” for Wild Turkey in 2016. 

    Julka Villa, managing director at Campari Group, which owns Wild Turkey said: “The decision to partner with Matthew was born out of a desire to share our rich, storied history with a younger bourbon consumer.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the decade ahead, eyes will also be on Aaron Paul and Bryan Cranston’s “Dos Hombres” mezcal brand and Kate Hudson’s gluten free, non-GMO corn-based vodka, “King Street”. 

    The rise in premium spirits has also led to higher quality mixers. For instance, Fever Tree from the U.K., which makes mixers, was valued at $4.5 billion earlier this year. Other mixer companies will also be gaining traction in the upcoming decade.

    Jordan Silbert, founder of Q Mixers in Brooklyn, New York said: “When we launched over 10 years ago, consumers in the know wanted to make great drinks and they began investing in premium spirits. It only made sense that mixing those better spirits with mixers of comparable quality and sophistication would make better drinks.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Additionally, low alcohol drinks have also been a trend over the past decade, as we have highlighted before here on Zero Hedge

    Lynn House, national spirits specialist and portfolio mixologist for Heaven Hill said: “Spritzes and low alcohol session cocktails are a way for people to enhance a moment without the punch of a high proof spirit.”

    The trend seems to be set for the upcoming decade: low alcohol fizzy and highball type drinks made with liquers won’t be going away anytime soon, even though tariffs may have an impact on availability of some cordials. 

    Meanwhile, according to Nielsen, sales of hard seltzer like White Claw are up more than 208% in 2019. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There has also been a rise in bitter-style drinks that has coincided with the hop-heavy beer trend that started in the late 90’s and early 2000’s. Amor y Amargo, a bitters-focused cocktail bar in New York City, started as a pop-up bar in 2011 and has graduated to a full blown bar due to popular demand. It now has a second location in Williamsburg, Brooklyn, that it opened in 2019. 

    Nick Elozevic, co-owner of Diamond Dogs, a casual neighborhood bar in Astoria, Queens said: “Years of watching people like Anthony Bourdain on TV has expanded American consumers’ palates and appreciation for different flavors.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, the growth of cocktails on social media has helped contribute to their popularity outside of social media. Bright drinks and ridiculous glasses all make for good fodder on social media.

    Liquor brands hire social media cocktail stylists like Josue Romeo to help in posting content. They also work with consultants like Alexandra Farrington to come up with eye-catching concepts that will grab people’s attention on social media. Some bars even have their own budgets for “creative directors”. 

    But looking into the 2020’s, some are hopeful that the trend doesn’t continue. “With constantly shifting algorithms and platforms such as Instagram experimenting with not posting “likes”, maybe we can all soon go back to sipping plain old glasses of wine—and not telling anyone about it,” Bloomberg concludes.
     
     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 22:45

  • Donald Trump Will Easily Be Reelected: There's Been No Repudiation Of What He Represents and There Won't Be
    Donald Trump Will Easily Be Reelected: There's Been No Repudiation Of What He Represents and There Won't Be

    Authored by Anis Shivani via Counterpunch.org,

    predicted well before the last election that Donald Trump would be elected, having felt that way once he rode down that golden escalator with his rapist invective. Ever since he was elected, I’ve also believed he’ll be reelected, more easily this time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An illustrative personal anecdote, one of many over the last three years: A creative writing PhD with tons of debt, whose wife happens to be an undocumented Filipina, became mighty angered by the promise of student debt cancelation. What about those who have paid their dues by taking out debt? No doubt he would refuse a blanket amnesty for “illegals” too. His DACA wife paid her dues.

    The columnists at the New York Times are all angry at the possibility of decriminalization of border crossings, health care for the undocumented, and abolition of private insurance. They don’t want to do away with Trumpian inhumanity. They want the oppression to continue, but without the transparent rhetoric.

    Minus the Trumpian rhetorical overlash, war, empire, violence, hollowness, junk goods, and a junk life are all the people have ever known and all they want.

    Historical movement in long cycles can’t be short-circuited, as we can see in the resistance of the liberal elites toward Sanders, the only candidate who could beat Trump, versus the stampede toward Warren, who provides a safe alternative, and would surely lose.

    But what kind of a fascist doesn’t start a war in three years? Trump doesn’t need war, because he has brought the war home by making us confront our emptiness directly. He is the catalyst we needed at this time, and he is fulfilling his purpose beautifully. America is exhausted, which the liberal elites don’t get.

    Trump keeps making noises about Iran, but he hasn’t actually done it yet. His pullback at the last moment, when the bombers were supposedly already on their way, is a trope that makes sense to a lot of people. We could have, in a science-fictional world, the repetition of this particular action—pulling back from the brink, the antithesis to Strangelovian irrevocability—day after day, and it would be the right psychotropic drug to rouse us.

    And what kind of a huckster is he? He constantly keeps changing his mind, which is not a character flaw, but the essence of his “deal-making.” America can’t find a better deal—from the New Deal to the Fair Deal to the imaginary Green New Deal, a landscape of lost opportunities and blighted dreams—so contingent honor, betrayed promises, and infinite self-cancelation constitute the only kind of deal-making possible. And unlike The Apprentice there can be no winner at the end, while the rest get fired, because the endless prevarication—saying two things at the same time, often diametrically opposite—is what constitutes deal-making. We’d better get used to it: it is the welcome end to a century of liberal social planning.

    To be totally adrift, he’s saying and resonating mightily, is to have total freedom. The empire embraces its most recent eruption of vulgarity, barbarism, and eco-destruction as a welcome development—at least the dispossessed do, if not the meritocrats. To move beyond the dead language of liberal political correctness, which all of the Democratic candidates suffer from, is a great service. He is preparing us for the imminent turmoil of the coming decades—concluding at last in secession and fragmentation by mid-century—with the kind of language the empire needs now. He’s reading history well, only too well, far better than his ideological opponents, the neoliberal globalizers or the democratic socialists.

    Not one of his opponents is prepared to say that power is America—brute, unforgiving, no-second-chances power. This kind of power requires a base removed from liberal education. He reforms language every day, in his tweets, which emanate from our deepest unconscious, such as when liberal stand-up comedians turn out to be racists and mysogynists in their revealing moments.

    As we prepare for the age of brutality, he’s telling us—as the Times columnists confirm every day in the limits they impose to compassion—that the recent gloss of multicultural tolerance, in the Reagan/Clinton/Obama years, was the final fantasy. His border wall seeks to literalize the walls of segregation and inequality that have been going up relentlessly all throughout the interior. He won’t start wars of humanitarian liberation, because that was the foreign aspect to the domestic malevolence passing as tolerance.

    Jeane Kirkpatrick counseled in the 1970s that we could work with good authoritarians around the world but not socialists. Trump’s affection for Modi, Bolsonaro, Putin, Kim Jong-un, and Mohammad bin Salman is nothing new. It is how we have always operated, even in the halcyon days of Kissinger’s détente, when we violently crushed democracy in Chile and elsewhere, or under the spiritual Carter, when we trapped the Russian bear in Afghanistan, much to Brzezinski’s delight.

    Trump doesn’t want to restart history, to repudiate Francis Fukuyama, or Bill Clinton. Nor does he want to start a clash of civilizations, to validate Samuel Huntington, or Bush Jr. He is content with leaving history alone, which seems natural, coming so soon after Bush Jr.’s counselors, who wanted full spectrum dominance. The deal, as Trump sees it, is ever-changing, immune from textual recreation, legal solidity, constitutional affirmation.

    What is his obsession with China then? China for the last three decades has been a management consultant’s dream come true. Trump is not playing a zero-sum game, a chessboard called economic nationalism, with China. With him we move beyond oligarchic nationalism or even democratic fascism. China helps construct a total vacuum of thought reaching even beyond the vulgarity of trashy American consumerism. We no longer want their tacky goods. We want the Harley-Davidsons back—or not, it’s okay if they don’t come back. If we can’t recall manufacturing, and we leave world trade, then we are thrown upon a manly ideal, where we make things and do things for ourselves, except that Trump and his followers know that that ideal is well past reach, going out of fashion with the rise of consumerism precisely a century ago.

    The 2020s: an exact reversal of the rise of optimistic consumerism in the 1920s. History does have its symmetries, if you know where to look. The end to advertising, news broadcasting, modernist propaganda, the religion of self-help and therapy, physical fitness, institutionalized spying, and technological utopia.

    His attack on the media, the breathing tube for an empty liberal consumerism that died long ago, is the most welcome move to his fervent supporters. You can’t believe a word you see. You have to create your own reality, which the Internet helped bring about starting in the 1990s. Consider the real scandal of Joe Biden’s son’s corruption, already noted matter-of-factly in leading newspapers, versus the impeachable scandal of just talking—airing out possible deals to land political opponents in trouble. Torture, assassination, deportation, and ecocide are all within the pale, for the resistance, for those who would like to replace him with an acceptable alternative who will take empire back to where it was.

    But it’s not going to happen, because he never was the bearer of a virus, which implies something alien. He is the perfect mirror, just as Nixon followed Johnson, Reagan followed Carter, and Bush followed Clinton, in performing not so much an oscillation but an exaggerated return to form. Empires, heavy and difficult to maneuver, don’t engage in circular or sideways motions. Trump is the accelerant to the end point empire needs now, just as Reagan and Bush served their functions earlier, and in that sense he is a true man of the people. You don’t beat a man of the people electorally, you just don’t.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 22:25

    Tags

  • Is Tesla Shoving It In Trump's Face By Producing Cars In China To Skirt Tariffs?
    Is Tesla Shoving It In Trump's Face By Producing Cars In China To Skirt Tariffs?

    Once again it seems like the rules apply to everyone – except Tesla.

    First it was “Funding Secured”, argued to be one of the most blatant examples of securities fraud in recent history – all but ignored by the SEC. Then it was scores of Tesla vehicles involved in various “Autopilot” related accidents – all but ignored by the NHTSA.

    Now it’s moving to China to produce vehicles in order to skirt tariffsall but ignored by President Trump.

    Tesla is now going to be delivering Model 3 vehicles built in its Shanghai factory effective Monday, according to Reuters. Construction of the plant began in January and production started in October. Tesla’s goal is to produce 250,000 vehicles a year at the factory, after the Model Y is added to the line. 

    The first 15 cars to roll off the line on December 30 will go to employees.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Elon Musk, pretending to give a shit. 

    The factory will be delivering cars just 357 days after the factory’s construction started. We also recently reported that Musk was somehow able to procure a $1.4 billion loan from various Chinese banks at a 10% discount to the prime rate. 

    That’s right, nothing to see here, President Trump…

    The China made cars are priced at $50,000 before subsidies and Tesla wants to have deliveries in full swing by January 25. China is the world’s biggest EV market and sold 1.3 million NEVs last year. 

    Tesla is also working to build infrastructure in China, setting up service centers and charging stations across the country.

    We can’t help but ask: With all of the outrage Trump has directed toward conventional manufacturers like General Motors and Carrier – why does Elon Musk and Tesla once again get a pass?

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 22:05

  • Scientists Say Aliens Should Have Already Visited Earth
    Scientists Say Aliens Should Have Already Visited Earth

    Authored by Manuel Garcia Aguilar via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    The debate about the existence of alien life has been a topic that has interested humans for a long time and the scientific community has had split opinions regarding our solitude in this amazingly big universe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, new research published in the Astronomical Journal provides further information that invites us to rethink our mindset on this topic.

    During the summer of 1950, physicist Enrico Fermi posed a question to his colleagues over lunch:

    “Don’t you ever wonder where everybody is?”

    He was referring to alien life.

    The Earth is 4.5 billion years old, and we could say that that was roughly the time it took a “kind of life” to be capable of space travel. Our universe is approximately 13.8 billion years old.

    Fermi proposed that during this time, the galaxy should have been overrun with intelligent, technologically-advanced aliens. Yet, we have no evidence of this despite decades of searching. This postulate became known as the Fermi Paradox.

    Briefly, some of the main points of this paradox, formalized by Michael H. Hart, are:

    • There are billions of stars in the Milky Way similar to the Sun.

    • With high probability, some of these stars have Earth-like planets, and if the Earth is typical, some may have already developed intelligent life.

    • Some of these civilizations may have developed interstellar travel.

    • Even at the slow pace of currently envisioned interstellar travel, the Milky Way galaxy could be completely traversed in a few million years

    • And since many of the stars similar to the Sun are billions of years older, this would seem to provide plenty of time

    Now, you can have a clearer view of why this paradox is so interesting for scientists and further investigation is being done, the odds seem to be really high.

    The expectation that the universe should be teeming with intelligent life is linked to models like the Drake equation, which suggests that even if the probability of intelligent life developing at a given site is small, the sheer multitude of possible sites should nonetheless yield a large number of potentially observable civilizations.

    This new study offers a different perspective on the question: maybe aliens are just taking their time and being strategic.

    “If you don’t account for the motion of stars when you try to solve this problem, you’re basically left with one of two solutions,” Jonathan Carroll-Nellenback the study’s lead author said.

    “Either nobody leaves their planet, or we are in fact the only technological civilization in the galaxy.”

    Stars orbit the center of the galaxy on different paths at different speeds. They occasionally pass each other, so, aliens could be waiting for their next destination to come closer, Caroll-Nellenback’s study says.

    Researchers have formulated different theories trying to answer the Fermi Paradox, including the possibility that all alien life forms in oceans below a planet’s surface and there’s even the “zoo hypothesis” which imagines that societies in our galaxy decided to not contact us to “preserve” us in a way analogical to how we preserve some natural places—or even to prevent them from getting some kind of “disease” from us.

    A crucial fact to this new study is the fact that, as previously mentioned, the galaxy moves. So, aliens could be waiting for an optimal travel distance to explore new territories.

    “If long enough is a billion years, well then that’s one solution to the Fermi paradox,” Carroll-Nellenback said.

    Another important thing to notice is that the research team did not attempt to guess at the alien’s motivations or politics, something that usually delayed the attempts to solve the Fermi Paradox.

    We have to consider also that our consciousness and our perception of the “civilization” concept may play a crucial part in this kind of studies. So, our predictions may be based on our own behavior.

    “We tried to come up with a model that would involve the fewest assumptions about sociology that we could,” Carroll-Nellenback said.

    So far, we’ve detected about 4,000 planets outside of our solar system and none have been shown to host life. But we haven’t looked that hard—there are at least 100 billion stars in the Milky Way and even more planets, so we still have a lot more to explore.

    Maybe, merging philosophy and science together for a moment, we could believe that at some point, if there is in fact alien life out there in the universe, we (or our kids, grandkids, or great grandkids) will get to know them and make really close contact, assuming all of this in basis of some of the ideas exposed in Kant’s Critique of Pure Reason, where he says that if something can happen, and there is enough time for that to happen, it will happen.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 21:45

  • Russian YouTubers Create Gas-Powered Replica Of Tesla's Cybertruck Using A Hatchback And Some Sheet Metal
    Russian YouTubers Create Gas-Powered Replica Of Tesla's Cybertruck Using A Hatchback And Some Sheet Metal

    Who knows how long it could be before Tesla finally starts production and delivery of its Cybertruck? Given the company’s timelines of days past, it could be years. 

    Maybe that’s why a group of three men in Russia decided they were just going to make their own knock off of the truck, from a gas powered car, according to Business Insider. And so, that’s exactly what the YouTube channel Pushka Garazh – which translates to “Gun Garage” in English – did. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And they did it using an early model of a Russian made hatchback. The men started with this: a Lada Samara, a hatchback created by Russian car maker AvtoVAZ.

    The group spent about $1,300 USD to create the replica, spray painting the hatchback after covering the car in sheet metal. However, at 13 feet long, the replica is about 6 feet shorter than the actual Cybertruck. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The replica, however, doesn’t have any doors (just like a Model S in the winter!). So people that want to get in and out are forced to go through the trunk.

    The guys even added Tesla branded hubcaps and a horizontal beam brakelight, like the one found on the actual Cybertruck. The replica is also gas powered.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The garage has put the vehicle up for sale for about $10,700, or 666,666 rubles.

    It has even been spotted near Russia’s capital and has cause “quite a stir” on social media. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you ask us, they did a great job in re-creating the overall hideousness of the vehicle. Given how shoddy it looks, we’re sure those on the street lucky enough to catch a glimpse of the replica likely had no problem believing it was the real thing. 

    You can watch the entire episode where they build the replica here:

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 21:25

  • Report Hyped By Climate Alarmists Warned: Millions Dead, Nuclear War, & Sunken Major Cities By 2020
    Report Hyped By Climate Alarmists Warned: Millions Dead, Nuclear War, & Sunken Major Cities By 2020

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    According to experts, climate change will result in “millions” of deaths, major European cities being sunken, nuclear war and global environmental riots…all within the next 5 days.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s because they made the prediction back in 2004 and said all that would happen by 2020, which is just 5 days away.

    “Climate change over the next 20 years could result in a global catastrophe costing millions of lives in wars and natural disasters,” reported left-wing newspaper the Guardian on February 22, 2004.

    “A secret report, suppressed by US defence chiefs and obtained by The Observer, warns that major European cities will be sunk beneath rising seas as Britain is plunged into a ‘Siberian’ climate by 2020. Nuclear conflict, mega-droughts, famine and widespread rioting will erupt across the world,” the report added.

    The alarmist document went on to claim that nations would resort to using nuclear weapons to protect dwindling food supplies, a situation that would “bring the planet to the edge of anarchy.”

    The authors of the report, Peter Schwartz and Doug Randall, also asserted that “By 2020 ‘catastrophic’ shortages of water and energy supply will become increasingly harder to overcome, plunging the planet into war,” causing widespread “crop failure” and “famine.”

    So apparently, the UK is just 5 days away from being plunged into a “Siberian climate” and millions of people are about to die in a giant nuclear carnage caused by global food shortages and monster droughts.

    Or alternatively, so-called “climate experts” have been proven spectacularly wrong on absolutely everything, from Paul Ehrlich’s prediction of millions of deaths from famine by the 80’s, to Al Gore’s absurd claim that the Arctic would have “ice free” summers by 2013.

    Just like the much heralded “secret report” that predicted global catastrophe by 2020, none of it happened.

    So why should we trust the same people now?

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 21:05

  • Opioid Abusers Also Face Higher Risks Of Death From Suicide, Disease & Car Accidents
    Opioid Abusers Also Face Higher Risks Of Death From Suicide, Disease & Car Accidents

    The surge in drug overdose deaths linked to powerful opioids like fentanyl and other analogues will likely be remembered as the defining national health crisis of the 2010s. And as the decade draws to a close, one study found that people who use illicit opioids face an increased risk of other “deaths of despair.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to CNN, which cited findings from the study initially published Thursday in the medical journal JAMA Psychiatry (one of the more well-respected medical journals in the US) users of illicit opioids (i.e. everyone who uses them without a prescription) face an elevated risk of dying from noncommunicable diseases (like heart disease), infectious diseases and viruses (like HIV and Hep C), suicide and other unintentional injuries (like car accidents).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Suicide deaths among the sample group studied occurred at nearly 8x the expected rate, while unintentional injuries occurred at 7x the expected rate. Deaths from interpersonal violence, while still relatively infrequent, occurred at 9x the normal rate, which is also unsurprising. Heroin addicts will often take risks to get high, including trying to rob drug dealers, who often carry guns to ward off such attacks.

    “People might be surprised that although overdose was the most common cause of death, it’s far from the only cause of death that people using opioids outside a prescription experience at excessive rates,” said Sarah Larney, lead author of the study and a senior research fellow at the University of New South Wales’ National Drug and Alcohol Research Centre in Australia.

    “Smoking-related illnesses such as cancer and cardiovascular diseases are common. Trauma is another major factor. People are exposed to car accidents, assaults and other causes of injuries at greater than usual rates, and suicide is also much more common than in the broader population,” she said. “It’s really clear that although overdose prevention is critical, we also need to look at the range of poor outcomes that people are experiencing, and work to reduce other causes of excess mortality such as suicide, chronic diseases and infectious diseases.”

    Researchers looked at opioid users across 28 countries, and compared their data to data collected from 124 previously published studies, some that were conducted as far back as Jan. 2009.

    Unsurprisingly, researchers found that men faced significantly higher rates of drug-related deaths than women (unsurprising since the majority of hard-drug users are men). Older users also faced significantly higher rates of drug-related deaths.

    But among women examined in the study, deaths from HIV were particularly pronounced. That’s hardly surprising, since female heroin users will often work as prostitutes to raise money to finance their addictions. Men who consume excessive amounts of alcohol, meanwhile, registered much higher rates of deaths related to liver disease.

    Overall, while poisoning- or substance-related deaths were the most common cause of death among opioid users (accounting for 31.5% of deaths), noncommunicable diseases accounted for 24.1% of deaths, while infectious diseases accounted for 19.7% and physical traumas accounted for 18.1%.

    “To me the most important message to take from this study is that we need to think beyond the drug. People using opioids are people first and foremost, and have complex health and social needs,” Larney said. “Making sure people have access to essential medicines to treat HIV and Hepatitis C; encouraging smoking cessation through access to nicotine replacement therapies; and ensuring access to nutritious food and safe shelter would all go towards reducing the death toll in this population.”

    A report issued in September by the US Congress Joint Economic Committee entitled “Long-Term Trends in Deaths of Despair”  found that “mortality from deaths of despair far surpasses anything seen in America since the dawn of the 20th century…the recent increase has primarily been driven by an unprecedented epidemic of drug overdoses.”

    The explosion of opioid use and opioid-related deaths have been the primary drivers of a drop in overall life expectancy in the US for three straight years.

    Most of those dying are relatively young white male adults.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 20:45

  • What's Good And Bad About Automation
    What's Good And Bad About Automation

    Authored by Stephen Davies via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Currently, there is a lot of discussion about the impact of technologies such as artificial intelligence on the world of work and employment.

    Some of this is alarmist, and some excessively excited. There will indeed be dramatic changes, but history and economic theory both suggest that these will not radically alter the nature of the economic system. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, while we should not fear the changes brought by widespread and extensive automation, we should be concerned about the way the process works and about its short-term and transitional aspects. Devising ways of dealing with these is a real challenge for both public policy and civil society.

    In the last few years, there has been a lot of discussion about a new wave of automation that is already under way and starting to transform much of the economy. The central element in this is the combination of telecommunications with artificial intelligence (AI). This makes possible, people both hope and fear, the replacement of a great deal of human labor of many types. It is AI in particular that attracts the attention, not least because of recent dramatic breakthroughs such as the development by the Google-owned firm Deep Mind of an AI that could defeat the world’s best Go player (Go is a game played mainly in the Far East that in terms of its complexity is at least one order of magnitude higher than chess). 

    There have of course been many episodes of mechanization and automation before over the last 250 years. The argument made by many is that this time really is different for two reasons:

    1. AI replaces not just human labor but the human mind and judgment as well;

    2. and the automation will make market signals unnecessary because the key resource will be information, which is inherently abundant and can be reproduced at zero marginal cost. 

    There is a consensus that a lot of jobs or kinds of employment are going to disappear in the next two decades or so. There is disagreement over just how many will go as a proportion of currently existing employment. The OECD estimates that just under 10 percent of existing jobs are at high risk of automation. Other studies all conclude that the correct figure is somewhere in the high 40 percent range. The weight of opinion is therefore on the higher side of the two kinds of estimate.

    Kinds of Jobs

    There is a general agreement about the kinds of jobs that are likely to vanish. They all have certain qualities. One is that they are routine and repetitive, involving the repeated performance of standardized tasks. This includes both simple manual jobs and process-driven desk jobs. Another is that the job or role can be captured in a decision-making tree or flow diagram so that the range of decisions that have to be made is finite (it may still be large) — this means it can be done by an algorithm. 

    There is also general agreement about the kinds of work that are at low risk of automation. One is work requiring manual dexterity and manipulation (because of the difficulty of replicating the human hand); another is anything that requires human judgment or creativity, dealing with something that cannot be captured in an algorithm. The OECD study also argues that work involving human interaction is likely to survive simply because people crave human contact. Others are skeptical about this. Finally, there are some cases where stubborn human prejudice will keep the job in existence: it would be much safer if airplanes were entirely automated, but in polls most people would (irrationally) prefer a human pilot. 

    Given this, we can easily construct a list of the kinds of employment that are likely to vanish in the next decade or two. These range from jobs such as truck drivers and taxi drivers (replaced by autonomous vehicles), to a lot of logistics and warehouse work (replaced by automated handling systems), to a lot of routine work in the financial-services sector both high and low paid, to most legal work (but not trial lawyers) and most medical work, including diagnosis and prescription (but not surgery). There will thus be substantial losses of both blue collar and white collar jobs — in fact the losses of the second kind are likely to be larger.

    Common Responses

    Faced with this prospect of a huge upheaval in employment with many kinds of work simply vanishing, one response is to panic. The fear is that there will simply be no work available, or not enough for the people looking for and needing paid work. Others are excited and see this as a huge opportunity. 

    A popular reaction at the moment is to see this as the way toward a radical reconstruction of the entire economic system and a move beyond capitalism to some other kind of economic order. The idea is that the connection between work and income will be decisively severed and that we will also move into a world in which many products will be capable of being reproduced at zero marginal cost, which means they will be effectively free: in that case, the price mechanism will no longer operate. 

    This view has been eloquently put forth by people on the Marxist left such as Paul Mason (in Post-Capitalism) and Aaron Bastani (in Fully Automated Luxury Communism). These authors see the chance to realize the vision of the young Marx, in which the alienation of work is abolished along with the division of labor. 

    There are also people on the free market side who see this kind of outcome as likely, although what they envisage is a capitalist economy in which a large part of the population subsists on free stuff while not working or doing low-paid work. 

    New Kinds of Work

    Neither panic and despair nor excitement is justified. The question to ask is not whether new technology is going to replace many jobs but whether those jobs will be replaced by new ones. There have been several episodes before where observers have expected the end of employment because of automation, and in every case the actual result has been that while many jobs do disappear, they are replaced by even more new ones. 

    Of course, that does not mean the same pattern is bound to happen again — to think so is to commit the fallacy of induction. It really could be different this time. However, there are theoretical reasons to doubt the more excitable predictions. 

    Firstly, many theoreticians of AI have a mechanistic view of human consciousness and decision making. For them, the human brain is simply a computer, only more complex and made of neurons rather than silicon. Hence the processes that create human thought are no different from the kind that take place in a computer or an AI, and any and all of them can be reproduced in a sufficiently advanced AI. This would mean that any and all human activities could be performed by an AI. 

    This, however, confuses intelligence and consciousness. We truly have no idea what the latter is or how it is produced, but we do know that the two are distinct (there are animals that we can show to have one but not the other). An AI or computer procedure, no matter how advanced, can only do what its programming and algorithm allow for — it cannot originate anything. This means that genuine creativity or the exercise of judgment when confronted by something novel cannot be built in. They remain human capacities.

    Secondly, there is the question of knowledge. Even if most activities can be reduced to an algorithmic decision tree, the knowledge that those decisions will be made on is mostly tacit, localized, changing, and therefore incapable of being expressed in writing or numbers. This gives humans an advantage because of their greater flexibility and adaptability (AI can also learn, but this process is not as flexible as in humans). Putting the two things together means that there are many areas where humans will retain an advantage. Even if AI can also do these things, it will do so at a higher cost.

    Thirdly, this misunderstands what automation does and hence its effects. What automation of any kind does is to make work more productive and hence to free up time and resources by increasing the intensity of the use of resources. Instead of using X amount of time and Y physical resources to get a given output, you use a fraction of X and Y to get the same result. This frees up the resources and human time for doing other things. 

    The result is fewer people doing some things and the people no longer doing them doing other things (often in different places). One challenge is that we do not know what those other things will be (although we can make informed guesses). We should not speak of a displacement of human labor but rather of its being freed up to do new things, in the way that all of the labor once needed to grow food has been released to do a myriad of other tasks. (The argument about zero-marginal-cost production misunderstands the nature of both scarcity and the price system, but that is another argument).

    Genuine Challenges

    So should we just chill and see what happens? Not so. There are two genuine challenges that these changes pose. The first is that the rewards from the new activity and its output will accrue to a small minority. The historical pattern is that this is what happens in the early phase of any technological transformation, due to first-mover advantage and simple good fortune. 

    However, as time passes and the returns to the new technologies decline as it becomes mature and widely adopted, the income and wealth gap that widened in the earlier phase starts to shrink. This is what we can observe in both the 19th and 20th centuries. However, this takes time, and in the meantime you can have serious political and social unrest, for obvious reasons. Moreover, today the high rewards to first movers are artificially heightened and prolonged by the legal system, above all the current regime of intellectual property rights. 

    The second challenge is that the transitional costs in human terms of rapid innovation can be very high. Outside the world of economic models, the reallocation of both capital and labor as a result of technological innovation is neither immediate nor frictionless. This is because of the heterogeneity of both labor and capital — they are not uniform. 

    In plain English, this means that many capital resources such as buildings and machinery will simply become useless because they are in the wrong place or cannot be readily adapted or changed to a new use. In terms of labor, a person who has a range of skills that are now redundant may find it very difficult to acquire new ones or to move physically to a different place. In human terms, this can be very painful and traumatic and very destructive of both human connections and personal happiness. This is a real challenge – you can write off capital, but writing off human beings (often in large numbers or in concentrated locations) is both wrong in itself and very dangerous. 

    What Should Be Done?

    If that is the real challenge of AI and automation (as opposed to fantasies of automated luxury communism or panic and despondency about the replacement of humans), what then should be done? Clearly, there is a place for imaginative public policy, which should mainly take the form of institutional reform and innovation rather than paid programs (e.g., radical reform of intellectual property). 

    The main step though is to look to social entrepreneurialism. We need people to develop solutions to the challenge of radical change in work and employment at a local level and in a decentralized but networked way. It is mutualism and social action that we need to rediscover and employ. Fortunately, some of the results of the current wave of automation are likely to make this easier, but that is for another column.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 20:25

  • Japan's Richest Man Quits SoftBank Board After Clashes With Masayoshi Son
    Japan's Richest Man Quits SoftBank Board After Clashes With Masayoshi Son

    After the year SoftBank just had, this is probably the last thing its shareholders want to see.

    One of SoftBank’s last two remaining non-executive directors is stepping down from its board after 18 years, removing perhaps the company’s biggest internal skeptic, according to a Reuters report.

    Tadashi Yanai, the CEO of Uniqlo owner Fast Retailing and a longtime Masa advisor, said he’s leaving SoftBank to focus more on expanding his own business into new markets, including Italy, India and Vietnam. With a net worth of $25 billion (according to Forbes), Yanai is the wealthiest person in Japan. But at SoftBank, he was known as a close ally and sometimes critic of Masayoshi Son credited with attempting to rein in some of Masa’s more reckless tendencies.

    But whatever his reasons for leaving, the fact remains that Yanai’s departure comes at a time when his more conservative outlook is badly needed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tadashi Yanai

    In one of his most famous quotes, Yanai said “Dreams are all good, but nothing beats realistic management. Let’s keep our feet firmly on the ground.”

    Unfortunately, the word “Realistic” was never a big part of Masayoshi Son’s vocabulary. As his reputation as one of the world’s greatest momentum investors grew, Son pushed his firm toward ever-larger bets on Silicon Valley startups, leaving firms like Uber and WeWork with outrageous valuations that many analysts found difficult to justify.

    After WeWork scrapped its planned IPO, SoftBank was forced to swoop in with a rescue package to stave off an imminent WeWork bankruptcy filing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, in its Q3 earnings report, SoftBank suffered a staggering $4.6 billion writedown on its WeWork investment. But that wasn’t all: In addition to the WeWork fiasco, SoftBank’s ill-advised bets on Uber and Slack, both of which flopped after their long-anticipated IPOs this year, bringing the firm’s losses in 2019 to somewhere around $10 billion.

    After the WeWork fiasco, shareholders were calling for Masa to step aside. Instead, the SoftBank founder and chairman acknowledged that “there was a problem with my own judgment, that’s something I have to reflect on.” He promised to be more conservative in the future.

    But according to the FT, it appears that Masa has already changed his mind. Despite the failure of the first SoftBank Vision Fund, a $100 billion pot of mostly Saudi money used to invest in dozens of tech startups, sources close to Masa say the chairman wants to continue investing aggressively by raising a Vision Fund 2 (though it’s not clear where he intends to find the money and investors, now that the Saudis have reportedly soured on their relationship with SoftBank, and Japanese Telecom/Tech/VC/whatever conglomerate’s reputation as a responsible steward of capital lies in tatters.

    Back in 2017, Yanai told a weekly Japanese business newspaper that his role was to raise sometimes painful questions.

    “I realise he has a knack for investing, but if he’s going to make use of his ability, I want him to be successful as an entrepreneur rather than as an investor,” Yanai said in an interview with weekly paper Nikkei Veritas at the time. “I want him to focus on his core business.”

    During a presentation last month, Son joked about being scolded by Yanai, and said his longtime friend could be a “scary external director” at times.

    Shortly after, Bloomberg published the latest edition of Bloomberg Businessweek with a cover lampooning Son’s many investing failures.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    At this point, remaining SoftBank investors should be trying to figure out exactly why Yanai left. Was he simply exhausted after 18 years of service on the board? Or was it Masayoshi Son’s hubris that drove him out the door?

    Whatever the reason, with Yanai out, SoftBank’s board is now composed almost entirely of SoftBank executives and employees. That’s definitely a recipe for a more insular company, and more “yes” men surrounding Masayoshi Son.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 20:05

  • "Decline Is Now Inevitable" – Dennis Meadows On 'The Limits To Growth'
    "Decline Is Now Inevitable" – Dennis Meadows On 'The Limits To Growth'

    Authored by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity.com,

    Fifty years ago, an international team of researchers was commissioned by the Club of Rome to build a computer simulation of exponential economic and population growth on a finite planet.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In 1971, its findings were first released in Moscow and Rio de Janeiro, and later published in 1972 under the title The Limits To Growth. The report concluded:

    1. Given business as usual, i.e., no changes to historical growth trends, the limits to growth on earth would become evident by 2072, leading to “sudden and uncontrollable decline in both population and industrial capacity”. This includes the following:

      • Global Industrial output per capita reaches a peak around 2008, followed by a rapid decline

      • Global Food per capita reaches a peak around 2020, followed by a rapid decline

      • Global Services per capita reaches a peak around 2020, followed by a rapid decline

      • Global population reaches a peak in 2030, followed by a rapid decline

    2. Growth trends existing in 1972 could be altered so that sustainable ecological and economic stability could be achieved.

    3. The sooner the world’s people start striving for the second outcome above, the better the chance of achieving it.

    Few reports have generated as much debate, discussion and disagreement. Though it’s hard to argue that its forecasts made back in the early 1970s have proved eerily accurate over the ensuing decades.

    But most of its warnings have been largely ignored by policymakers hoping (blindly?) for a rosier future.

    One of the original seventeen researchers involved in The Limits To Growth study, Dennis Meadows, joins us for the podcast this week. Fifty years later, what does he foresee ahead?

    Decline is now inevitable.

    We’re without any question moving into the remainder of a century which is going to see, by the end of these decades, a much smaller population, much lower level of energy and material consumption and so forth.

    Whether we retain equity amongst people and avoid the more violent forms of conflict remains to be seen. But sustainable development is no longer an option.

    This is one of the most important discussions we’ve ever recorded among the hundreds produced over the past decade.

    Click the play button below to listen to Chris’ interview with Dennis Meadows (55m:24s).


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 19:45

  • China Crackdown On Bitcoin Miners Sparks Concern 
    China Crackdown On Bitcoin Miners Sparks Concern 

    China has been raiding Bitcoin miners who’ve been illegally using electricity — presents a significant danger since so much of the world’s hash rate is concentrated in one country, reported Asia Times

    A recent interview with Ethan Pierse, director of the CryptoAssets Institute, said a recent government crackdown on mining facilities was due to miners illegally using electricity. By law, miners have to register with the government to use large amounts of power. Since electricity is so cheap, miners from around the world have flocked to China. 

    Pierse said, “People are going around that even still and tapping into electricity where they can and siphoning that off. So basically, they see that and monitor that there are weird peaks of electricity usage in places, and they go and track it down. One miner’s using the same electricity as a single household or dozens of households.”

    Pierse said 65% of the world’s hash rate is produced in China. He said the Siachen region is responsible for 50% of that. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If any network disruption occurred in China, it would be very problematic for the global Bitcoin network.

    Pierse said, “If you’re basing your economy or if you’re trying any kind of monetary policy to anything, whether it’s bitcoin or eventually other things, and the mining of that particular cryptocurrency is controlled this much by another government, more or less their ability to shut that down in and of itself can cause severe economic problems for governments or large corporations or other platforms that are leveraging this.”

    In June, China’s Bitcoin miners controlled 60% of the global hash rate, and now the figure is up to 65% in December.

    Chris Bendkisen, head of research at CoinShares, believes the rapid increase in the Chinese share of hash rate could be due to the deployment of advanced mining technology and cheap electricity. 

    “This is beneficial to the Chinese mining industry,” said Bendiksen. “If you are the first to increase your proportion of the hash rate, and you can do that before your competitors, that’s generally good.”

    Mining crypto has become more difficult over the last several years as profitability sags. The overall Bitcoin hash rate has risen 80% since June, which in recent times, has created stronger profitability for miners who have access to cheap electricity.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With China controlling more and more of the world’s Bitcoin hash rate, some worry that the US could be falling behind the crypto curve, as Beijing is making a state effort to be a leader in blockchain.

    Other top mining hubs are in the US, Russia, and Kazakhstan.

    China could be laying the groundwork for a state-backed digital currency in the mid-2020s as it wants to become a leader in crypto in the intermediate timeframe.

    The danger at play is that there’s too much hash rate concentrated in China and could lead to global network issues if disruptions in the country were seen. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 19:25

  • What Do They Know? US And Russia Both Developing Plans To Deal With Incoming Asteroids
    What Do They Know? US And Russia Both Developing Plans To Deal With Incoming Asteroids

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    When the Russians take decisive action, it is usually for a reason. As you will see below, the Russians have suddenly decided that now is the time to create an organization that will be tasked with detecting, tracking and potentially destroying incoming asteroids. Are they doing this now because they have finally decided that this is a good idea, or has something gotten their attention? Of course they are not likely to publicly admit if they have come to the conclusion that a gigantic space rock is heading directly toward us. Just like the U.S. government, the Russian government is very interested in maintaining social order, and so they would probably delay telling the public about a potential asteroid impact for as long as possible.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In life, what people do is far more important than what they say, and the new center that the Russians have just created will not just be watching giant space rocks. According to Futurism, this new organization will be in charge of making sure “they don’t collide with Earth”…

    Russian space agency Roscosmos is creating a center devoted to monitoring meteors, comets, and asteroids to ensure they don’t collide with Earth — even it means having to blow them up in space.

    “As part of the creation of a monitoring system and information support for the safety of space activities in near-Earth space, we plan to launch the Russian Center for Small Celestial Bodies, whose main task will be to detect and track celestial bodies approaching Earth,” Igor Bakaras, a senior official at Roscosmos subsidiary TsNIIMash, told Russian-owned news agency Sputnik.

    Certainly nobody can fault the Russians for allocating resources toward this purpose.

    Our solar system is full of potentially dangerous giant space rocks, and a big enough impact could literally end our civilization.

    But why now?

    According to a British news source, this new organization will be evaluating whether it is better “to destroy celestial objects or steer them on to new trajectories and away from Earth”…

    Roscosmos, the Russian equivalent of Nasa, wants to work out if it’s possible to destroy celestial objects or steer them on to new trajectories and away from Earth.

    This could involve slamming a ‘kinetic impactor’ craft in the rock or using a satellite to drag it onto a new course. Nukes could also be sent into space to blow up the rocks.

    A new department at Roscosmos called the Russian Centre for Celestial Bodies will be tasked with looking into space to find comets and asteroids approaching Earth.

    Once again, nobody can argue with the value of such a major project, but isn’t NASA already doing all this?

    Couldn’t the Russians just sit back and let us Americans do all the work?

    I wish someone would ask Vladimir Putin that question.

    And this sudden move by the Russians comes just one year after the U.S. issued a “National Near-Earth Object Preparedness Strategy and Action Plan”

    In 2018, The White House Office of Science and Technology Policy released a new report titled the “National Near-Earth Object Preparedness Strategy and Action Plan”.

    The 18-page document outlines the steps that NASA and the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) will take over the next 10 years to both prevent dangerous asteroids from striking Earth and prepare the country for the potential consequences of such an event.

    Maybe U.S. officials suddenly decided last year that having a plan for incoming giant space rocks was a great idea, and maybe the Russians decided that it was such a great idea that they should copy us.

    Or maybe both governments know something that they aren’t telling us yet.

    Of course the truth is that NASA has not even identified most of the giant space rocks that are floating around out there. For example, back in July a very large asteroid came very close to hitting us

    A 427-foot-wide asteroid whizzed within 45,000 miles of Earth on Thursday.

    While that may sound far away, 45,000 miles is what astronomers consider a close shave: It’s less than 20% of the distance between Earth and the moon. This was the closest we’ve come to an “Armageddon”-like scenario in at least a few years.

    If that asteroid had actually hit our planet, it would have been the worst disaster that any of us have ever seen by a very wide margin.

    And according to leaked emails, officials at NASA only knew about it the day before it whizzed by us

    Travelling at 55,000mph and measuring 426 feet by 187ft (130m x 57m), NASA only realised 2019 OK was coming 24 hours before it passed.

    Experts say that had it hit, it would have devastated an entire city like London with over 30 times the energy of the atomic blast at Hiroshima.

    So the truth is that we could be hit by a giant space rock at any time, and none of us may have any idea that it is even coming.

    With that being said, there are a couple of enormous asteroids that scientists do know about that could potentially be major problems over the next decade.

    The first one that I want to discuss is 2007 FT3. That is not a fancy name, and not that much is known about the asteroid, but apparently there is a chance that it “might hit the planet on Oct. 2, 2024”

    In the case of 2007 FT3, Sentry reported that the asteroid could hit Earth between the years 2024 and 2116. During these years, Sentry recorded a total of 164 potential Earth impacts caused by the asteroid. As noted by the monitoring system, there’s a chance that 2007 FT3 might hit the planet on Oct. 2, 2024.

    By the way, Rosh Hashanah begins on the evening of October 2nd, 2024. I don’t know if that is important, but I thought I would throw that out there.

    According to NASA, this asteroid would hit at a speed of approximately 46,000 miles per hour, and it would “create a crater that’s several miles long”

    Based on the data collected by Sentry, the asteroid has an estimated diameter of about 1,115 feet, which makes it almost as tall as the Empire State Building. The monitoring system noted that it could breach Earth’s atmosphere and hit the planet at a velocity of around 46,000 miles per hour.

    Given the asteroid’s speed and size, it is certainly capable of causing high levels of destruction if it ends up colliding with Earth. Upon impact, it would create a crater that’s several miles long. The energy that will be released from the asteroid’s explosion would be powerful enough to level an entire city as well as its neighboring areas.

    2007 FT3 is not getting much publicity at all, but a slightly larger asteroid that could potentially hit us in 2029 is getting far more attention.

    On April 13th, 2029, it is being projected that Apophis will pass by our planet at a distance that is “ten times closer than the moon”. The following comes from Wikipedia

    The closest known approach of Apophis comes on April 13, 2029, when the asteroid comes to within a distance of around 31,000 kilometres from Earth’s surface. The distance, a hair’s breadth in astronomical terms, is ten times closer than the moon, and even closer than some man-made satellites.[23] It will be the closest asteroid of its size in recorded history. On that date, it will become as bright as magnitude 3.1[22] (visible to the naked eye from rural as well as darker suburban areas, visible with binoculars from most locations).[24] The close approach will be visible from EuropeAfrica, and western Asia. During the approach, Earth will perturb Apophis from an Aten-class orbit with a semi-major axis of 0.92 AU to an Apollo-class orbit with a semi-major axis of 1.1 AU.

    NASA insists that it will not actually hit us, but other independent researchers are skeptical.

    And if Apophis doesn’t hit us then, NASA has listed ten other future dates when it potentially could

    • April 12, 2060

    • April 11, 2065

    • April 12, 2068

    • October 10, 2068

    • April 13, 2076

    • April 13, 2077

    • April 13, 2078

    • October 10, 2089

    • April 13, 2091

    • April 14, 2103

    Over in Russia, they are so concerned about this asteroid that they have “developed intercontinental ballistic missiles that aim to destroy asteroid Apophis”

    In what sounds like an elevator pitch for an Armageddon sequel, Russian scientists announced that they’ve developed intercontinental ballistic missiles that aim to destroy asteroid Apophis, which is going to swing by Earth in 2036.

    Also referred to as 99942 Apophis, it measures 210-330 meters (690-1080 feet) in diameter. According to a Slate article by astronomer Phil Plait an encounter with Earth would mean not so fun times for our planet; “it would release the energy equivalent to more than 1 billion tons of TNT exploding, at least 20 times more than the largest nuke ever detonated!”

    Russian scientists have also warned that Apophis could have “hundreds of opportunities to hit the Earth over the course of the next century”.

    But for now, both American and Russian scientists are assuring us that everything is just fine and that there is no reason to panic.

    Do you believe them?

    Maybe they are telling us the truth.

    Maybe there is nothing to be concerned about at all.

    But of course both governments have a long track record of being loose with the truth, and it wouldn’t be much of a surprise at all if they weren’t exactly being straight with us.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 19:05

  • Demographic Armageddon: Japan's Births Drop To Lowest Since 1874 As Deaths Hit Highest Since World War II
    Demographic Armageddon: Japan's Births Drop To Lowest Since 1874 As Deaths Hit Highest Since World War II

    Japan’s demographic Armageddon made another entry in the history books this week when Japan’s welfare ministry estimated that in 2019, Japan’s population organically shrank by 512,000 people this year compared to 2018. That’s a drop of more than the entire population of the city of Atlanta.

    While Japan’s demographic doom is well-known, its severity has taken on a breathless haste in recent years with births in the country — which are expected to drop below 900,000 this year — are at their lowest figure since 1874 according to the NYT, when the population was about 70% smaller than its current 124 million.

    Meanwhile, as Japan’s birthrate collapses, the total number of deaths is accelerating with every passing year, and in 2019 the figure is expected to reach almost 1.4 million, 60% more than the number of births, and the highest level since the end of World War II, a rise driven by the country’s increasingly elderly population.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That gap between births and deaths, which has risen above half a million for the first time ever, has put Japan on the path to demographic destruction and deflationary doom, because in a country that shrinks by over half a million people each year, economic concepts such as resource scarcity become increasingly quaint.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, as the number of births goes down, there are fewer young people entering its work force. That means fewer people to replace retiring workers and support them as they age, a situation that poses a serious threat to Japan’s economic vitality and the security of its social safety net – although, as we noted previously, Japan is not even in the Top 10 list of nations with the heaviest retiree burden; that group is headed by Italy, Greece and France.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Japan is not the only country having to cope with a shrinking society. It’s not even the country with the lowest birthrate: That title, according to the NYT, goes to South Korea. Meanwhile, other countries — including China and the United States — also face declining birthrates, which could spell demographic trouble down the road.

    But Japan stands out in one specific way: it is the world’s grayest nation, with almost 28% of its residents over the age of 65.

    Japan reached it demographic tipping point over a decade ago, giving Tokyo ample opportunity to find a solution and address the effects of its declining population. The country has been consistently shrinking since 2007, when the country’s population dipped by around 18,000 people. Since then, however, the losses have accelerated, crossing the half-million mark this year for the first time. Across the nation, whole villages are vanishing as young people choose not to have children or move to urban areas in search of better employment opportunities (or they just happen to be close to the Fukushima radioactive wasteland).

    Unfortunately for Japan, it’s only going to get worse as there is no end to the decline in sight. The government estimates that the population could shrink by around 16 million people, nearly 13%, over the next 25 years.

    In seeking to stave off demographic armageddon, Japan has made efforts to push up its fertility rate defined as the average number of births per woman, from its current level of around 1.4 to a target of 1.8, although still short of the 2.1 considered necessary to hold the population steady. The government has moved to encourage births by increasing incentives for parents to have more children and reducing obstacles that might discourage those who want to.

    But like every other failed attempt by the state or economists to dictate behavior, the incentives have proved woefully insufficient as more people in Japan are putting off childbirth — or not having children at all — either to take advantage of economic opportunities or because they worry that economic opportunities do not exist and feel that they cannot afford children. Even for those who do want to be parents, the hurdles remain daunting.

    Demand for day care in the country far outstrips supply, making it difficult for working women to juggle careers and children. Meanwhile, working men who want to take advantage of the country’s generous paternity leave can find themselves stigmatized by an entrenched cultural belief that a man’s place is in the office, not in the home.

    If this wasn’t enough, the NYT also notes that adding to the government’s worries, marriage is also on the decline. The number of marriages dropped by 3,000 year-on-year to 583,000, according to the data released on Tuesday, part of a steep decline over the last decade.

    Ironically, the most practical solution, if only from a labor standpoint, is also a terminal one for Japan as a society: as births continue to drop, Japan has tried to promote robots as a supplement for its shrinking work force. The only problem: robots don’t vote, don’t pay taxes, and don’t have little robot children of their own.

    Finally, in an attempt to succeed where Germany, and Merkel’s “Open Door” policies failed, Japan has also committed to accepting limited numbers of immigrants to handle vital work such as caring for the elderly. This year the country began issuing more than a quarter-million visas to immigrants who will do such work. The only problem: the Japanese are notorious nationalists and tend to ostracize, mock and ridicule and gai jin to the point where nobody actually wants to stay in the notoriously closed-off society.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 18:45

  • David Stockman: Here's What A Fed Audit Could Really Reveal
    David Stockman: Here's What A Fed Audit Could Really Reveal

    Via InternationalMan.com,

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Man: Trump is calling for a weaker dollar and negative interest rates. What does this tell you about Trump’s understanding of economics?

    David Stockman: It tells you that he has no understanding of economics at all!

    I think Trump is not even a primitive when it comes to economic comprehension. His views are just plain stupid when it comes to exchange rates. He seems to think it’s some grand game of global golf, where the strongest player gets the lowest score.

    What sense does it make tweeting as he did recently in attacking the Fed?

    According to Trump, the US economy is so much better than the rest of the world’s economies, and therefore we should have the lowest interest rate as a result. It has nothing to do with economic logic or with principles related to sound money. I think he’s just thrashing about trying to create a warning that if things go badly, it’s the Fed’s fault.

    The whole narrative on the economy is wrong.

    The low unemployment rate is something he inherited. It’s the end of the longest business cycle in history—126 months.

    As the economy continues the inch forward, the inventory of excess labor goes down. The unemployment rate, even as badly measured as it is by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), inherently goes lower. He didn’t have anything to do with it.

    In fact, if you look at the first 33 job reports under President Trump, the average gains have been 190,000 a month. During the last 33 reports under President Obama, it was 225,000 a month.

    There has been no acceleration. There has been no improvement. It’s a running out of the business cycle, even as the foundation underneath has been made worse and worse by Trump’s trade policies and a really insane fiscal policy of driving the deficit to over a trillion dollars at the top of the business cycle.

    Even John Maynard Keynes himself said that you ought to try to balance the budget and even generate a surplus at the top of the cycle.

    We’re right in the middle of the worst kind of economic policy in my lifetime, anyway—going back to the 1960s.

    Trump is completely clueless about how we got here, how he got here, and where we’re going.

    I’ve said many times that if you boast about it, you own it. He’s been boasting about the stock market, which is the greatest bubble in history. He’s been boasting about a business cycle that he inherited that’s got all kinds of rot underneath and that’s nearing its final days.

    All of that’s going to come home to roost, and I think it’s very likely to happen before the 2020 election.

    So the 2020 election is not all over except for the shouting, as a lot of people believe. In fact, the prospect that Elizabeth Warren gets the nomination on the Democratic side and becomes a serious contender to the Oval Office is very high. The irony is that it will ensure the stock market’s collapse and Trump‌’s defeat. He’s setting himself up for the worst possible outcome.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Man: The Fed recently said it could increase its tolerance for inflation before it considers raising interest rates. It would be a major policy shift. What’s really going on here?

    David Stockman: I think what’s going on is that they’re looking for another excuse to capitulate to Wall Street next time it has a hissy fit because it believes the Fed owes them another shot of stimulus and more liquidity.

    Let’s address the underlying issue now. The 2% inflation target is absurd to begin with. There is no historical or theoretical evidence to suggest that inflation at 2% is better for growth and prosperity than inflation at 1.5%, 1%, or even -1%.

    This is just made up, just like the money they created that’s been snatched from thin air, adopted as official policy in January 2012.

    It becomes a rolling excuse for running the printing press and accommodating both the politicians in Washington, D.C., who want low interest rates so that debts are cheap to finance and the gamblers on Wall Street who want low interest rates because they result in higher asset values and cheaper costs for carry trade speculators.

    The idea that we haven’t had enough inflation as it’s measured by one indicator—the Personal Consumption Expenditure (PCE) deflator—is kind of crazy for two reasons.

    First, there’s a lot of other inflation measures that say we easily achieved 2% inflation.

    The 16% trimmed-mean CPI is a very handy tool. It has the same CPI data at the product code level as that in the regular CPI, but in order to smooth out the monthly figure, it takes out the lowest and highest 16% of individual prices.

    It’s probably more accurate than CPI because it removes the outliers but puts them back in as soon as they reach the center of the distribution.

    The trimmed-mean CPI has averaged 2% since January 2012. During the last 12 months, it’s reached 2.34%, way over the Fed’s 2% target.

    There are lots of issues here.

    One of them is that there are many ways to measure inflation. Another issue is that you can’t scientifically measure inflation in a dynamic global economy like the one we’re in today.

    It’s just an average in some arbitrarily-weighted product categories that are way too complicated, even for the bureaucrats at the BLS.

    And third, even if you could measure it halfway accurately, which I seriously doubt, the Fed has no tools to achieve its targets anyway.

    The big swings of inflation are from commodity cycles and the global trading system, evidenced in oil prices, metal and materials prices, food and grain prices, and so forth. The Fed can’t do much about that.

    The point is, inflation targeting is one of the greatest efforts at misdirection that a government agency has ever concocted. This gives them a license to constantly intervene and meddle in the financial markets—pointlessly fiddling with the whole price structure of debt and equity assets.

    The less inflation there is, the better.

    They can’t target it to the second decimal point, and you can’t measure it anyway.

    The fact that they’re now saying, “Well, we don’t mean to target inflation on a monthly basis or quarterly or annual basis, it’s a cumulative basis from a day one,” indicates they are maybe starting from the Garden of Eden or something like that.

    It just shows you that they’ve backed themselves into a corner of illogic and stupidity, from which I don’t think there’s any exit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Man: There are increasing calls for central banks to combat climate change. The IMF, the European Central Bank, and several others have chimed in. What does this mean, and why are central bankers suddenly so keen on this topic?

    David Stockman: This is beyond stupid. What could the central banks possibly do to help the global economies adjust to climate change? Climate change may or may not be happening, and if it is, it’s due to planetary forces that central banks have absolutely no power to impact or counteract.

    In my view, it’s one of the many hoaxes going on. It does remind you of how far out modern Keynesian central banking has become. They only have one tool: they can try to falsify interest rates, and they do that by injecting flat credit and liquidity into the market.

    That’s all they can do. They have no other ability to drive the $85 trillion global economy, or the $21 trillion domestic economy.

    They have a crude instrument. As they say, when your only instrument is a hammer, everything looks like a nail. That’s the case with the Fed.

    The only thing they can do is inflate financial asset prices on Wall Street and other financial markets. If they can’t even drive the macroeconomy to hit their inflation targets, how are they going to redirect the macroeconomy to use more green energy?

    It’s so idiotic that it doesn’t merit any further discussion.

    These central banks are the all-time champions at mission creep.

    They have added mission after mission, including inflation at 2%, as they measure it, and now they want another mandate. They want another reason to enhance their power. When already, they are the most powerful state institutions in the world, and they’re in the process of wrecking prosperity everywhere.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Man: If Rand Paul finally gets his audit of the Federal Reserve, what do you think they’ll find?

    David Stockman: What he’s going to find is just more detail on the absurdities of what they’re doing already.

    I think one that you would look into is this policy called Interest on Excess Reserves (IOER). They targeted that number at 1.55% right now. There’s about $1.5 trillion of excess reserves in the banking system.

    So, they’re paying out to the banks upwards of $23 billion a year in order to keep excess funds on deposit at the Fed, rather than putting it to work in the macroeconomy.

    How stupid is that?

    They are blindly fixated on commanding the money market rate. The Federal Funds Market has disappeared. Ben Bernanke basically destroyed that. There’s nothing left there.

    Since they know that the federal funds rate is pretty much nothing in the broad money markets—which are dominated by the repo markets, they have come up with IOER to show that they can make an interest rate happen.

    It’s crazy. This is what you get from modern central banks.

    We have to ask, why don’t they just get out of the way and let those reserves either stay on deposit at the Fed, or let them flow into the repo market, the money market, or the commercial paper market?

    So, that’s one area that a thorough audit of the Fed could get at.

    The second one that I think would be even more interesting, if it were done properly, is to recognize that they’ve created a bloated balance sheet. They’re back at it again—it peaked at $4.5 trillion from a base of $900 billion, at the time of the crisis in 2008.

    They rolled it back a little bit under the short-lived Quantitative Tightening (QT).

    The minute the stock market had a moderate hissy fit last fall and last Christmas, they immediately dropped the project, announced the end of QT in August, and started back the other way.

    So, now they’re back up to $4 trillion and rising rapidly.

    The reason I’m mentioning this is that you have $4 trillion of assets at work earning the interest rates that Uncle Sam is paying on 10-year paper, the interest rates that Freddie Mac and Fanny Mae are paying on their longer-term securities—all of this money is coming into the Fed.

    The cost of their liabilities is practically nothing because they’ve been created from thin air by hitting the button on the digital printing press. Other than the $23 billion that they’re paying out in this phony IOER scheme, basically, they have cost-free liabilities, and a $4 trillion balance sheet that is earning interest.

    Now, the reason I’m bringing this up is it brings in a massive profit. A lot of it that gets cycled back to the Treasury, which is another circular scheme of stupidity. But it also gets used for a big fat, juicy payroll, for some 20,000 people—including several thousand economists.

    It’s not only these people on the payroll, but there are all kinds of contract research they fund from the massive profits they generate from printing money. That means that a substantial share of the academic economists in the United States is on the payroll of the Federal Reserve. They lick the boots of the guy who’s signing the checks.

    The system is bad enough the way it is—between the political process, the dominance of statism, interventionism, and Keynesianism. But now, even the academic economists on the payroll are being paid to find that the Fed is doing a wonderful job and should be doing even more.

    If we have an audit, we ought to find out the name and serial number of every damn economist that’s on their payroll or that’s getting contract research and ignore them—because they’re saying what the master wants to hear.

    *  *  *

    What could be the greatest bubble in history is reaching its final days. President Trump’s call for a weaker US dollar and negative interest rates is a last ditch effort to keep the party going. The whole financial system could come crumbling down much faster than most people think. That’s exactly why NY Times bestselling author Doug Casey and his team just released an urgent report on how to survive and thrive during an economic collapse. Click here to download the PDF now.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 18:25

  • Warren Campaign Sounds The Alarm As Q4 Fundraising Total Plunges 30%
    Warren Campaign Sounds The Alarm As Q4 Fundraising Total Plunges 30%

    Elizabeth Warren’s campaign is losing fundraising steam just days after ridiculing Mayor Pete Buttigieg for raising money from billionaires. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At least that’s the tone coming from an email she sent supporters on Friday. Warren, who ironically spent the last Democratic debate trying to distance herself from Buttigieg’s fundraising tactics, disclosed that it has only raised $17 million in the fourth quarter, marking a significant drop from her fundraising totals in the third quarter.

    “So far this quarter, we’ve raised a little over $17 million. That’s a good chunk behind where we were at this time last quarter,” her e-mail says, according to CNBC

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the third quarter, her campaign brought in $24.6 million, far more than most other candidates, including Joe Biden and Buttigieg.

    Warren’s momentum in the Democratic primary race has slowed in recent months, as she has fallen behind Joe Biden, who now leads the field of candidates. The plunge in fundraising also comes after Warren escalated her attacks on billionaires like Leon Cooperman and Mike Bloomberg, who she has accused of “trying to buy” the nomination.

    Warren said during the last debate to Mayor Buttigieg: “So, the Mayor just recently had a fundraiser that was held in a wine cave full of crystals and served $900 a bottle wine. Think about who comes to that. He had promised that every fundraiser he would do would be open door but this one was closed door. We made the decision many years ago that rich people in smoke filled rooms would not pick the next President of the United States.”

    You can watch Warren spar with Buttigieg at the last debate here:


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 18:05

  • Deplorables Versus The Ruling Class: A Global Struggle
    Deplorables Versus The Ruling Class: A Global Struggle

    Authored by Chet Richards via The American Thinker blog,

    Consider the age of monarchs.  Squabbling barons select a supreme ruler – a king or an emperor — to suppress the squabbling.  Peace and prosperity return to the land.  The king makes policy but he can’t do everything.  His minions take care of the details. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Minions mean bureaucracy.   The bureaucracy grows.  The king grows old and dies.  The dynasty continues.  The bureaucracy continues – always continues, and always grows.  The bureaucracy becomes an establishment kingdom unto itself.  The bureaucracy grows in power and serves its own interests.  The king diminishes in power.  The land grows restless under the increasing regulatory tyranny and taxes.  Legitimacy – what the Chinese called the “mandate of heaven” –  is lost and so is the dynasty.

    Change the names and we are at the end of a similar cycle – a cycle that began with the guillotine.  This time it is a world-wide cycle.  The modern king is a modern tyrant – Stalin, Hitler, Mao were the worst.

    The socialist idea had been kicking around since the 18th century.  This seemingly plausible notion shaped the various Marxist evils of the 20th century.  The Soviet Union, Mao’s China, Nazism, Fascism, and today’s imperious European Union, are all socialist tyrannies of one degree or another.

    Bureaucratic agencies become ideal tools for tyrants.  A tyrant can point his agencies in a particular direction and unleash them.  They immediately glory in their new power.  Horrors ensue.  Nazi Germany gave us the Holocaust and war.  Stalin used betrayal.  Friends betrayed friends.  Children spied on parents.  During the Soviet show trials of the 1930’s Stalin’s innocent victims were forced to falsely confess in order to save the lives of their families.  Fear reigns. 

    Sound familiar?  How about the FBI inducing General Flynn to plead guilty in order to protect his son?  Mao injected dark comedy by unleashing hordes of children to humiliate their elders.  No one was safe.  Fear reigns.  Sound familiar?  Antifa anyone?  Black Lives Matter anyone?  Greta anyone?  Mao lives!

    The United States has become an undemocratic administrative state as well, but only by happenstance.  In this country Congress has ceded much of its power to unchecked regulatory agencies, allowing them to write their own laws — regulations which enable them to prosecute, and persecute, anyone who might stand in an agency’s way.  The agencies are powers unto themselves — judge, jury, and arresting police altogether.  Innocents are often victims.

    It isn’t just the regulatory, or administrative, state that is the problem.  There is a growing sense that something is terribly wrong throughout society – throughout progressive liberal society, that is.  How about needles in the street?  How about sanctuary cities, counties and states?  How about the ruins of Detroit?  How about the weekly slaughter in Chicago?  How about suppression of free speech in academia?  How about the corrupt liberal media?  How about big tech bias and censorship?  It seems that our governments, and our intellectual establishments both, no longer serve the average citizen.  They serve only a leftist political ideology, and themselves.

    Worst of all, the political ideology that the establishment promotes is antithetical to the native ideology of America.  America was founded as a society with spiritual values.  True America is a society where the family is paramount.  It is a society where a person is rewarded in proportion to his contribution.  It is a society devoted to the individual where the individual is inherently free because his rights derive from the Creator not from the government.  The purpose of government, according to the American ideology, is to serve the individual, not to be his master.  The collection of individuals is to be the master of the government.  This is classical liberalism – now a conservative ideal.  It is the opposite of “progressive liberalism.”

    The true American ideology cautions against granting power to any bureaucratic establishment.  In its ever increasing hunger for power the establishment has gravitated to an alien progressive ideology – an ideology of ever bigger government and government control.  But the bossy progressive Left increasingly forbids Americans to be Americans.

    Political turmoil is the consequence.  The barons are squabbling.  The Left openly advocates overthrowing the Constitution.  The Right counters with Donald Trump.  The Left politically assassinates him with impeachment.  The Right, with centrist allies, will reelect him anyway.  The Mandate of Heaven has been removed from the elitist establishment.  It is passing to the Deplorables.

    It isn’t just in America.  The world as a whole is pivoting.  The dogmatic socialist established order is ending.  We enter the age of the Deplorables.  The Deplorables are ascending in America, with Trump, in Britain with Brexit, in Hong Kong, in much of Europe, in Latin America, in Iran.  Deplorables are the antidote to arrogant globalist socialists.  Deplorables everywhere say “from now on we will make our own decisions.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hong Kong Deplorables protest extradition bill (credit: Studio Incendo)

    What is it with the Deplorables?  What gives them such power? 

    Three things, I believe, are elevating them. 

    Deplorables are pragmatic They are not wedded to any extreme ideology.  Deplorables will go with anything that works.  It is no wonder that the Deplorables began in America.  For, as Americans we inherit the pragmatism of our pioneering ancestors.

    Second, the Deplorables adhere to the original American ideology of free individuals.  They reject the concentration of government power that has accumulated over the past century.

    The third energizer is a technological miracle – the internet.  Establishments everywhere fear the internet.  And properly so.  For the first time we can instantly communicate across the world.  We can find like-minded people everywhere.  We have discovered just how very many people agree with us.

    It follows that Deplorables are no longer just an American phenomenon, the phenomenon resonates with people everywhere.  People around the world are much the same.  They value their traditions and customs.  They value their families, their values, their spiritual heritage.  They value their nation.  They resent the imposition of intrusive government by strangers, by bureaucratic globalists.  They are becoming Deplorables.

    Born in the still free parts of America, this new movement seems destined to chart the course for the whole world — for this century and beyond.

    The Mandate of Heaven no longer rests with the condescending progressive bureaucratic establishment.  It is passing back to the people.  It is passing to Deplorables everywhere in the world.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 12/27/2019 – 17:45

    Tags

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 27th December 2019

  • Is There A Future For Russian Aircraft Carriers?
    Is There A Future For Russian Aircraft Carriers?

    Via The Saker blog,

    Those following the news from Russia have probably heard that Russia’s only aircraft carrier, the Admiral Kuznetsov (official name: Admiral of the Fleet of the Soviet Union Kuznetsov), was put into dry dock for major repairs and retrofits. Things did not go well. 

    First, the dry dock sank (it was Russia’s biggest) and then a huge crane came crashing down on the deck. And just to make it even worse, a fire broke out on the ship killing 2 and injuring more.  With each setback, many observers questioned the wisdom of pouring huge sums of money into additional repairs when just the scheduled ones would cost a lot of money and take a lot of time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Actually, the damage from the fire was not as bad as expected.  The damage from the crane was, well, manageable.  But the loss of the only huge floating dry dock is a real issue: the Kuznetsov cannot be repaired elsewhere and these docks cost a fortune.

    But that is not the real problem.

    The real problem is that there are major doubts amongst Russian specialists as to whether Russia needs ANY aircraft carriers at all.

    How did we get here?

    A quick look into the past

    During the Soviet era, US aircraft carriers were (correctly) seen as an instrument of imperial aggression.  Since the USSR was supposed to be peaceful (which, compared to the USA she was, compared to Lichtenstein, maybe less so) why would she need aircraft carriers?  Furthermore, it is illegal to transit from the Black Sea to the Mediterranean through the Bosphorus with an aircraft carrier and yet the only shipyard in the USSR which could built such a huge ship was in Nikolaev, on the Black Sea.  Finally, the Soviets were acutely aware of how vulnerable US aircraft carriers are to missile attacks, so why built such an expensive target, especially considering that the Soviet Union had no AWACS (only comparatively slow, small and much less capable early warning helicopters) and no equivalents to the F-14/F-18 (only the frankly disappointing and short range Yak-38s which would be very easy prey for US aircraft).

    Eventually, the Soviets did solve these issues, somewhat.  First, they created a new class of warships, the “heavy aircraft carrying cruiser”: under the flight deck, these Soviet aircraft carriers also held powerful anti-ship missiles (however, this was done at the cost of capacity under the deck: a smaller wing and smaller stores).  Now, they could legally exit the Black Sea.  Next, they designed a very different main mission for their “heavy aircraft carrying cruiser”: to extend the range of Russian air defenses, especially around so called “bastion” areas where Russian SSBNs used to patrol (near the Russian shores, say the Sea of Okhotsk or the northern Seas).  So while the Soviet heavy aircraft carrying cruiser were protecting Russian subs, they themselves were protected by shore based naval aviation assets.  Finally, they created special naval variants for their formidable MiG-29s and Su-27s.  As for the AWACS problem, they did nothing about it at all (besides some plans on paper).  The collapse of the USSR only made things worse.

    The Soviets also had plans for a bigger, nuclear, aircraft carriers, and on paper they looked credible, but they never made it into production. These supposed “super carriers” would also come with a truly “super” price…

    So how good was/is the Kuznetsov?

    Well, we will probably never find out.  What is certain, however, is that she is no match for the powerful U.S. carriers, even their old ones, and that the USA has always been so far ahead of the USSR or Russia in terms of carriers and carrier aviation that catching up was never a viable option, especially not when so many truly urgent programs needed major funding.  Did the Kuznetsov extend the range of Russian air defenses?  Yes, but this begs the question of identity of the “likely adversary”.  Not the USA: attacking Russian SSBNs would mean total war, and the U.S. would be obliterated in a few short hours (as would Russia).  I don’t see any scenario in which US ASuW/ASW assets would be looking for Russian SSBNs anywhere near the Russian coasts anyway, this would be suicidal.  What about smaller countries?  This is were the rationalizations become really silly.  One Russian (pretend) specialist even suggested the following scenario: the Muslim Brotherhood in Egypt takes power, thousands of Russian tourists are arrested and the Islamists demand that Russia give full sovereignty over to all Muslim regions of Russia, if not: then hundreds of Russians will get their throats slit on Egyptian TV.  Can you guess how an aircraft carrier would help in this situation?

    Well, according to this nutcase, the Russian carrier would position itself off the Egyptian coast, then the Russians would send their (pretty small!) air-wing to “suppress Egyptian air defenses” and then the entire Pskov Airborne Division would be somehow (how?!?!?!) be airlifted to Egypt to deal with the Ikhwan and free the Russian hostages.

    It makes me wonder what this specialist was smoking!

    Not only does it appear that the Egyptians are currently in negotiations with Moscow to acquire 24+ brand new Su-35s (which can eat the Russian airborne aircraft for breakfast and remain hungry for more), but even without these advanced multi-role & air superiority fighters the rest of the Egyptian air defenses would be a formidable threat for the relatively old and small (approx.: 18x Su-33; 6x MiG-29K; 4x Ka-31; 2x Ka-27) Russian airwing.  As for airlifting the entire 76th Guards Air Assault Division – Russia simply does not have the kind of transport capabilities to allow it to do that (not to mention that Airborne/Air Assault divisions are NOT trained to wage a major counterinsurgency war by themselves, in a large and distant country).  Theories like these smack more of some Russian version of a Hollywood film than of the plans of the General Staff of Russia.

    Back to the real world now

    Frankly, the Kuznetsov was a pretty decent ship, especially considering its rather controversial design and the appalling lack of maintenance.  She did play an important role in Syria, not thanks to her airwing, but to her powerful radars.  But now, I think that it is time to let the Kuznetsov sail into history: pouring more money in this clearly antiquated ship makes no sense whatsoever.

    What about new, modern, aircraft carriers?

    The short answer is: how can I declare that the USN has no rational use left for its aircraft carriers and also say that the Russian case is different and that Russia does need one or perhaps several such carriers?  The USN is still several decades ahead of modern Russia in carrier operations, and (relatively) poor and (comparatively) backward Russia (in naval terms) is going to do better?  I don’t think so.

    Then, there is one argument which, in my opinion, is completely overlooked: while it is probably true that a future naval version of the Su-57s (Su-57K?) would be more than a match for any US aircraft, including the flying brick also knows as F-35, Russia STILL has nothing close to the aging but still very effective carrier-capable USN Northrop Grumman E-2 Hawkeye.  Yes, Russians have excellent radars and excellent airframes, but it is one thing to have the basic capabilities and quite another to effectively integrate them.  As always, for Russia, there is the issue of cost.  Would it make sense to finance an entire line of extremely costly aircraft for one (or even a few) aircraft carriers?

    We need to keep in mind that while Russia leads the world in missile technology (including anti-shipping missiles!), there are many countries nowadays who have rather powerful anti-ship missiles too, and not all are so friendly to Russia (some may be at present, but might change their stance in the future).  Unless Russia makes a major move to dramatically beef-up her current capabilities to protect a high-value and very vulnerable target like a hypothetical future aircraft carrier, she will face the exact same risks as all other countries with aircraft carriers currently do.

    A quick look into the future

    Hypersonic and long range missiles have changed the face of naval warfare forever and they have made aircraft carriers pretty much obsolete: if even during the Cold War the top of the line U.S. carriers were “sitting ducks”, imagine what any carrier is today?  The old saying, “shooting fish in a barrel” comes to mind.  Furthermore, what Russia needs most today are, in my opinion, more multi-role cruise missile and attack submarines SSN/SSGN (like the Yasen), more diesel-electric attack submarines SSK (like the Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky), more advanced patrol boats/frigates (like the Admiral Kasatonov), more small missile ships/corvettes (like the Karakurt), more large assault ships (like the Petr Morgunov) and many, many, more.

    As for aircraft carriers, they are not needed any more to extend the (already formidable) Russian air defenses and in the power-projection role (operations far from Russia), the Russian Navy does not have the capabilities to protect any carrier far away from home shores.

    Which leaves only three possible roles:

    1) “Showing the flag”, i.e. make port calls to show that Russia is as “strong” and “advanced” as the US Navy. Two problems with that: i) the USN is decades ahead of Russia in carrier operations and 2) there are MUCH cheaper way to show your muscle (the Tu-160 does a great job of that).

    2) “Retaining the carrier know-how”.  But for what purpose?  What naval strategy? What mission?  Russia is the nation that made aircraft carriers obsolete – why should she ignore her own force planning triumphs?

    3) Prestige and $$$ allocation to select individuals and organizations within and next to the Russian Navy.  Since Russia does not have a money-printing-press or criminally bloated budgets, she simply cannot afford the capital outlay either for the Russian Navy, or for the nation of Russia, just to fill the pockets of some interested parties.

    Conclusion:

    If I have missed something, please correct me.  I don’t see any role for carriers in the future Russian Navy.  That is not to say that I am sure that they won’t be built (there are constant rumors about future Russian “super” carriers, no less!), but if they are built, I believe that it will be for all the wrong reasons.

    The plight of the Kuznetsov might be blessing for Russia.  She was a good ship (all in all), but now she should be viewed as an object lesson to (hopefully) kill any plans to build more carriers for the Russian Navy.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 23:55

  • The 20 Best-Performing Stocks Of The Decade
    The 20 Best-Performing Stocks Of The Decade

    Hindsight is 20/20. It can be incredibly difficult to pick the “next big stock” in the moment, but, as Visual Capitalist’s Jenna Ross notes, looking back gives us clarity on where we could have reaped the highest rewards. While some of the decade’s chart-toppers – like Netflix and Amazon – are household names, other stocks may come as a surprise.

    Today’s visualization reveals the best-performing stocks over the last 10 years, and shows how much an initial $100 investment would be worth today.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Shortlist

    To compile the list, MarketWatch reviewed the current S&P 500 constituents and excluded any stocks that have traded in their present form for less than 10 years. The remaining companies were sorted based on their total return, with reinvested dividends, from December 31, 2009 to December 5, 2019.

    So, which stocks come out on top? Here’s a full list of the top 20, organized by ranking:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note: The final value of a $100 investment is based on the total return, with reinvested dividends, from December 31, 2009 – December 5, 2019.

    In comparison, $100 in the S&P 500 index overall would have amounted to $344 over the same time period. Let’s take a closer look at these strong performers.

    Household Names

    Streaming giant Netflix takes the #1 spot. The company earned a staggering 3,767% return over the last ten years, meaning an initial $100 investment would now be worth almost $4,000. However, it remains to be seen whether Netflix’s first mover advantage will remain strong with new competitors entering the space.

    One such rival, Amazon, takes its spot at #10 in the best-performing stocks of the decade. From its humble roots as an online bookseller, the company has transformed into an ecommerce leader. CEO Jeff Bezos credits Amazon’s admirable success to three key customer-centric factors: listen, invent, and personalize.

    At #12 on the list, Constellation Brands—owner of several alcohol brands such as Corona—is also no stranger to invention. The company is protecting itself against cannabidiol (CBD) disruption with a $5 billion dollar investment in Canopy Growth, and future plans to create its own CBD-infused beverages.

    Other well-known names on the top 20 list include discount department store chain Ross Stores (#15) and the credit card company Mastercard (#17), with the latter benefiting from an oligopoly in the industry.

    Flying Under the Radar

    Apart from the names you’d expect to see, there are also some lesser-known companies that made the list.

    Well established among institutional investors and broker-dealers, MarketAxess Holdings takes the #2 spot. The fintech company operates a global electronic bond trading platform, vastly improving the process for investors who traditionally traded bonds “over-the-counter”.

    In third place, healthcare technology company Abiomed develops medical devices that provide circulatory support. The company’s Impella® device—the world’s smallest heart pump— has been used to treat over 50,000 U.S. patients.

    Fourth place company Transdigm Group gains its stronghold by developing specialized products for the aerospace industry. It has a strong acquisition strategy as well, having acquired over 60 businesses since its formation in 1993.

    A Sector View

    If we organize the top 20 by sector, information technology stocks appear in the list most frequently with five companies, followed by consumer discretionary (4 companies), and industrials and healthcare (3 companies each).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sectors with less representation in the top 20 are communication services (2 companies), as well as consumer staples, financials, and real estate (1 company each).

    The Bottom Line

    While these stocks have performed extremely well over the last decade, they are not necessarily the best portfolio additions today. Some companies may have become overvalued, or be facing new competition in their industry—as is the case with Netflix. It’s best to consider all current information when building a portfolio.

    However, the top 20 stocks do demonstrate the power of a buy-and-hold strategy. If you’re lucky enough to identify a winner early on, it’s possible to simply sit back and let your dollars grow.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 23:30

  • Beware, The Long Now
    Beware, The Long Now

    Authored by Ben Hunt via EpsilonTheory.com,

    The Long Now is everything we pull into the present from our future selves and our children.

    The Long Now is driven by the constant stimulus applied to our economy and the constant fear applied to our politics.

    The Long Now is personal.

    Tick-Tock

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Long Now is political.

    Make – Protect – Teach

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Long Now is micro.

    Wink

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Today’s note is on the macro structure of the Long Now.

    Today’s note is on the untethering of fundamental linkages between the economic policies that organize our social lives as investors and citizens.

    SNIP!

    Today’s note is on how we survive the Long Now. Because it won’t be easy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s George Clooney in Gravity, right before he ends up like this.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The spacewalking astronaut, risking the abyss with only a slim tether to life, is a powerful trope. Gravity was an entire movie about that frisson of fear we get from these images, although for my money it doesn’t get better than Frank Poole’s murder by HAL in 2001: A Space Odyssey, with the looong shot of the body tumbling uncontrollably through space. Because it’s not just the aloneness and abandonment that sparks our hard-wired emotional response here, but the out-of-controllness of being truly untethered.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We’ve got happy-ending movies that use this trope (The Martian), Russian movies that use this trope (Spacewalker), and even haunted-house-in-space movies that use this trope (Event Horizon). So you’ll forgive me if I’m going to use this imagery, too, because it’s the best story-telling device I know to instill in you the fear and loathing I feel when I think through the consequences of the Long Now.

    SNIP! is the Long Now’s destruction of the meaning of words that define our social connections.

    Words like “war”.

    This is a picture of the Predator drone firing a Hellfire missile.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s probably going to kill someone that we want dead, and almost certainly going to kill some other people that we don’t mind being dead … collateral damage and all that. As they say on Succession, you can’t make a Tomlette without breaking a few Greggs. This is war, and we fire these missiles all over the world, on the daily, both in countries we have officially invaded, like Afghanistan, and in countries we haven’t, like Pakistan and Yemen.

    But we have redefined war to NOT mean things like drone and cruise missile attacks, to NOT mean things like “observer” or “training” missions. We have redefined war to ONLY mean American troops being shot at.

    So politicians can speak the words “End the war in Country XYZ!” without actually meaning it. Because what they mean is preventing any American troops from being shot at. But the actual war of drones and missiles and killing … that continues. And it will continue forever in the Long Now.

    Words like “capitalism”.

    This is a picture of the billionaire CEO of a government-supported too-big-to-fail megabank, telling his 60 Minutes interviewer that he has no control over his compensation, as that’s determined by the CEO’s board of directors. Interestingly enough, this is also a picture of the billionaire Chairman of that board.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And it’s not just the billionaire CEO bank manager. It’s his centimillionaire lieutenant bank managers. It’s the dozens of decamillionaire sub-lieutenant bank managers. All of them made generationally rich from stock-based compensation in a company where the government guarantees their success. None of them entrepreneurs. None of them risk-takers with their own skin in the game. All of them … lifer managers of a too-big-to-fail bank.

    But, hey, the stock is up! They’ve done a good job! What’s the problem, Ben?

    That’s exactly the problem. The problem is that we have redefined capitalism to mean “the stock is up”. We have redefined capitalism to NOT mean Smith’s invisible hand or Schumpeter’s creative destruction or productivity-enhancing and risk-taking investments in the real economy. We have redefined capitalism to ONLY mean financial asset price inflation in the here and now. By any means necessary. So that’s what we get. From the Fed, from the White House, from corporate management … that’s what we get in the Long Now … an endless series of policies and decisions in service to capitalism-as-financialization, where capital markets are maintained as a political utility.

    George Orwell, who called the Long Now an “endless present, where the Party is always right”, understood how the most powerful weapon of a totalitarian society is to control its language, so that War IS Peace, Freedom IS Slavery, and Ignorance IS Strength.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Why? Because control over the meaning of words is control over how we THINK. When we no longer remember what words mean, when we are TOLD over and over again a NEW meaning … we start to doubt ourselves. We start to doubt our own autonomy of mind. And that’s when they win.

    Iakov Guminer, Arithmetic of an alternative plan (1931)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the end the Party would announce that two and two made five, and you would have to believe it. It was inevitable that they should make that claim sooner or later: the logic of their position demanded it. Not merely the validity of experience, but the very existence of external reality, was tacitly denied by their philosophy. The heresy of heresies was common sense.

    And what was terrifying was not that they would kill you for thinking otherwise, but that they might be right.

    — George Orwell, 1984

    The Long Now is the Fiat World of reality by declaration, where we are TOLD that inflation does not exist, where we are TOLD that wealth inequality and meager productivity and negative savings rates just “happen”, where we are TOLD that we must vote for ridiculous candidates to be a good Republican or a good Democrat, where we are TOLD that we must buy ridiculous securities to be a good investor, and where we are TOLD that we must borrow ridiculous sums to be a good parent or a good citizen.

    And the most terrifying thing is that you start to think they might be right.

    Hey, maybe the whole Ukraine thing really is Trump “fighting corruption” and maybe the whole Saudi thing really is Trump “bringing the troops home”. Maybe the really important thing about Jeffrey Epstein is whether or not he committed suicide. Maybe we should really try some “democratic socialism” in 2020 … how bad could it be?

    Self-doubt is a biologically terrifying condition for a social animal like humans, and that’s why you see more and more of us becoming rhinoceroses. That’s why you see more and more well-meaning citizens willingly give over their autonomy of mind to the MAGA Train or the Bernie Bros … some sort of social Answer with a capital A … so that the torture of self-doubt can end.

    That’s why, in the end, Winston loved Big Brother.

    And make no mistake, the Answer is always totalitarian. Not merely authoritarian, but totalitarian. It brooks no dissent, in ANY aspect of your life. The Answer is a general closed-form solution, something we are hard-wired to want, but something that is impossible to find in a social system. Yes, this is the Three-Body Problem.

    Unfortunately, I believe that the totalitarian Long Now is going to get a lot worse before it gets any better. I believe that we are going to doubt ourselves in new and profound ways over the next decade. I believe that our common sense will become even more the heresy of heresies.

    Why?

    Because the Long Now has redefined the meaning of “taxes”.

    Because the tether between taxation and spending – the most important macroeconomic policy relationship for our lives as both investors and citizens – has been severed.

    Oh, I know that this snip-of-no-return doesn’t feel bad. Yet. In fact, it probably feels pretty darn good to you right now.

    Funny how fallin’ feels like flyin’ For a little while

    That’s from a song in the movie Crazy Heart, and that’s where we are right now. So yeah, you’re going to be told that 2 + 2 = 5, that it’s no big deal to cut the cord between taxes and spending, that in truth it’s good for you. And yeah, you’re going to start to think that they might be right.

    The redefinition of taxation and the severing of the Tether of Meaning between taxes and spending isn’t something that I think WILL happen. This is something that I know HAS happened. We’ve had a steady fraying of this cord for about two decades now, ever since Al Gore’s idea of a Social Security “lockbox” (where those taxes could ONLY be used for Social Security spending and paying down the existing debt)  was met with derision rather than acclaim by both parties. Yes, both parties. By steady fraying I mean over both Republican and Democrat administrations. The political beneficiaries of the fraying are different when it’s Republicans doing the snipping or Democrats doing the snipping, but the INTENT – to eliminate the tether between taxation and spending – is the same whether you’re George Bush or Barack Obama. Or Donald Trump. Destroying the relationship between taxation and spending is not a partisan thing. It’s a power thing. It’s a Management thing.

    I mean, there are still people who believe that the money they pay in Social Security taxes is their money, that they’ve purchased some sort of old age income insurance plan with their money, like an annuity where their money is invested somewhere to support that income down the road.

    But that’s a lie.

    In truth there is ZERO relationship between social security taxes and social security benefits today, other than sharing the words “social security”. In truth they are two entirely separate government programs, the former a regressive tax on workers that goes into the big pot of the annual budget and the latter a wealth transfer program to old people that comes out of that budget.

    SNIP!

    So for twenty years Republicans and Democrats have gone back and forth to steer taxation and spending to their political advantage, with divided government being the only thing to keep the tether intact. But divided government vanished with Donald Trump’s election, and as a result we got the 2017 Tax Cuts and (LOL) Jobs Act, which I think was the final cut.

    What did the TCJA do? It lowered taxes by trillions without reducing spending by a dime.

    The TCJA levered up the United States of America.

    Management levered up our country and used the proceeds to provide a windfall gain for corporations and the rich. You know … “returning capital to job creators”. In exactly the same way that Management might lever up a company and use the proceeds for a big stock buyback. You know … “returning capital to shareholders”.

    Both of these narratives – “returning capital to job creators” and “returning capital to shareholders” – had a truth to them, an important truth. I believed in the important truth of both of these narratives for most of my adult life! And yes, I’m using the past tense.

    Because in the Long Now, the meaning of both narratives has been perverted beyond all recognition.

    Both are now part and parcel of the Trickle-Down Lie, that the crumbs that fall off massa’s table are crumbs that you wouldn’t get otherwise, so let’s celebrate all those extra crumbs. Yay, crumbs!

    And yes, there’s an Epsilon Theory note or three for that.

    Pecking Order

    The pecking order is a social system designed to preserve economic inequality: inequality of food for chickens, inequality of wealth for humans. We are trained and told by Team Elite that the pecking order is not a real and brutal thing in the human species, but this is a lie. It is an intentional lie, formed by two powerful Narratives: trickle-down monetary policy and massive student debt financing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This Is Water

    Time to add a fourth shift in the Zeitgeist: capitalist productivity, now 200+ years old, is becoming capitalist financialization. Wall Street gets something to sell, management gets stock-based comp, the Fed gets a (very) grateful Wall Street, and the White House gets re-election.

    What do YOU get out of financialization? You get to hold up a card that says “Yay, capitalism!”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yeah, It’s Still Water

    One day we will recognize the defining Zeitgeist of the Obama/Trump years as an unparalleled transfer of wealth to the managerial class.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But if we’re no longer even pretending that taxes are necessary to support spending …

    If we agree that neither the Republicans nor the Democrats care about fiscal policy except as it advances their myopic political goals …

    Then what are taxes FOR?

    Yep, this is our George-Clooney-realizes-he-is-about-to-be-flung-into-outer-space moment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • In the Long Now, taxes are for … justice.

    • In the Long Now, taxes are for … equity.

    • In the Long Now, taxes are for … retribution.

    And what do those words mean?

    Whatever Management says they mean.

    Donald Trump has a vision of how to use taxes for HIS conception of justice, equity and retribution, a vision that – well, how about that! – advances his political power.

    The primary beneficiaries of the TCJA are large public companies, particularly the multinationals that dominate the S&P 500. For example, in each of the past two years, Amazon has availed itself of the deductions and deferrals and lower corporate rates created by the TCJA to be a “net-negative US Federal cash taxpayer”. In English, that means that in each of the past two years, the US Treasury has written checks of more than $100 million to Amazon out of YOUR tax dollars. I know you think I’m making this up, but check out Amazon’s 10-K. It’s all there.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And before you @ me, I am NOT saying that Amazon doesn’t pay taxes. What I am saying is that I really don’t care how much Amazon pays in taxes to freakin’ Ireland. What I am saying is that Amazon is cashing checks from the US government instead of writing checks. As the kids would say, let that sink in.

    How does this advance Trump’s political power? Because the windfall tax benefits that the TCJA created for large public companies like Amazon and Apple and Microsoft translate directly into higher stock prices. Because in Trump’s own words, “the stock market is my report card”. Because Trump realizes that you can politically argue to death whether the real economy is doing better or worse, but you can’t argue with a new high for the Dow Jones.

    What does it mean to transform capital markets into a political utility, and use the tax code to do it?

    This.

    Similarly, Bernie Sanders and Elizabeth Warren and No Malarkey Joe and Mayor Pete and all the rest have a vision of how to use taxes for THEIR conception of justice, equity and retribution, a vision that – well, how about that! – advances their political power.

    None of the “wealth tax” proposals you hear from the Left are being proposed to pay for anything in a budgetary sense. They are explicitly proposed so that the rich pay their “fair share”. In fact, when candidates make the mistake of expressing their wealth tax idea in a fiscal sense – as Elizabeth Warren did when she linked it to “paying for” Medicare-for-all – the narrative immediately shifts from “fairness” to “making the numbers add up” (Spoiler Alert: they don’t and they never will), and these candidates immediately take a hit in the polls.

    Bernie gets it. He doesn’t even pretend to make this about budgets. He realizes that the political popularity of the wealth tax has nothing to do with making the rich pay for a government program, and everything to do with making the rich pay for their sins. And yes, Bernie believes that great wealth is a sin. He believes that great wealth should not be allowed, not because it’s a source of unaccountable political power (my beef with great wealth), but because he believes it is fundamentally unfair. So do a lot of voters, maybe more than care about the Dow Jones.

    SNIP!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Feeling out of control yet? Wait, there’s more!

    If the meaning of spending is no longer constrained by taxation …

    Then what is spending FOR?

    In the Long Now, spending is ALSO for justice and equity and retribution … ALSO in whatever mode or measure fits the regime goals of whatever Management is in power at the time.

    I think that whoever is elected in 2020, we will see a $2 trillion spending plan enacted in 2021.

    If it’s a second term for Trump, it will be the 2021 Make America Great Again Act, and we will call them “Infrastructure Bonds”.

    If it’s a first term for a Democrat, it will be the 2021 Take Back America Act or something like that (I suppose if it’s President Biden we can hope for the 2021 No Malarkey Act, although I’m rooting for the 2021 OK, Boomer Act), and we will call them “Green Bonds”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In either case, I expect that the Fed will monetize at least half of the bond issuance. At least half.

    In either case, I expect that the primary corporate beneficiaries of the spending will be exactly the same. Exactly the same.

    And so here we are.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I believe there are no limits to the retributive and malicious use of taxation as a political weapon.

    I believe there are no limits to the retributive and malicious use of spending as a political reward.

    Sometimes those political weapons and rewards will be used by the rich and the old against the non-rich and the non-old, as we saw with the TJCA and Trump. Sometimes it will the other way around, as we will see the day after a Democrat takes the White House, whenever that might be.

    What’s to be done? Well, I suppose this is the point where I should tell you what I would do if I were given magic genie powers to change the world from the top down. And then you’d argue with me about my proposals and tell me what you would do if given magic genie powers.

    How about we not do that? I don’t have magic genie powers. And neither do you.

    It’s not that the severing of taxes from spending WILL happen. It’s not that the NEXT administration is going to make the cut. It’s ALREADY happened. It’s been happening for twenty years! This ship has sailed, and now there’s not a damn thing that you or I can do to turn it around. All we can do now is survive the voyage.

    When I started this note, I said I wanted to instill an emotion of fear and loathing in you from the realization that the meaning of taxes had become untethered from the meaning of government spending. That phrase – fear and loathing – is of course a catchphrase for Hunter S. Thompson, who used it in the titles of his best-known works … Fear and Loathing in Las VegasFear and Loathing on the Campaign Trail, etc. Thompson had lots of catchphrases, lots of mottos, lots of great quotes. My all-time favorite, though, is this:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When the going gets weird, the weird turn pro.

    I love it because there are so many plausible interpretations, and it just sounds so cool to take a tired inspirational quote about what to do when the going gets tough, blah blah blah … and turn it on its ear. Or foot, or whatever body part you think Thompson would have approved. Here’s what it means to ME.

    “The going gets weird” = an economic and political environment that no one alive has experienced.

    I think that the smiley-face totalitarian genie (and yes, I wrote ‘totalitarian’, not ‘authoritarian’) is going to be let out of the bottle as the meaning of taxes becomes justice, equity and retribution.

    I think that the not-so-smiley-face inflation genie is going to be let out of the bottle as the meaning of spending in the real economy becomes untethered from any concern of paying for it.

    To paraphrase Richard Nixon paraphrasing Milton Friedman, we’re all MMTers now. “Modern Monetary Theory” is here, firmly ensconced in BOTH political parties in the Long Now

    We’re All MMTers Now

    If Trump is reelected in 2020, I think he pushes forward a $2 TRILLION bond issuance that is fully or partially monetized by the Fed. They’ll be called Infrastructure Bonds. If a Democrat is elected in 2020, I think she or he pushes forward a $2 TRILLION bond issuance that is fully or partially monetized by the Fed. They’ll be called Green Bonds. We’re all MMT’ers now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Modern Monetary Theory or: How I Learned to Stop Worrying and Love the National Debt

    Modern Monetary Theory is neither modern nor a theory. It’s a post hoc rationalization of politically expedient policy that makes us feel better about all the bad stuff we’ve done with money and debt in service to Team Elite. And all the bad stuff we’re going to do in the future.

    A recession isn’t weird. Deflation isn’t weird. Authoritarian isn’t weird. I don’t think ANY of those things is coming down the pike, and you don’t need my help (or anyone else’s) if any of them does.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But smiley-face totalitarian stagflation where capital markets have been transformed into a propped-up-at-all-costs political utility?

    Now THAT’S weird. And that’s what I think IS coming down the pike. And we’re all going to need all the help we can get. Which gets us to the second half of Hunter S. Thompson’s quote.

    “The weird turn pro” = an all-in engagement for those who see the societal transformation; a recognition that the fundamental rules of the social game have changed, and a willingness to confront the implications of that change in every aspect of your life without surrendering to an Answer.

    How do we confront the Long Now?

     

    Personal courage

    Leaders who act as stewards of the future, not managers of the Now.

    Professional courage

    Investors who take more risk with what’s Real, and less with what’s not.

    Social courage

    Citizens who take back their vote, and who refuse to play the Fool.

    You know, in one of my twitter fights with Angry-Billionaires-and-their-Renfields™, I was called “a bizarre combo of Zerohedge and self-help guru”. It was meant as an insult, of course, but for me … man, I wear it like a badge. Because I DO believe, in Zerohedge-esque fashion, that “the system” is designed by and for a Team Elite that, in the immortal words of The Outlaw Josey Wales, pisses down our backs and tells us it’s raining.  And I DO believe, in self-help guru-esque fashion, that the only effective resistance to the Nudging State and the Nudging Oligarchy is through a bottom-up grassroots social movement that is driven by one thing and one thing only: each individual’s courage and determination to maintain their autonomy of mind … the courage and determination to believe that 2 + 2 = 4.

    The revolution will not be televised. The revolution will not be in the streets.

    The revolution will be in our hearts.

    It’s the hardest thing you’ll ever do, precisely because no one will be watching.

    But you won’t be alone.

    In 2020, we’re going to host an international conference to come together on this, an Epsilon Theory Forum. It’s intended to be the anti-Davos … a meet-up for those who still have a soul, who care about something bigger than the celebration and perpetuation of Team Elite. And I can promise you this … there won’t be a single billionaire on a panel at the ET Forum. But there will be plenty of real people … people with ideas and experiences that aren’t contingent on how many zeros they have after their name.

    Clear eyes, full hearts, can’t lose.

    Make / Protect / Teach.

    As wise as serpents, and as harmless as doves.

    We’ve got a lot of slogans. In 2020 you’ll have a chance to take action. You’ll have a chance to talk this through with like-minded truth-seekers, to figure out TOGETHER what a bottom-up grassroots social movement devoted to preserving each and every one of our autonomies of mind can do. It may be too late to prevent the SNIP! that severs the tether between taxation and spending, but it is high time to create new tethers, new personal bonds of association, loyalty and mutual support. Yep, it’s a Pack. And that’s how we survive the Long Now. Together.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 23:05

    Tags

  • Bipartisan Group Of NYC Lawmakers Pushing For "Gentrification Tax"
    Bipartisan Group Of NYC Lawmakers Pushing For "Gentrification Tax"

    It’s almost as if New York politicians are deliberately trying to crash NYC’s housing market.

    On Christmas Day, the New York Post reported that a bipartisan group of NYC lawmakers is pushing Albany to change state laws and close a loophole that extends tax breaks to homebuyers in gentrifying neighborhoods.

    The “gentrification tax” law would require homebuyers to pay taxes at the market rate, rather than at the much-lower assessed value.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Presently, homebuyers across the five boroughs who buy multimillion dollar brownstones and other existing homes often pay less in taxes than those who buy more moderately priced homes.

    Republican Staten Island City Council member Joe Borelli is spearheading the movement to end the tax loophole. He told the Post that New Yorkers are “just getting fed up” with the unfair treatment.

    “My proposal would end the practice of charging more tax on $500k home on Staten Isl etc. than a $2m home in Park Slope,” Borelli tweeted on Thursday. “This can be done Jan. 1.”

    Borelli also blamed Mayor de Blasio for creating the ‘yuppie tax’ loophole.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Borelli’s coalition also includes Park Slope Democrat Brad Lander and Bay Ridge Democrat Justin Brannan, two other members of the city council, which is controlled by Democrats.

    The NY Post breaks down the impact of the gentrification tax thusly: A buyer who snapped up a Clinton Hill brownstone for $3 million in 2017 only pays taxes on a fraction of the buying price, leaving the building’s new owner with a tax bill of just $4,297 a year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Joe Borelli

    Meanwhile, the owner of a $500,000 Bergen Beach bungalow pays a nearly identical amount, even though the bungalow is worth roughly one-sixth of the brownstone.

    The change to opaque state tax laws advocated by Borelli would raise the brownstone owner’s annual tax bill by $1,600, while the owner of the bungalow would see no increase.

    Of course, the changes would come with drawbacks: Back in April, New York State passed a revised ‘mansion tax’. First passed in 1989 by New York Gov. Mario Cuomo, New York’s original mansion tax was a 1% tax on statewide sales of homes of $1 million or more. Under the original tax, if a house, co-op, or condo sold for $1.25 million, the buyer would have paid a tax of $12,500, in addition to whatever other taxes they would pay.

    For fiscal year 2020, the statewide mansion tax will remain at 1% for property purchased for $1 million or more. For properties in NYC, however, the ‘progressive’ mansion tax will rise incrementally with purchase prices of $2 million or more, capping out at a total of 3.9% for properties sold at $25 million or above. Homes sold for $1 million+ outside of NYC but within New York state won’t be affected by the progressive taxes.

    Homebuyers in New York state (including NYC) will also need to factor in the Republican tax plan’s rejection of the SALT deductions.

    Borelli sent the proposed resolution to City Council Speaker Corey Johnson and state Assembly Speaker Carl Heastie earlier this month. Johnson spokeswoman Jennifer Fermino said the speaker is waiting for a preliminary report from a city property tax reform commission that he and Mayor de Blasio commissioned back in 2018.

    With the new mansion tax, it’s hardly surprising that Manhattan home sales plunged in Q3. Will we see more housing market pain in Q4 and the new year? Investors don’t need a magic 8-ball to figure that one out.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 22:40

  • Bond Worries And Gold
    Bond Worries And Gold

    Authored by Alasdair Macleod via GoldMoney.com,

    There is evidence that US Treasury bond yields may continue to rise, exposing the debt trap in which the US government finds itself. Market participants don’t realise it yet, but the dollar-based monetary system is spinning out of control. This will become obvious as the crisis stage of the credit cycle, which we now appear to be entering, becomes evident.

    The outlook for monetary inflation is dire. Not only will governments fund themselves through QE, but central banks will be forced to inflate even more to pay for government deficits significantly greater than currently forecast. And when markets stop taking government statistics on inflation as the Gospel Truth, the interest cost of government funding will rise and rise, reflecting an increasing rate of time preference for fiat currencies which will be losing their purchasing power at an accelerating rate.

    In a world where all fiat currencies will face enormous challenges, using yardsticks such as trade weighted indices will be misleading. The best gauges of the slide in fiat currencies will be commodities, particularly commodity monies, gold and silver.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Introduction

    The chart above, of the US 10-year Treasury yield is shows that its yield bottomed at the end of August, when it had more than halved from the levels of October 2018. What, if anything, does it mean? Some would argue that it is good to see a positive yield curve again, implying the recession, or the risk of one, has gone away. But if US Treasury yields have bottomed out, then in the fullness of time they will continue to rise. Chartists might even claim it is setting up for a bullish golden cross, like the one earlier in the chart on 17 November 2016, which marked the beginning of a significant rise in bond yields.

    That would be a worry, since equity markets have flown to places where bond yields don’t exist. But there are more solid concerns about the course of bond yields, other than charting ephemera. Despite the massive expansion of money and credit since the Lehman crisis, there is a shortage of liquidity, because the Fed is having to inject half a trillion dollars into the banking system to keep overnight levels suppressed at the Fed Funds Rate target.

    Informed opinion suggests that there is indeed a liquidity crisis. The banking system in New York has become strained through banks loaded with US Government debt and providing repos to hedge funds who have shorted euros and yen to buy T-bills and short-dated government coupon debt. The shortage has occurred because the largest banks, designated globally systemically important banks (GSIBs) must demonstrate excess reserves to cover obligations thirty days out. The strains for this Basel III requirement are expected to increase at the next quarter-end, i.e. 31 December.

    These strains first became evident in the repo market, which blew up three months ago, on the day Deutsche Bank completed the sale of its prime brokerage to BNP. We don’t know if these events were related, but as any investigating detective will tell you, pure coincidence must be dismissed until proven otherwise. In any event, the problems in the repo market have continued, so having noted that perhaps the Deutsche Bank sale did not go as planned, we must go with the GSIB excess reserves explanation.

    Looked at in this light, the persistent rise in UST bond yields is threatening. Unless the Fed simply floods the markets with liquidity, they seem set to rise further. If the Fed does not, the GSIBs have two courses of action, and they may be forced to take both. First, they could be forced to sell down their US Treasuries in order to create intraday liquidity needs by releasing some of their required reserves to be categorised as excess. Second, they can refuse to roll hedge fund repos, forcing hedge funds to sell US Treasuries and T-bills and then sell their dollars to close their shorts in euros and yen. The withdrawal of liquidity could wipe out one or more major relative value (RV) funds, invoking the ghost of Long-Term Capital Management, which ran into trouble in 1998.

    All this is now known, so it would be surprising if the Fed fails to act to contain a year-end crisis. But its actions are limited to providing liquidity for the banks. It will be up to the banks if they decide to use that liquidity to continue to accommodate the RV funds.

    Foreign buyers hold the dollar key

    Let us assume for a moment that we get through the year end without mishap. We will not have dealt with the underlying problem, which is who is going to buy the $1–1½ trillion of US government debt to be issued in 2020. In the past it has been principally foreigners, banks and RV hedge funds as described above. On a net basis the US saver has not been involved for a very long time, except passively through managed pension funds.

    According to US Treasury TIC data, in the year to October major foreign holders added $580.5bn to their holdings of Treasury bills, T-Bonds and Notes. The balance will have come directly and indirectly from domestic credit expansion, including the banks and the RV hedge funds. But from August, foreign investors have been net sellers to the tune of $77.4bn. Until then, every successive month had seen an increase, so it appears foreign demand is stalling, which could have fed into the repo crisis as the GSIB banks in New York and RV funds ended up with too much US Government paper.

    Foreign dollar demand is almost certainly affected by the sharp slowdown in global trade. This has happened for two reasons: President Trump’s tariff war against China and others has stalled international trade and at the same time, having been expanding for the last nine years, the credit cycle is due to run out of steam. Together they are recessionary headwinds, probably synergistic, which reduce the level of dollars in in the correspondent banking system foreigners need to hold for liquidity.

    China is the second largest holder of US government paper and has been reducing her position in recent months. As to her future reserve policies, commercial considerations are being complicated by politics. She understands that America is desperate for global investment flows to finance US Government debt, and that China’s infrastructure plans would compete for them which explains America’s hidden agenda over Hong Kong. China bungled her management of that situation, and apparently is now exploring the use of Macau as an investment channel for foreign inward investment.

    It is probably too late, the damage to investing in China having been done. But it is hard to see why China should just roll over on this issue and continue to buy US government bonds. More likely US Government debt will now be viewed as a source of funds to replace lost inward investment through Hong Kong.

    We can now see a best and worst case for the dollar and US Treasury funding. The best case is stagnating demand from abroad, which throws the onus onto domestic investment, which, in the absence of an increase in savers, will be through QE and the inflation of bank credit.

    The worst case will see not only stagnant foreign demand, but active selling down of current positions, due to slumping economies and China in particular selling actively. American investors seem generally complacent about this possibility, arguing that foreigners will always need dollars, and more so in a credit crisis. While there is some force in this argument, it ignores the fact that foreign ownership of dollars and dollar investment is already very high at roughly $23 trillion of which over $4 trillion is in deposit accounts, while US ownership of foreign currency liquidity is a relatively trivial figure.

    Bearing all this in mind, we must assume that at a minimum US banks and hedge funds between them will be funding all the budget deficit and may even have to absorb existing stock from foreigners. But surely, one imagines a critic asking, in the absence of a change in the savings ratio, a budget deficit is a matter of an accounting identity and will give rise to a similarly sized balance of payments deficit, and so long as dollars accumulate in foreign hands, they must form the capital inflows that finance the budget deficit. Therefore, dollars will continue to accumulate in foreign hands, and they must be invested.

    The accounting identity argument is correct, but there is more than one way to skin a rabbit. Dollars received by foreigners can always be sold in the foreign exchanges instead of being reinvested, which given the relative lack of foreign currency liquidity in the hands of domestic Americans, could have a dramatic effect on the exchange rates.

    Alternatively, the gap can be closed by the inflation of money through quantitative easing and the expansion of bank credit. In effect, the existing stock of dollar deposits is diluted to bridge the shortfall between a budget deficit and the lack of inward capital flows recorded in the balance of payments.

    In this context, the chart below of the dollar’s trade-weighted index appears to show the dollar is struggling to advance and may be losing the bullish momentum that developed shortly after President Trump was elected.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If, as the chart suggests, the dollar could be heading lower, it would fit in with a diminution of foreign capital inflows. But the major component of this index is the euro, so it is not an accurate representation of the dollar’s weighting with respect to trade imbalances, which are the normal source of capital flows. But in the case of the euro, it has already been sold down by RV hedge funds to strip out the interest differential by selling euros short and buying dollars. According to Hedgeweek.com, six months ago this form of hedge fund arbitrage stood at $865.6bn, a truly significant sum, most of which will have accumulated since 2018 Q1, when the dollar’s bull phase commenced.

    Not all of it would have involved selling down the euro, because in the past the Japanese yen has been the short leg of choice in an interest rate arbitrage. It is clear that the repo crisis tells us that by financing this speculation the US GSIBs have expanded their balance sheets too much and will need a substantial increase in their excess reserves to continue to finance this trade, thereby avoiding a crash in both the US bond market and the dollar. While this problem has surfaced at this year-end, it will be a continuing problem thereafter.

    This brings us back to our first chart, of the 10-year T-bond yield. The reasons why it may have bottomed and will rise further are becoming clear. If a rising bond yield is accompanied by a falling dollar it will be because markets recognise an acute funding crisis is upon the US government, reminiscent of the 1970s in sterling markets.

    A falling dollar will be the signal, so we must watch the trade-weighted index and, more importantly, the gold price.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The gold price particularly acts as the canary in a coal mine, and in that context Comex open interest is hitting record levels, which without the price rising indicates a suppression operation is already in place. It is therefore reasonable to suggest the combination of the lack of excess reserves in the GSIBs and the suppression of gold is circumstantial evidence that a financial crisis is already on its way.

    Markets will take control from central banks

    When the funding difficulties of the US Government become more obvious, investment strategists are bound to rethink the course of interest rates in other fiat currencies, which face similar pressures from increasing budget deficits. Being aware that monetary policies are not working as intended, central banks have already encouraged their governments to deploy additional fiscal stimulus. Even before welfare costs rise and tax income falls due to a developing global recession, it appears that government borrowing world-wide is set to accelerate.

    With the credit cycle on the turn, one thing is for sure, and that is what central banks call the business cycle will follow. The mistake made by all mainstream commentators and economists is to not appreciate that the problem is one of the central banks’ own making, and that once the credit cycle is set in motion it cannot be simply stopped by reducing official interest rates. We saw this proved ten years ago, when the Fed and other central banks had to inflate the quantity of money by however much base money was required and by taking failing institutions into public ownership. In the UK the only significant bank which successfully resisted needing a government bail-out was Barclays, and executive directors at the time are still having to answer for their actions in the courts. It seems that not only is failure rewarded, but a major bank not failing has become a criminal act.

    The fact that some central banks have unsuccessfully imposed negative rates has not yet led to a realisation that attempting to control the cycle in this way simply does not work. The periodic credit and systemic crises are increasingly destabilising and the dynamics behind the next one indicate it will be on a scale significantly greater than the Lehman crisis eleven years ago. The banking scene is set for a reversion from incautious greed to abject fear, fear of lending to anyone and to any other bank. And the weakest banks are to be found in the Eurozone. Even in the EU’s strongest economy, the two largest private banks, Deutsche Bank and Commerzbank, by their share prices are signalling a slidetowards bankruptcy.

    At some stage, and it could only be a matter of weeks or even days, the global outlook will cause all GSIB banks to become considerably more cautious, withdrawing lending facilities from smaller banks, financial speculators (hedge funds), and businesses alike. Lending to the last category ceases in two ways. In capital markets banks begin to cut their high levels of exposure to sub-investment grade bonds and syndications, and they withdraw working capital facilities for medium and small businesses. The crisis phase of the credit cycle is then irreversible.

    The credit-induced recession will be proportional to the scale of the preceding credit expansion. It feeds through to an escalation of government borrowing in all welfare-dependent nations, because of the fall in tax receipts and the increase in welfare costs.

    If US bond yields rise, they will do so either because foreigners are selling the dollar, or because domestic prices, reflecting a fall in the dollar’s purchasing power, begin to rise at a faster pace. It is already an open secret that official price inflation figures bear no relation to reality and only financial markets are wedded to the CPI myth. In fact, not only are government statistics inaccurate, but all statistics are reported in funny money. When US dollar markets wake up, the same will be true of markets in other currencies, and the greater the level of interest rate distortion the more severe the crisis is likely to be.

    How it plays out in different nations and their currencies is not so much down to the scale of government borrowing in deteriorating circumstances, but whether savers respond to the financing demands of their governments. For this reason, monetary inflation rates will be offset by a tendency for Japanese and Chinese savers to increase their bank deposits rather than spend. In the Eurozone and Britain, this is less the case. Increasing monetary inflation will end up fuelling rising eurobond and sterling bond yields more rapidly than their equivalents in Japan and probably China.

    Commodities and commodity money

    The point has been already made in this article that measuring the dynamics behind a credit crisis is distorted by government statistics not fit for the purpose and by the elastic nature of fiat currency. Furthermore, monetary planners, portfolio managers and the commentariat inhabit a Keynesian fantasy land and only understand rising prices to be directly related to increased demand, and falling prices to falling demand. Presumably, this explains why they associate a CPI rising at two per cent with a healthy economy.

    The key to understanding the error is that money is only objective in its value for the purpose of individual transactions. But give money a temporal context and it becomes clear that money’s purchasing power varies as well as the cost of anything.

    If it is expected that the rate at which a currency loses purchasing power is about to increase, then commodity prices measured in that currency will rise without any improvement in demand. Demand can even fall, and prices rise, if the purchasing power of the currency declines sufficiently. This condition can be temporarily overcome by an investors’ panic when they sell assets, such as bonds and equities, in order to escape falling prices, but once that initial effect has quickly worn off, the relationship between money and goods will adjust to the public’s general desire to hold money as opposed to goods.

    We have a contemporary example. At the time of the Lehman crisis the price of gold declined from $1,000 in March 2008 to $700 the following October, before rising to $1,920 three years later. But this time is likely to be different, because the rate of monetary inflation before the Lehman crisis varied little in the preceding few years, compared with subsequently. Following Lehman, all major central banks expanded money quantities very rapidly, so the next crisis comes against a background of already inflated currencies before a further acceleration in supply. Depending how the next credit crisis evolves, there may not be a dip in the gold price at all.

    Instead, gold and other commodity prices, precious or otherwise, will be bought and sold against a background of rapidly debasing currencies. We know this, because renewed monetary expansion in the form of quantitative easing is taking place even before any crisis materialises. And when we hear luminaries such as Christine Lagarde at the ECB talking about QE to finance eco-friendly infrastructure developments directly, we know that central bankers and their governments now view monetary inflation much as it was in the Weimar Republic: an infinite source of funds.

    Despite attempts by the bullion banks to suppress the evidence from the gold price of what is likely to turn out to be the early stages of a widespread fiat currency collapse, if matters progress on the lines described in this article, gold, silver and other commodities will rise priced in fiat. Initially it is likely to reflect the fact that such assets are under-owned. But then another effect is likely to take over, as the public begins to realise what is going on and start dumping fiat currencies for gold, silver and even bitcoin.

    Ninety years ago, it was called a crack-up boom, the last dash out of currency for anything not printed by the government. It will happen differently this time, because it always does. But now that inflationary financing is not only required to balance governments’ books but to finance the expansion of their spending, happen it will.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 22:15

  • Meet The Quants That Are Taking Over The NFL
    Meet The Quants That Are Taking Over The NFL

    The NFL’s “Big Data Bowl” caught on in a big way.

    Last year, 125 people got together to participate in trying to figure out new insights about the game from poring over mountains of NFL data. This year, 2,038 teams made 32,000 submissions to the event, according to the Wall Street Journal

    And like baseball, which caught analytics fever some years back around the time that Moneyball was released, the NFL now seems set for its own analytics boom. 

    The numbers are already starting to shift the game, too. More teams are going for it on fourth down and teams are throwing more out of the shotgun, among other decisions being dictated by “rudimentary math”.

    At the same time, some GM’s still mock “eggheads and their spreadsheets”, leading to a bit of friendly competition between those who rely on analytics and those who don’t. 

    To some degree, it seems like a foregone conclusion: this is already the third year that the NFL is using its Next Gen Stats, which collects “granular data about movements on the field that is enabling analyses that were never before possible.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And because data research is so new, there’s still many inefficiencies that can be taken advantage of when discovered by quants. 

    Momin Ghaffar, manager of strategic research and development for the Jacksonville Jaguars said: “There’s a lot of low-hanging fruit to be had.” 

    Ghaffar’s career path has followed the trend: first as manager of analytics for the San Antonio Spurs before defecting to the Jaguars after submitting a paper on analytics to the team. 

    At last year’s competition, he was one of 11 people hired by NFL teams or other companies looking for analysts. 

    Prior to Next Gen stats, each game had about 160 rows of data, with each representing one play. Now, tracking data makes 10 observations per second, per player. So instead of 160 rows, there’s about 600,000. 

    Lopez said: “There’s some knowledge in those 600,000 rows. And teams are trying to figure that out.”

    Charlie Gelman, whose work at last year’s Big Data Bowl landed him with a job with the Ravens said: “That’s why I wanted to get into football originally, much more than any other sport. Right now, there’s a huge rush of people trying to get in.”

    He was only a sophomore at Duke when he submitted his paper. He also started doing analytics for Duke’s wrestling team and football team. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Football is huge, but there’s still so few analytics in it,” he said.

    The Philadelphia Eagles have the league’s most progressive front office when it comes to analytics, and it helped lead the team to a Super Bowl two years ago against the Patriots. This year, the Ravens have been the most effective with going for it on fourth down, a key centerpiece in the Eagles’ aggressive Super Bowl strategy. 

    There’s no doubt about it: tracking data can exponentially expand insights for teams. For this year’s “Big Data Bowl”, participants are asked to calculate how many yards a running back should get on any given play. Participants had to create models based on complex factors like position of all players on the field, their speed and other attributes. 

    Nate Sterken, who previously worked in data science for the federal government and President Obama’s reelection campaign in 2012, is now working on models on how to identify every route a receiver ran on every play so he could analyze which combinations worked best together. And come 2020, he’ll be working for the Cleveland Browns. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 21:50

  • Christian Post Editor Quits Over Publication's Defense Of President Trump
    Christian Post Editor Quits Over Publication's Defense Of President Trump

    Authored by Jennie Taer via SaraACarter.com,

    Christian Post Politics Editor Napp Nazworth said he resigned from the publication after it published an editorial in defense of President Donald Trump.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In an interview with CNN Thursday, Nazworth said his issue was with the Post ‘aligning with the interests of President Trump.’ That was the straw that broke the camel’s back for Nazworth.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nazworth resigned on Monday. He announced his decision in a Twitter thread.

    “Announcement: Today, rather abruptly, I was forced to make the difficult choice to leave The Christian Post. They decided to publish an editorial that positions them on Team Trump. I can’t be an editor for a publication with that editorial voice….” Nazworth wrote.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The controversy began when the former Editor-in-Chief of Christianity Today Mark Galli penned an op-ed arguing for President Trump’s removal from office as the U.S. House of Representatives deliberated and later voted to impeach him.

    “The president of the United States attempted to use his political power to coerce a foreign leader to harass and discredit one of the president’s political opponents. That is not only a violation of the Constitution; more importantly, it is profoundly immoral,” Galli wrote.

    Galli further argued that the President’s removal is consistent with evangelical teachings and principles.

    “That he should be removed, we believe, is not a matter of partisan loyalties but loyalty to the Creator of the Ten Commandments.”

    The Christian Post later responded with a scathing piece titled “Christianity Today and the problem with ‘Christian elitism.’” Those elites included Galli, as the piece notes.

    Mr. Galli asks evangelicals supporting Trump to consider how continued support for the president will impede and compromise evangelical witness for Jesus to an unbelieving world. One might well ask Mr. Galli how his obvious elitist disdain and corrosive condescension for fellow Christians with whom he disagrees, as ignorant, uneducated, “aliens in our midst” might well damage evangelical witness to an unbelieving world. Unbelievers might well conclude, “These Christian preach love for neighbor, but they certainly don’t seem to practice what they preach!”” editors John Grano and Richard Land wrote.

    That defense of President Trump was enough for Nazworth.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 21:25

  • Indian IPOs Plunge To Four-Year Low Amid "Great Slowdown"
    Indian IPOs Plunge To Four-Year Low Amid "Great Slowdown"

    Several months ago, we reported how the global IPO market went bust in 2019. Now a new report via Reuters provides more insight into the trend, more specifically, taking a look at the IPO bust in India. 

    Indian IPOs plunged to a four year low by value in 2019 as the global and domestic economy continues to slow.

    Refinitiv data shows funds raised by Indian IPOs fell to $2.8 billion this year, the lowest since about 2016. IPO proceeds soared in 2017 to $11.7 billion and $5.5 billion in 2018 during a synchronized recovery across the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Financial, industrial, and consumer staple sectors led IPOs in 2018 and 2019, but the amount raised compared to last year is significantly less. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With a synchronized downturn across the world and an Indian economy in crisis, investors have been pulling back on speculative IPOs: 

    “2019 has been the worst year from an IPO market perspective,” said Sandip Khetan, a partner at consultancy EY.

    “Because of different types of disruptions, such as corporate failures and bankruptcies, things have slowed down considerably,” he said.

    Over the weekend, Arvind Subramanian, the former chief economic adviser to the Narendra Modi government, told NDTV that “this is not an ordinary slowdown… it is India’s great slowdown.” 

    India’s GDP has fallen for seven consecutive quarters, dropping to 4.5% in 2Q19; it stood at 8% in 1Q18. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Industrial production growth is at the weakest level in a decade.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Business confidence has also plunged to decade lows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    “…they (key indicators) are either in negative growth or barely positive growth territory… the comparison is to the real sector of the economy… growth, investment, export, and import… which matter for jobs. It is also a matter of how much revenue the government has to spend on social programs,” Subramanian said during the interview, adding, “The real sector economy is slowing… jobs, you know, people’s incomes, people’s wages and of course government revenues”.

    Indian investors are ditching speculative IPOs as the global and domestic economy continues to falter. So far, there are no “green shoots” in India — likely continued deceleration into early 2020.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 21:00

  • "We're Heading For Very, Very Bad Places": Dave Collum's 'Pandemonium' Podcast
    "We're Heading For Very, Very Bad Places": Dave Collum's 'Pandemonium' Podcast

    The only thing nearly as enlightening (and time-consuming) as reading David Collum’s epic Year In Review is listening to him and Chris Martenson discuss its highlights. So strap in, grab some eggnog, and listen to this year’s recap:

    We are so close to a financial crisis now that we may be way, way past the fail-safe.

    We’ve got all these unfunded liabilities that we have to pay or face the consequences of — and they are fantastically enormous.

    The pensions are all underfunded — at the top of a financial asset price bubble, mind you.

    Social Security is a disaster. And we’re promising so much medical help for everyone that is now profoundly expensive.

    There are so many things out there that are unmoored. The Fed is unmoored. The digital world is taking us to this digital gulag, in my opinion — I don’t think I’m being hyperbolic.

    I think we’re heading for very, very bad places.

    Click the play button below to listen to Chris’ interview with David Collum (84m:24s).


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 20:35

  • China Turns To Shocking Solution To Curb Pig Ebola
    China Turns To Shocking Solution To Curb Pig Ebola

    China is the world’s top producer and consumer of pork. So when 50% of its pig herd was wiped out in 2019 from African Swine Fever (ASF), it caused pork prices in the back half of the year to hyperinflate. The immediate response by the government was to consolidate pig farms and release pork from its strategic reserves. Other measures included sourcing pork from South American countries, like Brazil and Argentina, along with reestablishing trade with the US in the last several weeks.

    Now the Chinese government is working to limit the spread of ASF through a high-voltage electricity experiment installed in pig barns, reported South China Morning Post (SCMP).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The new device will be installed at a medium-sized hog farm in Chengdu, in one of China’s top pig producing regions.

    The goal of the test is to see whether an electric field around a barn can limit the transmission of deadly viruses.

    Professor Liu Binjiang, a government scientist in northeastern China, is responsible for the “electro culture” program that has already been a huge success for increasing crop yields and reducing plant viruses.

    Binjiang and his team are creating a static electric field of 50 kilovolts around a barn that holds thousands of pigs.

    He believes the high-voltage discharges will break down chemicals, reduce biological aerosol by 50-90%, kill germs, and stop the spread of viruses that are transmitted through the air.

    “The air quality [for the pigs] should improve when the device is powered up,” Binjiang said. “Electricity is one of the many ways to improve living conditions for farm animals. We have a long to-do list.”

    Binjiang claims that high-voltage electricity was used to create an electric field around a barn in the Hubei province, one of the hardest-hit ASF areas; he claims that none of the pigs died from the virus.

    “It had been deployed to enhance animal welfare and prevent airborne diseases such as foot and mouth, but the lack of African swine fever cases was a surprise. It led the team to hypothesize that the electric field had caused a change in the environment that prevented the virus thriving,” SCMP noted.

    Electrifying pig farms to create force fields that scrub the air of deadly viruses could be the next big breakthrough China needs to restrict the spread of ASF.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 20:10

  • Doug Casey: "This Is Going To Be One For The Record Books"
    Doug Casey: "This Is Going To Be One For The Record Books"

    Via InternationalMan.com,

    Just because society experiences turmoil doesn’t mean your personal life has to. And a depression doesn’t have to be depressing. Most of the real wealth in the world will still exist – it will just change ownership.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What is a depression?

    We’re now at the tail end of a very long, but in many ways a very weak and artificial, economic expansion. At the same time we’ve had one of the strongest securities bull markets in history. Both are the result of trillions of new dollars created over the last decade. Right now very few people are willing to consider the possibility of tough times—let alone The Greater Depression.

    But, perverse though it may seem, this is the very best time to think about it. The U.S. economy is a house of cards, built on quicksand, with a tsunami on the way. I urge everyone to read up on the topic. For now, I’ll only briefly touch on the nature of depressions. There are at least three good definitions of the term:

    1. A period of time when most people’s standard of living drops significantly.

    2. A period of time when distortions and misallocations of capital are liquidated.

    3. A period of time when the business cycle climaxes.

    Using the first definition, any natural disaster can cause a depression. So can living above your means for long enough. But the worst kind of depression has not just economic effects, but economic causes. That’s where definitions 2 and 3 come in.

    What can cause distortions in the way the market operates, causing people to do things they’d otherwise consider unreasonable or uneconomic? Only government action, i.e., coercion. This takes the form of regulation, taxes, and currency inflation.

    Always under noble pretexts, government is constantly directly and indirectly inducing people to buy and sell things they otherwise wouldn’t, to do things they’d prefer not to, and to invest in things that make no sense.

    These misallocations of capital subtly reduce a society’s general standard of living, but the serious trouble happens when such misallocations build up to an unsustainable degree and reality forces them into liquidation. The result is bankrupted companies, defaulted debt, and unemployed workers.

    The business cycle is caused mainly by currency inflation, which is accomplished today by the monetization of government debt through the banking system; essentially, when the government runs a deficit, the Federal Reserve buys its debt, and credits the government’s account at a commercial bank with dollars. Using the printing press to create new money is largely passé in today’s electronic world.

    Either way, inflation sends false signals to businessmen (especially those who get the money early on, as it filters through the economy), making them overestimate demand for their products. That causes them to hire more workers and make capital investments—often with borrowed money. This is called “stimulating the economy.”

    Inflating the currency can actually drive down interest rates for a while, because the price of money (interest) is lowered by the increased supply of money. This causes people to save less and borrow more, just as Americans have been doing for years. A lot of that newly created money goes into the stock market, driving it higher.

    It all looks pretty good, until retail prices start rising as a delayed consequence of the increased money supply, and interest rates skyrocket to reflect the depreciation of the currency.

    That’s when businesses start failing. Stocks fall. Bond prices collapse. Large numbers of workers lose employment.

    Rather than let the market adjust itself, government typically starts the process all over again with a new and larger “stimulus package.” The more often this happens, the more ingrained become the distortions in the way people consume and invest, and the nastier the eventual depression.

    This is why I predict the Greater Depression will be … well … greater. This is going to be one for the record books. Much different, much longer lasting, and much worse than the unpleasantness of 1929-1946.

    *  *  *

    A financial depression far greater than any crisis America has seen could soon strike. For some it could completely wipe out their savings… and for others it could be the fortune-building opportunity of a lifetime. Legendary speculator Doug and the International Man team just released a new report with all the details on how it could all unfold, and what you can do about it. It’s not something you’re likely to hear about in the mainstream financial media, or anywhere else. Click here to download it now.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 19:45

  • Huawei Benefited From Billions Of Dollars In State Support During Its Rise To Global Dominance
    Huawei Benefited From Billions Of Dollars In State Support During Its Rise To Global Dominance

    The Wall Street Journal continued its string of reports on the Chinese government’s shadowy campaign to support mission-critical companies in the private sector on Christmas Day by exposing for the first time to totality of government support for Huawei.

    Billions of dollars in credit facilities backed by state-controlled “policy banks”, coupled with pro-business tax breaks, allowed Huawei to cement its position as the world’s leading telecoms giant, according to WSJ.

    Huawei’s grants, credit facilities, tax breaks and other forms of financial assistance details for the first time how Huawei had access to as much as $75 billion in state support as it grew from a little-known vendor of phone switches to the world’s largest telecom-equipment company—helping Huawei offer generous financing terms and undercut rivals’ prices by some 30%, analysts and customers say.

    Around the world, Huawei is vying to build next-generation 5G telecom networks, much to Washington’s chagrin. In a well-documented campaign, the US has struggled to convince it allies to exclude Huawei equipment from their 5G infrastructure, claiming that Huawei parts would compromise security and allow the Chinese government to tap into civilian and military communications.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But thanks in part to all of this government support, Huawei is able to offer telecoms equipment at world-beating prices. Its biggest competitors, Nokia and Ericsson, can’t even come close.

    This government support also undermines Huawei’s claims that it operates independent of Beijing, and that it would under no circumstances cooperate with state intelligence against its customers.

    Nevermind that multiple investigations have uncovered evidence that Huawei builds backdoors into its equipment to allow easy access by Chinese intelligence forces.

    It’s important to remember that Huawei’s commercial interests align with those of the Chinese government in more ways than one.

    “While Huawei has commercial interests, those commercial interests are strongly supported by the state,” said Michael Wessel, a member of a U.S. congressional panel that reviews U.S.-China relations, in an interview. The U.S. has raised concerns that use of Huawei’s equipment could pose a security risk, should Beijing request network data from the company. Huawei says it would never hand such data to the government.

    According to WSJ’s investigation, the biggest source of state support for Huawei, about $46 billion, comes from loans, credit lines and other support from state lenders. Huawei saved about $25 billion in taxes between 2008 and 2018 due to state incentives for Chinese tech firms. It also benefited from $2 billion in land discounts, and another $1.6 billion in government grants.

    In a statement, Huawei said it benefited from “small and non-material” grants to support its research, but otherwise denied WSJ’s claims that the Chinese state played a critical role in Huawei’s development.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In its research, WSJ used public records in China including company statements and land registration documents. The paper said it “verified” its analysis with subsidy analysts, including a professor at Wichita State University, and Good Jobs First, a Washington DC-based organization that analyzes tax incentives.

    Setting the money aside for a moment, it’s important to remember that state support can’t always be quantified. In 1999, China’s central government arranged an unusual rescue from allegations of tax fraud.

    The grants Huawei received from the Chinese government between 2008 and 2018 were 17x larger than similar subsidies received by Nokia, the world’s second-largest telecoms equipment maker, while Ericsson received no subsidies during that period.

    Back in 2010, the European Commission ruled that Chinese modem exporters, including Huawei, benefited from unfair subsidies, according to a confidential report leaked to WSJ.

    But that investigation was cut short after the unnamed “complainant” dropped their claims against China.

    In addition to providing cheap loans to Huawei which lower operating costs compared with foreign rivals, Beijing-backed banks also extend cheap credit to Huawei’s customers.

    Financial support helped the company undercut rivals. In 2010, the European Commission found that Chinese modem exporters including Huawei had benefited from subsidies, according to a confidential report reviewed by the Journal. The commission cut short its probe after the complainant prompting it reached a “cooperation agreement” with the company. Huawei denied receiving such subsidies.

    Besides subsidies, Huawei since 1998 has received an estimated $16 billion in loans, export credits, and other forms of financing from Chinese banks for itself or its customers, the Journal found.

    China’s state-controlled banking system underpins cheap loans that lower costs for Huawei and its customers to buy its products on credit. State lending facilities for Huawei were among the largest in history.

    Two of China’s biggest banks extended more than $30 billion in credit to Huawei customers over the last 20 years.

    Mega-lenders China Development Bank and Export-Import Bank of China in the last two decades made available more than $30 billion in credit lines for Huawei’s customers. World Bank and official data indicate these banks were lending to the company’s clients in developing economies at some 3% in at least Huawei’s first decade abroad, around half of China’s five-year benchmark rate in since 2004.

    A Huawei spokesman told WSJ that this customer credit facility was rarely more than 10% subscribed. He added that lenders, who were mostly non-Chinese banks, accounted for only 10% of Huawei’s ongoing financing needs as of the end of last year. Most of Huawei’s working capital comes from its own cash flows.

    “If you’re going to buy a house, and if you are able to say you got backing of a half-million-dollar line of credit, that’s going to make you a much stronger bidder,” said Fred Hochberg, former chairman of U.S. Export-Import Bank. “What Huawei did, cleverly, is to make sure that, when they made a bid, it came with financing terms” that surpassed those of competitors.

    Of course, China’s whole state capitalist model is based on the idea that government policy and corporate achievement are inseparable. This is made clear in a statement from China’s foreign ministry, which told WSJ that “like many others in China,” Huawei is a private company whose achievements “are inseparable from a good policy environment.”

    WSJ found an example of how China’s export-import financing for Huawei customers has influenced foreign governments’ decision to pick Huawei over other telecoms providers.

    In summer 2009, Huawei pitched to Pakistan a surveillance system for its capital, Islamabad. Pakistan’s prime minister accepted, but Islamabad lacked funds and its procurement rules required competitive bidding, Pakistan court filings say.

    The Chinese offered a solution. China Ex-Im would lend Pakistan $124.7 million for the project and waive most of the 3% annual interest on the 20-year loan. There was a condition, Pakistan Supreme Court filings show: Pakistan could choose only Huawei. Pakistan’s government decided to proceed without competitive bidding.

    “On the recommendation of Ex-Im Bank, the prime minister of Pakistan selected Huawei,” then-interior minister Ahsan Iqbal told Pakistan officials.

    A Chinese embassy report showed Beijing’s then-ambassador to Islamabad officiating at the project’s inauguration in 2016 alongside Pakistan’s interior minister, standing before an array of glowing security monitors.

    “The Chinese government funded it and Huawei built it,” the embassy said.

    And there are probably dozens of other examples like this one. Ultimately, Huawei’s expansion explains only part of China’s growing influence across the emerging world. Their two missions are deeply intertwined.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 19:25

  • Rachel Maddow Called Out By WaPo Columnist For Shamelessly Peddling Fake News
    Rachel Maddow Called Out By WaPo Columnist For Shamelessly Peddling Fake News

    Conspiracy theorist and MSNBC host Rachel Maddow has been called out by Washington Post columnist Erik Wemple for breathlessly peddling the Steele Dossier – becoming a “clearinghouse” for the largely debunked opposition research funded by the Hillary Clinton campaign and the DNC in 2016 (and fed to the MSM six weeks before the 2016 US election by the former British spy who wrote it).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wemple has been writing about the media’s coverage of the Steele dossier since it was significantly undercut earlier this month by Michael Horowitz, the DOJ Inspector General. Thursday’s feature details how Maddow spewed Russophobic propaganda to the American public based on Steele’s fabricated claims.

    Horowitz absolutely shredded the dossier, writing in his report on FBI FISA abuse that “The FBI concluded, among other things, that although consistent with known efforts by Russia to interfere in the 2016 U.S. elections, much of the material in the Steele election reports, including allegations about Donald Trump and members of the Trump campaign relied upon in the Carter Page FISA applications, could not be corroborated; that certain allegations were inaccurate or inconsistent with information gathered by the Crossfire Hurricane team; and that the limited information that was corroborated related to time, location and title information, much of which was publicly available.”

    Maddow began using the dossier to smear Trump in March of 2017 – when both CNN and the New Yorker falsely claimed that US authorities had loosely confirmed ‘some of the details’ from the dossier. An emboldened Maddow claimed that while the “baseline” dossier claim that Trump colluded with Russia to win the 2016 election had yet to be proven, “all the supporting details are checking out, even the really outrageous ones. A lot of them are starting to bear out under scrutiny. It seems like a new one each passing day.”

    Based on the conclusions reached by both the FBI and DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz, Maddow was peddling conspiracy theories. 

    “When small bits of news arose in favor of the dossier, the franchise MSNBC host pumped air into them,” writes Wemple. “At least some of her many fans surely came away from her broadcasts thinking the dossier was a serious piece of investigative research, not the flimflam, quick-twitch game of telephone outlined in the Horowitz report.”

    She seemed to be rooting for the document.

    In April, Maddow ignored that the Mueller report debunked the dossier’s key allegation a literal conspiracy theory – namely that the Trump campaign coordinated with Russia to influence the 2016 US election. Instead, the MSNBC host grasped at straws – trying to suggest various claims in the dossier were corroborated.

    Several days after the Mueller report emerged, Maddow addressed not the dissonance between Mueller and the dossier, but a point of possible corroboration. In perhaps its most famous allegation, the dossier claimed that Trump had rented a suite at the Ritz Carlton in Moscow and “employed” prostitutes to perform a perverted ritual for him. It suggested that there were tapes of the show, the better to amass kompromat against Trump.

    A footnote in the Mueller report, noted Maddow, bore a possible connection to this part of the dossier. It turned out that Russian businessman Giorgi Rtskhiladze had sent a text message to Cohen on Oct. 30, 2016, saying, “Stopped flow of tapes from Russia but not sure if there’s anything else. Just so you know…” Those tapes were “compromising,” Rtskhiladze told the special counsel. However, he also said “he was told the tapes were fake, but he did not communicate that to Cohen.”

    Seizing on the revelations, Maddow commented: “[According] to Mueller, Cohen then told Trump about that before the election. So that means Trump knew that somewhere in the former Soviet Union, a business buddy of his had taken action to make sure tapes, supposedly from Trump’s trip to Russia, those tapes weren’t getting out. Don’t worry, all taken care of. I took care of that for you, right? she said. –Washington Post

    Maddow pumped the brakes on the dossier following the Mueller report. When Horowitz published his report’s comprehensive dressdown of the dossier, there was no mea culpa from Maddow – instead, she said “The inspector general debunks that there was any anti-Trump political bias motivating these decisions. They debunked the idea that the Christopher Steele dossier of opposition research against Trump was the basis for opening the FBI’s Russia investigation. It absolutely was not, and ‘Oh, by the way, no, there was no spying on the Trump campaign.”

    And while Wemple says these are legitimate points, Maddow’s track record on the dossier is abysmal.

    The case for Maddow is that her dossier coverage stemmed from public documents, congressional proceedings and published reports from outlets with solid investigative histories. She included warnings about the unverified assertions and didn’t use the dossier as a source for wild claims. There is something fishy, furthermore, about that Mueller footnote regarding the “tapes.” In their recent book on the dossier, “Crime in Progress,” the Fusion GPS co-founders wrote that Steele believes the document is 70-percent accurate.

    The case against Maddow is far stronger. When small bits of news arose in favor of the dossier, the franchise MSNBC host pumped air into them. At least some of her many fans surely came away from her broadcasts thinking the dossier was a serious piece of investigative research, not the flimflam, quick-twitch game of telephone outlined in the Horowitz report. She seemed to be rooting for the document. –Washington Post

    One of Russia’s overall goals, according to ex-KGB agent Yuri Bezmenov, is to weaken the West by dividing America. With MSM hosts like Maddow peddling disinformation to an outrage-hungry audience that still hasn’t accepted the results of the 2016 election, they hardly have to try. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 19:00

    Tags

  • Boeing Executive In Charge Of 737 MAX Legal Response Has Been Fired
    Boeing Executive In Charge Of 737 MAX Legal Response Has Been Fired

    Boeing shareholders just can’t catch a break.

    Barely three days after now-former Boeing CEO Dennis Muilenburg’s termination at the hands of the company’s board of directors, another top-ranking company official has retired been pushed out.

    According to a press release published shortly after American markets closed on Thursday, Boeing revealed that the company’s top legal official, former federal judge J Michael Luttig, has decided to “retire” after just over six months in a position that was created by Muilenburg specifically for Luttig.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Judge J Michael Luttig

    Here’s more from the press release:

    The Boeing Company announced today that J. Michael Luttig, 65, valued Counselor and Senior Advisor to the Boeing Board of Directors, has informed the Board of his long-considered retirement at year end.

    Luttig, who served as Boeing’s General Counsel from 2006 until assuming his current responsibilities in May 2019, has been managing legal matters associated with the Lion Air Flight 610 and Ethiopian Airlines Flight 302 accidents, and advising the Board on strategic matters.

    Boeing interim President and CEO Greg Smith praised Luttig in a quote included with Boeing’s press release.

    “Judge Luttig is one of the finest legal minds in the Nation and he has expertly and tirelessly guided our company as General Counsel, Counselor, and Senior Advisor,” said Interim Boeing President and CEO Greg Smith. “We are deeply indebted to Judge Luttig for his extraordinary service to Boeing over these nearly 14 years, especially through this past, challenging year for our company,” said Smith. “The Board and I will always be grateful for the Judge’s remarkable service to The Boeing Company – and I will personally always be grateful for his friendship.”

    According to the Seattle Times, during his brief tenure at Boeing, Luttig assembled a deeply connected defense team of outside lawyers to represent Boeing executives and employees in a criminal investigation launched by federal authorities after the second 737 MAX crash, which occurred just minutes after a Ethiopian Airlines flight 302 took off from Addis Ababa Bole International Airport on March 10, 2019.

    Luttig’s appointment signaled that Boeing was planning to aggressively combat any criminal charges or civil lawsuits tied to the two 737 crashes, which killed 346 people, including all of the passengers and crew. 

    Luttig was named to the newly created position in May, as the Chicago-based company faced an onslaught of lawsuits and a federal criminal investigation arising from the crashes. Until then, Luttig had served as Boeing’s general counsel since 2006.

    His duties regarding the 737 MAX will now fall to Brett Gerry, who replaced Luttig as general counsel.

    Luttig’s appointment to the new position last spring reflected the complex and costly fallout stemming from the crashes, coming on the heels of statements indicating Boeing planned to take an aggressive stance in responding to lawsuits and any potential criminal allegations

    The Department of Justice, aided by the Department of Transportation’s Inspector General and the FBI, is investigating the design and certification process for the MAX to try and determine whether the FAA’s decision to certify the 737 MAX 8 amounted to criminal negligence.

    It’s possible that Luttig’s departure is simply a natural consequence of Muilenburg’s ouster. It’s also possible that his departure is tied to recent revelations that Boeing withheld critical internal text messages from the FAA.

    Still, given Luttig’s crucial role within Boeing’s legal department, something about the timing of Luttig’s departure doesn’t sit right. And with Boeing shares on track to finish the year above the 2019 lows reached in March, we imagine shareholders will soon be asking themselves: ‘what does this guy know that I don’t?’


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 18:45

  • How Today's Central Bankers Threaten Civilization
    How Today's Central Bankers Threaten Civilization

    Authored by Claudio Grass via The Mises Institute,

    When I was asked to write an article about the impact of negative interest rates and negative yielding bonds, I thought it was a chance to look at the topic from a broader perspective. There have been lots of articles speculating about the possible implications and focusing on their impact in the short run, but it’s not very often that an analysis looks a bit further into the future, trying to connect money and its effect on society itself. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Qui Bono?

    Let us begin with a basic question, that lies at the heart of this issue: Who profits from a loan that is guaranteed to pay back less than the amount borrowed? Obviously, it is the borrower and not the lender, which in our case is the government and those closely connected to it. Negative rates and negative-yielding bonds by definition favor the debtors and punish the savers. In addition, these policies are an affront to basic economic principles and to common sense too. They contradict all logical ideas about how money works and they have no basis and no precedent in any organic economic system. Thus, now, in addition to the hidden tax that is inflation, we also have another mechanism that redistributes wealth from the average citizen to those at the top of the pyramid. 

    Thus, this very concept of a central authority being able to bend and twist the rules, even when the result is illogical, has implications that extend way beyond daily economic activities. In fact, it ultimately divides society into two classes, those who profit from this arbitrary and unilateral rewriting of the rules and those who are forced to pay the price even though they never agreed to it. In fact, they weren’t even asked.

    A System of Collective Corruption

    Of course, we can also look at it from the collective perspective of the so-called social contract of Rousseau and argue that this system of overt (taxation) and covert (monetary policy) redistribution is legitimate, or even benign. You might still believe that the state will take care of you in the future, and thus you are willing to sacrifice a part of your wealth and savings today to make sure that happens. In that case, it is useful to remember that the current central banking system is not that old. It’s only been around for about hundred years, or two long-term debt cycles combined. The first cycle ended when President Nixon officially tried to demonetize gold in 1971, empowering a centralized system whereby a few decide who receives the currency first and at what interest rate, allowing them to create bubbles in certain asset classes, protect different key industries and to use it to finance wars and enrich politicians and those close to them. 

    So far, total credit on a global scale stands around $240 trillion. It’s hard to conceive of such a number, but if you consider that 1 trillion seconds are equal to 31,709 years, you might begin to wrap your head around just how leveraged the system has become. We should never forget that debt is always consumption brought forward. That being said, debts need to be paid back or forgiven — there is no other outcome. In addition, the amount of debt that a system can take on is limited, and when a credit-based system can’t grow any further, the logical outcome is the collapse of the whole system. As Ludwig von Mises described this a long time ago,

    There is no means of avoiding the final collapse of a boom brought about by credit expansion. The alternative is only whether the crisis should come sooner as the result of a voluntary abandonment of further credit expansion, or later as a final and total catastrophe of the currency system involved.

    This is the reason why central banks started trying to avoid this systemic collapse by taking interest rates below zero and allowing the big players to take on debt for free and to reduce their debt burden at the same time. This, of course, is something that we already witnessed extensively during the past decade and it is just a matter of time until more central banks, including the Federal Reserve, use the same fraudulent tactic to let some air out of the balloon, and to deleverage the debtor at the cost of the saver. However, it is very questionable whether this can be successfully managed, especially since demographics have been a problem for decades in the West, making growth a problem too. Governments enforced a mass-immigration policy to fight this aging population trend, yet its execution has been disastrous; instead of rejuvenating nations and spurring productivity, it has ended up crushing the national welfare systems. 

    It is thus clear that the current path that governments and central bankers have selected is utterly unsustainable and that their attempts at short-term “patches” have little hope of stopping the inevitable implosion, which has already been decades in the making. Pretending otherwise is as futile as it is naïve. As Ayn Rand put it,

    We can ignore reality, but we cannot ignore the consequences of ignoring reality.

    The “De-Civilization” Effect 

    Negative interest rates are a great example of these short-term patches, only in this case, they are not just useless as a cure for our economic ills, but they actually do more harm than good. 

    The outcome of this policy is that time becomes worthless. As one’s hard-earned money, set aside for a rainy day or for one’s children’s education, instead of appreciating, as logic would dictate, diminishes day by day, it does not make sense any longer to produce and to save. The basic motivation for each individual to get up in the morning and to work hard to achieve a higher living standard is removed, and time, therefore, turns into a dimension without any value. If people can’t save any longer, by government decree, then there is no other way than to consume. And with all traditionally safe investment options gone, they are only left with the option of speculating in rigged financial markets, and the massive risk that comes with it, especially now, when we’re nearing the end of a long-term debt cycle. 

    The individual is thus turned more and more into a state dependent, as the basis for a free life is financial independence and the ability have savings on the side that keep you self-reliant. The fundament of a successful system requires individuals that live a decent life, knowing that they must first produce before they can consume.

    The masses are trained and forced to consume and spend money they don’t have to buy things they don’t need. Our monetary system in combination with this kind of public policy causes mass overconsumption, the destruction of wealth, capital consumption, and the destruction and exploitation of nature. 

    People significantly add value to society if they are able to save, as this allows them to invest at a later stage, once they have accumulated as much as needed, and thereby aid others in their own efforts to succeed and to reach financial independence. Parents can help their children and investors can help budding new companies that bring innovative ideas that benefit the economy and society as a whole. As this virtuous cycle continues, based on productivity, long-term thinking, and responsible financial management, “the rising tide lift all boats”.

    To the contrary, when this natural process is forcibly disrupted and reversed, the effects are deleterious and far-reaching: mass overconsumption, the destruction of wealth, and the exploitation of nature and the environment are all symptoms of this institutional and massive push towards short-term thinking and of being forced to focus just on today, at the expense of tomorrow. 

    Wider Implications  

    Thus, what is at stake is not only the world economy, but the accelerating decline of Western culture, which, based on liberalism (personal freedom and private property rights) and Christianity (personal responsibility), laid the foundation for a decentralized Europe that allowed for competition of goods and services but especially the competition of ideas. This dangerous decline is nothing new, either, as it began after World War I, when Europe turned towards a more centralized approach, with all sorts of collectivist ideas causing all kinds of schisms that we still see today in modern societies. Today, we see a rapid acceleration of this decline, as our economic system can barely remain standing, and as our politics and our societies devolve even faster into tribal or more precisely into political identity groups, fighting each other over meaningless feuds. All the while they are distracted from the real threat, the one that governments and central banks pose to their future and to their children’s future.

    As long as people are afraid of liberty and falsely delegate their self-responsibility to a central authority, hope is dim. It’s time to think independently about whether today’s centralized system really makes sense, if it is sustainable, and for how much longer. If the answers to these questions scare you, it is pointless to expect solutions to come from above. It is then time to act directly and responsibly, with a solid plan, hard physical assets privately owned, and a long-term strategy that does not depend on the whims and caprices of those in charge.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 18:25

  • 'Love Trump, Hate The Wall': Texas Landowners Stymie Border Barrier Plans
    'Love Trump, Hate The Wall': Texas Landowners Stymie Border Barrier Plans

    The biggest obstacles to the construction of President Trump’s border wall aren’t blue-state politicians like California Gov. Gavin Newsom. Rather, Texas landowners who have refused to fork over their border plots are creating the biggest problems for the Trump Administration, according to the New York Times.

    Richard Drawe, the owner of a border plot in Progreso, Texas, told the NYT that he decided to capitulate and accept the government’s offer for his land rather than engage in a drawn-out legal battle.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Two days after signing over his land to the federal government, Drawe paused with his wife and mother on a levee that his family had owned for nearly a century.

    A border wall that he reluctantly agreed to put on his land will soon divide this Texan family from the whole scene: the levee, a lake, an onion field and all of those birds.

    Mr. Drawe, 69, doubts the wall will do much to stop illegal immigration, and though he supports the president who ordered it, he believes that the construction will “ruin” his life. But selling the land early on seemed better and cheaper than facing the government in court, only to have it take the land anyway, he reasoned. The wall, the lights and the roads will be built on about a dozen acres that his grandfather bought in the 1920s, and that will cut him off from the priceless views of the Rio Grande that he cherishes.

    “We just finally gave up,” he said. “If they offered me a million dollars to build the wall, I would refuse it if I knew they wouldn’t build it. I don’t want the money. This is my life here.”

    With the election less than a year away, President Trump is scrambling to fulfill his promise to build 450 miles of border wall by the end of next year.

    The other challenges still facing Trump’s “big, beautiful” wall include an ongoing investigation into government contracts and a legal ruling blocking emergency access to Defense Department funds that Trump tried to re-allocate to the wall.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: BBC

    The nationwide injunction has, for now, curtailed work on 175 miles of wall from Laredo to El Paso, and from Yuma to El Centro.

    According to Customs and Border Protection, the administration has thus far only built 93 miles of the wall, nearly all of it on federal land where dilapidated barriers once stood. Mark Morgan, the acting commissioner of the CBP, insisted that the government will meet its goal for the wall.

    “It’s hard right now to say whether we’re still going to meet that goal,” Mr. Morgan said of building the wall by 2021. “But I’m confident we’re going to be close.”

    The US brought more than 300 cases against landowners for their property after President George W. Bush signed a bill to begin installing fencing along the border in 2006, according to a Texas nonprofit. Some 46 of those cases are still ongoing.

    Years ago, the government reached a settlement to acquire the land of most of the other property owners, and some of the fencing is now being reinforced to transform it into a veritable wall. The Trump Administration picked up where Bush left off, filing 48 lawsuits to help it begin work on other parcels of property.

    Even if landowners decide to put up a fight, their odds of success aren’t great, thanks to a little something called “Eminent Domain,” as one attorney who spoke to the NYT pointed out.

    “They’re going to acquire the land for their wall, whether you negotiate with them upfront or they end up filing a lawsuit and taking it by a declaration of taking,” said Roy Brandys, an attorney specializing in eminent domain who represented Mr. Drawe.

    For Drawe and his family, the worst part of the deal is that the government isn’t building the wall directly on the border; instead, the wall will be situated well within US territory, cutting Drawe and his family off from even more of their land, while also spoiling the family’s view of the Rio Grande.

    If the wall goes up, it’ll be the new border, Drawe reckons, meaning cartel members will likely continue raining down packages of drugs and other contraband across his property.

    Becky Jones, a property owner in California who has decided to fight the federal government, put it this way: “Forget deplorable Americans,” she said, “you’re disposable Americans if you happen to be on the south side of the wall.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 18:05

    Tags

  • Very Unusual Seismic Activity On West Coast Has Experts Extremely Concerned
    Very Unusual Seismic Activity On West Coast Has Experts Extremely Concerned

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    The west coast never stops shaking, but lately the shaking has gone to an entirely new level, and this has many people deeply concerned about what may be coming. Last summer, a series of alarming foreshocks immediately preceded the two historic quakes that shook the Ridgecrest area in southern California. But those quakes were nothing compared to “the Big One” that scientists assure us is way overdue. Someday an earthquake that is hundreds of times stronger will absolutely devastate the California coastline, and it may be arriving a lot sooner than many people think. Farther north, the Cascadia subduction zone is a ticking time bomb that could literally unleash an unprecedented disaster at any moment. What I am talking about is an event that will completely wipe out entire cities and that the region will never recover from. As I have detailed repeatedly, authorities have warned us that “everything west of Interstate 5 will be toast” when an absolutely massive seismic event along the Cascadia subduction zone sends a gigantic tsunami sweeping inland.

    And without a doubt, that day is coming.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Because of the extreme damage that a major west coast seismic event would do to our economy and to our Internet infrastructure, all of our lives will dramatically change the moment it happens. So it is understandable why so many people are alarmed by the tremendous shaking that we have witnessed over the past few days. As Americans all over the country were celebrating Christmas, the state of California was shaken by 9 significant earthquakes, and farther north the city of Vancouver was rattled by a magnitude 6.3 quake

    A series of earthquakes on Christmas Eve and before dawn Christmas morning hit around California, and a much bigger 6.3 quake shook off Vancouver.

    At least nine earthquakes in 24 hours reaching up to 3.2 magnitude shook California from the Los Angeles area north to Chico, the U.S. Geological Survey reports.

    The other quakes in the swarm ranged from 2.5 to 3.0 magnitude and stretched the length of the state, according to the USGS.

    The large earthquake that shook Vancouver was preceded by five other large earthquakes that hit the region on Monday

    There were no reports of damage or injuries after five earthquakes struck within seven hours off the northwest end of Vancouver Island on Monday.

    The tremors began as minor quakes, but grew stronger as the morning turned to afternoon.

    According to the CBC, those five large earthquakes ranged in size from magnitude 4.8 to magnitude 6.0…

    • 5.1 (8:44 a.m. PT).

    • 5.6 (11:13 a.m.).

    • 5.8 (11:49 a.m.).

    • 6.0 (12:56 p.m.).

    • 4.8 (3:38 p.m.).

    Hopefully this earthquake swarm off the coast of Vancouver will turn out to be nothing.

    But scientists tell us that an enormous rupture of the Cascadia subduction zone has the potential to produce a giant tsunami hundreds of feet tall, and the death and destruction such a tsunami would cause in Vancouver, Seattle, Tacoma, Portland and other coastal communities in the Northwest would be absolutely off the charts.

    Meanwhile, we have also witnessed more than 30 significant earthquakes over last 30 days in the vicinity of Mt. Rainier, and anyone that is familiar with my work knows how concerned I am about the potential for a major eruption of that volcano.

    Because there is always at least a little bit of shaking going on along the west coast, many residents have been lulled into a false sense of security. Yes, a major disaster has not happened in a long time, and as a result many believe that there is nothing to be concerned about. But someday a major event will strike very suddenly, and the devastation will be unimaginable. Just consider what Steve Quayle recently told Greg Hunter

    “The amount of damage, and I am going to choose my words carefully, is going to be precedent setting. It’s going to be the combination of volcanos going off that are inland from the subduction zone where the plates meet, coupled with tsunamis. . . . When this happens, you will lose eight million to twenty million people. When it happens, you will lose all productivity in the electronic field, obviously Silicon Valley, and all food production in all of California, Oregon and Washington. When it happens, you will have a State of Emergency unlike any other. How about the refugees? There will be 3.5 million refugees to take care of. When this happens, what happens to the underground aquifers, and where does everybody go for fresh water? There will be years of drought, years of famine and years of water, water where did it all go? It is a very dire situation painted by computer models. This is not a sensational thing. It is a reality based, scientific study with the application of what happens.”

    Hopefully such an event will be delayed for as long as possible.

    But each day it gets a little closer.

    Before I get back to California, there is one more little tidbit from the Northwest that I wanted to share with you. On Friday, the city of Seattle experienced “its darkest day in recorded history”

    Seattle, the city known for its rainy weather and overcast, saw its darkest day in recorded history Friday due to several factors, including shorter days and dense cloud coverage.

    Pyranometers are devices installed in buildings on campus at the University of Washington that help scientists gauge just how dark the days actually get in the city, the Seattle Times reported. Scientists there monitor how much solar radiation reaches the ground during a 24-hour span.

    Could that be some sort of a harbinger?

    I don’t know, but certainly a lot of really weird things have been happening in the U.S. lately.

    Overall, there have been more than 1,200 earthquakes in the United States over the past week, and the majority of those quakes have happened in the state of California.

    Prior to the earthquake swarm that we witnessed on Christmas Eve and Christmas Day, a series of moderate quakes rattled the Ridgecrest area on Thursday and Friday

    Five months after the biggest earthquake in two decades, a swarm of smaller quakes rattled a secretive Navy base in the Mojave Desert Thursday afternoon and before dawn on Friday, according to the US Geological Survey.

    Five quakes magnitudes over 2.5 struck Naval Air Weapons Station China Lake between 3 p.m. Thursday and 3.30 a.m. Friday in Ridgecrest, CA, according to the Fresno Bee.

    That is the exact same area where two large earthquakes made headlines all over the globe last July.

    Could it be possible that another major event is on the way?

    As I repeatedly stress, we live at a time when our planet is becoming increasingly unstable.

    Maybe it won’t happen this week, and maybe it won’t happen this month, but scientists assure us that major seismic disasters are coming to the west coast.

    It is simply a matter of time, and time may be running out a whole lot more rapidly than most people would dare to imagine.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 17:45

  • El Chapo's Son Gives Away Cars To Sinaloa Locals At Christmas Party 
    El Chapo's Son Gives Away Cars To Sinaloa Locals At Christmas Party 

    Ivan Archivaldo Guzmán, the son of jailed drug kingpin Joaquín “El Chapo” Guzmán, took a page right out of the infamous drug lord Pablo Escobar’s handbook of how to run a successful drug cartel, with generous giveaways at a lavish Christmas party for locals in his home state of Sinaloa, reported the Daily Mail

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Social media posts detailed the events of the party — including the gifts received by locals: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A Honda Civic was one of the cars given away at the holiday bash.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Three subcompact cars were spotted in another picture. In all, ten cars and SUVs were gifted to locals. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Several photos showed boxes of gifts lined up for locals to take home after the party. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One picture revealed how a live band was playing. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Daily Mail said locals were thankful for the gifts and shouted, “Thank You Ivan Archivaldo Guzmán.” 

    A tag on one of the gift bags read: “May this season be full of happiness … [may] the light provide you faith and love. Iván Archivaldo wishes you a Merry Christmas and a Happy New Year.” 

    Iván is one of six sons of El Chapo, the founder of the Sinaloa Cartel. El Chapo was captured by Mexican authorities in 2016, then extradited to the US a year later. He now awaits trial in New York. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 17:25

  • DeVos, DOJ Slam Campuses Behaving As "Mini Police States"
    DeVos, DOJ Slam Campuses Behaving As "Mini Police States"

    Authored by Seth Segal via Campus Reform,

    Mississippi community college is defending itself against allegations from the DOJ and Betsy DeVos that it positions itself as a “police state” and threatens the free speech rights of its students.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In September, the Foundation for Individual Rights in Education filed a lawsuit against Jones College after the school threatened to arrest student members of Young Americans for Liberty for their efforts to initiate a conversation about marijuana legalization on campus. The campus police stopped the YAL members from tabling to raise awareness about this issue. FIRE sued the school on behalf of YAL and student Michael Brown.

    Now the Department of Justice is weighing in on the matter, releasing a statement insisting that “College  campuses  should not be mini  police states.”

    “The United States of America is not a police state,” said assistant attorney general for the Civil Rights Division Eric Dreiband, adding “Repressive speech codes are the indecent hallmark of despotic, totalitarian regimes. They have absolutely no place in our country.”

    US secretary of education Betsy DeVos also weighed in on the free speech of students at Jones County Junior College saying that the situation is “yet another concerning example of students encountering limits on what, when, where, and how they learn.”

     “This is happening far too often on our nation’s campuses. This Administration won’t let students be silenced. We stand with their right to speak and with their right to learn truth through the free exchange of ideas—particularly those with which they might disagree,” DeVos added.

    Jones County Junior College told Campus Reform that it “has reviewed the statement of interest filed by the federal government on this matter,” and that “At this time a preliminary motion to dismiss certain claims against certain defendants is pending before the court.”

    The school disputed the legitimacy of the allegations, telling Campus Reform that “the only alleged facts in the record come from the unproven statements contained in the plaintiffs’ complaint,” and complains that the DOJ’s statement “broadly accepts those allegations and the merits of plaintiffs’ claims. The College looks forward to the Court’s ruling on the motion to dismiss and to developing the facts of this case through the discovery process.”

    The institution assured Campus Reform that its “goal has always been to ensure that all students have equal and safe access to an environment free from hate speech; racial, gender, national origin, religious affiliation; and disability discrimination.”

    “The plaintiffs’ allegations require the College to actively defend itself, its employees, and the Trustees from the position that no harm was done to the plaintiff by the College. Our mission is to teach the ideals of a democratic society. We focus every effort to ensure our students have access to their future through advanced affordable education that stands not only on free inquiry but promotes learning, advances knowledge, and promotes economic growth for the American family,” the college added.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 17:05

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th December 2019

  • An End To The World As We Know It?
    An End To The World As We Know It?

    Authored by Philip Giraldi via The Unz Review,

    At the end of the nineteenth century, Lord Palmerston stated what he thought was obvious, that “England has no eternal friends, England has no perpetual enemies, England has only eternal and perpetual interests.” Palmerston was saying that national interests should drive the relationships with foreigners. A nation will have amicable relations most of the time with some countries and difficult relations with some others, but the bottom line should always be what is beneficial for one’s own country and people.

    If Palmerston were alive today and observing the relationship of the United States of America with the rest of the world, he might well find Washington to be an exception to his rule. The U.S., to be sure, has been adept at turning adversaries into enemies and disappointing friends, and it is all done with a glib assurance that doing so will somehow bring democracy and freedom to all.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, either neoliberal democracy promotion or the neoconservative version of the same have been seen as an overriding and compelling interest during the past twenty years even though the policies themselves have been disastrous and have only damaged the real interests of the American people.

    The U.S. relationship with Israel is, for example, driven by a powerful and wealthy domestic lobby rather than by any common interests at all yet it is regularly falsely touted as being between two “close allies” and “best friends.” It has cost Americans hundreds of billions of dollars in subsidies for the Jewish state and Israeli influence over U.S. policy in the Middle East region has led to catastrophic military interventions in Afghanistan, Lebanon, Iraq, Syria, Mogadishu and Libya. Currently, Israel is agitating for U.S. action against the nonexistent Iranian “threat” while also unleashing its lobby in the United States to make illegal criticism of any of its war crimes, effectively curtailing freedom of speech and association for all Americans.

    Far more dangerous is the continued excoriation of the Kremlin over the largely mythical Russiagate narrative. Congress has recently approved a bill that would give to Ukraine $300 million in supplementary military assistance to use against Russia. The money and authorization appear in the House of Representatives version of the national defense authorization act (NDAA) that passed last week.

    The bill is a renewal of the controversial Ukraine Security Assistance Initiativethat Donald Trump allegedly manipulated to bring about an investigation of Joe Biden’s son Hunter. The new version expands on the former assistance package to include coastal defense cruise missiles and anti-ship missiles as offensive weapons that are acceptable for export to Kiev. It also authorizes an additional $50 million in military assistance on top of the $250 million congress had granted in last year’s bill, “of which $100 million would be available only for lethal assistance.”

    Ukraine sought the money and arms to counter Russian naval dominance in the Black Sea through its base at Sevastopol in the Crimea. One year ago the Russian navy captured three Ukrainian warships and Kiev was unable to push back against Moscow because it lacked weapons designed to attack ships. Now it will have them and presumably it will use them. How Russia will react is unknowable.

    Dmytro Kuleba, Ukraine’s Deputy Prime Minister for European and Euro-Atlantic Integration, has been in Washington lobbying for the additional military assistance. He has had considerable success, particularly as there is bipartisan support in Congress for aid to Kiev and also because the Trump Departments of Defense and State as well as the National Security Council are all on board in countering the “Russian threat” in the Black Sea. President Trump signed the NDAA last week, which completed the process.

    Far more ominously, Kuleba and his interlocutors in the administration and congress have been revisiting a proposal first surfaced under Bill Clinton, that Ukraine and Georgia should be admitted to the NATO alliance. Like the $300 million in military aid, there appears to be considerable bipartisan support for such a move. NATO already has a major presence on the Black Sea with Bulgaria, Romania and Turkey all members. Adding Ukraine and Georgia would completely isolate the Russian presence and Moscow would undoubtedly see it as an existential threat.

    The NDAA also provides seed money to initiate the so-called Space Force, which President Trump inaugurated by describing it as “the world’s newest war-fighting domain. Amid grave threats to our national security, American superiority in space is absolutely vital. We’re leading, but we’re not leading by enough, but very shortly we’ll be leading by a lot. The Space Force will help us deter aggression and control the ultimate high ground.”

    If that isn’t bad enough, the new defense budget ominously also requires the Trump administration to impose sanctions “with respect to provision of certain vessels for the construction of certain Russian energy export pipelines.” Last week the House of Representatives and Senate approved specific sanctions relating to the companies and governments that are collaborating on the construction of the Nord Stream 2 pipeline that will cross the Baltic Sea from Vyborg to Greifswald to connect Germany with Russian natural gas. President Trump has signed off on the legislation.

    The United States has opposed the project ever since it was first mooted, claiming that it will make Europe “hostage” to Russian energy, will enrich the Russian government, and will also empower Russian President Vladimir Putin to be more aggressive. Engineering companies that will be providing services such as pipe-laying will be targeted by Washington as the Trump administration tries to halt the completion of the $10.5 billion project.

    Now that the NDAA has been signed, the Trump administration has 60 days to identify companies, individuals and even foreign governments that have in some way provided services or assistance to the pipeline project. Sanctions would block individuals from travel to the United States and would freeze bank accounts and other tangible property that would be identified by the U.S. Treasury. One company that will definitely be targeted for sanctions is the Switzerland-based Allseas, which has been contracted with by Russia’s Gazprom to build the offshore section of pipeline. It has suspended work on the project while it examines the implications of the sanctions.

    Bear in mind that Nord Stream 2 is a peaceful commercial project between two countries that have friendly relations, making the threats implicit in the U.S. reaction more than somewhat inappropriate. Increased U.S. sanctions against Russia itself are also believed to be a possibility and there has even been some suggestion that the German government and its energy ministry might be sanctioned. This has predictably resulted in pushback from Germany, normally a country that is inclined to go along with any and all American initiatives. Last week German Foreign Minister Heiko Maas asked Congress not to meddle in European energy policy, saying “We think this is unacceptable, because it is ultimately a move to influence autonomous decisions that are made in Europe. European energy policy is decided in Europe, not in the U.S.”

    German Bundestag member Andreas Nick warned that “It’s an issue of national sovereignty, and it is potentially a liability for trans-Atlantic relations.” That Trump is needlessly alienating important countries like Germany that are genuine allies, unlike Israel and Saudi Arabia, over an issue that is not an actual American interest is unfortunate. It makes one think that the wheels have definitely come off the cart in Washington.

    The point is that Donald Trump, Mike Pompeo, Mike Pence and Mike Esper (admittedly too many Mikes) wouldn’t know a national interest if it hit them in the face. Their politicization of policy to “win in 2020” promoting apocalyptic nonsense like war in space has also reinforced an existing tunnel vision on what Russia under Vladimir Putin is all about that is extremely dangerous. Admittedly, Team Trump throws out sanctions in all directions with reckless abandon, mostly aimed at Russia, Iran, North Korea and, the current favorite, Venezuela. No one is immune. But the escalation going from sanctions to arming the Kremlin’s enemies is both reckless and pointless. Russia will definitely strike back if it is attacked, make no mistake about that, and war could easily escalate with tragic consequences for all of us. That war is perhaps becoming thinkable is in itself deplorable, with Business Insider running a recent piece on surviving a nuclear attack. New homes in target America will likely soon come equipped with bomb shelters, just like in the 1950s.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 12/26/2019 – 00:00

    Tags

  • Large, Non-Government Drones Flying In Mysterious Grid Pattern Over Colorado
    Large, Non-Government Drones Flying In Mysterious Grid Pattern Over Colorado

    Several of large, non-government drones have been flying in what the Denver Post describes as a ‘nighttime search pattern’ over northeast Colorado.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With estimated wingspans of six-feet, the aircraft have been covering 25-square-mile plots of Phillips and Yuma counties every night between 7 – 10 p.m. for around a week, Phillips County Sheriff Thomas Elliott said Monday, adding that they have received nine calls about the drones since last week. 

    “They’ve been doing a grid search, a grid pattern,” he said “They fly one square and then they fly another square.

    Nobody knows who’s flying them

    Several agencies, including the sheriff’s office, the Army, the Air Force, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA), say they have no knowledge of the mysterious aircraft or who is operating them, however Undersheriff William Meyers suggested that “The estimated size and number of drones makes it unlikely that they’re being flown by hobbyists.”

    Drone pilots aren’t required to submit flight plans unless planning to operate in controlled airspace, such as an airport.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    UAV and Drone Solutions monitoring aircraft (via AOPA.org)

    Meyers says he watched eight of the large drones flying along the Yuma County border, while a single drone was spotted simultaneously hovering around 25 miles away over the town of Paoli. According to the report “it didn’t move all night, just hovered over the town,” while eight more drones flew 10 miles away over the town of Haxtun, Meyers added.

    “Overhead they were probably doing 30, 40 mph,” he said. “They weren’t racing or flying around with speed.”

    One resident who spotted a drone last week gave chase, Elliott said, driving behind it at about 50 mph, but lost the drone when he ran out of gas in Washington County.

    The machines fly too high to be heard from the ground but can be seen by their strobing white lights along with red, blue and green lights, Myers said.

    Myers suspects the drones might be operated by a private company, although the machines haven’t targeted any obvious landmarks or features — sometimes they fly over towns, other times over empty fields.

    “They do not seem to be malicious,” Elliott said. “They don’t seem to be doing anything that would indicate criminal activity.” –Denver Post

    Denver-based commercial photographer Vic Moss, a drone pilot and owner of an online drone school (Drone U), said on Monday he thinks either a company or government agency is behind the flights.

    “We have a number of drone companies here in Colorado, and they’re very innovative,” said Moss, adding “So maybe they’re testing something of theirs out in that area because it is very rural. But everyone that I know of, they coordinate all that stuff with local authorities to prevent this very situation. They all very much want people to understand drones and not cause this kind of hysteria.”

    Moss suggests that the grid pattern may indicate some type of mapping or searching operation, adding that perhaps they are flying at night in order to use infrared cameras – which are sometimes used to examine crops.

    He also says that the pilots are unlikely to be breaking any laws, as “The way Colorado law is written, none of the statutes fit for harassment or trespassing.”

    “Colorado hasn’t gotten on board with identifying the airspace around your property as the actual premises, so we don’t have anything we could charge.”

    The FAA does say that drones weighing under 55 lbs must be flown during daylight hours, within sight of the pilot, under 400 feet, and not directly over people. Pilots can apply for waivers.

    It’s also not clear whether the drones over Phillips and Yuma counties would be governed by those regulations. A drone the size of the ones spotted over the counties likely would weigh more than 55 pounds, Moss said. That means the drone operator would be flying commercially and would likely need to be a “manned aviator” — an actual pilot, Moss said.

    Chuck Adams, CEO of 1Up Aerial Drone Services in Golden, said that he wasn’t sure who might be flying the drones, but said his company does offer “drone defense” systems that can help people on the ground discover where drones are being flown from. –Denver Post

    “It’s something we put up with radio frequency and acoustics, and you can tell where the operator is and where the drones are,” said Adams. “We can’t take them out of the sky, but we can give awareness.”

    And according to Sheriff Elliott, people can stop calling about the drones.

    “We just want to know if one lands, if we can get our hands on it, or if they see someone operating them, that’s what we’re looking for now,” he said. “We know they exist.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 23:15

  • Mary And Joseph's Battle Against The State
    Mary And Joseph's Battle Against The State

    Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    The story of Christmas begins with a 90-mile trek in a dangerous world of robbers both private and public. It was the first imposition of a head tax in that generation, by the tyrannical Caesar Augustus, who ruled the Roman Empire from 27 BC until AD 14. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And you know he had major ego issues. He changed the name of the month Sextillia to name it after himself: August. The calendar still pays him homage. 

    His major ambition in his reign was to restore a centralized empire. Raising revenue was a major priority of the regime, and this tax was a means of accomplishing that goal. 

    Few people give voluntarily to any state. The state must rely on enforcement via coercion, including beatings and imprisonment. A state needs a standard by which to judge compliance, which means that taxation always and everywhere begins with accounting for all the people, their income and jobs. 

    It was precisely this with the Edict of Caesar Augustus. 

    Eugene W. Seraphin, writing for The Catholic Biblical Quarterly (January, 1945) explains as follows:

    In the days of the Republic, no one had ever tried to settle how much money was needed to carry on the government, and how much of this sum each province ought justly to pay in the form of taxes. Augustus proceeded to put together huge census lists and property assessments, by which to determine the population and the total value of the property in each province

    Suidas, a Greek lexicographer of the tenth century, wrote that 

    Augustus, having become the sole master, chose twenty men distinguished for integrity and probity, and sent them through all the earth subject to him, to make a census of persons and goods, in order to apportion justly the contributions which should be paid into the public treasury. This was the first census. That which had preceded The Edict of Caesar Augustus was sort of a spoliation of the rich, as though the state regarded the possession of property as a public crime.

    The entire process was incredibly invasive and reminds us that state surveillance is nothing new. The emperor wanted the name, age, profession, and an accounting of the personal wealth of every person over the age of 14. All this was recorded in official records. 

    Getting revenue always and everywhere begins with accounting for all the people, their income and jobs. For every Roman, compliance meant registering in the town in which he or she lived. 

    For Jews, it was different. They had to return to their home of heritage, which in the case of Joseph was Bethlehem, the “land of the Jews.” Thus began the journey with his bride-to-be Mary who was already very much with child. To be clear, this was not a trip they undertook willingly; it was forced on them by the state. Augustus was effectively drafting people into his taxing regime. 

    And here too we see an early implementation of identity politics. Joseph and Mary were not just counted and taxed; they were counted and taxed as Jews. The state in these pre-liberal days considered it public business to assign everyone a tribe  – a collective identity whether or not he or she felt an attachment to that tribe. No one could escape. They were forced to return to a homeland that the state defined for them. 

    Joseph had to leave his business behind. Mary, who should have been resting in bed, risked her life and that of a child to travel on dangerous roads for days, to comply with the edict. 

    As the couple arrived in Bethlehem, we are told that they were unable to find a place to stay, which today we render as some kind of discrimination. This is ridiculous. There were no commercial hotels in Bethlehem. There were only places to stay based on the kindness of strangers in exchange for small gifts. The whole place was overcrowded because everyone was rushing to avoid the penalties of law. 

    It was typical in those days, scholars tell us, that the living quarters of places were above where the animals stayed so that the animals could be a source of heat for the house. Mary and Joseph were generously given a place on the lower floor.

    The actions of the “innkeeper” here were generous and benevolent in a way in which the state that was bludgeoning these travelers was not. The state dragged an expecting woman and her plus one, based on their Jewishness, across dangerous terrain for three days solely so they could be counted and taxed. Meanwhile, the private sector provided them with shelter, safety, and love. 

    What a paradigm of truth here! The story of Mary and Joseph on their journey sets up the essential conflict of our own time: compulsion vs choice, the former being the brutal, something we all must deal with and work around in service to the state, and the latter being the compassionate and loving, enabling new life and light to be born into the world.

    As the story continues, recall that they were not safe there either. Face with a murderous order from King Herod, they had to leave again, this time for Eygpt. 

    Think about this story as you contemplate the surveillance, the identity politics, the impending internal passports, and the demographic controls of modern statism. These are tools of oppression. And think too of the beautiful opportunities afforded to us today by the benevolent hands of commerce and private charity. These are truly the saviors of the world. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 22:30

  • ​​​​​​​US Sends 4 Spy Planes Over N.Korea, But Ominous Christmas 'Gift' Didn't Come
    ​​​​​​​US Sends 4 Spy Planes Over N.Korea, But Ominous Christmas 'Gift' Didn't Come

    Given it’s now Dec. 26 in Korea, it looks like Kim Jong Un’s promised “Christmas gift” — or what many thought would be a long-range missile test — never arrived. Perhaps this was the actual gift in the most optimistic scenario: a softening of tensions and willingness to back down in the hope that nuclear talks would warm in this holiday season headed into 2020. 

    However, it’s not too late for some kind of “late present” brought by ‘Santa Kim’ given the following provocative US action on Christmas Day no less, as the Pentagon was likely closely monitoring to see if a ‘gift’ was being readied on the ground, via The Hill:

    The United States flew four surveillance planes over the Korean peninsula Wednesday, according to an aviation tracker, South Korea’s Yonhap news agency reported.

    …The U.S. flew four aircraft, the RC-135W Rivet Joint, E-8C, RQ-4 Global Hawk and RC-135S Cobra Ball, over the country between Tuesday and early Wednesday. The planes were believed to have carried out missions in and around the Korean Peninsula, Yonhap reported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    USAF Rivet Joint surveillance plane. 

    Yonhap further called the flyovers “unusual” and said it shows Washington took Pyongyang’s threatened Christmas “surprise” seriously. 

    Per the report

    Military sources confirmed to the news outlet that South Korea and the U.S. have strengthened efforts against the possibility of North Korea firing an ICBM or other weapons.

    “We’re keeping a close watch over military moves in North Korea,” said one of the sources, who the outlet declined to name.

    On Tuesday just ahead of Christmas celebrations at Mar-a-Lago, President Trump held out hope the ‘gift’ could turn out to be something positive. 

    “Let’s see what happens. Everybody’s got surprises for me, but let’s see what happens. I handle them as they come along,” Trump told reporters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustration via Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists

    “We’ll see what happens,” Trump added. “Maybe it’s a nice present. maybe it’s a present where he sends me a beautiful vase as opposed to a missile test.”

    But who knows just how North Korea will interpret the Christmas Day spy plane flyover? Perhaps Kim will take it as a sign of bad faith and will determine a potential belated holiday gift accordingly. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 21:45

  • A Farewell To Paper Money?
    A Farewell To Paper Money?

    Authored by Jeff Thomas via InternationalMan.com,

    A decade or more ago, I began to discuss with associates the possibility of governments and banks colluding to eliminate physical cash. Back then, the idea struck most everyone as poppycock, that governments could never get away with it.

    I didn’t write on the subject until 2015, when several countries had begun to limit the amount of money a depositor could extract from his bank account. At that point, the prospect that central banks might conceivably eliminate cash was looking less like an alarmist fantasy, and it became possible to write on the nascent issue.

    In a nutshell, today, in most of the world’s most prominent countries, the people who control banking are the same people who pull the strings in government. A cashless system therefore seemed to me to be a natural, as it dramatically increased both profit and power for both banking and government – an opportunity that can’t be passed up.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Benefit to Banking

    Some banks have been delving into negative interest rates, which is a euphemism for charging you to keep your money in the bank, so that they can loan it out for their own profit. You actually lose money annually by having it on deposit.

    Of course, some people accept negative interest rates in order to retain the imagined safety of having their cash in a bank vault, rather than at home. Others tolerate it because they value the convenience of using ATMs and chequing.

    But anyone else may simply decide to store their money at home and save the “reverse interest” charges.

    But what if cash were eliminated? No one would have a choice. They’d have to have a bank account and use it for all transactions, or they couldn’t purchase goods or pay bills.

    Once everyone accepted the concept that bankers had total control of transactions, that this was “normal,” banks would be in the catbird seat. They could raise the transaction fees considerably over time and the depositors would be unable to exit the system.

    The Benefit to Governments

    Governments would thoroughly endorse the idea, because it would mean that, for the first time, they’d have access to all information on your economic activity. The necessity of allowing people to file for income tax would vanish. In future, they could assess your annual tax themselves and take it from your account by direct debit. They could also begin taxing you monthly rather than annually, “for your convenience.”

    And in the bargain, we could anticipate that the charges would be numerous, confusingly worded on the monthly statement and difficult to figure out. That would allow both the banks and the government to periodically effect incremental increases.

    Once all your transactions were monitored, those that are “suspect” could be noted and even refused. Purchases at gun shops could be classified as “terrorist-related.” A transfer to a realtor in Panama could be classified as “money-laundering.”

    Since the War on Cash has become recognized in the last few years, many people have turned to cryptocurrencies as a means of retaining monetary freedom.

    However, as the future of financially pillaging the populace depends on ensuring that the populace have no option other than banks, will governments allow cryptos to flourish?

    Not if they can stop it. But can they?

    It’s been my contention that banks will at some point, launch their own cryptos, whilst doing all they can to discredit non-central bank cryptos as being potentially criminal.

    The Bank of Canada is now considering launching a digital currency that it says would help it combat the “direct threat” of cryptocurrencies. It would initially coexist with paper money, but would eventually replace it completely.

    They state further that banknotes are becoming obsolete as a means of payment, creating problems for the banking system as a whole: “The time may come that merchants/banks find it too costly to accept banknotes.”

    Translate that to mean that, if you insist on using banknotes, the bank will have no choice but to charge you a premium for their use.

    This has come on the heels of the plan by Facebook to release libra, its own cryptocurrency. The Bank of Canada states that “Facebook’s digital offering is losing key backers and facing scrutiny from regulators worldwide, including the Bank of Canada.”

    It suggests that central bank digital currencies allow banks to collect more information on Canadians than is possible when people use cash. “Personal details not shared with payee, but could be shared with police or tax authorities.”

    And if there are any remaining uncertainties to the benefits of non-central bank cryptos, they added, “Cryptocurrencies may become a direct threat to our ability to implement monetary policy and lender of last resort role.”

    On the surface, the statement from Bank of Canada appears to be an announcement of banking progress, for the betterment of depositors. But it’s the first report, to my knowledge, in which a bank declares bitcoin and other non-central bank cryptos as a “direct threat.”

    The above statement is a forerunner to declaring non-bank cryptos to be criminal in nature. Cryptos offer the hope of monetary freedom and that can’t be allowed.

    At some point, we can expect banks to disallow any payment for cryptos such as bitcoin through central bank cryptos and refuse accounts to anyone who has a history of dealing in non-central bank cryptos. The objective will be to eliminate the possibility that your grocer or gas station, along with any other bank depositor, might accept bitcoin. The intent will be to send bitcoin to the crypto graveyard.

    Unlike gold, bitcoin is intangible and cannot simply be stuffed in the mattress until such time as it regains its acceptance for convertibility, as gold has in the past. It doesn’t exist in physical form and only has a perceived value if another party is prepared to accept it in payment.

    The War on Cash is a war on your economic freedom. At present, most people still retain the ability to remove their wealth from the system, move it to a more wealth-friendly jurisdiction and hold it to forms that will retain value in the future.

    That window may close sooner, rather than later.

    *  *  *

    It’s no secret that governments are eager to eliminate cash. Part of the reason is that it would enable them to devalue their currencies faster. That’s precisely why, as the calls to eliminate cash grow louder, we’ve seen a massive increase in currency creation and inflation all around the world. It’s created an economic situation unlike we’ve ever seen before, and it’s all building up to a severe crisis on multiple fronts. That’s exactly why NY Times bestselling author Doug Casey and his team just released an urgent report on how to survive and thrive during an economic collapse. Click here to download the PDF now.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 21:00

  • Colleges Track Hundreds Of Thousands Of Students Using Their Phones
    Colleges Track Hundreds Of Thousands Of Students Using Their Phones

    “Graduates will be well prepared … to embrace 24/7 government tracking and social credit systems.”

    An app created to track the attendance of ‘less academically inclined’ college athletes is under fire, after over 40 schools have begun using the technology to monitor students campus-wide, according to the Washington Post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Syracuse professor Jeff Rubin says his lectures have never been so full

    Developed by former college basketball coach Rick Carter (who is currently under a restraining order by DePaul University for allegedly threatening the athletic director and head basketball coach), the Chicago-based SpotterEDU app uses Bluetooth beacons to ping a student’s smartphone once they enter a lecture hall. About the size of a deck of cards, they are installed in covert locations on walls and ceilings.

    School officials give SpotterEDU the students’ full schedules, and the system can email a professor or adviser automatically if a student skips class or walks in more than two minutes late. The app records a full timeline of the students’ presence so advisers can see whether they left early or stepped out for a break. –Washington Post

    Syracuse University IT instructor Jeff Rubin uses the app to encourage his students to attend lectures – awarding “attendance points” to those who show up. Rubin is also notified when students skip classes. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “They want those points,” said Rubin. “They know I’m watching and acting on it. So, behaviorally, they change.

    According to Rubin, his 340-student lecture has never been so full at around 90% attendance.

    Double Secret Dystopia

    Understandably, not everyone is thrilled with the intrusive new technology, which many argue breaches students’ privacy rights on a massive scale.

    We’re adults. Do we really need to be tracked?” said sophomore Robby Pfeifer, a student at Commonwealth University in Richmond, which recently began using the campus’ WiFi network to track students. “Why is this necessary? How does this benefit us? … And is it just going to keep progressing until we’re micromanaged every second of the day?

    School and company officials, on the other hand, argue that monitoring students is a powerful motivator and will encourage students to adopt habits geared towards success.

    “If they know more about where students are going, they argue, they can intervene before problems arise,” according to the Post.

    That said, some schools have taken things further – assigning “risk scores” to students based on factors such as whether they are going to the library enough.

    The dream of some administrators is a university where every student is a model student, adhering to disciplined patterns of behavior that are intimately quantified, surveilled and analyzed.

    But some educators say this move toward heightened educational vigilance threatens to undermine students’ independence and prevents them from pursuing interests beyond the classroom because they feel they might be watched.

    These administrators have made a justification for surveilling a student population because it serves their interests, in terms of the scholarships that come out of their budget, the reputation of their programs, the statistics for the school,” said Kyle M. L. Jones, an Indiana University assistant professor who researches student privacy.

    What’s to say that the institution doesn’t change their eye of surveillance and start focusing on minority populations, or anyone else?” he added. Students “should have all the rights, responsibilities and privileges that an adult has. So why do we treat them so differently?” –Washington Post

    “It embodies a very cynical view of education — that it’s something we need to enforce on students, almost against their will,” said UCSD digital scholarship librarian Erin Rose Glass. “We’re reinforcing this sense of powerlessness … when we could be asking harder questions, like: Why are we creating institutions where students don’t want to show up?

    Hilariously, creators of the dystopian surveillance app have tried to make things ‘more fun,’ by ‘gamifying students’ schedules with colorful Bitmoji or digital multiday streaks.’

    That said, “the real value may be for school officials, who Carter said can split students into groups, such as “students of color” or “out-of-state students,” for further review.”

    When asked why an official would want to segregate out data on students of color, Carter said many colleges already do so, looking for patterns in academic retention and performance, adding that it “can provide important data for retention. Even the first few months of recorded data on class attendance and performance can help predict how likely a group of students is to” stay enrolled.

    Students’ attendance and tardiness are scored into a point system that some professors use for grading, Carter said, and schools can use the data to “take action” against truant students, such as grabbing back scholarship funds. –Washington Post

    Meanwhile, another app from Austin-based start-up Degree Analytics uses WiFi check-ins to track around 200,000 students across 19 state universities, private colleges and other schools, according to the Post.

    Founded in 2017 by data scientist Aaron Benz, the company claims that every student can graduate with “a proper environment and perhaps a few nudges along the way.”

    According to Benz, his system can solve “a real lack of understanding about the student experience” by using campus WiFi data to measure and analyze 98% of students.

    But the company also claims to see much more than just attendance. By logging the time a student spends in different parts of the campus, Benz said, his team has found a way to identify signs of personal anguish: A student avoiding the cafeteria might suffer from food insecurity or an eating disorder; a student skipping class might be grievously depressed. The data isn’t conclusive, Benz said, but it can “shine a light on where people can investigate, so students don’t slip through the cracks.”

    To help find these students, he said, his team designed algorithms to look for patterns in a student’s “behavioral state” and automatically flag when their habits change. He calls it scaffolding — a temporary support used to build up a student, removed when they can stand on their own.

    At a Silicon Valley summit in April, Benz outlined a recent real-life case: that of Student ID 106033, a depressed and “extremely isolated” student he called Sasha whom the system had flagged as “highly at-risk” because she only left her dorm to eat. “At every school, there are lots of Sashas,” he said. “And the bigger you are, the more Sashas that you have.” –Washington Post

    Read the rest of the report here.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 20:15

    Tags

  • Israel's Military Chief Outlines Strategy For "Coming War" With Iran & Its Allies
    Israel's Military Chief Outlines Strategy For "Coming War" With Iran & Its Allies

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    The Chief-of-Staff for the Israeli Armed Forces, Aviv Kochavi, said on Wednesday that Israel cannot allow Iran to station militarily in Iraq. According to Ynet News, Kochavi stated on the seventh anniversary of the death of the former Chief-of-Staff, Amnon Lipkin Shahak, that the Israeli army would never allow Iran to be stationed in Iraq.

    “The Quds Force of the Iranian Revolutionary Guards in Iraq… transfer advanced weapons there monthly. We cannot leave this situation without interference,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image: Iranian Revolutionary Guard members attend a ceremony in Tehran.

    Furthermore Kochavi said that “there is an opportunity in the Gaza Strip, after the results of the ‘Black Belt’ operation, to develop a secure reality and make it more stable.”

    “In the coming war, we will have to attack with great force in populated areas and also target the state structure or the entity that allows terrorism to act against us,” Kochavi continued.

    The Israeli military official said that “in the coming war with Lebanon or with Hamas, the internal front in Israel will be subject to major rocket attacks, most of which are inaccurate, but will have an impact,” adding that “Israel will target everything that helps in combat operations, such as electricity, fuel, bridges, if the state of Lebanon, Syria or Hamas and others allow terrorism from its lands to be used against us.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and IDF Chief of Staff Aviv Kochavi (right), via Ynet News.

    Israel has accused Iran of transferring long-range weapons and missiles to Iraq, and from there to Syria and Hezbollah in Lebanon.

    The Popular Mobilization Units (Hashd Al-Shaabi) came under attack in July after a suspected Israeli drone carried out a devastating assault on a base in the Salaheddine Governorate.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 19:30

  • Wave Of Chinese Restaurants Close Across America
    Wave Of Chinese Restaurants Close Across America

    According to The New York Times, citing data from Yelp, the share of Chinese restaurants has dramatically fallen across major US metropolitan areas in the last five years. 

    Yelp data shows the share of Chinese restaurants in the top 20 metros has been in free fall since about 2014.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Five years ago, 7.3% of all restaurants in the top 20 metros were Chinese, compared with 6.5% today. The declining trend has resulted in over 1,200 fewer Chinese restaurants while these metros added over 15,000 more restaurants.

    The Times notes that the oldest Chinatown in the US is located in San Francisco, and even there, the share of Chinese restaurants shrank to 8.8% from 10% in 2014. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mass closings of Chinese restaurants show no signs of abating, Indian, Korean, and Vietnamese restaurants continue to hold a steady market share or increase nationwide. 

    One big reason for the rash of closings “seems to be the economic mobility of the second generation,” said The Times. 

    “It’s a success that these restaurants are closing,” said Jennifer 8. Lee, a former New York Times journalist. “These people came to cook so their children wouldn’t have to, and now their children don’t have to.”

    The children of Chinese immigrants have integrated into the economy and are less likely to take over their parent’s restaurant. 

    While the wave of closings has been underway for at least a half-decade, some restaurants, instead of closing, are selling operations to incoming first-generation immigrants who want the chance to cook Kung pow chicken to an overweight baby boomer. 

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 18:45

  • Colorado Man Robs Bank, Throws Cash In The Air Yelling "Merry Christmas!"
    Colorado Man Robs Bank, Throws Cash In The Air Yelling "Merry Christmas!"

    Authored by Emma Fiala via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    The holiday season has a way of bringing out both the best and the worst in people. As holiday consumption increases, unfortunately theft does as well from a host of places like porches, donation bins, stores, and even banks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But it isn’t often that the stolen goods are immediately redistributed in such an extremely noticeable fashion.

    Just after noon on Monday, a 65-year-old man walked into a downtown Colorado Springs, Colorado bank and stole thousands of dollars before running outside and tossing the cash up into the air while yelling “Merry Christmas!”

    “He robbed the bank, came out, threw the money all over the place,” Dion Pascale, a witness of the strange ordeal, told KKTV.

    “He started throwing money out of the bag and then said, ‘Merry Christmas!’”

    According to Pascale, when the robber was done tossing the cash in the air, he walked from outside of the Academy Bank and onto the patio of a nearby Starbucks, sat down, and waited for police to arrive and arrest him. He reportedly did not order a drink.

    The man, David Wayne Oliver, was arrested without incident. Police didn’t find a weapon on the man despite his having claimed that he was armed during the robbery.

    According to witnesses, bystanders retrieved some of the money and returned it to the bank but The Denver Post quoted police as saying “thousands of dollars” remained unaccounted for.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 18:00

  • "Like Watching A Car Crash In Slow Motion": Turkey Balks At US Sanction Threat, Warns It May Evict US Forces From Military Bases
    "Like Watching A Car Crash In Slow Motion": Turkey Balks At US Sanction Threat, Warns It May Evict US Forces From Military Bases

    Despite mounting political and diplomatic pressure by the US and its NATO allies, Turkey has again balked at US attempts of intimidation and dug into its refusal to abandon a new Russian missile defense, saying it won’t bow to the threat of crippling US sanctions or trade the S-400s for an American system.

    “They said they would not sell Patriots unless we get rid of the S-400s. It is out of question for us to accept such a precondition,” said Ibrahim Kalin, a spokesman for President Recep Tayyip Erdogan, late on Tuesday after a cabinet meeting, quoted by Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Parts of Russian S-400 defense system unloaded from a Russian plane at Murted Airport near Ankara in August; Photo: Turkish Defense Ministry

    “An irrational anti-Turkish sentiment has prevailed in the Congress and it is not good for Turkish-American relations,” Kalin added, noting that Congress “should know that such language of threat would push Turkey exactly toward places that they don’t want it turn to.” Namely, right into the hands of Vladimir Putin, who is on even better terms with Erdogan than Trump, despite Turkey taking down a Russian fighter jet over its territory several years back.

    Separately, as the WSJ reported this morning, Erdogan once again warned that he would evict U.S. forces from two military bases in his country if Washington imposes new sanctions on his government, creating a bitter quandary for NATO as it seeks to cope with Ankara’s deepening ties to Russia.

    In a television interview this month, President Recep Tayyip Erdogan said if the U.S. punishes Turkey for its purchase of a Russian air-defense system, then, “if necessary, we may close Incirlik and Kureci,” installations where the U.S. keeps approximately 50 B61 nuclear weapons, and operates critical radar.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Erdogan’s declaration elicited an anxious reaction from U.S. Defense Secretary Mark Esper, who said it raised questions about Turkey’s dedication to the North Atlantic Treaty Organization: “They have that inherent right to house or to not house NATO bases or foreign troops,” Esper said. “But again, I think this becomes an alliance matter, your commitment to the alliance, if indeed they are serious about what they are saying.”

    “It feels like watching a car crash in slow motion,” a Western diplomat in Turkey told the WSJ.

    The main bone of contention is Turkey’s purchase of the S-400 system, which the Pentagon views as a security threat to NATO. The U.S. has suspended deliveries of the F-35 Joint Strike Fighter to Turkey and excluded Turkish aerospace companies from a contract to supply fuselage and other parts, saying Russia could use the system’s radar to spy on and assess the stealthy aircraft’s capabilities.

    As has been duly covered here for the past two years, US Congress has been pushing for sanctions against Turkey, which has NATO’s second biggest standing army after the US, over the country’s purchase of the Russian S-400 despite the objection of President Donald Trump, who has developed a particularly close relationship with Turkey’s Erdogan in the past year, and who says such a move could drive Turkey closer to Moscow.

    And just to make sure Congress is really furious, Turkey intends to purchase a second Russian S-400 battery and pursue a joint-development agreement with Moscow in order to be able to produce its own sophisticated ballistic missiles, a move that will spark chaos among NATO member nations; as a reminder, NATO only exists to feed the US military-industrial complex with organic customers for advanced weapon systems. By using Russia for its most advanced military needs, Turkey has taken that old maxim and flipped it on its head.

    The Trump administration has sought to cajole Erdogan in a bid to prevent Ankara from knitting closer ties with Moscow amid concerns that treating him like a pariah would push Turkey further into Russia’s orbit, U.S. officials said. But Trump has had to contend with angry U.S. lawmakers, who have voted through a string of bills aimed at punishing Turkey.

    The US president has so far refrained from using a piece of legislation that allows the U.S. president to slap sanctions on any country that makes a sizable arms purchase from Russia. But a Senate committee recently approved a bill that would enforce the legislation, which could freeze Turkish assets in the U.S., restrict visas and limit access to credit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In response to growing Western anger, Turkish officials proposed setting up an expert committee with the U.S., or under NATO supervision, to look into the S-400 issue and propose remedies. But US officials told the WSJ, Washington would rather pay substantial compensation than deliver a single F-35 to Turkey and jeopardize the integrity of the multibillion-dollar program.

    Highlighting the impasse, Turkey carried out a test of the S-400 system, deployed at an airbase near Ankara, against U.S.-made F-16 jets in late November, and it said it might order Russian combat aircraft if the F-35 delivery ban wasn’t lifted.

    “Turkish national-security interests must be regarded as one of the primary issues for the U.S. and NATO,” said Ahmet Berat Conkar, a Turkish lawmaker affiliated with Mr. Erdogan’s ruling AK Party, and the deputy head of Turkey’s delegation to the NATO Parliamentary Assembly. “If this cannot be openly guaranteed and maintained by concrete action for Turkey, new cracks may open inside the NATO alliance.”

    The biggest irony is that in effecting its de facto breach from NATO, Turkey is also exposing the hypocrisy that runs through the heart of the military alliance. As the Journal notes, “some European allies bristle that NATO uses language similar to Turkey’s, which says that its invasion of northern Syria is for national security interests, and voice concerns that the West’s alliance gave Turkey too much leeway to expand its military partnership with Russia.”

    Turkey, which is already coordinating with Russia in northern Syria, is now also seeking to cooperate with Russia in war-torn Libya.

    “Turkey is playing a showdown and it is winning,” a senior European diplomat at NATO said.

    It is indeed, and the only recourse the West has is to slap crippling sanctions on its economy in hopes of forcing Erdogan to realign his attitude. As Bloomberg reminds us, the last time the U.S. sanctioned Turkey last summery, to pressure it to release a detained U.S. pastor, the lira crashed and sent the Turkish economy into a recession from which it is still recovering.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 17:15

  • All I Want For Christmas Is An Unmanipulated Market
    All I Want For Christmas Is An Unmanipulated Market

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    The irony, of course, is that only those punters who sold on the way up will escape the devastation of the collapse into a bidless “market.”

    All I want for Christmas is an unmanipulated market, because manipulated markets always crash big and crash hard. Virtually every market in America is heavily manipulated by the Federal Reserve, which creates currency out of thin air to either buy assets (outright market manipulation) or distribute to financiers, banks and corporations, which then manipulate the markets with their own profiteering (stock buybacks, leveraged buyouts, derivatives, etc.).

    The Fed decided long ago that the housing and stock markets were too critical as signals that all is well to remain real markets, because real markets fluctuate and on occasion crash, especially if participants are playing fast and loose with debt, leverage and speculative bets placed with zero collateral (or fake collateral, which is the same thing).

    To make sure no decline could ever collapse the happy-happy euphoria of ever-rising markets, the Fed turned markets into simulations of real markets, controlled “markets” masquerading as real markets in which price and value are set by participants, not central banks and proxies of central banks.

    The key characteristics of markets are price discovery and the free flow of information about prices, supply, demand, quality, cost of credit, creditworthiness of buyers, etc.

    Without a free flow of information and transparent-to-all-participants bids and asks (the price being offered by buyers and sellers), the market can’t discover the price (value) of credit, goods, services, collateral, assets, etc.

    Once markets have been stripped of the ability to discover price, nobody can trust the values being presented as “real” are actually based on reality. In the current simulacrum of a real market, the “price” is set by the Fed or its proxies, and there is a purposeful / profitable information asymmetry between high frequency traders and other insiders and everyone outside the inner circles who are kept in the dark while insiders skim billions in no-risk profits from the victims of this information asymmetry.

    Right now market participants are euphorically confident that value no longer matters; the only thing that matters is the Fed wants stocks and housing to move higher, and they can move markets at will with their firehouse of trillions of dollars.

    In other words, participants are confident the Fed is the market, but it’s no longer a market at all. This mirage market has worked splendidly for the Fed, since it continues to signal all is well by rising year after year.

    But manipulated markets are a mile wide and an inch deep. Everyone thinks selling won’t happen or can’t happen because the Fed is essentially guaranteeing that “buy the dips” will reward buyers. This was precisely what happened in 2008: The Fed reckoned the system had plenty enough liquidity to absorb any selling, but the liquidity was only an inch deep; once real selling hit the “market,” it collapsed, as buyers dried up and blew away.

    Manipulating markets into “signaling” mechanisms insures the eventual crash will not be stopped by applying the same manipulations that destroyed price discovery and trust. Everyone knows the price has lost connection with reality, and so every punter and algo is one second away from hitting “sell” and locking in the gains from a manipulated bubble.

    The irony, of course, is that only those punters who sold on the way up will escape the devastation of the collapse into a bidless “market.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the Fed will discover, providing “liquidity” isn’t the same as conning buyers to get wiped out when the selling tsunami hits.

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer? Profit, Power and A.I. in a Traumatized World (Kindle $6.95, print $11.95) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($6.95 (Kindle), $12 (print), $13.08 ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 16:45

  • Iran Again Blocks Internet & Mobile Service Ahead Of Protesters' Funerals 
    Iran Again Blocks Internet & Mobile Service Ahead Of Protesters' Funerals 

    Fearing the potential for renewed protests and violent clashes with police, Iran has again blocked internet and mobile access to broad section of the country on Wednesday.  

    This as several funerals will be held over the coming days for protesters killed last month amid a severe government crackdown, which also witness an unprecedented nationwide internet blockage which lasted for a week or more in some provinces. 

    Citing Iranian state media, Bloomberg reports, “The mourning services are scheduled to begin on Thursday. The independent Shargh newspaper said five unidentified provinces will be subject to the blackout, while ILNA said internet users in those areas will have access to a limited number of state-approved Iran websites and applications.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Protesters last month torched gas stations and banks, angry at a sudden massive gas price hike, which turned anti-government, via The Guardian. 

    Government authorities are reportedly acting in response to relatives of some among the killed who have posted to social media calling for renewed protests to be held on Thursday in conjunction with ceremonies commemorating the victims (various estimates put those killed from the November protests ranging from 200 to over 300, with the US State Dept. claiming multiple times that number).

    The US as well as various human rights organizations have accused Tehran authorities of quelling protests — initially sparked by a huge gas price hike when subsidies were slashed — with live ammunition and other brutal tactics. 

    Thus it appears the government is making a move to prevent large-scale protests before they gain momentum. State-run ILNA said of the mobile and internet blockage: “According to this source, it is possible that more provinces will be affected by the shutdown of mobile international connectivity,” after it appeared to spread on Wednesday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And internet blockage observatory NetBlocks said, according to Reuters: “Confirmed: Evidence of mobile internet disruption in parts of #Iran …real-time network data show two distinct drops in connectivity this morning amid reports of regional outages; incident ongoing.”

    Washington has condemned such attempts to dramatically restrict communications; however, Iran’s leadership has said it is taking efforts to thwart external US-Saudi-Israeli regime change efforts to hijack and guide the protests.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 16:15

  • Local Moms Furious About Las Vegas Strip Club's Decision To Hand Out Tents To The Homeless
    Local Moms Furious About Las Vegas Strip Club's Decision To Hand Out Tents To The Homeless

    Like they say: No good deed goes unpunished.

    A Las Vegas strip club has created a furor in the community after it handed out tents and clothing to the homeless bearing the club’s name and logo.

    Club Deja Vu, which advertises itself as the “No. 1 topless strip club in the US,” decided to spend $50,000 on the merchandise and hand it out to the homeless in what appears to be a kind of political statement: The city recently passed an ordinance making it illegal for people to camp out on the sidewalk if there are still beds available in city shelters.

    That Vegas wants to crack down on homeless encampments is hardly surprising – just look at what’s happening in San Francisco.

    But it appears the club’s true aim in all of this is to try and exploit the homelessness crisis in Vegas for a bit of publicity.

    The club, on the other hand, tried to spin its decision to hand out tents and clothes as an act of compassion.

    “While some seem to think that the solution is a camping ban, we think that the solution is one that includes decency and kindness,” the club said in a statement to a local TV station.

    “This just seems like the right thing to do during the holidays.”

    Police will start enforcing the new city ordinance on Feb. 2.

    Several community members complained to KTNV Las Vegas about the inappropriate strip club merchandise. One local mother said her small children asked about the tents after driving by.

    The woman said she was surprised by the sight of the “disgusting” and “immoral” tents.

    Fortunately for Deja Vu, it looks like that $50,000 it spent on merchandise was marketing money well spent. Because according to another old saying: there’s no such thing as bad publicity.

    In fact, we imagine the club was deliberately courting this kind of controversy when it decided on the campaign.
     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 15:45

  • Is The TRACED Act "The Best Thing To Come Out Of Washington This Decade"?
    Is The TRACED Act "The Best Thing To Come Out Of Washington This Decade"?

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    Recent legislation to halt unwanted robocalls may be the best thing to come out of Washington in over a decade. This is providing it proves effective in stopping or at least substantially reducing those annoying calls that cause our phones to ring several times a week. The House of Representatives approved the Telephone Robocall Abuse Criminal Enforcement and Deterrence Act, or the TRACED Act, earlier this month. Now with the Senate voting unanimously to pass it, the bill is on its way to President Donald Trump’s desk for a signature.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The TRACED Act (Telephone Robocall Abuse Criminal Enforcement and Deterrence Act)was sponsored by Senators John Thune (R-SD), Ed Markey (D-MA), and Roger Wicker (R-MS). Its purpose is to combat robocalls with stronger deterrents. As the volume of illegal calls has increased, so has the attention of regulators. They are especially concerned about calls from scammers who target vulnerable people, such as the elderly, to steal their personal information.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nobody Wants These Call!

    In a piece titled; “Nobody Wants Your Robocall, Louie! – Stop Calling Me!” published in the middle of 2017 I bashed Washington for not taking action to end the robocall assault on the American people. Like many people, after being constantly bothered by nuisance calls and machine-generated messages I was past angry. Even a lying politician would have difficulty presenting an argument giving any merit to allowing people’s lives to be disrupted by such calls. Adding injury to insult is the fact is that we are paying for this intrusion into our lives every time we pay our phone bill.

    This legislation placing as much $10,000 per call.fine upon those behind what are obviously unwanted robocalls will reduce the incentive for companies to widely cast upon society their self-serving agenda. Before I declare this a significant win for consumers I want to see whether the Federal Communications Commission will or can actually enforce this law and get the job done.

    The TRACED Act requires phone companies to block robocalls at no charge to customers. They must also adopt call authentication technologies so carriers can verify that incoming calls are legitimate before they reach consumers’ phones. This builds on preventative measures taken by the FCC under Chairman Ajit Pai, who recently announced that the commission would move to criminalize international robocalls and spam texts.

    You would think that even a few high profile convictions would reduce the number of unwanted calls generated by machines. These calls are designed not to inform but to benefit a few at the expense of the many. Like many Americans, I have found that even being registered on the “no-call list” has proven ineffective in halting this intrusion into my life. I sill continue to get annoying recordings from Heather, Sara, or Rachael claiming she represents a credit card service center or inquiring about my student loan that doesn’t exist.

    After spending hundreds of billions of dollar on agencies such as the NSA it is difficult to think America does not have in place the expertise and apparatus to track down and identify the perpetrators of these calls.  Considering Washington is filled with elected officials that do little but annoy, debate, pander, and suck the blood out of us, trying to stop these calls is the least they can do. We should remember that both politicians and those who support them have used robocalls as a way to get their message to a public who they see as only a phone call away. Here, I’m referring to the calls during elections that sport political campaign messages.

    I find little comfort in knowing I’m not the only person suffering this barrage of unwanted calls. On average, about 167 million robocalls per day were made from January to November of this year, according to the YouMail Robocall Index. That totals more than 50 billion robocalls. Sen. John Thune (R-S.D.) said, “This bill represents a unique legislative effort that is not only bipartisan at its core, but it’s nearly unanimously supported in Congress.” Please forgive me if I remain dubious of whether anything will change. I will consider this legislation successful only after the calls have stopped. My question is why in the hell did it take so long to write such legislation and get it passed?


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 15:15

  • China's Imports Of US Soy Soar To 20 Month High As Food Inflation Explodes
    China's Imports Of US Soy Soar To 20 Month High As Food Inflation Explodes

    One year after China did not import even one ounce of US soybeans as the trade feud was escalating at the end of 2018, in November 2019, China – which has found itself roiled by soaring food prices – saw its imports of US soybeans surge to the highest in 20 months after more American cargoes cleared customs ahead of the alleged signing of the Phase One trade deal in January.

    According to data from China’s Customs Administration, China’s inbound shipments from the U.S. more than doubled to 2.6 million tons, the highest since March 2018, and up from about 1.1 million tons in October. As noted above, in November of 2018 – when the trade war between the two nations was escalating rapidly – China imported no U.S. soybeans.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Bloomberg notes, citing USDA data, China’s total commitments in the current marketing year hit 10.5 million tons, compared with just 2 million tons the previous year.

    That said, the surge in US soybean imports was not some trade war concession aimed at the US because as US imports jumped, so did China’s imports from its top Latin American markets: specifically, in November, China bought bought 3.9 million tons of soybeans from Brazil, Beijing’s largest supplier, up from 3.8 million tons in October and 5.1 million tons in November last year; imports from Argentina also rose from 959,936 tons in October to 1.4 million tons, and up from a tiny 36,119 tons in November last year.

    According to China’s National Grain and Oils Information Center, December imports may climb to about 9 million tons following more shipments from U.S., which could ease supply shortages at some crushers.

    And while China is unlikely to order less soybean from either Brazil or Argentina any time soon as the two nations have emerged as the two key supply chain alternatives to the US, where any trade goodwill may be undone with stroke of a tweet, Bloomberg notes that Chinese companies are likely to continue purchasing American soybeans especially if the two countries sign the partial trade deal in early January, in line with the market’s expectations.

    There is also China’s desperation to repopulate its decimated pig population and to do that, Beijing needs access to all the soybeans it can get. It explains why China has been issuing regular tariff waivers (which cover 30% of the retaliatory tariffs on US soybeans) for domestic firms to buy U.S. soybeans.

    That said, China was quick to pretend like the surge in US soybean purchases was in fact some concession, and shortly after the news of the import jump hit, China’s infamous twitter troll, Global Times editor Hu Xijin, tweeted “congrats to US farmers” adding a tacit threat that US farmers should “prod” the US government to sign the Phase One deal if they want China’s vital goodwill to continue, to wit: “meanwhile please prod the US government, making sure the two countries can sign phase one deal smoothly and the next trade talks continue to make progress. This is vital to stabilize China’s purchase of US farm products.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    What he really meant was that China, where we will soon need a bigger chart to show soaring food hyperinflation (and middle-class anger at surging good prices) is desperate to buy US agricultural products to keep prices lower, and with every passing months, Trump’s negotiating leverage rises in lockstep with Chinese food inflation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He also really meant “congrats to Chinese farmers” for procuring the soybeans they so urgently need if they are to have any hope of restocking China’s most popular protein: pork.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 14:45

  • A Majority Of US Adults Say 'Die Hard' Is Not A Christmas Movie
    A Majority Of US Adults Say 'Die Hard' Is Not A Christmas Movie

    For some movie buffs, it’s an argument that arises every holiday season: Is “Die Hard” starring Bruce Willis a Christmas movie?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After all, it takes place during a holiday office party, there’s Christmas music and it snows at the end. But then again, as Statista’s Maria Vultaggio notes, “Die Hard” is an action movie, was released as a summer blockbuster and centers around an extremist who was recently excommunicated from a West German political terrorist group.

    According to a poll by YouGov, barely 20 percent of people polled said “Die Hard” was a Christmas movie. The survey, conducted December 15, 2017, questioned 4,340 U.S. adults.

    Infographic: U.S. Adults Say 'Die Hard' Is Not a Christmas Movie | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    As far as the stars are concerned, Willis said the film wasn’t a Christmas movie during a Comedy Central Roast in 2018, while screenwriter Steven E. de Souza tweeted the opposite in 2017.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 14:15

  • The Wealth Redistribution Scam that Is "Inflation"
    The Wealth Redistribution Scam that Is "Inflation"

    Authored by Thortsen Polleit via The Mises Institute,

    The world over people are told that central banks pursue “price stability” by making sure that consumer goods prices do not rise by more than 2 percent per annum. This is, of course, a big sham. If the prices of goods rise over time, it does not take that much to understand that prices do not remain stable. And if the prices of goods increase over time, it necessarily means that the purchasing power of the money unit declines.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As money loses its purchasing power, income and wealth are stealthily redistributed. Some individuals and groups of people are enriched at the expense of others. Savers and workers are swindled out of their deserved income and retirement benefits, while those who own goods that rise in value or who borrow money typically reap a windfall profit. Clearly, the banking industry is a major beneficiary of monetary debasement.

    “Inflation” Is a Rise in the Quantity of Money

    Central banks are the very source of the phenomenon that all prices of goods tend to rise over time. They hold the money production monopoly and increase — in close cooperation with commercial banks — the outstanding quantity of money through credit expansion, an increase in the supply of credit that is not backed by real savings. It goes without saying that it is rather profitable to be active in the money-production business.

    The increase in the quantity of money results, and necessarily so, in higher prices compared to a situation in which the quantity of money has not been increased. This is no arbitrary assertion but stems from logical reasoning: a rise in people’s money holding lowers the marginal utility of the additional money unit, meaning that the marginal utility of other goods that can be exchanged against money rises.

    Consider the case in which the quantity of money in the hands of market agents rises. People will then exchange money balances (which have, from the viewpoint of the money holder, lost in marginal utility) against other vendible items (which have gone up in marginal utility). As people exchange money units against other goods, money prices go up (compared to a situation in which the quantity of money has not been increased).

    The Mainstream Explanation and Its Problems

    Of course, in real life additional factors (such as, for instance, demand changes, market introduction of new products, etc.) interfere with the link between the increase in the quantity of money and the rising prices of goods. This, however, by no means refutes the economic insight that a rise in the quantity of money in the economy leads to goods prices that will be higher than if the quantity of money not been increased.

    The increase in the quantity of money is what deserves to be called inflation; rising prices are just a possible symptom of an increase in the quantity of money. However, mainstream economists typically define inflation as rising consumer goods prices. This, however, is problematic for at least two reasons. First, by equating inflation with rising prices, the real reason for higher prices, namely the rise in the quantity of money, is obscured.

    This, in turn, gives rise to arbitrary explanations of why goods prices may go up: sheikhs who force up oil prices, unions that cause wages to rise, an overall buoyant economy that creates shortages in production factors, and so forth. All these pseudo-explanations deflect from the real culprit — the central bank, in cooperation with commercial banks, which issues new money, so that people no longer understand who, in fact, harms them.

    Asset Price Inflation

    Second, changes in consumer goods prices do not tell us the entire story, for they do not take into account asset prices such as, for instance, stock prices, housing prices, and land prices. However, the newly injected money can be expected to not only push up consumer goods prices, but also drive up asset prices. And like rising consumer prices, rising asset prices diminish the purchasing power of money.

    In other words: asset price inflation destroys the purchasing power of money in the same way that price inflation of consumer goods does. Take, for instance, stock market prices. If prices rise from, say, $100 to $200, the purchasing power of the money unit would drop by 50 percent. The owner of the stock becomes richer, while the holder of dollars become poorer. In fact, this is precisely what has been happening in the last decades.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For illustrative purposes, let us take a look at the chart above. It shows the development of the US quantity of money, nominal GDP, and stock prices from 1996 to autumn 2019. In the period under review, the US nominal GDP increased by 4.3 percent per annum on average. The quantity of money rose by 6.1 percent, while stock prices expanded by 8.1 percent. To the attentive observer, these numbers contain an important message.

    The increase in the money supply does not only raise prices of consumer goods, but also tends to raise all prices. For instance, in the period under review, on average, the real GDP in the US rose around 1.9 percent per year while prices of goods and services that are included in US GDP went up by 2.4 percent. The remaining “excess money” obviously pushed up stock prices and other asset prices such as for instance, housing prices.

    Don’t Put Your Trust in Today’s (Fiat) Money

    The lessons to learn are these: always think of inflation as a rise in the quantity of money. Be aware that central banks and commercial banks provide a kind of money that does not keep its purchasing power — that most people suffer losses when holding it for the purpose of storing wealth. Better not to put your trust in today’s money and keep your transaction balances as small as possible. Don’t be taken in by the inflation sham.

    The insights outlined above should encourage all of us to join the call for better, sound money — money that lives up to the highest economic and ethical standards. This can be achieved by simply creating a free market in money, where people are free to choose the kind of money they would like to use, and where entrepreneurial spirits are free to make their fellow people sound-money offers.

    A free market in money — which would be tantamount to putting an end to central banks’ money production monopolies — is actually easy to establish. Just strip the official currency of its privileged “legal tender” status and remove all capital gain and sales taxes on all media that stand an excellent chance to compete for becoming currency — most notably gold and silver but potentially also crypto units.

    A free market in money will work wonders. Many of the evils that haunt our world today — be they chronic price inflation, financial and economic crises, boom-and-bust cycles, and even over-funded governments and aggressive wars, would be greatly reduced. One of the biggest challenges of our time is to reform our money. The solution is to open up the market in money.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 13:30

  • Watch Rapper Make It Rain On Skid Row Homeless – An Important Lesson For The Fed
    Watch Rapper Make It Rain On Skid Row Homeless – An Important Lesson For The Fed

    The Federal Reserve might want to take some pointers from Rapper Blueface of how to preform helicopter drops in low-income neighborhoods ahead of the next downturn. 

    The 22-year old rapper was seen standing on top of a black Mercedes-Benz G-Class in the middle of Los Angeles’ Skid Row, injecting money into the local economy via a direct transfer to low-income folks and the homeless. 

    The rapper was seen in the video throwing wads of cash into the air, with dozens of people scouring around the vehicle to collect as many bills as they could.

    According to RT News, it wasn’t entirely clear what domination the bills were and or how much cash the rapper gave away in the helicopter drop. 

    The video first surfaced on Blueface’s Twitter account on Dec. 23. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The video received mixed reviews with one Twitter user saying, “Way to demean them. You could have handed it out in a decent way that wasn’t so dehumanizing. Someone could have been seriously injured because of your stunt.”

    Another user said, “damn bruh you could’ve made it look a little less ghetto.”

    One user said, “Handing them the money wasn’t an option? Instead, you literally stand on top of them and throw it at them and make them scavenge for it….bro your buggin.” 

    Apparently, it’s the season of giving, something the Fed will be doing once the next recession strikes. They will be financing People’s Quantitative Easing in the form of direct transfers to citizens that will hopefully thwart a Hong Kong-style revolt against elites.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 12:45

  • How Economics Can Ruin Christmas, In A Good Way
    How Economics Can Ruin Christmas, In A Good Way

    Authored by Art Carden via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Some time ago, I resigned myself to the fact that economists are the wet blankets of the world. We can ruin almost any proposal and almost any situation with just a couple of analytical tools and the words “unintended consequences.” Rent control? It causes shortages and hurts poor people. Minimum wages? They reduce employment and hurt poor people. Laws against “price gouging?” They also cause shortages and hurt poor people. Interventions, regulations, and subsidies that were supposed to make housing and higher education more affordable and thereby make the world a kinder, gentler, more prosperous place? We’re seeing how that’s working out right now. You get the idea: the list of dreams that have been dashed upon the rocks of the principles of economics is long indeed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not content to ruin the dreams of a few idealists, economists turned their attention to Christmas a few years ago. Here are a few thoughts from the Dismal Science that rain on the holiday parade.

    1. You Shouldn’t Have. No, Really. You Shouldn’t Have.

    The classic salvo in the literature on the economics of Christmas is Joel Waldfogel’s “The Deadweight Loss of Christmas,” which provides a bit of evidence that people would be happier if you gave them cash instead of an equally-expensive present.  Yes, it’s the thought that counts, but how many of us have given (or gotten) gifts that have ended up in an end-of-year Goodwill donation or a Spring yard sale?Today In: Business

    We learned this first-hand at a family holiday party that involved a white elephant gift exchange. Everyone went home happy, but one participant (an Alabama fan) opened a box of Auburn stuff, another (an Auburn fan) opened Alabama stuff, and one of the gifts I (an Alabama fan) opened was an LSU cap. Again, everything worked out in the end, but the initial distribution was incredibly inefficient.

    The spectacular wealth we enjoy today has created the epitome of a first-world problem: over-gifting. It used to be that giving a gift required a meaningful material sacrifice. Today, baubles are so cheap that our problem isn’t a lack of generosity. It’s poorly-channeled generosity. You have probably heard people joke that kids are usually more interested in the boxes the toys come in than the toys themselves.

    You might have seen this Wired article listing “the 5 best toys of all time:” boxes, string, cardboard tubes, sticks, and dirt. As a father of a three-year-old and an 18-month-old, I can attest that this is most definitely true. At the end of How the Grinch Stole Christmas, the Grinch learns that Christmas doesn’t come from a store. The Grinch learns that Christmas means a little bit more. As we head down the Christmas stretch, it’s a lesson we should take to heart.

    2. Your Church or Civic Organization Should Probably Cancel Next Year’s Holiday Food and Toy Drives

    In a post that made my economist’s heart grow three sizes, Matt Yglesias explains “Why food drives are a terrible idea.” Most importantly, there’s no free lunch. Actually going out and getting the food is itself costly, sorting it is costly, and distributing it is costly. As Yglesias explains, charities can probably alleviate a lot more hunger if you give them $20 in cash rather than $20 worth of creamed corn.

    Throughout his research, F.A. Hayek emphasized the knowledge problem and explained how markets utilize and disperse knowledge that can’t be known or articulated by a single mind. Collecting and distributing canned comfort and joy runs into the same problem. People know their own preferences better than you do. The creamed corn might be a nice gesture, but what if the recipient is allergic to corn?

    3. Economics is Like The Transformers: There’s More Than Meets the Eye.

    No doubt, someone reading this is and saying “well, if you looked in the eyes of the people who are being helped, you would understand.” Hear me out, though. Economics emphasizes the unintended and unseen consequences of different actions. Suppose you could feed two hungry children with the same effort you’re currently using to feed one. Would you want to know how?

    If we’re honest with ourselves, we will see some of the ways in which Christmas lays bare our hypocrisy. You’ve probably heard someone say “don’t give until it hurts; give until it feels good,” and again, I think that if we’re really honest with ourselves a lot of our charitable endeavors have less to do helping the least of these among us than with showing that we’re the kind of people who care about the least of these among us. I’ve written before that “let not your left hand know what your right is doing” is not merely a sound Biblical injunction regarding our giving. It’s also excellent economics. If you haven’t read about people anonymously paying off others’ layaway accounts at Kmarts around the country, it’s an excellent example of what I’m talking about.

    4. That Impulse Purchase won’t “Help the Economy.” 

    We consume about two-thirds of national output every year, and it is true that production takes place with the goal of generating goods and services that make people happy. At the same time, consumption per se does not create sustainable economic growth. “Spend more” is an intuitive-but-wrong prescription for what ails the American economy. While purchasing a greater assortment of trinkets and baubles might pad retailers’ and manufacturers’ bottom line in the short run, they leave us with fewer unconsumed resources with which to build the economy of tomorrow.*

    5. Peace on Earth and Goodwill To Men Can Be Enjoyed and Deployed More Effectively.

    Intending to help people isn’t the same as actually helping people. Good intentions and a few dollars will get you a cup of coffee, if you’re lucky: “good intentions” channeled through pathological institutions might leave you saddled with a body count. In one of the most provocative books I read this year, Timothy Keller explains how Generous Justice is more than just giving stuff away. It’s a lifestyle decision that requires getting meaningfully involved in the lives of others. Over the long run, this is likely to be far more effective than simply bunching all of our benevolence into a few frenzied weeks.

    As a mentor has told me, economics shows us that it is very difficult to be charitable in ways that actually benefit the people we’re trying to help. Some people might find this sad–dismal, even. I actually think it’s kind of liberating because it suggests that–at the risk of being dramatic–a better world is possible. A new paradigm for charity and justice will require a lot of thinking outside the donation box. With Christmas 2019 and a brand new year right around the corner, it’s a challenge I look forward to meeting head-on.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 12/25/2019 – 12:10

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th December 2019

  • The Child That Christmas Forgot: How Would Jesus Fare In The American Police State?
    The Child That Christmas Forgot: How Would Jesus Fare In The American Police State?

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rurtherford Institute,

    “Once upon a midnight clear, there was a child’s cry, a blazing star hung over a stable, and wise men came with birthday gifts. We haven’t forgotten that night down the centuries. We celebrate it with stars on Christmas trees, with the sound of bells, and with gifts… We forget nobody, adult or child. All the stockings are filled, all that is, except one. And we have even forgotten to hang it up. The stocking for the child born in a manger. It’s his birthday we’re celebrating. Don’t let us ever forget that. Let us ask ourselves what He would wish for most. And then, let each put in his share, loving kindness, warm hearts, and a stretched out hand of tolerance. All the shining gifts that make peace on earth.”—The Bishop’s Wife (1947)

    The Christmas story of a baby born in a manger is a familiar one.

    The Roman Empire, a police state in its own right, had ordered that a census be conducted. Joseph and his pregnant wife Mary traveled to the little town of Bethlehem so that they could be counted. There being no room for the couple at any of the inns, they stayed in a stable (a barn), where Mary gave birth to a baby boy, Jesus. Warned that the government planned to kill the baby, Jesus’ family fled with him to Egypt until it was safe to return to their native land.

    Yet what if Jesus had been born 2,000 years later?

    What if, instead of being born into the Roman police state, Jesus had been born at this moment in time? What kind of reception would Jesus and his family be given? Would we recognize the Christ child’s humanity, let alone his divinity? Would we treat him any differently than he was treated by the Roman Empire? If his family were forced to flee violence in their native country and sought refuge and asylum within our borders, what sanctuary would we offer them?

    A singular number of churches across the country are asking those very questions, and their conclusions are being depicted with unnerving accuracy by nativity scenes in which Jesus and his family are separated, segregated and caged in individual chain-link pens, topped by barbed wire fencing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These nativity scenes are a pointed attempt to remind the modern world that the narrative about the birth of Jesus is one that speaks on multiple fronts to a world that has allowed the life, teachings and crucifixion of Jesus to be drowned out by partisan politics, secularism, materialism and war.

    The modern-day church has largely shied away from applying Jesus’ teachings to modern problems such as war, poverty, immigration, etc., but thankfully there have been individuals throughout history who ask themselves and the world: what would Jesus do?

    What would Jesus—the baby born in Bethlehem who grew into an itinerant preacher and revolutionary activist, who not only died challenging the police state of his day (namely, the Roman Empire) but spent his adult life speaking truth to power, challenging the status quo of his day, and pushing back against the abuses of the Roman Empire—do?

    Dietrich Bonhoeffer asked himself what Jesus would have done about the horrors perpetrated by Hitler and his assassins. The answer: Bonhoeffer risked his life to undermine the tyranny at the heart of Nazi Germany.

    Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn asked himself what Jesus would have done about the soul-destroying gulags and labor camps of the Soviet Union. The answer: Solzhenitsyn found his voice and used it to speak out about government oppression and brutality.

    Martin Luther King Jr. asked himself what Jesus would have done about America’s warmongering. The answer: declaring “my conscience leaves me no other choice,” King risked widespread condemnation when he publicly opposed the Vietnam War on moral and economic grounds.

    Even now, despite the popularity of the phrase “What Would Jesus Do?” (WWJD) in Christian circles, there remains a disconnect in the modern church between the teachings of Christ and the suffering of what Jesus in Matthew 25 refers to as the “least of these.”

    As the parable states:

    “Then the King will say to those on his right, ‘Come, you who are blessed by my Father; take your inheritance, the kingdom prepared for you since the creation of the world. For I was hungry and you gave me something to eat, I was thirsty and you gave me something to drink, I was a stranger and you invited me in, I needed clothes and you clothed me, I was sick and you looked after me, I was in prison and you came to visit me.’ Then the righteous will answer him, ‘Lord, when did we see you hungry and feed you, or thirsty and give you something to drink? When did we see you a stranger and invite you in, or needing clothes and clothe you? When did we see you sick or in prison and go to visit you?’ The King will reply, ‘Truly I tell you, whatever you did for one of the least of these brothers and sisters of mine, you did for me.’ Then he will say to those on his left, ‘Depart from me, you who are cursed, into the eternal fire prepared for the devil and his angels. For I was hungry and you gave me nothing to eat, I was thirsty and you gave me nothing to drink, I was a stranger and you did not invite me in, I needed clothes and you did not clothe me, I was sick and in prison and you did not look after me.’ They also will answer, ‘Lord, when did we see you hungry or thirsty or a stranger or needing clothes or sick or in prison, and did not help you?’ He will reply, ‘Truly I tell you, whatever you did not do for one of the least of these, you did not do for me.’”

    This is not a theological gray area: Jesus was unequivocal about his views on many things, not the least of which was charity, compassion, war, tyranny and love.

    After all, Jesus—the revered preacher, teacher, radical and prophet—was born into a police state not unlike the growing menace of the American police state. When he grew up, he had powerful, profound things to say, things that would change how we view people, alter government policies and change the world. “Blessed are the merciful,” “Blessed are the peacemakers,” and “Love your enemies” are just a few examples of his most profound and revolutionary teachings.

    When confronted by those in authority, Jesus did not shy away from speaking truth to power. Indeed, his teachings undermined the political and religious establishment of his day. It cost him his life. He was eventually crucified as a warning to others not to challenge the powers-that-be.

    Can you imagine what Jesus’ life would have been like if, instead of being born into the Roman police state, he had been born and raised in the American police state?

    Consider the following if you will.

    • Had Jesus been born in the era of the America police state, rather than traveling to Bethlehem for a census, Jesus’ parents would have been mailed a 28-page American Community Survey, a mandatory government questionnaire documenting their habits, household inhabitants, work schedule, how many toilets are in your home, etc. The penalty for not responding to this invasive survey can go as high as $5,000.

    • Instead of being born in a manger, Jesus might have been born at home. Rather than wise men and shepherds bringing gifts, however, the baby’s parents might have been forced to ward off visits from state social workers intent on prosecuting them for the home birth. One couple in Washington had all three of their children removed after social services objected to the two youngest being birthed in an unassisted home delivery.

    • Had Jesus been born in a hospital, his blood and DNA would have been taken without his parents’ knowledge or consent and entered into a government biobank. While most states require newborn screening, a growing number are holding onto that genetic material long-term for research, analysis and purposes yet to be disclosed.

    • Then again, had Jesus’ parents been undocumented immigrants, they and the newborn baby might have been shuffled to a profit-driven, private prison for illegals where they first would have been separated from each other, the children detained in make-shift cages, and the parents eventually turned into cheap, forced laborers for corporations such as Starbucks, Microsoft, Walmart, and Victoria’s Secret. There’s quite a lot of money to be made from imprisoning immigrants, especially when taxpayers are footing the bill.

    • From the time he was old enough to attend school, Jesus would have been drilled in lessons of compliance and obedience to government authorities, while learning little about his own rights. Had he been daring enough to speak out against injustice while still in school, he might have found himself tasered or beaten by a school resource officer, or at the very least suspended under a school zero tolerance policy that punishes minor infractions as harshly as more serious offenses.

    • Had Jesus disappeared for a few hours let alone days as a 12-year-old, his parents would have been handcuffed, arrested and jailed for parental negligence. Parents across the country have been arrested for far less “offenses” such as allowing their children to walk to the park unaccompanied and play in their front yard alone.

    • Rather than disappearing from the history books from his early teenaged years to adulthood, Jesus’ movements and personal data—including his biometrics—would have been documented, tracked, monitored and filed by governmental agencies and corporations such as Google and Microsoft. Incredibly, 95 percent of school districts share their student records with outside companies that are contracted to manage data, which they then use to market products to us.

    • From the moment Jesus made contact with an “extremist” such as John the Baptist, he would have been flagged for surveillance because of his association with a prominent activist, peaceful or otherwise. Since 9/11, the FBI has actively carried out surveillance and intelligence-gathering operations on a broad range of activist groups, from animal rights groups to poverty relief, anti-war groups and other such “extremist” organizations.

    • Jesus’ anti-government views would certainly have resulted in him being labeled a domestic extremist. Law enforcement agencies are being trained to recognize signs of anti-government extremism during interactions with potential extremists who share a “belief in the approaching collapse of government and the economy.”

    • While traveling from community to community, Jesus might have been reported to government officials as “suspicious” under the Department of Homeland Security’s “See Something, Say Something” programs. Many states, including New York, are providing individuals with phone apps that allow them to take photos of suspicious activity and report them to their state Intelligence Center, where they are reviewed and forwarded to law-enforcement agencies.

    • Rather than being permitted to live as an itinerant preacher, Jesus might have found himself threatened with arrest for daring to live off the grid or sleeping outside. In fact, the number of cities that have resorted to criminalizing homelessness by enacting bans on camping, sleeping in vehicles, loitering and begging in public has doubled.

    • Viewed by the government as a dissident and a potential threat to its power, Jesus might have had government spies planted among his followers to monitor his activities, report on his movements, and entrap him into breaking the law. Such Judases today—called informants—often receive hefty paychecks from the government for their treachery.

    • Had Jesus used the internet to spread his radical message of peace and love, he might have found his blog posts infiltrated by government spies attempting to undermine his integrity, discredit him or plant incriminating information online about him. At the very least, he would have had his website hacked and his email monitored.

    • Had Jesus attempted to feed large crowds of people, he would have been threatened with arrest for violating various ordinances prohibiting the distribution of food without a permit. Florida officials arrested a 90-year-old man for feeding the homeless on a public beach.

    • Had Jesus spoken publicly about his 40 days in the desert and his conversations with the devil, he might have been labeled mentally ill and detained in a psych ward against his will for a mandatory involuntary psychiatric hold with no access to family or friends. One Virginia man was arrested, strip searched, handcuffed to a table, diagnosed as having “mental health issues,” and locked up for five days in a mental health facility against his will apparently because of his slurred speech and unsteady gait.

    • Without a doubt, had Jesus attempted to overturn tables in a Jewish temple and rage against the materialism of religious institutions, he would have been charged with a hate crime. Currently, 45 states and the federal government have hate crime laws on the books.

    • Had anyone reported Jesus to the police as being potentially dangerous, he might have found himself confronted—and killed—by police officers for whom any perceived act of non-compliance (a twitch, a question, a frown) can result in them shooting first and asking questions later.

    • Rather than having armed guards capture Jesus in a public place, government officials would have ordered that a SWAT team carry out a raid on Jesus and his followers, complete with flash-bang grenades and military equipment. There are upwards of 80,000 such SWAT team raids carried out every year, many on unsuspecting Americans who have no defense against such government invaders, even when such raids are done in error.

    • Instead of being detained by Roman guards, Jesus might have been made to “disappear” into a secret government detention center where he would have been interrogated, tortured and subjected to all manner of abuses. Chicago police have “disappeared” more than 7,000 people into a secret, off-the-books interrogation warehouse at Homan Square.

    • Charged with treason and labeled a domestic terrorist, Jesus might have been sentenced to a life-term in a private prison where he would have been forced to provide slave labor for corporations or put to death by way of the electric chair or a lethal mixture of drugs.

    Indeed, as I show in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, given the nature of government then and now, it is painfully evident that whether Jesus had been born in our modern age or his own, he still would have died at the hands of a police state.

    Thus, as we draw near to Christmas with its celebrations and gift-giving, we would do well to remember that what happened on that starry night in Bethlehem is only part of the story. That baby in the manger grew up to be a man who did not turn away from evil but instead spoke out against it, and we must do no less.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 23:55

  • Japan Proposes Dumping Radioactive Waste Into Pacific As Storage Space Dwindles
    Japan Proposes Dumping Radioactive Waste Into Pacific As Storage Space Dwindles

    As the decade comes to an end, the future of nuclear power in the west remains in doubt. Almost nine years ago, a powerful underwater earthquake triggered a 15-meter tsunami that disabled the power supply and cooling at three of the reactors at the Fukushima Daiichi nuclear power plant.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The accident caused the nuclear cores of all three damaged reactors to melt down, prompting the government to issue evacuation orders for all people living within a 30 kilometer radius of the damaged reactors, a group that included roughly 100,000 people.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And the evacuation zone:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, the Epoch Times reports that Japan’s Economy and Industry Ministry has proposed that TEPCO gradually release, or allow to evaporate, massive amounts of treated but still radioactive water being stored at the power plant. TEPCO, or the Tokyo Electric Power Co, is the owner of the Fukushima plant, and is also responsible for leading the clean-up of the damaged reactors.

    But as regulators have stepped in to try and guide TEPCO as it struggles to dispose of all the contaminated water, one ministry has offered a proposal that is almost guaranteed to anger the fishermen who have resisted all of TEPCO’s other plans for dumping the contaminated water.

    In its Dec. 23 proposal, the ministry suggested a “controlled release” of the contaminated water into the Pacific. Offering another option, the ministry also suggested allowing the water to evaporate, or a combination of the two methods.

    The government is stepping up the pressure on TEPCO to do something as Fukushima’s ‘radioactive water crisis’ worsens. The problem is that TEPCO is running out of room to store the contaminated water.

    But the ministry insisted that the controlled release of the contaminated water into the sea would be the best option because it would “stably dilute and disperse” the water from the plant, while also allowing the government and TEPCO to more easily monitor the operation.

    And as we have reported, the Japanese fishing industry isn’t the only party that objects to the government’s plan. South Korea has also complained to the IAEA about TEPCO’s plans to dump the radioactive water.

    The project is expected to take years to fully dispose of the water.

    Still, the fishermen are bound to be skeptical because of one radioactive element that TEPCO has been unable to remove from the contaminated water: It’s called tritium.

    Fukushima fishermen and the National Federation of Fisheries Co-operative Associations have strongly opposed past suggestions by government officials that the water be released to the sea, warning of an “immeasurable impact on the future of the Japanese fishing industry,” with local fishermen still unable to resume full operations after the nuclear plant accident.

    The water has been treated, and the plant operator, Tokyo Electric Power Co., states that all 62 radioactive elements it contains can be removed to levels not harmful to humans except for tritium. There is no established method to fully separate tritium from water, but scientists say it isn’t a problem in small amounts. Most of the water stored at the plant still contains other radioactive elements including cancer-causing cesium and strontium and needs further treatment.

    Tritium is routinely found in nuclear explosions and other nuclear accidents, including the meltdown at Three-Mile Island back in 1979. But experts at the IAEA recommend that the controlled release of the tritium-laced water at Fukushima into the sea is probably the best option for handling the situation – even if the Japanese decide to wait until after the Summer Olympics in 2022.

    The ministry noted that tritium has been routinely released from nuclear plants around the world, including Fukushima before the accident. Evaporation has been a tested and proven method following the 1979 core meltdown at Three Mile Island nuclear plant in the United States, where it took two years to get rid of 8,700 tons of tritium-contaminated water.

    TEPCO says it is currently storing more than 1 million tons of radioactive water and only has space to hold up to 1.37 million tons, or until the summer of 2022, raising speculation that the water may be released after next summer’s Tokyo Olympics. TEPCO and experts say the tanks get in the way of ongoing decommissioning work and that space needs to be freed up to store removed debris and other radioactive materials. The tanks also could spill in a major earthquake, tsunami, or flood.

    Experts, including those at the International Atomic Energy Agency who have inspected the Fukushima plant, have repeatedly supported the controlled release of the water into the sea as the only realistic option.

    On Dec. 22, some experts on the panel called for more attention to be given to the impact on the local community, which already has seen its image harmed by accidental leaks and the potential release of water.

    “A release to the sea is technologically a realistic option, but its social impact would be huge,” said Naoya Sekiya, a University of Tokyo sociologist and an expert on disasters and social impact.

    Other possible strategies for disposing of the contaminated water have included injecting the water deep into the Earth’s crust. Another strategy, which called for storing the nuclear waste in large industrial tanks outside the plant, was ruled out because of fears that leaks in the tanks could contaminate some of Japan’s most important fishing waters.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 23:30

  • Escobar: You Say You Want A (Russian) Revolution?
    Escobar: You Say You Want A (Russian) Revolution?

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via ConsortiumNews.com,

    Once in a blue moon an indispensable book comes out making a clear case for sanity in what is now a post-MAD world. That’s the responsibility carried by “The (Real) Revolution in Military Affairs,” by Andrei Martyanov (Clarity Press), arguably the most important book of 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Martyanov is the total package — and he comes with extra special attributes as a top-flight Russian military analyst, born in Baku in those Back in the U.S.S.R. days, living and working in the U.S., and writing and blogging in English.

    Right from the start, Martyanov wastes no time destroying not only Fukuyama’s and Huntington’s ravings but especially Graham Allison’s childish and meaningless Thucydides Trap argument — as if the power equation between the U.S. and China in the 21stcentury could be easily interpreted in parallel to Athens and Sparta slouching towards the Peloponnesian War over 2,400 years ago. What next? Xi Jinping as the new Genghis Khan?

    (By the way, the best current essay on Thucydides is in Italian, by Luciano Canfora (“Tucidide: La Menzogna, La Colpa, L’Esilio”). No Trap. Martyanov visibly relishes defining the Trap as a “figment of the imagination” of people who “have a very vague understanding of real warfare in the 21st century.” No wonder Xi explicitly said the Trap does not exist.)

    Martyanov had already detailed in his splendid, previous book, “Losing Military Supremacy: The Myopia of American Strategic Planning,” how “American lack of historic experience with continental warfare” ended up “planting the seeds of the ultimate destruction of the American military mythology of the 20thand 21stcenturies which is foundational to the American decline, due to hubris and detachment of reality.” Throughout the book, he unceasingly provides solid evidence about the kind of lethality waiting for U.S. forces in a possible, future war against real armies (not the Taliban or Saddam Hussein’s), air forces, air defenses and naval power.

    Do the Math

    One of the key takeaways is the failure of U.S. mathematical models: and readers of the book do need to digest quite a few mathematical equations. The key point is that this failure led the U.S. “on a continuous downward spiral of diminishing military capabilities against the nation [Russia] she thought she defeated in the Cold War.”

    In the U.S., Revolution in Military Affairs (RMA) was introduced by the late Andrew Marshall, a.k.a. Yoda, the former head of Net Assessment at the Pentagon and the de facto inventor of the “pivot to Asia” concept. Yet Martyanov tells us that RMA actually started as MTR (Military-Technological Revolution), introduced by Soviet military theoreticians back in the 1970s.

    One of the staples of RMA concerns nations capable of producing land-attack cruise missiles, a.k.a. TLAMs. As it stands, only the U.S., Russia, China and France can do it. And there are only two global systems providing satellite guidance to cruise missiles: the American GPS and the Russian GLONASS. Neither China’s BeiDou nor the European Galileo qualify – yet – as global GPS systems.

    Then there’s Net-Centric Warfare (NCW). The term itself was coined by the late Admiral Arthur Cebrowski in 1998 in an article he co-wrote with John Garstka’s titled, “Network-Centric Warfare – Its Origin and Future.”

    Deploying his mathematical equations, Martyanov soon tells us that “the era of subsonic anti-shipping missiles is over.” NATO, that brain-dead organism (copyright Emmanuel Macron) now has to face the supersonic Russian P-800 Onyx and the Kalibr-class M54 in a “highly hostile Electronic Warfare environment.” Every developed modern military today applies Net-Centric Warfare (NCW), developed by the Pentagon in the 1990s.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rendering of a future combat systems network. (soldiersmediacenter/Flickr, CC BY 2.0, Wikimedia Commons)

    Martyanov mentions in his new book something that I learned on my visit to Donbass in March 2015: how NCW principles, “based on Russia’s C4ISR capabilities made available by the Russian military to numerically inferior armed forces of the Donbass Republics (LDNR), were used to devastating effect both at the battles of Ilovaisk and Debaltsevo, when attacking the cumbersome Soviet-era Ukrainian Armed Forces military.”

    No Escape From the Kinzhal

    Martyanov provides ample information on Russia’s latest missile – the hypersonic Mach-10 aero-ballistic Kinzhal, recently tested in the Arctic.

    Crucially, as he explains, “no existing anti-missile defense in the U.S. Navy is capable of shooting [it] down even in the case of the detection of this missile.” Kinzhal has a range of 2,000 km, which leaves its carriers, MiG-31K and TU-22M3M, “invulnerable to the only defense a U.S. Carrier Battle Group, a main pillar of U.S. naval power, can mount – carrier fighter aircraft.” These fighters simply don’t have the range.

    The Kinzhal was one of the weapons announced by Russian President Vladimir Putin’s game-changing March 1, 2018 speech at the Federal Assembly. That’s the day, Martyanov stresses, when the real RMA arrived, and “changed completely the face of peer-peer warfare, competition and global power balance dramatically.”

    Top Pentagon officials such as General John Hyten,  vice chairman of the Joint Chiefs, have admitted on the record there are “no existing countermeasures” against, for instance, the hypersonic, Mach 27 glide vehicle Avangard (which renders anti-ballistic missile systems useless), telling the U.S. Senate Armed Services Committee the only way out would be “a nuclear deterrent.” There are also no existing counter-measures against anti-shipping missiles such as the Zircon and Kinzhal.

    Any military analyst knows very well how the Kinzhal destroyed a land target the size of a Toyota Corolla in Syria after being launched 1,000 km away in adverse weather conditions. The corollary is the stuff of NATO nightmares: NATO’s command and control installations in Europe are de facto indefensible.

    Martyanov gets straight to the point: “The introduction of hypersonic weapons surely pours some serious cold water on the American obsession with securing the North American continent from retaliatory strikes.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kh-47M2 Kinzhal; 2018 Moscow Victory Day Parade. (Kremilin via Wikimedia Commons)

    Martyanov is thus unforgiving on U.S. policymakers who “lack the necessary tool-kit for grasping the unfolding geostrategic reality in which the real revolution in military affairs … had dramatically downgraded the always inflated American military capabilities and continues to redefine U.S. geopolitical status away from its self-declared hegemony.”

    And it gets worse: “Such weapons ensure a guaranteed retaliation [Martyanov’s italics] on the U.S. proper.” Even the existing Russian nuclear deterrents – and to a lesser degree Chinese, as paraded recently — “are capable of overcoming the existing U.S. anti-ballistic systems and destroying the United States,” no matter what crude propaganda the Pentagon is peddling.

    In February 2019, Moscow announced the completion of tests of a nuclear-powered engine for the Petrel cruise missile. This is a subsonic cruise missile with nuclear propulsion that can remain in air for quite a long time, covering intercontinental distances, and able to attack from the most unexpected directions. Martyanov mischievously characterizes the Petrel as “a vengeance weapon in case some among American decision-makers who may help precipitate a new world war might try to hide from the effects of what they have unleashed in the relative safety of the Southern Hemisphere.”

    Hybrid War Gone Berserk

    A section of the book expands on China’s military progress, and the fruits of the Russia-China strategic partnership, such as Beijing buying $3 billion-worth of S-400 Triumph anti-aircraft missiles — “ideally suited to deal with the exact type of strike assets the United States would use in case of a conventional conflict with China.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beijing parade celebrating the 70th anniversary of the People’s Republic, October 2019. (YouTube screenshot)

    Because of the timing, the analysis does not even take into consideration the arsenal presented in early October at the Beijing parade celebrating the 70thanniversary of the People’s Republic.

    That includes, among other things, the “carrier-killer” DF-21D, designed to hit warships at sea at a range of up to 1,500 km; the intermediate range “Guam Killer” DF-26; the DF-17 hypersonic missile; and the long-range submarine-launched and ship-launched YJ-18A anti-ship cruise missiles. Not to mention the DF-41 ICBM – the backbone of China’s nuclear deterrent, capable of reaching the U.S. mainland carrying multiple warheads.

    Martyanov could not escape addressing the RAND Corporation, whose reason to exist is to relentlessly push for more money for the Pentagon – blaming Russia for “hybrid war” (an American invention)  even as it moans about the U.S.’s incapacity of defeating Russia in each and every war game. RAND’s war games pitting the U.S. and allies against Russia and China invariably ended in a “catastrophe” for the “finest fighting force in the world.”

    Martyanov also addresses the S-500s, capable of reaching AWACS planes and possibly even capable of intercepting hypersonic non-ballistic targets. The S-500 and its latest middle-range state of the art air-defense system S-350 Vityaz will be operational in 2020.

    His key takeway: “There is no parity between Russia and the United States in such fields as air-defense, hypersonic weapons and, in general, missile development, to name just a few fields – the United States lags behind in these fields, not just in years but in generations [italics mine].”

    All across the Global South, scores of nations are very much aware that the U.S. economic “order” – rather disorder – is on the brink of collapse. In contrast, a cooperative, connected, rule-based, foreign relations between sovereign nations model is being advanced in Eurasia – symbolized by the merging of the New Silk Roads, or Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), the Eurasia Economic Union (EAEU), the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO), the Asia Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB), the NDB (the BRICS bank).

    The key guarantors of the new model are Russia and China. And Beijing and Moscow harbor no illusion whatsoever about the toxic dynamics in Washington. My recent conversations with top analysts in Kazakhstan last month and in Moscow last week once again stressed the futility of negotiating with people described – with  overlapping shades of sarcasm – as exceptionalist fanatics. Russia, China and many corners of Eurasia have figured out there are no possible, meaningful deals with a nation bent on breaking every deal.

    Indispensable? No: Vulnerable

    Martyanov cannot but evoke Putin’s speech to the Federal Assembly in February 2019, after the unilateral Washington abandonment of the INF treaty, clearing the way for U.S. deployment of intermediate and close range missiles stationed in Europe and pointed at Russia:

    “Russia will be forced to create and deploy those types of weapons…against those regions from where we will face a direct threat, but also against those regions hosting the centers where decisions are taken on using those missile systems threatening us.”

    Translation: American Invulnerability is over – for good.

    In the short term, things can always get worse. At his traditional, year-end presser in Moscow, lasting almost four and a half hours, Putin stated that Russia is more than ready to “simply renew the existing New START agreement”, which is bound to expire in early 2021: “They [the U.S.] can send us the agreement tomorrow, or we can sign and send it to Washington.” And yet, “so far our proposals have been left unanswered. If the New START ceases to exist, nothing in the world will hold back an arms race. I believe this is bad.”

    “Bad” is quite the euphemism. Martyanov prefers to stress how “most of the American elites, at least for now, still reside in a state of Orwellian cognitive dissonance” even as the real RMA “blew the myth of American conventional invincibility out of the water.”

    Martyanov is one of the very few analysts – always from different parts of Eurasia — who have warned about the danger of the U.S. “accidentally stumbling” into a war against Russia, China, or both which is impossible to be won conventionally, “let alone through the nightmare of a global nuclear catastrophe.”

    Is that enough to instill at least a modicum of sense into those who lord over that massive cash cow, the industrial-military-security complex? Don’t count on it.

    *  *  *

    Pepe Escobar, a veteran Brazilian journalist, is the correspondent-at-large for Hong Kong-based Asia Times. His latest book is “2030.” Follow him on Facebook.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 23:05

  • Christmas Trees: The Battle Between Pine & Plastic
    Christmas Trees: The Battle Between Pine & Plastic

    Starting in early December, many U.S. families carry out an annual and important ritual: an outing to find the perfect Christmas tree. Once the most desirable tree is found, it’s then lugged home and lavishly decorated while its piney smell wafts through the house.

    As nice as that smell is, a real tree has numerous disadvantages such as prickly pines that shed and it eventually needs to be disposed of.

    For some families, its just too much hassle and assembling a plastic three that spends most of the year in the basement is the preferred option. It also represents a once-off purchase, another advantage over its real counterpart.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, with America firmly experiencing prime Christmas tree shopping season, how do sales of real and plastic trees compare?

    Interestingly, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, while sales of plastic trees have increased noticeably over the past decade, sales of real trees have remained fairly stable according to historic data from the National Christmas Tree Association of America.

    Infographic: Christmas Trees: The Battle Between Pine & Plastic | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    32.8 million real trees were sold in the U.S. last year, the highest total since 2013. That’s despite the huge increase in people buying fake trees with their sales numbers climbing from 10.9 million in 2012 to 23.6 million in 2018.

    There is bad news for fans of real trees this year and that’s a supply shortage. During the recession, farmers planted fewer trees and that’s now impacting the industry a decade later. Industry workers say that everyone intent on buying a real tree will find one but that prices are going up, something that has the potential to drive more families towards plastic. In 2017, the average price of a real tree was $75 and that went up to $78 in 2018. Meanwhile, the average price of a plastic tree fell from $107 to $104 during the same period.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 22:40

  • Could Invisible Ink Tattoos Be Used By The Elites To Identify Unvaccinated Kids?
    Could Invisible Ink Tattoos Be Used By The Elites To Identify Unvaccinated Kids?

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    Because it’s becoming difficult for the ruling class and Big Pharma to keep track of people who have been vaccinated and those who have not, a suggestion to use “tattoos” has surfaced. A new technology created by researchers at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology can now help authoritarians track the unvaccinated.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Futurism, this means that they have found a covert way to embed the record of a vaccination directly in a patient’s skin rather than documenting it electronically or on paper. This tracking seems to be a lower-risk tracking system than vaccines themselves at least, and it could greatly simplify the process of maintaining accurate vaccine records, especially on a larger scale.

    “In areas where paper vaccination cards are often lost or do not exist at all, and electronic databases are unheard of, this technology could enable the rapid and anonymous detection of patient vaccination history to ensure that every child is vaccinated,” researcher Kevin McHugh said in a statement.

    If that’s what it’s used for, it will eventually also be used to force vaccines on those who wish to not receive them. There’s an obvious agenda here too when you follow the money: the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation funded the team’s research.

    This new research, which was published in the journal Science Translational Medicine on Wednesday, came about after following a direct demand from Microsoft founder Bill Gates himself, who has been personally involved in efforts to eradicate polio and measles through vaccinations, according to Scientific American.

    The invisible “tattoo” accompanying the vaccine is a pattern made up of minuscule quantum dots — tiny semiconducting crystals that reflect light — that glows under infrared light. The pattern — and vaccine — gets delivered into the skin using hi-tech dissolvable microneedles made of a mixture of polymers and sugar. –Futurism

    Researchers have already tested this new tattoo on rats and human cadavers.

    “It’s possible someday that this ‘invisible’ approach could create new possibilities for data storage, biosensing, and vaccine applications that could improve how medical care is provided, particularly in the developing world,” MIT professor and senior author Robert Langer said in the statement.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 22:15

  • Breaking The Ice: Mapping A Changing Arctic
    Breaking The Ice: Mapping A Changing Arctic

    The Arctic is changing. As retreating ice cover makes this region more accessible, Visual Capitalist’s Nicholas LePan notes that nations with Arctic real estate are thinking of developing these subzero landscapes and the resources below.

    As the Arctic evolves, a vast amount of resources will become more accessible and longer shipping seasons will improve Arctic logistics. But with a changing climate and increased public pressure to limit resource development in environmentally sensitive regions, the future of northern economic activity is far from certain.

    This week’s Chart of the Week shows the location of major oil and gas fields in the Arctic and the possible new trade routes through this frontier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A Final Frontier for Undiscovered Resources?

    Underneath the Arctic Circle lies massive oil and natural gas formations. The United States Geological Survey estimates that the Arctic contains approximately 13% of the world’s undiscovered oil resources and about 30% of its undiscovered natural gas resources.

    So far, most exploration in the Arctic has occurred on land. This work produced the Prudhoe Bay Oil Field in Alaska, the Tazovskoye Field in Russia, and hundreds of smaller fields, many of which are on Alaska’s North Slope, an area now under environmental protection.

    Land accounts for about 1/3 of the Arctic’s area and is thought to hold about 16% of the Arctic’s remaining undiscovered oil and gas resources. A further 1/3 of the Arctic area is comprised of offshore continental shelves, which are thought to contain enormous amounts of resources but remain largely unexplored by geologists.

    The remaining 1/3 of the Arctic is deep ocean waters measuring thousands of feet in depth.

    The Arctic circle is about the same geographic size as the African continent─about 6% of Earth’s surface area─yet it holds an estimated 22% of Earth’s oil and natural gas resources. This paints a target on the Arctic for exploration and development, especially with shorter seasons of ice coverage improving ocean access.

    Thawing Ice Cover: Improved Ocean Access, New Trading Routes

    As Arctic ice melts, sea routes will stay navigable for longer periods, which could drastically change international trade and shipping. September ice coverage has decreased by more than 25% since 1979, although the area within the Arctic Circle is still almost entirely covered with ice from November to July.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Typically shipping to Japan from Rotterdam would use the Suez Canal and take about 30 days, whereas a route from New York would use the Panama Canal and take about 25 days.

    But if the Europe-Asia trip used the Northern Sea Route along the northern coast of Russia, the trip would last 18 days and the distance would shrink from ~11,500 nautical miles to ~6,900 nautical miles. For the U.S.-Asia trip through the Northwest Passage, it would take 21 days, rather than 25.

    Control of these routes could bring significant advantages to countries and corporations looking for a competitive edge.

    Competing Interests: Arctic Neighbors

    Eight countries lay claim to land that lies within the Arctic Circle: Canada, Denmark (through its administration of Greenland), Finland, Iceland, Norway, Russia, Sweden, and the United States.

    There is no consistent agreement among these nations regarding the claims to oil and gas beneath the Arctic Ocean seafloor. However, the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea provides each country an exclusive economic zone extending 200 miles out from its shoreline and up to 350 miles, under certain geological conditions.

    Uncertain geology and politics has led to overlapping territorial disputes over how each nation defines and maps its claims based on the edge of continental margins. For example, Russia claims that their continental margin follows the Lomonosov Ridge all the way to the North Pole. In another, both the U.S. and Canada claim a portion of the Beaufort Sea, which is thought to contain significant oil and natural gas resources.

    To Develop or Not to Develop

    Just because the resources are there does not mean humans have to exploit them, especially given oil’s environmental impacts. Canada’s federal government has already returned security deposits that oil majors had paid to drill in Canadian Arctic waters, which are currently off limits until at least 2021.

    In total, the Government of Canada returned US$327 million worth of security deposits, or 25% of the money oil companies pledged to spend on exploration in the Beaufort Sea. In addition, Goldman Sachs announced that it would not finance any projects in the U.S.’s Arctic National Wildlife Refuge.

    The retreat of Western economic interests in the Arctic may leave the region to Russia and China, countries with less strict environmental regulations.

    Russia has launched an ambitious plan to remilitarize the Arctic. Specifically, Russia is searching for evidence to prove its territorial claims to additional portions of the Arctic, so that it can move its Arctic borderline — which currently measures over 14,000 miles in length — further north.

    In a changing Arctic, this potentially resource-rich region could become another venue for geopolitical tensions, again testing whether humans can be proper stewards of the natural world.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 21:50

  • What Percentage Of Americans Celebrate Christmas?
    What Percentage Of Americans Celebrate Christmas?

    Authored by Lydia Saad via Gallup.com,

    Ninety-three percent of Americans in December 2019 report celebrating Christmas, in line with the level Gallup has recorded over the past quarter century.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Near universal observance of Christmas is seen across all gender, age, education and income subgroups of Americans with more than 9 in 10 in each saying they celebrate, and the holiday is also a unifying event for Republicans and Democrats.

    The only Americans less likely to observe Christmas are those who say that religion is not very important to them, and among them the figure is 85%. Participation stretches to 96% among those who are “very” and “fairly” religious.

    While the overall percentage of Americans celebrating Christmas remains high, fewer today (71%) than a decade ago (82%) say it is a strongly or somewhat religious holiday for them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For more on this trend, read More Americans Celebrating a Secular Christmas.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 21:25

  • Russia's New Floating Nuclear Power Plant Begins Delivering Electricity To The Arctic
    Russia’s New Floating Nuclear Power Plant Begins Delivering Electricity To The Arctic

    On September 14, we reported that the world’s first ever floating nuclear power plant, the Akademik Lomonosov, reached the port city of Pevek in Russia’s Chukotka after covering a distance of more than 4,700km from Murmansk.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia’s first floating nuclear power plant has two KLT-40S reactor units that collectively generate 70 MW of energy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A year ago we noted video of the beginning of the ships’ voyage (from St.Petersburg to Murmansk)

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And now, as The Barents Observer reports that at 11 am Moscow Times on December 19th, the “Akademik Lomonosov” delivered its first electricity to the grid in Pevek, Arctic Russia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Thomas Nilsen reports, symbolically, given the season, the town’s Christmas tree was first to be lighted with electricity produced by the two reactors on board the plant that is moored in the port.

    Additional to the town of Pevek, the grid includes the Chaun-Bilibino junction in the Chukotka Autonomous Okrug, Rosatom informs.

    “Today a historic event occurred, the first connection of the “generators of “Akademik Lomonosov” floating nuclear heat- and electricity nuclear power plant were connected to the grid,” Rosenergoatom Director General Andrey Petrov said.

    He said Pevek is now the new energy capital of the region, “a stronghold for the development of western Chukotka and a key link for the Northern Sea Route.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we concluded previously, the launch of the first ever floating nuclear power plant has become an important engineering breakthrough that will impact the energy sphere on a global scale. This technology, which could potentially provide safe and clean energy to a large part of the planet, could also be provided at an attractive price.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 21:00

  • This Christmas, Over Half A Million Americans Will Struggle With Homelessness
    This Christmas, Over Half A Million Americans Will Struggle With Homelessness

    Authored by Alan Macleod via MintPressNews.com,

    The government estimates ending homelessness would cost around $20 billion, less than Americans spend on Christmas decorations, yet there appears to be little appetite to address the growing problem…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While millions of Americans celebrate Christmas this year with loved ones, carving turkey and sharing gifts, others are not so fortunate. According to the Department of Housing and Urban Development, over half a million of us will spend Christmas on the streets. The government agency estimates that on any given day, around 553,000 Americans are homeless. A third of those are families with young children. African Americans and those with disabilities are particularly likely to become homeless. 

    Yet these distressing numbers are sure to be underestimates of the true problem as they do not include the many more sleeping in vehicles or other makeshift accommodation, sofa surfing or relying on friends. Around 1.5 million people sleep at a shelter annually, according to figures from the National Alliance to End Homelessness. Furthermore, the 500,000 number itself is likely an underestimate. A 2017 experiment done by The Guardian, where it placed actors posing as homeless people on the streets, found that authorities missed around one in three of them. And they were wishing to be seen, not individuals keen to go undetected.

    Tens of millions of Americans are barely managing to stave off the same fate. Almost half of America is broke, and 58 percent of the country is living paycheck to paycheck, with savings of less than $1,000. 37 million Americans go to bed hungry and around 130 million admit an inability to pay for basic needs like food, housing or healthcare. After a decade of decline, the homeless population is again creeping up.

    The Trump administration is believed to be readying a “get tough” approach to the problem. Singling out California, earlier this year, Trump claimed that its cities were “going to hell” thanks to illegal encampments that increase environmental pollution. The number of unsheltered homeless people in Los Angeles Country alone increased by over 10 percent this year, to 44,214.

    Yet the United Nations has decried the already inhumane treatment of homeless Americans, claiming that the state “effectively criminalizes” them “for the situation in which they find themselves.” In many cities, activities like sleeping rough, panhandling or public urination (in locations with zero pubic bathrooms) have been turned into arrestable offenses, ensuring a carceral “solution” to the problem. Homeless people can be given tickets for infractions as innocuous as loitering, leading to warrants and unpayable fines, trapping them in a cycle of criminality which they cannot escape as their record prohibits them from subsequent employment and access to most housing. Thus, the UN report concludes that it is “effectively a system for keeping the poor in poverty while generating revenue” for the state to employ more police to speed the system up.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Despite being a very visible representation of the economic and social dislocation in society, there currently appears to be little political appetite in Washington to solve the problem. The government estimates ending homelessness would cost around $20 billion– less than Americans spend on Christmas decorations alone. Yet there may be an even easier and cheaper way to fix the problem. Amnesty International reported that there are five times as many vacant properties in the U.S. as there are homeless people. Legislation enacted to make use of those as emergency accommodation could be enacted.

    If Democrats manage to unseat Trump in 2020 there is hope that this could be the last year of mass homelessness at Christmas. Vermont Senator Bernie Sanders, for example, has made housing for all a key pillar of his campaign message.

    “In the richest country in the history of the world, every American must have a safe, decent, accessible, and affordable home as a fundamental right” his website declares, pledging to end homelessness, fight gentrification and protect tenants’ rights.

    Sanders also promises to invest $2.5 trillion into building nearly 10 million “permanently affordable housing units.”

    Other major candidates, like former Vice President Joe Biden and Massachusetts Senator Elizabeth Warren, have discussed measures to address the epidemic, but nothing as substantial as Sanders’. On the other hand, as Mayor of South Bend, Indiana, Pete Buttigieg conducted a relentless campaign against homeless people under his jurisdiction.

    Media often treat the problem of homelessness not as a condemnation of the callous disregard for human life of modern society, but as merely a natural function of the market. For example, in one supposedly heartwarming story about a good samaritan helping the homeless during the Chicago polar vortex last winter, CBS News casually noted that 22 homeless people had already died of exposure during the cold weather.

    Society does its best to hide or normalize homelessness. Or, worse still, blame them for their own predicament. But, like slavery and apartheid, it is not natural and is a consequence of a man-made system that can be changed. Americans in 2020 will have an opportunity to decide what solution they wish to see enacted. For now, though, it won’t be a very merry Christmas for those at the bottom of the economic scale.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 20:35

  • The Biggest Empires In Human History
    The Biggest Empires In Human History

    In 1913, 412 million people lived under the control of the British Empire, 23 percent of the world’s population at that time. As Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, it remains the largest empire in human history and at the peak of its power in 1920, it covered an astonishing 13.71 million square miles – that’s close to a quarter of the world’s land area.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At its height, it was described as “the empire on which the sun never sets” but of course the sun finally did set on it.

    Infographic: The Biggest Empires In  Human History | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Today, Britannia no longer rules the waves and its remnants consist of 17 small dependent and unincorporated territories scattered across the world such as the Falkland Islands and Gibraltar.

    The Mongol Empire existed during the 13th and 14th centuries and it is recognized as being the largest contiguous land empire in history. It of course originated in Mongolia and once stretched from Eastern Europe to the Sea of Japan, extending into the Indian subcontinent and the Middle East, covering 9.27 million square miles.

    The Russian Empire comes third on the list with a peak land area of 8.8 million square miles.

    The data for this infographic was published by website World Atlas.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 20:10

  • Profs Urge NYTimes To Correct The Many Errors In Its '1619 Project'
    Profs Urge NYTimes To Correct The Many Errors In Its ‘1619 Project’

    Authored by Jennifer Kabbany via The College Fix,

    Five historians have written a letter to the editor to The New York Times telling the “newspaper of record” to correct the major and serious errors that riddle its 1619 Project.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 1619 Project sought to “reframe the country’s history, understanding 1619 as our true founding,” due to the arrival in that year of 20 African slaves to a Virginia colony.

    The correction request was signed by Victoria Bynum of Texas State University, James McPherson and Sean Wilentz of Princeton University, James Oakes of the City University of New York and Gordon Wood of Brown University, reports The Washington Post.

    Their letter was published shortly after The Wall Street Journal reported on several of those professors’ concerns about the project that had been circulating on social media.

    The letter states in part:

    These errors, which concern major events, cannot be described as interpretation or “framing.” They are matters of verifiable fact, which are the foundation of both honest scholarship and honest journalism. They suggest a displacement of historical understanding by ideology. Dismissal of objections on racial grounds — that they are the objections of only “white historians” — has affirmed that displacement.

    On the American Revolution, pivotal to any account of our history, the project asserts that the founders declared the colonies’ independence of Britain “in order to ensure slavery would continue.” This is not true. If supportable, the allegation would be astounding — yet every statement offered by the project to validate it is false. Some of the other material in the project is distorted, including the claim that “for the most part,” black Americans have fought their freedom struggles “alone.”

    Still other material is misleading. The project criticizes Abraham Lincoln’s views on racial equality but ignores his conviction that the Declaration of Independence proclaimed universal equality, for blacks as well as whites, a view he upheld repeatedly against powerful white supremacists who opposed him. The project also ignores Lincoln’s agreement with Frederick Douglass that the Constitution was, in Douglass’s words, “a GLORIOUS LIBERTY DOCUMENT.”

    Instead, the project asserts that the United States was founded on racial slavery, an argument rejected by a majority of abolitionists and proclaimed by champions of slavery like John C. Calhoun.

    Given that the 1619 Project is being developed into a book and student curriculum, the scholars state it is very important that these errors be amended to reflect an accurate history of America.

    But The New York Times said no.

    “New York Times Magazine editor Jake Silverstein addressed each concern from the professors but stood firmly behind the reporting and declined to correct it,” the Post reports.

    Read the letter to the editor in the Times and the Post’s coverage of it.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 19:45

  • SEC Investigating BMW For Using "Sales Punching" To Potentially Inflate Sales Numbers
    SEC Investigating BMW For Using “Sales Punching” To Potentially Inflate Sales Numbers

    While Tesla continues to waltz around regulators, breaking any and all securities laws it wants to, underreserving its warranty liabilities and allowing its self-driving cars with human beta testers to slam into inanimate objects before bursting into flames, regulators have decided to instead pay attention to BMW.

    It was reported yesterday that the SEC has now opened an investigation into whether BMW’s sales figures have been manipulated, according to the Wall Street Journal. On a side note, there’s been no word on whether or not BMW counts its “factory gated” vehicles in its press releases. 

    Instead, the SEC is looking at whether or not the automaker has engaged in “sales punching”, a practice that encourages dealers to register cars despite them not being sold.

    BMW acknowledged they were being investigated, stating: “We have been contacted by the SEC and will cooperate fully with their investigation.”

    BMW also faces litigation by European authorities on allegations of colluding with rivals to manipulate prices and control emissions. BMW has vowed to fight the case and took a $1.1 billion charge as a result in April. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The company has also faced headwinds due the U.S./China trade war’s effect on its Spartanburg, S.C. factory exports. 

    The SEC investigation comes as U.S. officials are reportedly pursuing other car companies suspected of engaging in the same practice.

    Fiat paid a $40 million fine in September to settle claims by the SEC that the company had paid dealers to report exaggerated sales numbers. But don’t worry, the company has said it “reviewed and refined its sales reporting procedures and was committed to maintaining strong controls.”

    We feel better.

    Fiat was also forced to revise several years of sales results, nullifying a streak of 75 months of sales increases. Using the revised numbers, the streak ended in September 2013. 

    Regulators also found that VW had defrauded U.S. consumers and the U.S. government in 2015 by rigging their cars to cheat emissions tests. 

    As a reminder, the investigation into BMW comes at arguably the peak of the auto bubble – as well as the peak of auto regulator apathy. We recently reported that only 7% of incomes had been verified on new auto loans since 2017 and, despite these ongoing investigations into other companies, the name we see as the industry’s main offender, Tesla, has been mostly left alone by regulators. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 19:20

  • How The Soviets Replaced Christmas With A Socialist Winter Holiday
    How The Soviets Replaced Christmas With A Socialist Winter Holiday

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    Leftist revolutionaries have long been in the habit of reworking the calendar so as it make it easier to force the population into new habits and new ways of life better suited to the revolutionaries themselves.

    The French revolutionaries famously abolished the usual calendar, replacing it with a ten-day week system with three weeks in each month. The months were all renamed. Christian feast days and holidays were replaced with commemorations of plants like turnips and cauliflower.

    The Soviet communists attempted major reforms to the calendar themselves. Among these was the abolition of the traditional week with its Sundays off and predictable seven-day cycles.

    That experiment ultimately failed, but the Soviets did succeed in eradicating many Christian traditional holidays in a country that had been for centuries influenced by popular adherence to the Eastern Orthodox Christian religion.

    Once the communists took control of the Russian state, the usual calendar of religious holidays was naturally abolished. Easter was outlawed, and during the years when weekends were removed, Easter was especially difficult to celebrate, even privately.

    But perhaps the most difficult religious holiday to suppress was Christmas, and much of this is evidenced in the fact that Christmas wasn’t so much abolished as replaced by a secular version with similar rituals.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Emily Tamkin writes at Foreign Policy:

    Initially, the Soviets tried to replace Christmas with a more appropriate komsomol (youth communist league) related holiday, but, shockingly, this did not take. And by 1928 they had banned Christmas entirely, and Dec. 25 was a normal working day.

    Then, in 1935, Josef Stalin decided, between the great famine and the Great Terror, to return a celebratory tree to Soviet children. But Soviet leaders linked the tree not to religious Christmas celebrations, but to a secular new year, which, future-oriented as it was, matched up nicely with Soviet ideology.

    Ded Moroz [a Santa Claus-like figure] was brought back. He found a snow maid from folktales to provide his lovely assistant, Snegurochka. The blue, seven-pointed star that sat atop the imperial trees was replaced with a red, five-pointed star, like the one on Soviet insignia. It became a civic, celebratory holiday, one that was ritually emphasized by the ticking of the clock, champagne, the hymn of the Soviet Union, the exchange of gifts, and big parties.

    In the context of these celebrations, the word “Christmas” was replaced by “winter.” According to a Congressional report from 1965,

    The fight against the Christian religion, which is regarded as a remnant of the bourgeois past, is one of the main aspects of the struggle to mold the new “Communist man.” … the Christmas Tree has been officially abolished, Father Christmas has become Father Frost, the Christmas Tree has become the Winter Tree, the Christmas Holiday the Winter Holiday. Civil-naming ceremonies are substituted for christening and confirmation, so far without much success.

    It is perhaps significant that Stalin found the Santa Claus aspect of Christmas worth preserving, and Stalin apparently calculated that a father figure bearing gifts might be useful after all.

    According to a 1949 article in The Virginia Advocate,

    at children’s gatherings in the holiday season … grandfather frost lectures on good Communist behavior. He customarily ends his talk with the question “to whom do we owe all the good things in our socialist society?” To which, it is said, the children chorus the reply, ‘Stalin.’


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 18:55

  • Movie Theater Stocks Slump Amid Underwhelming Year, Not Even Star Wars Can Save Dying Industry 
    Movie Theater Stocks Slump Amid Underwhelming Year, Not Even Star Wars Can Save Dying Industry 

    Movie theater stocks plunged on Monday following a disappointing opening weekend for Disney’s Star Wars: The Rise Of Skywalker, reported Bloomberg

    AMC Entertainment Holdings, Cinemark Holdings Inc., and Cineworld Group Plc all plunged after reports over the weekend indicated weak ticket sales from Dec. 20 to Dec. 22 for Star Wars. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Theater stocks have exhibited declines throughout most of the year. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The movie generated a whopping $176 million over the weekend, making it the third-largest December debut ever but tracked below $183 million estimates.

    “Hollywood was banking on a strong showing to boost receipts,” Geetha Ranganathan, an analyst at Bloomberg Intelligence, wrote.

    “The reception, far below predecessors, may have been partly due to mixed critical reviews.”

    According to Comscore estimates, North American movie ticket sales slumped in 2019 by 3.6% to $11.5 billion, despite several blockbuster debuts this year, including Avengers: EndgameThe Lion King, and Star Wars: The Rise of Skywalker. 

    North America’s movie theater industry has been in limbo since the emergence of streaming services. A consolidation wave among movie theaters continues despite Hollywood’s softer domestic performance in 2019. Operators have been hunting for additional growth channels, including expansion in Asia.

    U.K.-based Cineworld is expected to become North America’s largest movie theater operator as it acquires Canada’s Cineplex in a $1.86 billion deal. 

    The movie theater consolidation wave began in 2012 when China’s Dalian Wanda Group purchased AMC Entertainment. 

    Netflix has undoubtedly disrupted the industry by releasing its content on television screens and mobile devices instead of at the box office.  Netflix released 371 new movies and TV shows in 2019, over 50 percent more than they did last year, according to data compiled by Variety Insight. 

    Infographic: Netflix Beats TV Industry's Output Before 2006 | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    The movie theater industry is always changing, there are ups and downs, but these days — it’s in a secular decline as streaming services have undoubtedly changed consumer preferences of how they watch movies. So in the next decade, or let’s say by 2030 — will movie theaters even exist?  


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 18:30

  • Christmas Is Canceled
    Christmas Is Canceled

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    No matter how good old St Nick Chris Cringle is, in his red and white suit, he’s not as good as Orange man is bad. And that’s why Christmas is canceled for leftists.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Whingy Amanda Marcotte of Salon complains that everything about Christmas is ruined, because all of her family are fans of President Trump, so she can no longer have any relationship with them.

    In an op-ed titled “How Donald Trump ruined Christmas,” Marcotte complains that Trump “ruins everything he touches” and that “Christmas isn’t fun for me anymore.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “My family is mostly a bunch of Trump voters, sucked up into a vortex of propaganda and lies, unable even to admit basic facts about the world that run contrary to what their tribal politics dictate,” she whines.

    “That sort of thing is stressful on a normal day but makes a mockery of the idea of familial love and harmony.” Marcotte further sobs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The unhinged whinging just gets more and more pathetic as the piece progresses. Marcotte explains that because she is a liberal, feminist, atheist, her “enthusiasm for the Christmas season was always weak”, but now because of Trump it’s gone altogether.

    “This isn’t a matter of political differences that can be set aside for the sake of the holiday,” she blathers.

    “This is about not being able to make merry with people who think nothing of voting for a man who is on tape bragging about sexual assault, a man who cheats in elections and runs concentration camps on the border. A man whose racism has inspired a wave of terrorist violence, including in my hometown of El Paso, Texas.”

    “It’s a sad reminder that we are not the country we pretend to be when we sing songs about love and joy at this supposedly wonderful time of the year.” Marcotte snivels.

    Maybe the actual reality is that the entirety of her family just don’t like to wallow around in misery for a fortnight complaining about how shit everything is?

    But wait… Christmas is actually for white supremacists now, Marcotte argues, saying that because “Trump and his minions” have gotten hold of it, it has “morphed into something even uglier, a way to imply that the point of Christmas is to declare white supremacist America as the only ‘real’ America and to tell everyone else they can go hang.”

    What?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Marcotte argues that Thanksgiving is still ok, because she can avoid her family and just hang out in a safe space bubble with her friends, who all presumably agree with her about everything and never challenge anything she says. If only the entire world was like that!!

    “It seems a little silly to make a big thing out of a holiday that just reminds me how my own family and so many other people in America have been sucked up into the Trump cult.” Marcotte adds, saying “I’d rather just read a book or binge-watch some TV.”

    Miserable and deranged.

    She then ends with a diatribe about how evil capitalism is, and claims “I can sense the shaming, criticism and condescension coming my way, let me be clear: I am not a joyless person.”

    Could’ve fooled me.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 18:05

  • Russia's Su-57 Stealth Fighter Crashes During Factory Test Flight
    Russia’s Su-57 Stealth Fighter Crashes During Factory Test Flight

    Tass News is reporting that Russia’s most advanced stealth fighter crashed Tuesday during a test flight in the Khabarovsk Region in the Far East of the country. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The fifth-generation Su-57 fighter jet experienced technical failure of the aircraft’s control system, a defense source told Tass.

    “According to the preliminary information, the crash is due to a failure of the Su-57’s control system,” one of the sources said.

    Another source said, “the tail control failed.”

    At the time of the incident, a civilian pilot was operating the Su-57, ejected from the aircraft 69 miles from the airfield. 

    Russia’s United Aircraft Corporation (UAC) also confirmed the crash on Tuesday.

    The company said the Su-57’s emergency system performed well and ejected the pilot to safety. 

    TASS noted that this is the first crash of the Su-57, a fifth-generation multirole fighter that is designed to rival the US’ Lockheed Martin F-22 Raptor and Lockheed Martin F-35 Lightning II stealth fighters.

    The Su-57 was first tested in early 2010 and has since flown combat missions in Syria. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Last month, UAC started series production of the Su-57, rolled off the first production jet, and delivered it to Russia’s Aerospace Force.

    Russia’s Aerospace Force is expecting to receive 76 Su-57s by 2028. 

    Back in August, Deputy Defense Minister Alexei Krivoruchko told the press that Su-57 is “the most advanced fifth-generation multirole fighter jet, which will boost the domestic Aerospace Force’s combat capabilities” across the country. 

    Russia is planning on arming the stealth jets with hypersonic missiles to become the deadliest planes in the world.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 17:40

  • The Great Cover Up Of The Biggest Scandal In American History
    The Great Cover Up Of The Biggest Scandal In American History

    Via The Z-Man blog,

    Joe diGenova has been talking about the seditious plot to overturn the 2016 election for at least a year, maybe longer. Unlike a lot of the people commenting on this in the mass media, he is not using it to sell books or boost his cable career. He also knows how the FBI and DOJ works from a practical matter. Being knowledgeable makes him a rare guy in the commentariat. Most of the people brought on as experts for the cable chat shows know very little about their alleged areas of expertise.

    Regardless, he has been one of the most hawkish people on the Barr investigation, claiming that it is a real investigation with real criminal targets. In this recent radio interview he goes into the details of both the Barr investigation and the ongoing impeachment fiasco. He is a Trump partisan, so his opinions on impeachment are predictable, but his thoughts on the conspiracy are interesting. He probably has access to information from the Trump White House.

    The interesting thing about all of this is just how widespread the conspiracy was during the 2015-2016 period. In that interview he talks about former NSA Director Admiral Mike Rogers, who is allegedly cooperating with Barr and Durham. What makes the Rogers issue interesting is that he was the original whistle-blower. He is not treated as such, because the media hates Trump and anyone associated with him, but Rogers was the guy who blew the whistle on the spying to the Trump people.

    What’s also interesting about Rogers is he seems to have been a good guy, who decided to put an end to the shenanigans with regards to access to top-secret data by FBI contractors. He closed off their access at some point in 2016, which put him in bad odor with the Obama administration. He was eventually pushed out, which suggests the conspiracy has roots into the Obama inner-circle. That may explain why the easy cases to be made against the FBI conspirators are on hold.

    That’s the other thing about the Rogers case. As CTH explains in that post, his addition to the story reveals that the use of the NSA database by political contractors working for the Democrats goes back to at least 2012. It is an axiom of white-collar crime that the practice always goes back much further than the evidence initially reveals. Anyone who has done forensic accounting knows this. You find the first evidence of a crime, but it turns out that the pattern goes back much further.

    That may be what lies beneath all of this. The great puzzle thus far has been the lack of prosecutions, despite ample evidence. The FBI agents are all guilty of crimes that have been detailed in public documents and the IG reports. There is now proof that Comey perjured himself many times. Just from a public relations perspective alone, rounding up these guys and charging them with corruption seems like a no-brainer. Almost a year into his tenure and Barr has charged no one with a crime.

    One obvious explanation is that Barr is running a long con on Trump and the rest of the country, on behalf of the inner party. Robert Mueller was supposed to use his investigation to hoover up all the data so it could not be made public, in addition to harassing the Trump White House. His incompetence meant Barr took over the job and is now hoovering up all the information on the various parties. That way, everyone has an excuse for not doing anything about plot.

    One bit of evidence in support of this is the handling of the James Wolfe issue. He was the Senate staffer caught leaking classified information to one of the prostitutes hired by the Washington Post. Big media hires good looking young women to sleep with flunkies like Wolf in order to get access to information. Wolf was caught and charged, but instead of getting a couple years in jail, he got two months. He will come out and land into a six-figure job as a reward for being a good soldier.

    An alternative explanation is that what started as a straight forward political corruption case bumped into a long pattern of behavior. In the course of investigating that pattern, the trail went much further back than the 2016 election. If there is evidence of abuse going back to 2012, maybe it goes back further. It was the Bush people, after all, who pushed for the creation of secret courts and secret warrants. Maybe Dick Cheney was listening to your phone calls after all.

    It is not just the linear aspect of this. The sheer number of people involved in just the FBI scandal is phenomenal. There are at least 20 FBI people named and dozens of bit players in the media and DOJ. So far, the “contractors” with access to the NSA database have not been revealed, but that could be hundreds of people, given that it seems to have been a free-for-all. The corruption may not only go back a long time, but cover a wide swath of official Washington.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That may be the answer to the great cover up. That’s what we are seeing. This is a great cover up of the biggest scandal in American history. To date, no one has been charged with a crime, despite hundreds of crimes being documented. Many of the principals are now enjoying high six figure lives, based on the fact they were part of the seditious plot to overturn the 2016 election. Instead of the scandal of the century, it is the celebration of the century for the inner party.

    One of the signs of ruling class collapse is when they can no longer enforce the rules that maintain them as a ruling class. When the Romans started making exceptions to republican governance, it was a matter of time before someone simply decided the rules no longer applied to them. Perhaps the robot historians will consider Obama our Marius or Sulla. Maybe that person is in the near future. Either way, the rule of law is over and what comes next is the rule of men.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 17:15

  • US Must "Pursue Targeted Decoupling" From China's Economy, Says Former US Ambassador
    US Must “Pursue Targeted Decoupling” From China’s Economy, Says Former US Ambassador

    Despite the latest Sino-American phase one deal to ease tensions over trade, one former top US official is now calling for a decoupling between both economies, reported the South China Morning Post (SCMP). 

    Former US ambassador to India Ashley Tellis explains in a new book titled Strategic Asia 2020: US-China Competition for Global Influence — that the world’s two largest economies have entered a new period of sustained competition. 

    Tellis said Washington had developed a view that “China is today and will be for the foreseeable future the principal challenger to the US.”

    “The US quest for a partnership with China was fated to fail once China’s growth in economic capabilities was gradually matched by its rising military power,” he said.

    Tellis said Washington must resume its ability to support the liberal international order established by the US more than a half-century ago, and “provide the global public goods that bestow legitimacy upon its primacy and strengthen its power-projection capabilities to protect its allies and friends.”

    He said this approach would require more strategic cooperation with allies such as Australia, Japan, and South Korea.

    “The US should use coordinated action with allies to confront China’s trade malpractices … should pursue targeted decoupling of the US and Chinese economies, mainly in order to protect its defense capabilities rather than seeking a comprehensive rupture.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest phase one deal between both countries is a temporary trade truce — likely to be broken as a strategic rivalry encompasses trade, technology, investment, currency, and geopolitical concerns will continue to strain relations in the early 2020s.

    A much greater decoupling could be dead ahead and likely to intensify over time, as it’s already occurring in the technology sector. 

    Tellis said President Trump labeling China as a strategic competitor was one of “the most important changes in US-China relations.” 

    The decoupling has already started as Washington races to safeguard the country’s cutting-edge technologies, including 5G, automation, artificial intelligence, autonomous vehicle, hypersonics, and robotics, from getting into the hands of Chinese firms.

    A perfect example of this is blacklisting Huawei and other Chinese technology firms from buying US semiconductor components.  

    Liu Weidong, a US affairs specialist from the Chinese Academy of Social Sciences, told SCMP that increased protectionism among Washington lawmakers suggests the decoupling trend between both countries is far from over.

    The broader shift at play is that decoupling will result in de-globalization, economic and financial fragmentation, and disruption of complex supply chains. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 16:50

  • The TSA and Security Theater: Understanding American Airport Security Following 9/11
    The TSA and Security Theater: Understanding American Airport Security Following 9/11

    Authored by Brian Miller via Ammo.com,

    Following the attacks of September 11th, Congress passed the Aviation and Transportation Security Act (ATSA), creating the Transportation Security Agency (TSA). The TSA replaced private security screening companies with one government agency. Since then, air travelers have bowed to pat downs, bans on water bottles and other inconvenient, intrusive procedures as the “new normal” at our nation’s airports. But does any of this make us safer?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The short answer is no, it doesn’t. What’s more, laid out below is the quantifiable evidence that the TSA is a massive boondoggle that has done little to keep Americans safe while they travel. Indeed, it might make us less safe by providing a false sense of security, as American politicians shy away from ever questioning the efficacy of the TSA (or other elements deemed necessary for “homeland security”).

    Perhaps more disturbing is the established record of TSA agents stealing from passengers. You’re far more likely to get robbed by a TSA agent than you are to get protected by one, a shorthand for the bureaucratic state if there ever was one.

    We did an in-depth study about the history, practices and statistics of the Transportation Security Agency. Whether you’re skeptical of the TSA efficacy, convinced of their incompetence, or just irritated about having to get groped to go on a plane, this article is a must read.

    SECURITY THEATER AND THE TSA

    Security expert Bruce Schneier coined the term “security theater” to describe some of the TSA’s procedures and screening practices. Security theater provides the appearance of enhanced security without actually making anyone more secure.

    Since 9/11, the TSA has implemented new screening procedures on an almost constant basis. The structural problem with these new screening procedures is two-fold. First, these procedures are almost always in response to past threats, not in anticipation of future threats. Second, average Americans suffer the consequences for years to come in the form of ever-increasing screening procedures and lost time.

    Sadly, the TSA’s accumulated procedures and screening practices are actually causing more American deaths. Cornell University researchers found decreased air travel after 9/11 led to an extra 242 road fatalities per month. In all, the researchers estimate that 1,200 people died as a result of decreased air travel. In 2007, the Cornell researchers studied TSA screening procedures implemented in 2002, and found that they decreased air travel by 6% – leading to an additional 129 road fatalities in the last three months of 2002. In terms of casualties, that’s the same as blowing up a fully loaded Boeing 737.

    THE TSA’S SECURITY THEATER TIMELINE

    There have been significant and numerous changes in the TSA’s security theater since 9/11. Here are some of the highlights and lowlights:

    • September 12, 2001: During the months after 9/11, National Guard troops are posted at the nation’s airports. Their guns are empty.

    • November 19, 2001: President Bush signs the Aviation and Transportation Security Act (ATSA), replacing private security screening with the Transportation Security Administration (TSA).

    • November 22, 2001: British national Richard Reid tries to blow up a Paris-Miami flight using explosives hidden in his shoes. The TSA institutes a random shoe-screening policy.

    • April 2002: The TSA deploys 6,000 explosive trace detection machines, or “puffers,” at all American airports. Fewer than 100 machines are deployed and the plan is scrapped. The total cost of the project is more than $30 million.

    • September 2004: The TSA orders all jackets and belts removed and X-rayed. Visitors banned from gate area.

    • March 31, 2005: TSA adds all lighters to its list of prohibited items.

    • December 2005: In response to the Madrid train bombings the year before, the TSA starts the Visible Intermodal Prevention and Response (VIPR) program to secure America’s transportation infrastructure beyond airports.

    • August 10, 2006: All passengers now required to remove shoes during security screening.

    • August 10, 2006: In response to a foiled plot using liquid explosives in Britain, the TSA adds all liquids, gels and aerosols to its list of prohibited items.

    • September 2006: The TSA implements its 3-1-1 Rule, allowing liquids in 3-ounce containers that fit in a single 1-quart plastic bag.

    • 2007: The TSA repeals the lighter ban and the agency’s chief Kip Hawley says that taking lighters away is “security theater.”

    • October 2007: In response to intelligence about remote-detonated explosives, the TSA starts training screeners to carry out additional screening of remote control toys.

    • Christmas Day, 2009: Nigerian citizen Umar Farouk Abdulmutallab tries to blow up a flight from Amsterdam to Detroit using explosives concealed in his underwear. The TSA orders mandatory full-body scans for all passengers. Passengers who refuse to be scanned will receive a physical pat-down search instead.

    • Early 2010: The TSA starts introducing full-body scanners that use backscatter radiation to produce effectively nude images of passengers. By the end of the year, more than 500 scanners are operational.

    • August 2010: The TSA achieves its goal of screening 100% of all checked baggage and cargo on board domestic flights.

    • October 2010: Saudi intelligence discovers a plot to blow up aircraft with explosives hidden in printer cartridges. The TSA bans all printer cartridges from carry-on luggage.

    • November 16, 2010: Hundreds of body scan images are leaked to the press. The leak causes a wave of demands to ban the fully-body scanners. In response to public outcry, Congress orders the TSA to purchase machines that generate a more generic picture of passengers’ bodies.

    • November 17, 2010: The TSA institutes new “enhanced” pat-down procedures that allow screeners to touch passengers’ inner thighs, groins, buttocks and breasts – areas previously off limits.

    • End of 2011: Every U.S. airport has at least one full-body scanner.

    • March 2012: Shoe removal rules are relaxed to allow passengers younger than 12 and older than 75 to keep their shoes on during screening.

    • July 6, 2014The TSA bans powerless devices on direct flights to the United States from certain overseas airports. Smartphones, laptops and any device with dead batteries “will not be permitted onboard aircraft.”

    • October 2018: The TSA lays out plans to use facial recognition software for domestic flights. And they order travelers to pay $1.4 million in civil penalties for bringing guns to airports.

    Nowadays, the TSA runs background checks on all travelers before they even arrive at the airport. Using the Department of Homeland Security’s Automated Targeting System, a massive database that employs algorithms to identify potential terrorists, the TSA automatically places thousands of travelers on the so-called selectee list, which earns them an “SSSS” stamp on their boarding pass and extra screening every time they fly. For travelers who want to avoid extra screening, there’s the TSA’s PreCheck program, which lets passengers keep their shoes, belts and jackets on and skip lengthy lines in exchange for a background check, fingerprinting and a fee.

    THE TSA’S 95% FAILURE RATE IN REHEARSALS

    Although security procedures have gotten more aggressive under the TSA, detection rates seem no better than they were before September 11, 2001. An undercover investigation by the DHS in 2018, found that the TSA had equipment or procedure failure more than half the time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Numbers don’t lie. The TSA’s failure rate at weapon detection remains strong, which is likely 80% at some major airports. And during undercover tests, that failure rate increases. During covert tests conducted by the DHS in 2015, TSA agents failed to detect guns and fake explosives 95 percent of the time. In one test, an undercover DHS agent was stopped and received an “enhanced” pat-down search after setting off a metal detector, but the TSA screener failed to detect the fake bomb taped to the agent’s back.

    The U.S. hasn’t suffered any major attacks since 9/11. However, incidents like shoe bomber Richard Reid weren’t thwarted by the TSA – they were stopped by watchful passengers.

    HOW TO SPOT A TERRORIST

    Since 2006, the TSA has spent more than $1 billion on training so-called Behavior Detection Officers (BDOs) who watch passengers for suspicious behavior so they can be singled out for extra screening at airports. The program is called Screening Passengers by Observation Techniques (SPOT).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The specific behaviors that BDOs are trained to look for are supposed to be secret, but a leaked copy of the behavior checklist includes fidgeting, sweating, yawning and “suspicious” eye movements. SPOT operates on a point system. Sweaty palms and whistling earns travelers one point. Arrogance, a cold stare and good posture earn travelers two points. Other indicators include a recently shaved face, looking at the floor, clearing your throat, and complaining about the screening process. Travelers who get enough points can be flagged for extra screening.

    Since its inception in 2006, and after spending more than $1 billion, the SPOT program has only identified one man who could be called a terrorist. Kevin Brown, a Jamaican citizen, was waiting for his flight back home at Orlando International Airport in 2008. He checked his two bags, but not before a BDO flagged him as suspicious and ordered extra screening of his checked luggage – which contained pipes, caps, fuses, fuel and a handy printout explaining how to put them all together to make a bomb.

    Fewer than one out of the 30,000 passengers who are flagged every year as “suspicious” and are searched, end up getting arrested (usually for carrying drugs, undeclared currency or having outstanding warrants or being in the country illegally). A report by the Government Accountability Office in 2013 surveyed more than 400 scientific studies and found no evidence that terrorists can be identified by the behaviors on the SPOT checklist, and recommended that the TSA cut funding for SPOT and stop training new BDOs.

    THE ISRAELI ART OF CONVERSATION

    Israel faces more terrorist threats than any other country in the world, yet their airport security is a model of sensible, measured response to a very real danger.

    The screening process at Ben Gurion International Airport starts with a vehicle and bag inspection before passengers even enter the airport. Once inside the airport, passengers must pass through increasing layers of security, facing heavier and heavier scrutiny until they board. The level of technology at Ben Gurion hasn’t changed much since the 1980s. Metal detectors, X-ray scanners and bomb-sniffing dogs are still considered state-of-the-art.

    Israeli security screeners approach passengers to ask about their travel plans as standard practice. If passengers’ answers seem practiced or implausible, security personnel can order extra screening. Instead of a checklist, Israeli security screeners rely on intuition and the art of conversation to judge passengers’ intentions. Science bears this out as a more effective technique than a behavior checklist.

    Under the rules of the SPOT program, a BDO may see a passenger they feel is suspicious. However, the BDO cannot order extra screening unless the passenger displays approved “suspicious” behaviors like clearing their throat or looking at the floor. Since BDOs are supposed to remain undercover, they cannot approach passengers to gauge their intentions through conversation. That forces American airport security to rely on body language alone, which is actually worse than chance at identifying liars and others with concealed intent.

    There are three problems with the Israeli screening procedures, however: First, Israelis in general are used to higher levels of security scrutiny as part of their overall culture. This means both a greater acceptance of the idea of profiling and police interaction, but also a greater deal of confidence and trust in security and police forces.

    Perhaps more importantly, there are potential Constitutional issues. Profiling – racial or otherwise – does not currently violate Fourth Amendment protections, but no one is eager to test this in a court of law. Still, as proponents of the Israeli system are quick to point out, their profiling is behavioral, relying less upon unsuccessful pseudoscience and more upon a general “feel” officers trained in behavioral sciences get from interacting directly with travelers.

    Finally, there are concerns that the Israeli system simply won’t scale. Still, it’s worth asking how the Israeli system applied to the United States could get any worse.

    BEYOND SECURITY THEATER

    The TSA’s poor performance record has led some airports back to the private screening companies that handled security before 9/11. Under the TSA’s Screening Partnership Program, an approval process that typically takes years, airports can hire private security screeners. The only requirement is that the private outfits maintain the same level of security as the TSA. More than 20 local and international airports have joined the program – with San Francisco and Kansas City already onboard and more set to join as the TSA promises waiting times will reach three hours at busy airports during the spring and summer travel seasons.

    Private screeners at SPP airports have proven themselves to be more efficient and more effective than the TSA. A report by a House oversight committee in 2013 found that private screeners at San Francisco International Airport were much better at detecting prohibited items than TSA screeners at LAX, and wait times were shorter. As a result of the report, calls are growing in Congress to abolish the TSA and return to private screening companies.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 16:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th December 2019

  • Negative Rates & The Destruction Of Money: Sweden Ends Its Experiment
    Negative Rates & The Destruction Of Money: Sweden Ends Its Experiment

    Authored by Daniel Lacalle,

    Negative rates are the destruction of money, an economic aberration based on the mistakes of many central banks and some of their economists who start from a wrong diagnosis:

    the idea that economic agents do not take more credit or invest more because they choose to save too much and therefore saving must be penalized to stimulate the economy.

    Excuse the bluntness, but it is a ludicrous idea.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Inflation and growth are not low due to excess savings, but because of excess debt, perpetuating overcapacity with low rates and high liquidity and zombifying the economy by subsidizing the low productivity and highly indebted sectors and penalizing high productivity with rising and confiscatory taxation.

    Historical evidence of negative rates shows that they do not help reduce debt, they incentivize it, they do not strengthen the credit capacity of families, because the prices of non-replicable assets (real estate, etc.) skyrocket because of monetary excess, and the lower cost of debt does not compensate for the greater risk.

    Investment and credit growth are not subdued because economic agents are ignorant or saving too much, but because they don’t have amnesia. Families and businesses are more cautious in their investment and spending decisions because they perceive, correctly, that the reality of the economy they see each day does not correspond to the cost and the quantity of money.

    It is completely incorrect to think that families and businesses are not investing or spending. They are only spending less than what central planners would want. However, that is not a mistake from the private sector side, but a typical case of central planners’ misguided estimates, that come from using 2001-2007 as “base case” of investment and credit demand instead of what those years really were: a bubble.

    The argument of the central planners is based on an inconsistency: That rates are negative because markets demand them, not because they are imposed by the central bank. If that were the case, why don’t they let rates float freely if the result was going to be the same? Because it is false.

    Think for a moment what type of investment, company or financial decision is one that is profitable with rates at -0.5% but unviable with rates at 1%. A time bomb. It is no surprise that investment in bubble-prone sectors are rising with negative rates and non-replicable and financial assets skyrocket.

    Public debt trades at artificially low yields and, instead of strengthening economies, negative rates make governments more dependent on cheap debt. Politicians abandon any reformist impulse and prefer to accumulate more debt.

    The financial repression of central banks begins with a misdiagnosis, assuming that low growth and below-target inflation is a problem of demand, not of the previous excess, and ends up perpetuating the bubbles that they sought to solve.

    The policy of negative types can only be defended by people who have never invested or created a job because no one that has worked in the real economy can believe that financial repression will lead economic agents to take much more credit and strengthen the economy.

    Negative rates are a huge transfer of wealth from savers and real wages to the government and the indebted. A tax on caution. The destruction of the perception of risk that always benefits the most reckless. The bailout of the inefficient.

    Central banks ignore the effects of demography, technology and competition on inflation and growth of consumption, credit, and investment, and with the wrong policies generate new bubbles that become more dangerous than the previous ones. The next bubble is to increase again the fiscal imbalances of the countries. Even worse. When central banks present themselves as the agent that will reverse the effect of technology and demographics, they create a greater risk and bubble.

    Sweden launched its failed negative rate plan almost five years ago and now reverses it due to the financial risks that are created. The most interesting thing is that it reverses the policy of negative rates precisely because of the risk of an economic slowdown because the evidence shows that investment and consumption decisions do not increase with financial repression.

    In Sweden, with negative rates, the real estate price index has increased 50% (from 160 points to 240), the average residential index has risen 27%, non-replicable assets have risen between 30% and 70 % (infrastructure, etc.), the stock market has risen more than 20%. In that period, household consumption and investment (gross capital formation) have increased very little and real wages have remained stagnant.

    Monetary policy has gone from being a support for structural reforms to an excuse to avoid them. Now, governments are delighted to read that “fiscal measures” must be implemented. And when a government hears “fiscal measures” it translates into “spending.” And when the eurozone governments start spending, the result is always the same: more debt and higher taxes.

    In the eurozone, the economic aberration of negative rates continues despite the evidence of the collateral risks they generate. Meanwhile, you and I are blamed for not spending and borrowing more. What can go wrong?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 02:00

  • Turkey Can't Handle New Refugee Explosion & Greece Will Be First To Feel Impact: Erdogan
    Turkey Can’t Handle New Refugee Explosion & Greece Will Be First To Feel Impact: Erdogan

    At a moment Erdogan has his hands dirty in Syria and is preparing to get more militarily involved in Libya, Turkey’s president has yet again threatened Europe with a refugee horde so large no country will be able to handle it. He’s now specifically threatened Greece as being among the first to bear the brunt of the first waves of refugees unleashed by Turkey.

    His threats are now centering on the major uptick in airstrikes by Russia and Syria on Idlib province, said to number in the “hundreds” since a new operation began on Dec.16. Since then, tens of thousands of civilians living under al-Qaeda’s Hayat Tahrir al-Sham (HTS) have reportedly fled. 

    “Turkey cannot handle a fresh wave of migrants from Syria, President Tayyip Erdogan said on Sunday, warning that European countries will feel the impact of such an influx if violence in Syria’s northwest is not stopped,” Reuters reports. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image: refugee crisis hit the Greek island of Lesvos in 2015.

    Common estimates now put the number of Syrian refugees hosted on Turkish soil at 3.7 million, with another 3 million inside war-torn Idlib province, which means the refugee crisis is set to explode dramatically higher in terms of numbers — a likely scenario given Damascus has vowed to return “every inch” of Idlib and all Syrian territory to its control.

    Thus far thousands have fled into neighboring Turkey, but there’s been on the ground reports suggesting HTS militants are blocking the bulk of refugees from leaving, perhaps using them as ‘human shields’ amid the Russian-Syrian onslaught.

    During a public speech in Istanbul on Sunday night, Erdogan claimed over 80,000 people were currently fleeing Idlib for the safety of Turkey, and repeated his urgent appeal for Europe to give additional support. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “If the violence toward the people of Idlib does not stop, this number will increase even more. In that case, Turkey will not carry such a migrant burden on its own,” Erdogan said.

    And he named Greece while invoking the peak of the migrant crisis in 2015, promising a “repeat” if nothing is done:

    “The negative impact of the pressure we will be subjected to will be something that all European nations, especially Greece, will also feel,” he said, adding that a repeat of the 2015 migrant crisis would become inevitable.

    “We call on European countries to use their energy to stop the massacre in Idlib, rather than trying to corner Turkey for the legitimate steps it took in Syria,” Erdogan said, referencing the Turkish army’s own ongoing ‘Operation Peace Spring’ against US-backed Syrian Kurds.

    Erdogan further called the some $3 billion in support offered by the United Nations refugee agency last week “not enough”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As for Erdogan’s targeting Greece in his latest remarks, this comes amid Turkey’s new jostling to secure oil and gas exploration and drilling rights across a broad swath of the eastern and southern Mediterranean, especially following a contentious deal with Libya’s GNA in Tripoli. 

    Greek sources: Foreign Minister Nikos Dendias traveled to Benghazi, Libya, on Sunday, where he met with the head of the Libyan National Army, General Khalifa Haftar, according to a ministry statement.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Athens is reportedly preparing to formally recognize Gen. Khalifa Haftar’s Benghazi-based administration as the official government of Libya, at a moment he and Turkey are in direct open war with each other, given Ankara is said to be shipping more military supplies and possibly even troops to help repel his ongoing offensive against Tripoli. Turkey is the closest military supporter to the UN-recognized government in Tripoli, despite the UN-led arms embargo in place (which no one seems to be abiding by). 

    Greece has also vowed to thwart Turkish exploration and drilling vessels from traversing its waters to enter disputed maritime regions off Libya. 

    Thus with Athens now more closely embroiled in the emerging maritime dispute involving Turkey, Cyprus, Libya and Egypt, Erdogan has all the more reason to target Greece with threats of flooding the islands with migrants — as happened in 2015, and which has been a steady stream of new arrivals ever since. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 12/24/2019 – 01:00

  • The Christmas Truce Of WWI Paused The Murderous Demands Of The State
    The Christmas Truce Of WWI Paused The Murderous Demands Of The State

    Authored by Will Grigg via The Libertarian Institute,

    For a tragically short time, the Spirit of the Prince of Peace drowned out the murderous demands of the State.

    In August 1914, Europe’s major powers threw themselves into war with gleeful abandon. Germany, a rising power with vast aspirations, plowed across Belgium, seeking to checkmate France quickly before Russia could mobilize, thereby averting the prospect of a two-front war. Thousands of young Germans, anticipating a six-week conflict, boarded troop trains singing the optimistic refrain: “Ausflug nach Paris. Auf Widersehen auf dem Boulevard.” (“Excursion to Paris. See you again on the Boulevard.”)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The antagonists found themselves mired along a static line of trenches running for hundreds of miles through France and Belgium.

    The French were eager to avenge the loss of Alsace and Lorraine to Germany in 1870. The British government, leery of Germany’s growing power, mobilized hundreds of thousands of young men to “teach the Hun a lesson.” Across the continent, writes British historian Simon Rees, “millions of servicemen, reservists and volunteers … rushed enthusiastically to the banners of war…. The atmosphere was one of holiday rather than conflict.”

    Each side expected to be victorious by Christmas. But as December dawned, the antagonists found themselves mired along the Western Front – a static line of trenches running for hundreds of miles through France and Belgium. At some points along the Front, combatants were separated by less than 100 feet. Their crude redoubts were little more than large ditches scooped out of miry, whitish-gray soil. Ill-equipped for winter, soldiers slogged through brackish water that was too cold for human comfort, but too warm to freeze.

    The unclaimed territory designated No Man’s Land was littered with the awful residue of war – expended ammunition and the lifeless bodies of those on whom the ammunition had been spent. The mortal remains of many slain soldiers could be found grotesquely woven into barbed wire fences. Villages and homes lay in ruins. Abandoned churches had been appropriated for use as military bases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Many of those pressed into service on the Western Front had not succumbed to the initial frenzy of bloodlust. Fighting alongside French, Belgian, and English troops were Hindus and Sikhs from India, as well as Gurkhas from the Himalayan Kingdom of Nepal.

    As losses mounted and the stalemate hardened, war fever began to dissipate on both sides.

    These colonial conscripts had been transported from their native soil and deployed in trenches carved out of wintry Belgian cabbage patches. Highland Scots were also found at the Front, proudly wearing their kilts in defiance of the bitter December cold.

    The German troops were led by elite Prussian officers, representatives of the bellicose Junker aristocracy. The German rank and file included Bavarian, Saxon, Westphalian, and Hessian reservists, more than a few of whom had lived – or even been born – in England and spoke perfect English. Bismarck’s efforts to unite the scattered German principalities notwithstanding, many German troops remained more attached to their local communities than to what for them was an abstract German nation.

    Comrades at Arms

    Wallowing in what amounted to cold, fetid sewers, pelted by freezing rain, and surrounded by the decaying remains of their comrades, soldiers on both sides grimly maintained their military discipline. On December 7, Pope Benedict XV called for a Christmas cease-fire. This suggestion earned little enthusiasm from political and military leaders on both sides. But the story was different for the exhausted frontline troops.

    A December 4 dispatch from the commander of the British II Corps took disapproving notice of a “live-and-let-live theory of life” that had descended on the Front. Although little overt fraternization was seen between hostile forces, just as little initiative was shown in pressing potential advantages. Neither side fired at the other during meal times, and friendly comments were frequently bandied about across No Man’s Land. In a letter published by the Edinburgh Scotsman, Andrew Todd of the Royal Engineers reported that soldiers along his stretch of the Front, “only 60 yards apart at one place… [had become] very ‘pally’ with each other.”

    With Christmas approaching, the scattered gestures of goodwill across enemy lines increased.

    Rather than flinging lead at their opponents, the troops would occasionally hurl newspapers (weighted with stones) and ration tins across the lines. Barrages of insults sometimes erupted as well, but they were delivered “generally with less venom than a couple of London cabbies after a mild collision,” reported Leslie Walkinton of the Queen’s Westminster Rifles.

    As December waxed, the combat ardor of the frontline troops waned. With Christmas approaching, the scattered and infrequent gestures of goodwill across enemy lines increased. About a week before Christmas, German troops near Armentieres slipped a “splendid” chocolate cake across the lines to their British counterparts. Attached to that delectable peace offering was a remarkable invitation:

    We propose having a concert tonight as it is our Captain’s birthday, and we cordially invite you to attend – provided you will give us your word of honor as guests that you agree to cease hostilities between 7:30 and 8:30…. When you see us light the candles and footlights at the edge of our trench at 7:30 sharp you can safely put your heads above your trenches, and we shall do the same, and begin the concert.

    The concert proceeded on time, with the bewhiskered German troops singing “like Christy Minstrels,” according to one eyewitness account. Each song earned enthusiastic applause from the British troops, prompting a German to invite the Tommies to “come mit us into the chorus.” One British soldier boldly shouted, “We’d rather die than sing German.” This jibe was parried instantly with a good-natured reply from the German ranks: “It would kill us if you did.” The concert ended with an earnest rendition of “Die Wacht am Rhein,” and was closed with a few shots deliberately aimed at the darkening skies – a signal that the brief pre-Christmas respite was ended.

    Elsewhere along the Front, arrangements were worked out to retrieve fallen soldiers and give them proper treatment or burial.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a letter to his mother, Lt. Geoffrey Heinekey of the 2nd Queen’s Westminster Rifles described one such event that took place on December 19. “Some Germans came out and held up their hands and began to take in some of their wounded and so we ourselves immediately got out of our trenches and began bringing in our wounded also,” he recalled.

    “The Germans then beckoned to us and a lot of us went over and talked to them and they helped us to bury our dead. This lasted the whole morning and I talked to several of them and I must say they seemed extraordinarily fine men…. It seemed too ironical for words. There, the night before we had been having a terrific battle and the morning after, there we were smoking their cigarettes and they smoking ours.”

    Football in No Man’s Land

    Soon talk along the Front turned to the prospect of a formal cessation of hostilities in honor of Christmas. Again, this idea met resistance from above. Comments historian Stanley Weintraub, in his book, Silent Night: The Story of the World War I Christmas Truce:

    Most higher-ups had looked the other way when scattered fraternization occurred earlier. A Christmas truce, however, was another matter. Any slackening in the action during Christmas week might undermine whatever sacrificial spirit there was among troops who lacked ideological fervor. Despite the efforts of propagandists, German reservists evidenced little hate. Urged to despise the Germans, [British] Tommies saw no compelling interest in retrieving French and Belgian crossroads and cabbage patches. Rather, both sides fought as soldiers fought in most wars – for survival, and to protect the men who had become extended family.

    In a sense, the war itself was being waged within an extended family, since both Germany’s Kaiser Wilhelm II and England’s King George V were grandsons of Queen Victoria. More importantly, the warring nations were all part of what had once been known as Christendom. The irony of this fact was not lost on those sentenced to spend Christmas at the Front.

    By Christmas Eve, the German side of the Front was radiant with glowing Tannenbeume – small Christmas trees set up, sometimes under fire, by troops determined to commemorate the holy day. “For most British soldiers, the German insistence on celebrating Christmas was a shock after the propaganda about Teutonic bestiality, while the Germans had long dismissed the British as well as the French as soulless and materialistic and incapable of appreciating the festival in the proper spirit,” writes Weintraub. “Regarded by the French and British as pagans – even savages – the pragmatic Germans were not expected to risk their lives on behalf of each beloved Tannenbaum. Yet when a few were felled by Scrooge-like gunfire, the Saxons opposite the [British line] stubbornly climbed the parapets to set the endangered trees up once more.”

    Troops extracted themselves from their trenches and dugouts, approaching each other warily, and then eagerly, across No Man’s Land.

    The radiant Christmas trees reminded some Indian conscripts of lanterns used to celebrate the Hindu “Festival of Lights.” Some of them must have been puzzled over finding themselves freezing, undernourished, and confronting a lonely death thousands of miles from their homes as soldiers in a war which pitted Christian nations against each other. “Do not think that this is war,” wrote one Punjabi soldier in a letter to a relative. “This is not war. It is the ending of the world.”

    But there were souls on each side of that fratricidal conflict determined to preserve the decencies of Christendom, even amid the conflict. As Christmas dawned, German Saxon troops shouted greetings to the British unit across from it: “A happy Christmas to you, Englishmen!” That welcome greeting prompted a mock-insulting reply from one of the Scottish troops, who was mildly irritated at being called an Englishman: “The same to you Fritz, but dinna o’er eat youself wi’ they sausages!”

    A sudden cold snap had left the battlefield frozen, which was actually a relief for troops wallowing in sodden mire. Along the Front, troops extracted themselves from their trenches and dugouts, approaching each other warily, and then eagerly, across No Man’s Land. Greetings and handshakes were exchanged, as were gifts scavenged from care packages sent from home. German souvenirs that ordinarily would have been obtained only through bloodshed – such as spiked pickelhaube helmets, or Gott mit uns belt buckles – were bartered for similar British trinkets. Carols were sung in German, English, and French. A few photographs were taken of British and German officers standing alongside each other, unarmed, in No Man’s Land.

    Near the Ypres salient, Germans and Scotsmen chased after wild hares that, once caught, served as an unexpected Christmas feast. Perhaps the sudden exertion of chasing wild hares prompted some of the soldiers to think of having a football match. Then again, little prompting would have been necessary to inspire young, competitive men – many of whom were English youth recruited off soccer fields – to stage a match. In any case, numerous accounts in letters and journals attest to the fact that on Christmas 1914, German and English soldiers played soccer on the frozen turf of No Man’s Land.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    British Field Artillery Lieutenant John Wedderburn-Maxwell described the event as “probably the most extraordinary event of the whole war – a soldier’s truce without any higher sanction by officers and generals….”

    This isn’t to say that the event met with unqualified approval. Random exchanges of gunfire along the Front offered lethal reminders that the war was still underway.

    From his rearward position behind the lines, a “gaunt, sallow soldier with a thick, dark mustache and hooded eyes” witnessed the spontaneous eruption of Christian fellowship with hateful contempt. The German Field Messenger of Austrian birth heaped scorn on his comrades who were exchanging Christmas greetings with their British counterparts. “Such a thing should not happen in wartime,” groused Corporal Adolf Hitler. “Have you no German sense of honor left at all?” “More than patriotic scruples were involved” in Hitler’s reaction, notes Weintraub. “Although a baptized Catholic, he rejected every vestige of religious observance while his unit marked the day in the cellar of the Messines monastery.”

    What If…?

    In a January 2, 1915 account of the Christmas Truce, the London Daily Mirror reflected that “the gospel of hate” had lost its allure to soldiers who had come to know each other.

    “The soldier’s heart rarely has any hatred in it,” commented the paper. “He goes out to fight because that is his job. What came before – the causes of the war and the why and wherefore – bother him little. He fights for his country and against his country’s enemies. Collectively, they are to be condemned and blown to pieces. Individually, he knows they’re not bad sorts.”

    “Many British and German soldiers, and line officers, viewed each other as gentlemen and men of honor,” writes Weintraub. The rank and file came to understand that the man on the other end of the rifle, rather than the soulless monster depicted in ideological propaganda, was frightened and desperate to survive and return to his family. For many along the Front, these realities first became clear in the light cast by the German Tannenbaum.

    The informal truce held through Christmas and, at some points along the Front, through the following day.

    In the shared symbol of the Christmas tree – an ornament of pagan origins appropriated by Christians centuries ago – British and German troops found “a sudden and extraordinary link,” observed British author Arthur Conan Doyle after the war (a conflict that claimed his son’s life). “It was an amazing spectacle,” Doyle reflected, “and must arouse bitter thought concerning the high-born conspirators against the peace of the world, who in their mad ambition had hounded such men on to take each other by the throat rather than by the hand.”

    In a remarkable letter published by The Times of London on January 4, a German soldier stated that “as the wonderful scenes in the trenches [during Christmas] show, there is no malice on our side, and none in many of those who have been marshaled against us.” But this was certainly not true of those who orchestrated the war, the “high-born conspirators against the peace of the world.” As British historian Niall Ferguson points out, the war-makers’ plans for the world required “Maximum slaughter at minimum expense.”

    The informal truce held through Christmas and, at some points along the Front, through the following day (known as “Boxing Day” to British troops). But before New Year’s Day the war had resumed in all of its malignant fury, and the suicide of Christendom continued apace.

    Most wars are senseless exercises in mass murder and needless destruction. World War I, however, is remarkable not only for being more avoidable and less justifiable than most wars, but also for its role in opening the gates of hell. Mass starvation and economic ruin inflicted on Germany during the war and its aftermath cultivated the National Socialist (Nazi) movement. Nearly identical ruin wrought in Russia thrust Lenin and the Bolsheviks to power. Benito Mussolini, a socialist agitator once regarded as Lenin’s heir, rose to power in Italy. Radical variants of intolerant totalitarian nationalism ulcerated Europe. The seeds of future wars and terrorism were deeply sewn in the Middle East.

    The truce – a welcome fermata in the symphony of destruction – illustrated a timeless truth.

    What if the Christmas Truce of 1914 had held? Might a negotiated peace have ensued, preserving Christendom for at least a while longer? We do not know. It is doubtful that the “high-born conspirators against the peace of the world” would have been long deterred in pursuing their demented plans. But the truce – a welcome fermata in the symphony of destruction – illustrated a timeless truth of the nature of the human soul as designed by its Creator.

    Reflecting on the Christmas Truce, Scottish historian Roland Watson writes: “The State bellows the orders ‘Kill! Maim! Conquer!’ but a deeper instinct within the individual does not readily put a bullet through another who has done no great offense, but who rather says with them, ‘What am I doing here?’”

    For a tragically short time, the Spirit of the Prince of Peace drowned out the murderous demands of the State.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 23:45

  • Baltimore Resurrects Spy Plane Program To Monitor Citizens
    Baltimore Resurrects Spy Plane Program To Monitor Citizens

    Baltimore City announced last week the return of a surveillance plane program that will use high-tech sensors to monitor citizens and help deter violent crime, reported WJZ Baltimore

    Police Commissioner Michael Harrison held a press conference Friday about three new spy planes that could hit the skies by May 2020. 

    Harrison said the new pilot program could utilize as many as three spy planes and will test whether the planes can aid investigators in solving violent crimes. 

    Ross McNutt, the president of Persistent Surveillance Systems, the company that operates the spy planes, told WJZ that the aircraft would be used to “save as many lives as possible.” McNutt said as many as three planes could start flying next May. 

    We noted several months ago about the possibility of the planes returning to the skies of Baltimore. 

    Each plane has high-tech sensors that can monitor up to 32 square miles at a time, and each would fly 45 to 50 hours a week. 

    As early as 2015, we reported that Persistent was flying a Cessna 182T Skylane over the streets of Baltimore during the riots. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The funding for the planes will be provided by Texas billionaire philanthropists John and Laura Arnold. There’s no expense to taxpayers to fly the aircraft for the first six months. 

    “We will be the first American city to use this technology in an effort to deter violent crime, “Harrison said. “It is important we are transparent about how the program will and will not be used going forward. “

    We noted Monday morning that Baltimore City’s homicide count for 2019 stands at 336, likely to breach the all-time high of 342 in the coming week, resulting in one of the worst years ever for violent crime in the city. 

    The resurrection of the spy plane program shows what happens when an American city implodes — the response by politicians is to create a surveillance state.  

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 23:25

  • After Blowing $3 Trillion On Lies In Afghanistan, Congress Just Authorized A Trillion More For 2020
    After Blowing $3 Trillion On Lies In Afghanistan, Congress Just Authorized A Trillion More For 2020

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    It’s rare that I read something on the Washington Post that I don’t find highly biased, even repugnant. But with their recent article on the Afghanistan Papers, they truly knocked the ball out of the park.

    The facts they shared should have every American protesting in the streets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trillions of dollars have been spent on a war that the Pentagon knew was unwinnable all along. More than 2300 American soldiers died there and more than 20,000 have been injured. More than 150,000 Afghanis were killed, many of them civilians, including women and children.

    And they lied to us constantly.

    Congress just proved that the truth doesn’t matter, though. A mere 22 hours after the release of this document, the new National Defense Authorization Act that breezed through the House and Senate was signed by the President. That bill authorized $738 billion in military spending for 2020, actually increasing the budget by $22 billion over previous years.

    So, how is your representation in Washington, DC working out for you?

    What are the Afghanistan Papers?

    The Afghanistan Papers are a brilliant piece of investigative journalism published by the Washington Post and the article is very much worth your time to read. I know, I know – WaPo. But believe me when I tell you this is something all Americans need to see.

    This was an article that took three years of legal battles to bring to light. WaPo acquired the documents using the Freedom of Information Act and got more than 2000 pages of insider interviews with “people who played a direct role in the war, from generals and diplomats to aid workers and Afghan officials.” These documents were originally part of a federal investigation into the “root failures” of the longest conflict in US history – more than 18 years now.

    Three presidents, George W. Bush, Barack Obama, and Donald Trump, have been involved in this ongoing war. It turns out that officials knew the entire time this war was “unwinnable” yet they kept throwing American lives and American money at it.

    Here’s an excerpt from WaPo’s report. Anything that is underlined is taken verbatim from the papers themselves – you can click on them to read the documents.

    In the interviews, more than 400 insiders offered unrestrained criticism of what went wrong in Afghanistan and how the United States became mired in nearly two decades of warfare.

    With a bluntness rarely expressed in public, the interviews lay bare pent-up complaints, frustrations and confessions, along with second-guessing and backbiting.

    “We were devoid of a fundamental understanding of Afghanistan — we didn’t know what we were doing,” Douglas Lute, a three-star Army general who served as the White House’s Afghan war czar during the Bush and Obama administrations, told government interviewers in 2015. He added: “What are we trying to do here? We didn’t have the foggiest notion of what we were undertaking.”

    “If the American people knew the magnitude of this dysfunction . . . 2,400 lives lost,” Lute added, blaming the deaths of U.S. military personnel on bureaucratic breakdowns among Congress, the Pentagon and the State Department. “Who will say this was in vain?” (source)

    The important thing to note about these interviews is that the interviewees never expected their words to become public. They weren’t “blowing the whistle.” They were answering questions for a federal investigation. So they didn’t hold back. These aren’t “soundbites.” It’s what the real witnesses are saying.

    The U.S. government has not carried out a comprehensive accounting of how much it has spent on the war in Afghanistan, but the costs are staggering.

    Since 2001, the Defense Department, State Department and U.S. Agency for International Development have spent or appropriated between $934 billion and $978 billion, according to an inflation-adjusted estimate calculated by Neta Crawford, a political science professor and co-director of the Costs of War Project at Brown University.

    Those figures do not include money spent by other agencies such as the CIA and the Department of Veterans Affairs, which is responsible for medical care for wounded veterans.

    “What did we get for this $1 trillion effort? Was it worth $1 trillion?” Jeffrey Eggers, a retired Navy SEAL and White House staffer for Bush and Obama, told government interviewers. He added, “After the killing of Osama bin Laden, I said that Osama was probably laughing in his watery grave considering how much we have spent on Afghanistan.” (source)

    The US government deliberately misled the American people.

    What’s more, if you officials, up to and including three presidents, knew they were throwing money at something that could never be achieved. They did it anyway and they lied to our faces about it.

    The documents also contradict a long chorus of public statements from U.S. presidents, military commanders and diplomats who assured Americans year after year that they were making progress in Afghanistan and the war was worth fighting.

    Several of those interviewed described explicit and sustained efforts by the U.S. government to deliberately mislead the public. They said it was common at military headquarters in Kabul — and at the White House — to distort statistics to make it appear the United States was winning the war when that was not the case.

    Every data point was altered to present the best picture possible,” Bob Crowley, an Army colonel who served as a senior counterinsurgency adviser to U.S. military commanders in 2013 and 2014, told government interviewers. “Surveys, for instance, were totally unreliable but reinforced that everything we were doing was right and we became a self-licking ice cream cone. (source)

    It’s been an epic 18-year-long exercise in CYA. (Cover Your A$$). I don’t see how anyone could fail to be outraged by this. And what I’ve cited here is just the crap icing on the maggot cupcake. It’s a festering mess and I urge you, if you really want to know the truth, to read this article on WaPo and click on these links.

    How was all this money spent?

    A lot of it went to building infrastructure in Afghanistan. It was flagrantly and frivolously used there while we live in a place where people are going bankrupt at best and dying at worst because they can’t afford medical care and there are places in our country without clean running water or toilets.

    One unnamed executive with the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID) guessed that 90 percent of what they spent was overkill: “We lost objectivity. We were given money, told to spend it and we did, without reason.”

    … One unidentified contractor told government interviewers he was expected to dole out $3 million daily for projects in a single Afghan district roughly the size of a U.S. county. He once asked a visiting congressman whether the lawmaker could responsibly spend that kind of money back home: “He said hell no. ‘Well, sir, that’s what you just obligated us to spend and I’m doing it for communities that live in mud huts with no windows.’ ” (source)

    Aren’t you angry about this? Don’t you feel betrayed as more Americans struggle to pay their bills and eat food and keep a roof over their heads each month?

    Who benefits from this?

    As usual, follow the money.

    The defense industry certainly reaped rewards and it’s highly likely a lot of people who had the power to allow it to go on made some “wise investments” that have paid off for them.  But for the rest of us, this conflict has done nothing except ensure that our tax dollars are not here improving our infrastructure or helping Americans lead better and more productive lives.

    Dr. Ron Paul refers to this as the crime of the century.

    It is not only members of the Bush, Obama, and Trump Administrations who are guilty of this massive fraud. Falsely selling the Afghanistan war as a great success was a bipartisan activity on Capitol Hill. In the dozens of hearings I attended in the House International Relations Committee, I do not recall a single “expert” witness called who told us the truth. Instead, both Republican and Democrat-controlled Congresses called a steady stream of neocon war cheerleaders to lie to us about how wonderfully the war was going. Victory was just around the corner, they all promised. Just a few more massive appropriations and we’d be celebrating the end of the war.

    Congress and especially Congressional leadership of both parties are all as guilty as the three lying Administrations. They were part of the big lie, falsely presenting to the American people as “expert” witnesses only those bought-and-paid-for Beltway neocon think tankers.

    What is even more shocking than the release of this “smoking gun” evidence that the US government wasted two trillion dollars and killed more than three thousand Americans and more than 150,000 Afghans while lying through its teeth about the war is that you could hear a pin drop in the mainstream media about it. Aside from the initial publication in the Washington Post, which has itself been a major cheerleader for the war in Afghanistan, the mainstream media has shown literally no interest in what should be the story of the century. (source)

    And it’s most likely that nobody will ever face punishment for this deception. If this is not the very definition of the term “war crimes” I can hardly imagine what is. Dr. Paul continues:

    We’ve wasted at least half a year on the Donald Trump impeachment charade – a conviction desperately in search of a crime. Meanwhile one of the greatest crimes in US history will go unpunished. Not one of the liars in the “Afghanistan Papers” will ever be brought to justice for their crimes. None of the three presidents involved will be brought to trial for these actual high crimes. Rumsfeld and Lute and the others will never have to fear justice. Because both parties are in on it. There is no justice. (source)

    The response? Silence and a budget increase.

    The people in government don’t care that we know about all this. Sure, it’s mildly inconvenient but “whatever.”

    How do I know this?

    Simple. Less than a full day after the story broke, the new NDAA ended up on President Trump’s desk and was signed, authorizing an additional 22 billion dollars for next year’s defense spending. And all anyone can talk about is, “Oooohhhh Space Force!!!”

    Government: “Merry Christmas. We’re going to blow through more of your tax money and you won’t get a damned thing for it.”

    I couldn’t make this up if I tried. In a notable, must-read op-ed, Darius Shahtahmasebi cited some horrific incidents and concluded:

    We can’t let this recent publication obscure itself into nothingness. The recent reaction from Congress is a giant middle finger designed to tell you that (a) there will never be anything you can do about it and (b) they simply don’t care how you feel. Democracy at its finest from the world’s leading propagator of democratic values. (source)

    When is enough going to be enough? Why are we not enraged en masse? Why haven’t we recalled these treasonous bastards and taken our country and our budget back?

    For a country that is ready to take up arms and waste countless hours “impeaching” Trump over something he said on a phone call, it sure says a lot about those same people ignoring 18 years of treasonous behavior by three separate administrations.

    Why isn’t the media raising hell over this? Why aren’t these lives important? Why isn’t sending trillions of our dollars to be frittered away an outrage?

    People love to say “America First” and “impeach Trump for treason” and all that jazz. They love to call anti-war people “un-American” and recommend a quick, one-way trip to Somalia if we don’t “support our troops.” However, I think is far more evidence of supporting our troops to want out of there, not risking their lives based on a castle of lies that further enriches powerful and wealthy people who have nothing to lose.

    Most people love to be outraged about frivolous matters. But when a report like this and its following insult are met with resounding silence, it’s pretty obvious that hardly anybody is really paying attention.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 23:05

    Tags

  • China Slams New US Space Force As Weaponizing A "New Battlefield" 
    China Slams New US Space Force As Weaponizing A “New Battlefield” 

    Entirely to be expected, China has slammed Trump’s newly established Space Force, calling it an unnecessary first move on the part of Washington to weaponize space

    Warning of a new Cold War style weapons space race, China’s Foreign Ministry said it is “deeply concerned” and “resolutely opposed” to the United States’ newest sixth branch of the military, calling it a threat to peaceful space missions undertaken by other countries.

    Coming days after Trump signed into law the defense bill which formally establishes United States Space Force, foreign ministry spokesman Geng Shuang said: “The relevant U.S. actions are a serious violation of the international consensus on the peaceful use of outer space, undermine global strategic balance and stability, and pose a direct threat to outer space peace and security,” according to the Associated Press

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustration image via Axios

    He also said the US initiative marking the first time in 70 years that a new branch has been established could make space into a “new battlefield”

    However, Washington officials and pundits have pointed to Beijing’s own ambitious space program which has advanced rapidly since China’s first crewed mission in 2003, per the AP:

    China in 2007 conducted an unannounced missile strike against one of its own defunct satellites, creating an enormous amount of space debris.

    Geng dismissed such concerns, calling them “unfounded counter charges” that merely provided the U.S. with a justification for its own actions. China, he said, has consistently opposed the weaponization of space and believes international treaties on arms control in outer space need to be negotiated.

    According to a prior report in Axios, China’s ambitions and intentions in space remain somewhat ambiguous, and while it “has publicly maintained that its goals in space are peaceful” it remains that it’s “military is also working toward shoring up its capabilities in space, driving the U.S. to take stock of its own orbital defenses.”

    The Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman added further: “We hope that the international community, especially the major powers concerned, will adopt a cautious and responsible attitude to prevent outer space from becoming a new battlefield and work together to maintain lasting peace and tranquility in outer space.”

    Trump’s own remarks upon signing the 2020 NDAA which authorized the Space Force didn’t bring Beijing any reassurances. He had said

    “The Space Force will help us deter aggression and control the ultimate high ground.”

    “For the first time since President Harry Truman created the Air Force over 70 years ago — think of that — we will create a brand new American military service. That’s such a momentous statement,” Trump said at the signing ceremony.

    “With my signature today, you will witness the birth of the Space Force, and that will be now officially the sixth branch of the United States Armed Forces. That is something really incredible. It’s a big moment. That’s a big moment, and we’re all here for it. Space, going to be a lot of things happening in space,” he added.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 22:45

  • What The Hell Is A 'FinTech' Anyway?
    What The Hell Is A ‘FinTech’ Anyway?

    Authored by Omid Malekan via Medium.com,

    Decentralized Finance, or DeFi, has really shined in the past year, and proven resilient during the crypto bear market. If you haven’t been paying attention, there is now a rich ecosystem of blockchain-based, fully-transparent and mostly-decentralized applications that offer lending, saving, trading, market making, derivatives, synthetic assets and even insurance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    MakerDAO, the leader of the bunch and by far the most sophisticated project on the Ethereum platform, recently pulled off a successful transition to version 2.0. It now boasts a $115m loan portfolio backed by close to $350m in assets. It also outputs the most reliable stablecoin in the blockchain ecosystem, one that is always fully backed (unlike Tether) based on sound financial principles (unlike Basis) and doesn’t have any corporate baggage (unlike Libra).

    If Maker were a FinTech, the VC community would be tripping over itself to get access. The Fintech Insider podcast wouldn’t stop blabbing about it and PYMNTS would have done an entire series on the transition to multi collateral Dai. But nobody considers Maker a FinTech. If you google “MakerDAO + FinTech” the only hit is the project’s own GitHub.

    Most FinTech experts probably don’t even know it exists. That’s not due to size, as Maker is presently at half-Unicorn status. It’s not due to traction either given the over 100,000 different loans the service has already dished out and the hundreds of millions of dollars worth of assets it currently holds as collateral. Maybe the experts are thrown off by the fact that MakerDAO is profitable , violating the sacred notion that the best startups are the ones that lose money today and will lose even more tomorrow.

    Or maybe it’s just a lack of imagination. Most FinTechs are nothing more than an old business model using new infrastructure. Stripe is a digital knuckle-buster that embeds into websites. Robinhood is a discount broker with a slick interface (but without the profits discount brokers used to be known for.) PayPal is Western Union using TCP/IP instead of telegraph. Revolut is digitized travelers checks with some random other businesses thrown in (because when losing money is a virtue, you should go into as many random business as possible). Chime is a bank, like any other bank, except that it’s done away with branches, and positive cash flows.

    These companies have smart and hard working founding teams and millions of loyal users, for which they deserve credit. They also have the old guard of financial services on their toes to upgrade their systems, which is good for everyone. Some even deploy new tech such as AI in genuinely creative ways. They are incrementally innovative, but only by the standards of existing financial services, an industry that only recently discovered the internet.

    Fintechs are far from revolutionary. Most still do what their predecessors have done for centuries — use proprietary ledgers to move client money around or intermediate between savers and borrowers. They have typical management structures and, like those who came before them, gain user trust from reputation and regulation. You, as a concerned client, know as much about what’s going on inside their systems as customers of the First Bank of Wichita did 100 years ago (actually FBW had a banking license, which many Fintechs don’t, so it probably had tighter disclosure requirements). But hey, they use Python, so there’s that.

    DeFi projects like Maker are actually different because the root of trust on top of which they are designed is an open, decentralized and censorship resistant blockchain platform. Here is the actual list of every loan Maker has ever given out, open for anyone to see. It’s also the first bank to tell you, Joe Schmo Public, its exact leverage ratio in real-time — a privilege that even the CEO of the hottest challenger bank probably doesn’t have.

    Like all DeFi projects, MakerDAO has never discriminated based on race, gender, nationality, income level or any other factor beyond financial qualification. A poor person in Vietnam borrowing a few dollars from Maker pays the same interest rate as a billionaire in America taking down a giant loan. Can your favorite FinTech offer the same?

    Then there is the superfluidity of the DeFi ecosystem. Every user can move seamlessly from borrowing to saving to trading to market making to investing in synthetic assets, and from crypto exposure to dollars to gold to the S&P 500, all within a few minutes and for just pennies in fees.

    Compare that to the FinTech world where PNC Bank just kicked out Plaid so users can’t cash out from Venmo. That’s problematic for Venmo users wanting to transfer a balance to PayPal, because even though both services are owned by the same company, they don’t interoperate. #innovation

    Despite the best efforts of many smart people, the FinTech industry is a lot closer to the legacy financial system than the blockchain-based one. There are projects on Ethereum such as Uniswap for which there is no historical analog. The word innovation has been abused to the point of meaninglessness, but if we are to ever resurrect it, it should mean “that which has not existed before, but should.”

    So what the hell is a FinTech anyway? Depends on what you are looking for. If you are looking for easy to understand projects with nice interfaces and fat valuations, look to the traditional names. If you are looking for originality, then it’s time to start paying attention to DeFi. You’ll know you are confronted by actual innovation by how confusing most of the projects will be at the outset. Confusion is a necessary condition of understanding something seminal.

    Just as 2019 was the year stablecoins exploded onto the scene, 2020 will be the year DeFi breaks the world, in a great way. Business models will be challenged, the uninformed will be embarrassed and regulators will have yet another freak out. The world will actually change a little bit.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 22:25

  • Here Are The 50 US Housing Markets Already Turning Ugly 
    Here Are The 50 US Housing Markets Already Turning Ugly 

    Plunging mortgage rates in late 2018 through 2019 wasn’t enough to revive the housing market (despite the hope of 20-year homebuilder sentiment). Cracks are already starting to appear in many metro areas across the country, as a more profound slowdown could be imminent. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last week, Home Depot ruined the party and pretty much declared that a housing boom in 2020 is non-existent. 

    The home-improvement chain cut its sales forecast for 2020, signaling that real estate and consumers could exhibit weakness in the year ahead. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The disappointing 2020 forecast comes amid a report that 50 housing markets across the country are already showing signs of a downturn. 

    GOBankingRates evaluated 500 metro areas for high rates of foreclosures and underwater mortgages, variations in median home listing prices, the number of days homes are on the market, and the percentage of for-sale listings with price cuts, against the national average and determined the 50 most at-risk metro areas that are already turning south.

    GOBankingRates determined that Peoria, Illinois, is the most at-risk metro area of seeing its housing market implode. Florida had the highest amount of real estate markets that were slowing. Here’s the full list: 

    50. Fort Myers, Florida

    • Median list price: $249,999

    • 2-year price change: -1.4%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.9%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,921 homes

    House prices are dropping in this city in southwest Florida. While home prices nationwide have climbed an average of 9.4% over the past two years, prices have dropped 1.4% in Fort Myers over the same period. Plus, houses for sale spend 105 days on the market in Fort Myers, on average, compared with a national average of 66 days.

    49. Newport News, Virginia

    • Median list price: $190,000

    • 2-year price change: 8.4%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 19.2%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,172 homes

    The percentage of underwater mortgages in this city in southeastern Virginia near Virginia Beach is more than double the national average of 8.2%. However, the real estate market here hasn’t turned too ugly yet. In fact, the percentage of listed home with price cuts in Newport News — 12.6% — is lower than the national average of 17.5%.

    48. Cumming, Georgia

    • Median list price: $383,511

    • 2-year price change: 1.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 4%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,311 homes

    Home prices still are rising in this suburb of Atlanta — but not nearly as much as the national average. In fact, home prices in Cumming increased an average of just 0.7% over the past year. And 21.8% of listed homes here have seen price cuts compared with a national average of 17.5%.

    47. Toledo, Ohio

    • Median list price: $84,900

    • 2-year price change: 8.8%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 24.7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,428 homes

    Home price growth has slowed over the past year in this western Ohio city on the banks of Lake Erie. However, the bigger problem here is the high percentage of underwater mortgages — which is about three times the national average. Plus, the number of foreclosed homes is higher than the national average.

    46. Naperville, Illinois

    • Median list price: $439,990

    • 2-year price change: -2.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 3,897 homes

    This Chicago suburb has made it onto plenty of “best places to live” lists. However, the housing market has been slumping here. Home prices have dropped more than 2% over the past two years. And at 26.4%, Naperville has the highest percentage of listed homes with prices cuts of any city on this list.

    45. Sarasota, Florida

    • Median list price: $359,000

    • 2-year price change: 5.6%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 4.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,520 homes

    South of Tampa on Florida’s Gulf Coast, Sarasota has a real estate market that could turn ugly. Home price growth has slowed. Houses for sale are sitting on the market for an average of 99 days, far longer than the national average of 66 days. On top of that, the foreclosure rate is higher in Sarasota than it is nationwide.

    44. Fort Lauderdale, Florida

    • Median list price: $499,900

    • 2-year price change: -0.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,507 homes

    The current housing market is slumping in this tourist destination about 30 miles north of Miami. Home prices in Fort Lauderdale have fallen in the past two years. And the average number of days houses stay on the market here — 133 — is double the national average.

    43. Menifee, California

    • Median list price: $380,000

    • 2-year price change: 8.3%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 5.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 808 homes

    This city in Southern California is part of the Los Angeles metro area. The median home price in Menifee is well above the national median. However, the housing market here could be headed for trouble. Menifee has the third-highest foreclosure rate among cities on this list.

    42. Tuscaloosa, Alabama

    • Median list price: $207,988

    • 2-year price change: 0%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11.7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,393 homes

    Home to the University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa has a higher percentage of homeowners with negative equity than the nation as a whole. Nearly 12% of mortgages are underwater here compared with about 8% nationwide. The foreclosure rate also is slightly higher in Tuscaloosa than the average across the U.S.

    41. Wilmington, Delaware

    • Median list price: $194,550

    • 2-year price change: 0.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 15%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,218 homes

    The percentage of foreclosed properties in Delaware’s largest city is twice as high as the national average. And the percentage of underwater mortgages in Delaware is almost double the percentage nationwide.

    40. Naples, Florida

    • Median list price: $407,990

    • 2-year price change: -8.8%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,515 homes

    The housing market has been slowing in this city on Florida’s Gulf Coast. While home prices nationwide have climbed 9.4%, on average, over the past two years, they’ve fallen 8.8% in Naples over the same period. And the average number of days that homes are on the market here — 140 — is more than double the national average.

    39. West Palm Beach, Florida

    • Median list price: $298,000

    • 2-year price change: 1.4%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 7.3%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,297 homes

    Although home prices have risen slightly in West Palm Beach over the last two years, they’ve fallen in the past year. In addition, houses for sale stay on the market in this city north of Miami an average of 119 days compared with an average of 66 days nationwide. The foreclosure rate here is also higher than the national rate.

    38. Waterbury, Connecticut

    • Median list price: $125,000

    • 2-year price change: 11.9%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 29.4%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,159 homes

    Home prices have risen more in this city 77 miles northeast of New York City over the past two years than across the U.S. However, the housing market in Waterbury could be in trouble. The percentage of underwater mortgages here is higher than in any other city on this list.

    37. Plainfield, Illinois

    • Median list price: $284,450

    • 2-year price change: 3.6%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 7.7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,138 homes

    Home prices have been rising in this village 35 miles southwest of Chicago but not at the same pace as the national average. More telltale signs, though, that the housing market in Plainfield could be turning ugly are the relatively high foreclosure rate and percentage of homes for sale with price cuts. In fact, Plainfield has the second-highest percentage of listed homes with price cuts at 25.3%.

    36. Bakersfield, California

    • Median list price: $276,400

    • 2-year price change: 1.1%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11.8%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,095 homes

    Home price growth is slowing in this agriculture hub in California’s Central Valley region. However, foreclosures and underwater mortgages are even bigger problems for Bakersfield’s real estate market. The rates for both are higher than the national averages.

    35. Jacksonville, Florida

    • Median list price: $219,000

    • 2-year price change: 11.8%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11.2%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 814 homes

    Home prices are rising at a faster rate in Florida’s largest city, on average, than across the U.S. But Jacksonville has one of the highest foreclosure rates of any city on this list. The percentage of underwater mortgages in this city on the Atlantic Coast also tops the national average.

    34. Orlando, Florida

    • Median list price: $289,000

    • 2-year price change: 5.7%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.6%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,328 homes

    The current housing market in Orlando could use some Walt Disney World magic to keep it from turning ugly. Home price growth in this tourist destination has been slowing. And the percentage of listed homes with price cuts — 21.2% — is higher than the national percentage. The foreclosure rate in Orlando also is higher than the foreclosure rate nationwide.

    33. McKinney, Texas

    • Median list price: $379,243

    • 2-year price change: -1.3%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 4.3%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,546 homes

    Home prices have been falling in this fast-growing city that is 30 miles north of Dallas. While home prices have risen an average of 9.4% over the past two years across America, prices have fallen 1.3% in McKinney. Plus, McKinney has one of the highest percentages of listed homes with price cuts among the cities on this list.

    32. Summerville, South Carolina

    • Median list price: $268,293

    • 2-year price change: 4.9%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.3%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,279 homes

    Houses for sale are lingering on the market longer in Summerville than the national average — 72 days versus 66 days. The increase in home prices in this city 24 miles northwest of Charleston also is lagging behind the national average. And the foreclosure rate in Summerville is twice as high as the rate nationwide.

    31. Annapolis, Maryland

    • Median list price: $499,181

    • 2-year price change: 0.7%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 9.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 3,964 homes

    Although the foreclosure rate in Annapolis is lower than the rate nationwide, the capital of Maryland’s housing market is showing some signs of trouble. Home price growth has slowed over the past year. In fact, the city has a higher percentage of listed homes with price cuts than the percentage nationwide. And houses are staying on the market 14 days longer than the U.S. average.

    30. Stamford, Connecticut

    • Median list price: $569,950

    • 2-year price change: 3.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11.1%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 4,498 homes

    The housing market is slowing in this city about 30 miles from New York. Home prices haven’t risen over the past year, and houses for sale are staying on the market longer than the U.S. average. Plus, the percentage of mortgages underwater in Stamford is higher than the percentage nationwide.

    29. Champaign, Illinois

    • Median list price: $164,900

    • 2-year price change: 3.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,173 homes

    The housing market in this city that is home to the University of Illinois is showing signs of weakness. The growth in home prices has been slowing. Houses spend more days on the market in Champaign than they do nationwide. And both the foreclosure rate and percentage of homes underwater are higher than the national rates.

    28. Port Saint Lucie, Florida

    • Median list price: $247,280

    • 2-year price change: 7.6%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.2%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,171 homes

    Although the percentage of underwater mortgages is below the national average in this city that’s halfway between Miami and Orlando, the foreclosure rate is twice as high. Plus, home price growth has slowed in Port Saint Lucie.

    27. Bradenton, Florida

    • Median list price: $293,700

    • 2-year price change: 1.7%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.6%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,799 homes

    The housing market is slowing more in Bradenton than in neighboring Sarasota. Home prices have fallen 0.3% over the past year. And 21% of listed homes have price cuts compared with 19.8% in Sarasota and 17.5% nationwide.

    26. Ocala, Florida

    • Median list price: $181,900

    • 2-year price change: 8.9%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 10.3%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 972 homes

    The foreclosure rate in this city in north-central Florida is among the top 10 highest on this list. Plus, the percentage of underwater mortgages in Ocala is higher than the U.S. average. To top it off, home price growth has slowed over the past year.

    25. Dayton, Ohio

    • Median list price: $67,000

    • 2-year price change: 16.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 27.6%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,820 homes

    The big increase in home prices in Dayton over the past two years might signal to some that the real estate market in this southwestern Ohio city is doing just fine. However, Dayton has the second-highest percentage of underwater mortgages among the cities on this list. And the foreclosure rate is higher here than the national rate.

    24. Lehigh Acres, Florida

    • Median list price: $180,000

    • 2-year price change: 6.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 6.9%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,189 homes

    Although the percentage of underwater mortgages in Lehigh Acres is lower than the percentage nationwide, the foreclosure rate is higher here than the U.S. average. In addition, this city in the Fort Myers metro area on Florida’s Gulf Coast has seen a slowdown in home price growth over the past year. Twenty percent of homes listed for sale here have had price cuts.

    23. Rockford, Illinois

    • Median list price: $100,00

    • 2-year price change: 10.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 21%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 890 homes

    Rockford’s real estate market could turn ugly because a significant percentage of homeowners here have negative equity. More than 20% of mortgages are underwater in this northern Illinois city compared with about 8% nationally. Plus, the foreclosure rate in Rockford is one of the highest among cities on this list.

    22. Mobile, Alabama

    • Median list price: $159,900

    • 2-year price change: 6.3%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 16.1%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,149 homes

    Home prices are still rising in this port city on the Gulf Coast, but not as fast as prices are increasing across the U.S. However, the bigger problem for Mobile’s real estate market is homeowners with negative equity. The percentage of underwater mortgages here is twice the national average.

    21. Cape Coral, Florida

    • Median list price: $262,200

    • 2-year price change: 4.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 5.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,191 homes

    This city near Fort Myers has seen rapid growth, but its current housing market is experiencing a slowdown. Home prices increased just 0.1%, on average, over the past year. Nearly 22% of homes listed for sale have price cuts. And houses in Cape Coral stay on the market an average of 103 days compared with a national average of 66 days.

    20. Fort Pierce, Florida

    • Median list price: $199,900

    • 2-year price change: 0.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 9.7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,585 homes

    While home prices climbed more than 9% nationwide over the past two years, they barely budged in this small city on Florida’s Atlantic Coast. Nearly 10% of mortgages are underwater in Fort Pierce compared with about 8% nationwide. And the foreclosure rate is higher than the rate across the U.S.

    19. Suffolk, Virginia

    • Median list price: $282,785

    • 2-year price change: 0%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 14.8%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,846 homes

    Home prices haven’t risen any, on average, over the past two years in Suffolk. And homes for sale stay on the market an average of 76 days compared with a national average of 66 days. The other problems the real estate market is facing in this city — which is part of the Virginia Beach metro area — are the relatively high percentage of underwater mortgages and high foreclosure rate.

    18. Laurel, Maryland

    • Median list price: $350,000

    • 2-year price change: -2.8%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 12.6%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,457 homes

    Home prices have been falling in this city that’s located between Baltimore and Washington, D.C. On top of that, nearly 13% of mortgages are underwater in Laurel compared with about 8% nationwide. And the foreclosure rate is higher than the U.S. average.

    17. Joliet, Illinois

    • Median list price: $169,900

    • 2-year price change: 9.6%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 15.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 812 homes

    Although home prices in Joliet increased 9.6% over the past two years, prices haven’t risen any, on average, over the past year. What’s more troubling, though, are the high number of foreclosures and underwater mortgages in this city 30 miles southwest of Chicago. Joliet has the fourth-highest foreclosure rate among cities on this list. And the percentage of underwater mortgages here is almost double the percentage nationwide.

    16. Valdosta, Georgia

    • Median list price: $154,900

    • 2-year price change: 0%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 22.7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 3,304 homes

    The foreclosure rate in this city near the Georgia-Florida border is lower than the U.S. average. However, Valdosta has one of the highest percentages of underwater mortgages among cities on this list. Home prices here have also fallen more than 6% over the past year.

    15. Decatur, Illinois

    • Median list price: $99,900

    • 2-year price change: 8.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 20.4%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 5,785 homes

    Decatur has the lowest foreclosure rate among the cities on this list. But the housing market in this central Illinois city could turn ugly due to its high percentage of underwater mortgages. Decatur also has a higher percentage of homes with price cuts than half of the cities on this list, and homes for sale spend more days on the market here than in a majority of cities.

    14. Elgin, Illinois

    • Median list price: $240,000

    • 2-year price change: 7.8%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11.9%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,223 homes

    The foreclosure rate in this Chicago suburb is twice the national rate. Plus, home price growth in Elgin has slowed over the past year, and nearly 20% of homes listed for sale have had price cuts.

    13. Riverview, Florida

    • Median list price: $252,990

    • 2-year price change: 2.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 7.2%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 796 homes

    Like other cities in the Tampa area, Riverview has a housing market that could turn ugly. It has the second-highest foreclosure rate on this list. Home price growth has slowed over the past year. And nearly 25% of homes listed for sale have had price cuts compared with 17.5% nationwide.

    12. Atlanta

    • Median list price: $339,500

    • 2-year price change: 1.6%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 8.8%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,942 homes

    Home prices have dropped 3% over the past year in Georgia’s capital and largest city. Atlanta is also seeing homes stay on the market longer than the U.S. average. Plus, the foreclosure rate here is higher than the rate nationwide.

    11. Lawton, Oklahoma

    • Median list price: $99,900

    • 2-year price change: 5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 25.7%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,661 homes

    Lawton has the fourth-highest percentage of underwater mortgages among cities on this list. The foreclosure rate also is higher in this southwestern Oklahoma city than it is nationwide. And homes stay on the market an average of 117 days compared with a U.S. average of 66 days.

    10. Hampton, Virginia

    • Median list price: $182,000

    • 2-year price change: 4.8%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 19.9%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,148 homes

    Hampton is one of the fastest-growing cities in the Hampton Roads region on the Chesapeake Bay. However, it’s housing market has been slowing. Home prices have fallen nearly 3%, on average, over the past year. And the percentage of underwater mortgages here is double the percentage nationwide.

    9. Aurora, Illinois

    • Median list price: $220,000

    • 2-year price change: 4.7%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 11.8%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,491 homes

    This Chicago suburb is actually the second-largest city in Illinois. Its current housing market is showing signs of trouble, though. Aurora has the fourth-highest percentage of homes with price cuts at 23.7%. And the foreclosure rate and percentage of underwater mortgages are higher than the U.S. averages.

    8. Bridgeport, Connecticut

    • Median list price: $189,900

    • 2-year price change: 11.1%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 26.9%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,453 homes

    This port city 60 miles from New York has the second-highest percentage of underwater mortgages on this list. The foreclosure rate is higher than the national rate. And houses stay on the market an average of 102 days compared with a U.S. average of 66 days.

    7. Norfolk, Virginia

    • Median list price: $220,000

    • 2-year price change: 3.3%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 20.6%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,094 homes

    Home to the world’s largest naval base, Norfolk is located in southeastern Virginia on the Chesapeake Bay. Home prices have been flat this past year, and houses are staying on the market here slightly longer than the national average. The bigger problem in Norfolk, though, is the high percentage of underwater mortgages, which is more than double the percentage nationwide.

    6. Miami Beach, Florida

    • Median list price: $499,000

    • 2-year price change: -5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 14.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 2,374 homes

    While home prices have been rising, on average, across the U.S. over the past two years, they’ve fallen 5% in this resort city across the Biscayne Bay from Miami. Plus, houses for sale spend more days on the market here — 225 — than in any other city on this list.

    5. Baltimore

    • Median list price: $169,900

    • 2-year price change: 17.1%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 26.5%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,376 homes

    Maryland’s largest city has had the biggest percentage increase in median home list prices over the past two years of any city on the list. However, Baltimore saw a 0.6% drop in home prices over the past year; it now has a higher percentage of homes with price cuts than most cities. And Baltimore has the third-highest percentage of underwater mortgages in this study.

    4. Columbus, Georgia

    • Median list price: $115,450

    • 2-year price change: -10.2%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 22.2%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,172 homes

    Home prices in Columbus have dropped more than in all but two cities on this list. The percentage of underwater mortgages in this city on the Georgia-Alabama border is among the highest rates in the study. And the foreclosure rate here is double the rate nationwide.

    3. Portsmouth, Virginia

    • Median list price: $165,700

    • 2-year price change: 1.5%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 19.4%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 730 homes

    This port city in southwestern Virginia has the highest foreclosure rate of any city on this list. Portsmouth also has a higher percentage of underwater mortgages than most cities in our rankings.

    2. Lakewood, New Jersey

    • Median list price: $252,000

    • 2-year price change: -12.3%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 9.4%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 1,187 homes

    This city about 70 miles south of New York City has seen home prices tumble more than 12% over the past two years — the second-biggest drop among cities in GOBankingRates’ ranking. The average number of days homes stay on the market here — 135 — is twice the national average. And the foreclosure rate is twice as high as the rate nationwide.

    1. Peoria, Illinois

    • Median list price: $124,450

    • 2-year price change: -15.9%

    • Percentage of underwater mortgages: 21%

    • Foreclosures: 1 in every 932 homes

    Peoria claims the No. 1 spot among cities with real estate markets that are turning ugly for several reasons. This city in central Illinois has seen the biggest drop in home prices over the past two years of any city on this list. The average number of days houses are on the market and the percentage of homes for sale with price cuts are higher than the national averages. The percentage of underwater mortgages here is more than double the percentage nationwide. And the foreclosure rate is among the highest on this list.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 22:05

  • Can China Dethrone The US Dollar As Global Reserve
    Can China Dethrone The US Dollar As Global Reserve

    Authored by Steve Brown via TheDuran.com,

    On the US dollar as reserve currency, that is a tough thing to break especially for China since the yuan is not freely convertible. China has renminbi and yuan; one they peg to the dollar and the other is circulated in China. Try converting USD to yuan in Paypal for example?  The option is not there. Payments from the west to china sellers by Paypal (for example) are only in dollars.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is a complex subject since China is the only foreign nation with a direct link into the US Treasury for purchase of US debt instruments, bypassing the Fed’s crooked relationship with its crooked primary dealers. This is done to manage China’s global trade relationships via the value of its currency which is somewhat pegged to the dollar (even if China and Trump claim otherwise) thus evading Federal Reserve gamesmanship. That’s why Trump messing with China is so dangerous, even if China has few options right now.

    As a result of this ‘trade war’ China has let the yuan slide versus the USD which is a warning to Trump, specifically Mnuchin, popularly known as one of the most slippery dealers (IndyMAC and One West) to ever walk the earth (and China knows that). China is hoping that a lower yuan will offset tariffs just as the US has ‘weaponized’ the dollar and has imposed sanctions and tariffs on China. Because the sums are so vast with China holding so much US debt, and because China depends on exports to the west, China is somewhat boxed in.

    So far China has been happy building ghost cities and high-quality infrastructure instead of blowing up their monetary reserves on the battlefield in useless wars as others do. If China wanted to blow up their trillion in US dollar reserves on the battlefield that would be very serious for the west indeed and so far, the Chinese leadership — and for that matter China’s people — have expressed no interest in doing so.

    China could reduce its ties to the US dollar (USD) by making the yuan freely convertible, noting the IMF’s inclusion of the yuan in the SDR as a first step. Next, China could reduce its US foreign debt holdings but the question is where that money will go… where is a nation to park billions upon billions or even one+ trillion in surplus if not in the US dollar? That’s still the great quandary for China.

    Besides the trade war, the US has engaged in Vicky Kagan-Nuland type jiggery-pokery in Hong Kong (perhaps inspired by John Bolton at the time?) attempting to pencilf China’s leadership in some very risky US gamesmanship along with Britain. And Trump gives the impression he is willing to screw the pooch and throw everything away in the China trade confrontation to make a point about US hegemony.

    The point being…. what option does China have in this war?  China has another option — rather than sell Treasury’s or fold to US trade demands — China could reveal its physical gold reserves and partially back the yuan with gold. (NB: return to a full gold standard in the present world economy is not possible – we are only discussing a partial backing, which has been the prevalent standard, ie partial not full, throughout modern monetary history until the adoption of a full by-decree currency by the US on August 15, 1971.)

    In this scenario China could do the former Swiss thing and partially back the yuan with gold, just as the Swiss once partially backed the swiss franc with gold (40% reduced to 25% in 1997) until the Swiss franc threatened to become the world reserve currency usurping the USD by 1999.

    What happened, the Swiss franc got so ‘strong’ against other currencies – and the USD – Swiss industries suffered. Also, the prospect then that the Swiss franc (now called the CHF) would usurp the USD as global reserve currency was absolutely terrifying to Swiss bankers who evidently prefer to be financial parasites instead of monetary leaders. [1]

    Deflationary pressures, domestic costs, and tariff problems became so bad by 1999, Switzerland held a public referendum and went off gold in 2000. Then the bankers decided to sell almost two-thirds of their gold reserves — until the US financial collapse of 2008 — for reasons that are still unknown. One suspicion is that the Swiss monetary pharaohs foresaw fiat by-decree currency as a permanent feature and future condition for the global monetary system, but there are many more potential reasons.

    The Swiss move to sell off 60% of its gold reserves from 2000 – 2008 was particularly surprising in light of Switzerland’s support for the gold carry trade. The old Swiss franc ended in 2000 and the current currency is the CHF.

    Back to China’s potential to re-define the yuan with partial gold backing, should the yuan fall further against the dollar that would be the time to introduce such backing. China would have to reveal its true gold reserves and say, for example, back the yuan by 10% of its gold reserves.

    But first, let’s posit that a full 1-to-1 ‘gold standard’ has never existed… not even in the United States, except for the period 1900-1913. Even then, National Bank Notes were not issued based on gold reserves although they purchased gold.

    [Historically the gold standard was implemented partially by cooperation of all the major monetary powers, where the chart here uses the example of partial gold backing in Britain showing 1830 to 1931 when Britain officially exited gold backing of its currency:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note that a gold standard based on gold reserves only imposes monetary discipline on the monetary system, when not all governments intend fiat by-decree governmental and private debt issuance to be used for noble purposes, as Modern Money Theory hopes.

    Along with universal convertibility of the yuan, a move to 10% gold reserve backing by China would be a magnet to all currency traders since China would commit to maintain the value of its currency, when the US dollar is in process of continued and accelerating decline and devaluation. This is the bottom line that those who maintain the system wonder if you will ever know, that even partial gold backing of the yuan would dethrone the US dollar very quickly.

    The problem being that partial backing of the yuan by gold would impact the global economy, and cause China’s money  – no longer strictly a currency when partially backed by gold – to strengthen enormously in relation to the dollar, and perhaps even achieve a 3-to-1 ratio over time (just a guess) where the yuan is presently 7-to-1.

    Such a move would dethrone the US dollar but would also hurt China and possibly even lead to social unrest there. It would represent a fundamental change where China would have to become more like the US, relying on imports instead of exports; relying on ‘consumers’ to drive the economy, and war, just as the US has relied upon since November 22nd, 1963.

    So far, a partial gold backing of the yuan to challenge King Dollar is not in the mindset of China’s leaders despite the pointless trade provocations and arrogant prodding of the dragon and meddling in Hong Kong that the US is engaged in. Thus the odds of a partial gold-backed yuan happening soon do not appear hopeful… and note that HSBC is itself a primary Fed dealer!

    Which brings us to Fed dealers and the euro. As far as the euro challenging the USD? …that’s an easy one to address.  Some of Europe’s biggest banks are Primary Dealers of the Federal Reserve such as BNP Paribas, Barclays Capital, Credit Suisse AG, Deutsche Bank, and NatWest; they are actively engaged in maintaining the US dollar as global reserve currency.  Inducing the European banks to get their hands dirty with Federal Reserve dollars as primary dealers after 1971 was one key to establishing the USD as global reserve.

    Ending that European support for the US dollar is an impossibility now, just witness Europe’s inability to work around US Treasury sanctions on Iran regarding Iran’s oil trade to Europe. The big European banks will attempt to maintain parity with the US Dollar and cannot challenge it, since the USD is interwoven into their economies by their status as Federal Reserve primary dealers and their purchase of US securities and debt instruments.

    Even the US financial collapse of 2008 saw foreign funds flee to the ‘safety’ of US Treasury debt instruments, when US debt instruments caused that collapse in the first place. The prospect for Europe of China to dethrone the USD as global reserve currency looks bleak for now. Powell and other economists say the USD has at least fifty years remaining to reign supreme. However with the United States on the monetary path it has been on for fifty years now, the idea that the US can persist for another fifty years in its dominance of the global monetary system seems unlikely at best.

    Perhaps of interest is the Federal Reserve’s extraordinary program to pump billions in US Federal Reserve digits into the banking system nightly, mostly to four primary dealers according to Wall Street on Parade. The specific trade detail concerning these massive funding injections is largely unknown to the public… and there is no indication that the Fed will reveal the precise nature of this interbank lending issue any time soon. The Fed calls this massive bank of Big overnight funding operation a “technicality” — and, like the Fed itself, is evidently an opaque technicality with no end.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 21:45

  • Australian PM Responds To Greta Thunberg: "We'll Do What We Think Is Right For Australia"
    Australian PM Responds To Greta Thunberg: “We’ll Do What We Think Is Right For Australia”

    Australian Prime Minister Scott Morrison and the patron saint of environmentalists, Greta Thunberg, have been duking it out in headlines as far as who is responsible for the raging brushfires near every major city across Australia.

    Morrison rejected Thunberg’s call for political action as bushfires spread across the country, reported Bloomberg.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Morrison said, during a news conference Sunday, it wasn’t the time to “make commentaries on what those outside of Australia think Australia should do” as he responded to Thunberg’s tweet that draws the connection between climate change and the raging inferno across the country.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Morrison said he’s not trying to “impress people overseas” and won’t cave to international climate change demands:

    “I have always acknowledged the connection between these weather events and these broader fire events and the impact globally of climate change. But I’m sure people equally would acknowledge that the direct connection to any single fire event, it’s not a credible suggestion to make that link.”

    Morrison said bushfires in Australia are nothing new and have been happening for a long time.

    “There are some fires that have been started by just carelessness, others sadly have been the result of direct arson, many have been created by dry lightning strikes,” Morrison said. “The drought conditions have certainly been a big contributor in terms of the dryness of the fuel load. There are also many other issues.”

    Left-leaning Green politicians have been critical of Morrison for not drawing the connection between extreme heat fueling some of the worst bushfires in the country’s history.

    Google News’ Saffron Howden tweeted a visual representation of the bushfires mapped out across the country, raging around almost every major city.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    BBC news reported on Saturday that bushfires in Australia’s southeastern state of New South Wales were at the “catastrophic” levels.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The map below shows bushfires around Sydney were so bad over the weekend, that most roadways to exit the city were impassible.
     

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And to make matters worse, the Australian Bureau of Meteorology reports there will be no major rain event across the country for at least the next two months.

    The Morrison Government appears to be the next target of climate change thugs, led by Thunberg and her “greenie” cult.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 21:25

  • Deep Truths Of Deepfakes – Tech That Can Fool Anyone
    Deep Truths Of Deepfakes – Tech That Can Fool Anyone

    Authored by Shiraz Jagati via CoinTelegraph.com,

    In its most basic sense, a deepfake is a combination of face- and voice-cloning AI technologies that allow for the creation of life-like, computer-generated videos of a real person. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

    In order to develop a high-quality deepfake of an individual, developers need to accumulate tens of hours of video footage associated with the person whose face/voice is to be cloned, as well as a human imitator who has learned the facial mannerisms and voice of the target.

    There are two humans involved in the creation of a deepfake, such that the target face/voice is that of the famous person while the other belongs to an unknown individual who is generally closely associated with the project.

    From tech to reality

    From a technical standpoint, visual deepfakes are devised through the use of machine learning tools that are able to decode and strip down the images of all the facial expressions related to the two individuals into a matrix consisting of certain key attributes, such as the position of the target’s nose, eyes and mouth. Additionally, finer details, such as skin texture and facial hair, are given less importance and can be thought of as secondary. 

    The deconstruction, in general, is performed in such a way that it is mostly always possible to fully recreate the original image of each face from its stripped elements. Additionally, one of the primary aspects of creating a quality deepfake is how well the final image is reconstructed – such that any movements in the face of the imitator are realized in the target’s face as well. 

    To elaborate on the matter, Matthew Dixon, an assistant professor and researcher at the Illinois Institute of Technology’s Stuart School of Business, told Cointelegraph that both face and voice can be easily reconstructed through certain programs and techniques, adding that:

    Once a person has been digitally cloned it is possible to then generate fake video footage of them saying anything, including speaking words of malicious propaganda on social media. The average social-media follower would be unable to discern that the video was fake.

    Similarly, speaking on the finer aspects of deepfake technology, Vlad Miller, CEO of Ethereum Express — a cross-platform solution that is based on an innovative model with its own blockchain and uses a proof-of-authority consensus protocol — told Cointelegraph that deepfakes are simply a way of synthesizing human images by making use of a machine learning technique called GAN, an algorithm that deploys a combination of two neural networks. 

    The first generates the image samples, while the second distinguishes the real samples from the fake ones. GAN’s operational utility can be compared to the work of two people, such that the first person is engaged in counterfeiting while the other tries to distinguish the copies from the originals. If the first algorithm offers an obvious fake, the second will immediately determine it, after which the first will improve its work by offering a more realistic image.

    Regarding the negative social and political implications that deepfake videos can have on the masses, Steve McNew, a MIT trained blockchain/cryptocurrency expert and senior managing director at FTI Consulting, told Cointelegraph:

    “Online videos are exploding as a mainstream source of information. Imagine social media and news outlets frantically and perhaps unknowingly sharing altered clips — of police bodycam video, politicians in unsavory situations or world leaders delivering inflammatory speeches — to create an alternate truth. The possibilities for deepfakes to create malicious propaganda and other forms of fraud are significant.”

    Examples of deepfakes being used for nefarious purposes

    Since deepfake technology is able to manipulate and imitate the facial features and personality characteristics of real-world individuals, it raises many legitimate concerns, especially in relation to its use for various shady activities. 

    Additionally, for many years now, the internet has been flooded with simple tutorials that teach people how to create digitally altered audio/video data that can fool various facial recognition systems.

    Not only that, but some truly disturbing instances of audio/video manipulation have recently surfaced that have called into question the utility of deepfakes. For example, a recent article claims that since 2014, deepfake technology has advanced to such levels that today, it can be used to produce videos in which the target can not only be made to express certain emotions but also bear resemblance to certain ethnic groups as well as look a certain age. On the subject, Martin Zizi, CEO of Aerendir, a physiological biometric technology provider, pointed out to Cointelegraph:

    “AI does not learn from mistakes, but from plain statistics. It may seem like a small detail, but AI-based on plain statistics — even with trillion bytes of data — is just that, a statistical analysis of many dimensions. So, if you play with statistics, you can die by statistics.”

    Zizi then went on to add that another key facet of facial recognition is that it is based on neural networks that are quite fragile in nature. From a structural standpoint, these networks can be thought of as cathedrals, wherein once you remove one cornerstone, the whole edifice crumbles. To further elaborate on the subject, Zizi stated:

    “By removing 3 to 5 pixels from a 12 million pixels image of someone’s face brings recognition to zero!  Researchers have found that adversarial attacks on neural net attacks can find those 3 to 5 pixels that represent the ‘cornerstones’ in the image.”

    One last big example of deepfake tech being misused for financial reasons was when the CEO of an unnamed United Kingdom-based energy firm was recently scammed into transferring 220,000 euros ($243,000) to an unknown bank account because he believed he was on the phone with his boss, the chief executive of the firm’s parent company. In reality, the voice belonged to a scammer who had made use of deepfake voice technology to spoof the executive.

    Blockchain may help against deepfakes

    As per a recent 72-page report issued by Witness Media Lab, blockchain has been cited as being a legitimate tool for countering the various digital threats put forth by deepfake technology. 

    In this regard, using blockchain, people can digitally sign and confirm the authenticity of various video or audio files that are directly or indirectly related to them. Thus, the more digital signatures that are added to a particular video, the more likely it will be considered authentic.

    Commenting on the matter, Greg Forst, director of marketing for Factom Protocol, told Cointelegraph that when it comes to deepfakes, blockchain has the potential to offer the global tech community with a unique solution — or at least a major part of it. He pointed out:

    “If video content is on the blockchain once it has been created, along with a verifying tag or graphic, it puts a roadblock in front of deepfake endeavors. However, this hinges on video content being added to the blockchain from the outset. From there, digital identities must underline the origins and creator of the content. Securing data at source and having some standardization for media will go a long way.”

    McNew also believes that owing to the blockchain’s overall immutability, once a particular data block has been confirmed by the network, its contents cannot be altered. Thus, if videos (or even photos, for that matter) are made to flow immediately into a blockchain verification application before being made available for sharing, altered videos could be easily identified as fake. 

    Lastly, a similar idea was shared by Miller, who is of the opinion that blockchain technology in conjunction with artificial intelligence can help solve many of the privacy and security concerns put forth by deepfakes. He added:

    “AI perfectly copes with the collection, analysis, sorting and transmission of data, improving the speed and quality of execution of internal processes. The blockchain, in turn, ‘makes sure’ that no one intervenes in the work of AI — it protects data and its sequence from any encroachment.”

    Blockchain technology has its own limitations

    As things stand, there are a few small drawbacks that are preventing blockchain technology from being actively used to monitor deepfakes on the internet. For starters, the technology is limited in its overall scalability, as the amount of computational resources and memory required to combat digitally manipulated A/V data in real-time is quite intense.

    Another potential issue that could arise as a result of blockchain being used for deepfake detection is a substantial curbing of crowdsourced video content (such as the material that is currently available on YouTube). On the issue, Dixon pointed out:

    “How does someone in a poor country reach the world with their message if they have to be approved by a Silicon Valley-based company? Should we be entrusting tech companies with such power? Liberty is always at stake when trust weakens.”

    A similar opinion is shared by Hibryda, creator and founder of Bitlattice, a distributed ledger system that uses a multidimensional lattice structure to address issues such as scalability, security, timing, etc. In his view:

    “The biggest drawback of blockchain tech lies in its inability to determine whether the signed media is really genuine or not. But that isn’t an internal issue of blockchain or related technologies — they only provide ledgers that are extremely hard to manipulate. It’s external and there’s no good way to solve that. While crowd-powered verification could be a partial solution, given crowds can be manipulated it’s rather impossible to build a system that provides reliable and objective fact-checking.”

    However, Forst told Cointelegraph that while the majority of people tend to believe that leveraging blockchain might be too expensive for deepfake detection, there are several open-source solutions that seek to do this. Forst then added that, “The biggest drawback is that blockchain doesn’t solve the problem with deepfakes in its entirety, rather it can be a piece of the solution.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 21:05

  • "A Farce" – China Denies Accusations Of Slave Labor After Chilling Note Found In Christmas Card
    “A Farce” – China Denies Accusations Of Slave Labor After Chilling Note Found In Christmas Card

    China on Monday denied accusations of forced labor at a Shanghai prison, one day after a young girl in a London supermarket was reportedly shocked to find a note from the Chinese gulag, according to Reuters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The note allegedly read “We are foreign prisoners in Shanghai Qingpu Prison China. Forced to work against our will,” and urged whoever found it to contact British former journalist and corporate fraud investigator Peter Humphrey, who was imprisoned in the same Chinese jail from 2014 – 2015 for illegally obtaining the private records of Chinese citizens and selling the information to various clients – including drugmaker GalaxoSmithKline.

    Tesco suspended their relationship with the Chinese Christmas card supplier on Sunday and announced an investigation.

    “We were shocked by these allegations and immediately suspended the factory where these cards are produced and launched an investigation,” said a spokesman.

    According to Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Geng Shuang, however, “I can responsibly say, according to the relevant organs [!?], Shanghai’s Qingpu prison does not have this issue of foreign prisoners being forced to work.

    Ghuang said the entire story was “a farce created by Mr. Humphrey.”

    The card was found by six-year-old Florence Widdicombe, who showed it to her alarmed father, who in turn contacted Humphrey on LinkedIn.

    Writing in the Sunday Times, Humphrey said he did not know the identities or the nationalities of the prisoners, but he “had no doubt they are Qingpu prisoners who knew me before my release in June 2015”. –Reuters

    According to Reuters, Humphrey did not believe his activities in China were illegal. He told Sky News that he believes the card came from the Zheijiang Yunguang Printing factory, where prisoners were used in the production line as slave laborers.  


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 20:45

  • Gold Versus The US Dollar: Correlation Is Not What Most Think
    Gold Versus The US Dollar: Correlation Is Not What Most Think

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk,

    Gold is not as correlated to the US dollar as most think.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I commented on this a few days ago in Gold Surprisingly Correlated With the US Dollar.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold has been positively correlated to the US dollar for well over a year.

    Most of the time gold is inversely correlated to the US dollar.

    The problem, as the lead chart shows, is that the strength of moves in gold vs the strength in moves in the US dollar are totally random.

    Look at the period between 1995 and 2005. A huge jump in the dollar index yielded a relatively small decline in the price of gold.

    Between 2005 and 2012 gold went on a long one-way tear up regardless of what the dollar did. The net result was a huge blast higher in gold vs the move in the US dollar index.

    Gold and Miners vs the S&P 500

    A few days ago someone Tweeted I was wrong about the positive correlation between gold and the dollar, stating that the correlation was between gold and miners and the S&P 500.

    That idea is more than silly as the following charts shows.

    Gold vs the S&P 500

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    $XAU vs S&P 500

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Warning: Don’t use short-term charts as a basis for making generalized statements.

    Path of Least Resistance

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    That is another one of those blind statements that feeds the widespread belief that gold is largely about the dollar.

    Let’s look at this still one more way.

    Various Price Points of Gold

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the US dollar right where it is now, gold has been at $450, $380, $1080, and $1480.

    Moreover, and as shown above, sometimes gold has a positive correlation to the US dollar and sometimes negative.

    Gold’s Big Surge

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold went on a huge surge from roughly $450 to $1924 with the US dollar index falling from roughly 90 to 72.70.

    Gold then fell to $1045 with gold bears coming out of the woodwork. Moves in the dollar once again do not explain. Here is a chart that does explain.

    Gold vs Faith in Central Banks

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you believe the Fed has everything under control, then the primary reason to own gold is insurance in case you are wrong.

    But one look at repo action and QE that allegedly is not QE ought to be enough reason to convince anyone that the Fed does not have things under control.

    Price Target?

    I have no price target, but I do have this observation:

    If the dollar falls to 72.70 and gold acts the same way, gold will be at well north of $2000.

    That is an “if and” statement, not a prediction. Yet, I do think $2000 gold has a very good shot. Dollar fundamentals help.

    Dollar Fundamentals

    1. The Fed is no longer tightening. The consensus opinion is the Fed is in for a long pause. I believe the Fed’s next move is another series of rate cuts. For discussion and an amusing set of “dot plots”, please see Fed Eyes Long Pause, No Rate Hikes in 2020

    2. European central banks are starting to see the folly of negative rate. If the ECB joins the rate hike party or at least stops QE, that will put upward pressure on the Euro and negative pressure on the dollar.

    3. Without a doubt the US stock market is extremely overvalued. This has led to dollar inflows from foreigners. When, not if, that reverses, the US dollar will reverse as well. For discussion, please see Where Will the Stock Market Be a Decade From Now?

    4. The US also suffers massively from a Ticking Time Bomb of Record High Corporate Debt. When that breaks, it will not be good for US equities.

    Where are We?

    Not only are gold fundamentals excellent, dollar fundamentals help.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Got Gold?


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 20:25

  • Baltimore City On Brink Of Worst-Ever Year For Homicides 
    Baltimore City On Brink Of Worst-Ever Year For Homicides 

    The latest shooting deaths in Baltimore City bring the homicide count to 336 in 2019, up from 309 last year.

    With eight days and 17 hours left in 2019 (as of 7 am est. Monday) — more homicides are expected in the region that could breach the record high of 342, achieved in 2017 and 2015.

    A mass shooting occurred over the weekend in Baltimore that got very little attention in the national press. Seven people were shot but no deaths. There were also three homicides, with two on Saturday and one on Sunday.

    The violent weekend angered Mayor Bernard C. “Jack” Young in a Sunday afternoon statement to the press that said: “The level of violence late into this weekend is completely unacceptable.”

    Baltimore Police Col. Richard Worley said the gunmen in the weekend’s mass shooting were “brazen” and said it is an example of the overall criminal culture in the city.

    “I think it’s the same thing that the commissioner [Michael Harrison] has been saying all along. The criminals are just brazen,” Worley said. “This guy gets out of a car with a rifle, not even a handgun, walks up the street and just opens fire on a line of people.”

    Cumulative homicide trends in the city show a massive jump in violence was sparked after the 2015 riots. Homicides from 2014 to 2015 jumped 62% over the year, and ever since, have sustained over 300 homicides per year. 2015 and 2016 were record-breaking years for murders, and 2019 could be another year for new highs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Homicides in Baltimore are seasonal. Homicides ramp up in spring and peak in summer. Winter usually suppresses the number of killings but not this year. Most of the murders are by handguns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Baltimore is a dangerous city, and if you have plans to visit the collapsing area for the holidays — please be advised you’re risking your life as the per capita homicide rate is some of the highest in the country.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 20:05

  • Making A Fortune: 19 Million Public Employees Across America Cost Taxpayers Nearly $1 Trillion
    Making A Fortune: 19 Million Public Employees Across America Cost Taxpayers Nearly $1 Trillion

    Authored by Adam Andrzejewski via Forbes.com,

    For the first time in history, 19 million public employee salaries at every level of government across America have been mapped and posted online.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The work of our auditors at OpenTheBooks.com tells a compelling story: Public service is supposed to be about serving the people. However, the good intentions of America’s 19 million public employees come at a very high price for the people – nearly $1 trillion. In many cases, taxpayers generously fund these employee salaries.

    Our online database is free to use and includes most employees within the federal, state, and local governments. You can search in your backyard or across the nation. Find out just how much public employees made last year. The salary records include name, salary, position title, and employer for 2017.

    The data is full of stunning examples.

    • Tree trimmers in Chicago lopped off $106,000.

    • New York City school janitors cleaned off $165,000 while out earning the principals at $135,000.

    • Lifeguards in Los Angeles County, California, made up to $365,000.

    • In the small school district in Southlake, Texas (8,000 students), the school superintendent earned $420,000.

    Help the reform-minded mayors, school superintendents, legislators and members of Congress by finding the waste, overspending, and bloated government in your very own neighborhood.

    Search our interactive map of the top 2 million most highly compensated public employees across America. Just click a pin (your ZIP code) and scroll down to see the results that render in the chart beneath the map. Click here to access the map below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Search 2 million public employee salaries by ZIP code at OpenTheBooks.com.

    Last year, we found 1.7 million public employees earned $100,000 or more. The vast majority – 1.3 million six-figure earners – worked at the state and local levels. There were 105,000 local and state government employees out-earning every governor of the 50 states at a salary of $190,000 or more.

    In Texas, 356 municipal employees made more than all governors ($190,000). Some of these towns are small, like Stanton (pop. 2,900), where the manager earned $314,696. In Whitesboro (pop. 4,000) and Manvel (pop. 10,000), the administrators were paid $312,000 and $292,529, respectively.

    In Florida, the city attorney of the seaside community Dania Beach, Florida (pop. 32,000) gleaned $436,917 – that’s more than any U.S. president. At the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, eight police officers and detectives made between $300,000 and $783,000 last year.

    Nearly 10,000 employees of the University of California system pulled down more than $200,000. This includes 65 highly compensated public employees who made between $1 million and $3.6 million.

    The top 5 locations for highly compensated public employees.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     OPENTHEBOOKS.COM

    Across the country, some of the largest salaries were paid out to athletic coaches at public universities. The retired football coach at University of Oregon received a $558,689 annual pension, and the fired Arizona State football coach got a $15 million payout. Nick Saban, at the University of Alabama, made $11 million.

    What will you find while searching the public payrolls in your community?

    Our recent investigation with Fox 32 Chicago found an Illinois superintendent earning $407,000 in a Calumet City district with only 1,100 students and no high school. Another superintendent made $206,000 in a New Lenox district with only 11 teachers and less than 100 students. Still another superintendent retired on a $300,000 pension at a Park Forest district, but, was then rehired on a $1,200 a day consulting contract – same position, same district.

    Before complaining about Washington, D.C., people must insist on good government where they live. The people have the power to hold local politicians accountable for tax and spend decisions. Our mission is to make this information available to citizens and policymakers.

    Government payrolls are the No. 1 issue affecting every service: public safety, healthcare, and welfare. Pay, perks, and pension benefits for public employees must be a priority in budgeting and deserve a rigorous, fact-based public debate.

    Highly compensated public employees banded by 2017 income.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     OPENTHEBOOKS.COM

    Compiling this database was a spending genome project of sorts. It was a million-dollar effort. In one year, we filed requests and captured data from nearly 60,000 government employers, broke open the files, mapped the information, and posted it online.

    The result is treasure-trove of oversight opportunity. It represents approximately 85% of all public employment at every level of government.

    Now, it’s up to you to call out waste and inefficiency in your government bodies. Use our interactive map and search by ZIP code, the top 2 million public employees making more than $95,000. Or, use our website to see all 19 million salary records.

    Open the books on your local taxing body. See how they are spending your property, sales, and income taxes. Then, raise your voice and demand better government in your own backyard.

    Remember, it’s your money.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 19:45

    Tags

  • Hunter Biden Denies Ukraine Money Laundering Allegations
    Hunter Biden Denies Ukraine Money Laundering Allegations

    Update: Biden has denied the allegations against him and asked the court to strike the filing from the record, claiming the allegations were improperly filed, and may constitute “redundant, immaterial, impertinent or scandalous” material, and that it was a “scheme by a non-party simply to make scandalous allegations in the pending suit to gain some quick media attention.”

    Biden also asked for attorney’s fees and costs to address the allegations.

    Judge Don McSpadden only agreed that it was improperly filed, striking the evidence on a technicality “as it was not filed in any acceptable manner to this court.”

    It is unclear whether it may be re-filed pursuant to (Ark R. Civ. P. 24).

    According to the New York Post: “Reached by phone, Dominic Casey, the D&A investigator who filed the papers, refused to say whether his group had been retained by Roberts, or sent the information to the court of its own volition.”

    ***

    A new filing in an Arkansas lawsuit against Hunter Biden claims that the former Vice President’s son “is the subject of more than one (1) criminal investigation involving fraud, money laundering and a counterfeiting scheme.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Filed by private investigator Dominic Casey of D&A Investigations on behalf of Lunden Alexis Roberts – with whom Hunter fathered a child, Monday’s “Notice of Fraud and Counterfeiting and Production of Evidence” alleges that Hunter Biden and associates Devon Archer and John Kerry stepson Christopher Heinz engaged in a money laundering scheme which accumulated over $156 million between March 2014 and December 2015.

    According to the document, Biden, Archer and Heinz became directors of consulting firm Rosemont Seneca Bohai, LLC in order to “conceal their family members ownership,” establishing financial accounts at Morgan Stanley and China Bank, the latter of which was used in a money laundering scheme.

    Biden and associates are accused of using the counterfeiting scheme “to conceal the Morgan Stanley et al Average Account Value.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The filing also says that “Family members of DEFENDANT Robert Hunter Biden, Devon Archer and Christopher Heinz are business partners of Serhiy Leshchenko and Mykola Zlochevesky in the Ukraine, and are currently under investigation for their part in the counterfeiting scheme.

    Of note, Leshchenko is a former Ukrainian parliamentarian who made headlines in August 2016 for helping to leak the so-called “black ledger” that resulted in the firing of then-Trump campaign manager Paul Manafort – the supposedly ‘debunked’ Ukraine meddling detailed in a November, 2017 Politico article.

    Notably, following an outreach to the Ukrainian embassy by Democratic operative Alexandra Chalupa, Artem Sytnyk, Ukraine’s Director of the National Anti-Corruption Bureau of Ukraine and Leshchenko released the “black ledger” containing off-book payments to Manafort. In December of 2018, a Ukrainian court ruled that Sytnyk and Leshchenko “acted illegally” by releasing Manafort’s name – a conviction which was later overturned on a technicality.

    Zlochevsky, meanwhile, is the owner of Burisma.

    Read below:


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 19:30

    Tags

  • Surprise! Trust In Media Edges Down After Brief Recovery
    Surprise! Trust In Media Edges Down After Brief Recovery

    Often referred to as the “Fourth Estate”, the media plays an important role in any democratic society. A free press is essential to holding governments accountable and informing the public, thus enabling voters to partake in political debate and make qualified decisions.

    The United States also has a long history of a free and independent press, with organizations such as the New York Times, TIME or CNN historically renowned and respected around the world.

    In recent years however, as Statista’s Felix Richter notes, Americans themselves started losing faith in their country’s media organizations.

    Infographic: Trust in Media Edges Down After Brief Recovery | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    While the trend in the loss of faith in the media, as the infographic above shows, has been going on for over two decades, the recent acceleration is possibly inspired by a presidential candidate who made no secret of his aversion towards the press (which has for four years done nothing but attack him and parrot establishment anti-Trump rhetoric – only to be busted for it numerous times thanks to Mueller and Horowitz), the percentage of U.S. adults having a great deal or a fair amount of trust and confidence in mass media dropped to a historic low of 32 percent in 2016, according to Gallup data.

    Since then, some trust has been recovered, but 2019 saw the level of trust in American media deteriorate again after consecutive improvements in 2017 and 2018.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 19:25

    Tags

  • How Everyone Messes Up At Once: Austrian Business Cycle Theory, Summarized
    How Everyone Messes Up At Once: Austrian Business Cycle Theory, Summarized

    Authored by Art Carden via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    The price system is a thing of beauty. F.A. Hayek was exactly right when he said that it would be considered among humanity’s greatest achievements had it actually been designed, created, and implemented. Instead, it just emerged without central planning or a wise order from a wise ruler. 

    The prices free markets generate aggregate and convey important information about what, how, where, when, and for whom to produce. As the economist Tim Harford put it in his book The Undercover Economist, competitive markets create a world of truth: he notes that in a competitive market, we produce the right stuff the right way for the right people and in the right proportions. The properties of competitive equilibrium have a certain beauty to them. We produce everything that is worth more than it costs to produce. We produce nothing that is worth less than it costs to produce. What gets produced is produced by the lowest-cost producers and consumed by the highest-value consumers. It’s an undesigned and unappreciated marvel.

    That raises an uncomfortable question. If markets are so great, why do we have business cycles? What’s the deal with the roller coaster rides of boom and bust that create widespread reductions in output and employment, also known as recessions?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are a lot of reasons. 

    In what follows, I want to explore one of the elements of the Austrian theory of the business cycle: a cluster of errors by people who, presumably, aren’t stupid and who, presumably, don’t waste resources intentionally.

    Here’s the punchline: monetary mischief means that prices are conveying inaccurate information about what, when, where, how, and for whom to produce. The signals that make markets work — prices, profits, and losses — are distorted relative to those that would what would tell the truth about underlying patterns of preferences and production possibilities. Hence, people make systematic errors. The prices, in other words, are lying.

    Friedrich Hayek emphasizes the price we pay for the right to use other people’s money and stuff now rather than later: the interest rate. Let’s consider a couple of concrete scenarios. In the first case, the interest rate changes due to a change in saving and tells us the truth about people’s willingness to sacrifice present for future consumption. In the second case, the interest rate lies about what is really going on because the creation of new money is not the same thing as the creation of new resources. Here’s a parable: the parable of the asteroid miners and the chicken restaurants.

    Suppose there is a change in people’s saving behavior. For this paper, I have been rereading James M. Buchanan’s Ethics and Economic Progress, and he devotes one chapter to the idea that, by our own standards and preferences, we would be better off if we all saved more — hence, Buchanan argues, the saving ethic has important “economic content.” Suppose that, on hearing this, people generally start saving more. This increases the supply of loanable funds and decreases the interest rate.

    In his legendary lectures on Austrian business cycle theory, Roger Garrison distinguishes between the derived-demand effect and the interest rate effect. For retailers, restaurants, and other firms that serve consumers directly, the derived-demand effect dominates. If people suddenly stop buying sandwiches at Popeye’s and Chick-fil-A, this is going to have a larger effect on their production decisions than lower borrowing costs.

    In the late stages of production, firms like Popeye’s and Chick-fil-A contract (relative to what they would have done, at any rate) because they aren’t selling as many sandwiches. Their (relative) contraction is a big part of what frees up the resources that make it easier for firms farther removed from immediate consumption to expand — companies like asteroid-mining firms with their eyes on asteroids said to be worth billions or trillions or even quintillions of dollars.

    These firms expand because the interest rate effect dominates the derived-demand effect. They are far enough removed from the retail market for chicken sandwiches that what’s going on there isn’t going to affect them much. What will matter will be what the falling interest rates tell them about the wisdom of long-term investment. Lower interest rates make far-future payoffs more valuable.

    At an interest rate of 5 percent, $1,000 one year from today is worth $952.38. At an interest rate of 1 percent, it is worth $990.10. The interest rate is transmitting extremely valuable information: people are now more willing to wait than they were before. Hence, it is a better idea to invest in projects that aren’t going to pay off for a very long time. Even if the payoff is a thousand years from now, we can in principle estimate the present value of a $700 quintillion asteroid. Suppose this is off by many orders of magnitude and the asteroid is worth “only” $7 quadrillion. If the interest rate is 1 percent and the payoff isn’t coming for a thousand years, that $7 quadrillion asteroid still has a present value of over $334 billion. At an interest rate of 2 percent, it’s about $17.5 million. 

    The interest rates are almost certainly too low because asteroid mining is a pretty risky venture. Lloyd’s of London will insure a lot of things, but the possibility of a 70.25-mile-wide asteroid hitting the Earth is a pretty spectacular risk. It probably wouldn’t be as dramatic as this simulation of a 500 km asteroid hitting the Earth, but it would almost certainly be an extinction event. The interest rates are low and the time scale is kind of absurd to make a point: small changes in interest rates can lead to big changes in asset values.

    This all goes fine if the changes are happening because of an increase in saving. Some firms and sectors — those closest to consumers — contract. Other firms and sectors — those farthest from consumers — expand. The economy grows faster as we add capital goods.

    Things go awry, however, when the change in the interest rate comes from the monetary authority messing around with things rather than a change in saving. A credit expansion, where the monetary authority creates new money, lowers interest rates and begins a cascade of errors because the lower interest rates are sending incorrect signals about what is most valuable where. The monetary authority creates more money; it does not, however, create more real resources to support expanded production.

    The lower interest rate has two effects, one on consumers and the other on firms in the early stages of the structure of production like mining, where all the action aims at creating stuff and skills that are a few years away from being finished goods or services. People consume more because interest rates are lower and the reward for delaying gratification isn’t what it used to be. In response to higher sales, firms in the late late stages (like retailers and restaurants) sell more and make plans to expand.

    In the earlier stages, the interest rate effect dominates. Firms in these stages, like the companies eyeing what they think are trillion- and quadrillion-dollar asteroids elsewhere in the solar system, see the present value of possible long-term investments rise. They try, therefore, to expand as well. In the short run, everything looks great. People are consuming more. People are investing more. Unemployment is falling, wages are rising. The economy is booming.

    There’s just one problem: prices are lying. Specifically, the interest rate is lying, and as Hayek emphasizes, the lying prices sow the seeds of an eventual bust even though everything looks wonderful. 

    Everyone is trying to expand their operations because of the lower interest rate and higher spending on consumption goods; however, there simply isn’t enough real saving to support everyone’s plans at the same time. To be sure, there are more loanable funds, which gives every appearance of real saving; however, people aren’t actually cutting back on consumption and leaving real materials like lumber, bricks, and nails for others. 

    Every chicken restaurant orders more chicken at the same time, driving up prices and encouraging their suppliers to expand. They all plan to build new restaurants while, at the same time, asteroid-mining firms are borrowing money and trying to expand. This increases the prices of lumber, land, construction materials, labor, and everything else, but again, the real saving isn’t there to support it. People are making terrible choices and systematically malinvesting capital goods not because they are stupid but because the prices are not reliable. Importantly, this is not a theory of overinvestment, where people invest too much. It is a theory of malinvestment, where people invest in the wrong things.

    They find this out when it turns out the prices they expected to remain stable start rising. This is just an unpleasant surprise for some people who may not enjoy as large a profit as they expected when they decided to expand their chicken restaurants and chicken farms and asteroid-mining concerns, but it is a catastrophe for others who were just on the margin of deciding to enter the market and who pulled the trigger once interest rates fell (in the early stages of production) or sales jumped up just a little bit (in the late stages of production). 

    This means there are half-built restaurants and half-built office towers that can’t be completed without more lumber, concrete, window glass, and copper wiring — but there’s not enough of these materials to go around. A lot of people have nowhere to turn but bankruptcy. The boom is over, and a bust — during which capital, land, and materials are liquidated and reallocated — is the inevitable consequence.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 19:05

  • Natgas Futures Plunge Into Bear Market On Warmer Weather Outlook
    Natgas Futures Plunge Into Bear Market On Warmer Weather Outlook

    Last week we described how “A cold shot of air” was going to blast Boston, New York, Philadelphia, and Washington, D.C., through the weekend, then lead to unseasonably warm temperatures through Jan. 02. Much of the cold weather has already exited the Northeast on Monday, resulting in a plunge in Natgas futures on warmer weather outlooks. 

    Front-month gas futures on the New York Mercantile Exchange were down .10 cents, or -4.21%, at $2.231 per million British thermal units (mmBtu) at 12:30 am est. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Natgas futures stumbling into a bear market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “(As) the weather last week was colder than normal we would expect a larger than usual storage draw. However, somewhat normal to above normal weather for this week and the holidays would mean reduced demand significantly,” Zhen Zhu, an economist at Oklahoma City-based C.H. Guernsey, told Reuters

    The Global Forecast System (GFS) shows from Washington, D.C., to New York to Boston, above-trend temperatures will be seen from Dec. 23 through Jan. 01. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Northeast heating degree day (HDD) index dips this week and won’t rise above trend until Jan. 02/03. This means that energy demand to heat a structure will decline due to warmer temperatures – more reasons why Natgas futures will remain on a decline through this week, or until weather forecasts show cooler weather is on the way. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Lower-48 HDD also shows energy demand across the U.S. to heat a structure will be on the decline for the next ten or so days. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Traders told Refinitiv that Natgas prices have plunged since early November “due to milder than usual weather and expectations inventories will still rise over the five-year average in the coming weeks. Near-record production enables utilities to leave more gas in storage, wiping away lingering concerns of supply shortages and price spikes during the winter.”

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 12/23/2019 – 18:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest